-
-### Abbildung 2: Opportunity aus einem offenen Lead heraus erstellen
-
-
-
-### Probebilanz
-
-Eine Probebilanz ist eine Liste von Kontoständen aller Konten (Bücher und Gruppen) zu einem bestimmten Datum. Für jedes Konto wird folgendes angezeigt:
-
-* Eröffnungstand
-* Summe Soll
-* Summe Haben
-* Schlußstand
-
-
-
-Um Ihren Kontenplan in ERPNext zu bearbeiten gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Kontenplan
-
-Im Kontenplan erhalten Sie eine Baumstruktur der Konten(bezeichnungen) und Kontengruppen, die ein Unternehmen benötigt um seine Buchungsvorgänge vornehmen zu können. ERPNext richtet für jede neu angelegte Firma einen einfachen Kontenrahmen ein, aber Sie müssen noch Anpassungen vornehmen, damit Ihren Anforderungen und gesetzlichen Bestimmungen Genüge geleistet wird. Der Kontenplan gibt für jede Firma an, wie Buchungssätze klassifiziert werden, meistens aufgrund gesetzlicher Vorschriften (Steuern und Einhaltung staatlicher Regelungen).
-
-Lassen Sie uns die Hauptgruppen des Kontenplans besser verstehen lernen.
-
-
-
-Zahlungen können auch unabhängig von Rechnungen erstellt werden, indem Sie einen neuen Journalbeleg erstellen und die Zahlungsart auswählen.
-
-### Eingehende Zahlungen
-
-Für Zahlungen von Kunden gilt:
-
-* Soll: Bank oder Kasse
-* Haben: Kundenkonto
-
-> Anmerkung: Vergessen Sie nicht "Zu Ausgangsrechnung" und "Ist Anzahlung" zu markieren, wenn es zutrifft.
-
-### Ausgehende Zahlungen
-
-Für Zahlungen an Lieferanten gilt:
-
-* Soll: Lieferant
-* Haben: Bank oder Kasse
-
-### Beispiel eines Buchungssatzes für eine Zahlung
-
-
-
----
-
-### Eine Zahlung per Scheck abgleichen
-
-Wenn Sie Zahlungen per Scheck erhalten oder leisten, geben die Kontoauszüge Ihrer Bank nicht exakt die Daten Ihrer Buchung wieder, weil die Bank normalerweise einige Zeit braucht diese Zahlungen einzulösen. Das gleiche trifft zu, wenn Sie Ihrem Lieferanten einen Scheck zusenden und es einige Tage braucht, bis er vom Lieferanten angenommen und eingereicht wird. In ERPNext können Sie Kontoauszüge der Bank und Ihre Buchungssätze über das Werkzeug zum Kontenabgleich in Einklang bringen.
-
-Dafür gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Rechnungswesen > Werkzeuge > Kontenabgleich
-
-Wählen Sie Ihr Bankkonto aus und geben Sie das Datum Ihres Kontoauszuges ein. Sie bekommen alle Buchungen vom Typ Bankbeleg. Aktualisieren Sie in jeder Buchung über die Spalte ganz rechts das "Einlösungsdatum" und klicken Sie auf "Aktualisieren".
-
-So können Sie Ihre Kontoauszüge und Ihre Systembuchungen angleichen.
-
----
-
-### Offene Zahlungen verwalten
-
-Ausgenommen von Endkundenverkäufen sind in den meisten Fällen die Rechnungslegung und die Zahlung voneinander getrennte Aktivitäten. Es gibt verschiedene Kombinationsmöglichkeiten, wie Zahlungen getätigt werden können. Diese Kombinationen finden sowohl bei Verkäufen als auch bei Einkäufen Anwendung.
-
-* Zahlungen können im Voraus erfolgen (100% Anzahlung).
-* Sie können nach dem Versand erfolgen. Entweder zum Zeitpunkt der Lieferung oder innerhalb von ein paar Tagen.
-* Es kann eine Teilzahlung im Voraus erfolgen und eine Restzahlung nach der Auslieferung.
-* Zahlungen können zusammen für mehrere Rechnungen erfolgen.
-* Anzahlungen können zusammen für mehrere Rechnungen erfolgen (und können dann auf die Rechnungen aufgeteilt werden).
-
-ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen alle diese Szenarien zu verwalten. Alle Buchungen des Hauptbuches können zu Ausgangsrechnungen, Eingangsrechnungen und Journalbelegen erfolgen.
-
-Der gesamte offene Betrag einer Rechnung ist die Summe aller Buchungen, die zu dieser Rechnung erstellt wurden (oder mit ihr verknüpft sind). Auf diese Weise können Sie in Buchungssätzen Zahlungen kombinieren oder aufteilen um alle Szenarien abzudecken.
-
-### Zahlungen mit Rechnungen abgleichen
-
-In komplexen Szenarien, besonders im Geschäftsfeld Investitionsgüter, gibt es manchmal keinen direkten Bezug zwischen Zahlungen und Rechnungen. Sie schicken an Ihre Kunden Rechnungen und Kunden senden Ihnen Zahlungsblöcke oder Zahlungen, die auf einem Zeitplan basieren, der nicht mit Ihren Rechnungen verknüpft ist.
-
-In solchen Fällen können Sie das Werkzeug zum Zahlungsabgleich verwenden.
-
-> Rechnungswesen > Werkzeuge > Zahlungsabgleichs-Werkzeug
-
-In diesem Werkzeug können Sie ein Konto auswählen (z. B. das Konto Ihres Kunden) und auf "Zahlungsbuchungen ermitteln" klicken und das System wählt alle offenen Journalbuchungen und Ausgangsrechnungen dieses Kunden aus.
-
-Um Zahlungen und Rechnungen zu abzugleichen, wählen Sie Rechnungen und Journalbelege aus und klicken Sie auf "Abgleichen".
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 834397e3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,120 +0,0 @@
-
-# Buchungen in unterschiedlichen Währungen
-
-
-In ERPNext können Sie Buchungen in unterschiedlichen Währungen erstellen. Beispiel: Wenn Sie ein Bankkonto in einer Fremdwährung haben, dann können Sie Transaktionen in dieser Währung durchführen und das System zeigt Ihnen den Kontostand der Bank nur in dieser speziellen Währung an.
-
-### Einrichtung
-
-Um mit Buchungen in unterschiedlichen Währungen zu beginnen, müssen Sie die Buchungswährung im Datensatz des Kontos einstellen. Sie können bei der Anlage eine Währung aus dem Kontenplan auswählen.
-
-
-
-#### Beispiel 2: Überweisung zwischen Banken (US-Dollar -> Indische Rupien)
-
-Nehmen wir an, dass die Standardwährung der Firma Indische Rupien ist. Sie haben ein Paypal-Konto in der Währung US-Dollar. Sie erhalten auf das Paypal-Konto Zahlungen und wir gehen davon aus, dass Paypal einmal in der Woche Beträge auf Ihr Bankkonto, mit der Währung Indische Rupien, überweist.
-
-Das Paypal-Konto wird an einem anderen Datum mit einem anderen Wechselkurs belastet, als die Gutschrift auf das Bankkonto erfolgt. Aus diesem Grund gibt es normalerweise einen Wechselkursgewinn oder -verlust zur Überweisungsbuchung. In der Überweisungsbuchung stellt das System den Wechselkurs basierend auf dem durchschnittlichen Wechselkurs für eingehende Zahlungen des Paypal-Kontos ein. Sie müssen den Wechelkursgewinn oder -verlust basierend auf dem durchschnittlichen Wechselkurs und dem Wechselkurs am Überweisungstag berechnen und eingeben.
-
-Nehmen wir an, dass das Paypal-Konto folgende Beträge, die noch nicht auf Ihr anderes Bankkonto überwiesen wurden, in einer Woche als Gutschrift erhalten hat.
-
-
-
-### Berichte
-
-#### Hauptbuch
-
-Im Hauptbuch zeigt das System den Betrag einer Gutschrift/Lastschrift in beiden Währungen an, wenn nach Konto gefiltert wurde, und wenn die Kontenwährung unterschiedlich zur Firmenwährung ist.
-
-
-
-7\. Sobald die Daten angezogen wurden, klicken Sie auf die detaillierte Buchung und geben Sie den Zahlungsbetrag zur Rechnung/Bestellung/zum Beleg ein.
-
-
-
-8\. Klicken Sie auf "Buchungssatz erstellen" um einen neuen Buchungssatz mit den entsprechenden Einzelheiten zu erstellen.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
deleted file mode 100755
index be6b0131..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-# Periodenabschlussbeleg
-
-
-Zum Ende eines jeden Jahres (oder evtl. auch vierteljährlich oder monatlich) und nachdem Sie die Bücher geprüft haben, können Sie Ihre Kontenbücher abschliessen. Das heißt, dass Sie die besonderen Abschlussbuchungen durchführen können, z. B.:
-
-* Abschreibungen
-* Wertveränderungen des Anlagevermögens
-* Rückstellungen für Steuern und Verbindlichkeiten
-* Aktualisieren von uneinbringbaren Forderungen
-
-usw. und Sie können Ihren Gewinn oder Verlust verbuchen.
-
-Wenn Sie das tun, muss der Kontostand Ihres GuV-Kontos 0 werden. Sie starten ein neues Geschäftsjahr (oder eine Periode) mit einer ausgeglichenen Bilanz und einem jungfräulichen GuV-Konto.
-
-Sie sollten nach den Sonderbuchungen zum aktuellen Geschäftsjahr über Journalbuchungen in ERPNext alle Ihre Ertrags- und Aufwandskonten auf 0 setzen, indem Sie hierhin gehen:
-
-> Buchhaltung > Werkzeuge > Periodenabschlussbeleg
-
-Das **Buchungsdatum** ist das Datum, zu dem die Buchung ausgeführt wird. Wenn Ihr Geschäftsjahr am 31. Dezember endet, dann sollten Sie dieses Datum als Buchungsdatum im Periodenabschlussbeleg auswählen.
-
-Das **Transaktionsdatum** ist das Datum, zu dem der Periodenabschlussbeleg erstellt wird.
-
-Das **abzuschließende Geschäftsjahr** ist das Jahr, für das Sie Ihre Finanzbuchhaltung abschliessen.
-
-
-
-In ERPNext können Sie einen Lieferantenauftrag auch direkt erstellen über:
-
-> Einkauf > Dokumente > Lieferantenauftrag > Neuer Lieferantenauftrag
-
-### Einen Lieferantenauftrag erstellen
-
-
-
-Sie können Ihre Lieferanten aus einem breiten Angebot verfügbarer Typen in ERPNext klassifizieren. Wählen Sie aus einem Satz vorgegebener Optionen wie Großhändler, Elekktro, Hardware, Regional, Pharma, Rohstoffe, Dienstleistungen, etc. aus.
-
-Wenn Sie Ihre Lieferanten in verschiedene Typen unterteilen, erleichtert Ihnen das die Buchhaltung und die Rechnungslegung.
-
-Geben Sie Ihre neue Lieferantenkategorie ein und speichern Sie.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier-quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier-quotation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 531da66a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier-quotation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lieferantenangebot
-
-
-Ein Lieferantenangebot ist eine formale Aussage, ein Versprechen eines potenziellen Lieferanten die Waren oder Dienstleistungen zu liefern, die von einem Käufer zu einem spezifizierten Preis und innerhalb eines bestimmten Zeitraumes benötigt werden. Ein Angebot kann weiterhin Verkaufs- und Zahlungsbedingungen und Garantien enthalten. Die Annahme eines Angebotes durch einen Käufer begründet einen bindenden Vertrag zwischen beiden Parteien.
-
-Sie können ein Lieferantenangebot aus einer Materialanfrage heraus erstellen.
-
-### Flußdiagramm zum Lieferantenangebot
-
-
-
-Sie können ein Lieferantenangebot auch direkt erstellen über:
-
-> Einkauf > Dokumente > Lieferantenangebot > Neues Lieferantenangebot
-
-### Ein Lieferantenangebot erstellen
-
-
-
-Sie können einen monatlichen Report über Ihre Anwesenheiten erhalten, indem Sie zum "Monatlichen Anwesenheitsbericht" gehen.
-
-Sie können auch ganz einfach Anwesenheiten über das [Werkzeug zum Hochladen von Anwesenheiten](/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.html) hochladen.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/employee.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/employee.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1bd6e100..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/employee.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-# Mitarbeiter
-
-
-Es gibt viele Felder, die Sie in einem Mitarbeiterdatensatz hinzufügen können.
-
-Um einen neuen Mitarbeiter zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Mitarbeiter > Neu
-
-
-
-### Urlaubsbewilliger einstellen
-
-* Ein Urlaubsgenehmiger ist ein Benutzer der Urlaubsanträge eines Mitarbeiters bewilligen kann.
-* Sie müssen eine Liste von Urlaubsbewilligern für einen Mitarbeiter in den Mitarbeiterstammdaten angeben.
-
-
-
-> Tipp: Wenn Sie möchten, dass alle Benutzer ihre Urlaubsanträge selbst erstellen, können Sie in den Einstellungen zur Urlaubsgenehmigung Ihre Mitarbeiter-IDs als so einstellen, dass sie für die Regel zutreffend sind. Für weiterführende Informationen kesen Sie hierzu die Diskussion zum Thema [Einstellungen zu Genehmigungen](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html).
-
-Um einem Mitarbeiter Urlaub zuzuteilen, kreuzen Sie [Urlaubszuteilung](/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.html) an.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d1c68b7c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
-
-# Gehalt und Gehaltsabrechung
-
-
-Ein Gehalt ist ein fester Geldbetrag oder eine Ersatzvergütung die vom Arbeitsgeber für die Arbeitsleistung des Arbeitnehmers an diesen gezahlt wird.
-
-Die Gehaltsabrechnung ist der zugrundeliegende Datensatz zum Verwaltungsakt von Gehältern, Löhnen, Boni, Nettoauszahlungen und Abzügen für einen Mitarbeiter.
-
-Um in ERPNext eine Gehaltsabrechnung durchzuführen
-
-1. Erstellen Sie Gehaltsstrukturen für alle Arbeitnehmer.
-2. Erstellen Sie über den Prozess Gehaltsabrechnung Gehaltsabrechnungen.
-3. Buchen Sie das Gehalt in Ihren Konten.
-
-### Gehaltsstruktur
-
-Die Gehaltsstruktur gibt an, wie Gehälter auf Basis von Einkommen und Abzügen errechnet werden.
-
-Gehaltsstrukturen werden verwendet um Organisationen zu helfen
-
-1. Gehaltslevel zu erhalten, die am Markt wettbewerbsfähig sind.
-2. Ein ausgeglichenes Verhältnis zwischen den Entlohnungen intern anfallender Jobs zu erreichen.
-3. Unterschiede in den Ebenen von Verwantwortung, Begabungen und Leistungen zu erkennen und entsprechend zu vergüten und Gehaltserhöhungen zu verwalten.
-
-Eine Gehaltsstruktur kann folgende Komponenten enthalten:
-
-* **Basisgehalt:** Das ist das steuerbare Basiseinkommen.
-* **Spezielle Zulagen:** Normalerweise kleiner als das Basiseinkommen
-* **Urlaubsgeld:** Betrag den der Arbeitgeber dem Arbeitnehmer für einen Urlaub zahlt
-* **Abfindung:** Bestimmter Betrag, der dem Arbeitnehmer vom Arbeitgeber gezahlt wird, wenn der Mitarbeiter das Unternehmen verlässt oder in Rente geht.
-* **Rentenversicherung:** Betrag für zukünftige Rentenzahlungen und andere Leistunge, die unter die Rentenversicherung fallen.
-* **Krankenversicherung**
-* **Pflegeversicherung**
-* **Arbeitslosenversicherung**
-* **Solidaritätszuschlag**
-* **Steuern**
-* **Boni**: Steuerbare Beträge, die dem Arbeitnehmer aufgrund guter individueller Leistungen gezahlt werden.
-* **Mietzulage**
-* **Aktienoptionen für Mitarbeiter**
-
-Um eine neue Gehaltsstruktur zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Personalwesen > Einstellungen > Gehaltsstruktur > Neu
-
-#### Abbildung 1: Gehaltsstruktur
-
-
-
-Beim Bearbeiten einer Gehaltsabrechnung
-
-1. Wählen Sie die Firma, für die Sie Gehaltsabrechnungen erstellen wollen.
-2. Wählen Sie den ensprechenden Monat und das Jahr.
-3. Klicken Sie auf "Gehaltsabrechnung erstellen". Hierdurch werden für jeden aktiven Mitarbeiter für den gewählten Monat Datensätze für die Gehaltsabrechnung angelegt. Wenn die Gehaltsabrechnungen einmal angelegt sind, erstellt das System keine weiteren Gehaltsabrechnungen. Alle Aktualisierungen werden im Bereich "Aktivitätsprotokoll" angezeigt.
-4. Wenn alle Gehaltsabrechnungen erstellt wurden, können Sie prüfen, ob Sie richtig sind, und sie bearbeiten, wenn Sie unbezahlten Urlaub abziehen wollen.
-5. Wenn Sie das geprüft haben, können Sie sie alle gemeinsam "übertragen" indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Gehaltsabrechnung übertragen" klicken. Wenn Sie möchten, dass Sie automatisch per E-Mail an einen Mitarbeiter verschickt werden, stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie die Option "E-Mail absenden" angeklickt haben.
-
-### Gehälter in Konten buchen
-
-Der letzte Schritt ist, die Gehälter mit Ihren Konten zu verbuchen.
-
-Gehälter unterliegen im Geschäftsablauf normalerweise sehr strengen Datenschutzregeln. In den meisten Fällen gibt die Firma eine einzige Zahlung an die Bank, die alle Gehälter beinhaltet, und die Bank verteilt dann die Gehälter an die einzelnen Konten der Mitarbeiter. Bei dieser Vorgehensweise gibt es nur eine einzige Zahlungsbuchung im Hauptbuch der Firma niemand mit Zugriff auf die Konten des Unternehmens hat auf die individuellen Gehaltsdaten Zugriff.
-
-Die Buchung zur Gehaltsabrechnung ist eine Journalbuchung welche das Bankkonto des Unternehmens belastet und den Gesamtbetrag aller Gehälter dem Gehaltskonto gutschreibt.
-
-Um einen Beleg über die Gehaltszahlung aus dem Punkt "Gehaltsabrechnung bearbeiten" heraus zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf "Bankbeleg erstellen" und es wird eine neue Journalbuchung mit den Gesamtbeträgen der Gehälter erstellt.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/branch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/branch.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2ccbe6d7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/branch.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Filiale
-
-
-Filialen Ihres Unternehmens
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/department.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/department.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e982fdad..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/department.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Abteilung
-
-
-Abteilungen Ihres Unternehmens
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 67d1406c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Art der Beschäftigung
-
-
-Verschiedene Beschäftigungsverträge, die Sie mit Ihren Mitarbeitern abgeschlossen haben.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 59d0bdeb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Einstellungen zum Modul Personalwesen
-
-
-Globale Einstellungen zu Dokumenten des Personalwesens
-
-
-
-Um mehreren verschhiedenen Mitarbeitern Urlaub zuzuteilen, nutzen Sie das [Urlaubszuordnungs-Werkzeug](/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.html).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e1e7cbdd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-# Urlaubstyp
-
-
-Geben Sie den Urlaubstyp an, der Mitarbeitern zugeordnet werden kann.
-
-
-
-* "Maximale zulässige Urlaubstage" gibt die Maximalanzahl von Tagen dieses Urlaubstyps an, die zusammen genommen werden können.
-* "Ist unbezahlter Urlaub" gibt an, dass es sich um unbezahlten Urlaub handelt.
-* "Negativen Saldo zulassen" gibt an, dass das System negative Beträge handhaben darf.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9a4739e1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-
-# Werkzeuge
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 658a9bf8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-upload-attendance
-leave-allocation-tool
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c9dca63d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Urlaubszuordnungs-Werkzeug
-
-
-Das Urlaubszuordnungs-Werkzeug hilft Ihnen dabei eine bestimmte Menge an Urlaub einem Mitarbeiter zuzuteilen.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/training.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/training.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5f1a963f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/training.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-# Schulung
-### Schulungsprogramm
-
-Erstelle ein Schulungsprogramm und teile die Schulungstermine ein. Auf der Seite des Schulungsprogramms gibt es einen Link zur Ansicht aller Schulungstermine dieses Schulungsprogramms.
-
-
-
-In diesem Werkzeug wählen Sie die aktuelle und die neue Stückliste aus. Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Austauschen" klicken, wird in der Stückliste des fertigen Produktes (Computer) die aktuelle Stückliste der Zentraleinheit durch die neue Stückliste ersetzt.
-
-#### Arbeitet das Stücklisten-Austauschwerkzeug auch dann, wenn ein fertiges Produkt in der Stückliste ausgetauscht werden soll?
-
-Nein. Hierzu sollten Sie die aktuelle Stückliste abbrechen und ändern, oder eine neue Stückliste für das fertige Erzeugnis anlegen.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 15cf85d4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Werkzeuge
-
-
-### Themen
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index bdd357cd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-bom-update-tool
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/work-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/work-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e477bfbf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/work-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,100 +0,0 @@
-
-# Arbeitsauftrag
-
-
-Der Arbeitsauftrag (auch als Arbeitsauftrag bezeichnet) ist ein Dokument welches vom Produktionsplaner als Startsignal in die Fertigung gegeben wird, um eine bestimmte Anzahl eines bestimmten Artikels zu produzieren. Der Arbeitsauftrag unterstützt Sie auch dabei den Materialbedarf (Lagerbuchung) für diesen Artikel aus der **Stückliste** zu generieren.
-
-Der **Arbeitsauftrag** wird aus dem **Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung** generiert, basierend auf den Kundenaufträgen. Sie können weiterhin direkt einen Arbeitsauftrag erstellen über:
-
-> Fertigung > Dokumente > Arbeitsauftrag > Neu
-
-
mitprotokolliert werden.
-* Zeitprotokolle werden zu den Arbeitsgängen des Arbeitsauftrages erstellt.
-* Vorlagen für Zeitprotokolle werden für die eingeplanten Arbeitsgänge zum Zeitpunkt des Übertragens des Arbeitsauftrages erstellt.
-* Um weitere Zeitprotokolle zu einem Arbeitsgang zu erstellen, wählen Sie "Zeitprotokoll erstellen" im betreffenden Arbeitsgang aus.
-
-
-
-### Zeitprotokolle erstellen
-
-1\. Um ein neues Zeitprotokoll zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Projekte > Dokumente > Zeitprotokoll > Neue
-
-2\. Sie können ein neues Zeitprotokll auch über den Kalender erstellen.
-
-Um Zeitprotokolle über den Kalender zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu "Zeitprotokoll" und wählen Sie "Kalender" aus.
-
-
-
-* Um ein Zeitprotokoll für mehrere Tage zu erstellen, klicken Sie und ziehen Sie den Mauszeiger über die Tage.
-
-
-
-* Sie können Zeitprotokolle auch aus der Wochen- oder Tagesansicht des Kalender heraus erstellen.
-
-
-
-* Zeitprotokolle für Fertigungsprozesse müssen aus dem Fertigungsauftrag heraus erstellt werden.
-* Um mehrere Zeitprotokolle zu Arbeitsgängen zu erstellen wählen Sie den entsprechenden Arbeitsgang und klicken Sie auf "Zeitprotokoll erstellen".
-
-### Abrechnung über Zeitprotokolle
-
-* Wenn Sie ein Zeitprotokoll abrechnen wollen, müssem Sie die Option "Abrechenbar" anklicken.
-* Im Abschnitt Kostenberechnung erstellt das System den Rechungsbetrag über die [Aktivitätskosten](/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-cost.html) basierend auf dem angegebenen Mitarbeiter und der angegebenen Aktivitätsart.
-* Das System kalkuliert dann den Rechnungsbetrag basierend auf den im Zeitprotokoll angegebenen Stunden.
-* Wenn "Abrechenbar" nicht markiert wurde, zeigt das System beim "Rechnungsbetrag" 0 an.
-
-
-
-* Nach dem Übertragen des Zeitprotokolls müssen Sie einen [Zeitprotokollstapel](/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log-batch.html) erstellen um mit der Abrechnung fortfahren zu können.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6cea5cbb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Vertrieb
-
-
-Vertrieb beschreibt die Kommunikation, die mit dem Kunden vor und während des Verkaufsvorgangs auftritt. Sie können die gesamt Kommunikation entweder selbst abwickeln oder Sie haben ein kleines Team an Vertriebsmitarbeitern. ERPNext hilft Ihnen dabei die Kommunikation, die zu einem Verkauf führt, mitzuprotokollieren, indem alle Dokumente in einer organisierten und durchsuchbaren Art und Weise verwaltet werden.
-
-### Themen
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 3f414d12..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-quotation
-sales-order
-setup
-articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b277f6ef..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
-
-# Angebot
-
-
-Während eines Verkaufsvorgangs wird der Kunde ein schriftliches Angebot über die Produkte oder Dienstleistungen, die Sie anbieten möchten, anfragen, inklusive der Preise und anderen Vertragsbedingungen. Dies bezeichnet man als Vorschlag, Kostenvoranschlag, Pro Forma-Rechnung oder Angebot.
-
-Um ein neues Angebot zu erstellen gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Vertrieb > Dokumente > Angebot > Neues Angebot
-
-### Erstellen eines Angebotes aus einer Opportunity heraus
-
-Sie können auch ein Angebot aus einer Opportunity heraus erstellen.
-
-
-
-Ein Angebot enthält Informationen über:
-
-* Den Empfänger des Angebots
-* Die Artikel und Mengen, die Sie anbieten
-* Die Preise, zu denen Sie anbieten (Siehe auch unten)
-* Die anfallenden Steuern
-* Andere Abgaben (wie Versandkosten, Versicherung), wenn sie zutreffen
-* Vertragsdauer
-* Die Lieferzeit
-* Andere Vereinbarungen
-
-> Tipp: Bilder schauen auf Angeboten toll aus. Um Bilder zu Ihren Angeboten hinzu zu fügen, binden Sie das entsprechende Bild in der Artikelvorlage ein.
-
-### Preise
-
-Die Preise, die sie abgeben, hängen von zwei Dingen ab:
-
-* Die Preisliste: Wenn Sie mehrere verschiedene Preislisten haben, können Sie eine Preisliste auswählen oder sie mit dem Kunden markieren (so dass sie automatisch vorselektiert wird). Ihre Artikelpreise werden automatisch über die Preisliste aktualisert. Für weitere Informationen bitte bei [Preisliste](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.html) weiterlesen.
-* Die Währung: Wenn Sie einem Kunden in einer anderen Währung anbieten, müssen Sie die Umrechnungsfaktoren aktualisieren um ERPNext in die Lage zu versetzen die Information in Ihrer Standardwährung zu speichern. Das hilft Ihnen dabei den Wert Ihres Angebots in der Standardwährung zu analysieren.
-
-### Steuern
-
-Um Steuern zu Ihrem Angebot hinzu zu fügen, können Sie entweder eine Steuervorlage oder eine Verkaufssteuern- und Gebühren-Vorlage auswählen oder die Steuern selbst hinzufügen. Um Steuern im Einzelnen zu verstehen, lesen Sie bitte [Steuern](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
-
-Sie können Steuern auf die gleiche Art hinzufügen wie die Vorlage Verkaufssteuern und Gebühren.
-
-### Vertragsbedingungen
-
-Im Idealfall beinhaltet jedes Angebot einen Satz an Vertragsbedingungen. Normalerweise ist es eine gute Idee eine Vorlage der eigenen Allgemeinen Geschäftsbediungen zu erstellen, damit Sie einen Standardsatz an Vertragsbedingungen haben. Das können Sie wie folgt tun:
-
-> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Vorlage für Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen
-
-Was sollten die Vertragsbedingungen beinhalten?
-
-* Die Gültigkeit des Angebotes
-* Die Zahlungsbedingungen (Vorkasse, auf Rechnung, Anzahlung etc.)
-* Optionen und Aufpreise
-* Sicherheitswarnungen und Gebrauchshinweise
-* Garantie, sofern vorhanden
-* Reklamationsvorschriften
-* Lieferbedingungen, wenn zutreffend
-* Vorgehensweise bei Beanstandungen, Schadensersatz, Haftung etc.
-* Adresse und Ansprechpartner Ihrer Firma
-
-### Übertraung
-
-Ein Angebot ist eine "übertragbare" Transaktion. Sobald Sie das Angebot an Ihren Kunden oder Lead senden, müssen Sie den Stand einfrieren, damit keine Änderungen durchgeführt werden können. Lesen Sie hierzu auch die Informationen zu den Dokumentenphasen.
-
-> Tipp: Angebote können auch als "Pro Forma-Rechnung" oder Vorschlag bezeichnet werden. Wählen Sie die passende Bezeichnung im Feld "Briefkopf drucken" in der Sektion "Druckeinstellungen" aus. Um neue Überschriften zu erstellen gehen Sie zu
-> Einstellungen > Druck > Briefkopf drucken
-
-### Rabatt
-
-Wenn Sie Ihre Vertriebstransaktionen wie z. B. ein Angebot (oder eine Kundenbestellung) erstellen, dann haben Sie wahrscheinlich schon gemerkt, dass es eine Spalte "Rabatt" gibt. Auf der linken Seite befindet sich der Preislisten-Preis auf der rechten Seite der Grundpreis. Sie können einen Rabatt hinzufügen um den Grundpreis zu aktualisieren. Um mehr über Rabatte zu erfahren lesen Sie bitte den Abschnitt [Rabatt](http://erpnext.org/discount).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index edb0a3b3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
-
-# Kundenauftrag
-
-
-Der Kundenauftrag bestätigt Ihren Verkauf und stößt Einkauf (**Materialanfrage**), Versand (**Lieferschein**), Abrechnung (**Ausgangsrechnung**) und Fertigung (**Produktionsplan**) an.
-
-Ein Kundenauftrag ist normalerweise ein bindender Vertrag mit Ihrem Kunden.
-
-Wenn Ihr Kunde das Angebot annimmt, können Sie das Angebot in einen Kundenauftrag umwandeln.
-
-### Flußdiagramm des Kundenauftrags
-
-
-
-### Die nächsten Schritte
-
-In dem Moment, in dem Sie Ihren Kundenauftrag "übertragen" haben, können Sie nun verschiedene Aktionen im Unternehmen anstossen:
-
-* Um den Beschaffungsvorgang einzuleiten klicken Sie auf "Materialanforderung"
-* Um den Versand einzuleiten klicken Sie auf "Auslieferung"
-* Um eine Rechnung zu erstellen klicken Sie auf "Rechnung"
-* Um den Prozess anzuhalten, klicken Sie auf "Anhalten"
-
-### Übertragung
-
-Der Kundenauftrag ist eine "übertragbare" Transaktion. Sehen Sie hierzu auch die Dokumentenphasen. Sie können abhängige Schritte (wie einen Lieferschein zu erstellen) erst dann durchführen, wenn Sie den Kundenauftrag übertragen haben.
-
-### Kundenauftrag mit Wartungsauftrag
-
-Wenn der Bestelltyp des Kundenauftrags "Wartung" ist, folgen Sie bitte unten dargestellten Schritten:
-
-* **Schritt 1:** Geben Sie die Währung, die Preisliste und die Artikeldetails ein.
-* **Schritt 2:** Berücksichtigen Sie Steuern und andere Informationen.
-* **Schritt 3:** Speichern und übertragen Sie das Formular.
-* **Schritt 4:** Wenn das Formular übertragen wurde, zeigt die Aktionsschaltfläche drei Auswahlmöglichkeiten: 1) Wartungsbesuch 2) Wartungsplan 3) Rechnung
-
-> **Anmerkung 1:** Wenn Sie auf die Aktionsschaltfläche klicken und "Wartungsbesuch" auswählen können Sie das Besuchsformular direkt ausfüllen. Die Details werden automatisch aus dem Kundenauftrag übernommen.
-
-> **Anmerkung 2:** Wenn Sie auf die Aktionsschaltfläche klicken und "Wartungsplan" auswählen, können Sie die Details zum Wartungsplan eintragen. Die Details werden autmomatisch aus dem Kundenauftrag übernommen.
-
-> **Anmerkung 3:** Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Rechnung" klicken, können Sie eine Rechnung für die Wartungsarbeiten erstellen. Die Details werden automatisch aus dem Kundenauftrag übernommen.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 306bca3a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Einrichtung
-
-
-Dieser Abschnitt enthält Informationen darüber, wie Kundengruppen, Vertriebspartner, Vertriebsmitarbeiter und Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen angelegt werden.
-
-Es gibt Anleitungen, wie die Vertriebseinstellungen eingegeben werden, um Standardfelder zu aktivieren.
-
-### Themen
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 22a335b0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-selling-settings
-sales-partner
-shipping-rule
-product-bundle
-item-price
-sales-person-target-allocation
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 84d70408..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-
-# Produkt-Bundle
-
-
-Der Begriff "Produkt-Bundle" ist gleichbedeutend mit der Stückliste des Vertriebs. Es handelt sich dabei um eine Vorlage, in der Sie Artikel zusammenstellen können, die zusammengepackt werden und als ein Artikel verkauft werden. Beispiel: Wenn ein Laptop geliefert wird, müssen Sie sicher stellen, dass das Ladekabel, die Maus und die Tragetasche mitgeliefert werden und der Lagerbestand dieser Artikel dementsprechend bearbeitet wird. Um dieses Szenario abzubilden, können Sie für den Hauptartikel, z. B. den Laptop, die Option "Produkt-Bundle"einstellen, und die zu liefernden Artikel wie Laptop + Ladekabel + anderes Zubehör als Unterartikel auflisten.
-
-Im Folgenden sind die Schritte dargestellt, wie die Vorlage zum Produkt-Bundle eingestellt wird, und wie sie in Vertriebsaktionen genutzt wird.
-
-### Ein neues Produkt-Bundle erstellen
-
-Um ein neues Produkt-Bundle zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Produkt-Bundle > Neu
-
-
-
-Das Werkzeug hat zwei Abschnitte, einen um eine Vorlage herunter zu laden, und einen zweiten um Daten hoch zu laden.
-
-(Anmerkung: Für den Import sind nur die DocTypes zugelassen, deren Dokumenttyp "Stammdaten" ist, oder bei denen die Einstellung "Import erlauben" aktiviert ist.)
-
-### 1. Herunterladen der Vorlage
-
-Daten werden in ERPNext in Tabellen gespeichert, sehr ähnlich einer Tabellenkalkulation mit Spalten und Zeilen voller Daten. Jede Instanz in ERPNext kann mehrere verschiedene mit Ihr verbundene Untertabellen haben. Die Untertabellen sind mit Ihren übergeordneten Tabellen verknüpft und werden dort eingesetzt, wo es für eine Eigenschaft mehrere verschiedene Werte gibt. So kann z. B. ein Artikel mehrere verschiedene Preise haben, eine Rechnung hat mehrere verschiedene Artikel usw.
-
-
-
-* Klicken Sie auf die Tabelle, die Sie herunter laden wollen, oder auf "Alle Tabellen".
-* Für Massenbearbeitung klicken Sie auf "Mit Daten herunterladen".
-
-### 2. Füllen Sie die Vorlage aus
-
-Öffnen Sie die Vorlage nach dem Herunterladen in einer Tabellenkalkulationsanwendung und fügen Sie die Daten unterhalb der Spaltenköpfe ein.
-
-
-
-Exportieren Sie dann Ihre Vorlage oder speichern Sie sie im CSV-Format (**Comma Separated Values**).
-
-
-
-### 3. Hochladen der CSV-Datei
-
-Fügen Sie abschliessend die CSV-Datei im Abschnitt Import hinzu. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Hochladen und Importieren".
-
-
-
-#### Anmerkungen
-
-1. Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie als Verschlüsselung UTF-8 verwenden, wenn Ihre Anwendung das zulässt.
-2. Lassen Sie die Spalte ID für einen neuen Datensatz leer.
-
-### 4. Hochladen aller Tabellen (übergeordnete und Untertabellen)
-
-Wenn Sie alle Tabellen auswählen, dann erhalten Sie Spalten für alle Tabellen in einer Zeile gertrennt durch ~ Spalten.
-
-Wenn Sie mehrere verschiedene Unterzeilen haben, dann müssen Sie einen neuen Hauptartikel in einer neuen Zeile eintragen. Sehen Sie hierzu das Beispiel unten:
-
-
- Main Table ~ Child Table
- Spalte 1 Spalte 2 Spalte 3 ~ Spalte 1 Spalte 2 Spalte 3
- v11 v12 v13 c11 c12 c13
- c14 c15 c17
- v21 v22 v23 c21 c22 c23
-
-
-Um zu sehen, wie das gemacht wird, geben Sie manuell über Formulare einige Datensätze ein und exportieren Sie "Alle Tabellen" über "Mit Daten herunterladen".
-
-### 5. Überschreiben
-
-ERPNext ermöglicht es Ihnen auch alle oder bestimmte Spalten zu überschreiben. Wenn Sie bestimmte Spalten aktualisieren möchten, können Sie die Vorlage mit Daten herunter laden. Vergessen Sie nicht die Box "Überschreiben" zu markieren, bevor sie hochladen.
-
-Anmerkung: Wenn Sie "Überschreiben" auswählen, werden alle Unterdatensätze eines übergeordneten Elements gelöscht.
-
-### 6. Einschränkungen beim Hochladen
-
-ERPNext begrenzt die Menge an Daten, die Sie in einer Datei hochladen können. Die Menge kann sich je nach Datentyp unterscheiden. Normalerweise kann man problemlos ungefähr 1.000 Zeilen einer Tabelle in einem Vorgang hochladen. Wenn das System den Vorgang nicht akzeptiert, sehen Sie eine Fehlermeldung.
-
-Warum das alles? Wenn Sie zuviele Daten hochladen, kann das System abstürzen, im Besonderen dann, wenn andere Benutzer parallel arbeiten. Daher begrenzt ERPNext die Anzahl von Schreibvorgängen, die Sie mit einer Eingabe verarbeiten können.
-
----
-
-#### Wie fügen Sie Dateien an?
-
-Wenn Sie ein Formular öffnen, dann sehen Sie in der Seitenleiste rechts einen Abschnitt zum Anfügen von Dateien. Klicken Sie auf "Hinzufügen" und wählen Sie die Datei aus, die Sie anfügen möchten. Klicken Sie auf "Hochladen" und die Sache ist erledigt.
-
-### Was ist eine CSV-Datei?
-Eine CSV (Durch Kommas getrennte Werte)-Datei ist ein Datensatz, den Sie in ERPNext hochladen können um verschiedene Daten zu aktualisieren. Jedes gebräuchliche Tabellenkalkulationsprogramm wie MS-Excel oder OpenOffice Spreadsheet kann im CSV-Format abspeichern.
-Wenn Sie Microsoft Excel benutzen und nicht-englische Zeichen verwenden, dann sollten Sie Ihre Datei UTF-8-kodiert abspeichern. Bei älteren Versionen von Excel gibt es keinen eindeutigen Weg als UTF-8 zu speichern. Deshalb können Sie die Datei auch ganz einfach als CSV abspeichern, dann mit Notepad öffnen und als UTF-8 abspeichern. (Microsoft Excel kann das leider nicht.)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 49219c0e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Datenmanagement
-
-
-Mithilfe des Werkzeuges zum Datenimport und -export können Sie Massenimporte und -exporte aus und nach Tabellenkalkulationsdateien (**.csv**) durchführen. Dieses Werkzeug ist sehr hilfreich zu Beginn des Einrichtungsprozesses um Daten aus anderen Systemen zu übernehmen.
-
-### Themen
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 428f3f2f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-
-data-import-tool
-bulk-rename
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b8307ebd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-# E-Mail-Konto
-
-
-Sie können in ERPNext viele verschiedene E-Mail-Konten für eingehende und ausgehende E-Mails verwalten. Es muss mindestens ein Standard-Konto für ausgehende E-Mails und eines für eingehende E-Mails geben. Wenn Sie sich in der ERPNext-Cloud befinden, dann werden die Einstellungen für ausgehende E-Mails von uns getroffen.
-
-**Anmerkung, wenn Sie das System selbst einrichten:** Für ausgehende E-Mails sollten Sie Ihren eigenen SMTP-Server einrichten oder sich bei einem SMTP Relay Service wie mandrill.com oder sendgrid.com, der den Versand einer größeren Menge von Transaktions-E-Mails erlaubt, registrieren. Standard-E-Mail-Services wie GMail beschränken Sie auf eine Höchstgrenze an E-Mails pro Tag.
-
-### Standard-E-Mail-Konten
-
-ERPNext erstellt standardmäßig Vorlagen für einige E-Mail-Konten. Nicht alle sind aktiviert. Um sie zu aktivieren, müssen Sie Ihre Konteneinstellungen bearbeiten.
-
-Es gibt zwei Arten von E-Mail-Konten, ausgehend und eingehend. E-Mail-Konten für ausgehende E-Mails verwenden einen SMTP-Service, eingehende E-Mails verwenden einen POP-Service. Die meisten E-Mail-Anbieter wie GMail, Outlook oder Yahoo bieten diese Seriveleistungen an.
-
-
)
-2. [Empfänger und Nachrichtentext eingeben](
)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-digest.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f2ee8c79..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Täglicher E-Mail-Bericht
-
-
-E-Mail-Berichte erlauben es Ihnen regelmäßig Aktualisierungen zu Ihren Verkäufen, Ausgaben oder anderen wichtigen Zahlen direkt in Ihren Posteingang zu erhalten.
-
-E-Mail-Berichte sind für Führungskräfte eine tolle Sache, um wichtige Kennzahlen wie "Gebuchte Verkäufe" oder "Eingezogene Beträge" oder "Erstellte Rechnungen" zu beobachten.
-
-Um einen E-Mail-Bericht einzurichten, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Einstellungen > E-Mail > Täglicher E-Mail-Bericht
-
-### Beispiel
-
-Stellen Sie ein, wie oft Sie eine Benachrichtigung erhalten wollen, markieren Sie alle Artikel, über die Sie in Ihrer wöchentlichen Aktualisierung benachrichtig werden wollen und wählen Sie die Benutzer-IDs aus, an die die Zusammenfassung gesendet werden soll.
-
-
-
-> Wichtig: Wenn Sie einen bestimmten Benutzer angeben, werden die POS-Einstellungen nur auf diesen Benutzer angewendet. Wenn diese Optin leer bleibt, werden die Einstellungen auf alle Benutzer angewendet. Um mehr über POS zu erfahren, gehen Sie zu POS.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b59d10d4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
-# Preisliste
-
-
-ERPNext lässt es zu, viele verschiedene Verkaufs- und Einkaufspreise für einen Artikel zu verwalten, indem eine Preisliste verwendet wird. "Preisliste" ist hierbei die Bezeichnung, die Sie einer Menge von Artikelpreisen geben können.
-
-Warum sollten Sie Preislisten verwenden? Sie haben für verschiedene Regionen (wegen der Versandkosten), für verschiedene Länder oder verschiedene Währungen etc. unterschiedliche Preise.
-
-Ein Artikel kann aufgrund des Kunden, der Währung, der Region, den Versandkosten etc. unterschiedliche Preise haben, die als unterschiedliche Sätze abgespeichert werden können. In ERPNext müssen Sie diese Listen jeweils getrennt abspeichern. Die Einkaufspreisliste unterscheidet sich von der Verkaufspreisliste und beide werden getrennt gespeichert.
-
-Sie können eine neue Preisliste erstellen über:
-
-> Vertrieb/Einkauf/Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Preisliste > Neu
-
-
-
-
-> Anmerkung: Die Zeichenfolge bis zum "?" ist die URL des SMS-Gateways.
-
-Beispiel:
-
-http://instant.smses.com/web2sms.php?username=abcd&password;=abcd&to;=9900XXXXXX&sender;=DEMO&message;=THIS+IS+A+TEST+SMS
-
-Die oben angegebene URL verschickt SMS über das Konto "abcd" an Mobilnummern "9900XXXXXX" mit der Sender-ID "DEMO" und der Textnachricht "THIS IS A TEST SMS".
-
-Beachten Sie, dass einige Parameter in der URL statisch sind. Sie bekommen von Ihrem SMS-Anbieter statische Werte wie Benutzername, Passwort usw. Diese statischen Werte sollten in die Tabelle der statischen Parameter eingetragen werden.
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7bb09ecb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,137 +0,0 @@
-
-# Bestandsabgleich bei nichtserialisierten Artikeln
-
-
-Bestandsabgleich ist der Prozess über den der Lagerbestand gezählt und bewertet wird. Er wird normalerweise zum Ende des Geschäftsjahres durchgeführt um den Gesamtwert des Lagers für die Abschlussbuchung zu ermitteln. In diesem Prozess werden die tatsächlichen Lagerbestände geprüft und im System aufgezeichnet. Der tatsächliche Lagerbestand und der Lagerbestand im System sollten übereinstimmen oder zumindest ähnlich sein. Wenn sie das nicht sind, können Sie das Werkzeug zum Bestandsabgleich verwenden, um den Lagerbestand und den Wert mit den tatsächlichen Begebenheiten in Einklang zu bringen.
-
-#### Unterschied zwischen serialisierten und nicht-serialisierten Artikeln
-
-Eine Seriennummer ist eine eindeutige Nummer oder Gruppe von Nummern und Zeichen zur Identifizierung eines individuellen Artikels. Serialisierte Artikel sind gewöhnlicherweise Artikel mit hohem Wert, für die es Garantien und Servicevereinbarungen gibt. Die meisten Artikel aus den Bereichen Maschinen, Geräte und hochwertige Elektronik (Computer, Drucker, usw.) haben Seriennummern.
-
-Nicht serialisierte Artikel sind normalerweise Schnelldreher und von geringem Wert und brauchen aus diesem Grund keine Nachverfolgbarkeit für jedes Stück. Artikel wie Schrauben, Putztücher, Verbrauchsmaterialien und ortsgebundene Produkte können in die nichtserialisierten Artikel eingeordnet werden.
-
-> Die Option Bestandsabgleich ist nur bei nichtserialisierten Artikeln verfügbar. Für serialisierte und Chargen-Artikel sollten Sie im Formular "Lagerbuchung" eine Materialentnahmebuchung erstellen.
-
-### Eröffnungsbestände
-
-Sie können einen Eröffnungsbestand über den Bestandsabgleich ins System hochladen. Der Bestandsabgleich aktualisiert Ihren Lagerbestand für einen vorgegebenen Artikel zu einem vorgegebenen Datum auf einem vorgegebenen Lager in der vorgegebenen Menge.
-
-Um einen Lagerabgleich durchzuführen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Lagerbestand > Werkzeuge > Bestandsableich > Neu
-
-#### Schritt 1: Vorlage herunterladen
-
-Sie sollten sich an eine spezielle Vorlage eines Tabellenblattes halten um den Bestand und den Wert eines Artikels zu importieren. Öffnen Sie ein neues Formular zum Bestandsabgleich um die Optionen für den Download zu sehen.
-
-
-
-#### Schritt 2: Geben Sie Daten in die CSV-Datei ein.
-
-
-
-Das CSV-Format beachtet Groß- und Kleinschreibung. Verändern Sie nicht die Kopfbezeichnungen, die in der Vorlage vordefiniert wurden. In den Spalten "Artikelnummer" und "Lager" geben Sie bitte die richtige Artikelnummer und das Lager ein, so wie es in ERPNext bezeichnet wird. Für die Menge geben Sie den Lagerbestand, den Sie für diesen Artikel erfassen wollen, in einem bestimmten Lager ein. Wenn Sie die Menge oder den wertmäßigen Betrag eines Artikels nicht ändern wollen, dann lassen Sie den Eintrag leer.
-Anmerkung: Geben Sie keine "0" ein, wenn sie die Menge oder den wertmäßigen Betrag nicht ändern wollen. Sonst kalkuliert das System eine Menge von "0". Lassen Sie also das Feld leer!
-
-#### Schritt 3: Laden Sie die Datei hoch und geben Sie in das Formular "Bestandsableich" Werte ein.
-
-
-
-##### Buchungsdatum
-
-Das Buchungsdatum ist das Datum zu dem sich der hochgeladene Lagerbestand im Report wiederspiegeln soll. Die Auswahl der Option "Buchungsdatum" ermöglicht es Ihnen auch rückwirkende Bestandsabgleiche durchzuführen.
-
-##### Konto für Bestandsveränderungen
-
-Wenn Sie einen Bestandsabgleich durchführen um einen **Eröffnungsbestand** zu übertragen, dann sollten Sie ein Bilanzkonto auswählen. Standardmäßig wird ein **temporäres Eröffnungskonto** im Kontenplan erstellt, welches hier verwendet werden kann.
-
-Wenn Sie einen Bestandsabgleich durchführen um den **Lagerbestand oder den Wert eines Artikels zu korrigieren**, können Sie jedes beliebige Aufwandskonto auswählen, auf das Sie den Differenzbetrag (, den Sie aus der Differenz der Werte des Artikels erhalten,) buchen wollen. Wenn das Aufwandskonto als Konto für Bestandsveränderungen ausgewählt wird, müssen Sie auch eine Kostenstelle angeben, da diese bei Ertrags- und Aufwandskonten zwingend erforderlich ist.
-
-Wenn Sie sich die abgespeicherten Bestandsabgleichdaten noch einmal angesehen haben, übertragen Sie den Bestandsabgleich. Nach der erfolgreichen Übertragung, werden die Daten im System aktualisiert. Um die übertragenen Daten zu überprüfen gehen Sie zum Lager und schauen Sie sich den Bericht zum Lagerbestand an.
-
-Notiz: Wenn Sie die bewerteten Beträge eines Artikels eingeben, können Sie zum Lagerbestand gehen und auf den Bericht zu den Artikelpreisen klicken, wenn Sie die Bewertungsbeträge der einzelnen Artikel herausfinden wollen. Der Bericht zeigt Ihnen alle Typen von Beträgen.
-
-#### Schritt 4: Überprüfen Sie die Daten zum Bestandsabgleich
-
-
-
-### Bericht zum Lagerbuch
-
-
-
-
-##### So arbeitet der Bestandsabgleich
-
-Ein Bestandsabgleich zu einem bestimmten Termin bedeutet die gesperrte Menge eines Artikels an einem bestimmten Abgleichsdatum abzugleichen, und sollte deshalb nicht im Nachhinein noch von Lagerbuchungen beeinträchtigt werden.
-
-Beispiel:
-
-Artikelnummer: ABC001, Lager: Mumbai. Nehmen wir an, dass der Lagerbestand zum 10. Januar 100 Stück beträgt. Zum 12. Januar wird ein Bestandsabgleich durchgeführt um den Bestand auf 150 Stück anzuheben. Das Lagerbuch sieht dann wie folgt aus:
-
-
- | Buchungsdatum - | -Menge - | -Bestandsmenge - | -Belegart - | -
| 10.01.2014 | -100 | -100 | -Kaufbeleg | -
| 12.01.2014 | -50 | -150 | -Bestandsabgleich | -
| Buchungsdatum | -Menge | -Bestandsmenge | -Belegart | -
| 05.01.2014 | -20 | -20 | -Kaufbeleg | -
| 10.01.2014 | -100 | -120 | -Kaufbeleg | -
| 12.01.2014 | -150 | -Bestandsabgleich |
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5fafde09..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-
-# Benutzer hinzufügen
-
-
-Benutzer können vom System-Manager hinzugefügt werden. Wenn Sie ein System-Manager sind, können Sie Benutzer hinzufügen über
-
-Es gibt zwei Hauptarten von Benutzern: Webbenutzer und Systembenutzer. Systembenutzer sind Leute, die ERPNext im Unternehmen verwenden. Webbenutzer sind Kunden oder Lieferanten (Portalbenutzer).
-
-Für einen Benutzer können viele Informationen eingegeben werden. Im Sinne der Anwenderfreundlichkeit ist die Menge an Informationen, die für Webbenutzer eingegeben werden können, gering: Der Vorname und die Email-Adresse. Wichtig ist, dass Sie erkennen, dass die Email-Adresse der eindeutige Schlüssel (ID) dafür ist, einen Benutzer zu identifizieren.
-
-> Einstellungen > Benutzer > Benutzer
-
-### 1. Übersicht der Benutzer
-
-
-
-
-Um einen neuen Benutzer hinzuzufügen, klicken Sie auf "Neu".
-
-### 2. Benutzerdetails hinzufügen
-
-Fügen Sie Details zum Benutzer hinzu, z. B. Vorname, Nachname, E-Mail-Adresse, usw.
-
-Die E-Mail-Adresse des Benutzers wird zur Benutzer-ID.
-
-Nach dem Hinzufügen dieser Details bitte den Benutzer abspeichern.
-
-### 3. Rollen einstellen
-
-Nach dem Speichern sehen Sie eine Liste der Rollen und daneben jeweils eine Schaltfläche zum Anklicken. Markieren Sie alle Rollen, von denen Sie möchten, dass sie der Benutzer bekommt, und speichern Sie das Dokument ab. Um zu sehen, welche Berechtigungen die einzelnen Rollen haben, klicken Sie auf den Rollennamen.
-
-
-
-### 4. Zugriff auf Module einstellen
-
-Benutzer haben Zugriff auf alle Module, für die sie aufgrund Ihrer Rollen Berechtigungen haben. Wenn Sie bestimmte Module für den Zugriff sperren möchten, entfernen Sie die Markierung in der Liste.
-
-
-
-### 5. Sicherheitseinstellungen
-
-Wenn Sie dem Benutzer nur zu bestimmten Bürozeiten oder an Wochenenden Zugriff auf das System gewähren möchten, stellen Sie das unter den Sicherheitseinstellungen ein.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 33776300..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-# Benutzer und Berechtigungen
-
-
-In ERPNext können Sie mehrere verschiedene Benutzer anlegen und ihnen unterschiedliche Rollen zuweisen. Es gibt einige Benutzer, die nur auf den öffentlichen Teil von ERPNext (d. h. die Webseite) zugreifen können. Diese Benutzer werden "Webseiten-Benutzer" genannt.
-
-ERPNext verwirklicht Berechtigungskontrolle auf den Ebenen von Benutzer und Rolle. Jedem Benutzer können über das System mehrere verschiedene Rollen und Berechtigungen zugeordnet werden.
-
-Die wichtigste Rolle ist der "System-Manager". Jeder Benutzer, der diese Rolle hat, kann weitere Benutzer hinzufügen und Benutzern Rollen zuteilen.
-
-### Themen
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index b00f32ad..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-adding-users
-role-based-permissions
-user-permissions
-sharing
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bbecc2a8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-
-# Rollenbasierte Berechtigungen
-
-
-ERPNext arbeitet mit einem rollenbasierten Berechtigungssystem. Das heißt, dass Sie Benutzern Rollen zuordnen können und Rollen Berechtigungen erteilen können. Die Struktur der Berechtigungen erlaubt es Ihnen weiterhin verschiedene Berechtigungsregeln für unterschiedliche Felder zu definieren, wobei das **Konzept der Berechtigungsebenen** für Felder verwendet wird. Wenn einem Kunden einmal Rollen zugeordnet worden sind, haben Sie darüber die Möglichkeit, den Zugriff eines Benutzers auf bestimmte Dokumente zu beschränken.
-
-Wenn Sie das tun wollen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Einstellungen > Berechtigungen > Rollenberechtigungen-Manager
-
-
-
-Berechtigungen werden angewandt auf einer Kombination von:
-
-* **Rollen:** Wie wir schon angesprochen haben, werden Benutzern Rollen zugeordnet, und auf diese wiederum werden Berechtigungsregeln angewandt.
-
-_Beispiele für Rollen sind der "Kontenmanager", der "Mitarbeiter" und der "Nutzer Personalabteilung"._
-
-* **Dokumenttypen:** Jeder Dokumententyp, jede Vorlage und jede Transaktion hat eine eigene Liste von rollenbasierten Berechtigungen.
-
-_Beispiele für Dokumententypen sind: "Ausgangsrechnung", "Urlaubsantrag", "Lagerbuchung", usw._
-
-* **Berechtigungs"ebenen":** Sie können in jedem Dokument Felder nach "Ebenen" gruppieren. Jede Gruppierung von Feldern wird mit einer eindeutigen Nummer (0, 1, 2, 3, usw.) versehen. Auf jede Feldgruppierung kann ein eigenständiger Satz von Berechtigungsregeln angewandt werden. Standardmäßig haben alle Felder die Ebene 0.
-
-_Die Berechtigungsebene verbindet die Gruppierung der Felder der Ebene X mit einer Berechtigungsregel der Ebene X._
-
-* **Dokumentenphasen:** Berechtigungen werden zu jeder Phase eines Dokumentes angewandt, wie z. B. Erstellung, Speicherung, Übetragung, Stornierung und Änderung. Eine Rolle kann die Berechtigung haben zu drucken, per E-Mail zu versenden, Daten zu importieren oder zu exportieren, auf Berichte zuzugreifen oder Benutzerberechtigungen zu definieren.
-
-* **Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden:** Dieser Schalter entscheidet, ob für eine Rolle in einer bestimmten Dokumentenphase Benutzerberechtigungen gültig sind.
-
-Wenn dieser Punkt aktiviert ist, kann ein Benutzer mit dieser Rolle nur auf bestimmte Dokumente dieses Dokumententyps zugreifen. Dieser spezielle Dokumentenzugriff wird über die Liste der Benutzerberechtigungen definiert. Zusätzlich werden Benutzerberechtigungen, die für andere Dokumententypen definiert wurden, ebenfalls angewandt, wenn Sie mit dem aktuellen Dokumententyp über Verknüpfungsfelder verbunden sind.
-
-Um Benutzerberechtigungen zu setzen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Einstellungen > Berechtigungen > [Benutzerrechte-Manager](/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
-
-
-
----
-
-**Um eine neue Regel hinzuzufügen**, klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Benutzereinschränkung hinzufügen". Es öffnet sich ein Popup-Fenster und bittet Sie eine Rolle und eine Berechtigungsebene auszuwählen. Wenn Sie diese Auswahl treffen und auf "Hinzufügen" klicken, wird in der Tabelle der Regeln eine neue Zeile eingefügt.
-
----
-
-Der Urlaubsantrag ist ein gutes **Beispiel**, welches alle Bereiche des Berechtigungssystems abdeckt.
-
-
-
-1\. **Er sollte von einem "Mitarbeiter" erstellt werden.** Aus diesem Grund sollte die Rolle "Mitarbeiter" Berechtigungen zum Lesen, Schreiben und Erstellen haben.
-
-
-
-2\. **Ein Mitarbeiter sollte nur auf seine/Ihre eigenen Urlaubsanträge zugreifen können.** Daher sollte der Punkt "Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden" für die Rolle "Mitarbeiter" aktiviert sein und es sollte ein Datensatz "Benutzerberechtigung" für jede Kombination von Benutzer und Mitarbeiter erstellt werden. (Dieser Aufwand reduziert sich für den Dokumententyp, indem über das Programm Datensätze für Benutzerberechtigungen erstellt werden.)
-
-
-
-3\. **Der Personalmanager sollte alle Urlaubsanträge sehen können.** Erstellen Sie für den Personalmanager eine Berechtigungsregel auf der Ebene 0 mit Lese-Rechten. Die Option "Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden" sollte deaktiviert sein.
-
-
-
-4\. **Der Urlaubsgenehmiger sollte die ihn betreffenden Urlaubsanträge lesen und aktualisieren können.** Der Urlaubsgenehmiger erhält Lese- und Schreibzugriff auf Ebene 0, und die Option "Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden" wird aktiviert. Zutreffende Mitarbeiter-Dokumente sollten in den Benutzerberechtigungen des Urlaubsgenehmigers aufgelistet sein. (Dieser Aufwand reduziert sich für Urlaubsgenehmiger, die in Mitarbeiterdokumenten aufgeführt werden, indem über das Programm Datensätze für Benutzerberechtigungen erstellt werden.)
-
-
-
-5\. **Ein Urlaubsantrag sollte nur von einem Mitarbeiter der Personalverwaltung oder einem Urlaubsgenehmiger bestätigt oder abgelehnt werden können.** Das Statusfeld des Urlaubsantrags wird auf Ebene 1 gesetzt. Mitarbeiter der Personalverwaltung und Urlaubsgenehmiger bekommen Lese- und Schreibrechte für Ebene 1, während allen anderen Leserechte für Ebene 1 gegeben werden.
-
-
-
-6\. **Der Mitarbeiter der Personalverwaltung sollte die Möglichkeit haben Urlaubsanträge an seine Untergebenen zu delegieren.** Er erhält die Erlaubis Benutzerberechtigungen einzustellen. Ein Nutzer mit der Rolle "Benutzer Personalverwaltung" wäre dann also in der Lage Benutzer-Berechtigungen und Urlaubsanträge für andere Benutzer zu definieren.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0748078b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Teilen
-
-
-Zusätzlich zu Benutzer- und Rollenberechtigungen können Sie ein Dokument auch mit einem anderen Benutzer "teilen", wenn Sie die Berechtigungen zum teilen haben.
-
-Um ein Dokument zu teilen, öffnen Sie das Dokument, klicken Sie auf das "+"-Symbol im Abschnitt "Freigegeben für" und wählen Sie den Benutzer aus.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3c8786b6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Benutzer-Berechtigungen
-
-This document has been changed but not yet translated. Please see the English Version
-
-User Permission
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/workflows.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/workflows.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8b937fb2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/workflows.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-
-# Workflows
-
-
-Um es mehreren unterschiedlichen Personen zu erlauben viele verschiedene Anfragen zu übertragen, die dann von unterschiedlichen Benutzern genehmigt werden müssen, folgt ERPNext den Bedingungen eines Workflows. ERPNext protokolliert die unterschiedlichen Berechtigungen vor dem Übertragen mit.
-
-Unten Sehen Sie ein Beispiel eines Worklflows.
-
-Wenn ein Benutzer einen Urlaub beantragt, dann wird seine Anfrage an die Personalabteilung weiter geleitet. Die Personalabteilung, repräsentiert durch einen Mitarbeiter der Personalabteilung, wird diese Anfrage dann entweder genehmigen oder ablehnen. Wenn dieser Prozess abgeschlossen ist, dann bekommt der Vorgesetzte des Benutzers (der Urlaubsgenehmiger) eine Mitteilung, dass die Personalabteilung den Antrag genehmigt oder abgelehnt hat. Der Vorgesetzte, der die genehmigende Instanz ist, wird dann den Antrag entweder genehmigen oder ablehnen. Dementsprechend bekommt der Benutzer dann eine Genehmigung oder eine Ablehnung.
-
-
-
-Um einen Workflow und Übergangsregeln zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Einstellungen > Workflow > Workflow > Neu
-
-#### Schritt 1: Geben Sie die unterschiedlichen Zustände des Prozesses Urlaubsantrag ein.
-
-
-
-#### Schritt 2: Geben Sie die Übergangsregeln ein.
-
-
-
-Hinweise:
-
-> Hinweis 1: Wenn Sie einen Workflow erstellen überschreiben Sie grundlegend den Kode, der für dieses Dokument erstellt wurde. Dementsprechend arbeitet das Dokument dann nach Ihrem Workflow und nicht mehr auf dem voreingestellten Kode. Deshalb gibt es wahrscheinlich keine Schaltfläche zum Übertragen, wenn Sie diese nicht im Workflow definiert haben.
-
-> Hinweis 2: Der Dokumentenstatus für "Gespeichert" ist "0", für "Übertragen" "1" und für "Storniert" "2".
-
-> Hinweis 3: Ein Dokument kann nicht storniert werden bis es übertragen wurde.
-
-> Hinweis 4: Wenn Sie die Möglichkeit haben wollen zu stornieren, dann müssen Sie einen Workflow-Übergang erstellen, der Ihnen nach dem Übertragen das Stornieren anbietet.
-
-#### Beispiel eines Urlaubsantrags-Prozesses
-
-Gehen Sie in das Modul Personalwesen und klicken Sie auf Urlaubsantrag. Beantragen Sie einen Urlaub.
-
-Wenn ein Urlaubsantrag übertragen wird, steht der Status in der Ecke der rechten Seite auf "Beantragt".
-
-
-
-Wenn sich ein Mitarbeiter der Personalabteilung anmeldet, dann kann er den Antrag genehmigen oder ablehnen. Wenn eine Genehmigung erfolgt, wechselt der Status in der rechten Ecke zu "Genehmigt". Es wird jedoch ein blaues Informationssymbol angezeigt, welches aussagt, dass der Urlaubsantrag noch anhängig ist.
-
-
-
-Wenn der Urlaubsgenehmiger die Seite mit den Urlaubsanträgen öffnet, kann er den Status von "Genehmigt" auf "Abgelehnt" ändern.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fc684838..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-
-# Bewertung des Lagerbestandes
-
-
-Der Wert des verfügbaren Lagerbestandes wird im Kontenplan des Unternehmens als Vermögenswert behandelt. Abhängig von der Art der Artikel wird hier zwischen Anlagevermögen und Umlaufvermögen unterschieden. Um eine Bilanz vorzubereiten, sollten Sie die Buchungen für diese Vermögen erstellen. Es gibt generell zwei unterschiedliche Methoden den Lagerbestand zu bewerten:
-
-### Ständige Inventur
-
-Bei diesem Prozess bucht das System jede Lagertransaktion um Lagerbestand und Buchbestand zu synchronisieren. Das ist die Standardeinstellung in ERPNext für neue Konten.
-
-Wenn Sie Artikel kaufen und erhalten, werden diese Artikel als Vermögen des Unternehmens gebucht (Warenbestand/Anlagevermögen). Wenn Sie diese Artikel wieder verkaufen und ausliefern, werden Kosten (Selbstkosten) in Höhe der Bezugskosten der Artikel verbucht. Nach jeder Lagertransaktion werden Buchungen im Hauptbuch erstellt. Dies hat zum Ergebnis, dass der Wert im Lagerbuch immer gleich dem Wert in der Bilanz bleibt. Das verbessert die Aussagekraft der Bilanz und der Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung.
-
-Um Buchungen für bestimmte Lagertransaktionen zu überprüfen, bitte unter [Beispiele](/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html) nachlesen.
-
-#### Vorteile
-
-Das System der laufenden Inventur macht es Ihnen leichter eine exakte Aussage über Vermögen und Kosten zu erhalten. Die Lagerbilanz wird ständig mit den relevanten Kontoständen abgeglichen, somit müssen keine manuellen Buchungen mehr für jede Periode erstellt werden, um die Salden auszugleichen.
-
-Für den Fall, dass neue zurückdatierte Transaktionen erstellt werden oder Stornierungen von bereits angelegten Transaktionen statt finden, werden für alle Artikel dieser Transaktion alle Buchungen im Lagerbuch und Hauptbuch, die danach liegen, neu berechnet. Auf dieselbe Vorgehensweise wird zurück gegriffen, wenn Kosten zum übertragenen Kaufbeleg hinzugefügt werden, nachgereicht über das Hilfsprogramm für Einstandskosten.
-
-> Anmerkung: Die ständige Inventur hängt vollständig von der Artikelbewertung ab. Deshalb müssen Sie bei der Eingabe der Werte vorsichtiger vorgehen, wenn Sie gleichzeitig annehmende Lagertransaktionen wie Kaufbeleg, Materialschein oder Fertigung/Umpacken erstellen.
-
----
-
-### Stichtagsinventur
-
-Bei dieser Methode werden periodisch manuelle Buchungen erstellt, um die Lagerbilanz und die relevanten Kontenstände abzugleichen. Das System erstellt die Buchungen für Vermögen zum Zeitpunkt des Materialeinkaufs oder -verkaufs nicht automatisch.
-
-Während einer Buchungsperiode werden Kosten in ihrem Buchhaltungssystem gebucht, wenn Sie Artikel kaufen und erhalten. Einen Teil dieser Artikel verkaufen und liefern Sie dann aus.
-
-Am Ende einer Buchungsperiode muss dann der Gesamtwert der verkauften Artikel als Unternehmensvermögen (oft als Warenbestand) gebucht werden.
-
-Die Differenz aus dem Wert der Waren, die noch nicht verkauft wurden, und dem Warenbestand zum Ende der letzten Periode kann positiv oder negativ sein und wird dem Vermögen (Warenbestand/Anlagevermögen) hinzugefügt. Wenn es sich um einen negativen Betrag handelt, erfolgt die Buchung spiegelverkehrt.
-
-Dieser Gesamtprozess wird als Stichtagsinventur bezeichnet.
-
-Wenn Sie als bereits existierender Benutzer die Stichtagsinventur nutzen aber zur Ständigen Inventur wechseln möchten, müssen Sie der Migrationsanleitung folgen. Für weitere Details lesen Sie [Migration aus der Stichtagsinventur](/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.html).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 21624e52..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-perpetual-inventory
-migrate-to-perpetual-inventory
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 973572b0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-
-# Zur Ständigen Inventur wechseln
-
-
-Bestehende Benutzer müssen sich an folgende Schritte halten um das neue System der Ständigen Inventur zu aktivieren. Da die Ständige Inventur immer auf einer Synchronisation zwischen Lager und Kontostand aufbaut, ist es nicht möglich diese Option in einer bestehenden Lagereinstellung zu übernehmen. Sie müssen einen komplett neuen Satz von Lagern erstellen, jedes davon verbunden mit dem betreffenden Konto.
-
-Schritte:
-
-
- * Heben Sie die Salden der Konten, die Sie zur Pflege des verfügbaren Lagerwertes verwenden, (Warenbestände/Anlagevermögen) durch eine Journalbuchung auf.
-
- * Da bereits angelegte Lager mit Lagertransaktionen verbunden sind, es aber keine verknüpften Buchungssätze gibt, können diese Lager nicht in einer ständigen Inventur genutzt werden. Sie müssen für zukünftige Lagertransaktionen neue Lager anlegen, die dann mit den zutreffenden Konten verknüpft sind. Wählen Sie bei der Erstellung neuer Lager eine Artikelgruppe unter der das Unterkonto für das Lager erstellt wird.
-
- * Erstellen Sie folgende Standardkonten für jede Firma:
-
- * Ware erhalten aber noch nicht abgerechnet
- * Lagerabgleichskonto
- * Aufwendungen in Bewertung enthalten
- * Kostenstelle
-
- * Aktivieren Sie die Ständige Inventur
-
-> Einstellungen > Rechnungswesen > Konteneinstellungen > Eine Buchung für jede Lagerbewegung erstellen
-
-
-
-* Erstellen Sie Lagerbuchungen (Materialübertrag) um verfügbare Lagerbestände von einem existierenden Lager auf ein neues Lager zu übertragen. Sobald im neuen Lager der Lagerbestand verfügbar wird, sollten Sie für zukünftige Transaktionen nur noch das neue Lager verwenden.
-
-Das System wird für bereits existierende Lagertransaktionen keine Buchungssätze erstellen, wenn sie vor der Aktivierung der Ständigen Inventur übertragen wurden, da die alten Lager nicht mit Konten verknüpft werden. Wenn Sie eine neue Transaktion mit einem alten Lager erstellen oder eine existierende Transaktion ändern, gibt es keine korrespondierenden Buchungssätze. Sie müssen Lager und Kontostände manuell über das Journal synchronisieren.
-
-> Anmerkung: Wenn Sie bereits das alte System der Ständigen Inventur nutzen, wird dieses automatisch deaktiviert. Sie müssen den Schritten oben folgen um es wieder zu aktivieren.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8f7dbc0a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,348 +0,0 @@
-
-# Ständige Inventur
-
-
-In der Ständigen Inventur erstellt das System Buchungen für jede Lagertransaktion, so dass das Lager und der Kontostand immer synchron bleiben. Der Kontostand wird für jedes Lager mit der zutreffenden Kontobezeichnung verbucht. Wenn das Lager gespeichert wird, erstellt das System automatisch eine Kontobezeichnung mit dem selben Namen wie das Lager. Da für jedes Lager ein Kontostand verwaltet wird, sollten Sie Lager auf Basis der in ihnen eingelagerten Artikel (Umlaufvermögen/Anlagevermögen) erstellen.
-
-Wenn Artikel in einem bestimmten Lager ankommen, erhöht sich der Stand des Vermögenskontos (das mit dem Lager verknüpft ist). Analog dazu wird ein Aufwand verbucht, wenn Sie Waren ausliefern, und der Stand des Vermögenskontos nimmt ab, basierend auf der Bewertung der entsprechenden Artikel.
-
-### Aktivierung
-
-1. Richten Sie die folgenden Standard-Konten für jede Firma ein:
- * Lagerwaren erhalten aber noch nicht abgerechnet
- * Lagerabgleichskonto
- * In der Bewertung enthaltene Kosten
- * Kostenstelle
-2. In der Ständigen Inventur verwaltet das System für jedes Lager einen eigenen Kontostand unter einer eigenen Kontobezeichnung. Um diese Kontobezeichnung zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu "Konto erstellen unter" in den Lagerstammdaten.
-3. Aktivieren Sie die Ständige Inventur.
-
-> Einstellungen > Rechnungswesen > Kontoeinstellungen > Eine Buchung für jede Lagerbewegung erstellen
-
----
-
-### Beispiel
-
-Wir nehmen folgenden Kontenplan und folgende Lagereinstellungen für Ihre Firma an:
-
-Kontenplan
-
- * Vermögen (Soll)
- * Umlaufvermögen
- * Forderungen
- * Jane Doe
- * Lagervermögenswerte
- * In Verkaufsstellen
- * Fertigerzeugnisse
- * In der Fertigung
- * Steuervermögenswerte
- * Umsatzsteuer (Vorsteuer)
- * Anlagevermögen
- * Anlagevermögen im Lager
- * Verbindlichkeiten (Haben)
- * Kurzfristige Verbindlichkeiten
- * Verbindlichkeiten aus Lieferungen und Leistungen
- * East Wind Inc.
- * Lagerverbindlichkeiten
- * Lagerware erhalten aber noch nicht abgerechnet
- * Steuerverbindlichkeiten
- * Dienstleistungssteuer
- * Erträge (Haben)
- * Direkte Erträge
- * Verkäufe
- * Aufwendungen (Soll)
- * Direkte Aufwendungen
- * Lageraufwendungen
- * Selbstkosten
- * In der Bewertung enthaltene Kosten
- * Bestandsveränderungen
- * Versandgebühren
- * Zoll
-
-#### Kontenkonfiguration des Lagers
-
-* In Verkaufsstellen
-* In der Fertigung
-* Fertigerzeugnisse
-* Anlagevermögen im Lager
-
-#### Kaufbeleg
-
-Nehmen wir an, Sie haben 10 Stück des Artikels "RM0001" zu 200€ und 5 Stück des Artikels "Tisch" zu **100€** vom Lieferanten "Arcu Vel Quam Fabricators" eingekauft. Im Folgenden finden Sie die Details des Kaufbelegs:
-
-**Supplier:** Arcu Vel Quam Fabricators
-
-**Artikel:**
-
-| Artikel | -Lager | -Menge | -Preis | -Gesamtmenge | -Wertansatz | -
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | -In Verkaufsstellen | -10 | -200 | -2000 | -2200 | -
| Tisch | -Anlagevermögen im Lager | -5 | -100 | -500 | -550 | -
Steuern: -
-| Konto | -Betrag | -Kategorie | -
|---|---|---|
| Versandgebühren | -100 | -Gesamtsumme und Bewertung | -
| MwSt | -120 | -Gesamtsumme | -
| Zoll | -150 | -Bewertung | -
Lagerbuch -
- -
-
-**Hauptbuch:**
-
-
-
-Um ein System der doppelten Buchhaltung zu erhalten, werden dadurch, dass sich der Kontensaldo durch den Kaufbeleg erhöht, die Konten "In Verkaufsstellen" und "Anlagevermögen im Lager" belastet und das temporäre Konto "Lagerware erhalten aber noch nicht abgerechnet" entlastet. Zum selben Zeitpunkt wird eine negative Aufwendung auf das Konto "In der Bewertung enthaltene Kosten" verbucht, um die Bewertung hinzuzufügen und um eine doppelte Aufwandsverbuchung zu vermeiden.
-
----
-
-### Eingangsrechnung
-
-Wenn eine Rechnung des Lieferanten für den oben angesprochenen Kaufbeleg eintrifft, wird hierzu eine Eingangsrechnung erstellt. Die Buchungen im Hauptbuch sind folgende:
-
-#### Hauptbuch
-
-
-
-Hier wird das Konto "Lagerware erhalten aber noch nicht bewertet" belastet und hebt den Effekt des Kaufbeleges auf.
-
-* * *
-
-### Lieferschein
-
-Nehmen wir an, dass Sie eine Kundenbestellung von "Utah Automation Services" über 5 Stück des Artikels "RM0001" zu 300€ haben. Im Folgenden sehen Sie die Details des Lieferscheins.
-
-**Kunde:** Utah Automation Services
-
-**Artikel:**
-
-| Artikel | -Lager | -Menge | -Preis | -Summe | -
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | -In Verkaufsstellen | -5 | -300 | -1500 | -
Steuern: -
-| Konto | -Menge | -
|---|---|
| Dienstleistungssteuer | -150 | -
| MwSt | -100 | -
-
-**Hauptbuch**
-
-
-
-Da der Artikel aus dem Lager "In Verkaufsstellen" geliefert wird, wird das Konto "In Verkaufsstellen" entlastet und ein Betrag in gleicher Höhe dem Aufwandskonto "Selbstkosten" belastet. Der belastete/entlastete Betrag ist gleich dem Gesamtwert (Einkaufskosten) des Verkaufsartikels. Und der Wert wird gemäß der bevorzugten Bewertungsmethode (FIFO/Gleitender Durchschnitt) oder den tatsächlichen Kosten eines serialisierten Artikels kalkuliert.
-
-
- In diesem Beispiel gehen wir davon aus, dass wir als Berwertungsmethode FIFO verwenden.
- Bewertungpreis = Einkaufpreis + In der Bewertung enthaltene Abgaben/Gebühren
- = 200 + (250 * (2000 / 2500) / 10)
- = 220
- Gesamtsumme der Bewertung = 220 * 5
- = 1100
-
-
-* * *
-
-### Ausgangsrechnung mit Lageraktualisierung
-
-Nehmen wir an, dass Sie zur obigen Bestellung keinen Lieferschein erstellt haben sondern direkt eine Ausgangsrechnung mit der Option "Lager aktualisieren" erstellt haben. Die Details der Ausgangsrechnung sind die gleichen wie bei obigem Lieferschein.
-
-**Lagerbuch**
-
-
-
-**Hauptbuch**
-
-
-
-Hier werden, im Gegensatz zu den normalen Buchungen für Rechnungen, die Konten "In Verkaufsstellen" und "Selbstkosten" basierend auf der Bewertung beeinflusst.
-
-* * *
-
-### Lagerbuchung (Materialschein)
-
-**Artikel:**
-
-| Artikel/th> - | Eingangslager | -Menge | -Preis | -Summe | -
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | -In den Verkaufsstellen | -50 | -220 | -11000 | -
-
-**Hauptbuch**
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-### Lagerbuchung (Materialanfrage)
-
-**Artikel:**
-
-| Artikel | -Ausgangslager | -Menge | -Preis | -Summe | -
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | -In den Verkaufsstellen | -10 | -220 | -2200 | -
-
-**Hauptbuch**
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-### Lagerbuchung (Materialübertrag)
-
-**Artikel:**
-
-| Artikel | -Ausgangslager | -Eingangslager | -Menge | -Preis | -Summe | -
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | -In den Verkaufsstellen | -Fertigung | -10 | -220 | -2200 | -
-
-**Hauptbuch**
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-coding.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-coding.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a8bf6795..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-coding.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-
-# Artikelkodierung
-
-
-Wenn Sie bereits einer ausgewachsenen Geschäftstätigkeit mit einer Anzahl an physischen Produkten nachgehen, haben Sie Ihre Artikel vielleicht schon kodifiziert. Wenn nicht, haben Sie die Wahl. Wir empfehlen Ihnen, Artikel zu kodieren, wenn Sie viele Produkte mit langen oder komplizierten Namen haben. Für den Fall, dass sie wenige Produkte mit kurzen Namen haben, übernimmt man vorzugsweise den Artikelnamen für den Artikelcode.
-
-Die Artikelkodierung war schon immer ein schwieriges Thema und es wurden hierzu schon Kriege geführt (kein Scherz!). Unserer Erfahrung nach ist das Arbeiten ohne Kodierung ein Alptraum, wenn Sie Artikel haben, die eine bestimmte Größe überschreiten.
-
-#### Vorteile
-
-* Standartisierter Weg, wie Dinge bezeichnet werden.
-* Geringere Wahrscheinlichkeit doppelter Einträge.
-* Eindeutige Bezeichnung.
-* Schnelle Möglichkeit einen ähnlichen Artikel zu finden.
-* Artikelnamen werden immer länger, wenn weitere Typen eingeführt werden. Codes sind kürzer.
-
-#### Nachteile
-
-* Sie müssen sich die Codes merken!
-* Für neue Teammitglieder schwerer nachzuvollziehen.
-* Sie müssen immer wieder neue Codes erstellen.
-
-#### Beispiel
-
-Sie sollten Sich eine einfache Anleitung / einen "Spickzettel" zurecht legen, um Ihre Artikel zu kodieren, anstatt sie einfach der Reihe nach zu numerieren. Jeder Buchstabe sollte eine Bedeutung haben. Hier ist ein Beispiel:
-
-Wenn Ihre Geschäftstätigkeit Holzmöbel umfasst, könnten Sie wie folgt kodieren:
-
-Artikel-Kodierungs-Übersicht (BEISPIEL)
-
-Die letzten Stellen können der Reihe nach vergeben sein. Wenn Sie sich also den Code "WM304" ansehen, dann wissen Sie, dass es sich um Holzleisten mit einer Länge unter 10cm handelt.
-
-#### Standardisierung
-
-Wenn mehr als eine Person Artikel benennt, kann sich die Art und Weise, wie bezeichnet wird, von Person zu Person unterscheiden. Manchmal vergisst sogar die gleiche Person wie sie einen Artikel bezeichnet hat und erstellt aus diesem Grund einen doppelten Eintrag, z. B. "Holzstück 3mm" und "3mm-Holzstück".
-
-#### Rationalisierung
-
-In der Praxis hat es sich als sinnvoll erwiesen, eine möglichst kleine Anzahl von Artikelvarianten zu haben, so dass möglichst wenig Lagerbestand existiert, die Lagerverwaltung einfacher ist, usw. Wenn Sie ein neues Produkt planen und Sie wissen wollen, ob Sie Rohmateriel oder ein Bauteil schon in anderen Produkten verwenden, helfen Ihnen die Artikelcodes dabei dies schnell herauszufinden.
-
-Wir glauben, dass Ihnen diese kleine Investition dabei helfen wird, Rationalisierungseffekte zu erzielen, wenn Ihre Geschäftstätigkeit zunimmt. Dennoch ist es natürlich in Ordnung, wenn Sie bei wenig Artikeln nicht kodieren.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-variants.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-variants.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5e0e5ed6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-variants.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Article Variants
-
-
-
-## 4.6.2 Artikelvarianten
-
-Eine Artikelvariante ist eine Version eines Artikels, die sich zum Beispiel durch eine andere Größe oder eine andere Farbe vom eigentlichen Artikel unterscheidet. Ohne Varianten müssten Sie die kleinen, mittleren und großen Versionen eines T-Shirts jeweils als eigenständigen Artikel anlegen. Artikelvarianten versetzen Sie in die Lage, kleine, mittlere und große Versionen des T-Shirts als Abwandlungen des selben Artikels zu verwalten.
-
-Um Artikelvarianten in ERPNext zu verwalten, erstellen Sie einen Artikel und aktivieren in den Artikeldaten den Punkt "Hat Varianten".
-
-Ab diesem Zeitpunkt wird der Artikel dann als "Vorlage" bezeichnet.
-
-Wenn Sie "Hat Varianten" auswählen, erscheint eine Tabelle. Hier spezifizieren Sie die Variantenattribute des Artikels. Für den Fall, dass das Attribut einen numerischen Wert hat, können Sie den Bereich und die Schrittweite angeben.
-
-> Hinweis: Sie können keine Transaktionen zu Vorlagen erstellen.
-
-Um aus einer Vorlage Artikelvarianten zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf "Varianten erstellen".
-
-Um mehr über Voreinstellungen zu Attributen zu erfahren, lesen Sie im Abschnitt "Artikelattribute" nach.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ad0b8359..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-
-# Artikel
-
-
-Ein Artikel ist ein Produkt oder eine Dienstleistung Ihres Unternehmens. Die Bezeichnung Artikel ist genauso anwendbar auf Ihre Kernprodukte wie auch auf Ihr Rohmaterial. Es kann ein Produkt oder eine Dienstleistung sein, welche Sie von Lieferanten kaufen/an Kunden verkaufen. ERPNext versetzt sie in die Lage alle Arten von Artikeln wie Rohmaterial, Unterbeauftragungen, Fertigprodukte, Artikelvarianten und Dienstleistungsartikel zu verwalten.
-ERPNext ist auf die artikelbezogene Verwaltung Ihrer Ver- und Einkäufe optimiert. Wenn Sie sich im Bereich Dienstleistungen befinden, können Sie für jede Dienstleistung, die Sie anbieten, einen eigenen Artikel erstellen. Die Artikelstammdaten zu vervollständigen ist für eine erfolgreiche Einführung von ERPNext ausschlaggebend.
-
-### Artikeleigenschaften
-
-* **Artikelname:** Artikelname ist der tatsächliche Name Ihres Artikels oder Ihrer Dienstleistung.
-* **Artikelcode:** Der Artikelcode ist eine Kurzform um Ihren Artikel zu beschreiben. Wenn Sie sehr wenig Artikel haben, ist es ratsam den Artikelnamen und den Artikelcode gleich zu halten. Das hilft neuen Nutzern dabei, Artikeldetails in allen Transaktionen zu erkennen und einzugeben. Für den Fall, dass Sie sehr viele Artikel mit langen Namen haben, und die Anzahl in die Hunderte geht, ist es ratsam, zu kodieren. Um die Benamung der Artikelcodes zu verstehen, lesen Sie bitte den Bereich "Artikel-Kodierung".
-* **Artikelgruppe:** Artikelgruppe wird verwendet um einen Artikel nach verschiedenen Kriterien zu kategorisieren, wie zum Beispiel Produkte, Rohmaterial, Dienstleistungen, Unterbeauftragungen, Verbrauchsgüter oder alle Artikelgruppen. Erstellen Sie Ihre Standard-Artikelgruppen-Liste unter Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Artikelgruppenstruktur und stellen Sie diese Option vorein, während Sie die Details zu Ihren neuen Artikeln unter Artikelgruppe eingeben.
-* **Standardmaßeinheit:** Das ist die Standardmaßeinheit, die in Verbindung mit Ihrem Produkt verwendet wird. Hierbei kann es sich um Stückzahl, kg, Meter, usw. handeln. Sie können alle Standardmaßeinheiten, die Ihr Produkt benötigt, unter Einstellungen > Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Maßeinheit ablegen. Für das Eingeben von neuen Artikeln kann eine Voreinstellung getroffen werden, indem man % drückt um eine Popup-Liste der Standardmaßeinheiten zu erhalten.
-* **Marke:** Wenn Sie mehr als eine Marke haben, speichern Sie diese bitte unter Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Marke und stellen Sie diese vorein, während Sie neue Artikel erstellen.
-* **Variante:** Eine Artikelvariante ist eine Abwandlung eines Artikels. Um mehr über die Verwaltung von Varianten zu erfahren, lesen Sie bitte "Artikelvarianten".
-
-### Ein Bild hochladen
-Um für Ihr Icon ein Bild hochzuladen, das in allen Transaktionen erscheint, speichern Sie bitte das teilweise ausgefüllte Formular. Nur dann, wenn die Datei abgespeichert wurde, ist die "Hochladen"-Schaltfläche über dem Bildsymbol verwendbar. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol und laden Sie das Bild hoch.
-
-### Lagerbestand: Lager- und Bestandseinstellungen
-
-In ERPNext können Sie verschiedene Typen von Lagern einstellen um Ihre unterschiedlichen Artikel zu lagern. Die Auswahl kann aufgrund der Artikeltypen getroffen werden. Das kann ein Artikel des Anlagevermögens sein, ein Lagerartikel oder auch ein Fertigungsartikel.
-
-* **Lagerartikel:** Wenn Sie Lagerartikel dieses Typs in Ihrem Lagerbestand verwalten, erzeugt ERPNext für jede Transaktion dieses Artikels eine Buchung im Lagerhauptbuch.
-* **Standardlager:** Das ist das Lager, welches automatisch bei Ihren Transaktionen ausgewählt wird.
-* **Erlaubter Prozentsatz:** Das ist der Prozentsatz der angibt, wieviel Sie bei einem Artikel überberechnen oder überliefern dürfen. Wenn er nicht vorgegeben ist, wird er aus den globalen Einstellungen übernommen.
-* **Bewertungsmethode:** Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten den Lagerbestand zu bewerten. FIFO (first in - first out) und Gleitender Durchschnitt. Um dieses Thema besser zu verstehen, lesen Sie bitte "Artikelbewertung, FIFO und Gleitender Durchschnitt".
-
-### Serialisierter und chargenbezogener Lagerbestand
-
-Die Nummerierungen helfen dabei einzelne Artikel oder Chargen individuell nachzuverfolgen. Ebenso können Garantieleistungen und Rückläufe nachverfolgt werden. Für den Fall, dass ein bestimmter Artikel von einem Lieferanten zurück gerufen wird, hilft die Nummer dabei, einzelne Artikel nachzuverfolgen. Das Nummerierungssystem verwaltet weiterhin das Verfalldatum. Bitte beachten Sie, dass Sie Ihre Artikel nicht serialisieren müssen, wenn Sie die Artikel zu Tausenden verkaufen, und sie sehr klein sind, wie z. B. Stifte oder Radiergummis. In der ERPNext-Software müssen Sie die Seriennummer bei bestimmten Buchungen mit angeben. Um Seriennummern zu erstellen, müssen Sie die Seriennummern per Hand in Ihren Buchungen eintragen. Wenn es sich nicht um ein großes und haltbares Verbrauchsgut handelt, es keine Garantie hat und die Möglichkeit eines Rückrufs äußerst gering ist, sollten Sie eine Seriennummerierung vermeiden.
-
-> Wichtig: Sobald Sie einen Artikel als serialisiert oder als Charge oder beides markiert haben, können Sie das nicht mehr ändern, nachdem Sie eine Buchung erstellt haben.
-
-### Diskussion zu serialisiertem Lagerbestand
-
-### Automatische Nachbestellung
-
-* **Meldebestand** bezeichnet eine definierte Menge an Artikeln im Lager, bei der nachbestellt wird.
-* **Nachbestellmenge** bezeichnet die Menge an Artikeln die bestellt werden muss, um einen bestimmtem Lagerbestand zu erreichen.
-* **Mindestbestellmenge** ist die kleinstmögliche Menge, für die eine Materialanfrage / eine Einkaufsbestellung ausgelöst werden kann.
-
-### Artikelsteuer
-
-Diese Einstellungen werden nur dann benötigt, wenn ein bestimmter Artikel einer anderen Besteuerung unterliegt als derjenigen, die im Standard-Steuerkonto hinterlegt ist. Beispiel: Wenn Sie ein Steuerkonto "Umsatzsteuer 19%" haben, und der Artikel, um den es sich dreht, von der Steuer ausgenommen ist, dann wählen Sie "Umsatzsteuer 19%" in der ersten Spalte und stellen als Steuersatz in der zweiten Spalte "0" ein.
-
-Lesen Sie im Abschnitt "Steuern einstellen" weiter, wenn Sie mehr Informationen wünschen.
-
-## Prüfkriterien
-
-* **Kontrolle erforderlich:** Wenn für einen Artikel eine Wareneingangskontrolle (zum Zeitpunkt der Anlieferung durch den Lieferanten) zwingend erforderlich ist, aktivieren Sie "Ja" bei den Einstellungen für "Prüfung erforderlich". Das Sytem stellt sicher, dass eine Qualitätskontrolle vorbereitet und durchgeführt wird bevor ein Kaufbeleg übertragen wird.
-* **Kontrollkriterien:** Wenn eine Qualitätsprüfung für den Artikel vorbereitet wird, dann wird die Vorlage für die Kriterien automatisch in der Tabelle Qualitätskontrolle aktualisiert. Beispiele für Kriterien sind: Gewicht, Länge, Oberfläche usw.
-
-## Einkaufsdetails
-* **Lieferzeit in Tagen:** Die Lieferzeit in Tagen bezeichnet die Anzahl der Tage die benötigt werden bis der Artikel das Lager erreicht.
-* **Standard-Aufwandskonto:** Dies ist das Konto auf dem die Kosten für den Artikel verzeichnet werden.
-* **Standard-Einkaufskostenstelle:** Sie wird verwendet um die Kosten für den Artikel nachzuverfolgen.
-
-## Verkausdetails
-* **Standard-Ertragskonto:** Das hier gewählte Ertragskonto wird automatisch mit der Ausgangsrechung für diesen Artikel verknüpft.
-* **Standard-Vertriebskostenstelle:** Die hier gewählte Kostenstelle wird automatisch mit der Ausgangsrechnung für diesen Artikel verknüpft.
-
-## Fertigung und Webseite
-
-Lesen Sie in den Abschnitten "Fertigung" und "Webseite" nach, um weitere Informationen zu diesen Themen zu erhalten.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index f2fbce0c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit
-auto-creation-of-material-request
-creating-depreciation-for-item
-is-stock-item-field-frozen-in-item-master
-manage-rejected-finished-goods-items
-managing-assets
-managing-batch-wise-inventory
-managing-fractions-in-uom
-opening-stock-balance-entry-for-the-serialized-and-batch-item
-repack-entry
-serial-no-naming
-stock-entry-purpose
-stock-level-report
-track-items-using-barcode
-using-batch-feature-in-stock-entry
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/batch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/batch.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f6514e92..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/batch.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-# Charge
-
-
-Die Funktion Chargenverwaltung in ERPNext versetzt Sie in die Lage, verschiedene Einheiten eines Artikels zu gruppieren und ihnen eine einzigartige Nummer, die man Chargennummer nennt, zuzuweisen.
-
-Die Vorgehensweise, das Lager chargenbasiert zu verwalten, wird hauptsächlich in der pharmazeutischen Industrie angewandt. Medikamenten wird hier chargenbasiert eine eindeutige ID zugewiesen. Das hilft dabei, das Verfallsdatum der in einer bestimmten Charge produzierten Mengen aktuell zu halten und nachzuvollziehen.
-
-> Anmerkung: Um einen Artikel als Chargenartikel zu kennzeichnen, muss in den Artikelstammdaten das Feld "Hat Chargennummer" markiert werden.
-
-Bei jeder für einen Chargenartikel generierten Lagertransaktion (Kaufbeleg, Lieferschein, POS-Rechnung) sollten Sie die Chargennummer des Artikels mit angeben. Um eine neue Chargennummer für einen Artikel zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Charge > Neu
-
-Die Chargenstammdaten werden vor der Ausfertigung des Kaufbelegs erstellt. Somit erstellen Sie immer dann, wenn für einen Chargenartikel ein Kaufbeleg oder ein Produktionsauftrag ausgegeben werden, zuerst die Chargennummer des Artikels und wählen diese dann im Kaufbeleg oder im Produktionsauftrag aus.
-
-
-
-> Anmerkung: Bei Lagertransaktionen werden die Chargen-IDs basierend auf dem Code, dem Lager, dem Verfallsdatum der Charge (verglichen mit dem Veröffentlichungsdatum der Transaktion) und der aktuellen Menge im Lager gefiltert.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/delivery-note.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/delivery-note.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a335a168..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/delivery-note.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lieferschein
-
-
-Ein Lieferschein wird dann erstellt, wenn ein Versand vom Lager der Firma statt findet.
-
-Normalerweise wird eine Kopie des Lieferscheins der Sendung beigelegt. Der Lieferschein beinhaltet die Auflistung der Artikel, die versendet werden, und aktualisiert den Lagerbestand.
-
-Die Buchung zum Lieferschein ist derjenigen zum Kaufbeleg sehr ähnlich. Sie können einen neuen Lieferschein erstellen über:
-
-> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Lieferschein > Neu
-
-oder aber über eine "übertragene" Kundenbestellung (die noch nicht versandt wurde) indem Sie auf "Lieferschein erstellen" klicken.
-
-
-
-Sie können die Details auch aus einer noch nicht gelieferten Kundenbestellung "herausziehen".
-
-Sie werden bemerken, dass alle Informationen über nicht gelieferte Artikel und andere Details aus der Kundenbestellung übernommen werden.
-
-### Pakete oder Artikel mit Produkt-Bundles versenden
-
-Wenn Sie Artikel, die ein [Produkt-Bundle](/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.html), ERPNext will automatically beinhalten, versenden, erstellt Ihnen ERPNext automatisch eine Tabelle "Packliste" basierend auf den Unterartikeln dieses Artikels.
-
-Wenn Ihre Artikel serialisiert sind, dann müssen Sie für Artikel vom Typ Produkt-Bundle die Seriennummer in der Tabelle "Packliste" aktualisieren.
-
-### Artikel für Containerversand verpacken
-
-Wenn Sie per Containerversand oder nach Gewicht versenden, können Sie die Packliste verwenden um Ihren Lieferschein in kleinere Einheiten aufzuteilen. Um eine Packliste zu erstellen gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Lagerbestand > Werkzeuge > Packzettel > Neu
-
-Sie können für Ihren Lieferschein mehrere Packlisten erstellen und ERPNext stellt sicher dass die Mengenangaben in der Packliste nicht die Mengen im Lieferschein übersteigen.
-
----
-
-### Frage: Wie druckt man ohne die Angabe der Stückzahl/Menge aus?
-
-Wenn Sie Ihre Lieferscheine ohne Mengenangabe ausdrucken wollen (das ist dann sinnvoll, wenn Sie Artikel mit hohem Wert versenden), kreuzen Sie "Ohne Mengenangabe ausdrucken" im Bereich "Weitere Informationen" an.
-
-### Frage: Was passiert, wenn der Lieferschein "übertragen" wurde?
-
-Für jeden Artikel wird eine Buchung im Lagerhauptbuch erstellt und der Lagerbestand wird aktualisiert. Ebenfalls wird die Ausstehende Menge im Kundenauftrag (sofern zutreffend) aktualisiert.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 12e7eb86..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lager
-
-
-Die meisten kleinen Unternehmen, die mit physischen Waren handeln, investieren einen großen Teil ihres Kapitals in Lagerbestände.
-
-### Materialfluß
-
-Es gibt drei Haupttypen von Buchungen:
-
-* Kaufbeleg: Artikel die das Unternehmen von Lieferanten aufgrund einer Einkaufsbestellung erhält.
-* Lagerbuchung: Artikel, die von einem Lager in ein anderes Lager übertragen werden.
-* Lieferschein: Artikel, die an Kunden versandt wurden.
-
-### Wie verfolgt ERPNext Lagerbewegungen und Lagerstände?
-
-Das Lager abzubilden bedeutet nicht nur, Mengen zu addieren und subtrahieren. Schwierigkeiten treten dann auf, wenn:
-
-* Zurückdatierte (vergangene) Buchungen getätigt/geändert werden: Dies wirkt sich auf zukünftige Lagerstände aus und könnte zu negativen Beständen führen.
-* Das Lager basierend auf der FIFO(Firts-in-first-out)-Methode bewertet werden soll: ERPNext benötigt eine Reihenfolge aller Transaktionen, um den exakten Wert Ihrer Artikel ermitteln zu können.
-* Lagerberichte zu einem beliebigen Zeitpunkt in der Vergangenheit benötigt werden: Wenn Sie für Artikel X zu einem Zeitpunkt Y die Menge/den Wert in ihrem Lager nachvollziehen müssen.
-
-Um dies umzusetzen, sammelt ERPNext alle Bestandstransaktionen in einer Tabelle, die als Lagerhauptbuch bezeichnet wird. Alle Kaufbelege, Lagerbuchungen und Lieferscheine aktualisieren diese Tabelle.
-
-### Themen
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index b89abe10..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-material-request
-stock-entry
-delivery-note
-purchase-receipt
-installation-note
-item
-warehouse
-serial-no
-batch
-projected-quantity
-accounting-of-inventory-stock
-tools
-setup
-sales-return
-purchase-return
-articles
-opening-stock
-stock-how-to
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/installation-note.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/installation-note.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3b04eeb7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/installation-note.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Installationshinweis
-
-
-Sie können einen Installationshinweis dazu benutzen, die Installation eines Artikels mit Seriennummer aufzuzeichnen.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/material-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/material-request.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b1577a6e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/material-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-# Materialanfrage
-
-
-Eine Materialanfrage ist ein einfaches Dokument, welches einen Bedarf an Artikeln (Produkte oder Dienstleistungen) für einen bestimmten Zweck erfasst.
-
-
-
-Um eine Materialanfrage manuell zu erstellen, gehen Sie bitte zu:
-
-> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Materialanfrage > Neu
-
-### Materialanfrage erstellen
-
-
-
-Eine Materialanfrage kann auf folgende Arten erstellt werden:
-
-* Automatisch aus einem Kundenauftrag heraus.
-* Automatisch, wenn die projizierte Menge eines Artikels in den Lagern einen bestimmten Bestand erreicht.
-* Automatisch aus einer Stückliste heraus, wenn Sie das Modul "Produktionsplanung" benutzen, um Ihre Fertigungsaktivitäten zu planen.
-* Wenn Ihre Artikel Bestandsposten sind, müssen Sie überdies das Lager angeben, auf welches diese Artikel geliefert werden sollen. Das hilft dabei die [projizierte Menge](/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.html) für diesen Artikel im Auge zu behalten.
-
-Es gibt folgende Typen von Materialanfragen:
-
-* Einkauf - Wenn das angefragte Material eingekauft werden muss.
-* Materialtransfer - Wenn das angefragte Material von einem Lager auf ein anderes Lager übertragen werden muss.
-* Materialausgabe - Wenn das angefragte Material ausgegeben werden soll.
-
-> Info: Eine Materialanfrage ist nicht zwingend erforderlich. Sie ist ideal, wenn Sie ihren Einkauf zentralisiert haben, damit Sie diese Anfragen von verschiedenen Niederlassungen sammeln können.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4ade5313..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-# Projizierte Menge
-
-
-Die projizierte Menge ist der Lagerbestand der für einen bestimmten Artikel vorhergesagt wird, basierend auf dem aktuellen Lagerbestand und anderen Bedarfen. Es handelt sich dabei um den Bruttobestand und berücksichtig Angebot und Nachfrage aus der Vergangenheit, die mit in den Planungsprozess einbezogen werden.
-
-Der projizierte Lagerbestand wird vom Planungssystem verwendet um den Nachbestellpunkt darzustellen und die Nachbestellmenge festzulegen. Die projizierte Menge wird vom Planungssystem verwendet um Sicherheitsbestände zu markieren. Diese Stände werden aufrechterhalten um unerwartete Nachfragemengen abfedern zu können.
-
-Eine strikte Kontrolle des projizierten Lagerbestandes ist entscheidend um Engpässe vorherzusagen und die richtige Bestellmenge kalkulieren zu können.
-
-
-
-> Projizierte Menge = Momentan vorhandene Menge + Geplante Menge + Angefragte Menge + Bestellte Menge - Reservierte Menge
-
-* **Momentan vorhande Menge:** Menge die im Lager verfügbar ist.
-* **Geplante Menge:** Menge für die ein Fertigungsauftrag ausgegeben wurde, der aber noch auf die Fertigung wartet.
-* **Angefragte Menge:** Menge die vom Einkauf angefragt, aber noch nicht bestellt wurde.
-* **Bestellte Menge:** Bei Lieferanten bestellte Menge, die aber noch nicht im Lager eingetroffen ist.
-* **Reservierte Menge:** Von Kunden bestellte Menge, die noch nicht ausgeliefert wurde.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-receipt.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-receipt.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e5ddc6f3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-receipt.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-
-# Kaufbeleg
-
-
-Kaufbelege werden erstellt, wenn Sie Material von einem Lieferanten annehmen, normalerweise aufgrund einer Einkaufsbestellung.
-
-Sie können Kaufbelege auch direkt annehmen (Setzen Sie hierfür "Kaufbeleg notwendig" in den Einkaufs-Einstellungen auf "Nein").
-
-Sie können einen Kaufbeleg direkt erstellen über:
-
-> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Kaufbeleg > Neu
-
-oder aus einer "übertragenen" Einkaufsbestellung heraus, in dem Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Kaufbeleg erstellen" klicken.
-
-
-
-### Ausschuss
-
-Im Kaufbeleg wird erwartet, dass Sie eingeben ob das gesamte erhaltene Material eine annehmbare Qualität aufweist (für den Fall, dass eine Wareneingangsprüfung statt findet). Wenn Sie Beanstandungen haben, müssen Sie die Spalte "Menge Ausschuss" in der Tabelle der Artikel aktualisieren.
-
-Wenn Sie aussortieren, müssen Sie ein Ausschusslager angeben, mit dem Sie angeben, wo Sie die aussortierten Artikel lagern.
-
-### Qualitätsprüfung
-
-Wenn für bestimmte Artikel eine Qualitätsprüfungen zwingend erforderlich sind (wenn Sie das z. B. so in den Artikelstammdaten angegeben haben), müssen Sie die Spalte Qualitätsprüfungsnummer (QA Nr) aktualisieren. Das System erlaubt Ihnen ein "Übertragen" des Kaufbelegs nur dann, wenn Sie die Qualitätsprüfungsnummer aktualisieren.
-
-### Umwandlung von Standardmaßeinheiten
-
-Wenn die Standardmaßeinheit der Einkaufsbestellung für einen Artikel nicht gleich derjenigen des Lagers ist, müssen Sie den Standardmaßeinheit-Umrechnungsfaktor angeben.
-
-### Währungsumrechnung
-
-Da sich der eingegangene Artikel auf den Wert des Lagerbestandes auswirkt, ist es wichtig den Wert des Artikels in Ihre Basiswährung umzurechnen, wenn Sie ihn in einer anderen Währung bestellt haben. Sie müssen (sofern zutreffend) einen Währungsumrechnungsfaktor eingeben.
-
-### Steuern und Bewertung
-
-Einige Ihrer Steuern und Gebühren können sich auf den Wert Ihres Artikels auswirken. Zum Beispiel: Eine Steuer wird möglicherweise nicht zum Wert Ihres Artikels hinzugerechnet, weil Sie beim Verkauf des Artikels die Steuer aufrechnen müssen. Aus diesem Grund sollten Sie sicher stellen, dass in der Tabelle "Steuern und Gebühren" alle Steuern für eine angemessene Bewertung korrekt eingetragen sind
-
-### Seriennummern und Chargen
-
-Wenn Ihr Artiel serialisiert ist oder als Charge verwaltet wird, müssen Sie die Seriennummer und die Charge in der Artikeltabelle eingeben. Sie dürfen verschiedene Seriennummern in eine Zeile eingeben (jede in ein gesondertes Feld) und Sie müssen dieselbe Anzahl an Seriennummern eingeben wie es Artikel gibt. Ebenfalls müssen Sie die Chargennummer jeweils in ein gesondertes Feld eingeben.
-
----
-
-### Was passiert, wenn der Kaufbeleg "übertragen" wurde?
-
-Für jeden Artikel wird eine Buchung im Lagerhauptbuch vorgenommen. Diese fügt dem Lager die akzeptierte Menge des Artikels zu. Wenn Sie Ausschuss haben, wird für jeden Ausschuss eine Buchung im Lagerhauptbuch erstellt. Die "Offene Menge" wird in der Einkaufsbestellung verzeichnet.
-
----
-
-### Wie erhöht man den Wert eines Artikels nach Verbuchung des Kaufbelegs?
-
-Manchmal weis man bestimmte Aufwendungen, die den Wert eines eingekauften Artikels erhöhen, erst nach einiger Zeit. Ein häufiges Beispiel ist folgendes: Wenn Sie Artikel importieren wissen Sie den Zollbetrag erst dann, wenn Ihnen der Abwicklungs-Agent eine Rechnung schickt. Wenn Sie diese Kosten den gekauften Artikeln hinzufügen wollen, müssem Sie den Einstandskosten-Assistenten benutzen. Warum Einstandskosten? Weil sie die Gebühren beinhalten, die Sie bezahlt haben, wenn die Ware in Ihren Besitz gelangt.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-return.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-return.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 82d32f6a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-return.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lieferantenreklamation
-
-
-In ERPNext gibt es eine Option für Produkte, die zurück zum Lieferanten geschickt werden müssen. Die Gründe dafür können vielfältig sein, z. B. defekte Waren, nicht ausreichende Qualität, der Käufer braucht die Ware nicht (mehr), usw.
-
-Sie können eine Lieferantenreklamation erstellen indem Sie ganz einfach einen Kaufbeleg mit negativer Menge erstellen.
-
-Öffnen Sie hierzu zuerst die ursprüngliche Eingangsrechnung zu der der Lieferant die Artikel geliefert hat.
-
-
-
-Klicken Sie dann auf "Lieferantenreklamation erstellen", dies öffnet einen neuen Kaufbeleg bei dem "Ist Reklamation" markiert ist, und bei dem die Artikel mit negativer Menge aufgeführt sind.
-
-
-
-Bei der Ausgabe eines Reklamations-Kaufbelegs vermindert das System die Menge des Artikels auf dem entsprechenden Lager. Um einen korrekten Lagerwert zu erhalten, verändert sich der Lagersaldo entsprechend dem Einkaufspreis des zurückgesendeten Artikels.
-
-
-
-Wenn die Ständige Inventur aktiviert wurde, verbucht das System weiterhin Buchungssätze zum Lagerkonto um den Lagersaldo mit dem Lagerbestand des Lagerbuchs zu synchronisieren.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/sales-return.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/sales-return.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ddd87afb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/sales-return.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-# Kundenreklamationen
-
-
-Dass verkaufte Produkte zurück gesendet werden ist in der Wirtschaft üblich. Gründe für die Rücksendung durch den Kunden sind Qualitätsmängel, verspätete Lieferung oder auch anderes.
-
-In ERPNext können Sie eine Kundenreklamation erstellen, indem Sie ganz einfach einen Lieferschein/eine Ausgangsrechnung mit negativer Menge erstellen.
-
-Öffnen Sie dazu zuerst den Lieferschein/die Ausgangsrechnung zu dem/der der Kunde einen Artikel zurück sendet.
-
-
-
-Klicken Sie dann auf "Kundenreklamation erstellen", das öffnet einen neuen Lieferschein, bei dem "Ist Reklamation" aktiviert ist, und die Artikel und Steuern mit negativem Betrag angezeigt werden.
-Sie können die Reklamation auch über die Originalausgangsrechnung erstellen. Um Material mit einer Gutschrift zurück zu geben, markieren Sie die Option "Lager aktualisieren" in der Reklamationsrechnung.
-
-
-
-Bei der Ausgabe eines Rücksendelieferscheins / einer Reklamationsrechnung erhöht das System den Lagerbestand im entsprechenden Lager. Um den richtigen Lagerwert zu erhalten erhöht sich der Lagerbestand um den Wert des ursprünglichen Einkaufspreises des zurückgeschickten Artikels.
-
-
-
-Für den Fall einer Reklamationsrechnung erhält das Kundenkonto eine Gutschrift und die damit verknüpften Konten für Erträge und Steuern werden belastet.
-Wenn die ständige Inventur aktiviert ist, erstellt das System auch Buchungen für das Lagerkonto um den Kontostand des Lagers mit dem Lagerbuch zu synchronisieren.
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/serial-no.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/serial-no.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 405783cc..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/serial-no.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-# Seriennummer
-
-
-Wie bereits im Abschnitt **Artikel** besprochen, wird ein Datensatz **Seriennummer** (S/N) für jede Menge eines Artikels vorgehalten, wenn ein **Artikel serialisiert** wird. Diese Information ist hilfreich um den Standort der Seriennummer nachzuvollziehen, wenn es um Garantiethemen geht und um Informationen zur Lebensdauer (Verfallsdatum).
-
-**Seriennummern** sind auch dann nützlich, wenn es darum geht, das Anlagevermögen zu verwalten. Zudem können **Wartungspläne** unter Zuhilfenahme von Seriennummern erstellt werden um Wartungsarbeiten für Anlagen zu planen und zu terminieren (sofern sie Wartung benötigen).
-
-Sie können auch nachvollziehen von welchem **Lieferanten** Sie eine bestimmte **Seriennummer** gekauft haben und welchem **Kunden** Sie diese verkauft haben. Der Status der **Seriennummer** verrät Ihnen den aktuellen Lagerbestands-Status.
-
-Wenn Ihr Artikel serialisiert ist, müssen Sie die Seriennummern in der entsprechenden Spalte eintragen, jede in eine neue Zeile. Sie können einzelne Einheiten von serialisierten Artikeln über die Seriennummern verwalten.
-
-### Seriennummern und Lagerbestand
-
-Der Lagerbestand eines Artikels kann nur dann beeinflusst werden, wenn die Seriennummer mit Hilfe einer Lagertransaktion (Lagerbuchung, Kaufbeleg, Lieferschein, Ausgangsrechnung) übertragen wird. Wenn eine neue Seriennummer direkt erstellt wird, kann der Lagerort nicht eingestellt werden.
-
-
-
-* Der Status wird aufgrund der Lagerbuchung eingestellt.
-* Nur Seriennummern mit dem Status "Verfügbar" können geliefert werden.
-* Seriennummern können automatisch aus einer Lagerbuchung oder aus einem Kaufbeleg heraus erstellt werden. Wenn Sie "Seriennummer" in der Spalte "Seriennummer" aktivieren, werden diese Seriennummern automatisch erstellt.
-* Wenn in den Artikelstammdaten "Hat Seriennummer" aktiviert wird, können Sie die Spalte "Seriennummer" in der Lagerbuchung/im Kaufbeleg leer lassen und die Seriennummern werden automatisch aus dieser Serie heraus erstellt.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b617cfbe..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Einrichtung
-
-
-### Themen
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index b21c4f92..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-stock-settings
-item-group
-item-attribute
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-attribute.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fbcc9bf9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-# Artikelattribute
-
-
-Sie können Attribute und Attributwerte für Ihre Artikelvarianten hier auswählen.
-
-
-
-### Nicht-numerische Attribute
-
-* Für nicht-numerische Attribute definieren Sie Attributwerte und deren Abkürzungen in der Tabelle Attributwerte.
-
-
-
-### Numerische Attribute
-
-* Wenn Ihr Attribut numerisch ist, wählen Sie numerische Werte.
-* Geben Sie den Bereich an und die Schrittweite.
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-group.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f70f7e58..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Artikelgruppe
-
-
-Die Artikelgruppe ist die Klassifikationskategorie. Ordnen Sie ein Produkt abhängig von seiner Art in einen entsprechenden Bereich ein. Wenn das Produkt dienstleistungsorientiert ist, ordnen Sie es unter dem Hauptpunkt Dienstleistung ein. Wenn das Produkt als Rohmaterial verwendet wird, müssen Sie es in der Kategorie Rohmaterial einordnen. Für den Fall, dass es sich bei dem Produkt um reine Handelsware handelt, können Sie es im Bereich Handelsware einordnen.
-
-
-
-### Eine Artikelgruppe erstellen
-
-* Wählen Sie eine Artikelgruppe aus unter der Sie eine Artikelgruppe erstellen wollen.
-* Klicken Sie auf "Unterpunkt hinzufügen".
-
-
-
-### Eine Artikelgruppe löschen
-* Wählen Sie die zu löschende Artikelgruppe aus.
-* Klicken Sie auf "Löschen"
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/stock-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 88ec20f8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lagereinstellungen
-
-
-Sie können Standardeinstellungen für Ihre mit dem Lager verbundenen Transaktionen hier voreinstellen.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/stock-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/stock-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1288d0b5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/stock-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lagerbuchung
-
-
-Eine Lagerbuchung ist ein einfaches Dokument, welches Sie Lagerbewegungen aus einem Lager heraus, in ein Lager hinein oder zwischen Lagern aufzeichnen lässt.
-
-Wenn Sie eine Lagerbuchung erstellen möchten, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Lagerbuchung > Neu
-
-
-
-Lagerbuchungen können aus folgenden Gründen erstellt werden:
-
-* Materialentnahme - Wenn das Material ausgegeben wird (ausgehendes Material).
-* Materialannahme - Wenn das Material angenommen wird (eingehendes Material).
-* Materialübertrag - Wenn das Material von einem Lager in ein anders Lager übertragen wird.
-* Materialübertrag für Herstellung - Wann das Material in den Fertigungsprozess übertragen wird.
-* Herstellung - Wenn das Material von einem Fertigungs-/Produktionsarbeitsgang empfangen wird.
-* Umpacken - Wenn der/die Originalartikel zu einem neuen Artikel verpackt wird/werden.
-* Zulieferer - Wenn das Material aufgrund einer Untervergabe ausgegeben wird.
-
-In einer Lagerbuchung müssen Sie die Artikelliste mit all Ihren Transaktionen aktualisieren. Für jede Zeile müssen Sie ein Ausgangslager oder ein Eingangslager oder beides eingeben (wenn Sie eine Bewegung erfassen).
-
-#### Zusätzliche Kosten
-
-Wenn die Lagerbuchung eine Eingangsbuchung ist, d. h. wenn ein beliebiger Artikel an einem Ziellager angenommen wird, können Sie zusätzliche Kosten erfassen (wie Versandgebühren, Zollgebühren, Betriebskosten, usw.), die mit dem Prozess verbunden sind. Die Zusatzkosten werden berücksichtigt, um den Wert des Artikels zu kalkulieren.
-
-Um Zusatzkosten hinzuzufügen, geben Sie die Beschreibung und den Betrag der Kosten in die Tabelle Zusatzkosten ein.
-
-
-
-Die hinzugefügten Zusatzkosten werden basierend auf dem Grundwert der Artikel proportional auf die erhaltenen Artikel verteilt. Dann werden die verteilten Zusatzkosten zum Grundpreis hinzugerechnet, um den Wert neu zu berechnen.
-
-
-
-Wenn die laufende Inventur aktiviert ist, werden Zusatzkosten auf das Konto "Aufwendungen im Wert beinhaltet" gebucht.
-
-
-> Hinweis: Um den Lagerbestand über eine Tabellenkalkulation zu aktualisieren, bitte unter Lagerabgleich nachlesen.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 15cf85d4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Werkzeuge
-
-
-### Themen
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 3aca9b75..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-packing-slip
-quality-inspection
-landed-cost-voucher
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7ca73ab0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-
-# Einstandskostenbeleg
-
-
-Die Einstandskosten sind der Gesamtbetrag aller Kosten eines Produktes bis es die Tür des Käufers erreicht. Die Einstandskosten umfassen die Originalkosten des Produktes, alle Versandkosten, Zölle, Steuern, Versicherung und Gebühren für Währungsumrechung usw. Es kann sein, dass nicht in jeder Sendung alle diese Komponenten anwendbar sind, aber die zutreffenden Komponenten müssen als Teil der Einstandskosten berücksichtigt werden.
-
-> Um Einstandskosten besser verstehen zu können, lassen Sie uns ein Beispiel aus dem täglichen Leben begutachten. Sie müssen eine neue Waschmaschine für Ihre Wohnung kaufen. Bevor Sie den tatsächlichen Kauf tätigen sehen Sie sich normalerweise ein wenig um, um den besten Preis heraus zu finden. In diesem Prozess haben Sie sicherlich schon oft ein besseres Angebot von einem Geschäft gefunden, das aber weit weg ist. Deshalb sollten Sie also auch die Versandkosten berücksichtigen, wenn Sie bei diesem Geschäft kaufen. Die Gesamtkosten inklusive der Transportkosten könnten höher liegen als der Preis, den Sie im nahegelegenen Laden erhalten. In diesem Fall werden Sie sich wahrscheinlich für den nähesten Laden entscheiden, da die Einstandskosten des Artikels im nahegelegenen Geschäft günstiger sind.
-
-In ähnlicher Art und Weise, ist es sehr wichtig Einstandskosten eines Artikels/Produkts zu identifizieren, weil es dabei hilft den Verkaufspreis dieses Artikels zu bestimmen und sich auf die Profitabilität des Unternehmens auswirkt. Folglich sollten alle zutreffenden Einstandskosten in der Artikelbewertung mit einfliessen.
-
-In Bezugnahme auf die [Third-Party Logistikstudie](http://www.3plstudy.com/) gaben nur 45% der Befragten an, dass Sie die Einstandskosten intensiv nutzen. Der Hauptgrund, warum die Einstandskosten nicht berücksichtigt werden, sind, dass die notwendigen Daten nicht verfügbar sind (49%), es an passenden Werkzeugen fehlt (48%), nicht ausreichend Zeit zur Verfügung steht (31%) und dass nicht klar ist, wie die Einstandskosten behandelt werden sollen (27%).
-
-### Einstandskosten über den Kaufbeleg
-
-In ERPNext können Sie die mit den Einstandskosten verbundenen Abgaben über die Tabelle "Steuern und Abgaben" hinzufügen, wenn Sie einen Kaufbeleg erstellen. Dabei sollten Sie zum Hinzufügen dieser Abgaben die Einstellung "Gesamtsumme und Wert" oder "Bewertung" verwenden. Abgaben, die demselben Lieferanten gezahlt werden müssen, bei dem Sie eingekauft haben, sollten mit "Gesamtsumme und Bewertung" markiert werden. Im anderen Fall, wenn Abgaben an eine 3. Partei zu zahlen sind, sollten Sie mit "Bewertung" markiert werden. Bei der Ausgabe des Kaufbelegs kalkuliert das System die Einstandskosten aller Artikel und berücksichtigt dabei diese Abgabe, und die Einstandskosten werden bei der Berechnung der Artikelwerte berücksichtigt (basierend auf der FIFO-Methode bzw. der Methode des Gleitenden Durchschnitts).
-
-In der Realität aber kann es sein, dass wir beim Erstellen des Kaufbelegs nicht alle für die Einstandskosten anzuwendenden Abgaben kennen. Der Transporteur kann die Rechnung nach einem Monat senden, aber man kann nicht bis dahin mit dem Buchen des Kaufbeleges warten. Unternehmen, die ihre Produkte/Teile importieren, zahlen einen großen Betrag an Zöllen. Und normalerweise bekommen Sie Rechnungen vom Zollamt erst nach einiger Zeit. In diesen Fällen werden Einstandskostenbelege sympathisch, weil sie Ihnen erlauben diese zusätzlichen Abgaben an einem späteren Zeitpunkt hinzuzufügen und die Einstandskosten der gekauften Artikel zu aktualisieren.
-
-### Einstandskostenbeleg
-
-Sie können die Einstandskosten an jedem zukünftigen Zeitpunkt über einen Einstandskostenbeleg aktualisieren.
-
-> Lagerbestand > Werkzeuge > Beleg über Einstandskosten
-
-Im Dokument können Sie verschiedene Kaufbelege auswählen und alle Artikel daraus abrufen. Dann sollten Sie zutreffende Abgaben aus der Tabelle "Steuern und Abgaben" hinzufügen. Die hinzugefügten Abgaben werden proportional auf die Artikel aufgeteilt, basierend auf ihrem Wert.
-
-
-
-### Was passiert bei der Ausgabe?
-
-1. Bei der Ausgabe des Einstandskostenbelegs werden die zutreffenden Einstandskosten in der Artikelliste des Kaufbelegs aktualisiert.
-2. Die Bewertung der Artikel wird basierend auf den neuen Einstandskosten neu berechnet.
-3. Wenn Sie die Ständige Inventur nutzen, verbucht das System Buchungen im Hauptbuch um den Lagerbestand zu korrigieren. Es belastet (erhöht) das Konto des zugehörigen Lagers und entlastet (erniedrigt) das Konto "Ausgaben in Bewertung eingerechnet". Wenn Artikel schon geliefert wurden, wurden die Selbstkosten zur alten Bewertung verbucht. Daher werden Hauptbuch-Buchungen erneut für alle zukünftigen ausgehenden Buchungen verbundener Artikel erstellt um den Selbstkosten-Betrag zu korrigieren.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/packing-slip.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 28a8582a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Packzettel
-
-
-Ein Packzettel ist ein Dokument, welches die Artikel einer Sendung auflistet. Normalerweise wird er den gelieferten Waren beigelegt. Beim Versand eines Produktes wird ein Entwurf für einen Lieferschein erstellt. Sie können aus diesem Lieferschein (Entwurf) einen Packzettel erstellen.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 53cc940f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Qualitätsprüfung
-
-
-In ERPNext können Sie eingehende und ausgehende Produkte für eine Qualitätsprüfung markieren. Um diese Funktion in ERPNext zu aktivieren, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Lagerbestand > Werkzeuge > Qualitätsprüfung > Neu
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/uom-replacement-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/uom-replacement-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cb32af46..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/uom-replacement-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Werkzeug zum Austausch der Lagermaßeinheit
-
-
-Dieses Werkzeug hilft Ihnen dabei die Maßeinheit eines existierenden Artikels auszutauschen.
-
-Sie müssen einen Artikel auswählen, das System holt sich dabei die Maßeinheit dieses Artikels. Dann können Sie die neue Maßeinheit für diesen Artikel auswählen und den Umrechnungsfaktor definieren.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/warehouse.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/warehouse.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7ad78d10..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/warehouse.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lager
-
-
-Ein Lager ist ein geschäftlich genutztes Gebäude zum Lagern von Waren. Lager werden von Herstellern, Importeuren, Exporteuren, Großhändlern, Transporteuren, vom Zoll, usw. genutzt. Es handelt sich normalerweise um große, flache Gebäude in Industriegebieten von Städten und Ortschaften. Meistens verfügen sie über Ladestationen um Waren auf LKWs zu verladen und sie aus LKWs zu entladen.
-
-Um zum Bereich "Lager" zu gelangen, klicken Sie auf "Lagerbestand" und gehen Sie unter "Dokumente" auf "Lager". Sie können auch über das Modul "Einstellungen" gehen und auf "Lagerbestand" und "Lager-Einstellungen" klicken.
-
-> Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Lager > Neu
-
-
-
-In ERPNext muss jedes Lager einer festen Firma zugeordnet sein, um einen unternehmensbezogenen Lagerbestand zu erhalten. Die Lager werden mit den ihnen zugeordneten Firmenkürzeln abgespeichert. Dies erleichtert es auf einen Blick herauszufinden, welches Lager zu welcher Firma gehört.
-
-Sie können für diese Lager Benutzereinschränkungen mit einstellen. Wenn Sie nicht möchten, dass ein bestimmter Benutzer mit einem bestimmten Lager arbeiten kann, können Sie diesen Benutzer vom Zugriff auf das Lager ausschliessen.
-
-### Lager verschmelzen
-
-Bei der täglichen Arbeit kommt es vor, dass fälschlicherweise doppelte Einträge erstellt werden, was zu doppelten Lagern führt. Doppelte Datensätze können zu einem einzigen Lagerort verschmolzen werden. Wählen Sie hierzu aus der Kopfmenüleiste des Systems das Menü "Datei" aus. Wählen Sie "Umbenennen" und geben Sie das richtige Lager ein, drücken Sie danach die Schaltfläche "Verschmelzen". Das System ersetzt in allen Transaktionen alle falschen Lagereinträge durch das richtige Lager. Weiterhin wird die verfügbare Menge (tatsächliche Menge, reservierte Menge, bestellte Menge, usw.) aller Artikel im doppelt vorhandenen Lager auf das richtige Lager übertragen. Löschen Sie nach dem Abschluß der Verschmelzung das doppelte Lager.
-
-> Hinweis: ERPNext berechnet den Lagerbestand für jede mögliche Kombination aus Artikel und Lager. Aus diesem Grund können Sie sich für jeden beliebigen Artikel den Lagerbestand in einem bestimmten Lager zu einem bestimmten Datum anzeigen lassen.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 738624a3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Support
-
-
-Guter Kundensupport und Wartung sind das Herzstück jeden erfolgreichen kleineren Geschäftes. ERPNext stellt Ihnen Werkzeuge zur Verfügung um alle eingehenden Anfragen und Sorgen Ihrer Kunden so zu erfassen, dass Sie schnell reagieren können. Die Datenbank Ihrer eingehenden Anfragen wird Ihnen auch dabei helfen festzustellen, wo die größten Möglichkeiten für Verbesserungen bestehen.
-
-In diesem Modul können Sie eingehende Supportanfragen über Supporttickets abwickeln. Sie können somit auch Kundenanfragen zu bestimmten Seriennummern im Auge behalten und diese basierend auf der Garantie und anderen Informationen beantworten. Weiterhin können Sie Wartungspläne für Seriennummern erstellen und Wartungsbesuche bei Ihren Kunden aufzeichnen.
-
-### Themen
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index eaff69e8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-issue
-warranty-claim
-maintenance-visit
-maintenance-schedule
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/issue.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/issue.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ec045198..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/issue.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fall
-
-
-Bei einem Fall handelt es ich um eine eingehende Nachricht vom Kunden, normalerweise per Email oder aus der Kontaktschnittstelle Ihrer Webseite (Um das Supportticket vollständig in Ihre Emails einzubinden, lesen Sie bitte bei "Email-Einstellungen" nach).
-
-> Tipp: Eine eigens eingerichtete Email-Adresse für Supportanfragen ist eine gute Möglichkeit um per Email eingehende Anfragen zu handhaben. Beispiel: Sie können Supportanfragen über support@erpnext.com an ERPNext senden und es werden automatisch im Frappe-System Einträge erstellt.
-
-> Support > Dokumente > Anfrage > Neu
-
-
-
-### Gesprächsaufzeichnung
-
-Wenn eine neue E-Mail aus Ihrer Mailbox geöffnet wird, wird ein neuer Datensatz für die Anfrage erstellt und eine automatische Antwort an den Absender verschickt, in der die Nummer des Supporttickets enthalten ist. Der Absender kann dann zusätzliche Informationen an diese Adresse schicken. Alle weiteren diese Fallnummer betreffenden E-Mails werden dann dieser Anfrage zugeordnet. Der Absender kann auch Anhänge mit versenden.
-
-Die Anfrage verwaltet alle E-Mails die für diesen Fall zurück gesendet und empfangen werden im System, so dass Sie nachvollziehen können, was zwischen dem Absender und der antwortenden Person besprochen wurde.
-
-### Status
-
-Wenn eine neue Anfrage erstellt wurde, ist ihr Status "offen", wenn geantwortet wurde, ändert sich der Status auf "wartet auf Antwort". Wenn der Absender wiederum zurückantwortet erscheint als Status wieder "offen".
-
-### Abschliessen
-
-Sie können den Fall einerseits manuell schliessen, indem Sie in der Werkzeugleiste auf "Ticket schliessen" klicken, oder wenn der Status "wartet auf Antwort ist. Anderenfalls schliesst der Fall automatisch, Wenn der Absender nicht innerhalb von 7 Tagen antwortet.
-
-### Zuordnung
-
-Sie können die Anfrage jemandem zuordnen, indem Sie die Einstellung für "Zugeordnet zu" in der rechten Seitenleiste verwenden. Dies erstellt für den eingestellten Benutzer eine neue ToDo-Aufgabe und schickt ihm eine Nachricht, in der er auf die neue Anfrage hingewiesen wird.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-schedule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-schedule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 581d58e6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-schedule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Wartungsplan
-
-
-Alle Maschinen benötigen regalmäßige Wartung, im besonderen diejenigen, die viele bewegliche Teile beinhalten. Wenn Sie also mit der Wartung dieser Artikel Geschäfte machen oder selbst welche besitzen, stellt der Wartungsplan ein nützliches Hilfsmittel dar, um die entsprechenden Wartungsarbeiten zu planen.
-
-Wenn eine Kundenanfrage eine Wartung aufgrund eines Stillstandes verlangt, bezieht sich das auf eine vorbeugende Wartung.
-
-Um einen neuen Wartungsplan zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Support > Dokumente > Wartungsplan > Neu
-
-
-
-Im Wartungsplan gibt es zwei Abschnitte:
-
-Im ersten Abschnitt können Sie die Artikel auswählen, für die Sie diesen Plan erstellen wollen, weiterhin wie oft ein Wartungsbesuch erfolgen soll. Das kann optional auch aus dem Kundenauftrag gezogen werden. Nach der Auswahl der Artike sollten Sie den Datensatz abspeichern
-
-Der zweite Abschnitt beinhaltet die Wartungsaktivitäten des Plans. "Zeitplan erstellen" erstellt eine separate Zeile für jede Wartungsaktivität.
-
-Jeder Artikel im Wartungsplan ist einer Person zugeordnet.
-
-Sobald das Dokument übertragen wird, werden für jede Wartung Kalendereinträge für den Benutzer oder den Vertriebsmitarbeiter erstellt.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-visit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-visit.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a91f3c00..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-visit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Wartungsbesuch
-
-
-Ein Wartungsbesuch ist ein Datensatz über einen Besuch eines Technikers bei einem Kunden, in den meisten Fällen wegen einer Kundenanfrage. Sie können einen Wartungsbesuch wir folgt erstellen:
-
-> Support > Dokumente > Wartungsbesuch > Neu
-
-
-
-Der Wartungsbesuch inhält Informationen über:
-
-* Den Kunden
-* Den Artikel der geprüft/gewartet wurde
-* Einzelheiten der durchgeführten Arbeiten
-* Die Person, die die Arbeit ausgeführt hat
-* Die Rückmeldung des Kunden
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/warranty-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/warranty-claim.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6cb25974..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/warranty-claim.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Garantieantrag
-
-
-Wenn Sie **Artikel** verkaufen, die eine Garantie besitzen, oder wenn Sie einen erweiterten Servicevertrag wie den Jährlichen Wartungsvertrag (AMC) verkauft haben, kann Sie Ihr **Kunde** wegen eines entsprechenden Falles oder eines Ausfalles anrufen und Ihnen die Seriennummer dieses Artikels mitteilen.
-
-Um diesen Vorgang aufzuzeichnen, können Sie einen **Garantiefall** erstellen und den **Kunden** sowie die **Artikel- bzw. Seriennummer** hinzufügen. Das System zieht dann automatisch die Einzelheiten zur Seriennummer aus dem System und stellt fest, ob es sich um einen Garantiefall oder einen AMC handelt.
-
-Sie müssen auch eine Beschreibung des Falles des **Kunden** anfügen und den Fall der Person zuordnen, die das Problem lösen soll.
-
-Um einen neuen **Garantiefall** zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Support > Dokukumente > Garantieantrag > Neu
-
-
-
-Wenn für die Lösung des Problems ein Besuch beim Kunden notwendig ist, können Sie einen neuen Wartungsbesuch erstellen.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/assignment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/assignment.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3b6e84a6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/assignment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-# Zuweisungen
-
-
-Die Option "Zuweisen zu" in ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen ein bestimmtes Dokument einem Benutzer, der weiter an diesem Dokument arbeiten soll, zu zu weisen.
-
-Beispiel: Wenn ein Kundenauftrag vom Vertriebsmanager bestätigt/übertragen werden muss, kann der Benutzer, der zuerst mit dem Vorgang beschäftigt war, diesen Kundenauftrag dem Vertriebsmanager zuordnen. Wenn das Dokument dem Vertriebsmanager zugeordnet wird, wird es dessen Aufgabenübersicht hinzugefügt. In gleicher Art und Weise kann einem Konto der Fertigung oder der Verwaltung, über das ein Lieferschein und eine Ausgangsrechnung zu dieser Kundenbestellung erstellt werden müssen, ein Dokument zugeordnet werden.
-
-Einschränkende Berechtigungen können nicht über "Zuweisen zu" erstellt werden. Im Folgenden werden die Schritt dargestellt, wie Sie ein Dokument einem anderen Benutzer zuweisen.
-
-### Schritt 1: Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Zuweisen zu"
-
-Die Option "Zuweisen zu" befindet sich in der Fußzeile des Dokuments. Wenn Sie auf das Zuteilungs-Symbol in der Werkzeugleiste klicken, werden Sie schnell zur Fußzeile des selben Dokuments weiter geleitet.
-
-
-
-
-
-### Schritt 2: Zu einem Benutzer zuweisen
-
-Im Abschnitt "Zuweisen zu" können Sie einen Benutzer auswählen, dem das Dokument zugeordnet werden soll. Sie können ein Dokument gleichzeitig mehreren verschiedenen Menschen zuordnen.
-
-Bei der Zuordnung können Sie auch einen Kommentar für denjenigen hinterlassen, dem das Dokument zugeordnet wird.
-
-
-
-### Aufgabenliste des Empfängers
-
-Diese Transaktion erscheint in der Aufgabenliste des Empfängers.
-
-
-
-Zuordnung entfernen
-
-Ein Benutzer kann eine Zuordnung entfernen, indem im Dokument die Schaltfläche "Zuordnung abgeschlossen" angeklickt wird.
-
-
-
-Wenn die Zuordnung einmal als abgeschlossen markiert wurde, wird der Status des zugehörigen Eintrages in der Aufgabenliste auf "Abgeschlossen" gesetzt.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/calendar.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/calendar.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f8ce1586..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/calendar.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-
-# Kalender
-
-
-Der Kalender ist ein Werkzeug, mit dem Sie Ereignisse erstellen und teilen können und auch automatisch aus dem System erstellte Ereignisse sehen können.
-
-Sie können die Kalenderansicht umschalten zwischen Monatsansicht, Wochenansicht und Tagesansicht.
-
-
-
-### Ereignisse im Kalender erstellen
-
-#### Ein Ereignis manuell erstellen
-
-Um ein Ereignis manuell zu erstellen, sollten Sie zuerst die Kalenderansicht festlegen. Wenn sich der Start- und Endzeitpunkt am selben Tag befinden, gehen Sie zuerst in die Tagesansicht.
-
-Diese Ansicht zeigt die 24 Stunden des Tages aufgeteilt in verschiedene Zeitfenster an. Klicken Sie für den Startzeitpunkt auf ein Zeitfenster und ziehen Sie den Rahmen auf bis Sie den Endzeitpunkt erreichen.
-
-
-
-Auf Grundlage der Auswahl des Zeitfensters werden Start- und Endzeitpunkt in die Ereignisvorlage übernommen. Sie können dann noch die Bezeichnung des Ereignisses angeben und speichern.
-
-#### Ereignis auf Grundlage eines Leads
-
-Im Leadformular finden Sie die Felder "Nächster Kontakt durch" und "Nächstes Kontaktdatum". Wenn Sie in diesen Feldern einen Termin und eine Kontaktperson eintragen, wird automatisch ein Ereignis erstellt.
-
-
-
-#### Geburtstag
-
-Auf Basis der in den Mitarbeiterstammdaten eingetragenen Geburtstage werden Geburtstagsereignisse erstellt.
-
-### Wiederkehrende Ereignisse
-
-Sie können Ereignisse als wiederkehrend in bestimmten Intervallen markieren, indem Sie "Dieses Ereignis wiederholen" aktivieren.
-
-
-
-### Erinnerungen an Ereignisse
-
-Es gibt zwei Arten, wie Sie eine Erinnerung zu einem Ereignis per E-Mail erhalten können.
-
-#### Erinnerung im Ereignis aktivieren
-
-Wenn Sie in der Ereignisvorlage den Punkt "E-Mail-Erinnerung am Morgen senden" anklicken, erhalten alle Teilnehmer an diesem Ereignis eine Benachrichtungs-E-Mail.
-
-
-
-#### Einen täglichen E-Mail-Bericht erstellen
-
-Wenn Sie für Kalenderereignisse Erinnerungen erhalten wollen, sollten Sie den täglichen E-Mail-Bericht für Kalenderereignisse einstellen.
-
-Der tägliche E-Mail-Bericht kann eingestellt werden über:
-
-> Einstellungen > E-Mail > Täglicher E-Mail-Bericht
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f596168c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Zusammenarbeit über Formulare
-
-
-### Zugeordnet zu
-
-Sie können jedwede Transaktion aus dem System versenden, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Zugeordnet zu" klicken. Im Menü "Kommunikation" wird ein Protokoll aller von Ihnen versendeter E-Mails gepflegt.
-
-
-
-### Kommentar
-
-Kommentare sind ein großartiger Weg Informationen über eine Transaktion, die aber nicht selbst Teil der Transaktion sind, hinzuzufügen, z. B. Hinfergrundinformationen usw. Kommentare können in der rechten Seitenleiste hinzugefügt werden.
-
-### Schlagworte
-
-Lesen Sie hier mehr über [Schlagworte](/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.html)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 35576621..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Werkzeuge zur Zusammenarbeit
-
-
-Wir leben in einer Ära, in der Menschen sehr bequem elektronisch kommunizieren, diskutieren, fragen, Arbeit verteilen und Rückmeldung bekommen können. Das Internet funktioniert auch großartig als Medium zur gemeinsamen Arbeit. Als wir dieses Konzept im ERP-System integriert haben, haben wir eine Handvoll Werkzeuge entworfen, mit denen Sie Transaktionen zuordnen, Ihre ToDos verwalten, einen Kalender teilen und pflegen, eine unternehmensweite Wissensdatenbank aktuell halten, Transaktionen verschlagworten und kommentieren und Ihre Bestellungen, Rechnungen und vieles mehr per E-Mail versenden können. Sie können über das Nachrichtenwerkzeug auch Mitteilungen an andere Benutzer senden.
-
-Diese Werkzeuge sind voll in das Produkt integriert, damit Sie effektiv Ihre Daten verwalten und mit Ihren Kollegen zusammenarbeiten können.
-
-### Themen
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 259835e3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-to-do
-collaborating-around-forms
-messages
-notes
-calendar
-assignment
-tags
-articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/messages.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/messages.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 07ac8c15..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/messages.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-# Mitteilungen
-
-
-Sie können mithilfe des Nachrichtenwerkzeuges Mitteilungen über das System versenden und empfangen. Wenn Sie einem Benutzer eine Mitteilung senden, und der Benutzer angemeldet ist, öffnet sich ein Mitteilungsfenster und der Zähler für ungelesene Mitteilungen in der Kopfleiste wird angepasst.
-
-
-
-Sie können Mitteilungen an alle Benutzer oder nur an bestimmte versenden.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/notes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/notes.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ec3d1fa2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/notes.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Anmerkungen
-
-
-In diesem Bereich können Sie lange Anmerkungen abspeichern. Diese können z. B. eine Liste Ihrer Partner, häufig genutzte Passwörter, Geschäftsbedingungen oder andere Dokumente sein, die gemeinsam genutzt werden müssen.
-
-### Gehen Sie zu den Anmerkungen
-
-> Werkzeuge > Anmerkung > Neu
-
-### Einzelheiten der Anmerkungen
-
-Geben Sie Titel und Inhalt ein.
-
-
-
-## Berechtigungen für ausgewählte Benutzer setzen
-
-Damit alle auf eine Anmerkung zugreifen können, aktivieren Sie "Öffentlich" unter dem Abschnitt Verknüpfungen. Damit ein Benutzer auf eine bestimmte Anmerkung zugreifen kann, können diese in der Tabelle "Teilen mit" ausgewählt werden.
-
-
-
-Anmerkungen können intern auch als Wissensdatenbank genutzt werden. Sie können an die Anmerkungen auch Dateien anhängen und diese einer bestimmten Auswahl an Benutzern zugänglich machen.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 73fc6f7b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Schlagworte
-
-
-Genauso wie Zuordnungen und Kommentare können Sie auch Ihre eigenen Schlagworte zu jeder Art von Transaktionen hinzufügen. Diese Schlagworte helfen Ihnen bei der Suche nach einem Dokument und klassifizieren dieses. ERPNext zeigt Ihnen die wichtigen Schlagworte in der Dokumentenliste an.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/to-do.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/to-do.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 15c280fe..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/to-do.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-# Aufgaben
-
-
-"Aufgaben" ist ein einfaches Werkzeug, welches alle Aktivitäten, die Ihnen [zugeordnet](https://erpnext.com/collaboration-tools/assignment) wurden, und die Sie zugeordnet haben, auflistet. Sie können zudem Ihre eigenen ToDos der Liste hinzufügen.
-
-
-
-Wenn eine Aufgabe abgeschlossen wurde, können Sie einfach die Zuweisung vom Dokument entfernen. Dabei wird die Aufgabe von der ToDo-Liste entfernt. Bei Aufgaben, die nicht über ein Dokument zugeordnet wurden, können Sie den Status über den ToDo-Datensatz selbst auf "abgeschlossen" setzen.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blog-post.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blog-post.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6133af67..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blog-post.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-# Blogeinträge
-
-
-Blogs sind eine großartige Möglichkeit die eigenen Gedanken zu Geschäftsaktivitäten mit anderen zu teilen und Ihre Kunden und Leser auf einem aktuellen Stand zu Ihren Vorhaben zu halten.
-
-Im Zeitalter des Internet hat das Schreiben einen hohen Stellenwert, weil Menschen, die Ihre Webseite besuchen, etwas über Sie und Ihre Produkte lesen wollen.
-
-Um einen neuen Blog zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Webseite > Blog-Eintrag > Neu
-
-
-
-Sie können einen Blog mit Hilfe des Markdown-Formats formatieren. Sie können auf Ihren Blog auch zugreifen, indem Sie zur Seite "blog.html" gehen.
-
-#### Ein Beispiel für einen Blog.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blogger.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blogger.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 11a7d872..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blogger.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Blogger
-
-
-Ein Blogger ist ein Benutzer, der Blog-Einträge erstellen kann. Sie können eine Kurzbiografie des Bloggers angeben und dazu einen Avatar.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8f17108d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Webseite
-
-
-Webseiten sind Kernbestandteile eines jeden Geschäftslebens. Eine gute Webseite zu haben bedeutet normalerweise:
-
-* Viel Geld zu investieren.
-* Schwierigkeiten bei der Aktualisierung
-* Probleme bei der Interaktion
-
-Es sei denn Sie sind selbst Webentwickler.
-
-Wäre es nicht toll, wenn es einen Weg gäbe, Ihren Produktkatalog auf Ihrer Webseite automatisch aus dem ERP-System aktualiseren zu können?
-
-Wir haben uns genau das gleiche gedacht und haben deshalb eine kleine aber feine App zur Webseitenentwicklung gebaut, direkt in ERPNext! Wenn Sie das Webseitenmodul von ERPNext nutzen, können Sie:
-
-1. Webseiten erstellen
-2. Einen Blog schreiben
-3. Ihren Produktkatalog basierend auf den Artikelstammdaten erstellen
-
-In Kürze werden wir einen Einkaufswagen mit bereit stellen, so dass Ihre Kunden Bestellung aufgeben können und online zahlen können.
-
-Obwohl es keine Voraussetzung für eine gute Webseite ist, sollten Sie vielleicht doch ein bisschen Grundwissen zu HTML und CSS mitbringen, oder aber einen professionellen Service in Anspruch nehmen. Das gute daran ist, dass Sie selbst Inhalte, Blogs und Produkte hinzufügen und ändern können, sobald die Grundeinstellungen erledigt sind.
-
-### Themen
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 846011d2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-web-page
-blog-post
-web-form
-blogger
-setup
-add-products-to-website
-shopping-cart
-articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 76fda9fd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Einstellungen
-
-
-Einstellungen für Ihre Webseite können Sie im Menüpunkt "Einstellungen" treffen.
-
-### Themen
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index e451bf3d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-website-settings
-social-login-keys
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/social-login-keys.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/social-login-keys.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1d725d0d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/social-login-keys.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-# Zugang zu sozialen Netzwerken
-
-
-Soziale Netwerke versetzen Benutzer in die Lage sich in ERPNext über Google, Facebook oder GitHub einzuloggen.
-
-### Soziale Netzwerke aktivieren
-
-Um zu verstehen, wie sie soziale Netzwerke für ERPNext aktivieren, sehen Sie sich bitte die folgenden Video-Tutorien an.
-
-* Für Facebook: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zC6Q6gIfiw8
-* Für Google: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=w_EAttrE9sw
-* Für GitHub: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bG71DxxkVjQ
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/website-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/website-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a8b770f9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/website-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-
-# Einstellungen zur Webseite
-
-
-Die meisten der Einstellungen, die Ihre Webseite betreffen, können hier eingestellt werden.
-
-
-
-### Zielseite
-
-* Homepage: Sie können angeben, welche [Webseite](/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.html) die Startseite der Homepage ist.
-* Startseite ist "Products": Wenn diese Option markiert ist, ist die Standard-Artikelgruppe die Startseite der Webseite.
-* Titel-Präfix: Stellt den Browser-Titel ein.
-
-### Webseitenthema
-
-Wählen Sie das Thema für Ihre Webseite aus. Sie können auch neue Themen für Ihre Webseite erstellen.
-
-
-
-* Wählen "Neues Webseiten-Thema erstellen" wenn Sie das Standars-Thema der Webseite anpassen wollen.
-
-### Banner
-
-Hier können Sie ein Banner/Logo auf Ihrer Webseite hinzufügen. Hängen Sie das Bild an und klicken Sie auf "Banner aus Bild einrichten". Das System erstellt einen HTML-Kode unter Banner HTML.
-
-
-
-### Kopfleiste
-
-Hier können Sie die Menüeinträge in der Kopfleiste einstellen.
-
-
-
-* In ähnlicher Art und Weise können Sie auch die Verknüpfungen auf der Seitenleiste und in der Fußzeile einstellen.
-
-### Einbindungen und Sonstige Informationen
-
-Sie können Google Analytics und soziale Netzwerke in Ihre Webseite mit einbinden und Einträge auf der Webseite teilen.
-
-
-
-* Sie können ein öffentliches Anmelden auf Ihr ERPNext-Konto unterbinden indem Sie auf "Anmelden deaktivieren" klicken.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-form.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-form.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e23d1053..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-form.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-# Webformular
-
-
-Fügen Sie Formulare, die Daten in Ihren Tabellen hinzufügen und ändern können, zu Ihrer Webseite hinzu. Erlauben Sie Nutzern mehrere verschiedene Webformulare zu erstellen und zu ändern.
-
-Sie können Ihrer Webseite Formulare hinzufügen, z. B. Kontakt, Anfrage, Beschwerde usw. Aus diesen Formularen können Daten in Datensätze übernommen werden, wie z. B. Lead, Opportunity, Fall etc. Sie können dem Benutzer auch die Erlaubnis erteilen mehrere verschiedene Datensätze (wie z. B. Beschwerden) zu verwalten.
-
-* * *
-
-### Erstellung
-
-Um ein neues **Webformular** zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Webseite > Web-Formular > Neu
-
-1. Geben Sie die Bezeichnung und die URL des Web-Formulars an.
-2. Wählen Sie den DocType aus, in dem der Benutzer Datensätze speichern soll.
-3. Geben Sie an, ob sich der Benutzer einloggen muss, Daten ändern muss, mehrere verschiedene Datensätze verwalten soll, etc.
-4. Fügen Sie die Felder, die Sie in den Datensätzen haben wollen, hinzu.
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-### Ansicht
-
-Wenn Sie das Web-Formular erstellt haben, können Sie es unter der URL ansehen und ausprobieren!
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-### Ergebnisse
-
-Ihre Daten werden in den angegebenen Tabellen gespeichert.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b390aedd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-# Webseite
-
-
-Über das Modul "Webseite" können feste Inhalte wie "Startseite", "Über uns", "Kontakt" und "Geschäftsbedingungen" erstellt werden.
-
-Um eine neue Webseite zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
-
-> Webseite > Webseite > Neu
-
-
-
-### Bezeichnung
-
-Das erste, was Sie angeben sollten, ist die Bezeichnung, der Titel Ihrer Webseite. Die Bezeichnung ist sehr wichtig für die Websuche. Wählen Sie also eine Bezeichnung, die Schlüsselwörter enthält, mit denen Sie Ihre Kundschaft adressieren können.
-
-### Inhalt
-
-Nach der Auswahl des Erscheinungsbildes können Sie Inhalt (Texte, Bilder) zu jeder Ihrer Inhaltsboxen hinzufügen. Sie können Inhalte im Markdown und im HTML-Format hinzufügen. Lesen Sie hierzu den Abschnitt über Markdownformatierung, wenn Sie weitere Informationen wünschen.
-
-### Seitenverknüpfung
-
-Die Verknüpfung zu Ihrer Seite besteht aus dem Wert des Feldes "Seitenname" + ".html". Beispiel: Wenn Ihr Seitenname contact-us ist, dann ist die Verknüpfung ihreseite.com/contact-us.html.
-
-### Bilder
-
-Sie können Bilder auf Ihrer Webseite darstellen und sie über einen HTML-Befehl oder im Markdown-Format anzeigen lassen. Die Verknüpfung zu Ihrem Bild lautet assets/manualerpnextcom/old_images/erpnext/filename
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a2434adf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-
-# Contact and Address
-
-Contacts do not need to be linked to another document, they can be stand alone. You can even create a contact with only a first name, not linked to any other document or party (Customer/Supplier).
-
-The Contact_ID is automatically created:
-
-1. If only a First Name is entered that First Name defines the ID , thus First name (only)
-2. If a First Name and a Party is linked the ID becomes “FirstName-Party”
-
-Contacts can, but do not have to be linked, to: User, Customer, Supplier, and Sales Partner. Since Customers and Addresses are not directly linked to a User, all links go via Contacts.
-
-A Contact can be linked to the (web) user. If that user is also a Customer, it is linked to the Customer by the Customer ID
-
-Contacts and Addresses in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can
-attach multiple Contacts or Addresses to Customers and Suppliers.
-
-To create a new Contact go to,
-
-> CRM > Contact > New
-
-
-
-Or you can add a Contact or Address directly from the Customer record, click on “New Contact” or “New Address”.
-
-
-
-> Tip: When you select a Customer in any transaction, one Contact and Address
-gets pre-selected. This is the “Default Contact or Address”.
-
-To Import multiple Contacts and Addresses from a spreadsheet, use the Data
-Import Tool.
-
----
-
-### Address Titles
-
-The Address Title (Name of person or organization that this address belongs to) is a free format unlinked field. The ID is automatically created from the Address Title and Address Type. (AddressTitle-AddressType).
-
-### Address Linking
-
-Addresses can be entered individually (unlinked) or linked to customers, leads, suppliers or Sales Partners.
-
-Linking is done in the reference section where the links can be established.
-
-(Contributed by Robert Becht)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/crm_reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/crm_reports.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0d5d59e5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/crm_reports.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-
-# Crm Reports
-
-CRM module's reports helps users to get the information about the prospects. Using Following reports, user can analyze the data about prospect's history with a company and will helps user to build strong relationships with them.
-
-###Lead Details
-It has data about the leads and their contact and address details.
-
-
-###Sales Funnel
-By using the sales funnel report, and by quantifying the number of prospects at each stage of the process, you can get an idea of your potential customers.
-
-More than this, by looking at the way these numbers change over time, you can identify problems in the sales pipeline and take any corrective action at the early stage.
-
-For example, if you notice that very few communications with the prospects has taken place in a month which might indicate a decrease in the sales. From the next month, organization should make sure that more communications has to take place with the prospects.
-
-
-
-###Prospects Engaged But Not Converted
-Using this report, user gets the information about the leads who has shown interest in the business with you but due to some reason they were not converted into the customers.
-
-
-
-###Minutes to First Response for Opportunity
-Immediacy is so important – and so valued
-In this internet area, we all expect a quicker response time to any of our query. This report gives you the information about the first response time given to an opportunities or issues. Using this report, the organization can improve their first response time to the prospects which can help to the better sales in the future.
-
-
-
-###Customer Addresses And Contacts
-It has data about the customers and their contact and address details.
-
-
-###Inactive Customers
-This report shows the list of customers who has not purchased since long time.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 80bb285c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customer
-
-A customer, who is sometimes known as a client, buyer, or purchaser is the one
-who receives goods, services, products, or ideas, from a seller for a monetary
-consideration. A customer can also receive goods or services from a vendor or
-a supplier for other valuable considerations.
-
-A customer is uniquely identified by the Customer ID. Normally this ID is identical to the customer Full Name, but in case of duplicate Full Name, a Name-1 is created as ID.
-
-You can either directly create your Customers via
-
-> Selling > Customer
-
-
-
-or upload it via the [Data Import Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.html).
-
-A Customer can avail the features (operations) in the selling process. The general flow can be summarised as:
-
-
-
-> Note: Customers are separate from Contacts and Addresses. A Customer can
-have multiple Contacts and Addresses.
-
-### Contacts and Addresses
-
-[Contacts and Addresses](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.html) in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can
-attach multiple Contacts or Addresses to Customers and Suppliers
-
-Thus we may have identical Customer Names that are uniquely identified by the ID. Since the email address is not part of the
-customer information, the linking of Customer and User is through Contacts.
-
-### Integration with Accounts
-
-In ERPNext, there is a separate Account record for each Customer, for each
-Company.
-
-When you create a new Customer, ERPNext will automatically create an Account
-Ledger for the Customer under “Accounts Receivable” in the Company set in the
-Customer record.
-
-> Advanced Tip: If you want to change the Account Group under which the
-Customer Account is created, you can set it in the Company master. If you want
-to create an Account in another Company, just change the Company value and
-“Save” the Customer again.
-
-By default, the system does not generate an account for every customer. All
-Customers can be booked in one account called Debitors. In order to manage a
-separate account for each customer, you have to first create the account under
-Accounts Receivable in the [Chart of Accounts](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.html) and then add it on the customer's
-form accounts table.
-
-### Customer Settings
-
-You can link a Price List to a Customer (select “Default Price List”), so that
-when you select that Customer, the Price List will be automatically selected.
-
-You can set “Credit Days”, so that it is automatically set due date in the Sales
-Invoices made against this Customer. Credit Days can be defined as fixed days or last day of the next month based on invoice date.
-
-You can set how much credit you want to allow for a Customer by adding the
-“Credit Limit”. You can also set a global “Credit Limit” in the Company
-master. Classifying Customers
-
-ERPNext allows you to group your Customers using [Customer Group](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.html)
-and also divide them into [Territories](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/territory.html)
-Grouping will help you get better analysis of your data and
-identify which Customers are profitable and which are not. Territories will
-help you set sales targets for the respective territories.
-You can also mention [Sales Person](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.html) against a customer.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Sales Partner
-
-A Sales Partner is a third party distributor / dealer / commission agent /
-affiliate / reseller who sells the companies products, for a commission. This
-is useful if you make the end sale to the Customer, involving your Sales
-Partner.
-
-If you sell to your Sales Partner who in-turn sells it to the Customer, then
-you must make a Customer instead.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6a843a96..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# CRM
-
-ERPNext helps you track business **Opportunities** from **Leads** and
-**Customers**, send them **Quotations** and make confirmed **Sales Orders**.
-
-The CRM Module helps maintain Leads, Oppurtunities and Customers.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 2fe3f4d6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-lead
-customer
-opportunity
-contact
-newsletter
-crm_reports
-setup
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5e27ff10..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lead
-
-To get the customer through the door, you may be doing all or any of the
-following:
-
- * Listing your product on directories.
- * Maintaining an updated and searchable website.
- * Meeting people at trade events.
- * Advertising your product or services.
-
-When you send out the word that you are around and have something valuable to
-offer, people will come in to check out your product. These are your Leads.
-
-They are called Leads because they may lead you to a sale. Sales people
-usually work on leads by calling them, building a relationship and sending
-information about their products or services. It is important to track all
-this conversation to enable another person who may have to follow-up on that
-contact. The new person is then able to know the history of that particular
-Lead.
-
----
-
-Leads are the entities constituting a first contact. Leads can be created by a system users or by a web-user. When a lead is created minimal info (name,email) is entered and the lead is (default) linked to the active system user, the owner of the lead A user configurable drop list is used to classify Status of the lead (Open, Replied etc)
-
-To create a Lead, go to:
-
-> CRM > Lead > New Lead
-
-
-
-ERPNext gives you a lot of options you may want to store about your Leads. For
-example what is the source, how likely are they to give you business etc. If
-you have a healthy number of leads, this information will help you prioritize
-who you want to work with.
-
-> **Tip:** ERPNext makes it easy to follow-up on leads by updating the “Next
-Contact” details. This will add a new event in the Calendar for the User who
-has to contact the lead next.
-
-### Difference between Lead, Contact and Customer
-
-A Lead is a potential Customer, someone who can give you business. A Customer is an
-organization or individual who has given you business before (and has an Account
-in your system). A Contact is a person who belongs to the Customer.
-
-A Lead can sometimes be an organization you are trying to make a deal with. In this case you can select "Lead is an Organization" and add as many contacts within this organization as you want.
-It is useful if you are establishing a relationship with several people within the same organization.
-
-A Lead can be converted to a Customer by selecting “Customer” from the **Make**
-dropdown. Once the Customer is created, the Lead becomes “Converted” and any
-further Opportunities from the same source can be created against this
-Customer.
-
-
-
----
-
-### Creation via Portal
-
-If a someone creates an account through the website interface is Lead is automatically created, status is Open and the Owner is the webuser.
-
-After registration the webform Addresses is called, where the web user can enter address information.The address is linked to the lead using the **Lead Name-Address Type** as ID.
-
-If using the Cart functionality, items are ordered the Lead is Converted and a Customer is created using the Web-User Name. Because a Customer can only be linked to a webuser using the (foreign) ID in Contact, such contact has to be created as well.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/newsletter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/newsletter.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 65965039..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/newsletter.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Newsletter
-
-A newsletter is a short written report that tells about the recent activities
-of an organization. It is generally sent to members of the organization,
-potential clients customers or potential leads.
-
-In ERPNext, you can use this UI to send any type of communication to a large
-number of audience. The process of sending bulk email to a target audience is
-very simple and easy.
-
-Select the list that you want to send the email to. Fill in your content in
-the message box, and send your newsletter.If you wish to test your email, to
-see how it looks to the recepient, you can use the test function. Save the
-document before testing. A test email will be sent to your Email Address. You can
-send the email to all the intended receipients by clicking on the send button.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a2b22ac6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-# Opportunity
-
-When you know a Lead is looking for some products or services to buy, you can
-track that as an Opportunity. Also opportunity document helps user to collect the requirement of a customer/lead.
-
-You can create an Opportunity from:
-
-> CRM > Opportunity > New Opportunity
-
-#### Figure 1: Create Opportunity
-
-
-
-You can also go to an “Open” Lead and select “Opportunity” from the **Make** dropdown.
-
-#### Figure 2: Create Opportunity from an open Lead
-
-
-
-#### Figure 3: Create Opportunity for Customer to Collect their Requirement
-
-
-
-An Opportunity can also come from an existing Customer. You can create
-multiple Opportunities against the same Lead. In Opportunity, apart from the
-Communication, you can also add the Items for which the Lead or Contact is
-looking for.
-
-#### Make Supplier Quotation
-In some businesses, users collect the rates from their supplier against the customer requirement and based on the supplier rates they prepare the quotation for the customer. With ERPNext, you can make a supplier quotation from the opportunity itself.
-
-
-
-> Best Practice: Leads and Opportunities are often referred as your “Sales
-Pipeline” this is what you need to track if you want to be able to predict how
-much business you are going to get in the future. Its always a good idea to be
-able to track what is coming in order to adjust your resources.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/campaign.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/campaign.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e3a1a2d0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/campaign.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
-# Campaign
-
-A Campaign is a full-scale implementation of a sales strategy to promote a
-product or a service. This is done in a market segment of a particular
-geographical area, to achieve specified objectives.
-
-
-
-You can track [Lead](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.html), [Opportunity](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.html), [Quotation](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.html) against a campaign.
-
-###Track Leads against Campaign
-
-* To track a 'Lead' against a campaign select 'View Leads'.
-
-
-
-* You shall get a filtered list of all leads made against that campaign.
-* You can also create new leads by clicking 'New'
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 293c60d7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customer Group
-
-Customer groups allow you to organize your customers. You can also have discounts based on customer groups.
-You can also get trend analysis for each
-group. Typically Customers are grouped by market segment (that is usually
-based on your domain).
-
-
-
-> Tip: If you think all this is too much effort, you can leave it at “Default
-Customer Group”. But all this effort, will pay off when you start getting
-reports. An example of a sample report is given below:
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 44ed3946..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 3d960aa4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-campaign
-customer-group
-sales-person
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b27e1f1d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sales Person
-
-Sales Persons behave exactly like Territories. You can create an organization
-chart of Sales Persons where each Sales Person’s target can be set
-individually. Again as in Territory, the target has to be set against Item
-Group.
-
-
-
-####Sales Person in Transactions
-
-You can use this Sales Person in Customer and sales transactions like Sales Order, Delivery Note and Sales Invoice.
-Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions) to learn more
-about how Sales Persons are used in the transactions of Sales Cycle.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/_sidebar.json
deleted file mode 100644
index 59e9629c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/_sidebar.json
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-[
- {
- "route": "/docs",
- "title": "Home"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/introduction",
- "title": "Introduction"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up",
- "title": "Setting Up"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/accounts",
- "title": "Accounts"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/asset",
- "title": "Asset"
-},
-
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/stock",
- "title": "Stock"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/CRM",
- "title": "CRM"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/selling",
- "title": "Selling"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/buying",
- "title": "Buying"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing",
- "title": "Manufacturing"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/projects",
- "title": "Projects"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources",
- "title": "Human Resources"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/support",
- "title": "Support"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/education",
- "title": "Education"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare",
- "title": "Healthcare"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit",
- "title": "Non Profit"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management",
- "title": "Quality Management"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext",
- "title": "Customize"
- },
- {
- "route": "/search_docs",
- "title": "Search",
- "type": "input"
- }
-]
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-entries.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-entries.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 38327e3f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-entries.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
-
-# Accounting Entries
-
-The concept of accounting is explained with an example given below: We will
-take a "Tea Stall" as a company and see how to book accounting entries for the
-business.
-
- * Mama (The Tea-stall owner) invests Rs 25000 to start the business.
-
-
-
-__Analysis:__ Mama invested 25000 in company, hoping to get some profit. In other
-words, company is liable to pay 25000 to Mama in the future. So, account
-"Mama" is a liability account and it is credited. Company's cash balance will
-be increased due to the investment, "Cash" is an asset to the company and it
-will debited.
-
- * The company needs equipments (Stove, teapot, cups etc) and raw materials (tea, sugar, milk etc) immediately. He decides to buy from the nearest general store "Super Bazaar" who is a friend so that he gets some credit. Equipments cost him 2800 and raw materials worth of 2200. He pays 2000 out of total cost 5000.
-
-
-
-__Analysis:__ Equipments are "Fixed Assets" (because they have a long life) of the
-company and raw materials "Current Assets" (since they are used for day-to-day
-business), of the company. So, "Equipments" and "Stock in Hand" accounts have
-been debited to increase the value. He pays 2000, so "Cash" account will be
-reduced by that amount, hence credited and he is liable to pay 3000 to "Super
-Bazaar" later, so Super Bazaar will be credited by 3000.
-
- * Mama (who takes care of all entries) decides to book sales at the end of the every day, so that he can analyze daily sales. At the end of the very first day, the tea stall sells 325 cups of tea, which gives net sales of Rs. 1575. The owner happily books his first day sales.
-
-
-
-__Analysis:__ Income has been booked in "Sales of Tea" account which has been
-credited to increase the value and the same amount will be debited to "Cash"
-account. Lets say, to make 325 cups of tea, it costs Rs. 800, so "Stock in
-Hand" will be reduced (Cr) by 800 and expense will be booked in "Cost of goods
-sold" account by same amount.
-
-At the end of the month, the company paid the rent amount of stall (5000) and
-salary of one employee (8000), who joined from the very first day.
-
-
-
-### Booking Profit
-
-As month progress, company purchased more raw materials for the business.
-After a month he books profit to balance the "Balance Sheet" and "Profit and
-Loss Statements" statements. Profit belongs to Mama and not the company hence
-its a liability for the company (it has to pay it to Mama). When the Balance
-Sheet is not balanced i.e. Debit is not equal to Credit, the profit has not
-yet been booked. To book profit, the following entry has to be made:
-
-
-
-Explanation: Company's net sales and expenses are 40000 and 20000
-respectively. So, company made a profit of 20000. To make the profit booking
-entry, "Profit or Loss" account has been debited and "Capital Account" has
-been credited. Company's net cash balance is 44000 and there is some raw
-materials available worth 1000 rupees.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-reports.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0b1e0d92..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-reports.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,126 +0,0 @@
-
-# Accounting Reports
-
-Some of the major accounting reports are:
-
-### General Ledger
-The General Ledger is a detail report for all transactions posted to each account and for every transaction there is a Credit and Debit account so it lists them all up.
-
-The report is based on the table GL Entry and can be filtered by many pre-defined filters like Account, Cost Centers, Party, Project and Period etc. This helps you to get a full update for all entries posted in a period against any account account. The result can be grouped by Account, Voucher/Transaction and Party with opening and closing balances for each group. In case of multi-currency accounting, there is also an option to check the amounts in any other currency than company's base currency.
-
-
-
-### Trial Balance
-
-A Trial Balance is an accounting report which lists account balances for all your Accounts
-(“Ledger” and “Group”) for any given reporting period. A company prepares a trial balance periodically, usually at the end of every reporting period. The general purpose of producing a trial balance is to ensure the entries in a company's bookkeeping system are mathematically correct. The totals of Debit and Credit columns must be same for any given period, to ensure the entries are correct. In ERPNext, the report shows following columns:
-
- * Opening (Dr): Opening debit balance as on From Date
- * Opening (Cr): Opening credit balance as on From Date
- * Debit: Total Debited amount against the account between the selected period
- * Credit: Total Credited amount against the account between the selected period
- * Closing (Dr): Closing debit balance as on To Date
- * Closing (Cr): Closing credit balance as on To Date
-
-There are some other options as well to include or exclude Period Closing Entries, show / hide accounts with zero balance and to show unclosed previous fiscal year's P&L (Income & Expenses) balances. All the figures in the report are shown in company's base currency.
-
-
-
-### Party Wise Trail Balance
-
-Usually you might need to see the trail balance for your customesrs and suppliers. You can easily get for all of your customers or suppliers and also for individual.
-
-
-
-
-### Balance Sheet
-
-A Balance Sheet is the financial statement of a company which states assets, liabilities and equity at a particular point in time.
-
-The Balance Sheet in ERPNext gives you more flexibility to analysis your financial position. You can run the report across multiple year to compare values. You can check values for a specific Finance Book or Cost Center. You can also choose any other currency to display the balances.
-
-
-
-
-### Profit and Loss Statement
-
-A Profit and Loss Statement is a financial statement which summarizes all the revenues and expenses in a given period. The report is also known as P&L Statement.
-
-In ERPNext, you can run the report across multiple year / period to compare the values. You can also check values for a specific Finance Book, Project or Cost Center. You can also choose any other currency to display the balances. If you are running the report to see quarterly / monthly balances, you can choose whether you want to show accumulated balances or only for each period.
-
-
-
-
-### Cash Flow Statement
-
-A Cash Flow is a financial statement which shows the incoming and outgoing of cash or cash-equivalents for a company. It is used to analyse the liquidity position of the company.
-
-
-
-
-### Consolidated Financial Statements
-
-The report shows a consolidated view of Balance Sheet, Profit and Loss Statement and Cash Flow for a group company, by merging financial statements of all the subsidary companies. It shows balances for all individual company and as well as accumulated balances for a group company.
-
-
-
-
-### Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable (AR / AP)
-
-These reports help you to track the outstanding amount of Customers and Suppliers. It also provides againg analysis i.e. a break-up of outstanding amount based on the period for which the amount is outstanding.
-
-
-
-For more information on accounts receivable report based on payment terms
-click here
-
-### Sales and Purchase Register
-
-The Sales and Purchase Register report shows all the Sales and Purchase transactions for a given period with invoiced amount and tax details. In this report, each taxes has a separate column, so you can easily get total taxes collected / paid for a period for each individual tax type, which helps to pay the taxes to government.
-
-
-
-### Item wise Sales and Purchase Register
-
-The Item Wise Sales and Purchase Register report shows all the Sales and Purchase transactions for a given period with item rate, quantity, amount and tax details. In this report, taxes has a separate column, so you can easily get individual taxes for each individual item. From this report you can have a look of which items are sold or purchase most.
-
-
-
-
-
-### Budget Variance
-
-In ERPNext, you can assign expense budget for an expense account against any specific cost center. This report gives a comparison between budgeted and actual expenses and the variance (the difference between the two) in monthly / quarterly / yearly view.
-
-
-
-### GSTR-1 (India)
-
-The GSTR-1 report helps Indian users to file monthly return of outward supplies. This report shows all the sales transactions of the company in Govt specified format. The output of the report is changed based on the selected type of business (B2B, B2C Large, B2C Small, CDNR and Export).
-
-
-
-### GSTR-2 (India)
-
-The GSTR-2 report helps Indian users to file monthly return of inward supplies. The report gives the details of all inward supplies of goods or services received during a month, in Govt specified format.
-
-
-
-### Sales or Purchase Invoice Trends
-
-Another very useful report is invoice trends, From this report you can easily get the trending items on monthly, quaterly, half yearly or yearly basis. You will get the idea of sales and purchase both in quantity and amount.
-
-
-
-### Other Reports:
-
-- **Ordered Items To Be Billed:** The report shows the items which has been ordered by customers, against which Sales
-Invoice has not been created / partially been created.
-- **Delivered Items To Be Billed:** The items which has been delivered to the customers, but Sales Invoice has not been created / partially been created.
-- **Purchase Order Items To Be Billed:** The report shows the items which has been ordered from the suppliers, but Purchase Invoice has not been created / partially been created.
-- **Received Items To Be Billed:** The items which has been received from the suppliers, but Purchase Invoice has not been created / partially been created.
-- **Customer Credit Balance:** The report shows the credit limit, outstanding and credit balance for each customer.
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounts-receivable.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounts-receivable.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 62330fef..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounts-receivable.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-# How to see Accounts Receivable report based on payment terms
-
-This report shows all the account receivables based on payment terms. For more information on **Payment Terms** in ERPNext click here
-
-Accounts Receivable report based on payment terms can be seen by navigating to page shown below and click the checkbox ```Based On Payment Terms``` as shown in the image below.
->Accounts>Accounting Statements>Accounts Receivable
-
-
-
-As seen in the example below outstanding amount against each payment term can be seen. **Invoiced Amount** shows each payment term amount and **Paid Amount** shows paid amount against each payment term. Payment against each term is allocted in FIFO order.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ec7e0dba..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-
-# Advance Payment Entry
-
-Payment done by the customer before accepting delivery of the product is an
-Advance Payment. For Orders of high value, the business houses expect to
-receive advance.
-
-
-__For Example:__ Consider a customer- Jane D'souza placing an order for a double
-bed costing $10000 She is asked to give some advance before the furniture
-house begins work on her order. She gives them $5000 in cash.
-
-Once Sales Order or Purchase Order is submitted, you will find option to create Advance Payment entry against it.
-
-To directly create Advance Payment Entry, Go to:
-
-> Accounts > Documents > Journal Entry > New Journal Entry
-
-Select a Voucher Type based on a mode in which advance payment is made.
-
-Since the customer has given $5000 as cash advance,it will be recorded as a
-credit entry against the customer. To balance it with the debit entry [as per the Double
-accounting system] enter $5000 as debit against the company's cash account. In
-the row "Is Advance" click 'Yes'.
-
-#### Figure 1 : Journal Entry -Advance Entry
-
-
-
-### Double Entry Accounting
-
-Double entry bookkeeping is a system of accounting in which every transaction
-has a corresponding positive and negative entry : debits and credits. Every
-transaction involves a [debit entry
-](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/debit)in one account
-and a [credit
-entry](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/credit) in another
-account. This means that every transaction must be recorded in two accounts;
-one account will be debited because it receives value and the other account
-will be credited because it has given value.
-
-
-#### Figure 2: Transaction and Difference Entry
-
-
-
-Save and submit the Journal Entry. If this document is not saved it will not be pulled in
-other accounting documents.
-
-When you make a new Sales Invoice for the same customer, mention the advance
-in the Sales Invoice Form.
-
-To link the Sales Invoice to the Journal Entry which mentions the advance
-payment entry, click on ‘Get Advances Received’. Allocate the amount of
-advance in the advances table. The accounting will be adjusted accordingly.
-
-#### Figure 3: Receive Advance
-
-
-
-Save and submit the Sales Invoice.
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 15af5708..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-#Adjust Withhold Amount in the Payment Entry
-
-###Question
-
-Let's assume that outstanding against a Sales Invoice is 20,000. When client makes payment, they will only pay 19,600. Rest 400 will be booked under Withhold account. How to manage this scenario in the Payment Entry.
-
-###Answer
-
-In the Payment Entry, you can mention Withhold Account in the Deductions or Loss table. Detailed steps below.
-
-####Step 1: Setup Withhold Account
-
-Create a Withhold Account in your Chart of Accounts master.
-
-`Accounts > Chart of Accounts'
-
-####Step 2: Payment Entry
-
-To create Payment Entry, go to unpaid Sales Invoice and create click on Make Payment button.
-
-#####Step 2.1: Enter Payment Amount
-
-Enter Payment Amount as 19,600.
-
-
-
-#####Step 2.2: Allocate Against Sales Invoice
-
-Against Sales Invoice, allocate 20,000 (explained in GIF below).
-
-#####Step 2.3: Add Deduction/Loss Account
-
-You can notice that there is a difference of 400 in the Payment Amount and the Amount Allocated against Sales Invoice. You can book this difference account under Withhold Account.
-
-
-
- Following same steps, you can also manage difference availed due to Currency Exchange Gain/Loss.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/bulk-payment-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/bulk-payment-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7c86b89b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/bulk-payment-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Bulk Payment Entry
-
-If you want to create a single payment entry adjusting against multiple invoices, follow the steps given below.
-
-* Make a "New Payment Entry".
-* Select a Party Type and Party. On selection of a Party, all the outstanding invoices will be fetched for that Customer/Supplier.
-* Enter the Payment Amount.
-* Allocate the amount against invoices/orders as needed.
-* Save and Submit Payment Entry.
-
-### Demo of Bulk Payment Entry
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/changing-parent-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/changing-parent-account.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d58a64d4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/changing-parent-account.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-#Changing Parent Account
-
-Chart of Account has hierarchical structure. Each account has a parent it is listed under.
-
-There are some accounts which are auto-created. For example, Account for Warehouse is auto-created when new Wareouse is added in the system. These accounts are added under pre-defined account ledger. Warehouse Account is always added under Stock Assets, under Current Assets.
-
-If you wish to place specific Account into another parent Account, you can achieve the same as below.
-
-####1. Go to Chart of Account
-
-`Accounts > Setup > Chart of Account`
-
-Click on Account for which Parent Account is to be changed.
-
-####2. Edit Account
-
-
-
-####3. Change Parent Account
-
-Search and select preferred Parent Account and save.
-
-
-
-Refresh system from Help menu to experience the change.
-
-
-
- Note: Parent cannot be customized for the Root Accounts, like Asset, Liability, Income, Expense, Equity.
-
-#### Quick Help
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/common-receivable-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/common-receivable-account.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9cdc631c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/common-receivable-account.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Common Receivable Account
-
-As per the party model, a common receivable account called **Debtor** is auto-created. This is a default Receivable Account for all the Customers.
-
-
-
-If needed, you can also create a new receivable account and update in the Customer master.
-
-**Question:** Should I create separate Receivable Account Account for each Customer?
-
-**Answer:** You can, but it's not a recommend approach. If you want to create separate Receivable Account for each Customer for tracking receivable, then it not needed. You still view Account Receivable & General Ledger report for each Customer.
-
-Just like Debtors, for tracking payables, default account called Creditors is created under Account Payables.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/difference-entry-button.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/difference-entry-button.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4e5b1090..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/difference-entry-button.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-#Difference Entry
-
-As per accounting standards, debit in a accounting entry must be equal to credit. If not, system does allow submission of accounting transaction, thereby stops ledger posting. In ERPNext, on saving accounting entry, system validates if debit and credit is tallying.
-
-
-
-To have entry balanced, you should one more row, select another account, and update different amount in it. Or you can add difference amount in one of the Account's row itself.
-
-On clicking 'Make Difference Entry' button, new Row will be added under Journal Entry Accounts table, with difference amount. You can edit that row to select appropriate Account.
-
-
-
-On selecting account under new row, debit and credit an entry will be tallying, and you should be able to submit Journal Entri correctly.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/exchange-rate-field-frozen.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/exchange-rate-field-frozen.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8250aaa9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/exchange-rate-field-frozen.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Exchange Rate Field Frozen
-
-In ERPNext, you can fetch Exchange Rates between currencies in real-time, or save specific exchange rates as well. In ERPNext, saved exchange rates are also referred as Stale Exchange Rate.
-
-In your sales and purchase transactions, if the field of Currency Exchange Rate is frozen, that is because the feature of allowing stale exchange rates in transactions is enabled. To you wish to make Currency Exchange Rate field editable again, then disable the feature of Stale Exchange Rate from:
-
-* Accounts > Setup > Accounts Settings
-* Uncheck field "Allow Stale Exchange Rates".
- 
-* Save Account Settings
-* Refresh your ERPNext account
-* Check Sales / Purchase transaction once again
-
-After this setting, the Exchange Rate field in the transactions should become editable once again.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-creation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-creation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6276b932..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-creation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fiscal Year Creation
-
-New Fiscal Year should be created each year, at the end of the current fiscal year. Creation of new Fiscal Year before its begining has been automated in ERPNext.
-
-Three days prior to the end of the current Fiscal Year, system checks if new Fiscal Year for the incoming year is already created. If not, then system auto-creates new Fiscal Year.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7ff9e728..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fixing Fiscal Year Error
-
-While creating any entry, system validates if dates (like Posting Date, Transaction Date etc.) belongs to Fiscal Year selected. If not, system through an error message saying:
-
-`Date ##-##-#### not in fiscal year`
-
-You are more likely to receive this error message if your Fiscal Year has changes, but new Fiscal Year still not set a default. To ensure new Fiscal Year is auto updated in the transactions, you should setup your master as instructed below.
-
-#### Create New Fiscal Year
-
-Only User with System Manager's Role Assigned has permission to create new Fiscal Year. To create new Fiscal Year, go to:
-
-`Accounts > Setup > Fiscal Year`
-
-Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.html) to learn more about Fiscal Year.
-
-#### Set Fiscal Year as Default
-
-After Fiscal Year is saved, you will find option to set that Fiscal year as Default.
-
-
-
-Default Fiscal Year will be updated in the Global Default setting as well. You can manually update Default Fiscal Year from:
-
-`Setup > Settings > Global Default`
-
-
-
-Save Global Default, and Reload your ERPNext account. Then, default Fiscal Year will be auto-updated in your transactions.
-
-Note: In transactions, you can manually select required Fiscal Year, from More Info section.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-account.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0074d35a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-account.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Freeze an Account
-
-Once an Account is Frozen, you won't be able to use it any accounting transaction. Since this is a critical action, you need to explicitly define a Role who can set an Account as Frozen. You can define this Role in the Account Settings.
-
-`Accounts > Account Settings`
-
-To freeze an Account, go to Chart of Accounts, and edit an Account.
-
-
-
-If User has Role define in the Account Setting assigned, then he/she will be able to set an Account as Frozen.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-accounting-entries.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-accounting-entries.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d83567ac..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-accounting-entries.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-#Freeze Accounting Entries
-
-To freeze accounting entries upto a certain date, follow below given steps.
-
-#### Step 1: Go to:
-
-`Accounts > Setup > Accounts Settings`
-
-#### Step 2: Set Date
-
-Set date in the **Accounts Frozen Upto** field.
-
-
-
-Now, the system will not allow to make any accounting entries before set date. If at all someone tries creating entries, system will show error message as below.
-
-
-
-You can still allow user with certain role to create/edit entries within accounts frozen date. You can set that Role in the Account Settings itself.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-customise-cash-flow-report.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-customise-cash-flow-report.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 48a4ff86..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-customise-cash-flow-report.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,157 +0,0 @@
-
-# How To Customise Cash Flow Report
-
-As your chart of accounts begins to get more complex and reporting standards change and evolve, the default cash flow
-report might no longer suffice. This is because ERPNext might not be able to accurately guess the classification and
-purpose of all accounts in the charts of accounts. Another gripe you might have is the inability to adjust the report
-format to fit your needs.
-
-This will no longer be a problem because ERPNext now allows users to customise the cash flow report.
-
-
-## Technical Overview
-Customisation is made possible by the introduction of two new doctypes - Cash Flow Mapper and Cash Flow Mapping. Both
-doctypes contain the information required to generate a cash flow report.
-
-Cash Flow Mapping shows how accounts in your charts of accounts map to a line item in your cash flow report while
-Cash Flow Mapper gets all the Cash Flow Mappings that relate to the three sections of a cash flow statement.
-
-With this, you generate detailed cash flow reports to your requirements. This might not make a lot of sense but it will
-after we go through an example.
-
-## Example
-### Background information
-Let's assume we have a fictitious company for which we want to generate a cash flow report.
-This is what the cash flow report looks like at the moment:
-
-
-We don't like the report for the following reasons:
-- The reporting format is too scant.
-- The 'Net Cash From Operations' figure is wrong
-
-### Customisation Process
-
-We wants the Cash Flow Report to look something similar to the format in the images below:
-
-
-
-#### Activate Customised Cash Flow Report
-Do this in Accounts Settings by checking the 'Use Custom Cash Flow Format' checkbox. This will cause ERPNext to only
-use your custom format for cash flow reports.
-
-After doing that, your cash flow report should look like this:
-
-
-Move to the next section to build the report.
-
-#### Create Cash Flow Mappings
-For each line, we need to create a Cash Flow Mapping document to represent it.
-
-
-
-You can think of the Cash Flow Mapping as a representation of each line in the cash flow report. A Cash Flow Mapping
-is a child of a Cash Flow Mapper which will be explained later.
-
-Let's start by creating Cash Flow Mappings that will represent the add back of non cash expenses already recodgnised in
-the Profit or Loss statement. We want them to appear on the cash statement as:
-- Income taxes recognised in profit or loss
-- Finance costs recognised in profit or loss
-- Depreciation of non-current assets
-
-Start by opening a new Cash Flow Mapping form.
-
-The fields in the Cash Flow Mapping doctype are:
-- **Name**: This something to identify this document. Name it something related to the label
-- **Label**: This is what will show in the cash flow statement
-- **Accounts**: This table contains all the accounts which this line relates to.
-
-With this information, let's go ahead and create the Cash Flow Mapping Document for the line 'Income taxes recognised in profit or loss'
-
-
-
-I have named it 'Income Tax Charge' and given it a label 'Income taxes recognised in profit or loss'. We want this
-line to reflect income tax charges from our profit or loss statement. The account where this happens in our chart
-of account is named 'Income Taxes' (an expense) so I have added 'Income Taxes' into the accounts table. If you have
-more accounts representing income tax expenses, you should add all of them here.
-
-Because Income Tax expense needs to be adjusted further in the cash flow statement, check the 'Is Income Tax Expense'
-checkbox. This is what will help ERPNext properly calculate the adjustments to be made.
-
-*For best results, let parent accounts have child accounts that have the same treatment for cash flow reporting
-purposes because ERPNext will calculate net change of all children accounts in a situation where the selected account
-is a parent account.*
-
-In the same way, I have created for the remaining two mappings.
-
-
-
-Finance costs also need to be adjusted so make sure to check the 'Is Finance Cost' checkbox.
-
-
-
-Next let's add Cash Flow Mapping for items that show changes in working capital:
-- Increase/(decrease) in other liabilities
-- (Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables
-- Increase/(decrease) in trade and other payables
-- VAT payable
-- (Increase)/decrease in inventory
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Don't forget to tell ERPNext that these mappings represent changes in working capital by checking the 'Is Working
-Capital' checkbox.
-
-At this point we have created all the mappings necessary for the Operating Activities section of our cash flow
-statement. However, ERPNext doesn't know that yet until we create Cash Flow Mapper documents. We'll create Cash Flow
-Mapper documents next.
-
-
-#### Create Cash Flow Mappers
-Cash Flow Mappers represents the sections of the cash flow statement. A standard cash flow statement has only three
-sections so when you view the Cash Flow Mapper list, you will that three have been created for you named:
-- Operating Activities
-- Financing Activities
-- Investing Activities
-
-You will not be able to add or remove any of them but they are editable and can be renamed.
-
-
-
-Open the Operating Activities Cash Flow Mapper so we can add the Cash Flow Mappings we have created.
-
-
-- **Section Name**: This is the heading of the section.
-- **Section Leader**: This is the first sub-header immediately after the profit figure. Relates only to Operating
-Activities Cash Flow Mapper
-- **Section Subtotal**: This is the label for subtotal in the cash flow statement section. Relates only to Operating
-Activities Cash Flow Mapper
-- **Section Footer**: This is the label for the total in the cash flow statement section.
-- **Mapping**: This table contains all the Cash Flow Mappings related to the Cash Flow Mapper.
-
-Now add all the Cash Flow Mappings you have created and Save. You should have something like this:
-
-
- Refresh the cash flow statement and view the changes.
-
-
-Looks close to our requirements but we are not done yet. Create new mappings for 'Investing Activities' and 'Financing
-Activities' sections of the cash flow statement.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Here's what our cash flow statement now looks like:
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-freeze-accounting-ledger.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-freeze-accounting-ledger.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ee980a3e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-freeze-accounting-ledger.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-
-#How To Freeze Accounting Ledger?
-
-If you want to discontinue using specific Account, you can freeze it.
-
->Account can be Frozen by the User having specific Role. This Role for set in the Account Settings, in the field "Role Allowed to Set Frozen Accounts & Edit Frozen Entries".
-
-Please check following steps to freeze an Account from the Chart of Accounts master.
-
-####Step 1: Chart of Accounts
-
-To edit an Account, go to Chart of Accounts:
-
-`Explore > Accounts > Chart of Accounts`
-
-
-
-Click on Account in which Frozen Date is to be updated.
-
-####Step 2: Set Account as Frozen
-
-In the Account form, you will find a field called **Frozen**. Set value in this field as 'Yes'
-
-
-
-####Step 3: Save
-
-After update Save an Account.
-
-On saving, this Account will be frozen and will not be selectable in any accounting transaction.
-
- Note: In future, if you want to make an accounting transaction against this Account, then you can unfreeze this account by setting values in the Frozen field as 'No'.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-manage-subscriptions-with-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-manage-subscriptions-with-erpnext.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2cd5bdd6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-manage-subscriptions-with-erpnext.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
-
-# How To Manage Subscriptions With ERPNext
-
-ERPNext now allows you to manage your subscriptions easily. A single subscription can contain multiple plans. At
-the same time, A single subscriber can also have multiple subscriptions. ERPNext also automatically manages your
-subscriptions for you by generating new invoices when due and changing the subscription status for you.
-
-## Related Doctypes
-### Subscriber
-Like its name suggests, the Subscriber Doctype represents your subscribers and each record is linked to a single
-Customer.
-
-
-
-### Subscription Plan
-Each Subscription Plan is linked to a single Item and contains billing and pricing information on the Item. You can have
-multiple Subscription Plans for a single Item. An example of a situation where you would want this is where you have
-different prices for the same Item like when you have a basic option and premium option for a service.
-
-
-
-### Subscription Settings
-Subscription Settings is where you tweak the behaviour of the Subscription Doctype. For example, you can set a grace
-period for overdue invoices from it. You can also elect to have a subscription cancelled if an overdue invoice is not
-paid after the grace period.
-
-
-
-## Creating A Subscription
-To create a Subscription, go to the Subscription creation form
-`Explore > Accounts > Subscriptions`
-
-
-
-Select a Subscriber.
-
-If you want to cancel a subscription at the end of the present billing cycle, check the 'Cancel At End Of Period'
-check box.
-
-Select the start date for the subscription. By default, the start date is today's date. (Optional).
-
-If you are giving the subscriber a trial, enter the Trial Period Start Date and Trial Period End Date.
-
-If your invoice is not payable immediately, you can set the number of days before the invoice will be due in the
-'Days Until Due' field.
-
-If you require more than one unit of a plan, set it in the 'Quantity' field. For instance, a web developer is subscribed
-to your web hosting service. The developer buys a plan for each customer. Instead of having multiple subscriptions for
-the same plan, you can simply increase the quantity as needed.
-
-In the 'Plan' table, add Subscription Plans as required. You may have multiple Subscription Plans in a single
-Subscription as long as they all have the same billing period cycle. If the same Subscriber needs to subscribe to
-plans with different billing cycles, you will have to use a separate subscription.
-
-Select a Sales Taxes and Charges Template if you need to charge tax in your invoices.
-
-Fill the relevant fields in the 'Discounts' section if you need to add discounts to your invoices.
-
-Click Save.
-
-### Subscription Status
-ERPNext Subscription has five status values:
-- **Trialling** - A subscription that is in trial period
-- **Active** - A subscription that does not have any unpaid invoice
-- **Past Due** - A subscription whose most recent invoice is unpaid but is still within the grace period
-- **Unpaid** - A subscription whose most recent invoice is unpaid and past the grace period
-- **Canceled** - A subscription whose most recent invoice is unpaid and past the grace period. In this state, ERPNext no longer monitors the subscription.
-
-### Subscription Processing In The Background
-Every one hour interval, ERPNext processes all Subscriptions and updates each for any change in status. It will
-create new invoices if need be. When an outstanding invoice is paid, ERPNext updates the subscription accordingly.
-
-### Manually Updating Subscriptions
-Once you have saved a subscription, you can change the 'Days Until Due', 'Quantity', 'Plans', 'Sales Taxes and Charges
-Template', 'Apply Additional Discount On', 'Additional Discount Percentage' and 'Additional Discount Amount' fields.
-
-Note that changing any of the values will reflect in newly generated invoices only. Previously generated invoices will
-not be changed.
-
-### Cancelling Subscriptions
-To cancel a Subscription, simply click the 'Cancel Subscription' button. The subscription will update its 'Cancellation
-Date' field and the subscription will no longer be monitored.
-
-If you are cancelling an active subscription, an invoice will immediately be generated. The generated invoice will be on
-pro-rata basis by default. If you want ERPNext always create an invoice for the full amount, uncheck the 'Prorate' field
-in Subsciption Settings.
-
-### Restarting Subscriptions
-To restart a canceled subscription, simply click the 'Restart Subscription' button. Note the Subscription will empty
-its invoices table. Note that the invoices will still exist but the Subscription will no longer track them. The start
-date of the subscription will also be changed to the date the Subscription is restarted. The start of the billing
-cycle will also be set to the date the Subscription is restarted.
-
-### Recalculating Subscriptions
-Some times, a Subscription's status might have changed but might not yet be reflected in the Subscription. You can force
-ERPNext to update the subscription by clicking 'Fetch Subscription Updates'.
-
-### Subscription Settings
-**Grace Period** represents the number of days after a subscriber's invoice becomes overdue that ERPNext should delay
-before changing the Subscription status to 'Canceled' or 'Unpaid'.
-
-**Cancel Invoice After Grace Period** would cause ERPNext to automatically cancel a subscription if it is not paid before the grace period elapses. This setting is off by default.
-
-**Prorate** would cause ERPNext to generate a prorated invoice when an active subscription is canceled by default.
-If you would prefer a full invoice, uncheck the setting.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 419196a0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center
-changing-parent-account
-difference-entry-button
-fiscal-year-error
-freeze-accounting-entries
-how-to-freeze-accouting-ledger
-manage-foreign-exchange-difference
-managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency
-fiscal-year-creation
-post-dated-cheque-entry
-update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice
-what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges
-withdrawing-salary-from-owners-equity-account
-adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry
-common-receivable-account.md
-types-in-tax-template
-freeze-account
-round-off-account-validation
-exchange-rate-field-frozen
-bulk-payment-entry
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/manage-foreign-exchange-difference.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/manage-foreign-exchange-difference.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2a50a50a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/manage-foreign-exchange-difference.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-# Manage Foreign Exchange Difference
-
-In ERPNext, you can create transactions in the foriegn currency as well. When creating transaction in the foreign currency, system updates current exchanage rate with respect to customer/supplier's currency and base currency on your Company. Since Exchange Rate is always flucuating, on might receive payment from the client on exchange rate different from one mentioned in the Sales/Purchase Invoice. Following is the intruction on how to manage different amount avail in payment entry due to exchange rate change.
-
-#### Add Expense Account
-
-To mange currency difference, create Account **Foreign Exchange Gain/Loss**. This account is generally created on the Expense side of P&L statement. However, you can place it under another group as per your accounting requirement.
-
-
-
-#### Book Payment Entry
-
-In the payment voucher, update invoice amount against Customer or Supplier account, then update actual payment amount against Bank/Cash account. Add new row and select Foreign Exchange Gain/Loss to update currency difference amount.
-
-In the below scenario, Sales Invoice was made EUR, at the exchange rate of 1.090. As per this rate, Sales Invoice amount in USD (base currency) was $1000.
-
-One receipt of payment, exchange rate changed. As per the new exchange rate, payment received in the base currency was $1080. This means gain of $80 due to change in exchange rate. Following is how Foreign Exchange Gain will be booked in this scenerio.
-
-
-
-In case you incur loss due to change foriegn exchnage rate, then different amount about be updated in the debit of Foreign Exchange Gain/Loss account. Also you can add another row to update another expenses like bank charges, remittance charges etc.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 16e375e1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-#Managing Transactions In Multiple Currency
-
-In ERPNext, transactions can be created in the base currency as well as in parties (customer or supplier) currency. If transaction is created in the parties currency, their currency symbol is updated in the print format as well.
-
-Let's consider a Sales Invoice, where your base currency is of a Company is USD and party currency is EUR.
-
-#### Step 1: New Sales Invoice
-
-`Accounts > Documents > Sales Invoice > New`
-
-#### Step 2: Select Party
-
-Select Customer from the Customer master. If default Currency is updated in the Customer master, same will be fetched in the Sales Invoice as well, as Customer Currency.
-
-#### Step 3: Exchange Rate
-
-Currency Exchange between base currency and customer currency will auto-fetch.
-
-
-
-#### Step 4: Update Details
-
-Update other details like Item, Taxes, Terms. In the Taxes and other Charges table, charges of type Actual should be updated in the Customer's currency.
-
-#### Step 4: Save and Submit
-
-Save Sales Invoice and then check Print Format. For all the Currency field (rate, amount, totals) Customer's Currency symbol will be updated as well.
-
-
-
-#### Currency Exchange Masters
-
-If you have come to terms with party to follow standard exchange rate throughout, you can capture it by creating Currency Exchange Rate master. To create new Currency Exchange Rate master, go to:
-
-`Accounts > Setup > Currency Exchange`
-
- If system find Exchange Rate master for any currency, it is given preference over currency exchange rate.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/post-dated-cheque-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/post-dated-cheque-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index eb8bcb60..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/post-dated-cheque-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-
-#Post Dated Cheque Entry
-
-Post Dated Cheque is a cheque dated on future date. Party generally give post dated cheque, as advance payment. This cheque would be cleared only when cheque date arrives.
-
-In ERPNext, create Payment Entry for post dated cheque.
-
-####New Payment Entry
-
-To open new journal voucher go to
-
-`Explore > Accounts > Payment Entry > New`
-
-#### Set Posting Date
-
-Assuming your Cheque Date is 31st December, 2016 (or any future date). As a result, this posting in your bank ledger will appear on Posting Date updated.
-
-
-
-Note: Payment Entry Reference Date should equal to or less than Posting Date.
-
-####Step 3: Save and Submit
-
-After entering required details, Save and Submit the Payment Entry.
-
-####Adjusting Post Dated Cheque Entry
-
-You can adjust Post Dated Payment Entry against an invoice via [Payment Reconciliation Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.html).
-
-When cheque is cleared, i.e. on actual date on the cheque, you can update its Clearance Date via [Bank Reconciliation Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.html).
-
-In the Chart of Accounts, you might find value of this Payment Entry already reflecting against bank Account. You should check **Bank Reconciliation Statement**, a report in the account module to know difference of bank balance as per system, and actual balance in the bank's statement.
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/purchase-invoice-account-type-error.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/purchase-invoice-account-type-error.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f018772f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/purchase-invoice-account-type-error.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Purchase Invoice - Account Type Error
-
-**Question:** On saving the Purchase Invoice, I am getting a validation message that Credit To Account must be a Balance Sheet account.
-
-
-
-**Answer: **On submission of a Purchase Invoice, payable is updated towards the Supplier. As per the accounting standards, Payable Account is aligned under Current Liability (credit side of Balance Sheet).
-
-The error message indicates that Account selected in the Credit To field doesn't belong to the Liability Group. Please ensure that Payable Account selected in the Purchase Invoice is located under Liability group.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/round-off-account-validation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/round-off-account-validation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4d7aa085..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/round-off-account-validation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-# Round of Account Validation Message
-
-**Question**
-
-When submitting an invoice, why does it ask for a Round Off Account? How to update it?
-
-
-
-**Answer**
-
-In the Purchase Invoice, Grand Total is calculated based on various calculations like:
-
-- Qty * Rate = Amount
-- Tax and other charges applied to each item
-- Discount applied to some or all the items
-- Multiplication with exchange rate, in case of multiple currencies
-
-As a result of multiple calculations, there could be some rounding loss in the final amount. This rounding loss is generally very marginal like 0.034. But for the accounting accuracy, has to be posted in the accounts. Hence, you need to define a default Round-Off account in the Company master in which such amount availed as a result of rounding loss can be booked.
-
-You need to create Round-off Account in the Chart of Accounts and update in the Company master. Steps here.
-
-* Accounts > Chart of Accounts
-* In the Chart of Account, check or create new Account under Expense > Direct Expense. Ignore if account for this purpose already existing
-* Come to Company master
- Account > Company
-* Open Company in which Round-Off account has to be updated.
-* In the Company master, scroll to Accounts Settings and select Round-Off account and Cost Center.
- 
-
-Once Round-Off account this updated in the Company master, then try to submit Purchase Invoice once again.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 032ac6a5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
-
-#Tracking Project Profitability using Cost Center
-
-To track expenses and profibility for a project, you can use Cost Centers. You should create separate Cost Center for each Project. This will allow you to.
-
-- Allocating budget on expense for Projects.
-- Tracking Profitability of Project.
-
-Let's check steps on how Project and Cost Center should be linked, and used in the sales and purchase transactions.
-
-### 1. Linking Project and Cost Center
-
-#### 1.1 Create Project
-
-To create new Project, go to:
-
-`Projects > Project > New`
-
-
-
-#### 1.2 Create Cost Center
-
-Since budgeting and costing for each Project will be managed separately, you should create separate Cost Center for each Project.
-
-To create new Cost Center, go to:
-
-`Accounts > Setup > Cost Center`
-
-[Click here to learn how to manage Cost Centers.](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.html)
-
-#### 1.3 Update Cost Center in the Project
-
-Update Cost Center in the Project master.
-
-
-
-In the sales and purchase transactions, if Project is selected, then Cost Center will fetched from the Project master.
-
-Let's check how this setting will affect your sales and purchase entries.
-
-### 2. Project and Cost Center in Sales & Purchase Transactions
-
-#### 2.1 Project in the Sales Transactions
-
-In the sales transactions (which are Sales Order, Delivery Note and Sales Invoice), Project will be selected in the More Info section. On selection of a Project, respective Cost Center will be updated for all the items in that transaction. Cost Center will be updated on in the transactions which has Cost Center field.
-
-
-
-#### 2.2 Project in the Purchase Transactions
-
-In the purchase transactions, Project is define for each line item. This is because you can create a consolidated purchase entry for various projects. On selection of Project, its default cost center will auto-fetch.
-
-As per perpetual inventory valuation system, expense for the purchased item will be booked when raw-materials are consumed. On consumption of goods, if you are creating Material Issue (stock) entry, then Expense Cost (says Cost of Goods Sold) and Project's Cost Center should be updated in that entry.
-
-
-
-### 3. Accounting Report for a Project
-
-#### 3.1 Projectwise Profitability
-
-Since Project's Cost Center is updated in both sales and purchase entries, you can check Project Profitability based on report on Cost Center.
-
-**Monthly Project Analysis**
-
-
-
-**Overall Profitability**
-
-
-
-#### 3.2 Projectwise Budgeting
-
-You can define budgets against the Cost Center associated with a Project. At any point of time, you can refer Budget Variance Report to analysis the expense vs budget against a cost center.
-
-To check Budget Variance report, go to:
-
-`Accounts > Budget and Cost Center > Budget Variance Report`
-
-[Click here to learn how to do budgeting from Cost Center](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.html).
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/types-in-tax-template.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/types-in-tax-template.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0da99c0b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/types-in-tax-template.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-# Types in Sales and Purchase Tax Template
-
-In the Sales Taxes and Purchase Taxes master, you will find a column called Type. Following a brief on a meaning of each Type and how you can use it.
-
-
-
-**Actual:** This allows you to enter expense amount directly. For example, Rs. 500 incurred for Shipping.
-
-**On Net Total:** If you want to apply any tax or charges on Net Total, select this option. For example, 18% GST applied to all the item in the Sales Order.
-
-**On Previous Row Amount:** This option helps you want to calculate tax amount calculated based on another tax amount.
-
-Example: Education Cess is calculated based on the amount of GST tax.
-
-**On Previous Row Total:** For each Tax row, a cumulative tax is calculated in the Total column. For the first row, total tax is calculated as Net Total + Tax amount at first row. If you want to apply a tax on the Total Amount of another tax row, then use this option.
-
-If you select Type as Previous Row Amount or Previous Row Total, then you must also specify a Row No. whose Amount or Total should be considered for the calculation.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice.md
deleted file mode 100755
index eb2b7116..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-#Delivery from Sales Invoice
-
-If you have items delivery and invoicing happening at the same time, you can create delivery from with Sales Invoice itself. Sales Invoice has field called **Update Stock**, just before Item table. If this field is checked, on submission of Sales Invoice, stock of Item will be deducted from selected Warehouse.
-
-
-
-On checking Update Stock, Sales Invoice Item will show relevant fields like Warehouse, Serial No., Batch No., Item valuation etc.
-
-On submission of Sales Invoice, with general ledger posting, stock ledger posting will happen as well.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 80ebf32a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-#Purchase Tax or Charges Categories
-
-Consider Tax or Charge field in Purchase Taxes and Charges master has three values.
-
-- Total
-- Valuation
-- Total and Valuation
-
-
-
-Let's consider an example to understand an effect of each charge type. We purchase ten units of item, at the rate of 800. total purchase amount is 800. Purchased item has 4% VAT applied on it, and INR 100 was incurred in transportation.
-
-####Total:
-
-Tax or Charge categorized as **Total** will be included in the total of purchase transactions. But it will not have impact on the valuation of item purchased.
-
-If VAT 4% is applied on item, it will amount to INR 32 (at item's based rate is 800). Since VAT is the [consumption tax](https://frappe.io/blog/erpnext-features/managing-consumption-tax), its should be added value of Purchase Order/Invoice, since it will be included in payable towards supplier. But its should not be added to the value of Purchased item.
-
-When Purchase Invoice is submitted, general ledger posting will be done for tax/charge categorized as Total.
-
-####Valuation:
-
-Tax or charge categorized as **Valuation** will be added in the value of purchased item, but not in the total of that purchase transaction.
-
-Transportation charge of INR 100 should be categorized as valuation. With this, the value of purchased item will be increased from 800 to 900. Also, this charge will be not be added to the total of purchase transaction, because it your expense, and should not be reflected to the supplier.
-
-Check [here](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html) to learn general posting done for expense categorized as Valuation.
-
-####Total and Valuation:
-
-Tax or Charge categorized as for **Total and Valuation** will be added in the valuation of item, as well as in the totals of purchase transactions.
-
-Let's assume that transportion is arranged by our supplier, but we need to pay transportation charges to them. In that case, for transportation charges, category selected should be Total and Valuation. With this, INR 100 transportation charge will be added to the actual purchase amount 800. Also, INR 100 will reflect in the total, as it will be payable for us towards supplier.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/withdrawing-salary-from-owners-equity-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/withdrawing-salary-from-owners-equity-account.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 234f9d29..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/withdrawing-salary-from-owners-equity-account.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-#Withdrawing Salary from Owner's Equity Account
-
-### Question
-
-After meeting with my accountant here in the US, I was informed that with my company being a sole member, I should not pay myself a salary that would hit the direct expenses account but instead should take a "draw" that hits the balance sheet and not the expenses. Can you please advise how I should set this up in ERP Next please?
-
-### Answer
-
-1. Create an account for **Owner's Equity** under Liabilities if you already do not have. This account will be your investment in the business and the accumulated profits (or losses). It will have a "Credit" type balance.
-2. In an Version 5, Equity will be a new head (not under Liabilities). (In either case Assets = Owner's Equity + Liabilities, so your balance sheet will be okay [Learn more about owner's equity account](http://www.accountingcoach.com/blog/what-is-owners-equity)).
-3. Create an account for **Owner's Draws** under **Owner's Equity**.
-4. Note that the balance of **Owner's Draws** will always be negative since you are reducing money from your total equity / profits.
-
-### Example
-
-Example journal entry (using Journal Voucher in ERPNext) for a withdrawal of $1000 would be:
-
-1. Credit **Cash** $1000
-2. Debit **Owner's Draws** $1000
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/auto_repeat.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/auto_repeat.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a78cd23e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/auto_repeat.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-# Auto Repeat
-
-Auto Repeat feature helps you create certain transaction automatically in a given time period.
-
-## Use Case
-
-Assuming that you follow deferred expense system for some items. It requires you to create same Journal Entry each month to Cr. Deferred Expense a/c to Dr. Expense Account. You can create first Journal Entry manually for it, and then create auto-repeat transaction for it.
-
-
-
-#### Auto Repeat
-
-To set the subscription for the sales invoice Go to Subscription > select base doctype "Sales Invoice" > select base docname "Invoice No" > Save
-
-
-
-**From Date and To Date**: This defines contract period with the customer.
-
-**Repeat on Day**: If frequency is set as Monthly, then it will be day of the month on which recurring invoice will be generated.
-
-**Notify By Email**: If you want to notify the user about auto recurring invoice.
-
-**Print Format**: Select a print format to define document view which should be emailed to customer.
-
-**Disabled**: It will stop to make auto recurring documents against the subscription.
-
-### Difference between Subscription and Auto Repeat
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/bank-guarantee.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/bank-guarantee.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 800bab4a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/bank-guarantee.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Bank Guarantee
-
-A Bank Guarantee is a guarantee from a lending institution such as a bank ensuring the liabilities of a debtor will be met. In other words, if the debtor fails to settle a debt, the bank covers it. A Bank Guarantee enables the customer, or debtor, to acquire goods, buy equipment or draw down loans, and thereby expand business activity.
-
-A client may ask you to provide a Bank Guarantee from a third party such as a bank. This guarantee is for a specified amount, which is usually a percentage of the total value of the contract. The Bank Guarantee is valid for a specified duration after which it expires and must be returned to you by the client.
-
-This document allows you to track Bank Guarantees given to clients. You can set Email Alerts as the Bank Guarantee expiry date approaches to remind yourself to get the Bank Guarantee back from your client.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f473af41..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-
-# Budgeting
-
-In ERPNext, you can set and manage budgets against a cost center or a project. This is useful in controlling your expenses.
-
-For example, if you are doing online sales, you can set a budget for search ads, and configure ERPNext to stop or warn you from over spending beyond the budget set.
-
-Budgets are also great for planning purposes. When you are making plans for the next financial year, you would typically target a revenue based on which you would set your expenses. Setting a budget will ensure that your expenses do not get out of hand, at any point.
-
-### Cost Center
-
-To create new Cost Center, go to:
-
-> Accounts > Budget and Cost Center > Chart of Cost Center > Add New Cost Center
-
-
-
-### Project
-
-To create new Project, go to:
-
-> Projects > project > Add New Project
-
-
-
-
-### Setting a budget
-
-#### Step 1: Create a new Budget
-
-To define a Budget, go to:
-
-> Accounts > Budget and Cost Center > Budget > New
-
-#### Step 2: Select Cost Center or Project
-
-In the Budget form, select a Cost Center or a Project. Budgets can be defined against any Cost Center, whether it is a Group / Leaf node in the Chart of Cost Centers.
-
-#### Step 3: Select Account
-
-In the Budgets table, select Income / Expense account for which budget is to be defined.
-
-
-
-#### Step 4: Monthly Distribution
-
-If you have seasonal business, you can also define a Monthly Distribution record, to distribute the budget between months. If you don't set the monthly distribution, ERPNext will calculate the budget on yearly
-basis or in equal proportion for every month.
-
-
-
-#### Step 5: Control Actions(Alerts)
-
-Control actions can be triggered while material request is being submitted, purchase order is being submitted or while actual expense is being posted(through a journal entry or a purchase invoice).
-
-There are three types of control actions.
-
-* Stop: This will not allow users to submit the transaction.
-
-* Warn: This will show a warning message but lets the user to submit the transaction.
-
-* Ignore: This will neither prevent the user from submitting transaction nor show an error message.
-
-
-
-You can set separate action for monthly and annual budgets.
-
-
-
-####Budget Variance Report
-
-At any point of time, user can check Budget Variance Report to analyse the actual expense incurred vs budget allocated against a cost center or a project.
-
-To check Budget Variance report, go to:
-
-Accounts > Budget and Cost Center > Budget Variance Report
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
deleted file mode 100755
index aba7041b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,202 +0,0 @@
-
-# Chart Of Accounts
-
-The Chart of Accounts forms the blueprint of your organization. The overall
-structure of your Chart of Accounts is based on a system of double entry
-accounting that has become a standard all over the world to quantify how a
-company is doing financially.
-
-The Chart of Accounts helps you to answer:
-
- * What is your organisation worth?
- * How much debt have you taken?
- * How much profit are you making (and hence paying tax)?
- * How much are you selling?
- * What is your expense break-up
-
-You may note that as a business manager, it is very valuable to see how well
-your business is doing.
-
-> Tip: If you can’t read a Balance Sheet (It took me a long time to
-figure this out) it's a good opportunity to start learning about this. It will
-be worth the effort. You can also take the help of your accountant to setup
-your Chart of Accounts.
-
-Financial statements for your company are easily viewable in ERPNext. You can view financial statements
-such as Balance Sheet, Profit and Loss statement and Cash flow statement.
-
-An Example of various financial statement are given below:
-
-#### Cash Flow Report
-
-
-#### Profit and Loss Report
-
-
-#### Balance Sheet Report
-
-
-To edit your Chart of Accounts in ERPNext go to:
-
-> Accounts > Setup > Chart of Accounts
-
-Chart of Accounts is a tree view of the names of the Accounts (Ledgers and
-Groups) that a Company requires to manage its books of accounts. ERPNext sets
-up a simple chart of accounts for each Company you create, but you have to
-modify it according to your needs and legal requirements. For each company,
-Chart of Accounts signifies the way to classify the accounting entries, mostly
-based on statutory (tax, compliance to government regulations) requirements.
-
-Let us understand the main groups of the Chart of Accounts.
-
-
-
-### Balance Sheet Accounts
-
-The Balance Sheet has Application of Funds (/assets) and Sources of Funds
-(Liabilities) that signify the net-worth of your company at any given time.
-When you begin or end a financial period, all the Assets are equal to the
-Liabilities.
-
-> Accounting: If you are new to accounting, you might be wondering, how can
-Assets be equal to Liabilities? That would mean the company has nothing of its
-own. Thats right. All the “investment” made in the company to buy assets (like
-land, furniture, machines) is made by the owners and is a liability to the
-company. If the company would want to shut down, it would need to sell all the
-assets and pay back all the liabilities (including profits) to the owners,
-leaving itself with nothing.
-
-All the accounts under this represent an asset owned by the company like "Bank
-Account", "Land and Property", "Furniture" or a liability (funds that the
-company owes to others) like "Owners funds", "Debt" etc.
-
-Two special accounts to note here are Accounts Receivable (money you have to
-collect from your customers) and Accounts Payable (money you have to pay to
-your suppliers) under Assets and Liabilities respectively.
-
-### Profit and Loss Accounts
-
-Profit and Loss is the group of Income and Expense accounts that represent
-your accounting transactions over a period.
-
-Unlike Balance sheet accounts, Profit and Loss accounts (or PL accounts) do
-not represent net worth (/assets), but rather represent the amount of money
-spent and collected in servicing customers during the period. Hence at the
-beginning and end of your Fiscal Year, they become zero.
-
-In ERPNext it is easy to create a Profit and Loss analysis chart. An example
-of a Profit and Loss analysis chart is given below:
-
-
-
-(On the first day of the year you have not made any profit or loss, but you
-still have assets, hence balance sheet accounts never become zero at the
-beginning or end of a period)
-
-### Groups and Ledgers
-
-There are two main kinds of Accounts in ERPNext - Group and Ledger. Groups can
-have sub-groups and ledgers within them, whereas ledgers are the leaf nodes of
-your chart and cannot be further classified.
-
-Accounting Transactions can only be made against Ledger Accounts (not Groups)
-
-> Info: The term "Ledger" means a page in an accounting book where entries are
-made. There is usually one ledger for each account (like a Customer or a
-Supplier).
-
-> Note: An Account “Ledger” is also sometimes called as Account “Head”.
-
-
-
-### Account Number
-A standard chart of accounts is organized according to a numerical system. Each major category will begin with a certain number, and then the sub-categories within that major category will all begin with the same number. For example, if assets are classified by numbers starting with the digit 1000, then cash accounts might be labeled 1100, bank accounts might be labeled 1200, accounts receivable might be labeled 1300, and so on. A gap between account numbers is generally maintained for adding accounts in the future.
-
-You can assign a number while creating an account from Chart of Accounts page. You can also edit a number from account record, by clicking "Update Account Number" button. On updating account number, system renames the account name automatically to embed the number in the account name.
-
-### Other Account Types
-
-In ERPNext, you can also specify more information when you create a new
-Account, this is there to help you select that particular account in a
-scenario like Bank Account or a Tax Account and has no effect on the Chart
-itself.
-
-Explanation of account types:
-
-* **Bank**
-
- The account group under which bank account will be created.
-
-* **Cash**
-
- The account group under which cash account will be created.
-
-* **Cost of Goods Sold**
-
- The account to book the accumulated total of all costs used to manufacture / purchase a product or service, sold by a company.
-
-* **Depreciation**
-
- The expense account to book the depreciation of the fixed assets.
-
-* **Expenses Included In Valuation**
-
- The account to book the expenses (apart from direct material costs) included in landed cost of an item/product, used in Perpetual Inventory.
-
-* **Fixed Asset**
-
- The account to maintain the costs of fixed assets.
-
-* **Payable**
-
- The account which represents the amount owed by a company to its creditors.
-
-* **Receivable**
-
- The account which represents the amount owed to a company by its debtors.
-
-* **Stock**
-
- The account group under which the warehouse account will be created.
-
-* **Stock Adjustment**
-
- An expense account to book any adjustment entry of stock/inventory. Generally comes at the same level of Cost of Goods Sold.
-
-* **Stock Received But Not Billed**
-
- A temporary liability account which holds the value of stock received but not billed yet and used in Perpetual Inventory.
-
-### Creating / Editing Accounts
-
-To create new Accounts, explore your Chart of Accounts and click on an Account
-group under which you want to create the new Account. On the right side, you
-will see an option to “Open” or “Add Child” a new Account.
-
-
-
-Option to create will only appear if you click on a Group (folder) type
-Account. There you need to enter account name, account number and some more
-optional details.
-
-ERPNext creates a standard structure for you when the Company is created but
-it is up to you to modify or add or remove accounts.
-
-Typically, you might want to create Accounts for
-
- * Travel, salaries, telephone, etc. under **Expenses**.
- * Value Added Tax (VAT), Sales Tax, etc. under **Current Liabilities**.
- * Product Sales, Service Sales, etc. under **Income**.
- * Building, machinery, furniture, etc. under **Fixed Assets**.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-limit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-limit.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dcbb96ed..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-limit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-
-# Credit Limit
-
-
-
-A credit limit is the maximum amount of credit that a financial institution or
-other lender will extend to a debtor for a particular line of credit. From an
-organisation's perspective, it is the maximum amount of credit which a
-customer gets on goods purchased.
-
-To set credit limit go to Customer - Master
-
-> Selling > Document > Customer
-
-
-#### Figure 1: Credit Limit
-
-
-
-Go to the 'CREDIT LIMIT' section and enter the amount in the field Credit Limit.
-
-If you leave CREDIT LIMIT as 0.00, it has no effect.
-
-In case a need arises to allow more credit to the customer as a good-will, the
-Credit Controller has access to submit order even if credit limit is crossed.
-
-To allow any other role to submit transactions by customers whose credit limit
-has expired, go to accounting settings and make changes.
-
-In the field Credit Controller, select the role who would be authorized to
-accept orders or raise credit limits of customers.
-
-To set credit limit at Customer Group Level go to Selling -> Customers -> Customer Group
-
-Go to the 'CREDIT LIMIT' field and enter the amount.
-If you leave CREDIT LIMIT as 0.00, it has no effect.
-
-
-To set credit limit at Company level go to Account -> Company
-
-Go to the 'ACCOUNT SETTINGS' section and enter the amount in the CREDIT LIMIT field.
-If you leave CREDIT LIMIT as 0.00, it has no effect.
-
-For 'CREDIT LIMIT' check functionality, Priority (High to Low) is as below
-1) Customer
-2) Customer Group
-3) Company
-
-
-
-
-#### Figure 2: Credit Controller
-
-
-
-Save the changes.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-note.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-note.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 135716ca..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-note.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-## Credit Note
-
-When you submit a sales invoice for $200...
-
-1. 'Income Account' is credited i.e income is increased by $200 and 'Profit and Loss Statement' reflects this.
-2. Customer is debited i.e amount the customer owes you is increased by $200 and 'Accounts Receivable' report reflects this.
-
-
-
-
-In real world, sometimes you have to **reverse** your sales invoice partially or fully. This can happen for various reasons like...
-
-* All or some of the goods you supplied was damaged in transit
-* All or some the goods you supplied does not meet the quality standards of the customer
-* You may have actually over billed the customer
-* You agree to replace an item you sent with other item as a good will
-
-In order to **reverse** the sales invoice you need to create a 'Credit Note'.
-
-A credit note is a document sent by a seller to the customer, notifying that a credit has been made to their account against the goods returned by the buyer.
-
-A credit note is issued for the value of goods returned by the customer, it may be less than or equal to total amount of the order.
-
-#### How to make credit note in ERPNext
-
-1. If the 'Sales Invoice' against which you need to issue the 'Credit Note' exists in ERPNext, then you can open the sales invoice and click on 'Make' > 'Return / Credit Note' and update the quantity and rate and submit.
- Please note 'Is Return' is checked automatically and also the quantity needs to be in negative.
-
-2. If the 'Sales Invoice' against which you need to issue the 'Credit Note' does not exist in ERPNext, then you can goto Accounts > Sales Invoice > New, manually check 'Is Return' checkbox, set the quantity in negative, add other details like item, rate and finally submit.
-
-Note: For 'Credit Note' it is mandatory that 'Is Return' is checked and quantity is in negative.
-
-#### Example
-
-Customer Mr. Sagar Malhotra has purchased Nokia Lumia worth Rs 42,400 and at the time of delivery, customer noticed that the item is damaged. Now Mr. Malhotra would like to return the product and get a refund. The 'Credit Note' and subsequent 'Payment Entry' needs to be prepared as shown below...
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/debit-note.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/debit-note.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c4a261f2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/debit-note.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-## Debit Note
-
-A debit note is a document sent by a buyer to a seller, or in other words, a purchaser to a vendor while returning goods received on credit. This notifies that a debit has been made to their accounts.
-
-A debit note is issued for the value of the goods returned. In some cases, sellers are seen sending debit notes which should be treated as just another invoice.
-
-##### How to make debit note in ERPNext
-
-The user can make a debit note against the purchase invoice or they can directly make debit note from the purchase invoice without reference
-Goto module Accounts > Purchase Invoice > New > Manually enabled Is Return checkbox
-
-
-
-Note: For debit note set the negative quantity while adding the item
-
-#### Example
-Debit note with payment entry in ERPNext
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/deferred-revenue.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/deferred-revenue.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d686a12..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/deferred-revenue.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-# Deferred Revenue
-
-Deferred revenue, also known as unearned revenue, refers to advance payments a company receives for products or services that are to be delivered or performed in the future.
-
-The company that receives the prepayment records the amount as Deferred revenue on their balance sheet as a liability. Deferred revenue is a liability because it refers to revenue that has not been earned and represents products or services that are owed to a customer. As the product or service is delivered over time, it is recognized as revenue on the income statement.
-
-### Deferred Revenue Usecase
-
-The internet and broadcasting services providers offers subscription plans on quaterly or yearly basis. They take complete payment in advance from the customer for couple of months, but book income on monthly basis in their books of accounts. Following is how they should configure Deferred Revenue accounting in ERPNext to automate the process.
-
-### Item
-
-In the Item master created for the subscription plan, under Deferred Revenue section, check field **Enable Deferred Revenue**. In this section, you can also select a Deferred Revenue account for this particular item and no. of months.
-
-
-
-### Sales Invoice
-
-On creation of Sales Invoice for the Deferred Revenue Item, instead of posting in the Income Account, Deferred Revenue account is Credited by the sale amount.
-
-
-
-
-### Journal Entry
-
-Based on the From Date and To Date set in the Sales Invoice Item table, Journal Entries are created automatically at the end of each month. It debits the value from Deferred Revenue account and credits Income Account selected for an Item in the Sales Invoice. Following is the example of Income for the deferred Revenue Item is booked via multiple Journal Entries.
-
-
-
-### Video Help (Webinar Recording)
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/exchange-rate-revaluation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/exchange-rate-revaluation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 44a4d30c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/exchange-rate-revaluation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-# Exchange Rate Revaluation
-
-In ERPNext, you can make accounting entries in multiple currency. For example, if you have a bank account in foreign currency, you can make transactions in that currency and system will show bank balance in that specific currency only.
-
-## Setup
-
-To get started with multi-currency accounting, you need to assign accounting currency in Account record. You can define Currency from Chart of Accounts while creating Account.
-
-
-
-You can also assign / modify the currency by opening specific Account record for existing Accounts.
-
-
-
-### Exchange Rate Revaluation
-
-Exchange Rate Revaluation feature is for dealing the situation when you have a multiple currency accounts in one company's chart of accounts
-
-Steps :
-
-1. Set the 'Unrealized Exchange / Gain Loss Account' field in Company DocType. This aacount is to balance the difference of total credit and total debit.
-
-
-
-2. Select the Company.
-
-3. Click the Get Entries button. It shows the accounts which having different currency as compare to 'Default Currency' in Company DocType. It will fetch the new exchange rate automatically if not set in Currency Exchange DocType for that currency else it will fetch the 'Exchange Rate' from Currency Exchange DocType
-
-
-
-4. On Submitting, 'Make Journal Entry' button will appear. This will create a journal entry for the Exchange Rate Revaluation.
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/finance-book.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/finance-book.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 80435ddb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/finance-book.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-A Finance Book is a book against which all the accounting entries are booked. You can have multiple finance books, for example one book for tax authorities and another for stockholders.
-
-This is useful if you have to report depreciation and other values in different ways based on regulatory requirements. You can also use this to post alternate balance sheets for your internal reporting.
-
-In ERPNext, Finance Book is not a mandatory setup. But if you choose to create multiple finance books, then you can make entries against a specific finance book by selecting that book in Journal Entry. If a Finance Book field is blank in Journal Entry that means the entry will be available in all finance books.
-
-Many a times, for fixed asset depreciation, company use different depreciation method (Straight Line / Written Down Value / Double Declining Balance) for different finance book. In ERPNext, you can setup different depreciation schedule for each finance book and auto depreciations will booked against that finance book only.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5bd8d776..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-# Accounts
-
-Whether you have an accountant in your internal team OR you do it yourself OR you have chosen to outsourced it,
-the financial accounting process is almost always at the center any business management system (aka an ERP system).
-
-In ERPNext, your accounting operations consists of 3 main transactions:
-
- * Sales Invoice: The bills that you raise to your Customers for the products or services you provide.
-
- * Purchase Invoice: Bills that your Suppliers give you for their products or services.
-
- * Journal Entries: For accounting entries, like payments, credit and other types.
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index b4d27e81..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-chart-of-accounts
-opening-accounts
-sales-invoice
-point-of-sale-pos-invoice
-point-of-sales
-credit-note
-purchase-invoice
-debit-note
-inter-company-invoices
-payments
-journal-entry
-reverse-journal-entry
-finance-book
-mode-of-payment
-inter-company-journal-entry
-payment-entry
-deferred-revenue
-subscription
-auto-repeat
-multi-currency-accounting
-advance-payment-entry
-payment-request
-credit-limit
-bank-guarantee
-loyalty-program
-accounting-entries
-managing-fixed-assets
-budgeting
-item-wise-taxation
-tax-withholding-category
-recurring-orders-and-invoices
-pricing-rule
-tools
-setup
-share
-accounting-reports
-articles
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/inter-company-invoices.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/inter-company-invoices.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7a22442d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/inter-company-invoices.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-
-# Inter Company Invoices
-
-Along with creating Purchase Invoices or Sales Invoices for a single company, you can create inter-linked invoices for multiple companies.
-
-Such as, you can create a Purchase Invoice for a company say 'Company ABC', and create a Sales Invoice against this Purchase Invoice for a company say 'Company XYZ' and link them together.
-
-#### To create Inter Company Invoices as mentioned in the above process, you need to follow the below steps:
-
- - Go to the Customer list, select the customer which you would want to choose for the inter-linked invoices, enable the checkbox, **Is Internal Customer** as shown below:
-
- 
-
- - Along with that, add the company which the Customer represents, i.e. the company for which the Sales Invoice will be created.
- - Next, fill up the child table **Allowed To Transact With** as shown in the image and add the company against which you will be creating a Purchase Invoice, which will be linked with the Sales Invoice created using this Customer.
- - *Easy peasy, right?* Now, you need to follow the similar procedure for setting up a Supplier for inter-linked invoices. And, in the **Represents Company** field, add the company which you added in the child table **Allowed To Transact With** for the Customer.
- - And, in the child table **Allowed To Transact With** for the Supplier, add the company which the Customer represents or against which you are going to make an inter-linked Purchase Invoice. You can refer the below image to avoid any confusion.
-
- 
-
-- Now, create a new Sales Invoice, fill up the fields, and remember to select the Customer who is an internal customer and company which the Customer represents.
-- Submit the Invoice.
-
- 
-
-- Under the **Make** button dropdown, you will find a link **Inter Company Invoice**, on clicking the link, you will be routed to a new Purchase Invoice form page.
-- Here, the supplier and company will be auto-fetched depending on the company you selected in the Sales Invoice. ***Remember**: There can only be a single Internal Supplier or Customer per company.*
-- Submit the invoice, done! Now, both the invoices are inter-linked. *Also, on cancelling any of the invoices, the link will break as well.*
-
-You can follow the same process to create a Purchase Invoice and then an inter-linked Sales Invoice from the submitted Purchase Invoice.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/inter-company-journal-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/inter-company-journal-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 361f7e75..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/inter-company-journal-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-
-# Inter Company Journal Entry
-
-You can also create Inter Company Journal Entry if you are making transactions with multiple Companies.
-You can select the Accounts which you wish to use in the Inter Company transactions.
-Just go to,
-
-> Accounts > Company and Accounts > Chart Of Accounts
-
-Select the Account which you would like to set as an Internal Account for the transaction, and check the **Inter Company Account** checkbox. It can now be used for Inter Company Journal Entry Transactions.
-
-
-
-You need to do the same for all the Companies' Accounts which you want to use for Inter Company Journal Entry transactions.
-
-Now, to create an Inter Company Journal Entry go to:
-
-> Accounts > Company and Accounts > Journal Entry > New
-
-
-
-In the Journal Entry, you must select,
-
-* Type of Voucher - **Inter Company Journal Entry**.
-* Add rows for the individual accounting entries. In each row, you must specify:
- * The Internal account that will be affected.
- * The amount to Debit or Credit.
- * The Cost Center (If it is an Income or Expense).
-
-On submitting the Journal Entry, you will find a button on the top right corner, **Make Inter Company Journal Entry**.
-
-
-
-Click on the button, you will be asked to select the Company against which you wish to create the linked Journal Entry.
-
-
-
-On selecting the Company, you will be routed to another Journal Entry where the relevant fields will be mapped, i.e. Company, Voucher Type, Inter Company Journal Entry Reference etc.
-
-
-
-Select the Internal accounts for the Company selected and submit the Journal Entry, make sure the total Debit and Credit Amounts are same as the previously created Journal Entry's total Credit and Debit Amounts respectively.
-
-You can also find the reference link at the bottom, which will be added in both the linked Journal Entries and will be removed if any of the Journal Entries are cancelled.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/item-wise-taxation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/item-wise-taxation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3756afe4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/item-wise-taxation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-# Itemised Taxation
-
-In the sales and purchase transactions, you can apply taxes and other charges on the items. For the ease of applying taxes, you can fetch values from the [Sales Taxes and Charges master](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes). Taxes and charges are applied equally on all the items. For example, if tax GST 16% is added in the Taxes and Charges table in Sales Order, then it will be applied on all the items in that Sales Order. However, if you need to have different tax rate applied on some of the items, following is how you should setup Items and Sales Taxes and Charges Template master in your ERPNext account.
-
-Let's assume that we are creating a Sales Order. We have Sales Taxes and Charges Template master for GST 16%. Out of all the Sales Items, on one item, only 5% GST will be applied, while one more item is exempted from the tax.
-
-####Step 1: Mention Tax Applicable in the Item master
-
-Items on which differential tax rate is applied, you should mention the tax, that you would apply in the Sales Order, for that item in the Item master itself and change the Tax Rate (in this case 5). Item master has tax table where you can list taxes which will be applied on it.
-
-> Tax rate mentioned in the item master gets preference over tax rate entered in the transactions.
-
-Here is the example of Item on which 5% GST is applied only.
-
-
-
-For the item which is exempted from GST totally, mention 0% as tax rate in the Item master.
-
-> Note: For Item Tax to work, you need to ensure that the Tax accounts set in Item Tax table (with changed tax rates) in Item master are part of the _default_ Sales / Purhcase Tax Template.
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Setup Taxes and Other Charges
-
-In Sales Taxes and Charges Template master, select GST 16% account and mention Tax Rate as 16. This tax rate will be applied on all the Items selected in the Sales Order, unless specific Tax Rate is defined in the Item master.
-
-
-
-If you want to have tax rate always applied from the Item master, then you should update Rate for the tax account as zero in the Taxes and Charges Template master.
-
-####Step 3: Tax Calculation in transaction
-
-In the Sales Order, we have selected many Items. For the items mentioned in blue, tax rate is applied based on tax rate mentioned in the taxes table. For the items highlighted in red, tax rate has fetched for them from the respective item master.
-
-
-
-Please note that item's tax rate will be pulled from the item master only if you have selected same tax account (GST 16% in this case) in both Item master and in Sales Order under Taxes and Charges section.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 416656c7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
-
-# Journal Entry
-
-All types of accounting entries other than **Sales Invoice** and **Purchase
-Invoice** are made using the **Journal Entry**. A **Journal Entry**
-is a standard accounting transaction that affects
-multiple Accounts and the sum of debits is equal to the sum of credits.
-
-To create a Journal Entry go to:
-
-> Accounts > Company and Accounts > Journal Entry > New
-
-
-
-In a Journal Entry, you must select.
-
- * Type of Voucher from the drop down.
- * Add rows for the individual accounting entries. In each row, you must specify:
- * The Account that will be affected
- * The amount to Debit or Credit
- * The Cost Center (if it is an Income or Expense)
- * Against Voucher: Link it to a voucher or invoice if it affects the “outstanding” amount of that invoice.
- * Is Advance: Select “Yes” if you want to make it selectable in an Invoice. Other information in case it is a Bank Payment or a bill.
-
-#### Difference
-
-The “Difference” field is the difference between the Debit and Credit amounts.
-This should be zero if the Journal Entry is to be “Submitted”. If this
-number is not zero, you can click on “Make Difference Entry” to add a new row
-with the amount required to make the total as zero.
-
-* * *
-
-## Common Entries
-
-A look at some of the common accounting entries that can be done via Journal
-Voucher.
-
-#### Expenses (non accruing)
-
-Many times it may not be necessary to accrue an expense, but it can be
-directly booked against an expense Account on payment. For example a travel
-allowance or a telephone bill. You can directly debit Telephone Expense
-(instead of your telephone company) and credit your Bank on payment.
-
- * Debit: Expense Account (like Telephone expense)
- * Credit: Bank or Cash Account
-
-#### Bad Debts or Write Offs
-
-If you are writing off an Invoice as a bad debt, you can create a Journal
-Voucher similar to a Payment, except instead of debiting your Bank, you can
-debit an Expense Account called Bad Debts.
-
- * Debit: Bad Debts Written Off
- * Credit: Customer
-
-> Note: There may be regulations in your country before you can write off bad
-debts.
-
-#### Depreciation
-
-Depreciation is when you write off certain value of your assets as an expense.
-For example if you have a computer that you will use for say 5 years, you can
-distribute its expense over the period and pass a Journal Entry at the end
-of each year reducing its value by a certain percentage.
-
- * Debit: Depreciation (Expense)
- * Credit: Asset (the Account under which you had booked the asset to be depreciated)
-
-> Note: There may be regulations in your country that define by how much
-amount you can depreciate a class of Assets.
-
-#### Credit Note
-
-"Credit Note" is made for a Customer against a Sales Invoice when the
-company needs to adjust a payment for returned goods. When a Credit Note
-is made, the seller can either make a payment to the customer or adjust
-the amount in another invoice.
-
- * Debit: Sales Return Account
- * Credit: Customer Account
-
-#### Debit Note
-
-"Debit Note" is made for a Supplier against a Purchase Invoice or accepted
-as a credit note from supplier when a company returns goods. When a Debit
-Note is made, the company can either receive a payment from the supplier or
-adjust the amount in another invoice.
-
- * Debit: Supplier Account
- * Credit: Purchase Return Account
-
-#### Excise Entry
-
-When a Company buys good from a Supplier, company pays excise duty
-on these goods to Supplier. And when a company sells these goods to Customers,
-it receives excise duty. Company will deduct payable excise duty and deposit balance
-in Govt. account.
-
- * When a Company buys goods with Excise duty:
- * Debit: Purchase Account
- * Debit: Excise Duty Account
- * Credit: Supplier Account
-
- * When a Company sells goods with Excise duty:
- * Debit: Customer Account
- * Credit: Sales Account
- * Credit: Excise Duty Account
-
-> Note: Applicable in India, might not be applicable for your country.
-Please check your country regulations.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/loyalty-program.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/loyalty-program.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7f0db4af..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/loyalty-program.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
-
-# Loyalty Program
-
-
-### What is a Loyalty Program?
-
-A customer loyalty program is a structured and long-term marketing effort which provides incentives to repeat customers who demonstrate loyal buying behavior. Successful programs are designed to motivate customers in a business's target market to return often, make frequent purchases, and shun competitors.
-
--To create a **Loyalty Program** go to: - -> Accounts > Billing > Loyalty Program > New - -
-
-In a Loyalty Program, you must select.
-
- * Type of Program from the drop down.
- * From Date - to provide when to start considering this Program.
- * End Date - to provide till when should this Program's effect be considered.
- * Auto Opt-in to automatically select a Program when creating a new Customer.
- * Add rows for the Collection Tier. In each row, you must specify:
- * Tier name to be assigned to a Customer based on his eligibility.
- * Collection Factor - how much of an amount constitues 1 loyalty point.
- * Minimum Spent - minimum transaction amount to be eligible for this tier.
-
-* * *
-
-## Loyalty Point Entry
--**Loyalty Point Entry** acts as a log to give an overview about which Customer earned how many points across which Invoice. It holds the data Invoice and Customer. - -
-
-* * *
-
-## Customer
--**Loyalty Program** section in Customer master. - -
-
--**Loyalty Point** earned can be viewed in Customer's dashboard. - -
-
-* * *
-
-# How it works ?
-
-### Earning Points
-* Firstly, a **Loyalty Program** needs to be created (as shown in the first screenshot).
-* Assign this **Loyalty Program** to a **Customer**.
-* Goto `Sales Invoice > New` and create an invoice for the **Customer** to whom you have assigned **Loyalty Program**.
-* For this example, an invoice is created with a grand total of `10000 INR` and according to the **Loyalty Program** for a minimum spent of `10000` INR, the Silver Tier collection factor will be eligible and for each `1000` INR spent, the **Customer** will receive 1 point (hence the total point earned on this transaction is 10).
-* Upon submission of the invoice, **Loyalty Point Entry** will be created for this invoice (as shown above under Loyalty Program Entry section).
-* In the **Loyalty Program** upon minimum spent of `19000`, Gold Tier would be eligible. So, if we were to duplicate our current invoice and submit it, the **Customer** will be automatically upgraded to Gold tier as his total expenditure under this current **Loyalty Program** has exceeded the minimum spent value for Gold tier collection factor (as his last invoice was `10000` INR and duplicated from that gives another invoice of `10000` INR, hence his total expenditure becomes `20000` INR).
-
-> Note: The minimum spent in Loyalty Program does not mean a minimum value for a single invoice. Rather it means the sum of amount of invoices for that customer under a particular LOyalty Program scheme.
-
-### Redeeming Points
-* Continuing from the above example where we have created 1 invoice and earned 10 points over it, we create another invoice by duplicating the first, and under the collapsible section for **Loyalty Program**, we check the checkbox for `Redeem Loyalty Points`.
-* The fields for `Loyalty Point`, `Redemption Account` and `Redemption Cost Center` will become visible under this section. The account and cost center will be fetched from the **Loyalty Program** assigned to the **Customer**.
-* Since we have earned 10 points, we can use as many of them as we want. If we try to use more than what we have an error will be thrown.
-* For this example, we'll use all 10 points to be redeemed. Doing so will enable another field which will display the amount calculated using ( loyalty point * convertion factor ). So basically, `10` INR will be lessened from our outstanding amount.
-* When submitted, 2 **Loyalty Point Entry** will be created. One for redeemed, which will be a negative value and one for the current invoice (as the amount is still eligible under a tier).
-
-> Note: For an invoice on which points have been earned, if a return invoice is created, it will delete the original Loyalty Point Entry and create a new one after subtracting the original amount with the returned amount. Also, when cancelling an invoice, its subsequent Loyalty Point Entry will also be deleted.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 644a1df9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-
-# Multi Currency Accounting
-
-In ERPNext, you can make accounting entries in multiple currency. For example, if you have a bank account in foreign currency, you can make transactions in that currency and system will show bank balance in that specific currency only.
-
-## Setup
-
-To get started with multi-currency accounting, you need to assign accounting currency in Account record. You can define Currency from Chart of Accounts while creating Account.
-
-
-
-You can also assign / modify the currency by opening specific Account record for existing Accounts.
-
-
-
-For Customer / Supplier (Party), you can also define it's billing currency in the Party record. If the Party's accounting currency is different from Company Currency, you should mention Default Receivable / Payable Account in that currency.
-
-
-
-
-Once you defined Currency in the Account and selected relevant accounts in the Party record , you are ready to make transactions against them. If Party account currency is different from Company Currency, system will restrict to make transaction for that party with that currency only. If account currency is same as Company Currency, you can make transactions for that Party in any currency. But accounting entries (GL Entries) will always be in Party Account Currency.
-
-You can change accounting currency in Party / Account record, until making any transactions against them. After making accounting entries, system will not allow to change the currency for both Party / Account record.
-
-In case of multi-company setup, accounting currency of Party must be same for all the companies.
-
-### Exchange Rates
-When dealing with multiple currencies, ERPNext has the Currency Exchange module for managing exchange rates. It allows you to save the exchange rate quotes you require.
-
-For foreign currency transactions, ERPNext checks Currency Exchange for any matching record. If this fails, ERPNext will attempt to get the exchange rate quote from [fixer.io](http://fixer.io). If this still fails, then the exchange rate will have to be entered manually.
-
-#### Exchange Rate Selection
-ERPNext automatically fetches the latest exchange rate available.
-
-
-## Transactions
-
-### Sales Invoice
-
-In Sales Invoice, transaction currency must be same as accounting currency of Customer if Customer's accounting currency is other than Company Currency. Otherwise, you can select any currency in Invoice. On selection of Customer, system will fetch Receivable account from Customer / Company. The currency of receivable account must be same as Customer's accounting currency.
-
-Now, in POS, Paid Amount will be entered in transaction currency, instead of earlier Company Currency. Write Off Amount will also be entered in transaction currency.
-
-Outstanding Amount and Advance Amount will always be calculated and shown in Customer's Account Currency.
-
-
-
-### Purchase Invoice
-
-Similarly, in Purchase Invoice, accounting entries will be made based on Supplier's accounting currency. Outstanding Amount and Advance Amount will also be shown in the supplier's accounting currency. Write Off Amount will now be entered in transaction currency.
-
-### Journal Entry
-
-In Journal Entry, you can make transactions in different currencies. There is a checkbox "Multi Currency", to enable multi-currency entries. If "Multi Currency" option selected, you will be able to select accounts with different currencies.
-
-
-
-
-In Accounts table, on selection of foreign currency account, system will show Currency section and fetch Account Currency and Exchange Rate automatically. You can change / modify the Exchange Rate later manually. Debit / Credit amount should be entered in Account Currency, system will calculate and show the Debit / Credit amount in Company Currency automatically.
-
-
-
-## Reports
-
-### General Ledger
-
-In General Ledger, system shows debit / credit amount in both currency if filtered by an Account and Account Currency is different from Company Currency.
-
-
-
-### Accounts Receivable / Payable
-
-In Accounts Receivable / Payable report, system shows all the amounts in Party / Account Currency.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/opening-accounts.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/opening-accounts.md
deleted file mode 100755
index de3502fc..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/opening-accounts.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
-
-# Updating Opening Balance in Accounts
-
-If you are a new company you can start using ERPNext accounting module by going to chart of accounts. However, if you are migrating from a legacy accounting system like Tally or a Fox Pro based software we recommend that you start using accounting in a new financial year, but you could start midway too. To setup your accounts, you will need the following for the “day” you start using accounting in ERPNext:
-
-* Opening capital accounts - like your shareholder’s (or owner’) capital, loans, bank balances on that day.
-
-* List of outstanding sales and purchase invoices (Payables and Receivables).
-
-If you were using another accounting software before, firstly you should close financial statements in that software. The closing balance of the accounts should be updated as an opening balance in the ERPNext. Before starting to update opening balance, ensure that your [Chart of Accounts](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.html) has all the Accounts required.
-
-> Opening entry is only for Balance Sheet accounts and not for the Accounts in the Profit and Loss statement.
-
- * For all assets (excluding Accounts Receivables): This entry will contain all your assets except the amounts you are expecting from your Customers against outstanding Sales Invoices. You will have to update your receivables by making an individual entry for each Invoice (this is because, the system will help you track the invoices which are yet to be paid). You can credit the sum of all these debits against the **Temporary Opening** account.
-
- * For all liabilities: Similarly you need to pass a Journal Entry for your Opening Liabilities (except for the bills you have to pay) against **Temporary Opening** account.
-
-###Opening Entry
-
-#### Step 1: New Journal Entry
-
-To open new Journal Entry, go to:
-
-`Explore > Accounts > Journal Entry`
-
-#### Step 2: Entry Type
-
-If Entry Type is selected as Opening Entry, all the Balance Sheet Accounts will be auto-fetched in the Journal Entry.
-
-
-
-#### Step 3: Posting Date
-
-Select Posting Date on which Accounts Opening Balance will be updated.
-
-#### Step 4: Enter Debit/Credit Value
-
-For each Account, enter opening value in the Debit or Credit column. As per the double entry valuation system, Total Debit value in a entry must be equal to Total Credit value.
-
-
-
-####Step 5: Is Opening
-
-Set field `Is Opening` as `Yes`.
-
-
-
-####Step 6: Save and Submit
-
-After enter opening balance for each account, Save and Submit Journal Entry. To check if Opening Balance for an account is updated correctly, you can check Trial Balance report.
-
-###Selecting Accounts Manually
-
-If your Balance Sheet has many Accounts, then updating Account Opening balance from single Journal Entry can lead to performance issues. In such a scenario, you can multiple Journal Entries to update opening balance in all the Accounts.
-
-If you are updating account opening balance in few accounts at a time, you can use **Temporary Opening** account for balancing purpose. In the standard chart of accounts, a Temporary Opening Account is auto-created under Assets.
-
-
-
-In the Journal Entry, manually select an Account for which opening balance is to be updated. For each Account, enter opening balance value in the Debit or Credit column, based on it's Account Type (Asset or Liability).
-
-For example, if you want to update balance in bank accounts, create Journal Entry as following.
-
-
-
-Once all your invoices are entered, your **Temporary Opening** account will have a balance of zero!
-
-###Trial Balance
-
-After completing the accounting entries, the trial balance report will look like the one given below:
-
-
-
-###Stock Opening
-
-To track stock balance in the Chart of Account, an Account is created for each Warehouse.
-
-`Chart of Accounts > Assets > Current Asset > StocK Assets > (Warehouse Account)`
-
-
-
-To update stock opening balance, create [Stock Reconciliation entry](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.html). Based on the valuation of items's update in the Warehouse, balance will be updated in the Warehouse account.
-
-###Fixed Asset Opening
-
-Opening balance for the fixed asset account should be updated via Journal Entry. Assets which are not fully depreciated should be added in the [Asset master](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/managing-fixed-assets.html). For adding Assets in your possession, ensure to check **Is Existing Asset** field.
-
-### Outstanding Payables and Receivables
-
-After opening Journal Entries are made, you will need to enter the Sales Invoice and Purchase Invoice that is yet to be paid.
-
-Since you have already booked the income or expense on these invoices in the previous period, select **Temporary Opening** in the “Income” and “Expense” accounts.
-
-> Note: Make sure to set each invoice as “Is Opening”!
-
-If you don’t care what items are in that invoice, just make a dummy item entry in the Invoice. Item code in the Invoice is not necessary, so it should not be such a problem.
-
-You can also do this quickly using the **Opening Invoice Creation Tool**
-
-To use this tool, just type "Opening Invoice" in the search bar and select the **Opening Invoice Creation Tool**
-
-Here, select the company and type of invoice (sales or purchase) and add a line item for each invoice you want to create.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index af655c0c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,113 +0,0 @@
-
-# Payment Entry
-
-Payment Entry can be made against following transactions.
-
- 1. Sales Invoice.
- 2. Purchase Invoice.
- 3. Sales Order (Advance Payment)
- 4. Purchase Order (Advance Payment)
- 5. Expense Claim
-
-####Step 1: Make Payment
-
-On submitting a document against which Payment Entry can be made, you will find Make Payment button.
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Mode of Payment
-
-In the Payment Entry, select Mode of Payment (eg: Bank, Cash, Wire Transfer). In the Mode of Payment master, default Account can be set. This default payment Account will fetch into Payment Entry.
-
-
-
-####Step 3: Payment Amount
-
-Enter actual payment amount received from the Customer or paid to the Supplier or Employee.
-
-
-
-####Step 4: Allocate Amount
-
-If creating Payment Entry for the Customer, Payment Amount will be allocated against Sales Invoice.
-
-
-
-On the same lines, when creating Payment Entry for a Supplier, Payment Amount will be allocated against Purchase Invoice.
-
-You Entry can be created directly from `Account > Payment Entry > New`. In the new entry, on selection of the Party (Customer/Supplier), all the outstanding Invoices and open Orders will be fetched for party. The Payment Amount will be auto-allocated, preferably against invoice.
-
-####Step 5: Deductions
-
-When making payment entry, there could be some difference in the actual payment amount and the invoice outstanding. This difference could be due to rounding error, or change in the currency exchange rate. You can set an Account here where this difference amount will be booked.
-
-
-
-####Step 6: Submit
-
-Save and Submit Payment Entry. On submission, outstanding will be updated in the Invoices.
-
-
-
-If payment entry was created against Sales Order or Purchase Order, field Advance Paid will be updated in them. when creating Payment invoice against those transactions, Payment Entry will auto-update in that Invoice, so that you can allocate invoice amount against advance payment entry.
-
-For incoming payment, accounts posting will be done as following.
-
- * Debit: Bank or Cash Account
- * Credit: Customer (Debtor)
-
-For outgoing payment:
-
- * Debit: Supplier (Creditor)
- * Credit: Bank or Cash Account
-
-###Multi Currency Payment Entry
-
-ERPNext allows you maintain accounts and invoicing in the [multiple currency](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.html). If invoice is made in the party currency, Currency Exchange Rate between companies base currency and party currency is also entered in the invoice. When creating Payment Entry against that invoice, you will again have to mention the Currency Exchange Rate at the time of payment.
-
-
-
-Since Currency Exchange Rate is fluctuating all the time, it can lead to difference in the payment amount against invoice total. This difference amount can be booked in the Currency Exchange Gain/Loss Amount.
-
-
-
-Payments can also be made independent of invoices by creating a new Payment Entry.
-
-###Internal Intransfer
-
-Following internal transfers can be managed from the Payment Entry.
-
-1. Bank - Cash
-2. Cash - Bank
-3. Cash - Cash
-4. Bank - Bank
-
-
-
-###Difference between Payment Entry and Journal Entry?
-
- 1. Journal Entry requires understanding of which Account will get Debited or Credited. In the Payment Entry, it is managed in the backend, hence simpler for the User.
- 2. Payment Entry is more efficient in managing payment in the foreign currency.
- 3. Journal Entry can still be used for:
- - Updating opening balance in an Accounts.
- - Fixed Asset Depreciation entry.
- - For adjusting Credit Note against Sales Invoice and Debit Note against Purchase Invoice, incase there is no payment happening at all.
- 4. Payment Entries are used if a cheque is printed.
-* * *
-
-## Managing Outstanding Payments
-
-In most cases, apart from retail sales, billing and payments are separate activities. There are several combinations in which these payments are done. These cases apply to both sales and purchases.
-
- * They can be upfront (100% in advance).
- * Post shipment. Either on delivery or within a few days of delivery.
- * Part in advance and part on or post delivery.
- * Payments can be made together for a bunch of invoices.
- * Advances can be given together for a bunch of invoices (and can be split across invoices).
-
-ERPNext allows you to manage all these scenarios. All accounting entries (GL Entry) can be made against a Sales Invoice, Purchase Invoice or Payment Entry of advance payment (in special cases, an invoice can be made via a Sales Invoice too).
-
-The total outstanding amount against an invoice is the sum of all the accounting entries that are made “against” (or are linked to) that invoice. This way you can combine or split payments in Payment Entry to manage the
-scenarios.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-request.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7869cb68..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-
-# Payment Request
-
-Payment Request is sent via Email and will contain a link to a Payment Gateway if setup. You can create payment request via Sales Order or Sales Invoice.
-
-- Create Payment Request via Sales Order
-
-
-- Create payment Request via Sales Invoice
-
-
----
-
-Select appropriate Payment Gateway Account on Payment Request. Account head specified on payment gateway will
-considered to create journal entry.
-
-Note: Invoice/Order currency and Payment Gateway Account currency should be same.
-
-
-
----
-
-##### Notify Customer
-You can notify customer from Payment Request with print format. If customer contact email is mentioned, it will automatically fetch email. If not so you can set Email Address on Payment Request.
-
-
-
-##### Request Mail
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-terms.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-terms.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6ef6552d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-terms.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-
-# Payment Terms
-You can save your business' payment terms on ERPNext and include it in all documents in the sales/purchase cycle and ERPNext will make all the proper general ledger entries accordingly.
-
-The documents you can attach Payment Terms to are:
-- Sales Invoice
-- Purchase Invoice
-- Sales Order
-- Purchase Order
-- Quotation
-
-Note that the introduction of Payment Terms removes "Credit Days" and "Credit Days Based On" fields in Customer/Supplier master. Payment Term contains the same information and makes it more flexible to use.
-
-
-
-## Payment Terms
-Navigate to the Payment Term list page and click "New".
-> Accounts > Payment Term > New Payment Term
-
-Payment Term has the following fields:
-**Payment Term Name:** (optional) The name for this Payment Term.
-
-**Due Date Based On:** The basis by which the due date for the Payment Term is to be calculated. There are three options:
-- Day(s) after invoice date: Due date should be calculated in days with reference to the posting date of the invoice
-- Day(s) after the end of the invoice month: Due date should be calculated in days with reference to the last day of the month in which the invoice was created
-- Month(s) after the end of the invoice month: Due date should be calculated in months with reference to the last day of the month in which the invoice was created
-
-**Invoice Portion:** (optional) The portion of the total invoice amount for which this Payment Term should be applied. Value given will be regarded as percentage i.e 100 = 100%
-
-**Credit Days:** (optional) The number of days or month credit is allowed depending on the option chosen in the `Due Date Based On` field. 0 means no credit allowed.
-
-**Description:** (optional) A brief description of the Payment Term.
-
-## Payment Terms In Converted Documents
-When converting or copying documents in the sales/purchase cycle, the attached Payment Term(s) will not be copied. The reason for this is because the copied information might no longer be true. For example, a Quotation is created for a service costing $1000 on January 1 with payment term of "N 30" (Net payable within 30 days) and then sent to a customer. On the quotation, the due date on the invoice will be January 30. Let's say the customer agrees to the quotation of January 20 and you decide to make an invoice from the Quotation. If the Payment Terms from the Quotation is copied, the due date on the invoice will still wrongly read January 30. This issue also applies for recurring documents.
-
-This does not mean you have manually set Payment Terms for every document. If you want the Payment Terms to be copyable, make use of Payment Terms Template.
-
-## Payment Terms Template
-Payment Terms Template tells ERPNext how to populate the table in the Payment Terms Schedule section of the sales/purchase document.
-
-You should use it if you have a set of standard Payment Terms or if you want the Payment Term(s) on a sales/purchase document to be copyable.
-
-To create a new Payment Terms Template, navigate to the Payment Term Template creation form:
-> Accounts > Payment Terms Template > New Payment Terms Template
-
-**Payment Term:** (optional) The name for this Payment Term.
-
-**Due Date Based On:** The basis by which the due date for the Payment Term is to be calculated. There are three options:
-- Day(s) after invoice date: Due date should be calculated in days with reference to the posting date of the invoice
-- Day(s) after the end of the invoice month: Due date should be calculated in days with reference to the last day of the month in which the invoice was created
-- Month(s) after the end of the invoice month: Due date should be calculated in months with reference to the last day of the month in which the invoice was created
-
-**Invoice Portion:** (optional) The portion of the total invoice amount for which this Payment Term should be applied. Value given will be regarded as percentage i.e 100 = 100%
-
-**Credit Days:** (optional) The number of days or month credit is allowed depending on the option chosen in the `Due Date Based On` field. 0 means no credit allowed.
-
-**Description:** (optional) A brief description of the Payment Term.
-
-Add as many rows as needed but make sure that the sum of the values in the `Invoice Portion` fields in all populated rows equals 100.
-
-## How to Add Payment Terms To Documents
-You can add Payments Terms in the "Payment Terms Schedule" section of the Document. Each row in the table represents a portion of the document's grand total. The table collects the following information:
-
-**Payment Term:** (optional) The name of the Payment Term document you require. If this is added, the data from the selected Payment Term will be used to populate the remaining columns in the row.
-
-**Description:** (optional) Description of the Payment Term.
-
-**Due Date:** (optional) The due date for the portion of the invoice. Set this value only if you did not specify anything in the `Payment Term` column.
-
-**Invoice Portion:** The percentage portion of the document represented in each row.
-
-**Payment Amount:** The amount due from the portion of the invoice represented by each row.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payments.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payments.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 640083b1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payments.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-
-# Payments
-
-Payment can be made against following transactions.
-
- 1. Sales Invoice.
- 2. Purchase Invoice.
- 3. Sales Order (Advance Payment)
- 4. Purchase Order (Advance Payment)
-
-In ERPNext, there is two options through which user can capture the payment
-
- 1. Payment Entry(Default).
- 2. Journal Entry.
-
-## Payment Entry
-
-####Step 1: Make Payment
-
-On submitting a document against which Payment Entry can be made, you will find Make Payment button.
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Payment Entry
-
-
-
-For more details about payment entry [check here.](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry)
-
-## Journal Entry
-
-To make payment using journal entry, check below steps
-
-####Step 1: Activate Payment via Journal Entry
-
-Goto Accounts Settings > checked Make Payment via Journal Entry
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Make Payment
-
-On submitting a document against which Journal Entry can be made, you will find Make Payment button.
-
-
-
-####Step 3: Journal Entry
-
-Save and submit the journal entry to record the payament against the invoice
-
-
-For more details about journal entry [check here.](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 484185a9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
-# Point of Sale Invoice
-
-The one-screen point-of-sale software, for the one-stop-shop retail business. It does everything your store needs, right from POS billing,
-to purchasing, to customer relationship management.
-
-
-
-### Offline POS
-
-In the retails business, invoicing needs to done very quickly, hence should less dependency. In the ERPNext, you can create POS Invoices, even when not connected to the internet.
-
-
-
-### POS Demo
-
-Here is the quick demonstration on the Point of Sale feature of ERPNext.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sales.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sales.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d9f66b28..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sales.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,131 +0,0 @@
-# Point of Sale Invoice
-
-For retail operations, the delivery of goods, accrual of sale and payment all happens in one event, that is usually called the “Point of Sale” (POS).
-
-
-
-###Offline POS
-
-In the retails business, invoicing needs to done very quickly, hence should less dependency. In the ERPNext, you can create POS Invoices, even when not connected to the internet.
-
-POS Invoices created in the offline mode will be saved locally in the browser. If internet connection is lost which creating POS Invoice, you will still be able can proceed forward. Once internet connection is available again, offline invoices will be synced, and pushed onto your ERPNext account. To learn more on how POS Invoices can be created when offline, [check here.](https://frappe.io/blog/blog/erpnext-features/offline-pos-in-erpnext-7)
-
-#### POS Profile
-
-In ERPNext all Sales and Purchase transactions, like Sales Invoice, Quotation, Sales Order, Purchase Order etc. can be edited via the POS. There two steps to Setup POS:
-
-1. Enable POS View via (Setup > Customize > Feature Setup)
-2. Create a [POS Profile](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.html) record
-
-#### Different sections of the POS
-
- * Update Stock: If this is checked, Stock Ledger Entries will be made when you “Submit” this Sales Invoice thereby eliminating the need for a separate Delivery Note.
- * In your Items table, update inventory information like Warehouse (saved as default), Serial Number, or Batch Number if applicable.
- * Update Payment Details like your Bank / Cash Account, Paid amount etc.
- * If you are writing off certain amount. For example when you receive extra cash as a result of not having exact denomination of change, check on ‘Write off Outstanding Amount’ and set the Account.
-
-### Customer
-
-In POS, user can select the existing customer during making an order or create the new customer. This features works in the offline mode also. User can also add the customer details like contact number, address details etc on the form. The customer which has been created from the POS will be synced when the internet connection is active.
-
-
-
-### Adding an Item
-
-At the billing counter, the retailer needs to select Items which the consumer buys. In the POS interface you can select an Item by two methods. One, is by clicking on the Item image and the other, is through the Barcode / Serial No.
-
-**Select Item** \- To select a product click on the Item image and add it into the cart. A cart is an area that prepares a customer for checkout by allowing to edit product information, adjust taxes and add discounts.
-
-**Barcode / Serial No** \- A Barcode / Serial No is an optical machine-readable representation of data relating to the object to which it is attached. Enter Barcode / Serial No in the box as shown in the image below and pause for a second, the item will be automatically added to the cart.
-
-
-
-> Tip: To change the quantity of an Item, enter your desired quantity in the
-quantity box. These are mostly used if the same Item is purchased in bulk.
-
-If your product list is very long use the Search field, type the product name
-in Search box.
-
-### Removing an Item from the Cart
-
-1. Select row in the cart and clik on delete button in the numeric keypad
-
-
-
-
-2. Set Qty as zero to remove Item from the POS invoice. There are two ways to remove an Item.
-
- * If Item's Qty is 1, click on a minus sign to make it zero.
-
- * Manually enter 0(zero) quantity.
-
-### Make Payment
-
-After all the Items and their quantities are added into the cart, you are
-ready to make the Payment. Payment process is divided into 3 steps -
-
- 1. Click on “Make Payment” to get the Payment window.
- 2. Select your “Mode of Payment”.
- 3. Click on “Pay” button to Save the document.
-
-
-
-Submit the document to finalise the record. After the document is submitted,
-you can either print or email it directly to the customer.
-
-### Write off Amount
-
-Outstanding amount can be write off from the POS, user has to enter the amount under write off field on the payment screen.
-
-
-
-System books the write off amount into the ledger which has selected on the POS Profile.
-
-### Change Amount
-
-POS calculate the extra amount paid by the customer, which user can return from the cash account. User has to set the account for the change amount on the POS profile.
-
-
-
-### Offline Records
-All the records from the POS stores into the browser's local storegae and sync submitted records after every minute of the interval if system is connected to internet. User can view the offline records by clicking on Menu > View Offline Records
-
-
-
-#### Accounting entries (GL Entry) for a Point of Sale:
-
-Debits:
-
- * Customer (grand total)
- * Bank / Cash (payment)
-
-Credits:
-
- * Income (net total, minus taxes for each Item)
- * Taxes (liabilities to be paid to the government)
- * Customer (payment)
- * Write Off (optional)
- * Account for Change Amount (optional)
-
-To see entries after “Submit”, click on “View Ledger”.
-
-### Email
-User can send email from the POS, after submission of an order, user has to click on menu > email
-
-After sync of an order, email sent to the customer with the print of the bill in the attachment
-
-
-### POS Closing Voucher
-
-At the end of its shift, the cashier can close his/her PoS by creating a POS Closing Voucher.
-
-Click on the menu and select "Close the POS"
-
-Select the period, your POS Profile and your user to retrieve all sales registered.
-
-
-
-Enter the collected amount for each mode of payment.
-If you notice any difference between the theoretical amount and the collected amount, create a difference posting.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f7d306f2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
-
-#Pricing Rule
-
-Pricing Rule is a master where you can define rules based on which discount is applied to specific Customer or Supplier.
-### Scenario:
-
-Following are the few cases which can be addressed using Pricing Rule.
-
-1. As per the promotional sale policy, if customer purchases more than 10 units of an item, he enjoys 20% discount.
-
-2. For Customer "XYZ", selling price for the specific Item should be updated as ###.
-
-3. Items categorized under specific Item Group has same selling or buying price.
-
-4. Customers balonging to specific Customer Group should get ### selling price, or % of Discount on Items.
-
-5. Supplier categorized under specific Supplier Group should have ### buying rate applied.
-
-To have %Discount and Price List Rate for an Item auto-applied, you should create Pricing Rules for it.
-
-Pricing Rule master has two sections:
-
-### 1. Applicability Section:
-
-In this section, conditions are set for the application of Pricing Rule. When transaction meets condition as specified in this section, Rate or Discount as specified in the Pricing Rule will be applied. You can set condition on following values.
-
-####1.1 Applicable On:
-
-
-
-If you want Pricing Rule to be applied on all the items, select based on Item Group. For value, select **All Item Group** (parent Item Group).
-
-####1.2 Applicable For:
-
-Applicability option will updated based on our selection for Selling or Buying or both. You can set applicability on one of the following master.
-
-
-
-####1.3 Quantity:
-
-Specify minimum and maximum qty of an item when this Pricing Rule should be applicable.
-
-
-
-###2. Application:
-
-Using Price List Rule, you can ultimately define rate or %discount to be applied on an item.
-
-
-
-####2.1 Rate
-
-Rate or Discount specified in the Pricing Rule will be applied only if above applicability rules are matched with values in the transaction. Rate mentioned in Pricing Rule will be given priority over item's Price List rate.
-
-
-
-#### 2.2 Discount Percentage
-
-Discount Percentage can be applied for a specific Price List. To have it applied for all the Price List, %Discount field should be left blank.
-
-
-
-If %Discount is to be applied on all Price Lists, then leave Price List field blank.
-
-#### Validity
-
-Enter From and To date between which this Pricing Rule will be applicable. This will be useful if creating Pricing Rule for sales promotion exercise available for certain days.
-
-
-
-#### Priority
-
-If two or more Pricing Rules are found based on same conditions, Priority is applied. Priority is a number between 0 to 20 while default value is zero (blank). Higher number means it will take precedence if there are multiple Pricing Rules with same conditions.
-
-
-
-#### Disable
-
-Check to Disable Pricing Rule.
-
-
-
-### Add Margin
-
-Using pricing rule user can add margin on the sales transactions
-
-For example : User want to add 10% margin on the supplier price list at the time of sales
-
-####1. Make Price List
-
-Create price list for supllier and create item price against the price list.
-
-
-
-
-####2. Make Pricing Rule
-
-Create pricing rule for the item against which supplier rate has created
-
-
-
-####2. Make Invoice
-
-System apply the margin rate on the item price on selection of an item.
-
-
-
-For more details about pricing rule [Click Here](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.html)
-
-
-{next}
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/purchase-invoice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9df27dd2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,134 +0,0 @@
-
-# Purchase Invoice
-
-Purchase Invoice is the exact opposite of your Sales Invoice. It is the bill
-that your Supplier sends you for products or services delivered. Here you
-accrue expenses to your Supplier. Making a Purchase Invoice is very similar to
-making a Purchase Order.
-
-To make a new Purchase Invoice:
-> type "new purchase invoice" into the search bar then select "New Purchase
-Invoice" from the drop down
-
-or click on “Make Purchase Invoice” in Purchase Order or Purchase Receipt.
-
-You can also create a Purchase Invoice from:
-> Accounts > Billing > Purchase Invoice > New Purchase Invoice
-
-
-
-The concept of “Posting Date” is again same as Sales Invoice. “Bill No” and
-“Bill Date” helps to track the bill number as set by your Supplier for
-reference.
-
-#### Is Paid option
-The **Is Paid** checkbox should be checked if there is a part or full payment
-on the invoice at posting date.
-
-#### Update Stock
-The **Update Stock** checkbox should be checked if you want ERPNext to automatically
- update your inventory. Consequently, there will be no need for a Delivery Note.
-
-#### Accounting Impact
-
-Like in Sales Invoice, you have to enter an Expense or an Asset account for
-each row in your Items table. This helps to indicate if the Item is an Asset
-or an Expense. You must also enter a Cost Center. These can also be set in the
-Item master.
-
-The Purchase Invoice will affect your accounts as follows:
-
-Accounting entries (GL Entry) for a typical double entry “purchase”:
-
-Debits:
-
- * Expense or Asset (net totals, excluding taxes)
- * Taxes (/assets if VAT-type or expense again).
-
-Credits:
-
- * Supplier
-
-##### Accounting Treatment When **Is Paid** is checked
-If **Is Paid** is checked, ERPNext will also make the following
-accounting entries:
-
-Debits:
-
- * Supplier
-
-Credits:
- * Bank/Cash Account
-
-To see entries in your Purchase Invoice after you “Submit”, click on “View
-Ledger”.
-
-* * *
-
-#### Is purchase an “Expense” or an “Asset”?
-
-If the Item is consumed immediately on purchase, or if it is a service, then
-the purchase becomes an “Expense”. For example, a telephone bill or travel
-bill is an “Expense” - it is already consumed.
-
-For inventory Items, that have a value, these purchases are not yet “Expense”,
-because they still have a value while they remain in your stock. They are
-“Assets”. If they are raw-materials (used in a process), they will become
-“Expense” the moment they are consumed in the process. If they are to be sold
-to a Customer, they become “Expense” when you ship them to the Customer.
-
-* * *
-
-#### Deducting Taxes at Source
-
-In many countries, the law may require you to deduct taxes, while paying your
-suppliers. These taxes could be based on a standard rate. Under these type of
-schemes, typically if a Supplier crosses a certain threshold of payment, and
-if the type of product is taxable, you may have to deduct some tax (which you
-pay back to your government, on your Supplier’s behalf).
-
-To do this, you will have to make a new Tax Account under “Tax Liabilities” or
-similar and credit this Account by the percent you are bound to deduct for
-every transaction.
-
-For more help, please contact your Accountant!
-
-#### Hold Payments For A Purchase Invoice
-There are two ways to put a purchase invoice on hold:
-- Date Span Hold
-- Explicit Hold
-
-##### Explicit Hold
-Explicit hold holds the purchase invoice indefinitely.
-To do it, in the "Hold Invoice" section of the purchase invoice form, simply
-check the "Hold Invoice" checkbox. In the "Reason For Putting On Hold" text
-field, type a comment explaining why the invoice is to be put on hold.
-
-If you need to hold a submitted invoice, click the "Make" drop down button
-and click "Block Invoice". Also add a comment explaining why the invoice is
-to be put on hold in the dialog that pops up and click "Save".
-
-##### Date Span Hold
-Date span hold holds the purchase invoice until a
-specified date. To do it, in the "Hold Invoice" section of the purchase
-invoice form, check the "Hold Invoice" checkbox. Next, input the release date
-in the dialog that pops up and click "Save". The release date is the date
-that the hold on the document expires.
-
-After the invoice has been saved, you can change the release date by clicking
-on the "Hold Invoice" drop down button and then "Change Release Date". This
-action will cause a dialog to appear.
-
-
-
-Select the new release date and click "Save". You should also enter a comment
-in the "Reason For Putting On Hold" field.
-
-Take note of the following:
-- All purchases that have been placed on hold will not included in a Payment Entry's references table
-- The release date cannot be in the past.
-- You can only block or unblock a purchase invoice if it is unpaid.
-- You can only change the release date if the invoice is unpaid.
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/recurring-orders-and-invoices.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/recurring-orders-and-invoices.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 524aa419..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/recurring-orders-and-invoices.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-#Recurring Orders and Invoices
-
-If you have a contract with a **Customer** where you bill the Customer on a monthly, quarterly, half-yearly or annual basis, you should use recurring feature in orders and invoices.
-
-#### Scenario:
-
-Subscription for your hosted ERPNext account requires yearly renewal. We use Sales Order for generating proforma invoices. To automate proforma invoicing for renewal, we set original Sales Order as recurring. Recurring proforma invoice is created automatically just before customer's account is about to expire, and requires renewal. This recurring Proforma Invoice is also emailed automatically to the customer.
-
-Feature of setting document as recurring is available in Sales Order, Sales Invoice, Purchase Order and Purchase Invoice.
-
-Option to set document as recurring will be visible only after submission. Recurring is last section in document. Check **Is Recurring** to set document as recurring.
-
-
-
-**From Date and To Date:** This defines contract period with the customer.
-
-**Repeat on the Day of Month:** If recurring type is set as Monthly, then it will be day of the month on which recurring invoice will be generated.
-
-**End Date:** Date after which auto-creation of recurring invoice will be stopped.
-
-**Notification Email Address:** Email Addresses (separated by comma) on which recurring invoice will be emailed when auto-generated.
-
-**Recurring ID:** Recurring ID will be original document id which will be linked to all corresponding recurring document. For example, original Sales Invoice's id will be updated into all recurring Sales Invoices.
-
-**Recurring Print Format:** Select a print format to define document view which should be emailed to customer.
-
-####Exception Handling:
-
-In a situation where recurring invoice is not created successfully, user with System Manager role is notified about it via email. Also the document on which recurring event failed, "Is Recurring" field is unchecked for it. This means system doesn't try creating recurring invoice for that document again.
-
-Failure in creation of recurring invoice could be due to multiple reasons like wrong Email Address mentioned in the Email Notification field in Recurring section etc.
-
-On receipt of notification, if cause of failure is fixed (like correcting Email Address) within 24 hours, then recurring invoice will be generated automatically. If issue is not fixed within the said time, then document should be created for that month/year manually.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/reverse-journal-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/reverse-journal-entry.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 322ea267..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/reverse-journal-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-# Reverse Journal Entry
-
-In any submitted Journal Entry, there is a dedicated button to reverse a Journal Entry. On clicking the button, the system creates a new Journal Entry by reversing debit and credit amount against all the accounts.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/sales-invoice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/sales-invoice.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 994920f6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/sales-invoice.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sales Invoice
-
-A Sales Invoice is a bill that you send to your customers, against which the customer processes the payment. Sales Invoice is an accounting transaction. On submission of Sales Invoice, the system updates the receivable and books income against a Customer Account.
-
-You can create a Sales Invoice directly from
-
-> Accounts > Billing > Sales Invoice > New Sales Invoice
-
-or you can Make a new Sales Invoice after you submit the Delivery Note.
-
-
-
-#### Accounting Impact
-
-All Sales must be booked against an “Income Account”. This refers to an
-Account in the “Income” section of your Chart of Accounts. It is a good
-practice to classify your income by type (like product income, service income
-etc). The Income Account must be set for each row of the Items table.
-
-> Tip: To set default Income Accounts for Items, you can set it in the Item or
-Item Group.
-
-The other account that is affected is the Account of the Customer. That is
-automatically set from “Debit To” in the heading section.
-
-You must also mention the Cost Centers in which your Income must be booked.
-Remember that your Cost Centers tell you the profitability of the different
-lines of business or product. You can also set a default Cost Center in the
-Item master.
-
-#### Accounting entries (GL Entry) for a typical double entry “Sale”:
-
-When booking a sale (accrual):
-
-**Debit:** Customer (grand total) **Credit:** Income (net total, minus taxes for each Item) **Credit:** Taxes (liabilities to be paid to the government)
-
-> To see entries in your Sales Invoice after you “Submit”, click on “View
-Ledger”.
-
-#### Dates
-
-Posting Date: The date on which the Sales Invoice will affect your books of
-accounts i.e. your General Ledger. This will affect all your balances in that
-accounting period.
-
-Due Date: The date on which the payment is due (if you have sold on credit).
-This can be automatically set from the Customer master.
-
-#### Recurring Invoices
-
-If you have a contract with a Customer where you bill the Customer on a
-monthly, quarterly, half-yearly or annual basis, you can check the “Recurring
-Invoice” box. Here you can fill in the details of how frequently you want to
-bill this Invoice and the period for which the contract is valid.
-
-ERPNext will automatically create new Invoices and mail it to the Email Addresses
-you set.
-
-#### Automatically Fetching Item Batch Numbers
-
-If you are selling an item from a [Batch](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch),
-ERPNext will automatically fetch a batch number for you if "Update Stock"
-is checked. The batch number will be fetched on a First Expiring First Out
-(FEFO) basis. This is a variant of First In First Out (FIFO) that gives
-highest priority to the soonest to expire Items.
-
-
-
-Note that if the first batch in the queue cannot satisfy the order on the invoice,
-the next batch in the queue that can satisfy the order will be selected. If there is
-no batch that can satisfy the order, ERPNext will cancel its attempt to automatically
-fetch a suitable batch number.
-
-#### POS Invoices
-
-Consider a scenario where retail transaction is carried out. For e.g: A retail shop.
-If you check the **Is POS** checkbox, then all your **POS Profile** data is fetched
-into the Sales Invoice and you can easily make payments.
-Also, if you check the **Update Stock** the stock will also update automatically,
-without the need of a Delivery Note.
-
-
-
-#### Billing Timesheet with Project
-
-If you want to bill employees working on Projects on hourly basis (contract based),
-they can fill out Timesheets which consists their billing rate. When you make a new
-Sales Invoice, select the Project for which the billing is to be made, and the
-corresponding Timesheet entries for that Project will be fetched.
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-#### "Pro Forma" Invoice
-
-If you want to give an Invoice to a Customer to make a payment before you
-deliver, i.e. you operate on a payment first basis, you should create a
-Quotation and title it as a “Pro-forma Invoice” (or something similar) using
-the Print Heading feature.
-
-“Pro Forma” means for formality. Why do this? Because if you book a Sales
-Invoice it will show up in your “Accounts Receivable” and “Income”. This is
-not ideal as your Customer may or may not decide to pay up. But since your
-Customer wants an “Invoice”, you could give the Customer a Quotation (in
-ERPNext) titled as “Pro Forma Invoice”. This way everyone is happy.
-
-This is a fairly common practice. We follow this at Frappe too.
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 14948864..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
-# Accounts Settings
-
-
-
-
-* Accounts Frozen Upto: Freeze accounting transactions upto specified date, nobody can make / modify entry except specified role.
-
-* Role Allowed to Set Frozen Accounts & Edit Frozen Entries: Users with this role are allowed to set frozen accounts and create / modify accounting entries against frozen accounts.
-
-* Credit Controller: Role that is allowed to submit transactions that exceed credit limits set.
-
-* Make Payment via Journal Entry: If checked, from invoice, if user choose to make payment, this will open the journal entry instead of payment entry
-
-* Allow Cost Center in Entry of Balance Sheet Account: If checked, system will allow user to tag entry in Balance Sheet Account against a Cost Center.
-
-* Unlink Payment on Cancellation of Invoice: If checked, system will unlink the payment against the invoice. Otherwise, it will show the link error.
-
-* Allow Stale Exchange Rate: This should be unchecked if you want ERPNext to check the age of records fetched from Currency Exchange in foreign currency transactions. If it is unchecked, the exchange rate field will be read-only in documents.
-
-* Stale Days: The number of days to use when deciding if a Currency Exchange record is stale. E.g If Currency Exchange records are to be updated every day, the Stale Days should be set as 1.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 44481a28..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-
-# Cost Center
-
-Your Chart of Accounts is mainly designed to provide reports to the government
-and tax authorities. Most businesses have multiple activities like different
-product lines, market segments, areas of business, etc that share some common
-overheads. They should ideally have their own structure to report, whether they
-are profitable or not. For this purpose, there is an alternate structure,
-called the Chart of Cost Centers.
-
-### Cost Center
-
-You can create a tree of Cost Centers to represent your business better. Each
-Income / Expense entry is also tagged against a Cost Center.If allow cost center
-in entry of balance sheet account is checked under Account Settings, system will
-allow user to tag entry in Balance Sheet Account against a Cost Center.
-
-For example, if you have two types of sales:
-
- * Walk-in Sales
- * Online Sales
-
-You may not have shipping expenses for your walk-in customers, and no shop-
-rent for your online customers. If you want to get the profitability of each
-of these separately, you should create the two as Cost Centers and mark all
-sales as either "Walk-in" or "Online". Mark your all your purchases in the
-same way.
-
-Thus when you do your analysis you get a better understanding as to which side
-of your business is doing better. Since ERPNext has an option to add multiple
-Companies, you can create Cost Centers for each Company and manage it
-separately.
-
-Chart of Cost Centers
-
-To setup your Chart of Cost Centers go to:
-
-> Accounts > Setup > Chart of Cost Centers
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 15da8df2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fiscal Year
-
-A fiscal year is also known as a financial year or a budget year. It is used
-for calculating financial statements in businesses and other organisations.
-The fiscal year may or may not be the same as a calendar year. For tax
-purposes, companies can choose to be calendar-year taxpayers or fiscal-year
-taxpayers. In many jurisdictions, regulatory laws regarding accounting and
-taxation require such reports once per twelve months. However, it is not
-mandatory that the period should be a calendar year (that is, 1 January to 31
-December).
-
-A fiscal year usually starts at the beginning of a quarter, such as April 1,
-July 1 or October 1. However, most companies' fiscal year also coincides with
-the calendar year, which starts January 1. For the most part, it is simpler
-and easier that way. For some organizations, there are advantages in starting
-the fiscal year at a different time. For example, businesses that are seasonal
-might start their fiscal year on July 1 or October 1. A business that has most
-of its income in the fall and most of its expenses in the spring might also
-choose to start its fiscal year on October 1. That way, they know what their
-income will be for that year, and can adjust their expenses to maintain their
-desired profit margins.
-
-To set the Fiscal Year as default, click on the 'Default' button.
-
-In case you have multiple companies sharing the same Fiscal Year, you can add
-it into the grid as shown below.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0ba43c3f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 916f96cf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-fiscal-year
-cost-center
-accounts-settings
-tax-rule
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 45a89054..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tax Rule
-
-You can define which [Tax Template](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) must be applied on a Sales / Purchase transaction using Tax Rule.
-
-
-
-You can define Tax Rules for Sales or Purchase Taxes.
-While making a Transaction the system will select and apply tax template based on the tax rule defined.
-The system selects Tax Rule with maximum matching Filters.
-
-Let us consider a senario to understand Tax Rule Better.
-
-Suppose we define 2 Tax Rules as below.
-
-
-
-
-
-Here Tax Rule 1 has Billing Country as India and Tax Rule 2 has Billing Country as United Kingdom
-
-Now supposed we try to create a Sales Order for a customer whose default Billing Country is India, system shall select Tax Rule 1.
-In case the customers Billing Country was United Kingdom, the system would have selected Tax Rule 2.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 702fb7e8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-# Shareholder Management
-
-> New in Version 11
-
-ERPNext allows you to keep a track of all your Shareholders and maintain a Share Transfers, Share Ledger and Share Balances.
-
-### Index
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/index.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c7e56d2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-shareholder
-share_transfer
-share_ledger
-share_balance
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/share_balance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/share_balance.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0e743b9b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/share_balance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Share Balance
-
-This is a report view which gives the list of all the shares held by a given Shareholder and its value
-
-> Accounts > Share Balance
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/share_ledger.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/share_ledger.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b05a1b3a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/share_ledger.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Share Ledger
-
-This is a report view which gives the list of all the transactions made by a given Shareholder
-
-> Accounts > Share Ledger
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/share_transfer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/share_transfer.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5d46cfd3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/share_transfer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Shareholder Transfer
-
-There may be times when you want to change the share structure of your company; either by adding a new shareholder or by changing the existing proportion of shares between shareholders. A share transfer is the process of transferring existing shares from one person to another; either by sale or gift.
-
-You can directly create your Shareholders via
-
-> Accounts > Share Transfer
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/shareholder.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/shareholder.md
deleted file mode 100755
index eb5f08db..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/shareholder.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Shareholder
-
-A shareholder is any person, company or other institution that owns at least one share of a company’s stock. Because shareholders are a company's owners, they reap the benefits of the company's successes in the form of increased stock valuation. If the company does poorly, however, shareholders can lose money if the price of its stock declines.
-
-A shareholder is uniquely identified by the Shareholder ID. Normally this ID is a naming series, starting with `SH-`. Also as soon as the Shareholder makes even a single transaction, a Folio number is allocated to him. This also is a unique to the Shareholder.
-
-You can directly create your Shareholders via
-
-> Accounts > Shareholder
-
-
-
-A Shareholder can avail the features (operations) in the [Share Transfer](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/share/share_transfer.html) process.
-
-> Note: Shareholders are separate from Contacts and Addresses. A Shareholder can
-have multiple Contacts and Addresses.
-
-### Contacts and Addresses
-
-[Contacts and Addresses](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.html) in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can
-attach multiple Contacts or Addresses to Shareholders, Customers and Suppliers
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/subscription.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/subscription.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 28b2bfd2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/subscription.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-# Subscription
-
-If you offer a service which requires renewal in the certain time period (yearly, monthly, quarterly etc.), you can use Subscription feature to track them. Subscription master captures all the details required for the auto-creation of Sales Invoice on subscription expiry.
-
-Let's consider a use-case of ERPNext subscription itself. Our hosting plans are available on yearly basis. Each customer's account has subscription expiry date, after which customer must renew their subscription with us.
-
-To manage client's subscription expiry and auto-generation of Sales Invoice for the renewal, we use Subscription feature.
-
-### Subscription Validity
-
-**Start Date:** Day from when the subscription will be valid.
-
-**Days Until Due:** Enter no. of days for which subscription will be valid.
-
-Based on the subscription start and end date, actual dates for invoices will be calculated.
-
-### Subscription Plan
-
-The subscription plan is linked to an Item, for which Sales Invoice is created.
-
-
-
-### Taxes
-
-Select Taxes and Charges which will be applicable in the Sales Invoice created against this Subscription.
-
-### Discounts
-
-Mention discounts if any which will be applied on this particular subscription.
-
-### Difference Between Subscription and Auto-Repeat
-
-Before Subscription feature was added in ERPNext, the current Auto-Repeat feature was available as a Subscription only.
-
-The Auto-Repeat feature which is applicable for multiple transactions like Sales Order, Purchase Order, Invoices, Journal Entry etc. Whereas based on Subscription, only Sales Invoices are auto-created.
-
-**Disabled**: It will stop to make auto recurring documents against the subscription
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tax-withholding-category.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tax-withholding-category.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7210f13c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tax-withholding-category.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tax Withholding Category
-
-Tax Withholding Category is simply Tax Deducted at Source. According to this, a person responsible for making payments are required to deduct tax at source at prescribed rates. Instead of receiving tax on your income from you at a later date, the govt wants the payers to deduct tax before hand and deposit it with the government.
-
-To create a **Tax Withholding Category** go to:
-
-> Accounts > Taxes > Tax Withholding Category > New
-
-
-
-In a Tax Withholding Category, you must select.
-
- * A unique name for the tax category (for example, "Section 194C Individual").
- * The name or description should be filled in the Category Name field (for example, "Payment to Contractors (Single / Aggregate)").
- * Add rows for the rates applicable in current fiscal year. In each row, you must specify:
- * The current Fiscal Year.
- * The rate to be applied on the invoice amount.
- * The threshold for a single invoice.
- * The threshold for the sum of amount of invoices.
- * Add rows for the Account head to be used (company wise). In each row, you must specify:
- * The name of the Company.
- * The Account head where the tax amount will be credited to.
-
-> Note:- Lets say a rate of 5% will be applicable on invoice where Single threshold is 20,000 and Cumulative threshold is 30,000. If an invoice is created with a grand total of 20,000 then the single threshold will be triggered and a 5% tax would be charged. But if the invoce amount totalled up to be 15,000 then no tax will be charged as it didn't cross the threshold. If again an invoice is created with a total of 15,000 then although it didn't cross the Single threshold, charges will be deducted since the sum of last invoice and this invoice adds up to be 30,000 which is equal to the specified Cumulative threshold.
-
-* * *
-
-## Supplier
-
-Select the Tax Category that needs to be applied on the Supplier.
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-## Purchase Invoice
-
-If the **Supplier** has the tax withholding field set, then upon selecting that supplier, a checkbox will become visible to select whether to apply tax or not.
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-## How it works?
-
-#### Setting up -
-
-* Firstly, we need to create a **Tax Withholding Category** like -
-
-
-
-- -* Go to Supplier master and select the tax category created. - -
-
-- -#### Creating Invoive - - -* Go to **Purchase Invoice** and select the supplier from above. - -
-
-- -* Saving the invoice, automatically calculates tax and appends it in the taxes table. - -
-
-- -* Incase of Cumulative threshold, lets create an invoice with a total of 15,000 and submit it. - -
-
-- -* Now, lets create another invoice same as the above. Although the invoice amount didn't cross the Single threshold, we see that tax has been charged. This is because the previous and the current invoice adds up to be 30,000 which exceeds the Cumulative threshold and hence tax based on the rate provided in the **Tax Withholding Category** are applied accordingly. - -
-
-> Note: On submitting the invoice, three GL Entry are created i.e. first for debit from the expense head, second for credit in Creditors account and third for credit in the account selected in Tax Withholding Category.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tax-withholding.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tax-withholding.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ec868eeb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tax-withholding.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tax Withholding
-Withholding tax is a tax that is deducted by the payer of the income. This withholding tax is also called retention tax. Under withholding tax, the taxable amount is deducted at source by the payer i.e. the payer of the income is liable to deduct the withholding tax before making payment to the payee.
-The withholding tax sounds similar to Tax deducted at source (TDS).
-
- tax withholding can be setup based on Supplier.
-
-To use Tax Withholding feature in ERPNext, first, you need to create Tax Withholding Category record. Here, you can mention percent of tax withheld and threshold amount (if any). Here, the threshold amount means tax will be deducted only if the order value is greater than or equal to the threshold value. You also need to link related accounts to the Tax Withholding Category record.
-
-
-
-To enable Tax Withholding for any Supplier, you need to mention applicable percent against tax withholding category.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 340f0da1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-
-# Bank Reconciliation
-
-### Bank Reconciliation Statement
-
-If you are receiving payments or making payments via cheques, the bank statements will not accurately match the dates of your entry, this is because the bank usually takes time to “clear” these payments. Also you may have mailed a cheque to your Supplier and it may be a few days before it is received and deposited by the Supplier. In ERPNext you can synchronise your bank statements and your Journal Entries using the “Bank Reconciliation” tool.
-
-The Bank Reconciliation Report provide the difference between the bank balance shown in an organisation's bank statement, as provided by the bank against amount shown in the companies Chart of Accounts.
-
-####Bank Reconciliation Statement
-
-
-
-In the report, check whether the field 'Balance as per bank' matches the Bank Account Statement. If it is matching, it means that Clearance Date is correctly updated for all the bank entries. If there is a mismatch, Its because of bank entries for which Cleanrane Date is not yet updated.
-
-###Bank Reconciliation Tool
-
-To add clearance entries go to:
-
-`Accounts > Tools > Bank Reconciliation`
-
-Select your “Bank” Account and enter the dates of your statement. Here you
-will get all the “Bank Voucher” type entries. In each of the entry on the
-right most column, update the “Clearance Date” and click on “Update”.
-
-By doing this you will be able to sync your bank statements and entries into
-the system.
-
-__Step 1:__ Select the Bank Account against which you intend to reconcile. For
-example; HDFC Bank, ICICI Bank, or Citibank etc.
-
-__Step 2:__ Select the Date range that you wish to reconcile for.
-
-__Step 3:__ Click on 'Get Reconciled Entries'
-
-All the entries in the specified date range will be shown in a table below.
-
-__Step 4:__ Click on the JV from the table and update clearance date.
-
-
-
-__Step 5:__ Click on the button 'Update Clearance Date'.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fe14356d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tools
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index d5518207..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-bank-reconciliation
-payment-reconciliation
-period-closing-voucher
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1918a3e9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-
-# Payment Reconciliation
-
-In complex scenarios, especially in the capital goods industry, sometimes there is no direct link between payments and invoices. You send invoices to your Customers and your Customer sends you block payments or payments based on some schedule that is not linked to your invoices.
-
-In such cases, you can use the Payment to Invoice Matching Tool.
-
-> Accounts > Tools > Payment Reconciliation
-
-In this tool, you can select an account (your Customer’s account) and click on “Pull Payment Entries” and it will select all un-linked Payment Entry and Sales Invoices from that Customer.
-
-To cancel off some payments and invoices, select the Invoices and Journal Vouchers and click on “Reconcile”.
-
-
-
-__Step 1:__ Select the Account against whom the payments need to be reconciled.
-
-__Step 2:__ Mention the Voucher Type, whether it is Purchase Invoice, Sales
-Invoice or Payment Entry.
-
-__Step 3:__ Select the Voucher Number and click on 'Get Unreconciled Entries'.
-
-* All the payment entries will be pulled into a table below.
-
-__Step 4:__ Click on the entry row to allocate a particular amount.
-
-__Step 5:__ Click on the button 'Reconcile'
-
-* You will get a message that says 'Amount allocated successfully'
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 54239802..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-# Period Closing Voucher
-
-At the end of every year or (quarterly or maybe even monthly), after completing auditing, you can close your books of accounts. This means that you make all your special entries like:
-
- * Depreciation
- * Change in value of Assets
- * Defer taxes and liabilities
- * Update bad debts
-
-etc. and book your Profit or Loss.
-
-By doing this, your balance in your Income and Expense Accounts become zero. You start a new Fiscal Year (or period) with a balanced Balance Sheet and fresh Profit and Loss account.
-
-In ERPNext after making all the special entries via Journal Entry for the current fiscal year, you should set all your Income and Expense accounts to zero via:
-
-> Accounts > Tools > Period Closing Voucher
-
-**Posting Date** will be when this entry should be executed. If your Fiscal Year ends on 31st December, then that date should be selected as Posting Date in the Period Closing Voucher.
-
-**Transaction Date** will be Period Closing Voucher's creation date.
-
-**Closing Fiscal Year** will be an year for which you are closing your financial statement.
-
-
-
-This voucher will transfer Profit or Loss (availed from P&L statment) to Closing Account Head. You should select a liability account like Reserves and Surplus, or Any Revenue Reserve account or into Owners Capital account as Closing Account.
-
-The Period Closing Voucher will make accounting entries (GL Entry) making all your Income and Expense Accounts zero and transferring Profit/Loss balance to the Closing Account.
-
-**Note:** If accounting entries are made in a closing fiscal year, even after Period Closing Voucher was created for that Fiscal Year, you should create another Period Closing Voucher. Later voucher will only transfer the pending P&L balance into Closing Account Head.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/analytics/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/analytics/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/analytics/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/analytics/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 11b8c3d0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/analytics/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-# Analytics
-
-This part of the Agriculture module is used for tracking data and report generation
-
-All the data pertaining to the following doctypes can be tracked by ERPNext
-
-* Plant Analysis
-* Soil Analysis
-* Water Analysis
-* Soil Texture
-* Weather
-* Agriculture Analysis Criteria
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/crop.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/crop.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9cc952b5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/crop.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-
-# Crop
-
-Now we need to specify what our crop will be. A crop summarizes all that is necessary before creatng our first crop cycle or planting.
-
-> Agriculture > Crop .
-
-On the desk, click on the Crop icon. A list will show any existing Crops.
-
-On the top right, click on 'New' to create the first Crop. A new Crop document will open, and we will enter basic information.
-
-The basic information should be entered as such:
-
-* Title: Carrot from carrot-top
-* Crop Name: Carrot
-* Scientific name: Daucus Carota
-* Type: Biennial
-* Planting UOM: Unit
-* Yield UOM: Grams
-
-Click Save
-
-We will skip the Materials Required, Byproducts and Produce sections. In the Ideal Agriculture Task List we enter some planned tasks such as planting, watering, and harvesting. (Please note, our activity list will be intentionally abbreviated for illustraion purposes. For this example we will prepare our field, plant the next day, water only once, add a cover after germination on day 12, remove weeds at day 19, and harvest at day 90.
-
-The first row will look like this:
-
-* Task Name: Preparation - Make rows
-* Start Day: 1
-* End Day: 1
-* Holiday Management: Ignore holidays
-
-When done, you can click 'Save' to prevent any work from being lost.
-
-We are not done yet, we simply have saved the minimum required information!
-Continue filling the next rows with Task Name, Start Day, End Day and Holiday Management.
-
-
-* Row 2: Preparation - Add mulch cover, 1, 1, Previous Business Day
-* Row 3: Planting - Sow the seeds, 2, 2, Previous Business Day
-* Row 4: Water - 10ml per plant, 2, 2, Ignore holidays
-* Row 5: Disease - Pest control - Cover with Fine Net, 12, 12, Previous Business Day
-* Row 6: Weed Control - Remove weeds, 19, 19, Previous Business Day
-* Row 7: Harvest - When top is at 5cm, 90, 90, Previous Business Day
-
-Click 'Save'
-
-You form should now look something like this
-
-
-
-Repeat step 2 for as many crops as you need. You can save some time by duplicating existing crops and modifying only the necessary items
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/crop_cycle.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/crop_cycle.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7829c184..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/crop_cycle.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-
-# Crop Cycle
-
-Once we have defined our crop, we can create as many crop cycles as we like, using the parameters outlined previously
-
-On the desk, clik on the Crop Cycle icon. A list will show any existing Crop Cycles.
-
-> Agriculture > Crop Cycle
-
-On the top right, click on New to create the first Crop Cycle. A new Crop Cycle document will open, and right away you see that two of the required items are a Land Unit and a Crop. We shall give it a descriptive name, to differentiate it from Crop Cycles we might create later.
-
-* Title: Carrot Planting 2017
-* Land Unit: Add a row, and select, Carrot Field 1
-* Crop: Carrot from carrot-top
-* Start Date: Today
-* Leave the ISO 8601 Standard (week count) box unchecked
-* Skip the next four fields for Crop Spacing
-
-Save the new Crop Cycle
-
-It should now look something like this
-
-
-
-Repeat these for every Crop Cycle you need
-
-As you can see a Project was created, with the same name as the Crop Cycle and linked to the Crop Cycle. If you click on the project, you'll see all the 'Sample Tasks' from the linked Crop, i.e. 'Carrot from carrot-top' in this case, were converted into actual 'Tasks' and linked to the Project, for easy management
-
-> Projects > Project
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f2dafe65..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Crops and Land
-
-The core and most important elements of Agriculture module are:
-
-* Land Unit: Representing the physical space where the crops are planted.
-* Crop: Characteristics of the crop, inputs and expected outputs, expected calendar of activities and harvest, etc.
-* Crop Cycle: Individual representation of a single planting in a specific area. (Links a crop to a Land Unit for a specified period)
-
-Here we will learn to do a quick setup with the essential requirements to manage a simple example crop, Carrots.
-
- These instructions assume you have already completed the basic ERPNext setup, and you have the ERPNext desk on your browser window.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 1b24d5b4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-land_unit
-crop
-crop_cycle
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/land_unit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/land_unit.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0a828603..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/crops_and_land/land_unit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-# Land Unit
-
-Before we do anything, we need to define some details about where our crops will be planted. We will first create our farm as a parent land unit, and then we will add one or more fields as children or nodes, belonging to the parent.
-
-> Agriculture > Land Unit
-
-On the desk, click on the Land Unit icon. assets/img/new-land-unit-icon.png A list will show any existing Land Units.
-
-On the top right, click on New to create the first Land Unit.
-
-* Land Unit Name: Carrot Farm
-* Parent Land Unit: All Land Units
-* Check the box next to 'Is Group'
-* Location: plot the area as you please
-
-Click Save
-
-It should look something like this
-
-
-
-With the farm created, we can now create our first Carrot Field! Click on New
-
-* Land Unit Name: Carrot Field 1
-* Parent Land Unit:select the one we just created in step two, i.e. Carrot Farm
-* Leave the 'Is Group' box unchecked
-* Location: plot the area as you please
-
-Click Save
-
-Repeat step 3 for as many fields as you need
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/disease.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/disease.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3027caa5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/disease.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Disease
-
-This part of Agriculture module deals with the management of Diseases, which may include various types of bacteria, funcgi, viruses, or pests which affect he Crop
-
-On the desk, click on the Disease icon. A list will show any existing Diseases.
-
-> Agriculture > Disease
-
-The basic information should be entered as such:
-
-* Disease Name: Aphids
-* Scientific name: Aphidoidea
-* Description: you could give a description of the disease here
-* Treatment Task: This may contain a list of all the Tasks which need to to be executed in orfer to get rid of the Disease
-
-Once you fill the form, click Save
-
-Click Save
-
-Now it should look something like this
-
-
-
-These Tasks will be imported into the Crop Cycle Project if you choose to add this Disease to the list of Detected Diesase in Crop Cycle
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/fertilizer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/fertilizer.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c535ed84..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/fertilizer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fertilizer
-
-This is used to keep track of available fertilizers, and their chemical composition, which is linked to the Item master
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d2b05815..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Disease and Fertilizer
-
-This part of Agriculture module deals with the management of Diseases which affect the Crop and Fertilizers which may be used to promote the growth of the Crop
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index eb13febe..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/diseases_and_fertilizer/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-disease
-fertilizer
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bf630e22..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-# Agriculture
-
-Farmers know that even a small operation requires intensive recordkeeping. A well-run farm requires proper management of accounting, payroll, suppliers, customers and logistics to name a few areas. ERPNext already helps organize these activities.
-
-
-
-### Capture Land Units and Manage Crops
-
-A farm requires additional attention to manage its productive units (plots of land), time sensitive crop activities (such as planting, irrigating, fertilizing etc.), recording environmental and crop data for analysis, and reports to help make effective decisions.
-
-
-
-### ERPNext Agriculture Demo
-
-The Agriculture module in ERPNext helps you keep track of your farming operations. It allows you keep records for each field where you farm, such as geospatial and soil texture characteristics. It allows you to:
-
-* Manage the physical spaces where you plant your crops
-* Manage your crops
-* Record analysis data
-* Plan activities related to your crops
-* Record sale of the harvest or transfer to warehouse for further processing
-* View reports
-
-To see feature of ERPNext Agriculture in action, check the following demo video.
-
-
-
-### Agriculture User Manual
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index a7f92f56..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/agriculture/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-crops_and_land
-diseases_and_fertlizers
-analytics
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-category.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-category.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7553f9d6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-category.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-## Asset Category
-
-First step towards asset management, is creating Asset Category based on the type of assets. For example, all your desktops and laptops can be part of an Asset Category named "Electronic Equipments".
-
-In Asset Category, you can set default depreciation method, periodicity and depreciation related accounts, which will be applicable to all the assets under the category.
-
-
-
-> **Note:** You can also set default depreciation related Accounts and Cost Centers in Company master.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-depreciation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-depreciation.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b8fdfd62..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-depreciation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-### Depreciations
-
-The system automatically creates a schedule for depreciation based on depreciation method and other related inputs in the Asset record. It is also possible to create multiple depreciation schedule for different Finance Book.
-
-
-
-On the scheduled date, system creates depreciation entry by creating a Journal Entry and the same Journal Entry is updated in the depreciation table for reference. Next Depreciation Date and Current Value are also updated on submission of depreciation entry.
-
-
-
-In the depreciation entry, the "Accumulated Depreciation Account" is credited and "Depreciation Expense Account" is debited. The related accounts can be set in the Asset Category or Company.
-
-You can enable booking of depreciaiton entry automatically from "Account Settings". This will create depreciation entry automatically on scheduled date via scheduler. Otherwise, you have to create Journal Entry manually by clicking "Make Depreciation Entry" in corresponding Depreciation Schedule row.
-
-
-
-The system will automatically set the fiscal year end date as the next depreciation date and calculate the depreciation amount prorata temporis based on the Available-for-use Date (IFRS16)
-
-
-
-For better visibility, net value of the asset on different depreciation dates are shown in a line graph.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-location.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-location.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9790c6ae..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-location.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-# Asset Location
-
-The assets that your organisation owns will be located at various facilities like administrative offices, manufacturing plants, warehouses etc. In ERPNext you can create a 'Location' for each of your facilities and track the assets which are present in these locations.
-
-You can also add Latitude and Longitude of the location.
-
-When an asset is moved from one location to another you need to create an asset movement record.
-
-### Map
-
-Map of the location is also shown.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-maintenance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-maintenance.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1552460a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-maintenance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-# Asset Maintenance Management
-ERPNext provides features to track the details of individual maintenance/calibration tasks for an asset by date, the person responsible for the maintenance and future maintenance due date.
-
-To perform Asset Maintenance in ERPNext,
-
- 1. Enable Asset Maintenance.
- 2. Create Asset Maintenance Team.
- 3. Create Asset Maintenance.
- 4. Create Asset Maintenance Log.
- 5. Create Asset Repair Log.
-
-### Enable Asset Maintenance
-Check Maintain Required in Asset to enable Asset Maintenance
-
-
-### Asset Maintenance Team
-Create Asset Maintenance Team, select team members and their role.
-
-
-
-### Asset Maintenance
-For each asset create a Asset Maintenance record listing all the associated maintenance tasks, maintenance type (Preventive Maintenance or Calibration), periodicity, assign to and start and end date of maintenance. Based on start date and periodicity the next due date is auto-calculated and a ToDo is created for the Assignee.
-
-
-### Asset Maintenance Log
-For each task in Asset Maintenance, Asset Maintenance Log is auto created to keep track of the upcoming Maintenances. It will have status, completion date and actions performed. Based on completion date here, next due date is calculated automatically and new Asset Maintenance Log is created.
-
-
-### Asset Repair
-You can also maintain the records of Repair/Failures of your asset which are not listed in Asset Maintenance.
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-movement.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-movement.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a016b834..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-movement.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-## Asset Movement
-
-In ERPNext, you can track the location of an asset or to whom it is issued. For that, you need to create a Asset Movement transaction, whenever the asset is moved from one location to another. You can also keep a track to issuance of the asset to any employee.
-
-
-
-There is also a dedicated button "Transfer Asset" inside the Asset form to initiate the Asset Movement.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-value-adjustment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-value-adjustment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ad51b8c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset-value-adjustment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-## Asset Value Adjustment
-
-In case of fixed asset managment, sometimes the value of an asset needs some adjustment. For example, if a laptop got damaged some reason, and it's value will be dropped instantly. And in that case, we have to readjust the value of the asset.
-
-Using Asset Value Adjustment form, you can do that easily. In the transaction, select the asset and mention the current value. And the system will book a "Gain/Loss on asset revaluation" and adjust the valuation of the asset.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset.md
deleted file mode 100644
index dd02972c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/asset.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-
-## Asset
-
-Asset record is the heart of fixed asset management feature. All the transactions related to Asset like purchasing, sales, depreciation, scrapping, movement or maintenance will be managed against the Asset record.
-
-
-There are two use cases for creating an asset record. The asset can be existing asset which has been bought erlier and it might already been depreciated partially. Or the asset is a newly purchased item.
-
-For the existing asset, you can create the asset record directly checking "Is Existing Asset" field. In this case, you also need to enter already booked depreciation amount and number of booked depreciation. And based on the input, system will create a schedule for remaining depreciation.
-
-
-
-For new asset, you cannot create the asset record directly from Asset master. Asset record will be created automatically on submission of Purchase Receipt / Purchase Invoice for the Asset. And later you can modify the details of the asset record. Find more details in [Purchasing Asset.]({{ docs_base_url }}/user/manual/en/asset/purchasing-asset.html)
-
-
-
-Explanation of the fields:
-
-1. Item Code: An Item for the Asset must be a non-stock item, with "Is Asset" field checked.
-
- 
-
-2. Asset Category: The category of assets it belongs to.
-3. Is Existing Asset: Check if the asset is being carried forward from the previous Fiscal Year. The existing assets which are partially / fully depreciated can also be created/maintained for the future reference.
-4. Status: The options are - Draft, Submitted, Partially Depreciated, Fully Depreciated, Sold and Scrapped.
-5. Location: Set the location of the asset.
-6. Gross Purchase Amount: The purchase cost of the asset.
-7. Depreciation Start Date: The date from which booking of depreciation will be started.
-8. Expected Value After Useful Life: Useful Life is the time period over in which the company expects that the asset will be productive. After that period, either the asset is scrapped or sold. In case it is sold, mention the estimated value here. This value is also known as Salvage Value, Scrap Value or Residual Value.
-9. Opening Accumulated Depreciation: The accumulated depreciation amount which has already been booked for an existing asset.
-10. Available-for-use Date: The date from which the asset has been started to use. The depreciation for the first period will be calculated from this date.
-11. Current Value (After Depreciation): In case you are creating record of an existing asset which has already been partially/fully depreciated, mention the current value of the asset. In case of new asset, mention the purchase amount or leave it blank.
-12. Depreciation Method: There are two options: Straight Line and Double Declining Balance.
- - Straight Line: This method spreads the cost of the fixed asset evenly over its useful life.
- - Double Declining Method: An accelerated method of depreciation, it results in higher depreciation expense in the earlier years of ownership.
-13. Total Number of Depreciations: The total number of depreciations during the useful life. In case of existing assets which are partially depreciated, mention the number of pending depreciations.
-14. Number of Depreciations Booked: Enter the number of already booked depreciations for an existing asset.
-15. Frequency of Depreciation (Months): The number of months between two depreciations.
-16. Next Depreciation Date: Mention the next depreciation date, even if it is the first one. If the asset is an existing one and depreciation has already been completed, leave it blank.
-
-### Accounting Entry
-
-On submission of an asset, "Capital Work in Progress" account will be credited and the asset account related to the asset will be debited. Submission is only possible after entering "Available-to-use Date". If "Available-to-use Date" is a future date, then accounting entry will be booked automatically on that date via scheduler.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6230460e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Managing Fixed Assets
-
-In ERPNext, you can maintain fixed asset records like Computers, Furnitures, Cars, etc. and manage their depreciations, sale or disposal of those assets. It gives you to track locations or keep records of the employees to whom the asset has been assigned. You can also manage maintenance details of the assets.
-
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/index.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 86c76b31..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-asset-category
-asset
-asset-location
-purchasing-asset
-selling-asset
-scrap-asset
-asset-depreciation
-asset-movement
-asset-value-adjustment
-asset-maintenance
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/purchasing-asset.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/purchasing-asset.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 74f76a3a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/purchasing-asset.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-## Purchase an Asset
-
-For purchasing a new asset, first you have to create Asset Category and related Item record for the asset. Then the normal purchase cycle should be followed for purchasing an asset. In Purchase Receipt or Purchase Invoice through which you are receiving the item, you have to enter "Asset Location". And on submission of the Receipt entry, asset record will be created automatically. You can then enter other details of the asset manually from the Asset record.
-
-
-
-Folllowing accounting entries will be posted on submission of the Receipt entry.
-
-
-
-It is noticeable here that, instead of corresponding asset account, Capital Work in Progress (CWIP) has been debited. It is because, asset has been just purchased and it is still not available for use. Until the asset is available for use, the asset value maintained against this account. On the day when it is available for use, the CWIP account gets credited and corresponding asset account gets debited.
-
-We also use a temporary account "Asset Received But Not Billed" (a liability account) which gets credited on submission of Purchase Receipt entry. Later, on submission of Purchase Invoice, this account gets debited / reversed.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/scrap-asset.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/scrap-asset.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d863a43a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/scrap-asset.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-## Scrap an Asset
-
-You can scrap an asset anytime using the "Scrap Asset" button in the Asset record. The "Gain/Loss Account on Asset Disposal" mentioned in the Company is debited by the Current Value (After Depreciation) of the asset. After scrapping, you can also restore the asset using "Restore Asset" button.
-
-
-
-{next}
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/selling-asset.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/selling-asset.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e327be7c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/asset/selling-asset.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-## Sell an Asset
-
-To sell an asset, open the asset record and create a Sales Invoice by clicking on "Sell Asset". On submission of the Sales Invoice, following entries will take place:
-
-- "Receivable Account" (Debtors) will be debited by the sales amount.
-- "Fixed Asset Account" will be credited by the purchase amount of asset.
-- "Accumulated Depreciation Account" will be debited by the total depreciated amount till now.
-- "Gain/Loss Account on Asset Disposal" will be credited/debited based on gain/loss amount. The Gain/Loss account can be set in Company record.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/amending-purchase-order-after-submit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/amending-purchase-order-after-submit.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 86cd2923..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/amending-purchase-order-after-submit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-#Amending Purchase Order after Submit
-Rate and Qty in Purchase Order can now be amended after Submit using the `Update Items` button.
-
-
-
-To Update Rate and Qty in a Submitted Purchase Order, click on the `Update Items` button. A dialog will pop up to let you make the change.
-
-
-
-Please Note the following validations and usecases:
-
-- Update Features checks if Purchase Order has Purchase Receipt and Purchase Invoice.
-- Qty can be updated for un-received and for partially-received Purchase Order. For Purchase Order with completed Purchase Receipt, it cannot be updated.
-- Rate can be updated for un-invoiced and partially-invoiced Purchase Order. For Purchase Order with submitted Purchase Invoice, it cannot be updated.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 5ae36580..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item
-purchasing-in-different-unit
-pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 71aa7229..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-#Maintaining Supplier's Item Code in the Item master
-
-For each item, code assigned might differ from the code your supplier has given to that same item. ERPNext allows you to track Supplier's Item Code in the item master. Also you can fetch Supplier's Item Code in your purchase transactions, so that they can easily recognize item referring to their Item Code.
-
-#### 1. Updating Supplier Item Code In Item
-
-In the Item master, under Supplier Details section, enter Item Code as given by the Supplier to this item.
-
-
-
-#### 2. Supplier's Item Code in Transactions
-
-Each purchase transaction has field in the Item table where Supplier's Item Code is fetched. This field is hidden in form as well as in the Standard print format. You can make it visible by changing property for this field from [Customize Form.](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.html)
-
-Supplier Item Code will only be fetched in the purchase transaction, if both Supplier and Item Code selected in purchase transaction is mapped with value mentioned in the Item master.
-
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 84311897..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-#Pull Items in Purchase Order based on Supplier
-
-**Question:**
-
-Our Material Request has many items, each purchased from different suppliers. How to pull items from all open Material Request which are to be purchased from common Supplier?
-
-**Answer:**
-
-To pull items from Material Request for specific Supplier only, follow below given steps.
-
-####Step 1: Default Supplier
-
-Update Default Supplier in the Item master.
-
-
-
-####Step 2: New Purchase Order
-
-`Buying > Document > Purchase Order > New`
-
-####Step 3: Select for Supplier
-
-From the options available to pull data in the Purchase Order, click on `For Supplier`.
-
-
-
-####Step 4: Get Items
-
-Select Supplier name and click on `Get`.
-
-
-
-####Step 5: Edit Items
-
-All the items associated with a Material Request and having the default Supplier will be fetched in the Items Table. You can further edit items to enter rate, qty etc. Also items which are not to be ordered can be removed from Item table.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/purchasing-in-different-unit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/purchasing-in-different-unit.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 94c0f0f1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/purchasing-in-different-unit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-
-#Purchasing in Different Unit (UoM)
-
-Each item has stock unit of measument (UoM) associated to it. For example UoM of pen could be numbers (Nos) and sand could be stocked kgs. However, when we place an order with Supplier, UoM for an item could change. Like we can order 1 set/box of Pen, or one truck of sand to our Supplier. When creating purchase transacton, you can change Purchase UoM for an item.
-
-### Scenario:
-
-Item `Pen` is stocked in Nos, but purchased in Box. Hence we will make Purchase Order for Pen in Box.
-
-#### Step 1: Edit UoM in the Purchase Order
-
-In the Purchase Order, you will find two UoM fied.
-
-- UoM
-- Stock UoM
-
-In both the fields, default UoM of an item will be fetched by default. You should edit UoM field, and select Purchase UoM (Box in this case). Updating Purchase UoM is mainly for the reference of the supplier. In the print format, you will see item qty in the Purchase UoM.
-
-
-
-#### Step 2: Update UoM Conversion Factors
-
-In one Box, if you get 20 Nos. of Pen, UoM Conversion Factor would be 20.
-
-
-
-Based on the Qty and Conversion Factor, qty will be calculated in the Stock UoM of an item. If you purchase just one Box, then Qty in the stock UoM will be set as 20.
-
-
-
-### Stock Ledger Posting
-
-Irrespective of the Purchase UoM selected, stock ledger posting will be done in the Default UoM of an item. Hence you should ensure that conversion factor is entered correctly while purchasing item in different UoM.
-
-
-
-### Set Conversion Factor in Item
-
-In the Item master, under Purchase section, you can list all the possible purchase UoM of an item, with its UoM Conversion Factor.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ef8a0c1f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-# Buying
-
-If your business involves physical goods, buying is one of your core business
-activity. Your suppliers are as important as your customers and they must be
-provided with as much accurate information as possible.
-
-Buying in right amounts, in right quantities, can affect your cash flow and
-profitability.
-
-ERPNext contains a set of transactions that will make your buying process as
-efficient and seamless as possible.
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 4bd75f10..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-supplier
-request-for-quotation
-supplier-quotation
-purchase-order
-setup
-articles
-purchase-taxes
-supplier-scorecard
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 58efe502..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-
-# Purchase Order
-
-A Purchase Order is analogous to a Sales Order. It is usually a binding
-contract with your Supplier that you promise to buy a set of Items under the
-given conditions.
-
-A Purchase Order can be automatically created from a Material Request or
-Supplier Quotation.
-
-#### Purchase Order Flow Chart
-
-
-
-In ERPNext, you can also make a Purchase Order directly by going to:
-
-> Buying > Documents > Purchase Order > New Purchase Order
-
-#### Create Purchase Order
-
-
-
-Entering a Purchase Order is very similar to a Purchase Request, additionally
-you will have to set:
-
- * Supplier.
- * A “Required By” date on each Item: If you are expecting part delivery, your Supplier will know how much quantity to deliver at which date. This will help you from preventing over-supply. It will also help you to track how well your Supplier is doing on timeliness.
-
-### Taxes
-
-If your Supplier is going to charge you additional taxes or charge like a
-shipping or insurance charge, you can add it here. It will help you to
-accurately track your costs. Also, if some of these charges add to the value
-of the product you will have to mention them in the Taxes table. You can also
-use templates for your taxes. For more information on setting up your taxes
-see the Purchase Taxes and Charges Template.
-
-### Value Added Taxes (VAT)
-
-Many a times, the tax paid by you to a Supplier, for an Item, is the same tax
-which you collect from your Customer. In many regions, what you pay to your
-government is only the difference between what you collect from your Customer
-and what you pay to your Supplier. This is called Value Added Tax (VAT).
-
-#### Add Taxes in Purchase Order
-
-
-#### Show Tax break-up
-
-
-For example you buy Items worth X and sell them for 1.3X. So your Customer
-pays 1.3 times the tax you pay your Supplier. Since you have already paid tax
-to your Supplier for X, what you owe your government is only the tax on 0.3X.
-
-This is very easy to track in ERPNext since each tax head is also an Account.
-Ideally you must create two Accounts for each type of VAT you pay and collect,
-“Purchase VAT-X” (asset) and “Sales VAT-X” (liability), or something to that
-effect. Please contact your accountant if you need more help or post a query
-on our forums!
-
-
-
-#### Purchase UOM and Stock UOM Conversion
-
-You can change your UOM as per your stock requirements in the Purchase Order
-form.
-
-For example, If you have bought your raw material in large quantities with UOM
--boxes, and wish to stock them in UOM- Nos; you can do so while making your
-Purchase Order.
-
-__Step 1:__ Store UOM as Nos in the Item form.
-
-Note: The UOM in the Item form is the stock UOM.
-
-__Step 2:__ In the Purchase Order mention UOM as Box. (Since material arrives in
-Boxes)
-
-__Step 3:__ In the Warehouse and Reference section, the UOM will be pulled in as
-Nos (from the Item form)
-
-#### Figure 3: Conversion of Purchase UOM to stock UOM
-
-
-
-
-__Step 4:__ Mention the UOM conversion factor. For example, (100);If one box has
-100 pieces.
-
-__Step 5:__ Notice that the stock quantity will be updated accordingly.
-
-__Step 6:__ Save and Submit the Form.
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-taxes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-taxes.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ee3ce195..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-taxes.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-
-# Purchase Taxes
-
-For Tax Accounts that you want to use in the tax templates, you must mention
-them as type “Tax” in your Chart of Accounts.
-
-Similar to your Sales Taxes and Charges Template is the Purchase Taxes and
-Charges Master. This is the tax template that you can use in your Purchase
-Orders and Purchase Invoices.
-
-> Buying > Setup > Purchase Taxes and Charges Template > New
-
-
-
-
-You can specify if the tax / charge is only for valuation (not a part of
-total) or only for total (does not add value to the item) or for both.
-
-If you select a particular tax as your Default tax, the system will apply this
-tax to all the purchase transactions by default.
-
-### Calculation Type
-
-This can be on Net Total (that is the sum of basic amount). On Previous Row
-Total / Amount (for cumulative taxes or charges). If you select this option,
-the tax will be applied as a percentage of the previous row (in the tax table)
-amount or total. Actual (as mentioned).
-
- * **Account Head:** The Account ledger under which this tax will be booked.
- * **Cost Center:** If the tax / charge is an income (like shipping) or expense it needs to be booked against a Cost Center.
- * **Description:** Description of the tax (that will be printed in invoices / quotes).
- * **Rate:** Tax rate.
- * **Amount:** Tax amount.
- * **Total:** Cumulative total to this point.
- * **Enter Row:** If based on "Previous Row Total" you can select the row number which will be taken as a base for this calculation (default is the previous row).
- * **Consider Tax or Charge for:** In this section you can specify if the tax / charge is only for valuation (not a part of total) or only for total (does not add value to the item) or for both.
- * **Add or Deduct:** Whether you want to add or deduct the tax.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f932c1e9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-
-# Request For Quotation
-
-A Request for Quotation is a document that an organization submits to one or more suppliers eliciting quotation for items.
-
-In ERPNext, You can create Request for Quotation directly by going to:
-
-> Buying > Request for Quotation > New
-
-
-
-
-
-## Supplier Quotation
-
-After creation of Request for Quotation, there are two ways to generate Supplier Quotation from Request for Quotation.
-
-
-#### For User
-
-__Step 1:__ Open Request for Quotation and click on make Supplier Quotation.
-
-
-
-__Step 2:__ Select Supplier and click on make Supplier Quotation.
-
-
-
-__Step 3:__ System will open the Supplier Quotation, user has to enter the rate and submit it.
-
-
-
-#### For Supplier
-
-__Step 1:__ User has to create contact or enter Email Address against the supplier on Request for Quotation.
-
-
-
-__Step 2:__ User has to click on send supplier emails button.
-
-* If Supplier's user not available: system will create Supplier's user and send details to the Supplier, Supplier will need to click on the link(Password Update) present in the email. After password update Supplier can access his portal with the Request for Quotation form.
-
-
-
-* If Supplier's user available: system will send Request for Quotation link to Supplier,Ssupplier has to login using his credentials to view Request for Quotation form on portal.
-
-
-
-__Step 3:__ Supplier has to enter amount and notes (payment terms) on the form and click on submit
-
-
-
-__Step 4:__ On submission, system will create Supplier Quotation (draft mode) against the supplier. The user has to review the Supplier Quotation
- and submit it. When all items from the Request for Quotation have been quoted by a Supplier, the status is updated in the Supplier
- table of the Request for Quotation.
-
-#### More details
-
-If a Supplier indicates that they will not provide a quotation for the item, this can be indicated in the RFQ document by checking the 'No Quote' box after the Request for Quotation has been submitted.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/buying-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e00a12db..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-
-# Buying Settings
-
-Buying Settings is where you can define properties which will be applied in the Buying module's transactions.
-
-
-
-Let us look at the various options that can be configured:
-
-### 1. Supplier Naming By
-
-When a Supplier is saved, system generates a unique identity or name for that Supplier which can be used to refer the Supplier in various Buying transactions.
-
-If not configured otherwise, ERPNext uses the Supplier's Name as the unique name. If you want to identify Suppliers using names like SUPP-00001, SUPP-00002, or such other patterned series, select the value of Supplier Naming By as "Naming Series".
-
-You can define or select the Naming Series pattern from:
-
-`Setup > Data > Naming Series`
-
-[Click here to know more about defining a Naming Series.](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html)
-
-### 2. Default Supplier Group
-
-Configure what should be the value of Supplier Group when a new Supplier is created.
-
-### 3. Default Buying Price List
-
-Configure what should be the value of Buying Price List when a new Buying transaction is created.
-
-### 4. Maintain Same Rate Throughout Purchase Cycle
-
-If this is checked, ERPNext will stop you if you change the Item's price in a Purchase Invoice or Purchase Receipt created based on a Purchase Order, i.e. it will maintain the same price throughout the purchase cycle. If there is a requirement where you need the Item's price to change, you should uncheck this option.
-
-### 5. Purchase Order Required
-
-If this option is configured "Yes", ERPNext will prevent you from creating a Purchase Invoice or a Purchase Receipt without first creating a Purchase Order.
-
-### 6. Purchase Receipt Required
-
-If this option is configured "Yes", ERPNext will prevent you from creating a Purchase Invoice without first creating a Purchase Receipt.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 44ed3946..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 980e2266..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-buying-settings
-supplier-type
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/supplier-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/supplier-group.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a8d4f164..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/supplier-group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-# Supplier Group
-
-A supplier may be distinguished from a contractor or subcontractor, who
-commonly adds specialized input to deliverables. A supplier is also known as a
-vendor. There are different types of suppliers based on their goods and
-products.
-
-ERPNext allows you to create your own categories of suppliers. These
-categories are known as Supplier Groups. For example, if your suppliers are
-mainly pharmaceutical companies and FMCG distributors, you can create a new
-type for them and name them accordingly.
-
-Based on what the suppliers supply, they are classified into different
-Supplier Groups. You can create your own category of Supplier Group.
-
-> Buying > Supplier > Supplier Group > New
-
-
-
-You can classify your suppliers from a range of choices available in ERPNext.
-Choose from a set of given options like Distributor, Electrical, Hardware,
-Local, Pharmaceutical, Raw material, Services etc.
-
-Classifying your supplier into different types facilitates accounting and
-payments.
-
-Type your new supplier category and Save.
-
-## Supplier Group Tree
-
-You can also construct Supplier Group in the form of a tree hierarchy, similar
-to that of Chart of Accounts.
-
-To view the Tree structure, select `tree` from the sidebar. To go back to the
-list view, simply select `Menu > View List`.
-
-
-
-With the new [User Permission](https://erpnext.org/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions)
-in place, you can now apply hierarchy based permissions.
-That is, if a User is permitted to view parent node of Supplier Group,
-he/she automatically qualifies to view the child nodes of that parent node.
-
-Example, in the above image, let's say that user permission is applied for a User to
-view 'Distributor' document. Then the user also gets permitted to view its
-child nodes 'Book Distributor', 'Electronic Distributor', etc.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-quotation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ee72e1ee..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-quotation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-# Supplier Quotation
-
-A Supplier Quotation is a formal statement of promise by potential supplier to
-supply the goods or services required by a buyer, at specified prices, and
-within a specified period. A quotation may also contain terms of sale and
-payment, and warranties. Acceptance of quotation by the buyer constitutes an
-agreement binding on both parties.
-
-You can make a supplier quotation from a Material Request
-
-#### Supplier Quotation Flow-Chart
-
-
-
-You can also make a Supplier Quotation directly from:
-
-> Buying > Documents > Supplier Quotation > New Supplier Quotation
-
-#### Create Supplier Quotation
-
-
-
-If you have multiple Suppliers who supply you with the same Item, you
-usually send out a message (Request for Quote) to various Suppliers. In
-many cases, especially if you have centralized buying, you may want to record
-all the quotes so that
-
- * You can easily compare prices in the future
- * Audit whether all Suppliers were given the opportunity to quote.
-
-Supplier Quotations are not necessary for most small businesses. Always
-evaluate the cost of collecting information to the value it really provides!
-You could only do this for high value items.
-
-#### Taxes
-If your Supplier is going to charge you additional taxes or charge like a shipping or insurance charge, you can add it here. It will help you to accurately track your costs. Also, if some of these charges add to the value of the product you will have to mention them in the Taxes table. You can also use templates for your taxes. For more information on setting up your taxes see the Purchase Taxes and Charges Template.
-
-You can select relevant tax by going to "Taxes and Charges" section and adding an entry to the table as shown below,
-
-
-
-Besides, in case of multiple items you can keep track of taxes on each by clicking "Show tax break-up"
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-scorecard.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-scorecard.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 173d08a1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-scorecard.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
-
-# Supplier Scorecard
-
-A Supplier Scorecard is an evaluation tool used to assess the performance of
-suppliers. Supplier scorecards can be used to keep track of item quality,
-delivery and responsiveness of suppliers across long periods of time. This data
-is typically used to help in purchasing decisions.
-
-A Supplier Scorecard is manually created for each supplier.
-
-In ERPNext, you can create a supplier scorecard by going to:
-
-> Buying > Documents > Supplier Scorecard > New Supplier Scorecard
-
-### Create Supplier Scorecard
-A supplier scorecard is created for each supplier individually. Only one supplier scorecard can be created for each
-supplier.
-
-
-#### Final Score and Standings
-The supplier scorecard consists of a set evaluation periods, during which the performance of a supplier is
-evaluated. This period can be daily, monthly or yearly. The current score is calculated from the score of each evaluation
-period based on the weighting function. The default formula is linearly weight over the previous 12 scoring periods.
-
-This formula is customizable.
-
-The supplier standing is used to quickly sort suppliers based on their performance. These are customizable for each supplier.
-The scorecard standing of a supplier can also be used to restrict suppliers from being included in Request for Quotations or
-being issued Purchase Orders.
-
-
-#### Evaluation Criteria and Variables
-A supplier can be evaluated on several individual evaluation criteria, including (but not limited to) quotation response time,
-delivered item quality, and delivery timeliness. These criteria are weighed to determine the final period score.
-
-The method for calculating each criteria is determined through the criteria formula field, which can use a number of pre-established variables.
-The value of each of these variables is calculated over the scoring period for each supplier. Examples of such variables include:
- - The total number of items received from the supplier
- - The total number of accepted items from the supplier
- - The total number of rejected items from the supplier
- - The total number of deliveries from the supplier
- - The total amount (in dollars) received from a supplier
-Additional variables can be added through server-side customizations.
-
-The criteria formula should be customized to evaluate the suppliers in each criteria in a way that best fits the Company requirements.
-
-##### Evaluation Formulas
-The evaluation formula uses the pre-established or custom variables to evaluate an aspect of supplier performance over the scoring period. Formulas can use the following mathematical functions:
-
-* addition: +
-* subtraction: -
-* multiplication: *
-* division: /
-* min: min(x,y)
-* max: max(x,y)
-* if/else: (x) if (formula) else (y)
-* less than: <
-* greated than: >
-* variables: {variable_name}
-
-It is crucial that the formula be solvable for all variable values. This is most often an issue if the value resolves to 0. For example:
-```
-{total_accepted_items} / {total_received_items}
-```
-
-This example would resolve to 0 / 0 in periods where there are no received items, and therefore should have a check to protect in this case:
-```
-({total_accepted_items} / {total_received_items}) if {total_received_items} > 0 else 1.
-```
-
-### Evaluating the Supplier
-An evaluation is generated for each Supplier Scorecard Period by clicking the "Generate Missing Scorecard Periods" button. The supplier
-current score can be seen, as well as a visual graphic showing the performance of the supplier over time. Any actions against the supplier
-are also noted here, including warnings when create RFQs and POs or locking out those features for this supplier altogether.
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0aa60027..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
-
-# Supplier
-
-Suppliers are companies or individuals who provide you with products or services.
-
-You can create a new Supplier from:
-
-`Explore > Buying > Supplier > New
-
-
-
-
-In the Supplier master you can add all regular information related to the supplier as well like Tax ID, Billing Currency, Price List and Payment Terms. So that in all future transactions, these default values will populate in the forms.
-
-You can also choose a default Supplier Type and add a new type if you want to.
-
-Each Supplier can have a default price list so that every time when you buy a new item from the supplier, the supplier price list would be updated as well.
-
-
-### Contacts and Addresses
-
-Contacts and Addresses in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can create multiple Contacts and Addresses for a Supplier. Once Supplier is saved, you will find the option to create Contact and Address for that Supplier.
-
-
-
-> Tip: When you select a Supplier in any transaction, Contact for which "Is Primary" field id checked, it will auto-fetch with the Supplier details.
-
-### Integration with Accounts
-
-For all the Supplier, "Creditor" account is set as default payable Account. When Purchase Invoice is created, payable towards the supplier is booked against "Creditors" account.
-
-If you want to customize payable account for the Supplier, you should first add a payable Account in the Chart of Account, and then select that Payable Account in the Supplier master.
-
-
-
-If you don't want to customize payable account, and proceed with default payable account "Creditor", then do not update any value in the Default Supplier Account's table.
-
-> Advanced Tip: Default Payable Account is set in the Company master. If you want to set another account as Account as default for payable instead of Creditors Account, go to Company master, and set that account as "Default Payable Account".
-
-You can add multiple companies in your ERPNext instance, and one Supplier can be used across multiple companies. In this case, you should define Companywise Payable Account for the Supplier in the "Default Payable Accounts" table.
-
-
-
-
-
-### Place Supplier On Hold
-In the Supplier form, check the "Block Supplier" checkbox. Next, choose the "Hold Type".
-
-The hold types are as follows:
-- Invoices: ERPNext will not allow Purchase Invoices or Purchase Orders to be created for the supplier
-- Payments: ERPNext will not allow Payment Entries to be created for the Supplier
-- All: ERPNext will apply both hold types above
-
-After selecting the hold type, you can optionally set a release date in the "Release Date" field.
-
-Take note of the following:
-- If you do not select a hold type, ERPNext will set it to "All"
-- If you do not set a release date, ERPNext will hold the Supplier indefinitely
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 09aacccc..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customer Orders Invoices And Shipping Status
-
-ERPNext Web Portal gives your customers quick access to their Orders, Invoices and Shipments Customers can check the status of their orders, invoices, and shipping status by logging on to the web.
-
-
-
-Once an order is raised, either using the Shopping Cart or from within ERPNext, your customer can view the order and keep an eye on the billing and shipment status. When the invoice and payment against these orders are submitted, the customer can see the updated status on the portal, at a glance.
-
-
-
-#### Outstanding Sales Invoice
-
-
-
-#### Paid Sales Invoice
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c1a4bc41..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customer Portal
-
-Customer Portal is designed to give easy accessibility to customers of a company.
-
-This portal allows customers to login and find out information relevant to them. The customers can trace the communication history of their mails. They can also check order status by logging into the website.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index a029f6b7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status
-portal-login
-sign-up
-issues
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/issues.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/issues.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ef7a55b5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/issues.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Issues
-
-The customer portal makes it very easy for a customer to raise concerns. A
-simple and intuitive interface facilitates your customer to report their
-concerns as Issues. They can view the complete thread of their
-conversation.
-
-#### Empty Issue List
-
-
-
-#### New Issue
-
-
-
-#### Open Issue
-
-
-
-#### Reply on Issue
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/portal-login.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/portal-login.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a431309b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/portal-login.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Portal Login
-
-To login into the customer account, the customer has to use his Email Address and
-the password sent by ERPNext; generated through the sign-up process.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/sign-up.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/sign-up.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8f9d9b81..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/sign-up.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sign Up
-
-Your Customer and Suppliers can signup to your ERPNext account by following Signup option on the Login Page.
-
-#### Step 1: Signup
-
-On the Login Page, you will find option to Signup.
-
-
-
-#### Step 2: Enter Customer Name and ID
-
-
-
-After the sign up process, an email will be sent to the customers Email Address with the password details.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b3961e4c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-#Editing Value in Submitted Document
-
-Once document is submitted, fields are frozen, and no editing is allowd. Still there are certain standard fields like Letter Head, Print Heading which can still be edited. For the custom field, if **Allow on Submit** property is checked, it will be editable even after document is submitted.
-
- Standard fields cannot be set as Allow on Submit.
-
-#### Step 1: Go To
-
-`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
-
-####Step 2: Select Form
-
-In Customize Form, select Document Type (Quotation, Sales Order, Purchase Invoice Item etc.)
-
-
-
-#### Step 3: Edit Field Property
-
-In the fields section, click on the Custom field and check the **Allow On Submit**.
-
-
-
-#### Step 3: Update Customize Form
-
-
-
-After updating Customize Form, you should reload your ERPNext account. Then check form, and field to confirm its editable in submitted form as well.
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/child-table-.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/child-table-.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9eb207f3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/child-table-.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customizing visibility of data in the child table
-
-**Question:** Currently, in the child table (like Item table in Quotation), we can view value in the four columns only. How can we have more values previewed in the child table?
-
-**Answer:** In the version 7, we introduced a feature, editable grid. This allowed the user to add values in the child table without opening dialog box/form for each row.
-
-This is how Quotation Item table renders value when Editable Grid is enabled. It will maximum list four columns in the table.
-
-
-
-As per the default setting, only four columns are listed in the child table. Following is how you can add more columns in the editable itself.
-
-For the field to be added as a column in the table, enter a value in the Column field. Also, ensure that "Is List View" property is checked for that field.
-
-
-
-Based on the value in the Column field, columns will be added in the child table. Ensure that sum total of value added in the Column field doesn't exceed 10. Based on the Column value, width for that column will be set.
-
-
-
-**Switch to Un-editable Grid**
-
-To have more values shown in the preview of Quotation Item table, you can disable Editable Grid for the Quotation Item Doctype. Steps below.
-
-
-
-Once Editable Grid is disabled for the Quotation Item, the following is how values will be rendered in a preview of the Quotation Item table.
-
-
-
-To have specific field's value shown in the preview, ensure that for that field, in the Customize Form tool, "In List View" property is checked.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 43a11b8c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-#Creating Custom Link Fields
-
-Links field are the ones linked to another document type. For example, customer field is a link field in Sales Order. This field is linked to the Customer master.
-
-You can insert Custom Link Field by following steps below.
-
-
-####Step 1: Go to Customize Form
-
-`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
-
-####Step 2: Select Form
-
-In Customize Form, select Document Type (Quotation, Sales Order, Purchase Invoice Item etc.). Once fields are updated in the accompanying table below, open a field above the one you wish to insert your Custom Field. Then click on "Insert Above" to insert the new Custom Field.
-
-
-
-####Step 4: Custom Field Values
-
-To set field as Link, enter values as below.
-
-1. Label: Desired label that user wishes to display in the form.
-1. Type: Set as 'Link'
-1. Name: Desired name for the field
-1. Options: Enter the name of the Doctype to which the field is linked
-
-
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 56920ac0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-#Customizing Sorting Order in the List View
-
-**Question:** I want records in my Item List sorted based on Desc Order of Item Code.
-
-**Answers:** Following are the steps to customize Sort Order for the Item master. These steps will be applicable for customizing Sort Order for the other documents as well.
-
-####Step 1: Go to Customize Form
-
-`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
-
-####Step 2: Select Doctype
-
-Select document type for which Sort Order is to be customized.
-
-
-
-####Step 3: Update Sort Details
-
-In the Customize Form, you will find these fields.
-
-
-
-1. Sort Field: Select field based on which sorting will be done. It will be "Item_Code" field in scenario.
-2. Sort Order: Sort Order will be two possible options, **Asc** for ascending, and **Desc** for descending.
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/deleting-custom-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/deleting-custom-reports.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 36efeb22..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/deleting-custom-reports.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-#Deleting Custom Reports
-
-ERPNext has several [types of reports](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/making-custom-reports-in-erpnext) which can be customize as per the companies/users requirement.
-
-If there is a report custom report which needs to be deleted, it can be achieved by following steps. Please note that its applicable only for the Custom Reports, and not for the standard reports.
-
-#### Step 1: Go to Report List
-
-In the Awesome Bar, type and select "Report List" for an option.
-
-
-
-####Selecting and Deleting Report
-
-The Report List will have all the standard and custom reports of your account. You can select Custom Report to be deleted from the list itself, and click on Delete icon.
-
-
-
-Or you can open that report, and delete it from File menu option.
-
-
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/disable-rounded-total.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/disable-rounded-total.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8dfce8c3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/disable-rounded-total.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-#Disable Rounded Total
-
-All the sales transactions like Sales Order, Sales Invoice has Rounded Total in it. It calculated based on the value of Grand Total. Also Rounded Total is also visible in the Standard Print Formats.
-
-
-
-Follow steps given below to hide rounded total from Standard Print Formats, for all the sales transactions.
-
-#### Step 1: Global Defaults
-
-`Setup > Settings > Global Defaults`
-
-#### Step 2: Disable Rounded Total
-
-Check Disable Rounded Total, and Save Global Defaults.
-
-
-
-For system to take effect of this setting, you should clear cache and refresh your ERPNext account. Then your print formats shall not render value for the Rounded Total in the print formats.
-
-Note: This setting will only affect Standard print formats.
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/fetching-data-from-a-document.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/fetching-data-from-a-document.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3eaa9208..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/fetching-data-from-a-document.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fetching Data from one Document to Another
-
-**Question:** We track Customer's PO No and PO Date field in the Sales Order. To have these values fetched into Sales Invoice as well, we have inserted Custom Field in the Sales Invoice. However, when we create Sales Invoice from the Sales Order, Customer's PO details are not being fetched.
-
-**Answer:** When data is fetched from one transaction to the another transaction, then the mapping of data is done based on the field names. If two transactions have fields with the exact same name, then it's values are mapped.
-
-For example, if you want Customer's PO No. and PO Date to be fetched from Sales Order to Sales Invoice, then you should ensure that Custom Fields added in the Sales Invoice has an exact same field name as in the Sales Order.
-
-Sales Order (standard fields)
-
-
-
-Sales Invoice (custom fields)
-
-
-
-Since names for the Customer's PO related fields are same in the Sales Order and Sales Invoice, when creating Sales Invoice from the Sales Order, values in these fields are auto-fetched.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.md
deleted file mode 100755
index adc459cd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
-
-#Field Types
-
-Following are the types of fields you can define while creating new ones, or while amend standard ones.
-
-- Attach:
-
-Attach field allows you browsing file from File Manager and attach in the transaction.
-
-- Button:
-
-It will be a Button, on clicking which you can execute some functions like Save, Submit etc.
-
-- Check:
-
-It will be a check box field.
-
-- Column Break
-
-Since ERPNext has multiple column layout, using Column Breaks, you can divide set of fields side-by-side.
-
-- Currency
-
-Currency field holds numeric value, like item price, amount etc. Currency field can have value upto six decimal places. Also you can have currency symbol being shown for the currency field.
-
-- Data
-
-Data field will be simple text field. It allows entering value upto 140 characters.
-
-- Date and Time
-
-This field will give you date and time picker. Current date and time (as provided by your computer) is set by default.
-
-- Dynamic Link
-
-Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.html) to learn how Dynamic Link Field function.
-
-- Float
-
-Float field carries numeric value, upto six decimal place. Precision for the float field is set in
-
-`Setup > Settings > System`
-
-Setting will be applicable on all the float field.
-
-- Image
-
-Image field will render an image file selected in another attach field.
-
-For the Image field, under Option (in Doctype),field name should be provide where image file is attached. By referring to the value in that field, image will be reference in the Image field.
-
-- Int (Integer)
-
-Integer field holds numeric value, without decimal place.
-
-- Link
-
-Link field is connected to another master from where it fetches data. For example, in the Quotation master, Customer is a Link field.
-
-- Geolocation
-
-Use Geolocation field to store GeoJSON featurecollection. Stores polygons, lines and points. Internally it uses following custom properties for identifying a circle.
-
-```
-{
- "point_type": "circle",
- "radius": 10.00
-}
-```
-
-- Password
-
-Password field will have decode value in it.
-
-- Read Only
-
-Read Only field will carry data fetched from another form, but they themselves will be non-editable. You should set Read Only as field type if its source for value is predetermined.
-
-- Section Break
-
-Section Break is used to divide form into multiple sections.
-
-- Select
-
-Select will be a drop-down field. You can add muliple results in the Option field, separated by row.
-
-- Small Text
-
-Small Text field carries text content, has more character limit than the Data field.
-
-- Table
-
-Table will be (sort of) Link field which renders another docytpe within the current form. For example, Item table in the Sales Order is a Table field, which is linked to Sales Order Item doctype.
-
-- Table MultiSelect
-
-This is a combination of 'Link' type and 'Table' type fields. Instead of a child table with 'Add Row' button, in one field multiple values can be selected.
-
-- Text Editor
-
-Text Editor is text field. It has text-formatting options. In ERPNext, this field is generally used for defining Terms and Conditions.
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/geolocation-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/geolocation-field.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4a6ab6a1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/geolocation-field.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-# Geolocation Field
-
-Geolocation is a field type offered by Frappe Framework. This field allows you to insert a field with map, on which you can tag a location or draw as per your need.
-
-This is a field type used in the Agriculture module, in the Land and Land Unit master.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 68c41e10..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-#Increase Max Attachments
-
-In ERPNext, you can limit how many files can be attached to specific Document. Using Custmize Form, you can set **Max(imum) Attachments** which can be added to a particular documents.
-
-Let's assume we need to update Max Attachment for Quotation to five.
-
-#### Step 1: Setup
-
-`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
-
-#### Step 2: Select Document Type
-
-
-
-#### Step 3: Set Limit
-
-Set Maximum Attachments as five.
-
-
-
-After update Max Attachments, Update Customization Form. Reload your ERPNext account and then check specific Quotation to confirm if Max Attachment limit is applied.
-
-Note: Maximum limit/size of an attachment is 1MB.
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 9b9f4d68..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit
-creating-custom-link-field
-customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view
-deleting-custom-reports
-disable-rounded-total
-field-types
-increase-max-attachments
-make-field-visible-in-print-format
-making-custom-reports-in-erpnext
-managing-dynamic-link-fields
-module-visibility
-perm-level-error-in-permission-manager
-search-record-by-specific-field
-set-language
-set-precision
-user-restriction
-maximum-numbers-of-fields-in-a-form
-child-table
-table-multiselect
-fetching-data-from-a-document
-signature-field
-geolocation-field
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/make-field-visible-in-print-format.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/make-field-visible-in-print-format.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4d85c2f8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/make-field-visible-in-print-format.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-#Make Fields Visible In Print Format
-
-Each transaction has Standard Print Format. In the Standard format, only certain fields are displayed by default. If user needs field in the Standard format to be visible, it can be customized by using Customize Form tool.
-
-Let's assume in the Sales order, we need to make Shipping Address field visible in the standard print format.
-
-#### Step 1: Customize Form
-
-Go to:
-
-`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
-
-#### Step 2: Document Type
-
-As per our scenario, Sales Order will be selected as Document Type.
-field-visible-2.gif
-
-
-#### Step 3: Uncheck Print Hide
-
-click to open field to be made visible in the Standard Print Format. Uncheck **Print Hide** field.
-
-
-
-#### Step 4: Update
-
-Update Customize Form to save changed. Reload your ERPNext account, and then check Print Format for confirmation.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/making-custom-reports-in-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/making-custom-reports-in-erpnext.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0e53c871..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/making-custom-reports-in-erpnext.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-#Reports in ERPNext
-
-There are three kind of reports in ERPNext.
-
-###1. Report Builder
-
-Report Builder is an in-built report customization tool in ERPNext. This allows you to define specific fields of the form which shall be added in the report. Also you can set required filters, sorting and give preferred name to report.
-
-
-
-### 2. Query Report
-
-Query Report is written in SQL which pull values from account's database and fetch in the report. Though SQL queries can be written from front end, like HTML, it's restricted for erpnext.com cloud users. Because it will allow users with no access to specific report to query data directly from the database.
-
-Check Purchase Order Item to be Received report in Stock module for example of Query report. Click [here](https://frappe.io/docs/user/en/guides/reports-and-printing/how-to-make-query-report.html) to learn how to create Query Report.
-
-### 3. Script Report
-
-Script Reports are written in Python and stored on server side. These are complex reports which involves logic and calculation. Since these reports are written on server side, customizing it from hosted account is not possible.
-
-Check Financial Analytics report in Accounts module for example of Script Report. Click [here](https://frappe.io/docs/user/en/guides/reports-and-printing/how-to-make-script-reports.html) to learn how to create Script Report.
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4d4fa4ea..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-
-#Managing Dynamic Link Fields
-
-Dynamic Link field is one which can search and hold value of any document/doctype. Let's consider an example to learn how Dynamic Link field works.
-
-While creating Opportunity or Quotation, we have to explicitly define if it is for Lead or Customer. Based on our selection (Lead/Customer), another link field shows up where we can select actual Lead or Customer.
-
-If you set former field as Dynamic Link, where we select actual Lead or Customer, then the later field will be linked to master selected in the first field, i.e. Leads or Customers. Hence we need not insert separate link fields for Customer and Lead.
-
-Below are the steps to insert Custom Dynamic Field. For an instance, we will insert Dynamic Link Field in Journal Entry.
-
-#### Step 1: Insert Link Field for Doctype
-
-Firstly we will create a link field which will be linked to the Doctype.
-
-
-
-By **Doctype** mentioned in the Option field, we mean parent Doctype. So, just like Quotation is one Doctype, which has multiple Quotation under it. Same way, Doctype is also a Doctype which has Sales Order, Purchase Order and other doctypes created as Doctype records.
-
--- Doctype----- Sales Order
----- Purchase Invoice
----- Quotation
----- Sales Invoice
----- Employee
----- Work Order
-.. and so on. - -So linking this field with parent Doctype will list all the Doctype records. - -
-
-#### Step 2: Insert Dynamic Link Field
-
-This custom field's type will be "Dynamic Link". In the Option field, name of Doctype link field will be mentioned.
-
-
-
-This field will allow selecting document id, based on value selected in the Doctype link field. For example, if we select Sales Order in the prior field, Dynamic Link field will list all the Sales Orders ids.
-
-
-
-
-**Customizing options in the Doctype Link field**
-
-By default, Docytpe link field will provide all the forms/doctypes for selection. If you wish this field to show certain specific doctypes in the search result, you will need to write Custom Script for it.
-
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/maximum-numbers-of-fields-in-a-form.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/maximum-numbers-of-fields-in-a-form.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bf4cad0c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/maximum-numbers-of-fields-in-a-form.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Maximum Numbers Of Fields In A Form
-
-Sometimes while creating custom fields, you might experienced an error message like below:
-
-> Row size too large. The maximum row size for the used table type, not counting BLOBs, is 65535. This includes storage overhead, check the manual. You have to change some columns to TEXT or BLOBs
-
-### What it actually means?
-
-In simple terms, it means that you have reached the limit of maximum numbers of fields for the specific form/doctype. So, what is the limit of maximum numbers of fields?
-
-In MySQL, there is a hard limit of 4096 columns per table, but the effective maximum may be less for a given table. The exact limit depends on several interacting factors.
-
-Every table (regardless of storage engine) has a maximum row size of 65,535 bytes. Storage engines may place additional constraints on this limit, reducing the effective maximum row size.
-
-The maximum row size constrains the number (and possibly size) of columns because the total length of all columns cannot exceed this size (65,535 bytes). For example, `utf8mb3` characters require up to 3 bytes per character, so for a `VARCHAR(140)` column, the server must allocate `140 × 3 = 420` bytes per value. Consequently, a table cannot contain more than `65,535 / 420 = 156` such columns.
-
-In Frappe frapework, `VARCHAR(140)` type columns are created based on "Data", "Link", "Select", "Dynamic Link", "Password" and "Read Only" fieldtypes. Hence, you can create approximately 156 such columns in the system.
-
-### Solutions:
-
-To add more fields in the system, you can do some changes.
-
-1. Convert some of the fields to "Text", "Small Text", "Text Editor" or "Code" type field. In MySQL, BLOB and TEXT columns count from one to four plus eight bytes each toward the row-size limit because their contents are stored separately from the rest of the row. So, converting to those fieldtypes will free up some spaces and will allow to add some more fields.
-2. Set smaller value in the "Length" property while creating fields, default value is 140. System sets length of `VARCHAR` based on this property and allocates size for that columns. Hence, smaller Length leads to add more fields.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 23a6b22e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-#Module Visibility
-
-If you have permission on specific module, but it is still not visible, following are the possibilities of issues you should look at. Let's consider a scenario that user is permission of Website module, but not able to access it.
-
-As step zero, ensure that you have "Website Manager" role assigned. It is a standard Role which grants permission on Website module. If permissions has been customized in your account, check Role Permission Manager to know which Role has permission on Website, and then check if same Role is assigned to User.
-
-If module is hidden in-spite of assignment of required Role, then you should check if Website is not disabled from All Application.
-
-
-
-If Website is checked in All Application, but still not visible for the User, check if is hidden by System Manager. In the Setup module, feature called Show/Hide Modules allows System Manager to hide specific module from all the Users.
-
-`Setup > Settings > Show / Hide Modules`
-
-Ensure Website module is checked. If you just enabled/activated it, update Show/Hide Module page, and then Reload tab of your ERPNext account. After reload, changes made in the Setup module will be applied and will be visible in the system.
-
-On the same lines, you can check for the visibility issue of other modules as well.
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/perm-level-error-in-permission-manager.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/perm-level-error-in-permission-manager.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1cb9e2b3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/perm-level-error-in-permission-manager.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-#Perm Level Error in Permission Manager
-
-While customizing rules in the [Permission Manager](/docs/user/erpnext/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions), you might receive an error message saying:
-
-`For System Manager _(or other role)_ at level 2 _(or other level)_ in Customer _(or other document)_ in row 8: Permission at level 0 must be set before higher levels are set.`
-
-Error message indicates problem is in the existing permission setting for this document.
-
-For any role, before assigning permission at Perm Level 1 or 2 (and so on), permission at Perm Level 0 must be assigned. Error message says that System Manager has been assigned permission at Perm Level 1 and 2, but not at level 0. You should first correct the permission for System Manager's role by:
-
-- Assigning permission to System Manager at level 0.
-
-Or
-
-- By removing permission at level 1 and 2.
-
-After executing one of the above step, you should be able to successfully add new permissions rules in the Role Permission Manager.
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/search-record-by-specific-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/search-record-by-specific-field.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7caefd29..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/search-record-by-specific-field.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-#Search Record by Specific Field
-
-While creating any document (say Sales Invoice), you have to select other document id in it (say Serial No). For ease in selection, you can also make value of other field of that visible in the search result. Search By functionality enables to define field whos value will be visible in the search result.
-
-Let's assume that while creating Sales Invoice, you wish to see Serial No result, with respective Warehouse.
-
-#### Step 1: Customize Form
-
-`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
-
-#### Step 2: Select Document
-
-`Document Type = Serial No.`
-
-#### Step 3: Search Field
-
-Update Warehouse field name in the Search By field.
-
-
-
-#### Searching in Another Record.
-
-While creating transaction, to get filtered result for Customer, you should firstly click on search magnifier.
-
-
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-language.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-language.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 077e80fe..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-language.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-
-#Change the Language
-
-ERPNext is an multi-lingual application. It allows each user to select preferred lannguage. Following is how User can customize language in one's account.
-
-### 1. Setting Language in User's Account
-
-Following are the steps to set language in your ERPNext account.
-
-#### 1.1 Go to My Setting
-
-
-
-#### 1.2 Select Language
-
-
-
-
-
-#### 1.3 Save User
-
-On saving User after selecting language, your ERPNext account will be refresh automatically. Then you will see ERPNext translated in your selected language.
-
-Being a System Manager, you can set language in other user's master as well.
-
-### 2. Set Language Globally for an Account
-
-#### 2.1 Go to Setup
-
-`Setup > Settings > System Settings`
-
-#### Set Language
-
-
-
-#### Save
-
-Save System Settings, and refresh your EPRNext account. On refreshing, you should language in your ERPNext account changed as per your preference.
-
-
-
-Note: For now, we have translation available only for few languages. You can contribute to make translation better, and add new languages from [here](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-precision.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-precision.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8e0d6ec5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-precision.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-#Set Precision
-
-In ERPNext, default precision for `Float`, `Currency` and `Percent` field is three. It allows you to enter value having value upto three decimal places.
-
-You can also change/customize the precision settings globally or for a specific field.
-
-To change the precision globally, go to:
-
-`Setup > Settings > System Settings`.
-
-
-
-You can also set field specific precision. To do that go to `Setup > Customize > Customize Form` and select the DocType there. Then go to the specific field row and change precision. Precision field is only visible if field-type is one of the Float, Currency and Percent.
-
-
-
-{next}
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/signature-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/signature-field.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cd164233..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/signature-field.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-# Signature Field
-
-Signature is a field type offered by Frappe Framework. This field allows you to write a signature in a block, just like we signature on a paper.
-
-
-
-This field can be used for taking a digital sign-off internally or with an external party, like customers and suppliers.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/table-multiselect.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/table-multiselect.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5291b12a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/table-multiselect.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-# Table MultiSelect
-
-Table MultiSelect field is very similar to Link Field. The key difference is Table MultiSelect field allows you to select multiple values.
-
-You may like to assign a 'ToDo' to multiple users as shown below.
-
-
-
-
-You can add a Table MultiSelect Field by following below steps.
-
-####Step 1: Create a child DocType.
-
-Create a new DocType, check 'Is Child Table' and 'Editable Grid' checkboxes and add a field with 'Link' type as shown below.
-
-Set the link field as mandatory.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Add a field with type 'Table MultiSelect'.
-
-Create a field with type 'Table MultiSelect' and add the DocType created in first step in 'options'.
-
-
-
-You can remove any selected value by clicking on the cross sign next to selected value or by placing the cursor next to the value and pressing Backspace.
-
-This field allows one value to be selected only once.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/user-restriction.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/user-restriction.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f4867ad7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/user-restriction.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Restricting based on Owner
-
-Following are the steps to restrict User to a document based on Owner/creator.
-
-#### Step 1: Role Permission Manager
-
-`Setup > Permissions > Role Permissions Manager`
-
-#### Step 2: Select Document Type
-
-Select Document Type for which you want to set user permission. After permissions are loaded for selected document, scroll to role for which you want to set restriction.
-
-
-
-#### Step 3: Apply User Permission
-
-For Role to be restricted (Sales User in this case), check "If Owner".
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 52e68f14..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
-
-# Custom Doctype
-
-DocType or a Document Type is a tool to insert form in ERPNext. The forms like Sales Order,
-Sales Invoices, Work Order are added as Doctype in the backend. Let's assume we are
-creating a Custom Doctype for a Book.
-
-Custom Doctype allows you to insert custom forms in ERPNext as per your requirement.
-
-To create a new **DocType**, go to:
-
-`Setup > Customize > Doctype > New`
-
-#### DocType Detail
-
-1. Module: Select module in which this Doctype should be placed.
-1. Document Type: Specify if this Doctype will be to carry master data, or to track transactions. Doctype
-for book will be added as Master.
-1. Is Child table: If this Doctype is to be inserted as table into another Doctype, like Item table
-in the Sales Order Doctype, then you should check Is Child Table. Else no.
-1. Is Single: If checked, this Doctype will become a single form, like Selling Setting, which user will
-not be able to re-produce.
-1. Custom?: This field will be checked by default when adding Custom Doctype.
-
-
-
-#### Fields
-
-In the Fields Table, you can add the fields (properties) of the DocType (Article).
-
-Fields are much more than database columns, they can be:
-
-1. Columns in the database
-1. For Layout (section / column breaks)
-1. Child tables (Table type field)
-1. HTML
-1. Actions (button)
-1. Attachments or Images
-
-
-
-When you add fields, you need to enter the **Type**. **Label** is optional for Section Break and Column Break. **Name** (`fieldname`) is the name of the database table column.
-
-You can also set other properties of the field like whether it is mandatory, read only etc.
-
-#### Naming
-
-In this section, you can define criteria based on which document for this doctype will be named. There are multiple criterion based on which document can be named, like naming based on the value in the specific field, or based on Naming Series, or based on value provided by the user in the prompt, which will be shown when saving document. In the following example, we are doing naming based on the value in the field **book_name**.
-
-
-
-#### Permission
-
-In this table, you should select roles and define permission roles for them for this Doctype.
-
-
-
-#### Save DocType
-
-On saving doctype, you will get pop-up to provide name for this Doctype.
-
-
-
-#### DocType in System
-
-To check this Doctype, open Module defined for this doctype. Since we have added Books doctype in the
-Human Resource module, to access this doctype, go to:
-
-`Human Resource > Document > Book`
-
-
-
-#### Book master
-
-Using the fields entered, following is the master one book.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2d641067..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-
-# Custom Field
-
-Every form in the ERPNext has standard set of fields. If you need to capture some information, but there is no standard field available for it, you can insert Custom Field in a form as per your requirement.
-
-Following are the steps to insert Custom Field in the existing form.
-
-####Customize Form
-
-To add a Custom Field, go to:
-
-`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
-
-####Select Document Type
-
-In the Customize Form, select Document Type in which you want to insert Custom Field. Let's assume we are inserting Custom Field in the Employee master.
-
-
-
-#### Insert Row for the Custom Field
-
-In Customize Form, open the field above which you want to insert a Custom Field. Click on Insert Above.
-
-
-
-####Set Field Label
-
-Custom Field's name will be set based on its Label. If you want to create Custom Field with specific name, but with different label, then you should first set Label as you want Field Name to be set. After Custom Field is saved, you can edit the Field Label again.
-
-
-
-####Select Field Type
-
-There are various types of Field like Data, Date, Link, Select, Text and so on. Select Field Type for the Custom Field.
-
-
-
-Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.html) to learn more about types of field you can set for your Custom Field.
-
-####Set Option
-
-Based on the Field Type, value will be entered in the Options field.
-
-If you are creating a Link field, then in the Options, enter Doctype name with which this field will be linked. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.html) to learn more about creating custom link field.
-
-If field type is set as Select (drop down field), then all he possible result for this field should be listed in the Options field. Each possible result should be separate by row.
-
-
-
-For Data field, Option can be set to "Email" or "Phone" and the field will be validated accordingly.
-
-For other field types like Date, Currency, Option field will be left blank.
-
-####Set More Properties
-
-You can set properties as:
-
-1. Mandatory: If checked, entering data in the custom field will be mandatory.
-1. Print Hide: If checked, this field will be hidden from the Standard Print Format. To make field visible in the Standard Print Format, uncheck this field.
-1. Field Description: It will be short field description which will appear just below that field.
-1. Default Value: Value entered in this field will be auto-set in the Custom Field.
-1. Read Only: Checking this option will make custom field non-editable.
-1. Allow on Submit: Checking this option will allow editing value in the field when in submitted transaction.
-
-####Update Customize Form
-
-After inserting required details for the Custom Field, Update Customize Form. On update, Custom Field will be inserting in the form, Employee master in this case. Before checking Employee form, reload your ERPNext account. After reload, check Employee form to see Custom Field in a form.
-
-
-
-####Deleting Custom Field
-
-Given a permission, user will be able to delete Custom Fields. Incase Custom Field is deleted by mistake, if you add another Custom Field with same name. Then you shall see new field auto-mapped with old-deleted Custom Field.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-button.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-button.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bf173136..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-button.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-# Add a Custom Button
-
- frappe.ui.form.on("Event", "refresh", function(frm) {
- frm.add_custom_button(__("Do Something"), function() {
- // When this button is clicked, do this
-
- var subject = frm.doc.subject;
- var event_type = frm.doc.event_type;
-
- // do something with these values, like an ajax request
- // or call a server side frappe function using frappe.call
- $.ajax({
- url: "http://example.com/just-do-it",
- data: {
- "subject": subject,
- "event_type": event_type
- }
-
- // read more about $.ajax syntax at http://api.jquery.com/jquery.ajax/
-
- });
- });
- });
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6e54d903..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Custom Script Fetch Values From Master
-
-To pull a value of a link on selection, use the `add_fetch` method.
-
-
-
- add_fetch(link_fieldname, source_fieldname, target_fieldname)
-
-
-### Example
-
-You create Custom Field **VAT ID** (`vat_id`) in **Customer** and **Sales
-Invoice** and want to make sure this value gets updated every time you select
-a Customer in a Sales Invoice.
-
-Then in the Sales Invoice Custom Script, add this line:
-
-
-
- cur_frm.add_fetch('customer','vat_id','vat_id')
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/date-validation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/date-validation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5f2d64d1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/date-validation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Date Validation
-
-
- frappe.ui.form.on("Task", "validate", function(frm) {
- if (frm.doc.from_date < get_today()) {
- frappe.msgprint(__("You can not select past date in From Date"));
- frappe.validated = false;
- }
- });
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/dynamically-show-options-in-dropdown.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/dynamically-show-options-in-dropdown.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e14377e5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/dynamically-show-options-in-dropdown.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-# Dynamically Update Options in Select Field
-
-Lets say you have a field named state and another field named city. And you would like to limit options in city based on the values chosen in state field, you can write custom script as shown below.
-
- frappe.ui.form.on("DocType Name Here", "state", function(frm) {
- if(frm.doc.state == "Karnataka")
- {
- set_field_options("city", ["Bangalore","Mysore"])
- }
- else if(frm.doc.state == "Maharashtra")
- {
- set_field_options("city", ["Mumbai","Pune"])
- }
- });
-
- {next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/fetch value in child table field b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/fetch value in child table field
deleted file mode 100755
index 8caf8f57..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/fetch value in child table field
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-## Example to fetch value in a child table field from master doctype
-
-
-### Sample Script to fetch expiry_date field from Batch doctype to Sales Invoice Item table
-
-Step 1: Create Custom Script for _**Sales Invoice**_ (parent) doctype
-
-Step 2: Script as below & Save
-
-```
-frappe.ui.form.on("Sales Invoice Item", "batch_no", function(frm, cdt, cdn) {
- var d = locals[cdt][cdn];
- frappe.db.get_value("Batch", {"name": d.batch_no}, "expiry_date", function(value) {
- d.expiry_date = value.expiry_date;
- });
-});
-```
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/generate-item-code-based-on-custom-logic.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/generate-item-code-based-on-custom-logic.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 26ac9275..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/generate-item-code-based-on-custom-logic.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-
-# Generate Item Code Based On Custom Logic
-
-Add this in the Custom Script of **Item**, so that the new Item Code is
-generated just before the a new Item is saved.
-
-
-(Thanks to Aditya Duggal)
-
-
-
- cur_frm.cscript.custom_validate = function(doc) {
- // clear item_code (name is from item_code)
- doc.item_code = "";
-
- // first 2 characters based on item_group
- switch(doc.item_group) {
- case "Test A":
- doc.item_code = "TA";
- break;
- case "Test B":
- doc.item_code = "TB";
- break;
- default:
- doc.item_code = "XX";
- }
-
- // add next 2 characters based on brand
- switch(doc.brand) {
- case "Brand A":
- doc.item_code += "BA";
- break;
- case "Brand B":
- doc.item_code += "BB";
- break;
- default:
- doc.item_code += "BX";
- }
- }
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3a4da9bd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-# Custom Script Examples
-
-### How to Create a Custom Script
-
-Create a Custom Script (you must have System Manager role for this):
-
- 1. Got to: Setup > Custom Script > New Custom Script
- 2. Select the DocType in which you want to add the Custom Script
-
-* * *
-
-### Notes
-
- 1. Server Custom Scripts are only available for the Administrator.
- 2. Client Custom Scripts are in Javascript and Server Custom Scripts are in Python.
- 3. For testing, make sure to go to Tools > Clear Cache and refresh after updating a Custom Script.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 06e02297..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-custom-script-fetch-values-from-master
-date-validation
-generate-item-code-based-on-custom-logic
-make-read-only-after-saving
-restrict-cancel-rights
-restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry
-restrict-user-based-on-child-record
-sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id
-update-date-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field
-custom-button
-dynamically-show-options-in-dropdown
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/make-read-only-after-saving.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/make-read-only-after-saving.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 16c58ea8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/make-read-only-after-saving.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-# Make Read Only After Saving
-
-Use the method `cur_frm.set_df_property` to update the field's display.
-
-In this script we also use the `__islocal` property of the doc to check if the
-document has been saved atleast once or is never saved. If `__islocal` is `1`,
-then the document has never been saved.
-
- frappe.ui.form.on("MyDocType", "refresh", function(frm) {
- // use the __islocal value of doc, to check if the doc is saved or not
- frm.set_df_property("myfield", "read_only", frm.doc.__islocal ? 0 : 1);
- }
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-cancel-rights.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-cancel-rights.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fc87d844..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-cancel-rights.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-# Restrict Cancel Rights
-
-Add a handler to `custom_before_cancel` event:
-
-
-
- cur_frm.cscript.custom_before_cancel = function(doc) {
- if (frappe.user_roles.indexOf("Accounts User")!=-1 && frappe.user_roles.indexOf("Accounts Manager")==-1
- && user_roles.indexOf("System Manager")==-1) {
- if (flt(doc.grand_total) > 10000) {
- frappe.msgprint("You can not cancel this transaction, because grand total \
- is greater than 10000");
- frappe.validated = false;
- }
- }
- }
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d64fd1ca..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-# Restrict Purpose Of Stock Entry
-
-
- frappe.ui.form.on("Material Request", "validate", function(frm) {
- if(frappe.user=="user1@example.com" && frm.doc.purpose!="Material Receipt") {
- frappe.msgprint("You are only allowed Material Receipt");
- frappe.throw(__("Not allowed"));
- }
- }
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-user-based-on-child-record.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-user-based-on-child-record.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 05287ed9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-user-based-on-child-record.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
-# Restrict User Based On Child Record
-
-
- // restrict certain warehouse to Material Manager
- cur_frm.cscript.custom_validate = function(doc) {
- if(frappe.user_roles.indexOf("Material Manager")==-1) {
-
- var restricted_in_source = frappe.model.get_list("Stock Entry Detail",
- {parent:cur_frm.doc.name, s_warehouse:"Restricted"});
-
- var restricted_in_target = frappe.model.get_list("Stock Entry Detail",
- {parent:cur_frm.doc.name, t_warehouse:"Restricted"})
-
- if(restricted_in_source.length || restricted_in_target.length) {
- frappe.msgprint(__("Only Material Manager can make entry in Restricted Warehouse"));
- validated = false;
- }
- }
- }
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a9e52586..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sales Invoice Id Based On Sales Order Id
-
-Below script allows you to get naming series in Sales Invoice, same as of corresponding Sales Order.
-Invoice uses a prefix M- but the number duplicates the SO doc name (number).
-
-Example: If Sales Order id is SO-12345, then corresponding Sales Invoice id will be set as M-12345.
-
- frappe.ui.form.on("Sales Invoice", "refresh", function(frm){
- var sales_order = frm.doc.items[0].sales_order.replace("M", "M-");
- if (!frm.doc.__islocal && sales_order && frm.doc.name!==sales_order){
- frappe.call({
- method: 'frappe.model.rename_doc.rename_doc',
- args: {
- doctype: frm.doctype,
- old: frm.docname,
- "new": sales_order,
- "merge": false
- },
- });
- }
- });
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/update-date-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/update-date-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 502ca670..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/update-date-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Update Date Field Based On Value In Other Date Field
-
-Below script would auto-set value for the date field, based on the value in another date field.
-
-Example: Production Due Date must be set as two days before Delivery Date. If you have Production Due Date field already, with field type as Date, as per the below given script, date will be auto-updated in it, two days prior Deliver Date.
-
- cur_frm.cscript.custom_delivery_date = function(doc, cdt, cd){
- cur_frm.set_value("production_due_date", frappe.datetime.add_days(doc.delivery_date, -2));
- }
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b4c67c89..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Custom Scripts
-
-If you wish to change any ERPNext form formats, you can do so by using Custom
-Scripts. For example, if you wish to add a submit button after saving, to a
-Lead form, you can do so by creating your own script.
-
-`Setup > Customization > Custom Script`
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 0fd3d460..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-custom-script-examples
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e8d4dd32..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customize Form
-
-
-Before we venture to learn form customization tool, click [here](https://frappe.io/docs/user/en/tutorial/doctypes.html) to understand the architecture of forms in ERPNext. It shall help you in using Customize Form tool more efficiently.
-
-Customize Form is the tool which allows user to customize property of the standard fields, and insert [custom fields](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.html) as per the requirement. Let's assume we need to set Project Name field as a mandatory field in the Sales Order form. Following are the steps which shall be followed to achieve this.
-
-####Step 1: Go to Customize Form
-
-Go to Customize Form from:
-
-`Setup >> Customize >> Customize Form`
-
-You can also reach the Customize Form tool from the List Views.
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Select Document Type
-
-If navigate from the list view, Document Type will be automatically set in the Customize Form.
-
-If you reach customize form from the Setup module, or from awesome bar, then you will have to manually select Document Type in which customization needs to be made.
-
-
-
-####Step 3: Edit Property
-
-On selecting Document Type, all the fields of the Document Type will updated as rows in the Customize Form.
-
-To customized Project field, click on the respective row, and check "Mandatory". With this, Project field will become mandatory in the Sales Order.
-
-
-
-Like setting setting field Mandatory, following are the other customization options in the Customize Form tool.
-
-* Change [Field Type](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.html).
-* Edit Field Labels to suit your industry/language.
-* Set field precision for the Currency field.
-* To hide field, check Hidden.
-* Customize Options for the Select field.
-
-####Step 4: Update
-
-To save your customizations, Update Customize Form.
-
-To have customizations take effect, reload your ERPNext account once.
-
-####Other Customizations
-
-From Customize Form, you can also do following customizations:
-
-* Max Attachment Limit: Define [maximum no. of files](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.html) which can attached on a document.
-* Default Print Format: For one document type, you can have multiple print formats. In the Customize Form, you can also set default Print Format for a document.
-* Set [Title Field](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/document-title.html)
-* Sort Field and Sort Order: Define field based on which documents in the list view will be sorted.
-
->Note: Though we want you to do everything you can to customize your ERP based on your business needs, we recommend that you do not make “wild” changes to the forms. This is because, these changes may affect certain operations and may mess up your forms. Make small changes and see its effect before doing some more.
-
-Following are the properties which you can customize for a specific field from Customize Form.
-
-
-| Field property | -Purpose | -
| Print hide | -Checking it will hide field from the Standard print format. | -
| Unique | -For a unique field, same value cannot repeat in another document. | -
| Hidden | -Checking it field will hide field in the data entry form. | -
| Mandatory | -Checking it will set field as mandatory. | -
| Field Type | -Click here to learn about of fields types. | -
| Options | -Possible result for a drop down fields can be listed here. Also for a link field, relevant Doctype can be provided. | -
| Allow on submit | -Checking it will let user update value in field even in submitted form. | -
| Default | -Value defined in default will be pulled on new record creation. | -
| Description | -Gives field description for users understanding. | -
| Label | -Label is the field name which appears in form. | -
-
-#### Fixed or Editable Titles
-
-If your title is generated as a default title, it can be edited by the user by clicking on the heading of the document.
-
-
-
-If you want a fixed title, you can set the rule in the **Options** property. In this way, the title will be automatically updated everytime the document is updated.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e3793c17..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Hiding Module Icons
-
-To hide modules (icons) from the home page, go to:
-
-`Setup > Permissions > Show / Hide Modules`
-
-
-
-Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.html) to learn about other features from where icons from the desktop can be hidden.
-
-> Note: Modules are automatically hidden for users that have no permissions on the documents within that module. For example, if a User has no permissions on Purchase Order, Purchase Request, Supplier, the “Buying” module will automatically hidden for that User.
-
-Any kind of Reports or DocTypes can also added as a shortcut to the desktop
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bec848db..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customize ERPNext
-
-ERPNext offers many tools to customize the system.
-
-You simplify the forms by hiding features you don’t need using Disable
-Features and Module Setup, add Custom Fields, change form properties, like
-adding more options to drop-downs or hiding fields using Customize Form View
-and make your own Print Formats by using HTML Templates. You can also create
-multiple Letter Heads for your Prints.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 36e2bf57..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-custom-field
-customize-form
-custom-doctype
-document-title
-hiding-modules-and-features
-print-format
-custom-scripts
-articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/kanban-board.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/kanban-board.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4c6dd078..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/kanban-board.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-
-#Kanban Board
-
-Kanban is a Japanese manufacturing system in which the supply of components is regulated through the use of an instruction card sent along the production line.
-
-In ERPNext Kanban board can be an alternative for the list views. It helps you in visualizing various documents (like Task, Projects, Quotatio etc.) based on some status on a virtual board. Also, you can easily update card status by dragging and dropping to required status column. Kanban Board helps to visualize, control and optimize workflow and collaborate in real-time with the entire team.
-
-###Create new Kanban Board
-
-To create a Kanban board in ERPNext click the Kanban dropdown on the sidebar, and select New Kanban Board.
-
-
-
-###Add new Card/Document
-
-To add Cards on Kanban Board click Add Tasks. You can Edit a card details by click on the card and it will take you to the Task Doctype where you can further add and edit card details.
-
-
-
-###Update Cards/Document Status
-
-Based on the Task status you can drag and drop the Cards in the respective column. For example if the task is work in progress you can move the card for the task from the status Open to Working.
-
-
-
-###Manage Columns
-
-To add more columns in the Kanban board click Add columns.
-
-
-
-To move columns based on the priority drag and drop the columns as per requirement.
-
-
-
-To set Colors to a Card click drop down menu on the card and assign color to it.
-
-
-
-You can also Archive and Restore the columns added in a Kanban board. To do so click Archive in drop down menu on the card. Once archived you can restore the column from the list of the archived columns in the Kanban board.
-
-
-
-###Filters
-
-You can create multiple Kanban Boards based on different filters. To save filters for a Kanban Board, click on Menu and then "Save filters"
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2a300a24..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
-
-# Print Format
-
-Print Formats are the layouts that are generated when you want to Print or
-Email a transaction like a Sales Invoice. There are two types of Print
-Formats,
-
- * The auto-generated “Standard” Print Format: This type of format follows the same layout as the form and is generated automatically by ERPNext.
- * Based on the Print Format document. There are templates in HTML that will be rendered with data.
-
-ERPNext comes with a number of pre-defined templates in three styles: Modern,
-Classic and Standard.
-
-You can modify the templates or create your own. Editing
-ERPNext templates is not allowed because they may be over-written in an
-upcoming release.
-
-To create your own versions, open an existing template from:
-
-`Setup > Printing > Print Formats`
-
-
-
-Select the type of Print Format you want to edit and click on the “Copy”
-button on the right column. A new Print Format will open up with “Is Standard”
-set as “No” and you can edit the Print Format.
-
-Editing a Print Format is a long discussion and you will have to know a bit of
-HTML, CSS, Python to learn this. For help, please post on our forum.
-
-Print Formats are rendered on the server side using the [Jinja Templating Language](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/). All forms have access to the doc object which contains information about the document that is being formatted. You can also access common utilities via the frappe module.
-
-For styling, the [Bootstrap CSS Framework](http://getbootstrap.com/) is provided and you can enjoy the full range of classes.
-
-> Note: Pre-printed stationary is usually not a good idea because your Prints
-will look incomplete (inconsistent) when you send them by mail.
-
-#### References
-
-1. [Jinja Templating Language: Reference](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/)
-2. [Bootstrap CSS Framework](http://getbootstrap.com/)
-
-#### Print Settings
-
-To edit / update your print and PDF settings, go to:
-
-`Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Settings`
-
-
-
-#### Example
-
- {% raw %}{{ doc.select_print_heading or "Invoice" }}
-
-
- Customer Name
- {{ doc.customer_name }}
-
-
- Date
- {{ doc.get_formatted("invoice_date") }}
- | Sr | -Item Name | -Description | -Qty | -Rate | -Amount | -
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| {{ row.idx }} | -
- {{ row.item_name }}
- {% if row.item_code != row.item_name -%}
- Item Code: {{ row.item_code}} - {%- endif %} - |
-
- {{ row.description }} |
- {{ row.qty }} {{ row.uom or row.stock_uom }} | -{{ - row.get_formatted("rate", doc) }} | -{{ - row.get_formatted("amount", doc) }} | -
-
-After assessment is conducted for a Course, marks earned are entered based on the Assessment Criteria. For example, if assessment was conducted for science subject, then you can evaluate Student in Science on various criteria like Writing, Practicals, Presentation etc.
-
-Assessment Criteria is be used when scheduling Assessment Plan for Student Group and Course.
-
-
-
-#### Video Tutorial on Assessment Criteria
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_group.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1bb999d1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-#Assessment Group
-
-Assessment Group tree is a master where you can define the hierarchy for examination conducted in your education institute.
-
-For example, if you conduct two assessment in a academic year, then setup Assessment Group as following.
-
-
-
-On the same lines, you can also define multiple Assessment Group bases on assessment conducted in your institute.
-
-
-
-#### Video Tutorial on Assessment Group
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_plan.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_plan.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b40f26f7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_plan.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-
-#Assessment Plan
-
-To schedule an assessment/examination for a Student Group, for specific Course, create Assessment Plan. In the Assessment Plan, you can also capture details like:
-
-1. Grading Scale based on which grades will be assigned to students.
-
-2. Schedule Date of Assessment
-
-3. Room where assessment will be conducted
-
-4. Examiner and Supervisor
-
-
-
-5. Assessment Criteria is list of criteria based which each student in will be evaluated and grades will be assigned.
-
-
-
-#### Video Tutorial on Assessment Plan
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_result.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_result.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 372cb494..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_result.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-#Assessment Result
-
-Assessment Result is a log of marks/grades earned by the student for specific Assessment. Assessment Result is created in the backend based on the marks entered in the [Assessment Result Tool](docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_result_tool).
-
-
-
-#### Video Tutorial on Assessment Result
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 29703b93..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-#Assessment Result Tool
-
-Assessment Result Tool help you entering marks earned by the Students for specific course. In this tool, based on the Assessment Plan, all the Student will be fetched into Assessment Result Tool. Also, Columns for Assessment Criteria will be where marks earned can be entered for each Student.
-
-
-
-As you go on entering marks for a Student, and switch to next student, in the backend, Student Result record will be auto-created for that Student.
-
-#### Video Tutorial on Assessment Result Tool
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/grading_scale.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/grading_scale.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 313976e7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/grading_scale.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-#Grading Scale
-
-In the Grading Scale, you can define various grades and threshold for them. Based on the score earned by an Student for an Assessment, Grade will be assigned.
-
-
-
-#### Video Tutorial on Grading Scale
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 317b468f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-#Assessment
-
-Every education institute organizes assessment / examination to evaluates progress of their Students. In ERPNext, you can manage complete assessment processing for your ERPNext account.
-
-Following is the order in which you should setup masters in the Assessment module.
-
-1. Assessment Criteria
-2. Assessment Group
-3. Grading Scale
-
-Once you have also defined the Student Group and Courses, you can schedule an assessment / examination by creating Assessment Plan.
-
-Based on the performance of Student in the assessment, you can create Assessment Result for an Student. You can create Assessment Results in bulk using Assessment Result Tool. In this tool, on selection of Assessment Plan, all the students (for Student Group) will be fetched. You can quickly enter marks earned by each Student for each Assessment Criteria in a single row.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 0266d303..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Assessment/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-assessment_criteria
-assessment_group
-assessment_plan
-assessment_result
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cc661226..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-#Attendance
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 14ecda38..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-student-attendance
-student-attendance-tool
-student-leave-application
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/student-attendance-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/student-attendance-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 41aa1555..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/student-attendance-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student Attendance Tool
-
-The Student Attendance tool allow you to bulk update the attendance for students based on **Student Group and Course Schedule**.
-
-To mark the **Attedance* based on Student Group select the group based on
-
-**1. Batch
- 2. Course
- 3. Activity **
-
-Student details will be autofetched and you can mark the attendance of the given date.
-
-
-
-#### Tutorial Video for Student Attendance Tool
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/student-attendance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/student-attendance.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 21f4a1c4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/student-attendance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student Attendance
-
-Attendance doctype allows you to track and manage attendance of a student in all the days at any time. The Attendance module is designed to help teachers easily mark student attendance during class.
-
-Attendance Records can be created against Student on daily basis.
-
-To create Attendance record :
-
-Select the **Student, Course Schedule and Student Group** for which attendance is to be marked for the given date. Set the Status to Present/Absent and save.
-
-
-
-**Student Attendance tool** can be used for bulk updation of the attendance based on **Batch, Course or Activity**.
-
-#### Tutorial Video on Student Attendance
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/student-leave-application.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/student-leave-application.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 07221f8e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/Attendance/student-leave-application.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-#Student Leave Application
-
-ERPNext allows you to record the leave application for a student.
-
-To create a Student Leave application record, enter the Student and the date for which the leave is applied and save.
-
-
-
-Incase the student is not attending the institute in order to participate or represent institute in any event, he/she can be mark as present from the Leave Application itself.
-
-Once a Leave Application is recorded for a student it will not be recorded in the absent student report as he has applied for a leave.
-
-#### Tutorial Video for Student Leave Application
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f9d0f14c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Admission
-
-The Admission section allow you to create all records starting from Student application till the program enrollment. Below is the list of documents for Student addmission.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 680d7790..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-student-admission
-student-applicant
-program-enrollment
-program-enrollment-Tool
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/program-enrollment-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/program-enrollment-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a9ff3bde..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/program-enrollment-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-# Program Enrollment Tool
-
-The Program Enrollment tool allows the bulk enrollment of the new and old students in a Program. If you are enrolling a new student, you can fetch the students from the **Student Applicant** or if you are promoting the older students you can fetch them from the **Program Enrollment** itself
-
-> Note: Academic Term is optional in the Program Enrollment Tool
-
-You can create the Program Enrollment for :
-
-1. **Student Applicants**: List of Student Applicants will be fetched for the selected **Program**, **Academic year** and **Academic Term** (if provided).
-
-
-
-2. **Program Enrollment**: List of students already enrolled in selected **Program** for the given **Academic Year**, **Academic Term** (if provided) and **Student Batch** will be fetched and can be used to enroll students from one academic year/term to another in the same **Program** or a new **Program**.
-
-
-
-**New Student Batch**: This can be selected for the entire students fetched in the table. Priority will be given to the Batch selected in the table (for individual students).
-
-For promoting the students, the new academic year, academic term and program can also be selected for the enrollment of the fetched students list.
-
-#### Video Tutorial for Program Enrollment Tool
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/program-enrollment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/program-enrollment.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a8c48f5a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/program-enrollment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-
-# Program Enrollment
-
-**Program Enrollment** is the record of enrollment of a student in a given program and choose courses for a particular Academic Year and Academic Term (optional). If a student is enrolled in a program then his/her Program Enrollment must be created. The mandatory course in that program is automatically filled in Enrolled Courses table while the elective/optional courses can be selected manually.
-
-If the student has applied online for the admission in a particular **Program** and the application is approved, then the Program Enrollment can be created from within the Student Applicant record via clicking on the **Enroll** button.
-
-Else, to create the new Program Enrollment manually, go to:
-> Education > Program Enrollment > New
-
-
-
-If any institution has skipped the online admission process then Program Enrollment can also be considered as the confirmation of the admission in a particular Program.
-
-> TIP: Academic Term is optional in the Program Enrollment. If your institution has only annual curriculum, you can skip the Academic Term
-
-Student Batch: To categorize student into different sections/batches, you can assign the batch to the student. On the basis of this field, later student groups can be created.
-
-Student Category: For the Institutions having multiple Fees Structure, this field can be used to differentiate the student enrollment in a given fee category.
-
-#### Video Tutorial For Program Enrollment
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/student-applicant.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/student-applicant.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 427aec10..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/student-applicant.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student Applicant
-
-A Student Applicant record needs to be created when a student applies for a program at your institute.
-You can Approve or Reject a student applicant. By accepting a student applicant you can add them to the student master.
-
-
-
-### Application Status
-
-- By default when a student applicant is created in the system, the application status is set to 'Applied'
-
-- You can update the status to 'Approved' once you approve the applicant to join your institute.
-
-- Once the application status is set to 'Approved', the 'Enroll' button should show up.
- You can create a student record against the student applicant and enroll them to a program by clicking on this button.
-
-- Once a student is created against the student applicant, the system shall set the application status to 'Admitted'
- and will not allow you to change the application status unless the student record is deleted.
-
-### Student Enrollment
-Once the form is submitted you can either approve or reject the application form.
-
-
-
-Once you approve a Student Applicant you can enroll them to a program. When you click the 'Enroll' buttom,
-the system shall create a student against that applicant and redirect you to the [Program Enrollment form](/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/program-enrollment.html).
-
-
-
-#### Video Tutorial for Student Application
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/student_admission.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/student_admission.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 90c51d9b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/admission/student_admission.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student Admission
-
-The admission process begins with filling the admission form. The Student Admission record enables to initiate your admission process for a given **Academic year**. ERPNext admission module allows you to create an admission record which can be then published on the ERPNext generate website.
-
-To create a Student Admission record go to :
-
-> **education** > **Admissions** > **Student Admission** >
-
-
-
-
-Once an admission record is created, the age eligibility criteria can be determined for the every program. Similarly, you can also determine the application fee and naming series for every student applicant. If you keep the naming series blank then the default naming series will be applied for every student applicant.
-
-The information provided in the Student Admission records will be used for the validation and creation of the Student Admission records (only if student admission link is filled there)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index 8b137891..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/__init__.py
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/assessment-plan-status.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/assessment-plan-status.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 392ac7b5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/assessment-plan-status.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-# Assessment Plan Status
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/course-wise-assessment-report .md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/course-wise-assessment-report .md
deleted file mode 100644
index dea86021..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/course-wise-assessment-report .md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Course wise Assessment Report
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/final-assessment-grades.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/final-assessment-grades.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 369829cb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/final-assessment-grades.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-# Final Assessment Grades
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e44ccec..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Assessment Reports
-
-This section contains 'Assessment Reports' related documents.
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/index.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 32055e76..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-course-wise-assessment-report
-final-assessment-grades
-assessment-plan-status
-student-report-generation-tool
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/student-report-generation-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/student-report-generation-tool.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c43fd58..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/assessment-reports/student-report-generation-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-# Student Report Generation Tool
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fee-category.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fee-category.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a3c2c473..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fee-category.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fee Category
-
-List of all different type of fees collected.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fee-schedule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fee-schedule.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6ca69872..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fee-schedule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-# Fee Schedule
-Fee Schedule is help to schedule the Fee for the student based on Student Group here you can directly Send Payment
-Request Email to the student while creating the Fee Schedule.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fee-structure.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fee-structure.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 85d1ba3e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fee-structure.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fee Structure
-
-A Fee Structure is a template that can be used while making Fees records or generating them via the Fee Schedule. In the Accounts section, you can set also the different accounts as for the Fees is an accounting transaction.
-
-You can create the Fee Structure directly from
-
-> Education > Fees > Fee Structure > New Fee Structure
-
-or you can create the Fee Structure from Program also.
-Here Fee can be split into different categories such as Tuition Fee, Laboratory Fee, Library Fee, Transport Fee, etc...
-
-
-
-#### Academic Year Impact
-
-If the Fee amount doesn't change every academic year then Fee Structure can be created without the Acadamic year. In doing so, the same Fee Structure can be used every academic year until the Fees for that particular program doesn't change. Still you can set the academic year and term while creating the Fees or Fee Schedule records.
-
-#### Accounting Impact
-
-You can set the "Income Account" and "Receivable Account" in the Accounts section which refers to an Account of you [Chart of Accounts](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md). You must also mention the Cost Center in which your income will be booked.
-
-If you are going to use this in the Fee Schedule, you must select the Accounts carefully as Fee Schedule updates the respected Accounts in bulk.
-
-#### Video Tutorial for Fee Structure
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fees.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fees.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a77a0636..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fees.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fees
-
-Maintain a record of fees collected from students.
-The [Fee Structure](/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/fee-structure.html) is fetched based on the selected Program and Academic Term.
-Student Details and detailed Fee Structure will be available in the fee module. You can get Paid amount and Outstanding Amount details also.
-
-
-
-
-# Payment Request
-Send pending fee Payment Request directly to the particular student by clicking Payment Request. It'll send an automatic remainder mail to the particular student. It also include the payment gateway details for making payments. (payment gateway need to setup)
-
-
-
-# Payment
-Directly make a payment from fee, select Mode of Payment in payment entry and submit the payment.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 770b1764..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fees
-
-This section contains 'Fee' related documents.
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 9bc69ba4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/fees/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-fees
-fee-structure
-fee-category
-fee-schedule
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1ac2f918..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-# Education
-
-The Education domain in ERPNext is designed to meet requirements of any organization which imparts knowledge and believe in doing it in an organized fashion. It has already been used at schools, colleges and even in private firms.
-
-It helps you effectively manage administrative side and allows you to focus on what is most important for your institute, **to educate!**
-
-
-
-### Contents of ERPNext Education Domain
-
-Using Education module of ERPNext, you can effectively manage operations like:
-
-- Managing Student
-- Program and Courses
-- Online Admissions
-- Student Attendance
-- Course Scheduling
-- Assessment Planning and Assessment Result
-- Fee Structure and Fee Receipt
-
-For an online demonstration on each functionality of ERPNext Education module, [click here.](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=f6foQOyGzdA&list=PL3lFfCEoMxvxyjnARY_C1zLoOE55LcMKB)
-
-
-
-### Who Uses ERPNext Education?
-
-The very first implementation of ERPNext was driven by a school teacher herself. She explains what it takes to get implementation right at your education institute.
-
-
-
-
-
-### User Manual
-
-Education Institute needs lots more than Education module, and ERPNext has all of it available built-in.
-
-- You track your books of accounts using [Accounts module](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts.html).
-- Manage payroll, leaves and claims of your admin and teaching staff in the [HR module](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources.html).
-- Organize your [purchases](/docs/user/manual/en/buying.html) and place an approval system.
-
-Here is the stepwise guide on each functionality of ERPNext Education module.
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 82e5ca04..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-student
-admission
-Attendance
-schedule
-fees
-setup
-Assessment
-Assessment Reports
-Tools
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/course-schedule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/course-schedule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 14abbb28..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/course-schedule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-# Course Schedule
-
-Course Schedule is the schedule of a session conducted by an Instructor for a particular Course.
-You can see the overall course schedule in the Calendar view.
-
-
-
-#### Video Tutorial on Course Scheduling
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Marking Attendance
-
-You can mark attendance for a Student Group against a Course Schedule.
-
-
-
-- To make attendance, expand the attendance section.
-- Check the students who were present for that session.
-- Click on 'Mark Attendance'. The system will create the Attendance records.
-
-###View Attendance
-
-Once you have marked Attendance against a Course Schedule the Attendance section in the Course Schedule shall be hidden.
-A View Attendance button shall appear. Click on that button to view all attendance records created against that Course Schedule.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/examination.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/examination.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7bdee05a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/examination.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Examination
-
-The Examination record can be used to track the exam schedule and the results of that exam.
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f16273f4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Schedule
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index d51180b4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-course-schedule
-student-attendance
-scheduling-tool
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/scheduling-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/scheduling-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 70ddbcad..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/schedule/scheduling-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-# Scheduling Tool
-
-This tool can be used to create 'Course Schedules'.
-
-
-
-### Creating Course Schedules
-
-- Select Student Group for which you need to create Course Schedules.
-- Select Course, Room and Instructor for Course Schedules.
-- Enter From Time and To Time for Course Schedule.
-- Enter Start Date and End Date of the Course (Course Schedules will be created within this date range)
-- Enter Day of the week on which you want to schedule the Course.
-- Click on the 'Schedule Course' button
-- The system will create Course Schedules if the Room and Instructor are available and there is no conflict for the selected Student Group with other Course Schedules.
-
-###Rescheduling
-
-- If you wish to reschedule Course Schedules created against a Course, follow the instructions for creating course schedules
-- Check the 'Reschedule' checkbox and then click 'Schedule Course' button.
-- System will delete existing Course Schedules for specified Course within the mentioned Course Start Date and Course End Date and crate new Course Schedules.
-
-#### Video Tutorial on Scheduling Tool
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/academic-term.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/academic-term.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0983103f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/academic-term.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Academic Term
-
-An academic term (or simply "term") is a portion of an academic year, the time during which an educational institution holds classes. The schedules adopted vary widely. The academic term can be a quater, trimester or a semester.
-
-The **Academic term** form in ERPNext enables you to create academic terms within in a year. Based on the term schedule enter the start and end date for the schedule and generate the term for a Academic year.
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/academic-year.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/academic-year.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 86f08839..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/academic-year.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Academic Year
-
-An academic year is a period of time which education, colleges and universities use to measure a quantity of study.
-
-The **Academic year** form have the Start and End date for the Academic year.
-
-
-
-**Student group** link is given to view or add the respective groups to the Academic year.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/course.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/course.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ab6ed9c4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/course.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-# Course
-
- A course is a unit of teaching that typically lasts one academic term, is led by one or more instructors (teachers or professors), and has a fixed number of students. Students may receive a grade and academic credit after completion of the course.
-
-To create a **Course** enter the Course name and Code. Code for the course should be unique for every course. You can also link the department under which the course is conducted.
-
-
-
-Once a **Course** is created, a course schedule can defined for the same.
-
-The Course form is further linked to **Program, Student Group and Assessment Plan** doctypes. The links allow to view/create the related documents for a **Course**.
-
-#### Video Tutorial for Course
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/education-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/education-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 74d32581..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/education-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Education Settings
-
-The Education Settings page allow you to setup basic settings like **Academic Year and Term** for the educational setup.
-Academic Year and Term must be update in each Academic Year and Term.
-
-Attendance Freeze Date is optional one, this will help the academic manager to manage the last working day /end of Academic Year or Term.
-
-Instructor Records can be created by Full Name / Naming Series / Employee Number. This will help to assign the instructor for the particular class or course.
-
-
-
-
-The checkbox to Validate Batch for Students in Student Group enables the Student Batch validation for every Student from the Program Enrollment for the **Batch** based on **Student Group**
-
-
-
-You can enable the validation of Course for every Student from the enrolled Courses in Program Enrollment,for Course based Student Group by checking the settings for **Validate Enrolled Course for Students in Student Group**
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 69a1c3a0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-The Setup section of education module provides facility to make some basic master records and configuration. Below are doctypes for those masters and configuration.
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 9f88c5de..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-course
-program
-instructor
-room
-student-category
-student-batch-name
-academic-term
-academic-year
-education-settings
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/instructor.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/instructor.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e1adaa74..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/instructor.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-# Instructor
-
-An Instructor can be a teacher, tutor, coach, or professor, of a specialised subject that involves any skill.
-
-To create new Instructor go to:
-
-> Education > Instructor > New
-
-
-
-An **Instructor** can also be linked to a **Course Schedule**, where you can define the schedule for a **Course** for a give date and **Room no**.
-
-It is also linked to **Student group** where an **Instructor** is assigned to the Student Group.
-
-While creating the **Assessment Plan** for a Student Group, **Instructor** can be linked as the Examiner or the Supervisor for that assessment.
-
-Further, the log for the Instructor can be entered in the Instructor Log table which can be used for keeping the records of subjects taught by that Instructor.
-
-#### Video Tutorial for Instructor
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/program.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/program.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 499e6d10..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/program.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-# Program
-
-An educational program is a program written by the institutions which determines the learning progress of each subject in all the stages of formal education.
-
-To create a Program go to :
-
-> Education > Setup > Program > New Program
-
-Enter a unique code for every **Program**. You can also link the **Program** to the department under which it is conducted.
-
-
-
-Add the relevant Course and the Fee details for a program.
-
-
-
-The Program Doctype is further linked to the **Student applicant**, **Program enrollment, Student group, Fee structre and Fee**. The links allow to view or create the related document for a Program.
-
-#### Video Tutorial on Program and Courses
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/room.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/room.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4ed4c9a1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/room.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Room
-
-A classroom is a space (room or lab) where you want to schedule courses or examinations. A room in an educational institute can be a Class room, a laboratory or a Examination hall.
-
-The Room doctype allows you to record the room number and the seating capacity for a classroom. Once a room is created Course schedule link is provided in the Room doctype to view or add the course schedule for the classroom.
-
-
-
-The course schedule validate the availability of the Room number and an alert message is shown if there is an overlap for the Room number for a given time slot.
-
-
-
-The Room number is further linked to the Assesment plan. It validates the availability of examination room for the assessment to be held for a given date and time.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/student-batch-name.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/student-batch-name.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1c198d41..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/student-batch-name.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student Batch
-
-Student batch is a collection of students from Student Groups. **Student batch** allows you to create **Student Group** based on a batch. When a student is enrolled for a **Program**, the Student batch is selected to enroll the student for the given Program and batch
-
-
-
-You can also get a **Student Batch-Wise Attendance** report to view the number of student present from the Batch.
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/student-category.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/student-category.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ee4a3420..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/setup/student-category.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student Category
-
-Student Category doctype allow you to classify student based various categories. In Institutions, there may be fee concession for some categories such as Handicapped students, foreign, nationals, reserved category by the government etc.
-
-To create Student category go to:
-
-> Setup > Student Category > New
-
-We can create new student category by adding a name and save it
-
-
-
-You can select the Student Category while making the Fee Structure and accordingly the student from the selected groups can be filtered out while making the Fee Schedule.
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/guardian.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/guardian.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6a6279fc..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/guardian.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-#Guardian
-
-The Guardian doctype allows you to record the guardian details for a **Student**.
-
-
-
-The email id added in the **Guardian** detail can be linked to an email group for sending newsletters or announcements.
-It also hold few important details like guardian primary contact number and alternative contact number for making any type of direct contact with the student’s guardian.
-
-Single students can have multiple guardians like Father, Mother, Brother or Sister etc..
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 58c14da2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student
-
-This section contains student related documents.
-Student's personal details, educational details and Guardian details including student exit information.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 89704b1f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-student
-guardian
-student-log
-student-batch
-student-group
-student-group-creation-tool
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-batch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-batch.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1c198d41..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-batch.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student Batch
-
-Student batch is a collection of students from Student Groups. **Student batch** allows you to create **Student Group** based on a batch. When a student is enrolled for a **Program**, the Student batch is selected to enroll the student for the given Program and batch
-
-
-
-You can also get a **Student Batch-Wise Attendance** report to view the number of student present from the Batch.
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-group-creation-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-group-creation-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a0c76e77..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-group-creation-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student Group Creation Tool
-
-The Student group creation tool allows you to create student groups in bulk.
-
-To create Student group using this tool go to
-
-> Education > Student > Student Group creation tool
-
-Select the **Academic Term** and the **Program** for which a student group is to be created.
-
-
-
-By default the student group is created based on the **Course** only. The check box for "Separate course based Group for every Batch" allows you to create batchwise Student groups for a course.
-
-You can leave it unchecked if you don't want to consider batch while making course based groups.
-
-#### Tutorial Video on Student Group Creation Tool
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-group.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5fa05cde..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student Group
-
-A student group is a collection of students taking same course. You can create Course Schedules and Examinations against a Student Group.
-
-A Student Group needs to be created for every course for **Academic Term** and **Academic Year**. The student group can be create based on **Batch, Course and Activity**.
-
-To create a Student Group go to:
-
-> Education > Student > New Student Group
-
-
-
-
-
-To create a Student group based on **Batch**, select the **Progam** and **Batch**, where as to create a Student group based on **Course**, you will only have to select the Course Code. Creating a student group based on activity allows you to group of student for events and activities happening in the institute.
-
-Once a student group is created you can mark attendance for the group.
-
-
-
-You can also update the **Email Group** for the Student Group. Click on Update Email Group to add all the email ids of the gaurdians in the respective email group and **Newsletter** can be created and sent to the Email group.
-
-#### Tutorial Video on Student Groups
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-log.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-log.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8600723d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student-log.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student Log
-
-The **Student Log** Doctype enables you to add and edit addtional information for a student.
-You can make a note of student activities using the **Student Log**.
-Logs can be categorised as 'General', 'Academic', 'Medical' or 'Achievement'
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 241936b2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/student/student.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student
-
-A Student is a person who has enrolled at your institute and you have accepted their application.
-The Student doctype maintains detials like personal information, photo, date of birth, address etc. It also records the **Guardian** and sibling details.
-
-
-
-
-The student is enrolled in a **Program** when the application is approved. Once the enrollement is done the **Student Applicant** status is update to Admitted.
-
-# New Student Creation
-
-You can also create a student directly from
-
-Education > Student > New Student
-
-After new student creation you can fill all the details and have to enrol into program as well.
-
-You can view every doctype created for a particular student. Eg : Fees, Student Group, etc
-
-#### Video Tutorial on Student Management
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index 8b137891..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/__init__.py
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/assessment-result-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/assessment-result-tool.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7cfe01d0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/assessment-result-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-
-# Assessment Result Tool
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/course-scheduling-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/course-scheduling-tool.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d0c7077f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/course-scheduling-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-
-# Course Scheduling Tool
-
-{next}
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 042c18e0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tools
-
-This section contains 'Tools' related documents.
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/index.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 9633c0b8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-student-attendance-tool
-assessment-result-tool
-student-group-creation-tool
-program-enrolment-tool
-course-scheduling-tool
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/program-enrolment-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/program-enrolment-tool.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 37cb2d1f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/program-enrolment-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Program Enrollment Tool
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/student-attendance-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/student-attendance-tool.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 11f9855b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/student-attendance-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student Attendance Tool
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/student-group-creation-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/student-group-creation-tool.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 75875d1a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/education/tools/student-group-creation-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-# Student Group Creation Tool
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/amazon_integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/amazon_integration.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 30a3040a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/amazon_integration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-# Amazon MWS Integration
- The Amazon Connector pulls Products and Sales Orders from Amazon marketplace.
- The sync of Products and Sales Orders is sequential. You have to sync the products before you Sync the Sales Orders.
-
-### How to Setup Amazon MWS Connector?
-
-#### Setting Up Credentials in ERPNext
-
-You can request the developer credentials from Amazon MWS once you are a registered seller on their website. For more details on the same, click [here](https://docs.developer.amazonservices.com/en_ES/dev_guide/DG_Registering.html).
-
- 1. Enter the Seller ID, AWS Access Key ID, MWS Auth Token, Secret Key, Market Place ID, Region and Domain.
-
-
- 2. Setup Company, Warehouse, Item Group, Price List, Customer Group, Territory, Customer Type and Account Group.
- The Account Group is used to hold Commission, taxes etc. that Amazon charges.
-
-
- 3. Setup Sync Configurations.
- Using the After Date, you can sync products and orders created after a particular date. In case you are importing a lot of historic data, it is suggested to start in the reverse chronological order of the After Date and import data in small chunks.
-
-After setting up all the configurations, click on Enable Amazon and save the settings. You are now ready to use the
-integration.
-
- 4. Sync Products
- Click on this button to sync products. Once this is successful you should see your Amazon products
- as Items in ERPNext.
-
-
-
- 5. Sync Orders
- Click on this button to sync sales orders. Once this is successful you should see your Amazon Orders
- as Sales Orders in ERPNext. You can also set up scheduler to sync orders automatically.
-
-
-### Note
-
-The connector won't handle Order cancellation. If you cancelled any order in Amazon then manually you have to cancel respective Sales Order and other documents in ERPNext.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5287c620..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# ERPNext Integrations
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/index.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 82d72b36..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-amazon_integration
-shopify_integration
-woocommerce_integration
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/shopify_integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/shopify_integration.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ee02cdf9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/shopify_integration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-
-# Shopify Integration
-
-The Shopify Connector pulls the orders from Shopify and creates Sales Order against them in ERPNext.
-
-While creating the sales order if Customer or Item is missing in ERPNext the system will create new Customer/Item by pulling respective details from Shopify.
-
-### How to Setup Connector?
-
-#### Create A Private App in Shopify
-
-1. Click on Apps in menu bar
-
-
-2. Click on **Manage private apps** to create private app
-
-
-3. Fill up the details and create app. The each app has its own API key, Password and Shared secret
-
-
-
-#### Setting Up Shopify on ERPNext:-
-Once you have created a Private App on Shopify, setup App Credentials and other details in ERPNext.
-
-1. Select App Type as Private and Fill-up API key, Password and Shared Secret from Shopify's Private App.
-
-
-2. Setup Customer, Company and Inventory configurations
-
-
-3. Setup Sync Configurations.
- The system pulls Orders from Shopify and creates Sales Order in ERPNext. You can configure ERPNext system to capture payment and fulfilments against orders.
-
-
-4. Setup Tax Mapper.
- Prepare tax and shipping charges mapper for each tax and shipping charge you apply in Shopify
-
-
-
-After setting up all the configurations, enable the Shopify sync and save the settings. This will register the API's to Shopify and the system will start Order sync between Shopify and ERPNext.
-
-### Note:
-The connector won't handle Order cancellation. If you cancelled any order in Shopify then manually you have to cancel respective Sales Order and other documents in ERPNext.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/woocommerce_integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/woocommerce_integration.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2171b5ca..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/erpnext_integration/woocommerce_integration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-
-
-# WooCommerce Integration
-
-### Setting Up WooCommerce on ERPNEXT:-
-
-Steps:
-
-1. From Awesome-bar, go to "Woocommerce Settings" doctype.
-
-2. From your woocommerce site, generate "API consumer key" and "API consumer secret" using Keys/Apps tab.
-
-3. Paste those generated "API consumer key" and "API consumer secret" into "Woocommerce Settings" doctype.
-
-4. In "Woocommerce Server URL" paste the url of your site where ERPNEXT is installed.
-
-5. Make sure "Enable Sync" is checked.
-
-6. Select Account type from Account Details Section.
-
-7. Click Save.
-
-8. After saving, "Secret" and "Endpoint" are generated automatically and can be seen on "Woocommerce Settings" doctype.
-
-9. Now from your woocommerce site, click on webhooks option and click on "Add Webhook".
-
-10. Give name to the webhook of your choice. Click on Status dropdown and select "Active". Select Topic as "Order Created". Copy the "Endpoint" from "Woocommerce Settings" doctype and paste it in "Delivery URL" field. Copy "Secret" from "Woocommerce Settings" doctype and paste it in "Secret" field. Keep API VERSION as it is and click on Save Webhook.
-
-11. Now the WooCommerce is successful setup on your system.
-
-
-
-
-**Note:** In above gif, inplace of delivery url on woocommerce website, you need to paste the url you will obtain after saving the "Woocommerce Settings" page (i.e. Endpoint from "Woocommerce Settings"). I pasted other url because I was using localhost. Please paste your endpoint in place of Delivery URL.
-
-
-
-### WooCommerce Integration Working:
-
-Steps:
-
-1. From your Woocommerce website, register yourself as a user.
-
-2. Now Click on Address Details and provide the required details.
-
-3. For start shopping, click on Shop option and now available products can be seen.
-
-4. Add the desired products into cart and click on View Cart.
-
-5. From Cart, once you have added the desired products, you can click on proceed to checkout.
-
-6. All billing details and Order details can be seen now. Once you are ok with it, click on Place Order button.
-
-7. "Order Received" message can been seen indicating that the order is placed successfully.
-
-8. Now on system where ERPNEXT is installed check the following doctypes: Customer, Address, Item, Sales Order.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/appointment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/appointment.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 33797ecd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/appointment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-
-# Patient Appointment
-ERPNext Healthcare allows you to book Patient appointments for any date and alert patients via Email or SMS. You can easily organize appointments for each Practitioner based on their availability schedules.
-
-
-
-You can create a Patient Appointment from,
-
-`Healthcare > Appointment Booking > Patient Appointment`
-
-You can book appointments for a registered Patient by searching for Patient by Patient ID, Name, Email or Mobile number. It is also possible to register a new Patient from the Appointment screen itself by selecting `Create a new Patient` in the Patient field.
-
-
-
-If you need to book appointments for procedures select a Procedure or use `Get Ordered Procedures` to select from a list of Procedures that are ordered for the selected Patient.
-
-`Check Availability` button will allow you to select the Practitioner, Appointment Type and Date for which the appointment is to be booked. On selecting the details, all the available time slots for the practitioner be displayed with status indicators for the selected date. You can select a time slot and `Book` an Appointment for the Patient.
-
-Note that, selecting the `Appointment Type` will automatically set the duration of the appointment as configured in the Appointment Type. This will allow you to override the duration of appointments set by the Practitioner Schedule and the time slots will adjust to the next available time automatically. To disable this behavior, you can enable `Always Use Slot Duration as Appointment Duration` in the Practitioner master. This will always set the slot duration configured in the Practitioner Schedule as the Appointment duration.
-
-
-
-> Note: Appointment booking considers any 'approved' Leave Applications for the Practitioner (Employee linked in the master) and does not allow bookings on such days.
-
-Once booked, the scheduled time of the Appointment and the Service Unit as per the Practitioner and appropriate Status will be set in the document. The More Info section of Patient Appointment, user can add *Notes* and also select a *Referring Practitioner* to help you track referrals.
-
-Optionally, you can configure ERPNext to automatically send an SMS alert to the Patient about the booking confirmation -
-
-`Healthcare > Healthcare Settings > Out Patient SMS Alerts`
-
-### Invoicing
-ERPNext Healthcare allows you to automatically create an Invoice as you book an Appointment. To enable this option, you can turn on this option
-
-`Healthcare > Healthcare Settings > Invoice Appointments Automatically`
-
-If enabled, the Patient Appointment will prompt you to select the *Mode of Payment* and enter the *Amount* collected as the Consultation Charge.
-
-
-
->Note: If you have not enabled this, you can always use *Get Items From > Healthcare Services* in Sales Invoice
-
-### Actions
- * Vital Signs: `Create > Vital Signs` button will take you to the new Vital Signs screen to record the vitals of the Patient.
-
- * Encounter: From the Appointment screen you can directly create and record the `Patient Encounter` to record the details of the visit.
-
- * View `Patient Medical History`.
-
-> Note: User should have appropriate privileges (User Role) to view the buttons
-
-Booking appointments via the ERPNext portal by patients directly checking a Practitioner's availability is not currently available.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/clinical_procedure.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/clinical_procedure.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 015c6b4a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/clinical_procedure.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
-# Clinical Procedure
-You can use this document to map all the clinical procedures, for example, wound cleaning or a cataract surgery. ERPNext allows you to preconfigure Clinical Procedure Templates, so that you do not have to set the default properties like the consumables every time you order a procedure. You can read more on this in the [Setting Up Practice](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_practice.html) page.
-
-You can lookup and book Patient Appointment from the ordered procedures for a patient by using the `Get Prescribed Procedures` button available in Patient Appointment. The performing practitioner can easily create a new procedure from a booked appointment using the `Create > Procedure` button.
-
-You can also create a Clinical Procedure by going to
-
-`Healthcare > Patient Care > New Clinical Procedure`
-
-If you are creating a Clinical Procedure manually, you may want to select a Patient Appointment for the procedure so that all details as provided by the Practitioner while ordering the procedure will be made available. Or you can also select a Clinical Procedure template so as to fetch the details of the procedure as configured in the template.
-
-### Procedure Actions
-The Practitioner can update the procedure status of the Procedure to _In Progress_ by clicking the `Start` button. For the procedure to start, adequate quantity of all consumables in the Healthcare Service Unit's Warehouse. If this fails, you can easily record a _Stock Transfer_ from the same screen.
-
-When the procedure is completed, the practitioner can update the _Consumables_ table with the actual values of the stock quantity that are used. The `Consume and Complete` button will record consumption by booking a stock entry and the update the status of the Clinical Procedure to _Completed_. If the Procedure does not have any stock items in the Consumables table, you can merely `Complete` the procedure.
-
-### Billing
-You can create Invoices for procedures performed on a patient by going to Sales Invoice > Get Items From > Healthcare Services. This way the billing officer need not access the Healthcare module documents and the un-billed services for a Patient will be listed which the officer can chose from.
-
-If the `Invoice Consumables Separately` option is turned on, the charges for the consumable Items will be added to the Sales Invoice separately.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/healthcare_practitioner.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/healthcare_practitioner.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c3989eeb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/healthcare_practitioner.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-# Healthcare Practitioner
-ERPNext Healthcare allows you to create multiple practitioners and link to a User with appropriate Roles. You can create a Practitioner by going to,
-
-`Healthcare > Masters > Healthcare Practitioner`
-
-
-
-To enable access rights to ERPNext, you may want to attach a User with `Physician` role for the practitioner. Most Patient related documents like the Encounter, Vitals etc. offer only limited access to users with other roles. You should ideally link the User to Employee document for the user to access Human Resources module so as to utilize the many features like Leaves, Payroll etc.
-
->Note: Selecting the Employee field will fetch in all relevant fields as configured in the Employee document to help you easily setup the Practitioner
-
-### Availability and Charges
-You can select multiple schedules for each practitioner and optionally a service unit at which the practitioner will be available.
-
-
-
-You can optionally set an `Appointment Type` for each schedule to ensure that only those types of appointments can be booked for the time slots available as per the schedule. Leaving this field blank will allow appointments of any type. Also, enabling `Always Use Slot Duration as Appointment Duration` will override the default behavior of setting appointment duration to the duration configured in the Appointment Type.
-
-
-
-You can set the consultation charges which are applicable to the practitioner. If required, you can also select an Income Account for a Physician to book all Consultation charges into separate accounts.
-
-
-
-### Referring Physicians
-You may also want to manage a list of Doctors who refers Patients to your facility. You can manage such data in the Healthcare Practitioner document itself by leaving out the Employee and User links.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/healthcare_serice_unit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/healthcare_serice_unit.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 830e456b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/healthcare_serice_unit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Healthcare Service Unit
-
-ERPNext Healthcare helps you map your facility infrastructure and manage scheduling, billing etc. A Healthcare Service Unit corresponds to each such unit which can be scheduled so that these are made available for Appointment booking or Inpatient occupancy and also to be billed. You can create Healthcare Service Units by going to,
-
-`Healthcare > Masters > Healthcare Service Unit`
-
-It is also possible that you can group and organize all the service units in a hierarchical fashion.
-
-
-
-Also read [Setting Up Inpatient](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup-inpatient.html) for more details about configuring Healthcare Service Unit Types
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8812a09a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-# Healthcare
-
-Life is priceless, and you, as a healthcare practitioner needs the best of the tools to honor it. ERPNext Healthcare domain is a humble initiative to help you serve your patients better.
-
-
-
-### What Healthcare Domain Covers
-ERPNext Healthcare helps you manage your hospital, clinic or practice efficiently by scheduling **Appointments**, capturing **Vitals** and managing medication and investigation orders by recording **Patient Encounters**. You can easily pull out a **Patient's Medical History** anytime to review the patient's past conditions and treatments assisting you in providing effective, high quality care. ERPNext Healthcare allows you manage multiple **Medical Code Standards** like the ICD 10 and easily search for Medical Codes simplifying the coding process. ERPNext Healthcare also comes with a **Laboratory** module with predefined templates for recording common Lab Tests.
-
-
-
-With ERPNext version 11, Healthcare domain helps you define templates for **Clinical Procedures**, schedule appointments for procedures and also record the consumption of **Stock** while performing a procedure. **Inpatient ADT** and related **Billing** features are also made available. More importantly, all of it seamlessly integrated with the bulk of other useful features available in ERPNext.
-
-### Contributors of ERPNext Healthcare domain
-The Healthcare domain of ERPNext is the first domain to be completely contributed by a ERPNext community member, earthians. Listen to Anoop, founder of earthians on what motivated him to venture into Healthcare domain and how it benefit all the stake holders of the community.
-
-
-
-
-
-### Power your operations with ERPNext
-Of course, a Healthcare institution needs lots more than just the Healthcare domain to operate efficiently - ERPNext has all of it built-in, out of box!
-
-- You can track your books of accounts using [Accounts module](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts.html).
-- Manage your staff's payroll, leaves, recruitment, appraisals, claims and much more with [HR module](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources.html).
-- Organize your [Purchases](/docs/user/manual/en/buying.html) and place an approval system.
-- Track and manage your Pharmacy [Stock](/docs/user/manual/en/stock.html) and other supplies effectively.
-- Manage your [Fixed Assets](/docs/user/manual/en/asset.html) purchases and sales, depreciation and ensure timely maintenance.
-- Receive online payments and [Integrations](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations.html) with other services including various Google Services.
-
-### User Manual
-Following are detailed guides on each of the functionalities ready for use in the ERPNext Healthcare domain.
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 303014f8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-patient
-appointment
-vital_signs
-patient_encounter
-medical_record
-sample_collection
-lab_test
-clinical_procedures
-inpatient_record
-invoicing
-inpatient_adt
-healthcare_practitioner
-practitioner_schedule
-healthcare_service_unit
-medical_codes
-setup
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/inpatient_adt.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/inpatient_adt.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 2798a5b2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/inpatient_adt.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-
-# Inpatient ADT
-
-Managing ADT (Admission, Discharge, Transfer) in a busy Hospital is quite a tricky function and ERPNext Healthcare eases this to a great extent. In ERPNext Healthcare every patient admission is managed using the [Inpatient Record](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/inpatient_record.html) document.
-
-## Admission
-A Practitioner can order a patient for admission from the Patient Encounter screen using the `Order Admission`.
-
-
-
-As part of the Admission Order, the practitioner can provide necessary details as to which type of ward bed the Patient needs to be admitted to, and any other admission instructions for the staff.
-
-
-
-On ordering a patient for admission, ERPNext Healthcare creates an Inpatient Record for the Patient with all instructions provided by the Practitioner. Any prescribed medications and investigations or procedure orders as part of the ordered Encounter will be carried to the IP record.
-
-> Note: Field Level permissions are by default applied so that Diagnosis information, Admission Instructions and other details are only visible to users with roles Physician and Nursing User enabled
-
-Inpatient admission officer can see the Inpatient Record with status _Admission Scheduled_ and allot the Patient the Ward as per the availability. The `Admit` button in the Inpatient Record will allow the admission officer to select a ward bed for the Patient and process the admission.
-
-
-
-Once a Service Unit is assigned for the patient, the Inpatient Record status will be updated to _Admitted_.
-
-## Discharge
-
-Similar to the Schedule Admission, Patient Encounters for admitted Patients will have the option to `Order Discharge` triggering the status of the impatient Record to _Discharge Scheduled_.
-
-
-
-The Practitioner can order an inpatient's discharge through a Patient Encounter or the Inpatient Record. The Discharge Order allows Practitioner to select the contents of the `Discharge Notes` (or the Discharge Summary) which gets updated in the patient's Inpatient Record document. The practitioner can select the investigations, medications and procedures which were included in the Patient's treatment at the facility which are to be printed in the discharge notes and optionally add his comments to print.
-
-
-
-The admission officer can print the Discharge Notes from the Inpatient Record and use the `Discharge` button to record patient's leave and marking the status to _Discharged_
-
->Note: ERPNext healthcare validates that all services availed during the stay at the facility are Invoiced to successfully complete the `Discharge` option. However, note that this validation _does not_ consider the Invoice status.
-
-## Transfer
-The Inpatient Record holds all data related to the Patient's stay at the facility including all the wards beds (Service Unit) utilized.
-
-
-
-You can always transfer a patient from one Service Unit to another using the `Transfer` button. This will allow you to select the Service Unit to which the Patient is being transferred.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/inpatient_record.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/inpatient_record.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c85954d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/inpatient_record.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Inpatient Record
-ERPNext Healthcare captures the all details about a Patient Admission using this document.
-
-Inpatient Record is automatically created when a practitioner order an admission, you can find the document by going to,
-
-`Healthcare > Patient Care > Inpatient Record`
-
-
-
-Healthcare Practitioner can order a patient admission from the Patient Encounter document using the `Schedule Admission` button. This will automatically create an Inpatient Record for the Patient in _Admission Scheduled_ status. The IP admission officer can then allot a vacant room to the Patient as recommended by the referring practitioner in the admission order.
-
-All details as provided by the Practitioner in the admission order will be made available in the Inpatient record, and the dashboard will link to all other documents which are created in the admission period, you also allowed to create new documents from the dashboard.
-
-> Note: Field Level permissions are by default applied so that Diagnosis information, Admission Instructions and other details are only visible to users with roles Physician and Nursing User enabled
-
-Patient ADT is also managed within the Inpatient Record as described in the [Inpatient ADT](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/inpatient_adt.html) section.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/invoicing.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/invoicing.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ad8f65de..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/invoicing.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Billing
-
-Billing is an integral part of any undertaking and ERPNext Healthcare achieves this by making use of the `Sales Invoice` document in the ERPNext Accounts module.
-
-The Healthcare domain links Patient document with `Customer` and all billable services like, Lab Tests, Clinical Procedures, Consulting Fees etc. with the `Item` document _(with Maintain Stock set to false)_. You can set the links manually too.
-
-The Sales Invoice already has the `Get Items` button which helps User to get a list of Items from other related documents. ERPNext Healthcare brings two more option here to fetch all un-billed services for a Patient as well as prescribed medications from Patient Encounter. This way, the billing user can fetch all billable services as well as medications without having to have access to the Patient Encounter or the Healthcare module itself.
-
-
-
-> Note: All transactions of a Patient are booked against the Customer which it is linked to. You may want to look up various Accounting Reports available in ERPNext Accounts module (like Accounts Receivable) using this Customer link.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/lab_test.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/lab_test.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 54024515..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/lab_test.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lab Test
-
-ERPNext Healthcare allows you to manage a clinical laboratory efficiently by allowing you to enter Lab Tests and print or email test results, manage samples collected, create Invoice etc. ERPNext Healthcare comes pre-packed with some frequently ordered tests, you can reconfigure Lab Test Templates for each Test and its result format or create new ones as explained in [Setting Up Laboratory](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_laboratory.html)
-
-Once you have all necessary Lab Test Templates configured, you can start creating Lab Tests by selecting a Test Template every time you create a Test. To create a new Lab Test
-
-`Healthcare > Laboratory > Lab Test > New Lab Test`
-
-
-
-It is also possible to use the `Create Multiple` option to create all the lab tests ordered / billed for a patient.
-
-
-
-You can select the Patient and then the Encounter or Invoice from which you need to pull the tests without having to open the Encounter / Sales Invoice to look up the orders.
-
-
-
-If the Lab Test Template has sample collection enabled, creating Lab Test will automatically create Sample Collection records.
-
-> Note: To create Sample Collection documents for every Lab Test, turn on "Manage Sample Collection" flag in Healthcare Settings *and* select Sample in the Lab Test Template
-
-ERPNext Healthcare also allows creation of Lab Tests automatically when any lab tests are billed (via Sales Invoice). This along with other Laboratory configurations can be setup in [Healthcare Settings](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/healthcare_settings.html)
-
-As the results gets ready, you can enter the details of results in the Lab Test document. All presets, Normal Values etc. as configured in the Lab Test Template are made available Lab Test for easy data capture.
-
-
-
-
-In many Laboratories, approval of Lab Tests is a must before printing and submitting the document. ERPNext Healthcare allows you to create Users with Role "Lab Test Approver" for this. You will also have to enable this in
-
-`Healthcare Settings > Laboratory Settings > Require Lab Test Approval`
-
-This will ensure that emailing or printing of Lab Tests can only be done after Approval of the Lab Test by the Lab Test Approver.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/medical_codes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/medical_codes.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5cd20ede..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/medical_codes.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Medical Code Standards
-Medical Coding are, in many countries, required for regulatory compliance and many of the Medical Insurance companies manage eligibility and coverage based on Medical Code standards. ERPNext Healthcare offers support, however limited, to encode diagnosis and assessments recorded as part of Patient Encounter. You can also codify Clinical Procedures. You can configure Medical Code Standard and related Medical Codes - which usually can be easily done by data import as the code data tends to be quite large. You can create as many Medical Code Standards as you wish if you need to comply with multiple Coding Standards.
-
-`Healthcare > Medical Coding > Medical Code Standard`
-
-
-
-Medical Code Standard document is used to name the Code Standard and act as a container for all the medical codes which are standardized under it. Medical Codes and descriptions can then be imported to the `Medical Code` document, after ensuring that you set the Medical Code Standard field appropriately.
-
-In the Patient Encounter, practitioner can easily search and select appropriate ones from preconfigured Medical Codes.
-
-
-
-It is also possible that you can link appropriate Medical Codes to `Appointment Type`, `Clinical Procedure Template`, `Lab Test Template` etc. to enable codification based on each of the services your facility offer. In many regions this is mandatory for processing patient _Insurance_ eligibility, claim processing and billing.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/medical_record.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/medical_record.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4338cba3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/medical_record.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Patient Medical History
-Maintenance of accurate and complete medical records of patients is one of the rudiments for healthcare practitioners and providers. Over and above, the ease at which the information is accessible by a practitioner is critical in rendering effective, high quality care.
-
-ERPNext Healthcare helps you to draw up the medical history of a Patient anytime by quickly searching and selecting the Patient. `View > Medical Record` button is available in all forms where Healthcare Practitioners act, so that they can easily switch to the `Patient Medical History` page to view the patient history.
-
-Medical Record automatically keeps track of all Complaints, Diagnosis and other information captured as part of a Patient Encounter, Vital Signs, Lab Investigations, ordered Clinical Procedures, Admissions etc.
-
-
-
-##### Adding Medical Records Manually
-In the Patient document `Create > Medical Record` will allow you to record notes to the Medical Record manually. You can also attach files when doing this, and the Medical Record will display links to the attached file alongside the notes. It's also possible to add Medical Records from the Patient Encounter.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/patient.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/patient.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1df5b3f7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/patient.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-
-# Patient
-
-In ERPNext Healthcare, the Patient document corresponds any individual who is the recipient of healthcare services you provide. For every document ERPNext Healthcare, it is important to have a Patient associated with it. You can create a new Patient from
-
-`Healthcare > Masters > Patient > New Patient`
-
-
-
-The Patient document holds most details that are required to identify and qualify a patient. You can enter as much information available while creating the Patient. All information in the patient document is presented on the Consultation screen for easy lookup and you can always update this information. Other data like observations, vital signs etc. are all linked to the Patient document. These could be recorded during patient encounters and will be available as part of the Patient Medical History.
-
-The Patient document holds the Patient barcode and can be used in any the default print formats or any [Custom Print Formats](docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.html) that you create for printing patient identification tags.
-
-### Patient as a Customer
-
-ERPNext, especially the Accounts module, makes use of **Customer** document for booking all transactions. So, you may want to associate every Patient to be associated with a Customer in ERPNext. By default, ERPNext Healthcare creates a Customer alongside a Patient and links to it - every transaction against a Patient is booked against the associated Customer. If, for some reason you do not intend to use the ERPNext Accounts module you can turn this behavior off by unchecking this flag
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Healthcare Settings > Manage Customer`
-
-In many cases, you may want to associate multiple Patients to a single Customer against whom you want to book the transactions. For instance, a Veterinarian would require the care services provided to different pets of an individual invoiced against a single Customer.
-
-
-
-### Registration Fee
-Many clinical facilities collect a registration fee during Registration. You can turn this feature on and set the registration fee amount by checking this flag
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Healthcare Settings > Collect Fee for Patient Registration`
-
-If you have this option enabled, all new Patients you create will be in _Disabled_ mode by default and will only be enabled after Invoicing the Registration Fee. To create Invoice and record the payment receipt, you can use the `Invoice Patient Registration` button in the Patient document.
-
-> Note: "Disabled" Patients are filtered out in all ERPNext Healthcare documents.
-
-### Grant access to Patient Portal
-ERPNext Healthcare allows you to create a portal user associated with a Patient by simply entering the user email id. A welcome email will be sent to the Patient email address to "Complete" registration.
-
-### Actions
-You can use the document links in the dashboard to traverse the linked document list with Patient filter applied, or use the + icons to create new records. Apart from this, the Patient document allows you to,
-
-* Jump to the Patient's Health History, using `View > Medical Record` button.
-
-* `Create > Vital Signs` to record the vitals of the Patient.
-
-* Manually add data to a Patient's Medical Record, for instance a scanned copy of a Lab Test performed in an external Laboratory or a quick note on the Patient's condition, using `Create > Medical Record` button.
-
-* Record the details of an encounter by using `Create > Patient Encounter` button
-
-> Note: User should have appropriate privileges (User Role) to view the buttons
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/patient_encounter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/patient_encounter.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c330d470..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/patient_encounter.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-# Patient Encounter
-ERPNext Healthcare allows you to record every encounter with patients through the Patient Encounter document. You can create a Patient Encounter based on a previously booked Appointment or directly by creating a new Patient Encounter
-
-`Healthcare > Patient Care > Patient Encounter`
-
-You can also create and record encounter details for a patient from Patient Appointment, the Patient Encounter or the Patient master documents by using the `Create > Patient Encounter` button. If creating a Patient Encounter manually, you can search for a Patient by name, email phone number etc. In the Patient Encounter document, all Patient related details will automatically be populated enabling easy access to relevant data. The Patient Details section will list the latest Vital Signs record of the patient and other information captured in the Patient screen. You can also look up the Patient Health History by using the `View > Medical Record` button.
-
-
-
-### Assessment
-Encounter Impression section allows you to select (or create new) Complaints and your Diagnosis based on the presented complaints. You can opt to include the captured data in Patient Encounter print by selecting the "In Print" flag
-
-
-
-### Order Entry
-You can prescribe medicines in the Drug Prescription section by selecting the drug codes (Stock Item) and appropriate dosages. If you are not managing Stock and Items are not configured, you can simply enter the Medicine name and strength in the Strength field which will printed.
-
-Ordering a laboratory investigation is similar and if you have Lab Tests configured, you can select from the list. Or key in the Lab Test name to be printed as part of the Prescription. You can also order a Clinical Procedure to performed in a similar fashion.
-
-
-
-The Pharmacy (Sales / Accounts) User can fetch medication and investigation orders from Patient Encounter using the _Get items from > Prescription_ made available in the sales Invoice. Lab Tests can be configured to be created automatically on Sales Invoice submission in [Healthcare Settings](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/healthcare_settings.html). Procedure Orders can be fetched using the `Get Prescribed Procedures` while booking the Appointment for the procedure. These will then be available for billing via the _Get items from > Healthcare Services_.
-
-### Medical Coding
-You can also attach one or more Medical Codes to designate the Diagnosis in the Medical Coding Section. You will have to select the Medical Code Standard you wish to encode the diagnosis and then select the Code by searching the Code itself or the Code Description.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/practitioner_schedule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/practitioner_schedule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2902b4bf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/practitioner_schedule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Practitioner Schedule
-Physician Schedule will help you to configure the availability Healthcare Practitioners. You can then select an applicable schedule for each practitioner.
-
-You can create Practitioner Schedule from -
-`Healthcare > Masters > Practitioner Schedule`
-
-
-
-After naming the schedule you can use the "Add Time Slots" button to create time slots for each day of the week. These time slots will then be displayed while checking the availability of a practitioner while booking an Appointment.
-
-
-
-To apply the schedule to a practitioner, open the Practitioner master and select the schedules and the service unit at which the practitioner will be available.
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/sample_collection.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/sample_collection.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 33eeed69..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/sample_collection.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sample Collection
-It's critical for a Laboratory to manage collected samples and you may want to ID the sample, print stickers etc. You can create a Sample Collection directly from
-
-`Healthcare Settings > Laboratory > Sample Collection`
-
-You can optionally automate the creation of Sample Collection document for each Lab Test by turning on this flag `Healthcare Settings > Laboratory Settings > Manage Sample Collection`.
-
-
-
-> Note: You will have to select a Sample in the Lab Test Template for the system to automatically create a Sample Collection document
-
-You will have to enter the sample collected date and time to Submit the document signaling that the sample is collected.
-
-Printing of sample identification tags is also possible. By default a sample sticker print template is made available, but you can always customize this directly using the [Print Format Builder](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.html) or even create a custom [Print Format](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.html) if required.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/healthcare_settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/healthcare_settings.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 12ceeddb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/healthcare_settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-
-# Healthcare Settings
-
-Most of the global settings for the Healthcare module can be done via the Healthcare Settings page.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Healthcare Settings`
-
-> Note: Ensure that you have `Healthcare Administrator` role enabled for your User to access this page.
-
-### Outpatient Settings
-
-
-* **Patient Auto Name**: By default Patient document uses naming series for naming but you can also opt to change this to Patient Name if required.
-
-* **Link Patient with Customer**: The `Manage Customer` option will enable the system to create and link a Customer whenever a new Patient is created. This Customer is used while booking all transactions. If you do not enable this, you wont be able to ling the Patient with a Customer while invoicing any of the services.
-
-* **Default Medical Code Standard**: ERPNext Healthcare allows you to use multiple Medical Code Standards - here, you can also select the default Medical Code Standard.
-
-* **Collect Fee for Patient Registration**: If you enable this, all new Patients you create will be _Disabled_ by default and will be only be enabled after Invoicing the Registration Fee. To create Invoice and record the payment receipt, you can use the `Invoice Patient Registration` button in the Patient document. Also note that all ERPNext Healthcare documents, filters out Patient records that are disabled. You can also set the registration fee to be collected here.
-
-* **Manage Appointment Invoice Automatically**: If you wish to automatically create an Invoice (with the selected Practitioner's consultation charges), you can enable this option. This feature is particularly helpful if your facility collects payment while booking an appointment. The Patient Appointment form will allow you to select the Payment Method and amount received.
-
-* **Validity for Followups**: Many healthcare facilities do not charge for follow up consultations within a time period after the first visit. You can configure the number of free follow ups (_Patient Encounters in valid days_) allowed as well as the time period (_Valid number of days_) for free consultations here.
-
-### Healthcare Service Items
-
-
-ERPNext Healthcare utilizes the Accounts module for billing Patients. You can configure default `Items` for billing consultation charges, procedure consumption items etc. here.
-
-### SMS Alerts
-
-
-You can enable sending SMS alerts on Patient appointment Booking etc. and also configure SMS text in this section.
-
-### Income Account and Receivable Account
-
-
-If you wish to override default accounts settings and set custom Income and receivable accounts, you can do so here.
-
-### Laboratory Settings
-
-
-* **Create Lab Test(s) on Sales Invoice Submit**: If your facility creates Invoices and collect payments from Patients before performing the Lab Test, you can enable this option to create Lab tests automatically for all the Tests that are billed. If you have enabled `Manage Sample Collection` and has a _Sample_ configured in the Lab Test Template, a Sample Collection document will also be created.
-
-* **Manage Sample Collection**: If this flag is enabled, every time you create a Lab Test, a Sample Collection document will be created.
-
-* **Require Lab Test Approval**: Turning this on will restrict printing and emailing of Lab Tests only if the documents are in Approved status. You can use this flag to ensure that every Test result leaves your facility after verification.
-
-* **Employee name and designation in print**: Enable the third option if you want the name and designation of the Employee associated with the User who submits the document to be printed in the Lab Test Report.
-
-* **Laboratory SMS Alerts**: You can configure ERPNext Healthcare to alert Patients via SMS when the Lab Test result gets ready (Submit) and when you Email the result. You can configure the templates for the SMS as registered with your provider here.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e6f6e0c4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-Setting up the Healthcare domain is fairly easy. Once you setup ERPNext (Company, Chart Of Accounts etc.), you can start with setting up your domain. To setup Healthcare module completely, you should have `Healthcare Administrator` Role enabled. You can configure each of the departments as detailed in the Topics below.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index ef48b3db..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-healthcare_settings
-setup_practice
-setup_inpatient
-setup_laboratory
-setup_pharmacy
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_inpatient.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_inpatient.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e91c09b3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_inpatient.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setting Up Inpatient Facility
-
-ERPNext Healthcare allows you to easily configure your Inpatient facility, Admit, Discharge and Transfer (ADT) patients and Invoice the Patient for the care services rendered. Here's how you can setup this.
-
-You can map your facility infrastructure (wards, beds etc.) in ERPNext using the [Healthcare Service Unit](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/healthcare_service_unit.html) document.
-
-### Healthcare Service Unit Type
-You can define the standard properties of `Healthcare Service Units` you create using the Healthcare Service Unit Type. By configuring various types of the service unit in your facility with respective rates and other properties, you can easily create multiple Healthcare Service Units by merely selecting the type. You can configure various types by going to,
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Healthcare Service Unit Type > New Healthcare Service Unit Type`
-
-
-
-ERPNext automatically creates an Item with the details you provide here, for the billing to function.
-
-You can also create Healthcare Service Units to map consulting rooms and other areas where appointment scheduling is possible by checking the `Allow Appointments` option. Such service units are not linked to Item master as billing will make use of the Item selected in the [Healthcare Practitioner](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/healthcare_practitioner.html) master or the ones configured in [Healthcare Settings](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/healthcare_settings.html)
-
-
-
-Note that turning on the `Allow Overlap` will allow overlapping appointments for the Healthcare Practitioner available at service unit. This will be handy when you create service units where multiple Patients can be treated at the same time, for instance a yoga center or a physiotherapy room.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_laboratory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_laboratory.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 15f3811e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_laboratory.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setting Up Laboratory
-
-If you wish to use features of Laboratory, you can create Users with _Laboratory User_. Lab Tests, Sample Collection etc. are only visible to users with this Role enabled.
-
-Read [Healthcare Settings](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/healthcare_settings.html) for setting up the Healthcare module.
-
-### Lab Test Templates
-Whenever you create a new Lab Test, the Lab Test document is loaded based on the template configured for that particular test. This means, you will have to have separate templates configured for each Lab Test.
-
-Here's how you can configure various types of templates.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Lab Test Template > New Lab Test Template`
-
-After providing the Name for the Test you will have to select a Code and Item group for creating the mapped Item. ERPNext Healthcare maps every Lab Test (every other billable healthcare service) to an Item with "Maintain Stock" set to false. This way, the Accounts Module will invoice the Item and you can see the Sales related reports of Selling Module. You can also set selling rate of the Lab Test here - this will update the Selling Price List.
-
-> The Standard Selling Rate field behaves similar to the Item Standard Selling Rate, updating this will not update the Selling Price List
-
-The `Is Billable` flag in Lab Test Template creates the Item, but as Disabled. Likewise, unchecking this flag will Enable the Item.
-
-###### Result Format
-Following are the result formats available in ERPNext Healthcare
-
-* Single: select this format for results which require only a single input, result UOM and normal value
-* Compound: allows you to configure results which require multiple input fields with corresponding event names, result UOMs and normal values
-* Descriptive: this format is helpful for results which have multiple result components and corresponding result entry fields.
-* Grouped: You can group test templates which are already configured and combine as a single test. For such templates select `Grouped`.
-* No Result: Select this if you don not need to enter or manage test result. Also, no Lab Test document will be created. e.g., Sub Tests for Grouped results.
-
-###### Normal values
-For Single and Compound result formats, you can set the normal values.
-
-###### Sample
-You will have to select the Sample required for the test. You can also mention the quantity of sample that needs to be collected. These details will be used when creating the Sample Collection document for the Lab Test.
-
-### Medical Department
-To organize your clinic into departments, you can create multiple Medical Departments. You can select appropriate departments in Lab Test Template and will be included in the Lab Test result print.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Medical Department > New Medical Department`
-
-### Lab Test Sample
-You can create various masters for Samples that are to be collected for a Lab Test.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Lab Test Sample > New Lab Test Sample`
-
-### Lab Test UOM
-You can create various masters for Unit of Measures to be used in Lab Test document.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Lab Test UOM > New Lab Test UOM`
-
-### Antibiotic
-You can create masters for a list of Antibiotics.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Antibiotic > New Antibiotic`
-
-### Sensitivity
-You can create masters for a list of Sensitivity to various Antibiotics.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Sensitivity > New Sensitivity`
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_pharmacy.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_pharmacy.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a12c4c0f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_pharmacy.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setting Up Pharmacy
-ERPNext Healthcare do not have a Pharmacy module as such. However, [ERPNext Stock](/docs/user/manual/en/stock.html), [Buying](/docs/user/manual/en/buying.html) and [Accounts](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts.html) Module will do all that's needed to seamlessly manage your Pharmacy Stock as well as other supplies, their billing and purchases.
-
-You can also consider creating multiple [POS Profiles](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.html) for each Pharmacy user. ERPNext Stock module features like [Items](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item.html) with Reorder Levels and [Auto Reordering](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/reorder.html), [Batch Number and Expiry Dates](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.html) etc. will be worth looking at.
-
-ERPNext Healthcare adds a few custom fields to `Item` document so that you can effectively configure medicines. Also read [Healthcare Settings](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/healthcare_settings.html) for setting up default Items, Accounts etc.
-
-
-
->Note that these fields are made available only if your setup has Healthcare domain enabled.
-
-Furthermore, all the three modules comes with exhaustive reporting and you can also configure auto email to have reports emailed automatically to you.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_practice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_practice.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5eae6238..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_practice.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setting Up Clinic / Practice
-
-You can easily configure the masters for setting up ERPNext Healthcare for your practice. Below are a list of documents which helps you speed up data entry. Also read [Healthcare Settings](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/healthcare_settings.html) for setting up the Healthcare module.
-
-## Medical Department
-To organize your clinic into departments, you can create multiple Medical Departments.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Medical Department > New Medical Department`
-
-## Appointment Type
-You can create masters for various type of Appointments. Appointment Type allows you to predefine the duration of the appointment so that while selecting Appointment Type, the duration gets set in the Appointment automatically. This will allow you to override the duration of appointments set by the Practitioner Schedule and the time slots will adjust to the next available time automatically.
-
->Note: To disable this behavior, you can enable `Always Use Slot Duration as Appointment Duration` in the Practitioner master. This is will always set the slot duration configured in the Practitioner Schedule as the Appointment duration.
-
-You can also set a color for each Appointment Type which will help you identify the appointments of a particular type in the Calendar view.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Appointment Type > New Appointment Type`
-
-## Healthcare Service Unit Type
-While setting up the schedule for Healthcare Practitioner, you can optionally select a [Healthcare Service Unit](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/Healthcare healthcare_service_unit.html) at which the Practitioner will be conducting his consultations. You should have `Allow Appointments` option checked for Healthcare Service Unit for booking appointments. You can also define the properties of service units in `Healthcare Service Unit Type`, also read about [Setting up Inpatient Facility](/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/setup/setup_inpatient.html) for more details.
-
-## Masters to Ease Data Input
-ERPNext Healthcare allows you to configure some of the frequently used masters to make the data entry more easy.
-
-#### Dosage Forms
-Dosage Forms help you configure the form in which the medications are packaged, for example Capsules, Syrups etc.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Complaints > New Dosage Form`
-
-#### Route of Administration
-The Route of Administration corresponds to the path by which the medication is induced into to Patient. For example, Oral, Intravenous etc.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Complaints > New Route of Administration`
-
-#### Prescription Dosage & Duration
-You can configure different dosages to be used while prescribing medication to patients. You can name the Prescription dosage in anyway you want (for example, BID or I-0-I), and then set the strength of the drug and the times at which it should be administered.
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Prescription Dosage > New Prescription Dosage`
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Prescription Duration > New Prescription Duration`
-
-#### Complaint and Diagnosis
-To ease the data entry while recording the encounter impression, ERPNext Healthcare allows you to save every Complaint / Diagnosis data you enter, from the Patient Encounter screen itself. This way, the database keeps building a list of all complaints and diagnosis you entered. Later on, every time you start keying in, you will be able to select the previously entered word / sentence from the search field. You can also configure the masters manually by going to,
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Complaints > New Complaint`
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Diagnosis > New Diagnosis`
-
-# Clinical Procedures Templates
-ERPNext Healthcare allows you to configure templates with the various properties of Clinical Procedures to ease the Procedure creation process. You can create new Clinical Procedure Templates by going to,
-
-`Healthcare > Setup > Clinical Procedure Template`
-
-Templates allow you to manage the billable Item, rate etc. for a particular procedure. The `Consumables` section lets you set the consumable stock Items, default quantities etc. so that these items will preloaded in the Clinical Procedures created based on the template. This allows the performing practitioner can easily input the consumed quantities or add additional items which in reality has been consumed as part of the procedure.
-
-If the `Invoice Consumables Separately` option is turned on, the charges for the consumable Items will be added to the Sales Invoice separately in addition to the `Billing Rate` of the procedure.
-
-Note that you can also enable `Sample Collection` for a Clinical Procedure if applicable. Also, possible is to add multiple stages to the Template so that the Clinical Procedure can be tracked by the various stages as configured in the template.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/vital_signs.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/vital_signs.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 35eecac8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/healthcare/vital_signs.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-# Vital Signs
-ERPNext Healthcare helps you to capture Vital Signs of Patients at any point of time. All Vitals information over time can be viewed as part of the Patient's Medical History. You can create a new document and record Vital Signs of a Patient directly by
-
-`Healthcare > Patient Care > Vital Signs`
-
-You can also create and record vitals for a patient from Patient Appointment, the Patient Encounter or the Patient master documents by using the `Create > Vital Signs` button
-
-
-
-You can select the Patient for whom you are recording the vitals and start by entering each of the fields. Normal values or ranges are provided for ease of assessment. An automated BMI calculator is also made available.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/hotel-room.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/hotel-room.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3822f196..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/hotel-room.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Hotel Room
-
-Hotel Room is a master to create hotel rooms for reservation
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 15cb348a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Hospitality
-
-ERPNext Hospitality module is designed to handle workflows for Hotels and Restaurants. This is still in early development stage.
-
-### Manage Restaurants
-
-The Restaurant module in ERPNext will help you manage a chain of restaurants. You can create Restaurants, Menus, Tables, Reservations and a manage Order Entry and Billing.
-
-### Manage Hotels
-
-The Hotels module in ERPNext will help you manage creating Hotel Rooms, create Hotel Room Reservation. It will also help in creating Invoice from hotel room reservation
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 0c909d84..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-restaurant
-restaurant-menu
-reservations
-order-entry
-hotel-room
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/order-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/order-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c949663d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/order-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Restaurant Order Entry
-
-The Restaurant Order Entry is the screen where the waiters will punch in orders related to a particular table.
-
-This screen makes it easy for the waiters in your restaurant to punch in orders from various tables.
-
-When the guest places an order, the waiter will select the table number and add the items in the Order Entry. This can be changed until it is time for the bill. Unless you bill a table, you can change the items and they will automatically appear when you select the table ID.
-
-To place an order you can select an item and click the enter key so that the item will be updated in the items table.
-
-
-
-You can also choose items with the POS style item selector.
-
-### Billing
-
-When it is time for billing, you just choose the bill and you can select the customer and mode of payment. On saving, a Sales Invoice is generated and the order section becomes empty.
-
-
-
-### Sales Invoice
-
-To print the invoice, you can click on the Invoice Link and print the invoice
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/reservations.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/reservations.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a6064603..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/reservations.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Restaurant Reservations
-
-Once you have setup the restaurant and tables, you can start taking in reservations for your restaurant.
-
-To take a reservation, just make a new Restaurant Reservation from the Restaurant Page and set the time, number of people and name of the guest.
-
-
-
-### Kanban
-
-As your guests walk in, You can also manage the reservations by making a simple Kanban board for the same.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/restaurant-menu.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/restaurant-menu.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e856e038..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/restaurant-menu.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Restaurant Menu
-
-For every restaurant you must set an active Restaurant Menu from which orders can be placed. You can also set the rates for each of the item for the day.
-
-When you save the Restaurant Menu, a Price List is created for that Menu and all pricing is linked to that price list. This way you can easily control the items on offer and pricing from the menu.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/restaurant.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/restaurant.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4f3614de..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/hospitality/restaurant.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-# Restaurant
-
-The Restaurant record represents one restaurant in your organization. To create a new Restaurant, just set the name, Company and Default Customer.
-
-You can set a unique numbering prefix for each of your restaurants. All invoices for that restuarant will follow that numbering prefix.
-
-If you have a default Sales Taxes and Charges Template, you can add it so that the same charge + tax will be applicable for all invoices in the restaurant.
-
-
-
-After your restaurant is created, you can add Tables and Menus for that restaurant
-
-### Adding Tables
-
-You can add a Restaurant Table by creating a new Restaurant Table from the dashboard.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/appraisal.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/appraisal.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ff5b27c4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/appraisal.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Appraisal
-
-In ERPNext, you can manage Employee Appraisals by creating an Appraisal
-Template for each role with the parameters that define the performance by
-giving appropriate weightage to each parameter.
-
-> Human Resource > Appraisal > New
-
-#### Step 1: Select an Appraisal Template
-
-
-
-After you select the template, the remaining form appears.
-
-#### Step 2: Enter Employee Details
-
-
-
-Once the Appraisal Template is completed, you can create Appraisal records for
-each period where you track performance. You can give points out of 5 for each
-parameter and the system will calculate the overall performance of the
-Employee.
-
-To make the Appraisal final, make sure to “Submit” it.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index d1e355c5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-loan-management
-leave-calculation-in-salary-slip
-working-days-in-salary-slip
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/leave-calculation-in-salary-slip.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/leave-calculation-in-salary-slip.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d169e0d5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/leave-calculation-in-salary-slip.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-# Leave Calculation In Salary Slip
-
-There are two types of leave which user can apply for.
-
-* Paid Leave (Sick Leave, Privilege Leave, Casual Leave etc.)
-* Unpaid Leave
-
-Paid Leave are firstly allocated by HR manager. As and when Employee creates Leave Application, leaves allocated to him/her are deducted. These leaves doesn't have impact on the employee's Salary Slip.
-
-When Employee is out of paid leave, he create Leave Application for unpaid leave. The term used for unpaid leave in ERPNext is Leave Without Pay (LWP). These leaves does have impact on the Employee's Salary Slip.
-
-Just marking Absent in the Attendance record do not have impact on salary calculation of an Employee, as that absenteeism could be because of paid leave. Hence creating Leave Application should be created incase of absenteeism. Let's consider a scenario to understand how leaves impact employees Salary Slip.
-
-1. Setup Employee
-1. Allocate him paid leaves
-1. Create Salary Structure for that Employee. In the Earning and Deduction table, select which component of salary should be affected if Employee takes LWP.
-1. Create Holiday List (if any), and link it with Employee master.
-
-**Working Days:** Working Days in Salary Slip are calculated based on number of days selected above. If you don't wish to consider holiday in Working Days, then you should do following setting.
-
-> Human Resource > Setup > HR Setting
-
-Uncheck field "Include Holidays in Total No. of Working Days"
-
-Holidays are counted based on Holiday List attached to the Employee's master.
-
-**Leave Without Pay:** Leave Without Pay is updated based on Leave Application made for this Employee, in the month for which Salary Slip is created, and which has Leave Type as "Leave Without Pay".
-
-Payment Days: Following is how Payment Days are calculated:
-
-Payment Days = Working Days - Leave Without Pay
-
-If you have LWP checked for the Salary Component, there will be reduction in Amount based on no. of LWP of an Employee for that month.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/working-days-in-salary-slip.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/working-days-in-salary-slip.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 074a9694..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/working-days-in-salary-slip.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Working Days Calculation in the Salary Slip
-
-Working Days are shown in the In the Salary Slip. Based on your preference, it may include holidays of the month or it may not. You can define your preference for the Working Days calculation in HR Settings.
-
-`HR > Setup > HR Settings`
-
-If you want to include holidays in the count of Total Working days, then ensure that in the HR Settings, field **Include holidays in Total no. of Working Days** is checked and vice versa.
-
-
-
-To learn how to define holidays for your company, check [Holiday List](/user/manual/en/human-resources/holiday-list) feature in the HR module.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2c2a3f11..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-# Daily Work Summary
-
-Daily Work Summary is way to get a automated way to get a summary of work done by users.
-
-Replies of all users who choose to respond is collected and sent as a summary at midnight. Emails are only sent based on the Holiday List selected for the group
-
-**Note:**
-> You must have one active incoming email account setup for this to work.
-
-
-
-### How to Use
-
-Go to "Daily Work Summary Group" via HR module or search bar and set the users for whom you want to send the reminder.
-
-You can set multiple groups with different set of _users_ from your user list with different _time to send emails_ and with separate _holiday list_ for each.
-
-You can also choose to customize the _Message_ you send to users.
-
-**Note:**
->1. If no holiday list is selected then the email will be sent every day.
->2. Name of a "Daily Work Summary Group" will be sent as the title for daily summary email.
->3. Mail will not be sent to the users of a disabled Daily Work Summary Group.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance-request.md
deleted file mode 100644
index df6ec468..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-# Attendance Request
-
-Using the Attendance Request document, employees can now submit their attendance request for the days when their attendance wasn't marked.
-
-Just go to,
-
-> Human Resources > Employee and Attendance > Attendance Request > New Attendance Request
-
-
-
-- Fill up the details, mention the dates for which you want the attendance to be marked, reason and explanation.
-- You can also choose if it has to be marked as a half day or not.
-- Save it.
-- On submission of the same, Attendance documents will be created for the days you mentioned.
-
-
-
-You can see in the below image, Attendance records are linked with Attendance Request which was submitted.
-
- 
-
-So, if you cancel the Attendance request, the linked Attendance documents created will be cancelled as well.
-
- 
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e17d34f0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Attendance
-
-An Attendance record stating that an Employee has been present on a particular
-day can be created manually by:
-
-> Human Resources > Documents > Attendance > New Attendance
-
-
-
-You can get a monthly report of your Attendance data by going to the _Monthly
-Attendance Details_ report.
-
-You can easily set attendance for Employees using the [Employee Attendance Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee-attendance-tool.html)
-
-You can also bulk upload attendance using the [Upload Attendence Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/upload-attendance.html)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee-attendance-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee-attendance-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 571241c7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee-attendance-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Attendance Tool
-
-To go the attendance tool, go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Employee and Attendance > Employee Attendance Tool
-
-This tool allows you to add attendance records for multiple employees quickly.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 54575a47..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee
-
-An individual who works part-time or full-time under a contract of employment, and has recognized rights and duties is your Employee.
-
-In ERPNext, you can manage Employee master. The Employee master captures demographics, personal and professional details.
-
-
-
-You can further use this Employee master for performing various HR functions like:
-
-1. Processing Payroll
-1. Leave Allocation and Application
-1. Employee Advance and Expense Claim
-1. Loan Application
-1. Performance Appraisal
-
-### New Employee
-
-To create new Employee go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Employee > New Employee
-
-
-
-### Employee Deputation
-
-Once an Employee is created, you can update Department, Designation, Employee to whom he/she will report to etc.
-
-
-
-
- - - -{next} diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.md deleted file mode 100644 index a81f814a..00000000 --- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6 +0,0 @@ - -# Employee and Attendance - -With ERPNext it's super simple to manage employees, keep track of attendance records etc. ERPNext also allows you to bulk upload attendance of employees. - -{index} diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 0ee047f2..00000000 --- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5 +0,0 @@ -employee -employee-attendance-tool -attendance -attendance-request -upload-attendance diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/upload-attendance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/upload-attendance.md deleted file mode 100755 index c2e27029..00000000 --- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/upload-attendance.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12 +0,0 @@ - -# Upload Attendance - -This tool helps you to upload bulk attendance from a csv file. - -To upload the attendance go to: - -> Human Resources > Upload Attendance - -
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee-onboarding-and-separation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee-onboarding-and-separation.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cfc16005..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee-onboarding-and-separation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
-# Employee Onboarding and Separation
-
-In the process of hiring or relieving an Employee, there are set of standard activities which need to be executed. This feature helps you maintain the master of these activities, and create the set of Task at the time of each Employee hiring or relieving.
-
-Use Case: Let's assume that following are the activities which need to be performed as soon as a job applicant is approved to be hired.
-
-- Perform a legal and professional background check
-- Create an Employee master
-- Create an Email Account
-- Create an identity card
-- Allocate leaves
-
-Same way, you can have a different set of activities to be performed when relieving an Employee, like:
-
-- Disable access from the system
-- Collect assets from the relieving Employee, if any allocated
-- Collect ID card
-- Update employee master
-- Perform full and final payment process in the payroll
-
-In ERPNext, these standard activities can be tracked in the Employee Onboarding and Separation Template.
-
-### Employee Onboarding Template
-
-> HR > Employee Lifecycle > Employee Onboarding Template
-
-
-
-You can notice that for each Activity, you can also mention the User or Role, or one of it, to whom this activity will be assigned.
-
-You can also maintain separate master for the Employee Separation Template, based on Department, Designation, and Grade.
-
-### Employee Onboarding
-
-Employee Onboarding is created for a Job Application, who is approved for the hiring.
-
-You can select an applicant from Job Applicant master, and fetch activities from Employee Onboarding master.
-
-
-
-### Tasks and Assignments
-
-On submission on Employee Onboarding / Separation, a Project will be created. Within the Project, a Tasks will also be created for each Activity. Again, each Task will be allocated, based on the User or Role selected for that Activity.
-
-
-
-### Employee Creation
-
-Based on the progress on the Tasks, progress can be updated in the Employee Onboarding and Separation process.
-
-
-
-### Video Help (Webinar Recording)
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_promotion.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_promotion.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4e75155c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_promotion.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Promotion
-
-You can manage Employee Promotions using this document.
-
-To record an Employee Promotion go to
-
-> Human Resource > Employee Promotion > New Employee Promotion
-
-Select Employee and add all details to be updated to Promotion Details table.
-
-
-
-Promotion document can be submitted on or after Promotion Date. Once submitted all the changes added to Promotion Details table will be applied to the Employee. ERPNext also keeps a record of all promotions of the Employee in the Employment History table in Employee document.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_transfer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_transfer.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e9e443ea..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_transfer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Transfer
-
-You can transfer Employees to different Company or Department by using Employee Transfer.
-
-To reocord an Employee Transfer go to
-
-> Human Resource > Employee Transfer > New Employee Transfer
-
-Select Employee and add all details to be updated to Transfer Details table.
-
-
-
-Transfer document can be submitted on or after Transfer Date. Once submitted all the changes added to Transfer Details table will applied to Employee.
-
-
-
-> Note : If Create New Employee ID is checked, a new Employee will be created with property changes in Transfer Details table and old Employee will be marked as relieved. Leave allocations for the new Employee has to be manually created from Leave Period.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b7cf5797..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Lifecycle Management
-Employee lifecycle management relates to the various stages an Employee goes through during the employment with an organization. It is important for most enterprise HR departments to keep records of these changes employees go through across the company. ERPNext simplifies these HR activities, read the following sections to understand how.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 7ac8e501..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-employee-promotion
-employee-transfer
-employee-onboarding-and-separation
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9ddc207d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fleet Management
-
-Fleet Management section of Human Resources helps your Organization manage their fleet of vehicles and track their expenses.
-
-To use Fleet Management in ERPNext,
-
- 1. Set Up a Vehicle.
- 2. Enter Vehicle Logs regularly.
- 3. Make Expense Claims for Vehicle Expenses.
- 4. View Reports for Vehicle Expenses.
-
-### Vehicle Set Up
-
-The Vehicle Set Up allows you to define the different types of Vehicles in your Organization.It acts as the Vehicle Master for Fleet Management.
-
-To create a new Vehicle go to:
-
-Human Resources > Fleet Management > Vehicle
-
-* Enter License Plate, Make, Model, Odometer Value, Fuel Type and Fuel UOM for a quick entry.
-
- 
-
-* Enter details like Insurance, Chassis, Vehicle Value, Location and Employee.
-
- 
-
-* Enter Vehicle attributes like color, wheels, doors and last carbon check
-
- 
-
-### Vehicle Log
-
-Vehicle Log is used to enter Odometer readings, Fuel Expenses and Service Expense details.
-
-To create a new Vehicle Log go to:
-
-Human Resources > Fleet Management > Vehicle Log
-
-* Enter License Plate, Employee, Date, Odometer reading for a quick entry.
-
- 
-
-* Enter Refueling details, Service details if applicable.
-
- 
-
-### Make Expense Claim
-
-* Click on Make Expense Claim button. This button appears only in case of Submitted Vehicle Logs.
-
- 
-
-When you click on 'Make Expense Claim',
-
- 1. The date,employee,expense total are copied over to the created Expense Claim.
- 2. The sum of Fuel Expenses and Service Expenses is copied over to Expense Claim Amount.
- 3. Employee can submit the Expense Claim for further processing.
-
- 
-
-### Vehicle Expenses Report
-
-* To track and monitor Vehicle Expenses you can use the Vehicle Expenses report.This report gives a one stop view of all your vehicle expenses month wise.
-
- 
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c85daadf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-
-# Human Resource Setup
-
-The HR module has a setup process where you create the masters for all the major activities.
-
-### Organization Setup
-
-To setup your Employee master you must first create:
-
-* Employment Type (like Permanent, Temp, Contractor, Intern etc).
-* Branch (if there are multiple offices).
-* Department (if any, like Accounting, Sales etc).
-* Designation (CEO, Sales Manager etc).
-* Grade (A, B, C etc, usually based on seniority).
-
-Check [Setup](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/) for more details on each of masters, global _HR Settings_ and other configurations.
-
-### Leave Setup
-
-To setup Leaves, create:
-
-* Leave Type (like Sick Leave, Travel Leave etc)
-* Holiday List (list of annual holidays for the year - these days will not be considered in Leave Applications)
-* Leave Policy to effectively track and manage Employee leaves across the company
-
-You can read [Leaves - Overview](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.html) for a detailed description about how you can configure and manage Leaves.
-
-### Payroll (Salary) Setup
-
-In ERPNext, salaries have two types of components, earnings (basic salary, expenses paid by the company, like telephone bill, travel allowance etc) and deductions (amounts deducted for taxes, social security etc). You can create and assign salary structures to employees and ERPNext simplifies most of the payroll processing for you.
-
-Read more about setting up your payroll and how ERPNext simplifies payroll processing in [Salary and Payroll](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.html).
-
-If you intend to configure ERPNext to calculate Income Tax deductions automatically based on multiple Salary Slabs, [Setting Up Income Tax Deduction]((/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setting-up-tax.html)) will help you understand how you can set this up properly.
-
-### Recruitment
-
-It is important for enterprises to plan their manpower recruitment for future periods. ERPNext allows you to define recruitment plans at group company level. Subsidiary companies can create and publish job openings based on the group company plans, making it easy to manage your hiring process. To understand how you can set this up, check [Staffing Plan](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.html)
-
-If you have an active Staffing Plan, every time you create a new _Job Opening_ ERPNext will validate the open positions and current employment count with the Staffing Plan.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 33a4ae99..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-# Human Resources Reports
-
-### Employee Leave Balance
-
-Employee Leave Balance Report shows employees and their respective balance leaves under various leave types. Report is generated as per the number of allowed leaves.
-
-
-
-### Employee Birthday
-
-Employee Birthday Report shows Birthdays of your employees.
-
-
-
-### Employee Information
-
-Employee Information Report shows Report View of important information recorded in Employee master.
-
-
-
-### Employee Holiday Attendance
-
-Employee Holiday Attendance shows the list of Employees who attended on Holidays.
-
-
-
-### Monthly Salary Register
-
-Monthly Salary Register shows net pay and its components of employee(s) at a glance.
-
-
-
-
-### Monthly Attendance Sheet
-
-Monthly Attendance Sheet shows monthly attendance of selected employee at a glance.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ba8ae9de..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Human Resources
-
-The Human Resources (HR) Module covers the processes linked to managing a team
-of co-workers. Most important feature here is processing the payroll by using
-Payroll Entry to generate Salary Slips. Most countries have complex tax
-rules stating which expenses the company can make on behalf of the Employees.
-There are a set of rules for the company to deduct taxes and social security
-from employee payroll. ERPNext allows to accommodate all types of taxes and
-their calculation.
-
-It also maintains a complete employee database including contact information,
-salary details, attendance, performance evaluation, and appraisal records.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index f5cd9f80..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-employee-and-attendance
-leave-management
-payroll
-travel-and-expense-claim
-appraisal
-loan-management
-training
-recruitment
-shift-management
-fleet-management
-daily-work-summary
-human-resources-reports
-human-resource-setup
-setup
-articles
-employee-onboarding-and-separation
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/compensatory-leave-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/compensatory-leave-request.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 015e1181..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/compensatory-leave-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-# Compensatory Leave Request
-ERPNext allows employees to request for compensatory leaves for days which they have worked on holidays. It is necessary that the dates should be in default Holiday List and also that the Employee should have her attendance marked Present. Note that Leave Types which are marked are _Is Compensatory_ can be selected in the Compensatory Leave Request.
-
-To create a new Compensatory Leave Request, go to
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Compensatory Leave Request > New Compensatory Leave Request
-
-
-
-On submitting a Compensatory Leave Request, ERPNext updates the Leave Allocation record for the leave type is updated allowing her to apply for leaves of this type later on.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/holiday-list.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/holiday-list.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a951c95e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/holiday-list.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-#Holiday List
-
-Holiday List is a list which contains the dates of holidays.
-
-Most organizations have a standard Holiday-List for their employees. Some even have different holiday lists based on the different locations or departments.
-
-To add a new Holiday List, go to:
-
-`Human Resources (HR) > Leave and Holiday > Holiday List`
-
-Click on New to add new Holiday List.
-
-### New Holiday List
-
-Give a name to Holiday List. It can be based in Fiscal Year or location or department as application. Also select From and To Date for the Holiday List.
-
-
-
-You can quickly add Weekly Off in the Holiday List as following.
-
-
-
-After that, you can also add specific days (like festival holidays) manually.
-
-
-
-
-### Holiday List in Employee
-
-If you have created multiple Holiday List, then select specific Holiday List for an Employee in the respective master.
-
-
-
-When an Employee applies for the Leave, then days mentioned in the Holiday List will not be counted, as they are holiday already. For more configuration option in Holiday List, check `HR > HR Settings`.
-
-> Note 1: If you have specified a Holiday List in the Employment master, then that Holiday List will give priority the default Holiday List of the company.
-
-> Note 2: You can form as many holiday lists as you wish. For example, if you have a factory, you can have one list for the factory workers and another list for office staff. You can manage between lists by attaching their respective holiday list to their respective employment detail form.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index aaf57a2a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Leaves and Holiday
-
-This section will help you understand how ERPNext enables you to efficiently manage the leave schedule of your organization. It also explains the way employees can apply for leaves.
-
-Employees create leave requests, which their respective managers (leave approver) can approve or reject. An Employee can select from a number of leave types such as sick leave, casual leave, privilege leave and so on. The number and type of leaves an Employee can apply is controlled by Leave Allocations. You can create Leave Allocations for a Leave Period based on the company's Leave Policy. You can also allocate additional leaves to your employees and generate reports to track leaves taken by Employees.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 3a828576..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-leave-type
-leave-period
-leave-policy
-leave-allocation
-leave-application
-compensatory-leave-request
-leave-encashment
-holiday-list
-leave-block-list
-leave
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-allocation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-allocation.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a92ecaa..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-allocation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-# Leave Allocation
-
-Leave Allocation enables you to allot a specific number of leaves to a particular employee. You can allocate a number of leaves to different types of leave.
-
-### Allocating leaves for a Leave Period
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Period
-
-Leave Period helps you manage leaves for a period and also doubles up as a tool to help you grant leaves for a category of employees. The _Grant_ button will generate Leave Allocations based on the Leave Policy applicable to each Employee. You can allocate leaves based on Employee Grade, Department or Designation. Also, note that _Carry Forward Leaves_ check will enable you to carry forward any unused leaves (for Leave Types with Is Carry Forward turned on) from previous allocations to new ones.
-
-
-
-###Manual Allocation of leaves
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Allocation > New Leave Allocation
-
-To manually allocate leaves for an Employee, select the period and the number of leaves you want to allocate. You can also add unused leaves from previous allocation period.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-application.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-application.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e6ec75e9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-application.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-
-# Leave Application
-
-If your company has a formal system where Employees have to apply for leaves
-to be able to qualify as paid leaves, you can create Leave Application to
-track approval and usage of leaves. The applying employee requires to select their Employee record, Leave
-Type and the period for which the leave is taken.
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Application > New Leave Application
-
-
-
-_Basic Workflow:_
-
-- Employee applies for leave through Leave Application
-- Approver gets notification via email, "Follow via Email" should be checked for this.
-- Approver reviews Leave Application
-- Approver approves/rejects Leave Application
-- Employee gets notification on the status of his/her Leave Application
-
-
-
-### Setting Leave Approver
-
-* A leave approver is a user who can approve an leave application for an employee. Leave Approvers for each department can be configured in the [Department](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.html) master.
-
-> Tip : If you want all users to create their own Leave Applications, you can set
-their “Employee ID” as a match rule in the Leave Application Permission
-settings. See the earlier discussion on [Setting Up Permissions](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
-for more info.
-
-_Notes:_
-
-* Leave Application period must be within a single Leave Allocation period. In case, you are applying for leave across leave allocation period, you have to create two Leave Application records.
-* Application period must be in the latest Allocation period.
-* Employee can't apply for leave on the dates which are added in the "Leave Block List".
-
-To understand how ERPNext allows you configure leaves for employees, check [Leaves - Setup](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.html)
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-block-list.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-block-list.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ec54d94c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-block-list.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-# Leave Block List
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Block List > New Leave Block List
-
-Leave Block List is a list of dates in a year, on which employees can not apply for leave. You can define a list of users who can approve Leave Application on blocked days, in case of urgency. You can also define whether the list will applied on entire company or any specific departments.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-encashment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-encashment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e33a2839..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-encashment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-# Leave Encashment
-
-For Leave Types which are encashable, you can submit Leave Encashment. To create a new Leave Encashment, go to
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Encashment > New Leave Encashment
-
-As you select Employee and Leave Type, Leave Balance and Encashable Days (which is total leave balance less the threshold days set in Leave Type) will be shown along with the Encashment Amount based on the Leave Encashment per day as configured in the Employee's assigned Salary Structure.
-
-
-
-On submitting a Leave Encashment for an Employee, ERPNext automatically creates an [Additional Salary](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/additional-salary.html) which will get added to the Salary Slip of the Employee when processing the next payroll
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-period.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-period.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 140fbf70..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-period.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-# Leave Period
-
-Most companies manage leaves based on a Leave Period, corresponding to a calendar year or the fiscal year. ERPNext allows you to create a Leave period by going to,
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Period > New Leave Period
-
-
-
-The Leave Period also allows you select the list a Holiday List which will be considered for allocating Optional Leaves for the period.
-### Granting Leaves to Employees
-
-Leave Management in ERPNext is based on [Leave Allocations](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-allocation.html) created for each employee. This means, Employees can only avail as many leaves (of each Leave Type) allocated to them.
-
-You can configure [Leave Policies](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-policy.html) and apply the Leave Policy for different Employee Grades or to specific Employees. The `Grant` button will allow you to create leave allocations in bulk. Alternatively, you can also create Leave Allocations manually.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-policy.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-policy.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7b42da02..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-policy.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-# Leave Policy
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Policy > New Leave Policy
-
-It is a practice for many enterprises to enforce a general Leave Policy to effectively track and manage Employee leaves. ERPNext allows you to create and manage multiple Leave Policies and allocate leaves to Employees as defined by the policy.
-
-
-
-### Enforcing the Leave Policy
-
-To enforce the Leave Policy, you can either:
-
-* Apply the Leave Policy in Employee Grade
-
-
-
-This will ensure all leave allocations for all employees of this grade will be as per the Leave Policy
-
-* Update Employee record with appropriate Leave Policy. In case you need to selectively update the Leave Policy for a particular Employee, you can do so by updating the Employee record.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-type.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 98f88f78..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-# Leave Type
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Type > New Leave Type
-
-Leave Type refers to types of leave allotted to an employee by a company. An employee can select a particular Leave Type while requesting for a leave. You can create any number of Leave Types based on your company’s
-requirement.
-
-
-
-* Max Leaves Allowed: This field allows you to set the maximum number of leaves of this Leave Type that Employees can apply within a Leave Period.
-
-* Applicable After (Working Days): Employees who have worked with the company for this number of days are only allowed to apply for this Leave Type. Do note that any other leaves availed by the Employee after her joining date is also considered while calculating working days.
-
-* Maximum Continuous Days Applicable: It refers to maximum number of days this particular Leave Type can be availed at a stretch. If an employee exceeds the maximum number of days under a particular Leave Type, his/her extended leave may be considered as ‘Leave Without Pay’ and this may affect his/her salary calculation.
-
-* Is Carry Forward: If checked, the balance leave will be carried forwarded to the next allocation period.
-
-* Is Leave Without Pay: This ensures that the Leave Type will be treated as leaves without pay and salary will get deducted for this Leave Type.
-
-* Allow Negative Balance: If checked, system will always allow to approve leave application for the Leave Type, even if there is no leave balance.
-
-* Include holidays within leaves as leaves: Check this option if you wish to count holidays within leaves as a ‘leave’. Such holidays will be deducted from the total number of leaves.
-
-* Is Compensatory: Compensatory leaves are leaves granted for working overtime or on holidays, normally compensated as an encashable leave. You can check this option to mark the Leave Type as compensatory. An Employee can request for compensatory leaves using [Compensatory Leave Request](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leaves_and_holiday/compensatory-leave-request.html) and on approval of such requests, Leave Allocation for this leave type is updated allowing her to apply for leaves of this type later on.
-
-* Is Optional: Check this Optional Leaves are holidays which Employees can choose to avail from a list of holidays published by the company. The Holiday List for optional leaves can have any number of holidays but you can restrict the number of such leaves granted to an Employee in a Leave Period by setting the Max Days Leave Allowed field.
-
-* Encashment: It is possible that Employees can receive cash from their Employer for unused leaves granted to them in a Leave Period. Not all Leave Types need to be encashable, so you should set "Allow Encashment" for Leave Types which are encashable. Leave encashment is allowed only in the last month of the Leave Period.
-
- 
-
- You can set the _Encashment Threshold Days_ field so that the Employees wont be able to encash that many days. These days should be carry forwarded to the next Leave Period so that it can be either encashed or availed. You may also want to set the _Earning Component_ for use in Salary Slip while paying out the encashed amount to Employees as part of their Salary.
-
- >Note: On submitting a [Leave Encashment](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leaves_and_holiday/leave-encashment.html) for an Employee, ERPNext automatically creates an [Additional Salary](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/additional-salary.html) which will get added to the Salary Slip of the Employee when processing the next payroll
-
-* Earned Leave: Earned Leaves are leaves earned by an employee after working with the company for a certain amount of time. Checking "Is Earned Leave" will allot leaves pro rata by automatically updating Leave Allocation for leaves of this type at intervals set by _Earned Leave Frequency_. For example, if an employee earns 2 leaves of type Paid Leaves monthly, ERPNext automatically increments the Leave Allocation for Paid Leave at the end of every month by 2. The leave allotment process (background job) will only allot leaves considering the max leaves for the leave type, and will round to _Rounding_ for fractions.
-
- 
-
-### Default Leave Types
-There are some pre-loaded Leave Types in the system, as below:
-
-- Leave Without Pay: You can avail these leaves for different purposes, such as, extended medical issues, educational purpose or unavoidable personal reason. Employee does not get paid for such leaves.
-- Privilege leave: These are like earned leaves which can be availed for the purpose of travel, family vacation and so on.
-- Sick leave: You can avail these leaves if you are unwell.
-- Compensatory off: These are compensatory leave allotted to employees for overtime work.
-- Casual leave: You can avail this leave to take care of urgent and unseen matters.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leaves_and_holiday/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leaves_and_holiday/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/loan-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/loan-management.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e139ff52..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/loan-management.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-
-# Loan Management
-This module enables companies which provides loans to define and manage loans.
-Employees can request loans, which are then reviewed and approved. For the approved loans,
-repayment schedule for the entire loan cycle can be generated and automatic deduction from salary can also be set up.
-
-### Loan Type
-To create a new Loan Type go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Loan Management > Loan Type > New Loan Type
-
-Configure Loan limit and Rate of interest.
-
-
-
-### Loan Application
-
-Employee can apply for loan by going to:
-
-> Human Resources > Loan Management > Loan Application > New Loan Application
-
-
-
-#### In the Loan Application,
-
- * Enter Employee details and Loan details
- * Select the repayment method, and based on your selection enter Repayment Period in Months or repayment Amount
-
-On save, Employee can see Repayment Information and make changes if required before submitting.
-
-
-
-### Loan
-
-Once the Loan is approved, Manager can create Loan record for the Employee.
-
-> Human Resources > Loan Management > Loan > New Loan
-
-
-
-#### In the Loan,
-
- * Enter Employee and Loan Application
- * Check "Repay from Salary" if the loan repayment will be deducted from the salary
- * Enter Disbursement Date, Repayment Start Date, and Account Info
- * If the amount has been disbursed and status is set to "Disbursed", as soon as you hit save, the repayment schedule is generated.
- * The first repayment payment date would be set as per the "Repayment Start Date".
-
-
-
-#### Loan Repayment for Members
-
-* After submitting the document, if the status is "Disbursed" and "Repay from Salary" is unchecked, you can click on "Make Repayment Entry" and select the payments which haven't been paid till date.
-* After selecting the rows, you will be routed to Journal Entry where the selected payments will be added and placed in their respective Debit/ Credit accounts.
-* On submitting the Journal Entry, "Paid" will be checked in the payment rows of the Repayment Schedule, for which the Journal entry has been created.
-
-
-
-#### Loan repayment deduction from Salary
-
-To auto deduct the Loan repayment from Salary, check "Repay from Salary" in Loan. It will appear as Loan repayment in Salary Slip.
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/additional-salary.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/additional-salary.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ddfd1b90..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/additional-salary.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Additional Salary
-
-ERPNext allows you to add additional Salary Components (_Is Additional Component_) to Salary Slips while processing the payroll. Some examples of Additional Salary could be Performance Bonus, Deputation Allowance, Arrears or other adjustments etc. To create Additional Salary, you can go to -
-
-> Human resources > Payroll > Additional Salary > New Additional Salary
-
-
-
-You can select the Employee to whom you wish to disburse the Additional Salary, the Salary Component and the period for which the employee is entitled to receive the Additional Salary. If the period (From and To dates) consists on multiple payroll periods, the amount will be disbursed on a pro-rata basis.
-
-> Note: The Salary Component can also be a deduction component which will add the Additional Salary to the Deductions table in the Salary Slip
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-application.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-application.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cc923d18..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-application.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-#Employee Benefit Application
-
-Employees are entitled to flexible benefits which they can either receive pro-rata (as part of their Salary) or as a lump-sum amount when they claim the benefit. In order to choose from various flexible benefits which an Employee shall receive on a pro-rata basis, the employee should create a new Employee Benefit Application.
-
-To create a new Employee Benefit Application,
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Employee Benefit Application > New Employee Benefit Application
-
-
-
-Here, Employee can view the Max Benefits as per the Salary Structure Assignment and then chose from the Earning Components which are part of the employee's assigned Salary Structure. They can also enter the amount which they wish to receive as part of their Salary Slip.
-
-It is based on the Employee Benefit Application that the Max Benefit Amount will be distributed among the flexible earning components while generating the Salary Slip. If an Employee fails to submit the Employee Benefit Application before processing the payroll, the Max Benefit Amount eligible to the employee will be distributed proportionately to each of the flexible component present in the Employee's salary structure.
-
-> Note: Employees can only submit one Employee Benefit Application for a Payroll Period.
-
-Employee Benefit Application should cover the full amount which the employee has to receive as per the Max Benefit amount on a pro-rata basis. However, if the Salary Structure of the employee consists of Salary Components which are to be paid on Employee Benefit Claim (Salary Component with _Pay Against Benefit Claim_), they are allowed to submit Employee Benefit Application excluding the amount allocated for such components.
-
-Also, note that those components which are to be received based on Employee Benefit Claims can also be part of the application, but will only be disbursed lump-sum, as part of their salary when the Employee submits a claim for it.
-
-> Note: Normal Tax calculation does not include Flexible Benefits as in most cases these are exempted from Tax. To tax these components anytime before the last payroll, use _Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits_ in Payroll Entry / Salary Slip while processing the Salary.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-claim.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3451fc8c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-claim.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-#Employee Benefit Claim
-
-Employee Benefit Claim allows Employees to -
- 1. Claim flexible benefits which are to be received lump-sum (if Salary Component is _Pay Against Benefit Claim_)
- 2. Claim tax exemption for flexible benefits received pro-rata, as part of salary when _Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits_ is checked in Payroll Entry / Salary Slip
-
-You can create a new Employee Benefit Claim by going to,
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Employee Benefit Claim > New Employee Benefit Claim
-
-
-
-Here, Employee can view the eligible amount as per their Salary Structure Assignment and claim for the amount which they wish to receive as part of their next Salary. Any remaining amount which the employee did not claim for, in a Payroll Period, will be disbursed as part of the last payroll Salary.
-
-> Note: Normal Tax calculation does not include Flexible Benefits as in most cases these are exempted from Tax. To tax these components anytime before the last payroll, use _Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits_ in Payroll Entry / Salary Slip while processing the Salary.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d17c2a00..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-#Employee Tax Exemption Declaration
-At the beginning of a Payroll Period, employees can declare the amount of exemption from their taxable salary they will be claiming at the end of the period by submitting proofs. To create a new Employee Tax Exemption Declaration, go to
-
-> Human resources > Payroll > Employee Tax Exemption Declaration > New Employee Tax Exemption Declaration
-
-
-
-The _Total Exemption Amount_ will be exempted from annual taxable earnings of the employee while calculating the tax deductions in Payroll.
-
-> Note: Employees can only submit one Employee Tax Exemption Declaration for a Payroll Period.
-
-### Regional - India
-For the current fiscal year, in India, House Rent Allowance (HRA) exemption from taxable earnings is the minimum of:
-
-* The actual amount allotted by the employer as the HRA.
-* Actual rent paid less 10% of the basic salary.
-* 50% of the basic salary, if the employee is staying in a metro city (40% for a non-metro city).
-
-As part of the Employee Tax Exemption Declaration, employees shall also fill out the HRA Exemption. ERPNext will calculate the exemption eligible for HRA and exempt it while calculating the taxable earnings.
-
-> Note: HRA component shall be configured in Company for HRA exemption to work
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 16851f25..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-#Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission
-Employees are required to submit proofs for all the spendings they claim tax exemption for. This is usually done at the end of a Payroll Period, but employees can submit any number of proofs unlike Employee Tax Exemption Declaration.
-
-To create a new Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission, go to
-
-> Human resources > Payroll > Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission > New Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission
-
-
-
-The _Total Exemption Amount_ will be exempted from annual taxable earnings of the employee while calculating the tax deductions in the last payroll.
-
-> Note: Even if employees submit exemption proofs anytime during the payroll period, ERPNext will only consider this in the last payroll of the Payroll Period for adjusting the final taxes based on the proof submitted. If you need to adjust any additional tax collected or consider proof submission of employees anytime before the last payroll, while processing Payroll Entry (or in the Salary Slip of the employee) check the _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ option.
-
-### Regional - India
-For the current fiscal year, in India, House Rent Allowance (HRA) exemption from taxable earnings is the minimum of:
-
-* The actual amount allotted by the employer as the HRA.
-* Actual rent paid less 10% of the basic salary.
-* 50% of the basic salary, if the employee is staying in a metro city (40% for a non-metro city).
-
-As part of the Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission, employees shall also submit proof for HRA Exemption. ERPNext will calculate the exemption eligible for HRA and exempt it while calculating the taxable earnings in the last payroll of the Payroll Period.
-
-> Note: HRA component shall be configured in Company for HRA exemption to work
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 837eaff9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Payroll
-Payroll processing is an important function of every enterprise HR. ERPNext greatly simplifies this process by offering an array of features that you can utilize form Salary Structure management to bulk processing Payroll of employees. Read the following documentation to understand how to configure and use ERPNext Human Resources to super power your Payroll processing.
-
-#Topics
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 72e0f4e8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-payroll-entry
-additional-salary
-retention-bonus
-employee-benefit-application
-employee-benefit-claim
-employee-tax-exemption-declaration
-employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission
-payroll-period
-payroll-setup
-setting-up-tax
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f2a54e95..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-
-# Payroll Entry
-
-Payroll Entry enables bulk processing of payroll for employees company wide or employees of a particular branch, department or designation. Payroll Entry helps you create Salary Slips _in bulk_ for selected employees, submit the created Salary Slips at once, submit salary accrual entry and finally post bank entry for recording the salary payment, automating almost every step involved in payroll processing. Here's how you can use Payroll Entry to simplify your payroll processing.
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Payroll Entry > New Payroll Entry
-
-
-
-> Note: Read [Payroll Setup](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-setup.html) to know how you can configure Payroll to take the full advantage of ERPNext Human Resources.
-
-In Payroll Entry,
-
-1. Select the Company for which you want to create the Salary Slips. You can also select the other fields like Branch, Department, Designation or Project to be more specific.
-2. Check _Salary Slip based on Timesheet_ if you want to process timesheet based Salary Slips.
-3. Select the Posting Date and the frequency of payroll which you want to create the Salary Slips.
-4. Click on _Get Employee Details_ to get a list of Employees for which the Salary Slips will be created based on the selected criteria.
-5. Enter the Start and End dates for the payroll period.
-6. You can check _Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits_ if you want to deduct taxes for all benefits (Salary Components which are _Is Flexible Benefit_) paid to employees till the current payroll
-7. Similarly, _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ allows you to deduct taxes for the earnings which were exempted in the previous payrolls as declared in [Employee Tax Exemption Declaration](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.html) but the Employee has not submitted sufficient proof [Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.html)
-8. Select the Cost Center and Payment Account.
-9. Save the form and Submit it to create Salary Slip records for each active Employee for the time period selected. If the Salary Slips are already created, the system will not create any more Salary Slips. You can also just save the form as Draft and create the Salary Slips later.
-
-
-
-Once all Salary Slips are created, you can use _View Salary Slips_ to verify if they are created correctly or edit it if you want to deduct Leave Without Pay (LWP).
-
-### Booking Salary Accrual and Payment
-
-After verifying the Salary Slips, you can _Submit_ them all together by clicking on `Submit Salary Slip`. This will also book the default Payroll Payable account against respective Expense Heads (as configured in Salary Components) to record the accrual of salary to employees.
-
-> Note: Submitting Salary Slips one by one manually will _not_ create the Journal Entry to record salary accrual.
-
-The final step is to book the Salary Payment.
-
-Salaries in businesses are usually dealt with extreme privacy. In most cases, the companies issues a single payment to the bank combining all salaries and the bank distributes the salaries to each employee’s salary account. This way there is only one payment entry in the company’s books of accounts and anyone with access to the company’s accounts will not have access to the individual salaries.
-
-The salary payment entry is a Journal Entry that debits the total of the earning type salary component and credits the total of deduction type salary component of all Employees to the default account set at Salary Component level for each component.
-
-To generate your salary payment voucher from Payroll Entry, click on -
-> Make > Bank Entry
-
-
-
-Payroll Entry will route you to Journal Entry with relevant filters to view the draft Journal Vouchers created. You shall set reference number and date for the transactions and Submit the Journal Entries.
-
->Note: For Salary Components which are Flexible Benefits and has _Create Separate Payment Entry Against Benefit Claim_ checked, ERPNext will book separate draft Journal Entries.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 668c4682..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-#Payroll Period
-A payroll period, in ERPNext, is a period for which Employees get paid for their occupation with the Company. Payroll period helps you define Tax slabs applicable for the period, making it easier to manage changing laws.
-
-You can create Payroll Period by going to:
-> Human Resources > Payroll Setup > Payroll Period > New Payroll Period
-
-
-
-You can add multiple tax slabs for the payroll period depending on the tax regulations. Note that you can use fields in Employee document in the _Condition_ field to apply tax slabs based on properties of employees. Here is an example of how to define a tax slab for Employees who are aged between 60 and 80 years.
-
-
-
-> Note: Configuring Payroll Period is optional if you do not intend to use Flexible Benefits or Tax Slabs
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-setup.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 83414457..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,226 +0,0 @@
-
-# Payroll Setup
-
-Salary is a fixed amount of money or compensation paid to an employee by an employer in return for the work performed.
-
-Payroll is the administration of financial records of employees' salaries, wages, bonuses, net pay, and deductions.
-
-To process Payroll in ERPNext,
-
-1. Define [Payroll Period](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.html) (optional)
-2. Create Salary Structure with Salary Components (Earnings and Deductions)
-3. Assign Salary Structures to each Employee via Salary Structure Assignment
-4. Generate Salary Slips via [Payroll Entry](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-entry.html).
-5. Book the Salary in your Accounts.
-
-## Payroll Period
-[Payroll Period](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.html), in ERPNext, is a period for which Employees get paid for their occupation with the Company. Payroll period helps you define Tax slabs applicable for the period, making it easier to manage changing laws.
-
-> Note: Configuring Payroll Period is optional if you do not intend to use Flexible Benefits or Tax Slabs
-
-## Salary Component
-This document allows you to define each Earning and Deduction component which can be used to create a Salary Structure and subsequently create Salary Slip or Additional Salary. You can also configure the type, condition and formula as well as other settings which are discussed below. You should be able to enable various combinations of the following options to configure each component as it fits your Company / Regional policies.
-
-* Depends on Leave Without Pay: Leave Without Pay (LWP) happens when an Employee runs out of allocated leaves
-or takes a leave without an approval (via Leave Application). If enabled, ERPNext will automatically deduct the
-pay in proportion of LWP days divided by the total working days for the month (based on the Holiday List).
-
- > Note: If you don’t want ERPNext to manage LWP, don’t turn on this flag in any of the Salary Components
-
-* Do not include in total: If this option is enabled, the component wont be added to the total of the Earnings or Deductions of the Salary Slip
-
-#### Earning
-
-
-
-* Is Additional Component: This option specify that the component can only be paid as Additional Salary. Examples of this component could be Performance Bonus or pay received for on-site deputation etc. Such components are not considered to be part of normal Salary Structure. Instead, Additional Salary with these components can be submitted as required which will be added to the Salary Slip automatically.
-
-* Is Tax Applicable: If a component needs to be considered for Tax calculations specified as per the Payroll Period you may want to enable this option. It would be required that you have a Payroll Period configured with valid Tax Slabs for payroll processing.
-
-* Is Payable: Such components can be booked against separate payable accounts and the Accounts shall be configured in the Accounts table
-
-* Flexible Benefits: Flexible Benefits are earning components which Employees can choose to receive on a pro-rata basis or annually when they claim for. These are mostly tax exempted, unless the Employee fail to file the claim with adequate bills / documents. If turned on, you can specify the maximum benefit allowed for an employee in a year. Employees can create [Employee Benefit Application](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benfit-application.html) with the ones they opt for.
-
- >Note: Employee Benefit Application will only allow Employees to only choose from the flexible components which are present in the Salary Structure assigned to the Employee
-
- - Pay Against Benefit Claim: Employees can opt to receive flexible benefits annually via Employee Benefit Claim or along with their salary every month. If you enable this, the amount allocated for the component will be paid as the Employee submits an [Employee Benefit Claim](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-claim.html). Else the amount will be dispersed as part of the Employee's salary on a pro-rata basis.
-
- - Only Tax Impact (Cannot Claim But Part of Taxable Income): Such components are those which the company has already paid to the Employee in cash or by some other means, for example a car purchased for the Employee's use. The Employee cannot claim but is liable to pay tax. The amount allocated for this component will be considered while calculating the taxable income of the Employee.
-
- - Create Separate Payment Entry Against Benefit Claim: Some of the flexible benefits may be legally required to be paid via separate vouchers. If you enable this, while posting the bank entry the amount paid for such components will be posted as a separate entry for each Employee.
-
- 
-
- > Note: Normal Tax calculation does not include Flexible Benefits as in most cases these are exempted from Tax. To tax these components anytime before that last payroll, use "Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits" in Payroll Entry / Salary Slip while processing the Salary.
-
-#### Deduction
-
-
-
-* Variable Based On Taxable Salary: If you enable this, the component will be considered as the standard Tax deduction component. Tax will be calculated based on the Tax slabs configured in Payroll Period on all the total taxable salary.
-
-## Salary Structure
-
-Salary Structure represents how Salaries are structured and calculated based on Earnings and Deductions. Salary structures are used to help organizations:
-
-1. Maintain pay levels that are competitive with the external labor market,
-2. Maintain internal pay relationships among jobs,
-3. Recognize and reward differences in the level of responsibility, skill, and performance, and manage pay expenditures.
-
-Usual components of a salary structure (in India) include:
-
-* Basic Salary: It is the taxable base income and generally not more than 40% of CTC.
-
-* House Rent Allowance: The HRA constitutes 40 to 50% of the basic salary.
-
-* Special Allowances: Makes up for the remainder part of the salary, mostly smaller than the basic salary which is completely taxable.
-
-* Leave Travel Allowance: The non-taxable amount paid by the employer to the employee for vacation/trips with family within India.
-
-* Gratuity: It is basically a lump sum amount paid by the employer when the employee resigns from the organization or retires.
-
-* PF: Fund collected during emergency or old age. 12% of the basic salary is automatically deducted and goes to the employee provident fund.
-
-* Medical Allowance: The employer pays the employee for the medical expenditures incurred. It is tax-free up to Rs.15,000.
-
-* Bonus: Taxable part of the CTC, usually a once a year lump sum amount, given to the employee based on the individual’s as well as the organizational performance for the year.
-
-* Employee Stock Options: ESOPS are Free/discounted shares given by the company to the employees. This is done to primarily increase employee retention.
-
-
-A submitted Salary Structure
-
-### Creating a New Salary Structure
-To create a new Salary Structure go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll Setup > Salary Structure > New Salary Structure
-
-In the new Salary Structure,
-
-1. Name the salary Structure and set the company, letterhead for Salary Slip printing and frequency of payroll etc.
-2. Set the starting date from which this is valid (Note: There can only be one Salary Structure that can be “Active” for an Employee during any period).
-3. Configure Leave Encashment Amount per Day which will be the amount payable to Employees on Leave Encashment requests.
-4. Max Benefits amount is the maximum amount eligible as Flexible Components to employees.
-
-#### Salary Slip Based on Timesheet
-
-Salary Slip based on Timesheet is applicable if you have timesheet based payroll system
-
-1. Check "Salary Slip Based on Timesheet"
-2. Select the salary component and enter Hour Rate (Note: This salary component gets added to earnings in Salary Slip)
-
-
-
-#### Earnings and Deductions in Salary Structure
-
-In the “Earnings” and “Deductions” tables, you can select the earnings and deductions components The condition and formula configured in Salary Component will be copied by default, but you may change this if required. You may also want to select the Base component in the Earnings table. Note that the amount eligible for each employee should be configured in Salary Structure Assignment.
-
-If the condition and formula for any of the earnings or deductions are not configured in Salary Component, you can calculate the values of Salary Components based on,
-
-#### Condition and Formula
-
-
-
-#### Condition and Amount
-
-
-
-
-In conditions and formulas,
-
- * Use field "base" for using base salary of the Employee
- * Use Salary Component abbreviations. For example: BS for Basic Salary
- * Use field name for employee details. For example: Employment Type for employment_type
-
-#### Account Details
-
-
-
- * Select Mode of Payment and Payment Account for the Salary Slips which will be generated using this Salary Structure
-
-Finally, *Save* the Salary Structure.
-
-### Leave Without Pay (LWP)
-
-Leave Without Pay (LWP) happens when an Employee runs out of allocated leaves or takes a leave without an approval (via Leave Application). If you want ERPNext to automatically deduct salary in case of LWP, then you must check on
-the “Apply LWP” column in the Earning Type and Deduction Type masters. The amount of pay cut is the proportion of LWP days divided by the total working days for the month (based on the Holiday List).
-
-If you don’t want ERPNext to manage LWP, leave the LWP unchecked in all of the Earning Types and Deduction Types.
-
-## Salary Structure Assignment
-
-Salary Structure Assignment allows you to assign salary structure and specify the base pay eligible for each employee. It is important that you set the base salary for each assignment as this will be the base salary used for calculations as per the Salary Structure.
-
-To create a new Salary Structure Assignment go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Salary Structure Assignment > New Salary Structure Assignment
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-#Processing Payroll
-You can either bulk process payroll for Employees under a department, branch or designation or process payroll individually by creating Salary Slips for each employee.
-
-## Payroll Processing Using Payroll Entry
-You can also create salary slip for multiple employees using Payroll Entry:
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Payroll Entry > New Payroll Entry
-
-#### Payroll Entry
-
-
-
-In Payroll Entry,
-
-1. Select the Company for which you want to create the Salary Slips. You can also select the other fields like Branch, Department, Designation or Project to be more specific.
-2. Check _Salary Slip based on Timesheet_ if you want to process timesheet based Salary Slips.
-3. Select the Posting Date and the frequency of payroll which you want to create the Salary Slips.
-4. Click on "Get Employee Details" to get a list of Employees for which the Salary Slips will be created based on the selected criteria.
-5. Enter the Start and End dates for the payroll period.
-6. You can check _Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits_ if you want to deduct taxes for all benefits (Salary Components which are _Is Flexible Benefit_) paid to employees till the current payroll
-7. Similarly, _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ allows you to deduct taxes for the earnings which were exempted in the previous payrolls as declared in [Employee Tax Exemption Declaration](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.html) but the Employee has not submitted sufficient proof [Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.html)
-8. Select the Cost Center and Payment Account.
-9. Save the form and Submit it to create Salary Slip records for each active Employee for the time period selected. If the Salary Slips are already created, the system will not create any more Salary Slips. You can also just save the form as Draft and create the Salary Slips later.
-
-
-
-Once all Salary Slips are created, you can use _View Salary Slips_ to verify if they are created correctly or edit it if you want to deduct Leave Without Pay (LWP).
-
-After checking, you can "Submit" them all together by clicking on "Submit Salary Slip".
-
->Note: Submitting Salary Slips will also book the default Payroll Payable account to record the accrual of salary.
-
-#### Booking Salaries in Accounts
-
-The final step is to book the Salaries in your Accounts.
-
-Salaries in businesses are usually dealt with extreme privacy. In most cases, the companies issues a single payment to the bank combining all salaries and the bank distributes the salaries to each employee’s salary account. This way there is only one payment entry in the company’s books of accounts and anyone with access to the company’s accounts will not have access to the individual salaries.
-
-The salary payment entry is a Journal Entry that debits the total of the earning type salary component and credits the total of deduction type salary component of all Employees to the default account set at Salary Component level for each component.
-
-To generate your salary payment voucher from Payroll Entry, click on -
-> Make > Bank Entry
-
-
-
-Payroll Entry will route you to Journal Entry with relevant filters to view the draft Journal Vouchers created. You shall set reference number and date for the transactions and Submit the Journal Entries.
-
->Note: For Salary Components which are Flexible Benefits and has _Create Separate Payment Entry Against Benefit Claim_ checked, ERPNext will book separate draft Journal Entries.
-
-
-
-## Creating Salary Slips Manually
-
-Once the Salary Structure is created and assigned to employees via Salary Structure Assignment, you can make a Salary Slip individually. Go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Salary Slip > New Salary Slip
-
-#### Salary Slip
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/retention-bonus.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/retention-bonus.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f1aee4e9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/retention-bonus.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-#Retention Bonus
-In general, retention bonus is a payment or reward outside of an employee's regular salary that is offered as an incentive to keep a key employee on the job during a particularly crucial business cycle, such as a merger or acquisition, or during a crucial production period.
-
-However, many enterprises also grant bonus to employees who have worked with them for longer periods. ERPNext allows you to configure Retention Bonus for employees which will alert the HR Manager (or any role as configured in Email Alert) on the event of an employee working for a particular period, say 5 years.
-
-You can create new Retention Bonus here,
-> Human resources > Payroll > Retention Bonus
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/setting-up-tax.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/setting-up-tax.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1115a2d7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/setting-up-tax.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-
-#Setting Up Income Tax Deduction
-Calculating Tax deductions for employees every month is a time consuming activity for most businesses, especially for large enterprises. If setup properly, ERPNext simplifies most of the tax related calculations by automatically calculating tax deductions while generating Salary Slips. Here's how you can configure ERPNext to ease you payroll processing -
-
-#Income Tax Exemption
-In many countries, especially in India, regulations allow exempting a part (or all) of some type of spendings by individuals from being added to their annual taxable income. Examples of such spendings could be contributions to charitable institutions, amount spent for education of children, specific investments etc. To
-avail the exemption from their taxable income, individuals are required to submit proof of such spendings.
-
-ERPNext allows you to configure Tax Slabs as part of every Payroll Period and the applies tax on each Salary based on projected annual earnings of the employee. Tax thus calculated will be added to the Salary Slip for deduction Salary Component configured _Variable Based On Taxable Salary_. Employees are required to declare the exemption amount they plan to claim at the end of the fiscal year so that the payroll deductions for tax will be calculated based on the projected annual earnings less the exemption. Employees can declare this through [Employee Tax Exemption Declaration](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.html), the total of which will be exempted from annual taxable earnings of the employee.
-
-If no declaration is submitted by the employee, the monthly deductions will be calculated without any exemption from the employee's annual earnings. However, if the employee submits a declaration in between the payroll period, from the next payroll onwards the exemption will be applied from the next payroll. Any additional tax collected in earlier payrolls will be adjusted in the last payroll or when using _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ in Payroll Entry or Salary Slip.
-
-Also, at the end of the year employees submit the actual proof of the spendings for filing via [Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.html). In the last payroll of the Payroll Period, ERPNext checks for proof submissions of employees and if not found, tax for the exempted income will be aded to the standard deduction component.
-
-###Employee Tax Exemption Category
-Exemptions from taxable salary are usually restricted to spendings on particular categories decided by government or regulatory agencies. ERPNext allows you to configure various categories which are allowed to be exempted. Examples of this could be, for India, 80G, 80C, B0CC etc.
-
-You can configure Employee Tax Exemption Category by going to,
-> Human resources > Payroll Setup > Employee Tax Exemption Category > New Employee Tax Exemption Category
-
-
-
-###Employee Tax Exemption Sub Category
-Under each category, there could be many heads for which the exemptions are allowed. For example, in India, sub categories under 80C could be Life Insurance Premium
-
-You can configure Employee Tax Exemption Sub Category by going to,
-> Human resources > Payroll Setup > Employee Tax Exemption Sub Category > New Employee Tax Sub Exemption Category
-
-
-
-###HRA Exemption - Regional, India
-For the fiscal year 2018-19, in India, House Rent Allowance (HRA) exemption from taxable earnings is the minimum of:
- * The actual amount allotted by the employer as the HRA.
- * Actual rent paid less 10% of the basic salary.
- * 50% of the basic salary, if the employee is staying in a metro city (40% for a non-metro city).
-
- As part of the Employee Tax Exemption Declaration, employees shall also fill out the HRA Exemption. ERPNext will calculate the exemption eligible for HRA and exempt it while calculating the taxable earnings.
-
- > Note: Basic and HRA salary component shall be configured in Company for HRA exemption to work
-
-###Options in Payroll Entry and Salary Slip
-ERPNext simplifies payroll processing by automatically processing payroll in bulk via [Payroll Entry](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-entry.html).
-
-* Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits: Flexible benefits (Salary Components which are _Is Flexible Benefit_) are not included in the taxable income of the employee. However, the amount received for these components will be included in the taxable earnings of the employee if she fails to submit [Employee Benefit Claim](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-claim.html) while calculating tax in the last payroll of the Payroll Period.
-
-If you wish to collect tax for benefits before the last payroll, check this option and ERPNext will recalculate the tax and add the tax for all untaxed benefits while generating the Salary Slip.
-
-* Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof: This option allows you to deduct taxes for the earnings which were exempted in previous payrolls as declared in [Employee Tax Exemption Declaration](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.html) but the Employee has not submitted sufficient proof via [Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.html). It is to be noted that if this option is checked ERPNext does not consider the Employee Tax Exemption Declaration by employees and will only take into account _Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission_ instead, while calculating exemption from employees' annual earnings.
-
->Note: If required, you can still process payroll for employees individually, by manually creating a new Salary Slip and both these options are made available in the Salary Slip
-
-#Payroll Period
-[Payroll Period](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.html) helps you define Tax slabs applicable for the period, making it easier to manage changing laws. You can add multiple tax slabs for the payroll period depending on the tax regulations. Note that you can use fields in Employee document in the _Condition_ field to apply tax slabs based on attributes of employees.
-
-#Salary Component
-To enable automatic tax deduction based on Tax slabs configured in Payroll Period, you have to configure a Salary Component of type _Deduction_ with _Variable Based On Taxable Salary_ option enabled. If you enable this, the component will be considered as the standard Tax deduction component and tax will be calculated based on the Tax slabs configured in Payroll Period on all the total taxable salary.
-
-_Important Note:_ If you configure condition and formula for this Deduction component, the condition and formula will be considered for calculating the Salary Component and the Tax Slabs configured in Payroll Period will be ignored. However, you can still use _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ option in Payroll Entry / Salary Slip to deduct taxes based on the Tax Slabs configured in Payroll Period, exempting [Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.html) which will give precedence to the Tax Slab based tax deduction.
-
-This is particularly helpful if you need to deduct a fixed amount as deduction in each payroll rather than ERPNext automatically calculating the deductions based on projected annual salary of the employee after exemption as declared by the employee via [Employee Tax Exemption Declaration](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.html). At the end of the fiscal year, you can still use _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ to deduct the remaining tax liability of the employee for the whole period.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2e33e4b6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Recruitment
-It is important for enterprises to create and manage vacant positions, job applicants and also create and manage recruitment plans. ERPNext helps you create recruitment plans and create and publish job openings accordingly, making it easy to manage your hiring process. To understand how you can do configure this, check [Staffing Plan](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.html)
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 76db6762..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-job-applicant
-job-offer
-job-opening
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-applicant.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-applicant.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 19ef8026..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-applicant.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-# Job Applicant
-
-You can maintain a list of People who have applied for a [Job Opening](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-opening.html).
-
-To create a new Job Applicant go to
-
-> Human Resource > Recruitment > Job Applicant > New Job Applicant
-
-
-
-### Linking with an Email Account
-
-You can link Job Application with an Email account.
-Suppose you link Job Application with an email job@example.com
-system shall create a New Job Applicant against each email received on the mailbox.
-
-* To link Email Account with Job Applicant, go to
-
-> Setup > Email > Email Account > New Email Account
-
-* Enter the Email Address and the password, and select 'Enable Incoming'
-
-* In 'Append To' select 'Job Applicant'
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-offer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-offer.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bba9c0a0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-offer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Job Offer
-
-Job Offer is given to selected candidates after Interview & selection which states the offered salary package,
-designation, grade, department working, no of days entitled for leave.
-
-In ERPNext you can make a record of the Job Offers that you can give to candidates. To create a new Job Offer go to
-
-> Human Resource > Recruitment > Job Offer > New
-
-
-
-> Note: A Job Offer can be made only against a [Job Applicant](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.html)
-
-There is a pre-designed print format to print you Job Offer.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-opening.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-opening.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5bc183c2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-opening.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Job Opening
-
-You can make a record of the open vacancies in your company using Job Opening.
-
-To create a new Job Opening go to
-
-> Human Resource > Recruitment > Job Opening > New Job Opening
-
-
-
-ERPNext allows to plan your recruitment at a group company level. The number of Job Openings you can create for a Designation is restricted according to the Vacancies planned by the Staffing Plan defined for the company or one of it's parent group companies in the hierarchy. To understand how you can do configure this, check [Staffing Plan](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.html)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3d0658c2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Branch
-
-Branches of your organization
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/daily-work-summary-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/daily-work-summary-group.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 22ae0b6b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/daily-work-summary-group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-#Daily Work Summary Group
-In order to facilitate daily reporting of employees, you can configure ERPNext to request employees email to send their work summary. To configure a new Daily Work Summary Group go to
-
-> Human Resources > Setup > Daily Work Summary Group
-
-You can set multiple groups with different set of _users_ from your user list with different _time to send emails_ and with separate _holiday list_ for each.
-
-You can also choose to customize the _Message_ you send to users.
-
-**Note:**
->1. If no holiday list is selected then the email will be sent every day.
->2. Name of a "Daily Work Summary Group" will be sent as the title for daily summary email.
->3. Mail will not be sent to the users of a disabled Daily Work Summary Group.
-via HR module or search bar and set the users for whom you want to send the reminder.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0fe314e7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Department
-
-You can configure the Departments in your organization, set Leave Block List for the department and also Leave and Expense Approvers.
-
-
-
-It is also possible for you to create and group departments as depicted below.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f8fc20aa..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Designation
-
-Designations in your organization
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employee-grade.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employee-grade.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ce21a322..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employee-grade.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-#Employee Grade
-ERPNext allows you to configure employee grades, helping you to easily categorize employees based on seniority or any other criteria. Employee Grades also helps you fetch employee records in bulk based on their grades while processing payroll, allocating leaves etc.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 65498692..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employment Type
-
-Various employment contracts you have with your employees.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/health-insurance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/health-insurance.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6ea12430..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/health-insurance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Health Insurance
-
-To create Health Insurance Provider:
-
-> Human Resources > Health Insurance > New
-
-
-
-In Employee, you can attached the provider and fill in the Health Insurance No.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 49001d60..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# HR Settings
-
-Global settings for HR related documents
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a7193b07..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index ad091920..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-hr-settings
-employment-type
-branch
-department
-designation
-employee-grade
-daily-work-summary-group
-health-insurance
-staffing-plan
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a0d002bb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-# Staffing Plan
-Staffing Plan helps you to plan human resource recruitments for your Company. ERPNext allows you to do this at a group company level helping you efficiently plan and budget new hirings for a period. Job Openings can only be created as per the number of vacancies and budget as per the active Staffing Plan.
-
-> Human Resources > Setup > Staffing Plan > New Staffing Plan
-
-
-
-- **Designation:** The designations for which you are creating the Staffing Plan.
-- **Number of Positions:** The number of positions you plan to recruit for between the Staffing Plan from and to dates.
-- **Current Count:** This is the number of Employees already hired for the Designation.
-- **Vacancies:** The number of vacancies based on the Number of Positions you wish to recruit and the current Employee count.
-- **Estimated Cost Per Position:** You can specify the cost to company per position so that hiring officials can stick to the budget.
-
-
-
-**Total Estimated Budget** Once you enter the recruitment plan for all the designations, Staffing Plan will draw up the total estimated budget as per the plan.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/shift-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/shift-management.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bf0c0ac6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/shift-management.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-# Shift Management
-
-Shift Management section of Human Resources helps your Organization manage shifts of your employees.
-
-To use Shift Management in ERPNext,
-
- 1. Set Up a Shift Type.
- 2. Enter Shift Request.
- 3. View and Manage Shift Assignments.
-
-### Shift Type
-
-The Shift Type Set Up allows you to define the different types of Shifts in your Organization.
-
-To create a new Shift Type go to:
-
-Human Resources > Shift Management > Shift Type
-
-* Enter Shift Type, Start Time and End Time for quick entry.
-
-
-
-### Shift Request
-
-Shift Request is used by an employee to request for a particular Shift Type.
-
-To create a new Shift Request Log go to:
-
-Human Resources > Shift Management > Shift Request
-
-* Enter Shift Type, Employee, Company, From Date and To Date.
-
- 
-
-### Shift Assignment
-
-* Once the Shift Request is submitted it automatically creates the Shift Assignments for an Employee.
-
- 
-
-* You can also view Calendar view of Shift Assignments.
-
- 
-
- {next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md
deleted file mode 100755
index af59ac87..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-
-# Training
-### Training Program
-
-Create Training Program and schedule Training Events under it. It has a dashboard linked to Training Event to view which event is under the Training Program.
-
-
-
-### Training Event
-
-Schedule seminars, workshops, conferences etc using Training Event linked to a Training Program. You can also invite your employees to attend the event using this feature.
-
-
-
-### Inviting Employees for Event
-
-You can invite your employees to attend the event. You can do so by selecting the employees to be invited in the employee table.
-
-By default the status of the employee will be 'Open'.
-
-
-
-When you submit the Training Event, a notification will be sent to the employee notifying that the Training has been scheduled. This is sent via Email Alert "Training Scheduled". You can modify this Email Alert to customize the message.
-
-### Training Result
-
-After completion of the training Employee-wise training results can be stored based on the Feedback received from the Trainer.
-
-
-
-When the Training Result is submitted, all the employees will receive an email notifying them that they must share their feedback via "Training Feedback". This is also managed via an Email Alert, so you can customize this alert too.
-
-### Training Feedback
-
-Employees can then share their feedback via Training Feedback.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/employee-advance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/employee-advance.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4b9a5d5c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/employee-advance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Advance
-
-Sometimes employees go outside for company's work and company pays some amount for their expenses in advance. In that time, the employee can create Employee Advance form and the expense approver can submit the advance record after verification. After Employee Advance gets submitted, the accountant releases the payment and makes the payment entry.
-
-To make a new Employee Advance, go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Travel and Expense Claims > Employee Advance > New Employee Advance
-
-
-
-Set the Employee ID, date, purpose and requested amount and “Save” the record.
-
-### Employee Advance Submission
-
-Employee Advance record can be created by any employee but they cannot submit the record.
-
-After saving Employee Advance, Employee should [Assign document to Approver](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.html). On assignment, approving user will also receive email notification. To automate email notification, you can also setup [Email Alert](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.html).
-
-After verification, approver can submit the Employee Advance form or reject the request.
-
-### Make Payment Entry
-After submission of Employee Advance record, accounts user will be able to create payment entry via Journal Entry or Payment Entry form.
-The payment entry will look like following:
-
-
-
-
-On submission of payment entry, the paid amount and status will be updated in Employee Advance record.
-
-### Adjust advances on Expense Claim
-Later when employee claims the expense and advance record can be fetched in Expense Claim and linked to the claim record.
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/expense-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/expense-claim.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fc08d2b9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/expense-claim.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-
-# Expense Claim
-
-Expense Claim is made when Employee’s make expenses out of their pocket on behalf of the company. For example, if they take a customer out for lunch, they can make a request for reimbursement via the Expense Claim form.
-
-To make a new Expense Claim, go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Travel and Expense Claims > Expense Claim > New Expense Claim
-
-
-
-Set the Employee ID, date and the list of expenses that are to be claimed and
-“Submit” the record.
-
-
-
-
-### Set Account for Employee
-Set employee's expense account on the employee form, system books an expense amount of an employee under this account.
-
-
-### Approving Expenses
-
-Approver for the Expense Claim is selected by an Employee himself. Employee can choose from the list of users who are configured as _Expense Approvers_ for their [Department](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.html).
-
-After saving Expense Claim, Employee should [Assign document to Approver](/docs/user/manual/en/using-eprnext/assignment.html). On assignment, approving user will also receive email notification. To automate email notification, you can also setup [Email Alert](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.html).
-
-Expense Claim Approver can update the “Sanctioned Amounts” against Claimed Amount of an Employee. If submitting, Approval Status should be submitted to Approved or Rejected. If Approved, then Expense Claim gets submitted. If rejected, then Expense Approver's comments can be added in the Comments section explaining why the claim was approved or rejected.
-
-### Booking the Expense
-
-On submission of Expense Claim, system books an expense against the expense account and the employee account
-
-
-User can view unpaid expense claim using report "Unclaimed Expense Claims"
-
-
-### Payment for Expense Claim
-
-To make payment against the expense claim, user has to click on Make > Bank Entry
-#### Expense Claim
-
-
-#### Payment Entry
-
-
-Note: This amount should not be clubbed with Salary because the amount will then be taxable to the Employee.
-
-Alternatively, a Payment Entry can be made for an employee and all outstanding Expense Claims will be pulled in.
-
-> Accounts > Payment Entry > New Payment Entry
-
-Set the Payment Type to "Pay", the Party Type to Employee, the Party to the employee being paid and the account being paid from. All outstanding expense claims will be pulled in and payments amounts can be allocated to each expense.
-
-
-### Linking with Task & Project
-
-* To Link Expense Claim with Task or Project specify the Task or the Project while making an Expense Claim
-
-
-
-This will update the Project cost with the Expense claim amounts
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ca24c75f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Travel and Expense Claim
-It is a common practice that employees incur expenses for official travel or other petty expenses which they reimburse from the employer periodically. ERPNext helps you efficiently manage advance payments made to employees, travel requests and expense claims and related approval workflows.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 818895ff..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-employee-advance
-expense-claim
-travel-request
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/travel-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/travel-request.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4974fcfd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/travel-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-#Travel Request
-Employees can request funds for official travel using Travel Request. To create a new Travel Request, go to
-
-> Human Resource > Travel and Expense Claim > Travel Request > New Travel Request
-
-
-
-You can also mention the Travel Itinerary as well as the costs involved for the trip. Employees can also check `Travel Advance Required` if they wish to receive any upfront payment form the company.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0cc26022..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# User Manual (English)
-
-### Contents:
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 6b127e42..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-introduction
-setting-up
-accounts
-asset
-stock
-CRM
-selling
-buying
-manufacturing
-projects
-support
-human-resources
-subscription
-customer-portal
-website
-using-erpnext
-regional
-customize-erpnext
-education
-erpnext_integration
-quality-management
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ee528577..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,432 +0,0 @@
-
-# Concepts And Terms
-
-Before you start implementation, lets get familiar with the terminology that
-is used and some basic concepts in ERPNext.
-
-* * *
-
-### Basic Concepts
-
-#### Company
-
-This represents the Company records for which ERPNext is setup. With this same
-setup, you can create multiple Company records, each representing a different
-legal entity. The accounting for each Company will be different, but they will
-share the Customer, Supplier and Item records.
-
-> Setup > Company
-
-#### Customer
-
-Represents a customer. A Customer can be an individual or an organization.
-You can create multiple Contacts and Addresses for each Customer.
-
-> Selling > Customer
-
-#### Supplier
-
-Represents a supplier of goods or services. Your telephone company is a
-Supplier, so is your raw materials Supplier. Again, a Supplier can be an
-individual or an organization and has multiple Contacts and Addresses.
-
-> Buying > Supplier
-
-#### Item
-
-A Product, sub-product or Service that is either bought, sold or manufactured
-and is uniquely identified.
-
-> Stock > Item
-
-#### Account
-
-An Account is a heading under which financial and business transactions are
-carried on. For example, “Travel Expense” is an account, “Customer Zoe”,
-“Supplier Mae” are accounts. ERPNext creates accounts for Customers and
-Suppliers automatically.
-
-> Accounts > Chart of Accounts
-
-#### Address
-
-An address represents location details of a Customer or Supplier. These can be
-of different locations such as Head Office, Factory, Warehouse, Shop etc.
-
-> Selling > Address
-
-#### Contact
-
-An individual Contact belongs to a Customer or Supplier or is just an
-independent. A Contact has a name and contact details like email and phone
-number.
-
-> Selling > Contact
-
-#### Communication
-
-A list of all Communication with a Contact or Lead. All emails sent from the
-system are added to the Communication table.
-
-> Support > Communication
-
-#### Price List
-
-A Price List is a place where different rate plans can be stored. It’s a name
-you give to a set of Item Prices stored under a particular List.
-
-> Selling > Price List
-
-
-> Buying > Price List
-
-* * *
-
-### Accounting
-
-#### Fiscal Year
-
-Represents a Financial Year or Accounting Year. You can operate multiple
-Fiscal Years at the same time. Each Fiscal Year has a start date and an end
-date and transactions can only be recorded in this period. When you “close” a
-fiscal year, it's balances are transferred as “opening” balances for the next
-fiscal year.
-
-> Setup > Company > Fiscal Year
-
-#### Cost Center
-
-A Cost Center is like an Account, but the only difference is that its
-structure represents your business more closely than Accounts.
-For example, in your Chart of Accounts, you can separate your expenses by its type
-(i.e., travel, marketing, etc.). In your Chart of Cost Centers, you can separate
-them by product line or business group (e.g., online sales, retail sales, etc.).
-
-> Accounts > Chart of Cost Centers
-
-#### Journal Entry
-
-A document that contains General Ledger (GL) entries and the sum of Debits and
-Credits of those entries is the same. In ERPNext you can update Payments,
-Returns, etc., using Journal Entries.
-
-> Accounts > Journal Entry
-
-#### Sales Invoice
-
-A bill sent to Customers for delivery of Items (goods or services).
-
-> Accounts > Sales Invoice
-
-#### Purchase Invoice
-
-A bill sent by a Supplier for delivery of Items (goods or services).
-
-> Accounts > Purchase Invoice
-
-#### Currency
-
-ERPNext allows you to book transactions in multiple currencies. There is only
-one currency for your book of accounts though. While posting your Invoices with
-payments in different currencies, the amount is converted to the default
-currency by the specified conversion rate.
-
-> Setup > Currency
-
-* * *
-
-### Selling
-
-#### Customer Group
-
-A classification of Customers, usually based on market segment.
-
-> Selling > Setup > Customer Group
-
-#### Lead
-
-A person who could be a future source of business. A Lead may generate
-Opportunities. (from: “may lead to a sale”).
-
-> CRM > Lead
-
-#### Opportunity
-
-A potential sale. (from: “opportunity for a business”).
-
-> CRM > Opportunity
-
-#### Quotation
-
-Customer's request to price an item or service.
-
-> Selling > Quotation
-
-#### Sales Order
-
-A note confirming the terms of delivery and price of an Item (product or
-service) by the Customer. Deliveries, Work Orders and Invoices are made
-on basis of Sales Orders.
-
-> Selling > Sales Order
-
-#### Territory
-
-A geographical area classification for sales management. You can set targets
-for Territories and each sale is linked to a Territory.
-
-> Selling > Setup > Territory
-
-#### Sales Partner
-
-A third party distributer / dealer / affiliate / commission agent who sells
-the company’s products usually for a commission.
-
-> Selling > Setup > Sales Partner
-
-#### Sales Person
-
-Someone who pitches to the Customer and closes deals. You can set targets for
-Sales Persons and tag them in transactions.
-
-> Selling > Setup > Sales Person
-
-* * *
-
-### Buying
-
-#### Purchase Order
-
-A contract given to a Supplier to deliver the specified Items at the specified
-cost, quantity, dates and other terms.
-
-> Buying > Purchase Order
-
-#### Material Request
-
-A request made by a system User, or automatically generated by ERPNext based
-on reorder level or projected quantity in Production Plan for purchasing a set
-of Items.
-
-> Buying > Material Request
-
-* * *
-
-### Stock (Inventory)
-
-#### Warehouse
-
-A logical Warehouse against which stock entries are made.
-
-> Stock > Warehouse
-
-#### Stock Entry
-
-Material transfer from a Warehouse, to a Warehouse or from one Warehouse to
-another.
-
-> Stock > Stock Entry
-
-#### Delivery Note
-
-A list of Items with quantities for shipment. A Delivery Note will reduce the
-stock of Items for the Warehouse from where you ship. A Delivery Note is
-usually made against a Sales Order.
-
-> Stock > Delivery Note
-
-#### Purchase Receipt
-
-A note stating that a particular set of Items were received from the Supplier,
-most likely against a Purchase Order.
-
-> Stock > Purchase Receipt
-
-#### Serial Number
-
-A unique number given to a particular unit of an Item.
-
-> Stock > Serial Number
-
-#### Batch
-
-A number given to a group of units of a particular Item that may be purchased
-or manufactured in a group.
-
-> Stock > Batch
-
-#### Stock Ledger Entry
-
-A unified table for all material movement from one warehouse to another. This
-is the table that is updated when a Stock Entry, Delivery Note, Purchase
-Receipt, and Sales Invoice (POS) is made.
-
-#### Stock Reconciliation
-
-Update Stock of multiple Items from a spreadsheet (CSV) file.
-
-> Stock > Stock Reconciliation
-
-#### Quality Inspection
-
-A note prepared to record certain parameters of an Item at the time of Receipt
-from Supplier, or Delivery to Customer.
-
-> Stock > Quality Inspection
-
-#### Item Group
-
-A classification of Item.
-
-> Stock > Setup > Item Group
-
-* * *
-
-### Human Resource Management
-
-#### Employee
-
-Record of a person who has been in present or past, in the employment of the
-company.
-
-> Human Resources > Employee
-
-#### Leave Application
-
-A record of an approved or rejected request for leave.
-
-> Human Resource > Leave Application
-
-#### Leave Type
-
-A type of leave (e.g., Sick Leave, Maternity Leave, etc.).
-
-> Human Resource > Leave and Attendance > Leave Type
-
-#### Payroll Entry
-
-A tool that helps in creation of multiple Salary Slips for Employees.
-
-> Human Resource > Payroll Entry
-
-#### Salary Slip
-
-A record of the monthly salary given to an Employee.
-
-> Human Resource > Salary Slip
-
-#### Salary Structure
-
-A template identifying all the components of an Employees' salary (earnings),
-tax and other social security deductions.
-
-> Human Resource > Salary and Payroll > Salary Structure
-
-#### Appraisal
-
-A record of the performance of an Employee over a specified period based on
-certain parameters.
-
-> Human Resources > Appraisal
-
-#### Appraisal Template
-
-A template recording the different parameters of an Employees' performance and
-their weightage for a particular role.
-
-> Human Resources > Employee Setup > Appraisal Template
-
-#### Attendance
-
-A record indicating presence or absence of an Employee on a particular day.
-
-> Human Resources > Attendance
-
-* * *
-
-### Manufacturing
-
-#### Bill of Materials (BOM)
-
-A list of Operations and Items with their quantities, that are required to
-produce another Item. A Bill of Materials (BOM) is used to plan purchases and
-do product costing.
-
-> Manufacturing > BOM
-
-#### Workstation
-
-A place where a BOM operation takes place. It is useful to calculate the
-direct cost of the product.
-
-> Manufacturing > Workstation
-
-#### Work Order
-
-A document signaling production (manufacture) of a particular Item with
-specified quantities.
-
-> Manufacturing > Work Order
-
-#### Production Planning Tool
-
-A tool for automatic creation of Work Orders and Purchase Requests based
-on Open Sales Orders in a given period.
-
-> Manufacturing > Production Planning Tool
-
-* * *
-
-### Website
-
-#### Blog Post
-
-A short article that appears in the “Blog” section of the website generated
-from the ERPNext website module. Blog is a short form of “Web Log”.
-
-> Website > Blog Post
-
-#### Web Page
-
-A web page with a unique URL (web address) on the website generated from
-ERPNext.
-
-> Website > Web Page
-
-* * *
-
-### Setup / Customization
-
-#### Custom Field
-
-A user defined field on a form / table.
-
-> Setup > Customize ERPNext > Custom Field
-
-#### Global Defaults
-
-This is the section where you set default values for various parameters of the
-system.
-
-> Setup > Data > Global Defaults
-
-#### Print Heading
-
-A title that can be set on a transaction just for printing. For example, you
-want to print a Quotation with a title “Proposal” or “Pro forma Invoice”.
-
-> Setup > Branding and Printing > Print Headings
-
-#### Terms and Conditions
-
-Text of your terms of contract.
-
-> Selling > Setup > Terms and Conditions
-
-#### Unit of Measure (UOM)
-
-How quantity is measured for an Item. E.g., Kg, No., Pair, Packet, etc.
-
-> Stock > Setup > UOM
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ab733386..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Do I Need An Erp
-
-ERPNext is a modern tool that covers not only accounting but also all other
-business functions, on an integrated platform. It has many benefits over both
-traditional accounting as well as ERP applications.
-
-### Benefits over traditional accounting software:
-
- * Do a lot more than just accounting! Manage inventory, billing, quotes, leads, payroll and a lot more.
- * Keep all your data safe and in one place. Don’t keep hunting for data when you need it across spreadsheets and different computers. Manage everyone on the same page. All users get the same updated data.
- * Stop repetitive work. Don’t enter the same information from your word processor to your accounting tool. It's all integrated.
- * Keep track. Get the entire history of a customer or a deal in one place.
-
-### Benefits over big ERPs
-
- * $$$ - Saves money.
- * **Easier to configure:** Big ERPs are notoriously hard to setup and will ask you a zillion questions before you can do something meaningful.
- * **Easier to use:** Modern web like user interface will keep your users happy and in familiar territory.
- * **Open Source :** This software is always free and you can host it anywhere you like.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 99adb079..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-# Getting Started with ERPNext
-
-There are many ways to get started with ERPNext.
-
-### 1\. See the Demo
-
-If you want to check out the user interface and **feel** the application, just
-see the demo at:
-
- *
-
-### 2\. Start a Free Account at ERPNext.com
-
-
-ERPNext.com is managed by the organization (Frappe) that publishes ERPNext.
-You can start with your own account by [signing up on the
-website](https://erpnext.com).
-
-You can also decide to host your application at erpnext.com by buying the
-hosting plans. This way you support the organization that develops and
-improves ERPNext. You also get one-to-one functional (usage) support with the
-hosting plans.
-
-### 3\. Download a Virtual Machine
-
-To avoid the trouble of installing an instance, ERPNext is available as a
-Virtual Image (a full loaded operating system with ERPNext installed). You can
-use this on **any** platform including Microsoft Windows.
-
-[Click here to see instructions on how to use the Virtual
-Image](https://erpnext.com/download)
-
-### 4\. Install ERPNext on your Unix/Linux/Mac machine
-
-If you are familiar with installing applications on *nix platforms, read the instructions on how to install using [Frappe Bench](https://github.com/frappe/bench).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/implementation-strategy.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/implementation-strategy.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fb0d84f1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/implementation-strategy.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-
-# Implementation Strategy
-
-Before you start managing your Operations in EPRNext, you must first become
-familiar with the system and the terms used. For this we recommend
-implementation should happen in two phases.
-
- * A **Test Phase**, where you enter dummy records representing your day to day transactions and a **Live Phase**, where we start entering live data.
-
-### Test Phase
-
- * Read the Manual
- * Create a free account at [https://erpnext.com](https://erpnext.com) (the easiest way to experiment).
- * Create your first Customer, Supplier and Item. Add a few more so you get familiar with them.
- * Create Customer Groups, Item Groups, Warehouses, Supplier Groups, so that you can classify your Items.
- * Complete a standard sales cycle - Lead > Opportunity > Quotation > Sales Order > Delivery Note > Sales Invoice > Payment (Journal Entry)
- * Complete a standard purchase cycle - Material Request > Purchase Order > Purchase Receipt > Payment (Journal Entry).
- * Complete a manufacturing cycle (if applicable) - BOM > Production Planning Tool > Work Order > Material Issue
- * Replicate a real life scenario into the system.
- * Create custom fields, print formats etc as required.
-
-### Live Phase
-
-Once you are familiar with ERPNext, start entering your live data!
-
- * Clean up the account of test data or better, start a fresh install.
- * If you just want to clear your transactions and not your master data like Item, Customer, Supplier, BOM etc, you can click delete the transactions of your Company and start fresh. To do so, open the Company Record via Setup > Masters > Company and delete your Company's transactions by clicking on the **Delete Company Transactions** button at the bottom of the Company Form.
- * You can also setup a new account at [https://erpnext.com](https://erpnext.com), and use the 30-day free trial. [Find out more ways of deploying ERPNext](docs/user/manual/en/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext)
- * Setup all the modules with Customer Groups, Item Groups, Warehouses, BOMs etc.
- * Import Customers, Suppliers, Items, Contacts and Addresses using Data Import Tool.
- * Import opening stock using Stock Reconciliation Tool.
- * Create opening accounting entries via Journal Entry and create outstanding Sales Invoices and Purchase Invoices.
- * If you need help, [you can buy support](https://erpnext.com/pricing) or [ask in the user forum](https://discuss.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0cadf62c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
-
-# Introduction
-
-## What is an ERP system? And why should anyone care to use it?
-
-*If you are already convinced you need an all-in-one system for your
-organization, you can skip this page.*
-
-Today, small & medium sized businesses (SMEs) are not so different from large/enterprises. The SMEs face similar complexities as a large businesses do, but have limited resources to deal with such complexity.
-
-Small businesses (like their bigger counterparts) have to:
-
-- do accounts to keep track of sales/ purchases
-- pay taxes to the goverment
-- pay their employees
-- manage deliveries within promised timelines
-- deliver quality goods and services
-- communicate with customers, answer queries
-And generally try to keep everyone happy.
-
-Large enterprises have been able to invest 100s of millions of dollars in very sophisticated systems such as SAP. Systems like SAP are able to handle requirements from such large enterprises to bring their **multi country**, **multi company**, **multi currency**, global businesses into a single platform. This has helped them achieve consolidation of data / records related to basic process such as accounting, taxation, payroll, reporting and supply chain to name a few.
-
-In contrast to large enterprises, SMEs have been left out of the **1st wave of digital revolution (1995-2015)**. The main reason for being left out is because they dont have the $ power to **license, hire programmers and customize** such software to match their needs. Systems like SAP have been **no-go** for most SMEs. Such systems need a **minimum** CAPEX or OPEX layout of **$100k (Yes, One Hundred Thousand Dollars)** and upwards. Even with cloud offerings (Software as a Service, SAAS) from such vendors, there is no easy Do It Yourself (DIY) people can feel confident about.
-
-So even today, small businesses continue to struggle to keep things organized. They often use a mix of applications and tools such as spreadsheets, accounting softwares, web based CRMs to manage their day to day record keeping. As a consequence, they have to access different systems to understand customers master data, sales, cash flows or profitability. The information exists in silos. The data is hard to combine to get useful insights or alerts. As a consequence, SMEs are **reactive** instead of being **proactive** in their day to day operations. With such a constrained way of working, there is limited scope for **growth**.
-
-ERPNext addresses some of the above fundamental problems of:
-* affordability : It is a Free & Open Source Software, freely available to download, install
-* completeness : All necessary modules are covered [Full List](https://erpnext.org/ "ERPNex.Org Homepage")
-* customizability : Easy to add fields, or to add more features
-* efficiency : Computing requirements are relatively low (cheaper to host and manage)
-* wholesomeness : One system & one database that allows multiple users to record transactions or extract data, simultaneouly.
-
-## What is ERPNext?
-
-ERPNext is a full featured business management solution that helps SMEs to record all the business transactions in one system. Further, SMEs can use it to make informed, fact based, timely decisions & remain ahead of the competition. It serves as the backbone of a business to add strength, transparency and control to your growing enterprise.
-
-Among other things, ERPNext will help you to:
- * Track all invoices and payments.
- * Know what quantity of which product is available in stock.
- * Identify and track your key performance indicators (KPI's).
- * Identify open customer queries.
- * Manage payroll.
- * Assign tasks and follow up on them.
- * Maintain a database of all your customers, suppliers and their contacts.
- * Prepare quotes.
- * Tracking your budgets and spending
- * Determine effective selling price based on the actual raw material, machinery and effort cost.
- * Get reminders on maintenance schedules.
- * Publish your website.
-
-And a lot lot lot more.
-
-## Is ERPNext only for SMEs?
-
-ERPNext could be used by SMEs as well as large enterprises. There is no known limitation or performance issues. So far it has scaled well. We know of serveral retail chains in Africa and a highly regarded equities trading company in India (with 1000+ employees) that uses ERPNext.
-
-Check out a variety of [User Stories](https://erpnext.org/stories) to know more.
-
-
-
-
-
-_Note: Not all of the steps are mandatory. ERPNext allows you to freely skip
-steps if you want to simplify the process._
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/open-source.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/open-source.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5cf6fe52..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/open-source.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-# Open Source
-
-The source code is an Open Source software. It is open for anyone to
-understand, extend or improve. And it is free!
-
-Advantages of an Open Source software are:
-
- 1. You can choose to change your service provider anytime.
- 2. You can host the application anywhere, including your own server to gain complete ownership and privacy of the data.
- 3. You can access a community to support you, incase you need help. You are not dependant on your service provider.
- 4. You can benefit from using a product that is critiqued and used by a wide range of people, who have reported hundreds of issues and suggestions to make this product better, and this will always continue.
-
-
----
-
-### ERPNext Source Code
-
-ERPnext source repository is hosted at GitHub and can be found here
-
-- [https://github.com/frappe/erpnext](https://github.com/frappe/erpnext)
-
-
----
-
-### Alternatives
-
-There are many Open Source ERPs you can consider. Popular ones are:
-
- 1. Odoo
- 2. OpenBravo
- 3. Apache OfBiz
- 4. xTuple
- 5. Compiere (and forks)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 670cae62..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-
-# The Champion
-
-
-
-We have seen dozens of ERP implementations over the past few years and we
-realize that successful implementation is a lot about intangibles and
-attitude.
-
-**ERPs are not required.**
-
-Like exercise.
-
-The human body may seem like it does not require exercise today or even tomorrow,
-but in the long run, if you wish to maintain your body and its health, you
-should get on the treadmill.
-
-In the same way, ERPs improve the health of your organization over a long run
-by keeping it fit and efficient. The more you delay putting things in order,
-the more time you lose, and the closer you get to a major disaster.
-
-So when you start implementing an ERP, keep your sight on the long term
-benefits. Like exercise, its painful in the short run, but will do wonders if
-you stay on course.
-
-* * *
-
-## The Champion
-
-ERP means organization wide change and it does not happen without effort.
-Every change requires a champion and it is the duty of the champion to
-organize and energize the entire team towards implementation. The champion
-needs to be resilient incase something goes wrong .
-
-In many organizations we have seen, the champion is most often the owner or a
-senior manager. Occasionally, the champion is an outsider who is hired for a
-particular purpose.
-
-In either case, you must identify your champion first.
-
-Most likely it's **you!**
-
-Lets Begin!
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/capacity-planning.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/capacity-planning.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cd2410f4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/capacity-planning.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-
-# Capacity Planning based on Work Order
-
-Capacity Planning functionality helps you in tracking production jobs allocated on each Workstation.
-
-
-
-Follow are the steps to use Capacity Planning Feature in your ERPNext account.
-
-1. Operations
-
- To add operations, go to:
-
- `Manufacturing > Bill of Materials > Operations`
-
-2. Workstation
-
- Add each Workstation in your ERPNext account from:
-
- `Manufacturing > Bill of Materials > Workstation`
-
- In the Workstation master, you can define which operations will be performed on it, what are the cost associated with it, and what are the working hours of that Workstation.
-
-3. Bill of Materials (BOM):
-
- In a BOM, with the list of raw material needed, for manufacturing, you can also list operation and workstations through which those raw materials will be processed.
-
-4. Work Order:
-
- On submission of Work Order, Timesheet for Operations. This helps you allocate production jobs on each Workstation, as well as you can update actual time taken for each Operation.
-
-### Error due to Capacity Planning
-
-**Question:** On Submission of Work Order, we are getting following error message.
-
-
-
-**Answer: **Please check if you have updated Working Hours in the Workstation master? If not, then please update it and then try to submit Work Order.
-
-On submission of Work Order, Operations (as added in the BOM) are allocated on the workstation. Each operation should start and end on the same day. If a system is not able to schedule that operation in a day, then system request you to divide that Project, so that system can allocate smaller operations in a day.
-
-If you have update working hours in the Workstation, but still getting this issue, that because one of your operation is taking too long, and cannot be completed in a day. Please divide that operation into smaller operations, so that it can be allocated on Workstation and completed on the same day.
-
-### Avoid Working Hours of Workstation
-
-If you want to ignore above validation and allow scheduling of production job beyond the working hours of the Workstation, enable
-Overtime in the Manufacturing Settings.
-
-
-
-If you want to complete disable Capacity Planning feature, in the Manufacturing Settings, check field "Disable Capacity Planning and Time Tracking".
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/customer-provided-items.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/customer-provided-items.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e65cd7d0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/customer-provided-items.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customer Provided Items
-
-In Contract Manufacturing, in some cases Customer provides specific items as one or few of the BOM components. These items cannot be received using a `Buying Cycle` since that will mean making Customer as a Supplier at the same time and it will go through each doctype in the cycle.
-
-In this feature, Customer Provided Item is received through `Stock Entry` from a `Material Request` with type `Customer provided`.
-
-
-
-Here are the steps on how to setup a `Customer Provided` item.
-
-1. Got to Item Doctype and add a new `Customer Provided` item.
-
- `Stock > Item >`
-
-2. In the `Purchase, Replenishment Details` section, check `Is Customer
- Provided` and set a default `Customer`.
-
- 
-
-How to receive a `Customer Provided` Items?
-
-1. If `Production Plan` is used, `Material Request` for this items can be auto
- created.
-
- 
-
-2. Once a component in a BOM is set as `Customer Provided` and `Material
- Request` is created from `Production Plan`, it will create both `Material Request` with type `Purchase` and `Customer Provided`. From there, a `Stock Entry` with purpose `Material Receipt` can be created.
-
- 
-
-3. A `Material Request` can have multiple `Stock Entry` - Material Receipt. It
- will reflect it in the status.
-
- 
-
-4. Customer will be able to track their `Material Requests` in a Web Portal
- `Material Requests`. The portal is filtered to show only the `Material Request` of the customer.
-
- 
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 91d4a6c4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-nested-bom-structure
-production-planning-subassembly
-valuation-based-on-field-in-bom
-capacity-planning
-open-work-orders
-material_consumption
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/material_consumption.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/material_consumption.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 911e0c4b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/material_consumption.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-#Material consumption
-
-Material Consumption functionality allows you to have multiple consumption `Stock Entry` against a Work Order. To enable this, go to Manufacturing > Manufacturing Settings.
-
-
-
-Once enabled, a `Material Consumption` button will be available in Work Order once started.
-
-
-
-When button is clicked, it will do the following:
-
-1. It will create Stock Entry with purpose `Material Consumption for Manufacture`.
-
-
-
-2. If the "Backflush Raw Materials Based On" in the Manufacturing Settings is set to `BOM`, if will propose to consume all required qty for manufacture.
-3. If the "Backflush Raw Materials Based On" in the Manufacturing Settings is set to `Material Transferred for Manufacture`, if will propose to consume all transferred qty for manufacture.
-4. Once submitted, it will update `Consumed Qty` column in the Work Order.
-
-
-
-5. In succeeding Material Consumption, it will suggest unconsumed qty.
-6. Once "Finish" button is clicked in Work Order, it will take into account consumed qty.
-
-### Validations
-
-* If "Allow Multiple Material Consumption" is not set in Manufacturing Settings but "Material Consumption for Manufacture" is use in Stock Entry.
-
-
-
-* Cannot cancel "Material Consumption for Manufacture" for completed Work Order.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a48dffa0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-
-#Nested BOM Structure
-
-**Question:** Our manufacturing process involves producing sub-assembly items before final product. How should we manage BOM master in this scenario?
-
-**Answer:** You should create BOM for item in the order of their production. BOM for the sub-assembly item should be created first. BOM for the Product Order item should be created last. Let's consider an example to understand this better.
-
-A computer assembler is creating a BOM for PC. They also manufacture Hard Disk and DVD Drive themselve. They should first create BOM for Hard Disk and DVD Drive. After that BOM for the PC should be created.
-
-BOM of PC will have all the raw-material items selected in it. Hard Disk and DVD Drive (sub-assemblies) will also be selected as raw-material items. For the sib-assembly items, respective BOM no. will be fetched as well.
-
-
-
-Following is how the structure of nested BOM will look:
-
-
-
-In this report, users are able to see what items need to be produced, total quantity to be produced and also any produced items before. To further detail, users can proceed to click on the work order e.g; MFG-WO-2018-00005.
-
-With this report, we are able to know what items to be produced, in this report qty to manufacture is 2.
-
-The important information is the warehouses which warehouses to store our in-progress items and the finished manufactured items. This should enable us to track our stocks inventory and translate to efficiency in costing.
-
-We can prepare our manufacturing in mannerly order based on the required items in source warehouse where the items been stored. See figure 3.
-
-Figure 4 Manufacturing operationsCertain items required certain manufacturing processes and steps. The open work orders will be able to tell us the manufacturing steps and their status if done or not yet done. It definitely will help in organizing the jobs in better way.
-
-This report is helping to calculate the operation cost required in the manufacturing. This is to give us certain information required to make the business decision. See below for more details.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/production-planning-subassembly.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/production-planning-subassembly.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a26a3e7a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/production-planning-subassembly.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-#Production Planning & Subassembly
-
-if you need Production Planning Tool to consider raw-materials required for the manufacturing of sub-assembly items selected in the BOM, please check following instructions to achieve the same.
-
-Production Planning Tool has field called "Use Multi-Level BOM", checking which will consider raw-material of sub-assemblies as well in the material planning. If this field is not checked, then it will consider sub-assembly as an item, and won't consider raw-material required for the manufacturing of that sub-assembly.
-
-
-
-`Use Multi-Level BOM` field is also there in the Work Order and Stock Entry. If checked, raw-materials of sub-assembly item will be consumed in the manufacturing process, and not the sub-assembly item itself.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/scrap-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/scrap-management.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 94de33c1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/scrap-management.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-# Production Scrap Management
-
-Scrap means waste that either has no economic value or only the value of its basic material content recoverable through recycling.
-
-Scrap is generally availed at the end of the manufacture process. Also you can find some products that are damaged or that are unusable due to expiry or for some other reason, which needs to be scraped.
-
-In ERPNext, at the end of manufacturing process, scrap items are accounted in the scrap warehouse.s
-
-### Scrap in Bill of Materials
-
-You can update estimated scrap quantity of an item in the BOM, Scrap table. If required, you can reselect a raw-material item as scrap.
-
-
-
-### Scrap in Manufacture Entry
-
-When production is completed, Finish / Manufacture Entry is created against a Production Order. In this entry, scrap item is fetched in the Item table, with only Target Warehouse updated for it. Ensure that Valuation Rate is updated for this item for the accounts posting purposes.
-
-
-
-> Scrap from the BOM will only work if Manufacture Entry is created based on BOM, and not based on Material Transfer. This is configurable from Manufacturing Settings.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0d50ab60..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-#Valuation Based On in BOM
-
-**Question:** What are for various options in `Valuation Based On` in the Bill Of Materials (BOM)?
-
-**Answer:** There are 3 available options in the Valuation Based On field:
-
-
-
-**Valuation Rate:** Item valuation rate is defined based on it's purchase or manufacture value.
-
-For Purchase Item, it is defined based on charges entered in the Purchase Receipt. If you don't have any Purchase Receipt
-made for an item or a Stock Reconciliation, then there won't be any Valuation Rate for that item.
-
-**Price List Rate:** This option allows to pull item rates from [Price List.](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.html)
-
-**Last Purchase Rate:** It will be the last Purchase (Order) Rate of an item.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 71e5e0c9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
-
-# Bill Of Materials
-
-At the heart of the Manufacturing system is the **Bill of Materials** (BOM).
-The **BOM** is a list of all materials (either bought or made) and operations
-that go into a finished product or sub-Item. In ERPNext, the component could
-have its own BOM hence forming a tree of Items with multiple levels.
-
-
-
-
-To make accurate Purchase Requests, you must always maintain correct BOMs.
-To make a new BOM:
-
-> Manufacturing > Bill of Materials > New BOM
-
-
-
-* To add Operations select 'With Operation'. The Operations table shall appear.
-
-
-
- * Select the Item for which you want to make the BOM.
- * Check 'Inspection Required' to make the 'Quality Inspection' mandatory for raw materials and the finished goods.
- * Add the operations that you have to go through to make that particular Item in the “Operations” table. For each operation, you will be asked to enter a Workstation. You must create new Workstations as and when necessary.
- * Workstations are defined only for product costing and Work Order Operations scheduling purposes not inventory.
- * Inventory is tracked in Warehouses not Workstations.
-
-###Costing of a BOM
-
-* The Costing section in BOM gives an approximate cost of producing the Item.
-
-* Add the list of Items you require for each operation, with its quantity. This Item could be a purchased Item or a sub-assembly with its own BOM. If the row Item is a manufactured Item and has multiple BOMs, select the appropriate BOM. You can also define if a part of the Item goes into scrap.
-
-
-
-* This cost can be updated on by using the 'Update Cost' button.
-
-
-
-* User can select the currency in the BOM
-* System calculates the costing based on the price list currency
-
-
-
-### Materials Required(exploded)
-
-This table lists down all the Material required for the Item to be Manufactured.
-It also fetches sub-assemblies along with the quantity.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8947be95..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-# Manufacturing
-
-ERPNext comes batteries included for all requirements of a manufacturing business like Bill of Materials tracking, Production Order planning and execution, procurement and lot more.
-
-
-
-### Bill of Material, Production Order and More
-
-The Manufacturing module in ERPNext helps you to maintain multi-level Bill of Materials (BOMs) for your Items. It helps in product costing, production planning, creating work orders for your manufacturing shop floors and planning inventory by getting your material requirement via BOMs (also called Material Requirements Planning MRP).
-
-
-
-You can also effectively track operations like:
-
-* Production Orders against customer's Sales Order
-* Material Planning
-* Purchasing based on Material Planning an reorder level.
-* Track actual material transfer against a Production Order
-* Despatched manufactured items to the Customers.
-* View reports
-
-### ERPNext Manufacturing Demo
-
-Check the following video to educate yourself on each feature in the manufacturing module.
-
-
-
-### User Manual
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index c21527cc..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-introduction
-workstation
-operation
-bill-of-materials
-work-order
-job-card
-subcontracting
-item-alternative
-tools
-setup
-articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 79f57ffa..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Introduction
-
-
-
-### Types of Production Planning
-
-Broadly there are three types of Production Planning Systems
-
- * __Make-to-Stock:__ In these systems, production is planned based on a forecast and the Items are then sold to distributors or customers. All fast moving consumer goods that are sold in retail shops like soaps, packaged water etc and electronics like phones etc are Made-to-Stock.
- * __Make-to-Order:__ In these systems, manufacturing takes place after a firm order is placed by a customer.
- * __Engineer-to-Order:__ In this case each sale is a separate project and has to be designed and engineered to the requirements of the customer. Common examples of this are any custom business like furniture, machine tools, speciality devices, metal fabrication etc.
-
-Most small and medium sized manufacturing businesses are based on a make-to-
-order or engineer-to-order system and so is ERPNext.
-
-For engineer-to-order systems, the Manufacturing module should be used along
-with the Projects module..
-
-#### Manufacturing and Inventory
-
-You can track work-in-progress by creating work-in-progress Warehouses.
-
-ERPNext will help you track material movement by automatically creating Stock
-Entries from your Work Orders by building from Bill of Materials.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/item-alternative.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/item-alternative.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 48f6d1c9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/item-alternative.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Alternative
-
-Item alternative feature is very useful in manufacturing industries, if the raw material defined in the BOM is not available during the production process then their respective available alternative item used to complete the production process.
-
-To make item alternative for an item, kindly enable the "Allow Alternative Item" in the item.
-
-
-* To make item alternative, goto module Stock > Items and Pricing > Item Alternative
-
-
-The user can enable Two-Way between an item and their alternative item if both can be used as an alternative to each other
-
-
-### Item Alternative for work order
-
-To allow to use alternative items in the manufacturing process user can configure allow an alternative item in the BOM/Work Order
-
-##### Provision to allow alternative item in the bom
-
-
-##### Provision to allow alternative item in the work order
-User can also enable/disable allow alternative item in the work order
-
-
-##### How it works for work order
-
-
-### Item Alternative for subcontract
-In subcontract, the user has to transfer raw materials to the subcontracted supplier to get finished good from them. If the raw material is not available in the stock, with this feature, the user can transfer the alternate item of the subcontracted raw material to the supplier.
-
-##### How it works for subcontract
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/job-card.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/job-card.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f697557e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/job-card.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-# Job Card
-
-A Job Card is created from the Work Order and given to each of the workstation in the manufacturing floor to start the production of an item with a certain quantity in each of the operations defined in the Work Order.
-
-The Job Card extends the functionality of the Work Order in the manufacturing process by adding/defining phase of operations in work orders and assigning each operations into their respective workstation.
-
-Job Card allows each operation's workstation to issue a “Material Request” and “Stock Transfer to Manufacture” for raw material required against a “Job Card” order assigned to them.
-
-Job Card completion will change the production status in Work Order, we can track completion of production progress for each of the operations defined in the work order.
-
-> Manufacturing > Work Order > Create Job Card
-
-### Job Card creation based on BOM
-
-In the Work Order, the Operations and Workstations are fetched from the BOM of an Item. Hence, you should ensure that Routing (master of Operations and Production) is configured in the BOM. Here are the steps for the same.
-
-- Define the Item BOM for production, select “With Operations” on the checklist.
-
-
-
-- Define the production flow by selecting operations in BOM.
-
-
-
-- Select Item required for production, assign each of the Item into Operations.
-
-
-
-> You can select “Transfer Material Against Job Card” to transfer raw material for production based on the Job Card, and not by Work Order.
-
-Define “Operations” cycle/flow involved in the Item
-Select the Item required and assign material to operations for manufacturing.
-
-
-
-You can select “Transfer Material Against Job Card” on the Bill of Material to transfer Material for Production based on Job Card.
-
-### Routing in Work Order
-
-Job Card will be created upon submission of the Work Order based on the Operations defined in the Bill of Material. Each Job Card represents job order for each Workstations on the manufacturing floor.
-
-#### Select Work Order with Item to Manufacture
-
-In the Work Order, define if you want to transfer material against a Job Order or no.
-
-
-
-#### Job Card Creation
-
-On submission of Work Order, Job Cards will be auto-created based on the values in the Routing table.
-
-
-
-### Job Card
-
-Each Job Card created will have Workstation & Operations assigned. Raw material required from each source warehouse will be calculated based on quantity required for production.
-
-Employee assignment and timing detail will also be defined in Job Card.
-
-
-
-#### Material Request against Job Card
-
-A Material Request will be raised from the Job Card as a basis/order to prepare raw-material required for manufacturing process. The Material Request raised will have its reference to the original Job Card number.
-
-
-
-Track the Manufacturing Progress in The Work Order by The Completion of Each Operations defined in Work Order.
-
-Job Card completion allow us to track the manufacturing progress inside the Work Order by looking of the completion of each Operations that are related in the Work Order.
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fe158e8d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Operation
-
-### Operation
-
-Stores a list of all Manufacturing Operations, its description and the Default Workstation for the Operation.
-
-You can also create a Operation by:
-
-> Manufacturing > Documents > Operation > New
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-plan.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-plan.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5f3e32d2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-plan.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-# Production Plan
-
-Production Plan helps user to plan production against multiple sales orders or the material requests. Also, it helps in Material Procurement planning for the raw-material item, based on the quantity of finished product to be manufactured.
-
-To use the Production Plan, go to:
-
-> Manufacturing > Production > Production Plan
-
-
-
-## Planning for Production
-
-#### Production Against Sales Orders
-
-* Select option as Sales Order from the drop down list of get items from. System will show the filters, using that we can pull the sales orders for the production.
-
-
-
-* Click on Get Sales Orders to fetch sales orders based on above filters
-
-
-
-* Click on Get Items for Work Order to fetch the items from the above sales orders.
-
-
- * Include Exploded Items :- To include subassembly items of raw materials in the production.
-
-#### Production Against Material Requests
-
-* Select option as Material Request from the drop down list of get items from. System will show the filters, using that we can pull the material requests for the production.
-
-
-
-* Click on Get Material Request to fetch material requests based on above filters
-
-
-
-* Click on Get Items for Work Order to fetch the items from the above material requests.
-
-
-
-## Planning for Material Requests
-* Click on get raw materials for production button to fetch raw materials required in the production.
-
-
-
- * Include Non Stock Items :- To add non stock items in the material request planning.
- * Include Subcontracted Items :- To add subcontracted item's raw materials if include exploded items is disabled
- * Ignore Existing Ordered Quantity :- If enabled then system will not check the projected quantity to make material request.
-
-# Options To Make Work Order and Material Request
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5430d779..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-Global settings for manufacturing Processes
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 68a2ad8c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-manufacturing-settings
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 929b04ba..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-
-#Manufacturing Settings
-
-Manufacturing Settings can be found at:
-
-`Manufacturing > Setup > Manufacturing Settings`
-
-
-
-####Disable Capacity Planning and Time Tracking
-
-As per Capacity Planning feature, when Work Order is created for an item, for each Operation, Time Log is created. Based on actual Operation Time, Time Logs is updated. This also provides total Operations Cost against Work Order.
-
-If you don't track actual operations time, and want to disable creation of Time Log based on Operations, you should check "Disable Capacity Planning and Time Tracking" in the Manufacturing Settings.
-
-####Allow Overtime
-
-In the Workstation master, actual working hours are defined (say 101m to 6pm). As per the Capacity Planning, Time Logs are created against Workstation, for tracking actual operations hour. It also considers working hours of a Workstation when scheduling job (via Time Log).
-
-
-
-As per the standard validation, if Operation cannot be completed within working hours of Workstation, then user is asked to divide an Operation into multiple and smaller Operations. However, if `Allow Overtime` field is checked, while creating Time Logs for Operation, working hours of Workstation will not be validated. In this case, Time Logs for Operation will be created beyond working hours of Workstation as well.
-
-####Allow Production on Holidays
-
-Holiday of a company can be recorded in the [Holiday List](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/) master. While scheduling production job on workstation, system doesn't consider a day listed in the Holiday list. If you want production job to be scheduled on holidays as well, `Allow Production on Holidays` field should be checked.
-
-
-
-####Over Production Allowance Percentage
-
-While making Work Orders against a Sales Order, the system will only allow production item quantity to be lesser than or equal to the quantity in the Sales Order. In case you wish to allow Work Orders to be raised with greater quantity, you can mention the Over Production Allowance Percentage here.
-
-####Back-flush Raw Materials Based On
-
-When creating Manufacture Entry, raw-material items are back-flush based on BOM of production item. If you want raw-material items to be back-flushed based on Material Transfer entry made against that Work Order instead, then you should set Back-flush Raw Materials Based On "Material Transferred for Manufacture".
-
-
-
-####Capacity Planning For (Days)
-
-Define no. of days for which system will do production job allocation in advance.
-
-####Time Between Operations (in mins)
-
-Time gap between two production operations.
-
-####Default Work In Progress Warehouse
-
-This Warehouse will be auto-updated in the Work In Progress Warehouse field of Work Order.
-
-####Default Finished Goods Warehouse
-
-This Warehouse will be auto-updated in the Work In Progress Warehouse field of Work Order.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1a3d0fce..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-
-# Subcontracting
-
-Subcontracting is a type of job contract that seeks to outsource certain types
-of work to other companies. It allows work on more than one phase of the
-project to be done at once, often leading to a quicker completion.
-Subcontracting is practiced by various industries. For example, manufacturers
-making a number of products from complex components subcontract certain
-components and package them at their facilities.
-
-If your business involves outsourcing certain processes to a third party
-Supplier, where you buy the raw material from, you can track this by using the
-sub-contracting feature of ERPNext.
-
-### Setup Sub-Contracting:
-
- 1. Create separate Items for the unprocessed and the processed product. For example if you supply unpainted X to your Supplier and the Supplier returns you X, you can create two Items: “X-unpainted” and “X”.
- 2. Create a Warehouse for your Supplier so that you can keep track of Items supplied. (you may supply a months worth of Items in one go).
- 3. For the processed Item, in the Item master, set “Is Sub Contracted Item” to “Yes”.
-
-
-
-
-__Step 1:__ Make a Bill of Materials for the processed Item, with the unprocessed
-Items as sub-items. For example, If you are manufacturing a pen, the processed
-pen will be named under Bill of Materials(BOM), whereas, the refill, knob, and
-other items which go into the making of pen, will be categorized as sub-items.
-
-
-
-__Step 2:__ Make a Purchase Order for the processed Item. When you “Save”, in the “Raw Materials Supplied”, all your un-processed Items will be updated based on your Bill of Materials. You can also select the warehouse from which the material would be reserved for sub contracting.
-
-
-
-Once the PO is submitted, you can view the reserved quantity of the item from the item dashboard as well.
-
-
-
-__Step 3:__ Make a Stock Entry to deliver the raw material Items to your Supplier.
-
-
-
-__Step 4:__ Receive the Items from your Supplier via Purchase Receipt. Make sure to check the “Consumed Quantity” in the “Raw Materials” table so that the
-correct stock is maintained at the Supplier’s end.
-
-
-
-> Note 1: Make sure that the “Rate” of processed Item is the processing rate
-(excluding the raw material rate).
-
-> Note 2: ERPNext will automatically add the raw material rate for your
-valuation purpose when you receive the finished Item in your stock.
-
-> Note 3: ERPNext will automatically default the Reserve Warehouse in the PO
-from the BOM. If not found in the BOM, it would default it from the default
-warehouse setup in the Item.
-
-### Video Help
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-update-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-update-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dd8b9fe1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-update-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-
-# BOM Update Tool
-
-From BOM Update Tool, you can replace a sub-assembly BOM and update costs of all BOMs.
-
-### Replace BOM
-Using this utility, you can replace an existing BOM of sub-assembly item, with a new one. The system will update the new BOM in all the parent BOMs where it was used.
-
-To use the BOM Update Tool, go to:
-
-> Manufacturing > Tools > BOM Update Tool
-
-Let's consider a scenario to understand this better.
-
-Suppose a company manufactures computers, Bill of Material of of the computer will look like this:
-
-1. Monitor
-1. Key Board
-1. Mouse
-1. CPU
-
-Out of all the items above, CPU is asembled separately. Hence separate BOM will be created for the CPU. Following are the items from the BOM of CPU.
-
-1. 250 GB Hard Disk
-1. Mother Board
-1. Processor
-1. SMTP
-1. DVD player
-
-If we have more items to be added , or existing items to be edited in the BOM of CPU, then we should create new BOM for it.
-
-1. _350 GB Hard Disk_
-1. Mother Board
-1. Processor
-1. SMTP
-1. DVD player
-
-To update new BOM in all the parent BOMs, where CPU is selected as raw-material, you can use Replace utility.
-
-
-
-In this tool, you should select Current BOM, and New BOM. On clicking Replace button, current BOM of CPU will be replaced with New BOM in the BOM of finished Item (Computer).
-
-**Will BOM Replace Tool work for replacing finsihed item in BOM?**
-
-No. You should Cancel and Amend current BOM, or create a new BOM for finished item.
-
-### Update BOM Cost
-Using the button **Update latest price in all BOMs**, you can update cost of all Bill of Materials, based on latest purchase price / price list rate / valuation rate of raw materials.
-
-On clicking of this buttom, system will create a background process to update all the BOM's cost. It is processed via background jobs because this process can take a few minutes (depending on the number of BOMs) to update all the BOMs.
-
-This functionality can also be executed automatically on daily basis. For that, you need to enable "Update BOM Cost Automatically" from Manufacturing Settings.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9919d806..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tools
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index bdd357cd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-bom-update-tool
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/work-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/work-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 56742c20..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/work-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,126 +0,0 @@
-
-# Work Order
-
-
-A Work Order is a document that is given to
-the manufacturing shop floor by the Production Planner as a signal to produce
-a certain quantity of a certain Item. The Work Order also helps to generate
-the material requirements (Stock Entry) for the Item to be produced from its
-**Bill of Materials**.
-
-The **Work Order** is generated from the **Production Planning
-Tool** based on Sales Orders. You can also create a direct Work Order
-by:
-
-> Manufacturing > Documents > Work Order > New
-
-
-
-
-
-* If you wish to reassign the workstation for a particular opeeration in the Work Order, you can do so before submitting the Work Order.
-
-
-
-* Select the respective operation, and change its workstation.
-* You can also change the Operating Time for that operation
-
-### Capacity Planning in Work Order
-
-* When a Work Order is submitted, based on the Planned Start Date and the availability of the workstations, system schedules all operations for the Work Order (if Work Order has operations specified).
-* Drafts of Time Logs are also created based on the scheduled operations.
-
-### Transfering Materials for Manufacturing
-
-* Once you have submitted your Work Order, you need to Transfer the Raw Materials to initiate the Manufacturing Process.
-* This will create a Stock Entry with all the Items required to complete this Work Order to be added to the WIP Warehouse. (this will add sub-Items with BOM as one Item or explode their children based on your setting above).
-
-* Click on 'Start'.
-
-
-
-* Mention the quantity of materials to be transfered.
-
-
-
-* Submit the Stock Entry
-
-
-
-* Material Transfered for Manufacturing will be updated in the Work Order based on the Stock Entry.
-
-
-
-#### Material Transfer through Stock Entry
-Use cases for this option are:
-* If material transfer is done in bulk and/or is not required to be tracked against a particular Work Order
-* If the responsibility for Material Transfer and Production Entry lies with two separate users
-
-If this is the case, you can select the Skip Material Transfer check box, which will allow you to make the “Manufacture” Stock Entry directly by clicking on the ‘Finish’ button.
-
-### Making Time Logs
-
-* Progress in the Work Order can be tracked using [Timesheet](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-work-order.html)
-* Timesheet's time slots are created against Work Order Operations.
-* Drafts of Timesheet are created based on the scheduled operations when an Work Order is Submitted.
-* To create more Timesheets against an operation click 'Make Timesheet' button.
-
-
-
-###Updating Finished Goods
-
-* Once you are done with the Work Order you need to update the Finished Goods.
-* This will create a Stock Entry that will deduct all the sub-Items from the WIP Warehouse and add them to the Finished Goods Warehouse.
-* Click on 'Finish'.
-
-
-
-* Mention the quantity of materials to be transfered.
-
-
-
- > Tip : You can also partially complete a Work Order by updating the Finished Goods stock creating a Stock Entry.
-
-### Stopping a Work Order
-
-* When you stop a Work Order its status is changed to Stop indicating that all production process against that Work Order is to be ceased.
-* To stop the Work Order click on the 'Stop' Button
-
- 1. On Submitting the Work Order, the system will reserve a slot for each of the Work Order Operations serially after the planned start date based on the workstation availability. The Workstation availability depends on the Workstation timings, holiday list and if some other Work Order Operation was scheduled in that slot. You can mention the number of days for the system to try scheduling the operations in the Manufacturing Settings. This is set to 30 Days by default. If the operation requires time exceeding the available slot, system shall ask you to break the operations. Once the scheduling is done system shall create Time Logs and save them. You can Modify them and submit them later.
- 2. You can also create additional time logs against an Operation. For doing so select the respective operation and click on 'Make Time Log'
- 3. Transfer Raw Material: This will create a Stock Entry with all the Items required to complete this Work Order to be added to the WIP Warehouse. (this will add sub-Items with BOM as one Item or explode their children based on your setting above).
- 4. Update Finished Goods: This will create a Stock Entry that will deduct all the sub-Items from the WIP Warehouse and add them to the Finished Goods Warehouse.
- 5. To check all Time Logs made against the Work Order click on 'Show Time Logs'
-
-
-
-* You can also re-start a stopped Work Order.
-
-> Note : In order to make a Work Order against an Item you must specify 'Yes' to "Allow Work Order" on the Item form.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6053b72f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-# Workstation
-
-### Workstation
-
-Workstation stores information regarding the place where the workstation operations is carried out.
-Data regarding the operation cost of the place can be stored here.
-We can also specify the workstation operation timings and a Holiday List.
-
-You can also create a Workstation by:
-
-> Manufacturing > Documents > Workstation > New
-
-
-
-In workstation specify the workstation working hours under the 'working hour' section.
-You can also specify the working hours based on shifts.
-While scheduling Work Order, system will check for the availability of the workstation based on the working hours specified.
-
-> Note : You can enable overtime for your workstation in [Manufacturing Settings](/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.html)
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/chapter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/chapter.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 19dfd269..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/chapter.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-#Chapter
-
-The Chapter doctype allows you to record the Chapter details.
-
-Chapter Head or System User can create Chapter.
-
-To Create Chapter:
-
-> Non Profit > Chapter > New
-
-
-
-System User or Chapter Head can add chapter Member directly from the desk or
-User can join directly by visiting chapter page on website
-
-to join chapter online
-
-> My Account on website > Chapter from sidebar > Select Available chapter and click on join chapter button
-
-
-
-
-
-
-To leave chapter click on leave chapter button
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e7971818..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Chapter
-
-This section contains Chapter related documents.
-
-Chapter doctype is for people to organize or join offline group meetings in various cities around the world. user/members can find and join groups with a common interest.
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 9eb7bdd7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-chapter
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0b9d4740..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-#Donor
-
-The Donor doctype allows you to record the Donor details.
-
-Donor are simply contacts in your ERPNext database with one or more Donation. The contact may be an individual, a household, an organisation, or some other contact sub-type, but it is always a contact to which a donation is applied.
-
-To create new Donor go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Donor > New
-
-
-
-**Email:** Email field is the id of Member doctype.
-
-**Donor Type:** DonorType is link field to Donor Type Doctype. Member can select Available Doctype.
-
-**Address and Contact Section:** This Section linked to address and contact doctypes.
-
-**Accounting Section:** This section allowed to set member accounting details such as Account Receivable.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor_type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor_type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0fa89d31..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor_type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-#Donor Type
-
-The Donor Type doctype allows you to Create different Donor Profile for the Donor.
-
-Donor Types are a basic building block for Donor and contribution management. Typically an organization will set up a donor type for each of the different donation that they offer. For example, an organisation may define three donation types for 'regular', 'Organization', and 'honorary' donor.
-
-In this chapter we will cover the most common set-up for donor types.
-
-To create new donor Type go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Donor Type > New
-
-
-
-**Donor Type:** The Donor Type is displayed throughout the system, on both public and backend pages so spend some time thinking about a donor type name that is appropriate to both audiences. It can be changed at a later date
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cfa50df4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Donor
-
-This section contains Donors and Donors Contribution related documents.
-
-A donor in general is a person, organization or government who donates something voluntarily. The term is usually used to represent a form of pure altruism but sometimes used when the payment for a service is recognized by all parties as representing less than the value of the donation and that the motivation is altruistic. In business law, a donor is someone who is giving the gift (law), and a donee the person receiving the gift.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 7f36f92b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-donor_type
-donor
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/grant_application.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/grant_application.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4bb9462a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/grant_application.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-
-#Grant Application
-
-The Grant Application doctype allows you to record the Grant Applicants details.
-
-To Generate Online Grant Application go to:
-
-> My Account on website > Grant Application from sidebar > Apply for new Grant Application.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-To Generate Grant Application go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Grant Application > New.
-
-
-
-
-
-**Email:** Email is a mandatory field.
-
-**Organization:** Organization is data field contain organizaion name set as name field in erpnext.
-
-
-**Address and Contact Section:** This Section linked to address and contact doctypes.
-
-**Grant Application Details Section:** This section contains information about grant description.
-
-**Amount:** Amount field describe requested amount by an applicant.
-
-**Route:** Route field leave blank it will automatically create route path grant-application/organization_name
-
-**Assessment Result Section:** In This section when status field selected as received, send Grant Review Email button appear on the top right corner which sends grant URL to Assessment Manager.
-
-After reviewing grant. Grant Assessment Manager scale application at 0 - 9 point and left a note about a grant.
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index adb41a38..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Grant Application
-
-Grant Application is designed to be used by organisations that distribute funds to others, for example grant seeker, etc.
-
-Grants are non-repayable funds or products disbursed or gifted by one party (grantmakers), often a government department, corporation, foundation or trust, to a recipient, often (but not always) a nonprofit entity, educational institution, business or an individual. In order to receive a grant, some form of "Grant Writing" often referred to as either a proposal or an application is required.
-
-Most grants are made to fund a specific project and require some level of compliance and reporting.
-
-The grant writing process involves an applicant submitting a proposal (or submission) to a potential funder, either on the applicant's own initiative or in response to a Request for Proposal from the funder. Other grants can be given to individuals, such as victims of natural disasters or individuals who seek to open a small business. Sometimes grant makers require grant seekers to have some form of tax-exempt status, be a registered nonprofit organization or a local government.
-
-Grant Application is grant writing process which can be review by assessment manager and then decided by the organization to disburse grant amount to the applicant or not.
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 5d997e82..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-grant_application
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 90712047..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Membership
-
-This section contains Member and Membership related documents.
-
-How to set up one or more membership types that you can use to manage your organization's members. It also explains the concept of membership statuses and how your organisation can use them to define a membership life-cycle.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index f1d9bf36..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-membership_type
-member
-membership
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/member.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/member.md
deleted file mode 100755
index df36fe94..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/member.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-#Member
-
-The Member doctype allows you to record the Member details for a **Membership**.
-
-Members are simply contacts in your ERPNext database with one or more memberships. The contact may be an individual, a household, an organisation, or some other contact sub-type, but it is always a contact to which a membership is applied.
-
-To create new Member go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Member > New
-
-
-
-**Email:** Email field is the id of Member doctype.
-
-**Membership Type:** Membership Type is link field to Membership Type Doctype. Member can select Available Doctype.
-
-**Membership Expiry Date:** This Field fetch membership end date details from membership doctype.
-
-**Address and Contact Section:** This Section linked to address and contact doctypes.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7fa94a64..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-#Membership
-
-The Membership doctype allows you to record membership details for the **Member**.
-
-Membership is a term which refers to any organization that allows people to subscribe, and often requires them to pay a membership fee or "subscription".
-
-
-To create new Membership go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Membership > New
-
-
-
-**Member:** Member is a link field fetch member details from Member doctype.
-
-**Membership Status:** Membership Status is a select field which contains New, Current, Expired, Pending and Cancelled.
-
-**Membership Date Details section:** This section contain information related to Membership start date, end date and member since date.
-
-**Payment Details:** This section contains payment related details. If the person paid for membership checkbox paid is marked as checked else unmarked.
-Amount fetch based on membership type.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership_type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership_type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d5c80be8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership_type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-#Membership Type
-
-Membership Types are a basic building block for membership management. Typically an organization will set up a membership type for each of the different memberships that they offer. For the simplest membership structures, one membership type may be enough. For more complex membership structures, more membership types may be required. For example, an organisation may define three membership types for 'regular', 'student', and 'honorary' members. Or an organization may choose to use membership types as subcriptions to their different publications, either free or paying ones.
-
-In this chapter we will cover the most common set-up for membership types.
-
-To create new Membership Type go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Membership Type > New
-
-
-
-
-**Membership Type:** The Membership Type is displayed throughout the system, on both public and backend pages so spend some time thinking about a membership type name that is appropriate to both audiences. It can be changed at a later date
-
-**Amount:** If your memberships are free you should enter 0 (zero) in this field. Otherwise you should enter the amount that must be paid for this membership type.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 943b9d65..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Volunteer
-
-This section contains Volunteer and Volunteer Type related documents.
-
-Volunteer is the practice of people working on behalf of others without being motivated by financial or material gain.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 3d93d069..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-volunteer_type
-volunteer
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c4dd81dd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-#Volunteer
-
-The Volunteer doctype allows you to record the Volunter details.
-
-Volunteer are simply contacts in your ERPNext database with one or more volunteering program. The contact may be an individual, a household, an organisation, or some other contact sub-type
-
-To create new Volunteer go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Volunteer > New
-
-
-
-**Email:** Email field is the id of Member doctype.
-
-**Volunteer Type:** Volunteer Type is link field to Volunteer Type Doctype. Volunteer can select available Doctype.
-
-**Address and Contact Section:** This Section linked to address and contact doctypes.
-
-**Volunteer Availability Section:** This section is child table which contains select field about volunteer availability. a volunteer can select availability such as weekly, morning etc
-
-**Volunteer Skills Section:** This section is child table which contains data field about the volunteer skills. a volunteer can add multiple skill for eg. Desk Job,
-Hospitality, Food management, computer operator etc.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer_type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer_type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 22a56dbf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer_type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-#Volunteer Type
-
-Volunteer Types are a basic building block for Volunteering management. Typically an organization will set up a volunteer type for each of the different donation that they offer. For example, an organisation may define three volunteer types for 'regular', 'Student', and 'Member' donor.
-
-In this chapter we will cover the most common set-up for volunteer types.
-
-To create new volunteer Type go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Volunteer Type > New
-
-
-
-
-**Volunteer Type:** The Volunteer Type is displayed throughout the system, on both public and backend pages so spend some time thinking about a membership type name that is appropriate to both audiences. It can be changed at a later date
-
-**Amount:** If your Volunteering are free you should enter 0 (zero) in this field. Otherwise you should enter the amount that must be paid to the volunteer.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2f4b9543..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-# ERPNext for Non-Profit Organizations
-
-People who change the world need the tools to do it! The Non Profit Modules of ERPNext is designed for a non-profit organization, so that they can deliver well on their noble cause of a better world.
-
-
-
-### Manager Members, Donors, Voluteers and More
-
-This is a centralized system, which maintains and updates all the activities related to an Organization.
-
-This will track all activity related to Memberships, Chapters, Volunteer Management, Donor Management, Event and Grant etc.
-
-
-
-### Demonstration of ERPNext Non-Profit Domain
-
-Check the following video to educate yourself on each feature in the non-profit module.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 87aeace1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Activity Type
-
-Activity Type makes a list of the different types of activities against which a Time Log can be made.
-
-
-
-By default the following Activity Types are created.
-
-* Planning
-* Research
-* Proposal Writing
-* Execution
-* Communication
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 56c193c2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-project-costing
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d4d741f0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-# Project Costing
-
-Each project has multiple task associated with it. To track actual costing of a Project, primarily in terms of services, user has to create Time Log based on actual time spent on Project-Task. Following the steps on how you can track actual service cost against Project.
-
-#### Activity Type
-
-Activity Type is a master of service offered by your personnel. You can add new Activity type from:
-
-`Project > Activity Type > New`
-
-#### Activity Cost
-
-Activity Cost is a master where you can track billing and costing rate for each Employee, and for each Activity Type.
-
-
-
-#### Time Log
-
-Based on Actual Time spent on the Project-Task, Employee will create a time log.
-
-
-
-On selection of Activity Type in the Time Log, Billing and Costing Rate will fetched for that Employee from respective Activity Cost master.
-
-
-
-Multiplying these rates with total no. of Hours in the Time Log gives Costing Amount and Billing Amount for the specific Time Log.
-
-#### Costing in Project and Task
-
-Based on total Time Logs created for a specific Task, its costing will be updated in the respective Task master.
-
-
-
-Same way, Project master will have cost updated based on Time Log created against that Projects, and tasks associated with that Project.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f71cc9ec..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-
-# Projects
-
-For a services business, which doesn't have a tangible product to showcase their value, needs to get many things right to stay afloat and grow in the industry. ERPNext helps services company effectively manage business aspects like Projects Management, Customer Support, Sales and Purchase Management to list a few.
-
-
-
-### Project Management in ERPNext
-
-ERPNext helps you manage your Projects by breaking them into Tasks and
-allocating them to different people.
-
-
-
-Projects can be used to manage internal projects, manufacturing jobs or
-service jobs. For service jobs, Time Sheets can also be created that can be used to bill Customers if billing is done on a Time & Money basis.
-
-### Sales, Purchase Management, Customer Support
-
-Purchasing and selling can also be tracked against Projects and this can help the company keep tabs on its budget, delivery and profitability for a Project.
-
-
-
-### Demo on ERPNext for the Service Business
-
-Check the following video to educate yourself on the ERPNext features for services business.
-
-
-
-### Add Customer and User in Project
-
-In the Project master, check Customer Details section. Select a Customer and Sales Order associated with this Project.
-
-
-
-### Portal View of Project
-
-When a Customer logins from the Portal, he/she will be able to view all the Task for that Project. Also, the customer will be able to update the status of the Tasks or comment when needed.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-expense-claims.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-expense-claims.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 65741c82..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-expense-claims.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Project and Managing Expenses
-
-The Employees working on the Project incur various expenses, sometimes from their own pocket. In ERPNext, then can claim such expenses using [Expense Claim](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html)
-
-In this Expense Claim, they can also select a Project for which that expense was incurred.
-
-Based on the Expense Claims made for a particular project, total Expense Claim Amount is updated in the Project master, under project costing section.
-
-* You can create an Expense Claims directly and link it to the Project.
-
-
-
-* Total amount of Expense Claims booked against a project is shown under 'Total Expense Claim' in the Project Costing Section
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-profitability.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-profitability.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0fdf3f62..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-profitability.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-
-# Project Profitability
-
-Project and related activities are generally active for longer time periods. While developments happen on the Project, there are various income and expense incurred against it. Hence, it becomes important to track the Profitability of a Project and ensure that you don't overspend.
-
-### Project in Sales Transactions
-
-You can link a Project in all the sales transactions like Sales Order, Delivery Note, Sales Invoice, and Payment. Linking Project with the sales transactions will help you in tracking income received against that Project.
-
-In sales transactions, Project field is generally available in the More Information section.
-
-
-
-
-#### Project in Purchase Transactions
-
-The project can also be linked to the purchase transactions like Purchase Order, Purchase Receipt, and Purchase Invoice.
-
-In the purchase transactions, Project's link field is available in the Item table. This is because you could be procuring material for multiple Projects from the same purchase entry.
-
-
-
-### Budgeting against Project
-
-You can create Budget for a Project as well. The expense limit defined in the Budget master will be validated in the expense transactions.
-
-
-
-### Project Profitability
-
-Based on the all the income and expense entries created for the Project, you can get its profitability.
-
-> Accounts > Profitability Analysis
-
-Filter report based on Project to check Projectwise Profitability.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 283f4704..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
-
-# Project
-
-The project is an individual or collaborative enterprise, possibly involving research or design, that is carefully planned, usually by a project team, to achieve a particular aim
-
-In ERPNext, Project management in is Task driven. You can a create Project and divide into multiple and assignable Tasks.
-
-
-
-### Managing Tasks
-
-The project is generally has a broader scope, and hence not assignable to an individual. Hence, you can divide the Project into multiple Tasks. These can be assigned to an individual and tracked better.
-
-These Tasks can be created from a Project itself or a [Task](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.html) can be created separately as well.
-
-
-
-### Task Completion
-
-You can also track % Completion of a Project using different methods.
-
- 1. Task Completion
- 2. Task Progress
- 3. Task Weight
-
-
-
-Some examples of how the % Completion is calculated based on Tasks.
-
-
-
-
-
-### Project Costing
-
-The Project Costing section helps you track the time, expenses and purchases incurred against the project.
-
-
-
-* The Total Cost is composed of the costing amount from timesheets, the total cost of expense claims and the total cost of purchase invoices created against this project.
-
-* The Gross Margin is the difference between Total Billed Amount and the Total Cost Amount for this project.
-
-### Gantt Chart
-
-ERPNext gives you an illustrated view of tasks scheduled for that project in Gantt Chart View.
-
-* To view Gantt chart against a project, go to the Task list and Apply filter on the Project.
-
-
-
-### Project Help Video
-
-This is a tutorial video on how to manage Project and associate Tasks in ERPNext.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fc37305f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tasks
-
-Project is divided into Tasks.
-In ERPNext, you can also create a Task independently.
-
-
-
-### Status of the Task
-
-A Task can have one of the following statuses - Open, Working, Pending Review, Closed, or Cancelled.
-
-
-
-* By default each new Task created has the status set to 'Open'.
-
-* If a Time Log is made against a task, its status will be set to 'Working'.
-
-### Dependent Task
-
-You can specify a list of dependent tasks under the 'Depends On' section.
-
-
-
-* You cannot close the parent task until all dependent tasks are closed.
-
-* If the dependent tasks are delayed and overlap with the expected Start Date of the Parent task, the system will reschedule the parent task.
-
-### Managing Time
-
-ERPNext uses [Time Log](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log.html) to track the progress of a Task.
-You can create multiple Time Logs against each task.
-The Actual Start and End Time along with the costing is updated based on the Time Log.
-
-* To view Time Log made against a Task click on 'Time Logs'
-
-
-
-
-
-* You can also create a Time Log directly and link it to the Task.
-
-
-
-### Managing Expenses
-
-You can book [Expense Claim](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html) against a task.
-The system shall update the total amount from expense claims in the costing section.
-
-* To view Expense Claims made against a Task click on 'Expense Claims'
-
-
-
-* You can also create a Expense Claims directly and link it to the Task.
-
-
-
-* Total amount of Expense Claims booked against a task is shown under 'Total Expense Claim' in the Task Costing Section
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 443d7682..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-# Timesheet
-
-Timesheet can be used to track actual hours worked. It can be used for multiple purposes like:
-
-* Billable work to Customers
-* Work Order Operations
-* Creating Salary Slip based on hours worked.
-* Tasks
-* Project
-* Internal References
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 287d5263..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-salary-slip-from-timesheet
-sales-invoice-from-timesheet
-timesheet-against-work-order
-timer-in-timesheet
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 53b0d8ba..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-
-#Salary Slip from Timesheet
-
-If salary / wages for your employees are calculated based on number of hours worked, you can use Timesheet to track actual hours worked, and for creating Salary Slip.
-
-####Employee creates Timesheet
-
-To track actual hours employee has worked for, create Timesheet for each Employee. We suggest you to create Timesheet based on a payment period. For example, if you are paying employee on a weekly basis, create one Timesheet for an Employee for one week. However, you can create multiple Timesheets, and create one Salary Slip for the multiple Timesheets.
-
-
-
-####Salary Structure for the Employee
-
-In the Salary Structure of the Employee, check field "Salary Slip Based on Timesheet". On checking this field, you see fields Salary Component and Hour Rate. Amount for that Salary Component (say Basic) will be calculated based on:
-
-
-
-In the Salary Slip, Timesheet ID will be updated. You can select more Timesheet to be paid via this Salary Slip. Based on the Timesheets selected, Total Working Hours will be calculated.
-
-
-
-Hour Rate will be fetched from the Salary Structure of an Employee. Based on Total Working Hours and Hour Rate, Amount will be calculated for the Salary Component based on actual hours worked.
- -#### Save and Submit Salary Slip - -On Submission of Salary Slip, Timesheet's status will be updated to "Payslip". - -
-
-
-
-#### Step 3:Activity Type
-
-Employee will have to select an Activity Type (like planning, site visit, repairing etc. ). Costing and Billing Rate for each Activity can be different for each Employee. These cost can be tracked in the Activity Cost. On selection of Activity Type, Activity Cost is fetched from that Employee. Based on total Activity Cost and total no. of hours, Total Billing Amount (to the Customer) is calculated.
-
-To learn more on how to setup Activity Type and Activity Cost, click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing).
-
-
-
-#### Step 4: Enter Actual Time
-
-In the Timesheet Details table, enter actual hours an Employee has worked for. One Timesheet can be used for multiple days as well.
-
-To be able to create Sales Invoice from the Time Sheet, ensure 'Is Billable' field is checked.
-
-
-
-Based on the actual hours worked and Activity Cost of an Employee, Total Billing Amount will be calculated for Timesheet.
-
-#### Step 5: Save and Submit
-
-After submitting Timesheet, you will find buttons to create Sales Invoice and Salary Slip against this Timesheet.
-
-
-
-###Create Sales Invoice from Timesheet
-
-#### Submitted Timesheet
-
-In the Timesheet, if "Is Billable" is checked, you will find option to create Sales Invoice against it.
-
-
-
-
-
-####Sales Invoice
-
-Sales Invoice has dedicated table for the Timesheet table where Timesheet details will be updated. You can select more Timesheets in this table.
-
-
-
-
-####Select Customer and Item
-
-Select Customer to be billed. Select an Item, and enter rate as the billing amount.
-
-####Save
-
-After you enter all required details in the Sales Invoice, Save and Submit it.
-
-On submitting Sales Invoice, status of the Timesheets linked to the Sales Invoice will be updated as Billed.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timer-in-timesheet.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timer-in-timesheet.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1af8930b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timer-in-timesheet.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-
-# Timer in Timesheet
-
-Timesheets can be tracked against Project and Tasks along with a Timer.
-
-
-
-#### Steps to start a Timer:
-
-- On clicking, **Start Timer**, a dialog pops up and starts the timer for already present activity for which checkbox `completed` is unchecked.
-
-
-
-- If no activities are present, fill up the activity details, i.e. activity type, expected hours or project in the dialog itself, on clicking **Start**, a new row is added into the Timesheet Details child table and timer begins.
-
-- On clicking, **Complete**, the `hours` and `to_time` fields are updated for that particular activity.
-
-
-
-- At any point of time, if the dialog is closed without completing the activity, on opening the dialog again, the timer resumes by calculating how much time has elapsed since `from_time` of the activity.
-
-- If any activities are already present in the Timesheet with completed unchecked, clicking on **Resume Timer** fetches the activity and starts its timer.
-
-- If the time exceeds the `expected_hours`, an alert box appears.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e723b174..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-
-#Timesheet against Project and Task
-
-Timesheets can be tracked against Project and Tasks so that you can get reports on how much time was spent on each Task or Project.
-
-If standard working hours are set up in the Company master and the user enters from time and to time, the system would
-automatically calculate the number of hours. Eg: standard working hours are set up as 8 at the company level and start
-time and end time are 4 days apart, the calculated hours would be 32. If the standard working hours are not set up, then
-the system would calculate the hours as 96 hours in this case.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-####Billable Timesheet
-
-To bill Customer based on Timesheet, check "Is Billable" in the Timesheet created against Project and Task. To learn more about billing Customer from Timesheet, click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.html).
-
-User can also make invoice against timesheet by selecting the project on the invoice. System will fetch the records from the timesheet based on selected project, for mode detail check below video
-
-
-####Project Costing
-
-When creating Timesheet, Employee will have to select an Activity Type. For each Activity Type, you can create an Activity Cost master. In the Activity Cost, Billing Rate and Costing rate is defined for each Employee.
-
-In the Timesheet, costing will be done based on Activity Cost multiplied with number of hours. Based the Timesheet Cost, total costing will be doen for the Task and Project as well.
-
-To learn about setup of Activity Type and Activity Cost, click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-work-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-work-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f357f77a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-work-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-#Timesheet based on Work Order
-
-Creating Timesheet for Work Order helps in capacity planning for the Workstations. Also it helps in tracking actual time consumed by the Workstation for completing specific operation.
-
-When a Work Order is submitted, based on the Planned Start Date and the availability of the Workstations, system schedules all operations by creating Timesheet.
-
-
-
-Let's assume we are manufacturing a mobile phone. As per the Bill of Material, time required for the assembly of components could be one hour. However the actual time taken for it's completion could be more than planned. The actual time tracking provides actual operation cost, hence helps in determining accurate valuation of the manufacturing item.
-
-####Work Order
-
-As per the Bill of Materials of manufacturing item, following are the Operations and Workstation through which raw-material items are processed.
-
-
-
-On submission of Work Order, Timesheet will be created automatically.
-
-
-
-####Time Sheet created from Work Order
-
-In the Timesheet, unique row will be added for each Operation - Workstation. This allows operator/supervisor at the workstation to enter actual From Time and To Time taken for each Operation.
-
-
-
-After enter From Time and To Time for all the Operations, Total Hours will be calculated.
-
-
-
-With updating actual time, you can also enter "Completed Qty". If all the items are not processed in the same Timesheet, you can create another Timesheet from the Work Order.
-
-
-
-####Save and Submit Timesheet
-
-On the submission of Timesheet, Total Hours is calculated. Also, in the Work Order, for each Operation, actual Start and End Time is updated.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/customer_feedback.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/customer_feedback.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6baaa472..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/customer_feedback.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customer Feedback
-
- It is the information that a customer expresses about the satisfaction or dissatisfaction about the products or services.
-
- The Customer Feedback has to rate different parameters and provide Qualitative Feedbacks using the pre-determined Feedback Templates.
-
-## Customer Feedback Template
-
- For creating the Customer Feedback first you must to decide the parameters by creating the Customer Feedback Template. The templates generally contains the title of the template, scope and the different parameter to be entered. The diffrent parameter which can be decided on the basis of different occssions and survey.
-
-## Creating a Customer Feedback Template
-
- 
-
- Steps for creating a Customer Feedback Template
-
- * Template : The name of the template
-
- * Procedure : Select procedure associated with the Feedback.
-
- * Parameter : Listing down various processes/parameters to which you want the user to rate and give the feedback.
-
- * Scope : Whether the Feedback Template is a generic for the whole company or only for a particular department.
-
- * Department : Deparment related to the Feedback Template.(If scope is deparment)
-
-## Customer Feedback
-
- The customer can easily give there feedbacks by selecting there template to rate on different parameter and also provide the qualitative feedback on the parameters.
- If the Feedback is not as per expectations, Quality Action may be initialised on the basis of the seriousness of the Feedback.
-
-## Creating a Customer Feedback
-
- 
-
- Steps for creating a Customer Feedback
-
- * Customer : Name of the Customer who is giving the Feedback.
-
- * Template : Selecting the template for the Feedback and the parameters are automatically populated for the Feedback.
-
- * Feedback :
-
- - Parameter : Various Parameters that are pre-defined in the Feedback Template.
- - Rating : Rate a parameter.
- - Qualitative Feedback : Feedback regarding the parameter.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 35e6188a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-# Quality Management System
-
- Quality management is the act of overseeing all activities and tasks needed to maintain a desired level of excellence.
-
- Quality Management System is used to comply with ISO quality standards. The tool eliminates the need for paper records and replaces them with electronic systems. The application helps service and manufacturing companies to manage day-to-day work and instills full transparency across the system.
- It helps the organization in making Quality Goal and design Quality Procedures to achieve it.
-
- For more details go through the following topics
-## Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7fd942e1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-quality_goal
-quality_procedure
-tree_of_procedure
-quality_review
-quality_action
-quality_meeting
-customer_feedback
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_action.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_action.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3f097dc2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_action.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Action
-
-
- Quality Action is a standard features to allow implementation of corrective and preventive actions. This will meet compliance with industry regulations including GMP, ISO 9001 and 14001, TSCA, REACH, etc.
-
- Quality Action process workflows provide a controlled environment and reduce the risk of repeat issues by ensuring that defined solutions and processes are met.
-
- Quality Actions can be initialized for a Quality Goal or for a Customer Feedback which may not meet the expected target and depending on that a Corrective or Preventive Action can be started.
-
-## Creating a Quality Action
-
-
-
- Steps for creating an Action:
-
- * Corrective/Preventive : It is used to indicate whether the Review is being scheduled for Corrective or for Preventive Purpose.
-
- * Type : It is used to select whether an Action is scheduled for a Quality Review or for a Customer Feedback.
-
- * Review : If the Quality Action is being scheduled for a Quality Review, select the Review from the list.
-
- * Feedback : If the Quality Action is being scheduled for a Customer Feedback, select the Feedback from the list.
-
- * Goal : If the Quality Action is being scheduled for a Quality Review, Goal associated with Review is fetched automatically.
-
- * Procedure : If the Quality Action is being scheduled for a Quality Review, Procedure associated with Review is fetched automatically.
-
- * Status : Is automatically computed based on the Status of the Problem. If the status of all the problem are 'Close' then the status of the Action is 'Closed'.
-
- * Problem : Consists of the Goal Objective that have not met the target.
-
- * Resolution : Reolution proposed for the problem.
-
- * Status : Indicates whether the problem is Open or Close.
-
- * Responsible : Individual responsible for handling the particular problem.
-
- * Completion Date : Date before which the Problem should be resolved.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_goal.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_goal.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bee2653e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_goal.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Goal
-
- It is collection of individual metrics that helps to quantify quality of application. It is a basic quality management process to establish a set of quality objectives.
-
- You can create a Quality Goal for your business having multiple Quality Objectives. Different Quality Objectives for a Goal can have definite numeric target or target measured in terms of completion status(yes or no). It is monitored based on Frequency which is set for that Goal.
-
-
-
-## Creating a Quality Goal
-
- Steps for creating a Quality Goal
-
- * Goal : Name of the Quality Goal that you intend to create.
-
- * Procedure : Quality Procedure that is to be followed to achieve the Goal.
-
- * created By : Person responsible for the creation of the Goal.
-
- * Scope : This represents whether the Goal applied to the Company or only to a particular department.
-
- * Department : If the scope of the Goal is only to a particular department, the name of the department is to be specified.
-
- * Monitoring Frequency : If a Review of a Goal is to be scheduled automatically then select the time interval after which the Review will be created.
-
- * Revision : Mentioning the curent Revision of the Quality Goal.
-
- * Measurable Goal : If a Goal can be measured in terms of numeric values, eg: 100 Leads, 24 Hours, etc, then select 'Yes' indicating the Goal is be measured in numeric values. If a Goal can only be measured interms of completion status ie Yes or No, then select 'No' indicating the Goal is to be measured interms of completion status. Target and Units are disabled if the Goal cannot be measured interms of numeric values.
-
- * Objective : Consists of the various Objectives that a Quality Goal consists of and which have to be completed to meet the Goal.
-
- * Target : Consists of the numeric target value of an Objective that is to be met.
-
- * Unit : Measurement Unit, eg: Lead/s, Hour/s, etc, to measure Objective.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_meeting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_meeting.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 925d394d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_meeting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Meeting
-
- It is an assembly of people for a particular purpose or agenda, especially for formal discussion about Quality aspects.
-
- Quality Meetings are conducted to review the Quality Reviews that have been generated. The minutes of these meetings would include the discussion on the various Quality Reviews.
-
-## Creating a Quality Meeting:
-
- 
-
- Steps for creating a Meeting
-
- * Meeting Date: Date on which the Meeting is held.
-
- * Status: The status of the Meeting is generated based in the status of every individual Minutes discussed. If the status of all the minutes is Close, then Status of the Meeting will be 'Close' else 'Open'.
-
- * Minute:
-
- - Review: Select the Quality Review to be discussed.
- - Action: It is the action that is proposed for the Review which can be either Under Review or Planned if any action is planned.
- - Responsible: The individual who is responsible for carrying out the action for the Review.
- - Status: Status of minute can be Open or Close depending upon whether the action has been carried out or not.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_procedure.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_procedure.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cae14ebf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_procedure.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Procedure (Standard Operating Procedure)
-
- A standard operating procedure (SOP) is a set of step-by-step instructions compiled by an organisation to help workers carry out complex routine operations. SOPs aim to achieve efficiency, quality output and uniformity of performance, while reducing miscommunication and failure to comply with industry regulations.
-
- A Procedure can be of two types ie a Procedure consiting of simply steps that you must follow to achieve the Goal and Procedure having a nested Procedure along with steps that must be followed.
-
-## Creating a Quality Procedure
-
- Steps for creating a Procedure
-
-* Procedure : Name of the Procedure that you intend to create.
-
-* Department : The Department to which the Procedure is associated with. For Example, A Procedure regarding a product sales is associated with the Sales Department.
-
-* Parent Procedure : If a Procedure is child to a Parent Procedure, then this field will contain the name of the Parent Procedure.
-
-* Is Group : If a Procedure has chile Procedures, selecting Is Group, groups all the Procedures into the Parent Procedure in the TreeView.
-
-* Procedure consisting of Steps :
-
- 
-
- - If a Procedure only has a set of steps to be followed, select Step from Dropdown.
- - Document the step.
- - Select the Individual responsible for carrying out the task.
-
-* Procedure consisting of Nested Procedure :
- 
- - If a Procedure multiple procedures, select Procedure from Dropdown.
- - Select the Child Procedure.(When this field is set, the Parent Procedure field of the Child Procedures will contain the name of the Parent Procedure)
- - Select the Individual responsible for carrying out the task.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_review.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_review.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 210c8332..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_review.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Review
-
- A Quality Review is an inspection with a specific structure, defined roles and procedure designed to ensure a product's completeness and adherence to standards.
-
- The Quality Review can be scheduled manually or scheduled based on Goal's Monitoring Frequency. The Quality Review checks whether all Objectives of a Goal have been achieved or not.
-
-
-
-## Creating a Quality Review
-
- Steps for creating a Review
-
- * Quality Goal : Quality Goal which is to be Reviewed.
-
- * Procedure : Quality Procedure of the Goal is automatically fetched when a Goal is selected.
-
- * Scope : Scope of the Goal is automatically fetched when a Goal is selected.
-
- * Values : All the Objectives and Target and Unit associated with the Goal are fetched.
-
- * Achieved : Indicates the Achieved Value for a certain Target Value.(This Field is visible only if the Goal can be measured interms of numeric values)
-
- * Yes/No : Indicates whether the Objective has been completed or not.(This Field is visible only if the Goal cannot be measured interms of numeric values)
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/tree_of_procedure.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/tree_of_procedure.md
deleted file mode 100644
index de4b353d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/tree_of_procedure.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tree of Procedures
-
- Tree of Procedures is used to show the Parent-Child relationship which may or may not exist between the different Procedures. If a Procedure has a Child Procedure, then they are grouped under the Parent Procedure else they are represented individually.
- From where you can directly edit or delete the procedure if he don't have any child.
-
- 
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/fichier_des_ecritures_comptables.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/fichier_des_ecritures_comptables.md
deleted file mode 100755
index efd3585c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/fichier_des_ecritures_comptables.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Le Fichier des Écritures Comptables [FEC]
-
-Since 2014, a legal requirement makes it mandatory for companies operating in France to provide a file of their general accounting postings by fiscal year corresponding to an electronic accounting journal.
-
-For ERPNext users this file can be generated using a report available if you system's country is France.
-
-
-### Requirements
-
-To generate the report correctly, your Chart of Account needs to be setup according to the french accounting rules.
-
-All accounts need to have a number in line with the General Chart of Account (PCG) and a name.
-
-The SIREN number of your company can be added in the "Company" doctype.
-
-
-### CSV generation
-
-You can generate the required CSV file by clicking on "Export" in the top right corner of the report.
-
-
-### Testing Instructions
-
-To test the validity of your file, the tax administration provides a testing tool at the following address: [Outil de test des fichiers des écritures comptables (FEC)](http://www.economie.gouv.fr/dgfip/outil-test-des-fichiers-des-ecritures-comptables-fec)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 84fcb9e3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-fichier_des_ecritures_comptables
-local_overrides
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/local_overrides.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/local_overrides.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 25505e13..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/local_overrides.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sales and Payment Transactions
-
-In order to be compliant with the latest finance law applicable to POS software, ERPNext automatically registers all sales and payment transactions in a chained log.
-
-If your country is set to "France", the deletion of sales and payment transactions will also not be permitted, even if the appropriate permissions are given to the user.
-
-Please note that ERPNext is not yet fully compliant with the 2016 Finance Law.
-
-# Chained log Report
-
-A dedicated report called "Transaction Log Report" is available to verify that the logged chain has not been broken.
-
-If the status of the column "Chain Integrity" is "True", the chain has not been broken.
-It means that you can consult the full chain of events that occurred in your system.
-
-If the status of the column "Chain Integrity" is "False", it means that there is a discrepancy in the chain.
-In this case, the previous row has been removed or altered in the database. It is a probable effect of a fraudulent behavior.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 68464f2e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Regional
-
-ERPNext aims to support local regulation for all the regions in the world. In most cases ERPNext is very flexible so you can easily add Custom Fields and make Custom Reports to support the regluation of your region.
-
-As of mid-2017, ERPNext aims to pre-set additional fields and forms required for companies to easily submit reports to the relevant authorities.
-
-This section is still under-development.
-
-### Regions
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 1a6cf1b7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-france
-india
-united_arab_emirates
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6c106a5c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sending GST Reminders
-
-You can send email reminders to your Customers and Suppliers so that they can directly add or update their GSTIN numbers
-
-To send GSTIN Reminders, you can either open the Customer / Supplier record or **GST Settings**
-
-
-
-Here you can click on the "Send GSTIN Update Reminders" button to send email reminders to all your customers
-
-### Updating GSTIN
-
-Your customers will receive an email asking them to update their GSTIN and that email will link them to a portal page:
-
-
-
-Here they can update their GSTIN and it will automatically be added to your customer GSTIN record.
-
-#### Sample GSTIN Reminder Email
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f46f5336..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-
-# GST Features in ERPNext
-
-### 1. Setting up GSTIN
-
-GST Law requires that you maintain the GSTIN number for all your suppliers and vendors. In ERPNext, GSTIN is linked to the **Address**
-
-
-
-**GST for your Company Address**
-
-You also need to set the Address for your own Company and your Company's GST Number
-
-Go to the Company master and add the GSTIN to your default address.
-
-
-
-**Include GSTIN number in the Address Template**
-
-Open Address Template record for India, add GSTIN number and State Code there if not exists.
-
-
-
-
-### 2. Setting up HSN Codes
-
-According to the GST Law, your itemised invoices must contain the HSN Code related to that Item. ERPNext comes pre-installed with all 12,000+ HSN Codes so that you can easily select the relevant HSN Code in your Item
-
-
-
-### 3. Making Tax Masters
-
-To setup Billing in GST, you need to create 3 Tax Accounts for the various GST reporting heads CGST - Central GST, SGST - State GST, IGST - Inter-state GST
-
-Go to your **Chart of Accounts**, under the Duties and Taxes head of your account, create 3 Accounts
-
-**Note:** Usually the rate in CGST and SGST is half of IGST. For example if most of your items are billed at 18%, then create IGST at 18%, CGST and SGST at 9% each.
-
-
-
-### 4. Make Tax Templates
-
-You will have have to make two tax templates for both your sales and purchase, one for in state sales and other for out of state sales.
-
-In your **In State GST** template, select 2 accounts, SGST and CGST
-
-
-
-In your **Out of State GST** template, select IGST
-
-### 5. Making GST Ready Invoices
-
-If you have setup the GSTIN of your Customers and Suppliers, and your tax template, you are ready to go for making GST Ready Invoices!
-
-For **Sales Invoice**,
-
-1. Select the correct Customer and Item and the address where the transaction will happen.
-2. Check if the GSTIN of your Company and Supplier have been correctly set.
-3. Check if the HSN Number has been set in the Item
-4. Select the the **In State GST** or **Out of State GST** template that you have created based on the type of transaction
-5. Save and Submit the Invoice
-
-
-
-### 6. Print GST Tax Invoice
-
-To print Tax Invoice as per GSTN guidelines, please select **GST Tax Invoice** print format. This print format includes company address, GSTIN numbers, HSN/SAC Code and item-wise tax breakup. And while printing select correct value of Invoice Copy field, to mention whether it is for the Customer, Supplier or Transporter.
-
-
-
-### Reports
-
-ERPNext comes with most of your reports you need to prepare your GST Returns. Go to Accounts > GST India head for the list.
-
-
-
-You can check the impact of your invoice in the **GST Sales Register** and **GST Itemised Sales Register**
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 67abf7bf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Statutory Requirements for India
-
-As of 2017, India will fall under the new GST (Goods and Services Tax) regime and ERPNext makes it easy for users to track the details of its Supplier and Customers across Invoices and make the required reports.
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 8d72c56f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-gst-setup
-gst-reminders
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index cf167db3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-uae-vat-setup
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/uae-vat-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/uae-vat-setup.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e0e0793e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/uae-vat-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-
-# VAT/EXCISE Tax Implementation for UAE/KSA
-
-### 1. Setting up Tax Registration No for customer, supplier and company
-
-Set tax registation number in the field tax id for the customer, supplier and company
-
-1. For Customer
-
-
-2. For Company
-
-
-### 2. Setting up TAX Code for Products
-Setup tax code in the item master, system will fetch same code in the sales/purchase invoice on selection of an item.
-
-
-### 3. Default Tax Templates
-
-ERPNext provides you default tax template for vat(5%, zero, exempted) and excise(50%, 100%). You can create your own [tax template](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
-
-
-
-### 3. Making VAT Ready Invoices
-
-If you have setup the TRN of your Customers and Suppliers, and your tax template, you are ready to go for making VAT Ready Invoices!
-
-For **Sales Invoice**,
-
-1. Select the correct Customer and Item and the address where the transaction will happen.
-2. Check if the TRN of your Company and Supplier have been correctly set.
-3. Check if the TAX Code has been set in the Item
-4. Select the template that you have created based on the type of transaction
-5. Save and Submit the Invoice
-
-
-
-### 4. Print Tax Invoice
-
-ERPNext provides 2 default print foramt
-
-1. Simplified Tax Invoice
-
-
-2. Detailed Tax Invoice
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 087f32a5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-#Selling in Different Unit (UoM)
-
-A sell price unit of measure (UOM) is the UOM with which you price items. You can have multiple sell price UOMs for any inventory item. However, when Customer places, UoM for an item could change.
-
-For example an Item Pen is stocked in Nos, but sold in Box. Hence we will make Sales Order for Pen in Box.
-
-###Step 1: In the Item master, under Unit of Measure section, you can list all the possible UoM of an item, with its UoM Conversion Factor. Update UoM Conversion Factors
-In one Box, if you get 10 Nos. of Pen, UoM Conversion Factor would be 10.
-
-
-
-
-###Setp 2: In the Sale Order, you will find two UoM fields
-
--UoM
--Stock UoM
-
-In both the fields, default UoM of an item will be fetched by default. You should edit UoM field, and select Sale UoM (Box in this case). Updating Sales UoM is mainly for the reference of the Customer. In the print format, you will see item quantity in the Sales UoM.
-
-
-
-Based on the Qty and Conversion Factor, qty will be calculated in the Stock UoM of an item. If you sell just one Box, then Qty as per stock UoM will be set as 10.
-
-
-###Stock Ledger Posting
-
-Irrespective of the Sales UoM selected in the Sale Order, stock ledger posting will be done in the Default UoM of an item. Hence you should ensure that conversion factor is entered correctly while selling item in different UoM.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e864e567..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-#Adding Margin
-
-User Can apply the margin on Quotation Item and Sales Order Item using following two options.
-1)Price Rule: With the help of this method user can apply the margin on Quotation and Sales Order based on condition. You can find the section margin on pricing rule where a user has to select the type of margin whether it is Percentage or Amount and Rate or Amount. The system will apply the margin on quotation item and sales order item if pricing rule is enabled.
-
-To setup Pricing Rule, go to:
-
-`Selling > Setup > Pricing Rule` or `Accounts > Setup > Pricing Rule`
-
-####Adding Margin in Pricing Rule
-
-
-
-Total Margin is calculated as follows:
-`Rate = Price List Rate + Margin Rate`
-
-So, In order to apply the Margin you need to add the Price List for the Item
-
-To add Price List, go to:
-
-`Selling > Setup > Item Price` or `Stock > Setup > Item Price`
-
-####Adding Item Price
-
-
-
-2) Apply margin direct on Item: If user wants to apply the margin without pricing rule, they can use this option. In Quotation Item and Sales Order Item, user can select the margin type and rate or amount. The system will calculate the margin and apply it on price list rate to calculate the rate of the product.
-
-To add margin directly on Quotation or Sales Order, go to:
-
-`Selling > Document > Quotation`
-
-add item and scroll down to section where you can find the Margin Type
-
-####Adding Margin in Quotation
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/amending-sales-order-after-submit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/amending-sales-order-after-submit.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bc33773d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/amending-sales-order-after-submit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-#Amending Sales Order after Submit
-Rate and Qty in Sales Order can now be amended after Submit using the `Update Items` button.
-
-
-
-To Update Rate and Qty in a Submitted Sales Order, click on the `Update Items` button. A dialog will pop up to let you make the change.
-
-
-
-Please Note the following validations and usecases:
-
-- Update Features checks if Sales Order has Delivery Note and Sales Invoice.
-- Qty can be updated for undelivered Sales Order and for Partial Delivery Note. For Sales Order with completed Delivery Notes, it cannot be updated.
-- Rate can be updated for un-invoiced and partially-invoiced Sales Order. For Sales Order with submitted Sales Invoice, it cannot be updated.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2aafd2b7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-#Applying a Discount
-
-There are several ways to apply a Discount on an item in a sales transactions. This can be done in the Sales Order, as well as in a Sales Invoice
-
-#### 1. Discount on "Price List Rate" of an item
-
-You can find the Discount field in the Item table. a Discount can be applied as a percentage or a fixed amount related to the Price List Rate of the Item.
-
-
-
-The feature of Discount (%) is available in all sales and purchase transactions.
-
-If you want to apply a discount (as a Percentage) regularly for certain quantities you'd rather use a "Pricing Rule" [Click here to learn more about Pricing Rule functionality.](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.html)
-
-#### 2. Discount on "Net Total" or "Grand Total"
-
-In the "Additional Discount" section (of a "Sales Order" or "Sales Invoice" alike), you can apply a Discount as a fixed amount or a percentage on the total sum of the Sales.
-
-
-
-##### 2.1 Discount on "Net Total"
-
-If a Discount is applied on **Net Total**, then item's Net Rate and Net Amount is calculated as per the Discount Amount. Net Rate and Amount field will be visible only if Discount is applied using this feature.
-
-
-
-##### 2.2 Discount on "Grand Total"
-
-If a Discount is applied based on the **Grand Total**, then with item's Net Rate, Net Amount as well as taxes are also re-calculated as per Discount Amount.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5d86e5fa..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-#Close Sales Order
-
-In the submitted Sales Orders, you will find **Stop** option. Stopping Sales Order will restrict user from creating Delivery Note and Sales Invoice against it.
-
-
-
-####Scenario
-
-An order is received for ten Wind Turbines. Sales Order is also created for ten units. Due to scarcity of stock, only seven units are delivered to the customer. Pending three units are to be delivered soon. Customer informs that they don't need to deliver pending item, as they have purchased it from other vendor.
-
-In this case, create Delivery Note and Sales Invoice will be created only for the seven units. And the Sales Order should be set as stopped.
-
-
-
-Once Sales Order is set as stopped, you will not have pending quantities (three in this case) reflecting in Pending to Deliver and Pending to Invoice reports. To make further transactions against Stopped Sales Order, you should first Unstop it.
-
-You will find same funtionality in the Purchase Order as well.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cd5cee99..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-
-#Drop Ship
-
-**Drop shipping** is a supply chain management technique in which the retailer does not keep goods in stock. Instead they transfer customer orders and shipment details to either the manufacturer, another retailer, or a wholesaler, who then ships the goods directly to the customer
-
-In ERPNext, you can create a Drop Shipping by creating Purchase Order against Sales Order.
-
-> Selling > Documents > Sales Order > Purchase Order
-
-#### Setup on Item Master
-
-Set **_Delivered by Supplier (Drop Ship)_** and **_Default Supplier_** in Item Master.
-
-
-
-#### Setup on Sales Order
-If Drop Shipping has set on Item master, it will automatically set **Supplier delivers to Customer** and **Supplier** on Sales Order Item.
-
-You can setup Drop Shipping, on Sales Order Item. Under **Drop Ship** section, set **Supplier delivers to Customer** and select **Supplier** agaist which Purchase Order will get created.
-
-
-
-#### Create Purchase Order
-After submitting a Sales Order, create Puchase Order.
-
-
-
-From Sales Order, all items, having **Supplier delivers to Customer** checked or **Supplier**(matching with supplier selected on For Supplier popup) mentioned, will get mapped onto Purchase Order.
-
-It will automatically set Customer, Customer Address and Contact Person.
-
-After submitting Purchase Order, to update delivery status, use **Mark as Delivered** button on Purchase Order. It will update delivery percetage and delivered quantity on Sales Order.
-
-
-
-**_Close_**, is a new feature introduced on **Purchase Order** and **Sales Order**, to close or to mark fulfillment.
-
-
-
-###Drop Shipping Print Format
-You can notify, Suppliers by sending a email after submitting Purchase Order by attaching Drop Shipping print format.
-
-
-
-###Video Help on Drop Ship
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5e3462c3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-
-#ERPNext for Service Organization
-
-**Question:** ERPNext looks primarily designed for the traders and manufacturers. Is ERPNext used by companies offering servies?
-
-**Answer:**
-
-About 30% of ERPNext customers are companies into services. These are companies into software development, certification services, individual consultants and many more. Being into service business ourselves, we use ERPNext to manage our sales, accounting, support and HR operations. Check following video to learn how ERPNext uses ERPNext.
-
-
-
-###Master Setup
-
-The setup for a Service company differs primarily for Items. They don't maintain the Stock for Items and thus, don't have Warehouses.
-
-To create a Service (non-stock) Item, in the item master, uncheck "Maintain Stock" field.
-
-
-
-When creating Sales Order for the services, select Order Type as **Maintenance**. Sales Order of Maintenance Type needs lesser details compared to stock item's order like Delivery Note, item warehouse etc.
-
-Service company can still add stock items to mantain their fixed assets like computers, furniture and other office equipments.
-
-###Hiding Non-required Features
-
-Since many modules like Manufacturing and Stock will not be required for the services company, you can hide those modules from:
-
-`Setup > Permissions > Show/Hide Modules`
-
-Modules unchecked here will be hidden from all the User.
-
-####Feature Setup
-
-Within the form, there are many fields only needed for companies into trading and manufacturing businesses. These fields can be hidden for the service company. Feature Setup is a tool where you can enable/disable specific feature. If a feature is disabled, then fields relevant to that feature is hidden from all the forms. For example, if Serial No. feature is disabled, then Serial. No. field from Item as well as from all the sales and purchase transaction will be hidden.
-
-[To learn more about Feature Setup, click here.](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.html).
-
-####Permissions
-
-ERPNext is the permission controlled system. Users access system based on permissions assigned to them. So, if user is not assigned Role related to Stock and Manufacturing module, it will be hidden from that User. [Click here to learn more about permission management.](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions.html).
-
-You can also refer to help video on User and Permissions setting in ERPNext.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 12617f81..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-applying-discount
-drop-shipping
-erpnext-for-services-organization
-shipping-rule
-sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions
-close-sales-order
-request-for-raw-materials-from-sales-order
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/request-for-raw-materials-from-sales-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/request-for-raw-materials-from-sales-order.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 637b5ed5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/request-for-raw-materials-from-sales-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-# Request for Raw Materials from Sales Order
-
-Production Plan helps user to plan production against multiple sales orders and helps in Material Procurement planning for the raw-material item, based on the quantity of finished product to be manufactured.
-
-But, when you only need to plan for raw-material items of a single Sales Order, it becomes a bit of a tedious task. Hence, you can create a Material Request for the raw materials of the finished Items present in the Sales Order, from that Sales Order itself.
-
-To do so, you can follow the below steps.
-
-* After your Sales Order has been submitted, click on **Make** and select **Request for Raw Materials**.
-
-
-
-* It will open a dialog and display all the Finished Items having a BOM.
-
-
-
-* Here, you can change the BOM as you want and choose the necessary options.
-
-Suppose, enabling the **Include Exploded Items** will fetch the Raw Materials from the Exploded Items of BOM and enabling the **Ignore Existing Ordered Qty** will make a Request even if the required quantities are present.
-
-* Click on Make, and your Material Request will be submitted.
-
-
-
-Material Request generated for the Raw Material of the finished Item present in Sales Order.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2f8ba8bf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-#Sales Persons in the Sales Transactions
-
-In ERPNext, Sales Person master is maintained in [tree structure](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.html). Sales Person is selectable in all the sales transactions.
-
-Sales Persons can be updated in the Customer master as well. On selection of Customer in the transactions, Sales Persons as updated in the Customer will fetch into sales transaction.
-
-
-
-####Sales Person Contribution
-
-If more than one sales persons are working together on an order, then contribution (%) should be set for each Sales Person.
-
-
-
-On saving transaction, based on the Net Total and Contriution (%), `Contribution to Net Total` will be calculated for each Sales Person.
-
-
-
-####Sales Person wise Commission
-
-ERPNext only provide total amount of sale made by a Sales Person. If you offer commission to Sales Person, you should add Sales Person as Sales Partners in ERPNext. For Sales Partners, you can define Commission (%). On selected on Sales Partner in a sales transction, based on Net Total, Commission Amount is calculated as well. You can check Sales Partner's commission report from:
-
-`Accounts > Standard Reports > Sales Partners Commission`
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c7ea46fe..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-#Shipping Rule
-
-Shipping Rule master helps in defining a rule based on which shipping charge is applied on a sales transactions.
-
-Most of the companies (mainly retail) have shipping charge applied based on the invoice total. If invoice value is above certain value, then shipping charge applied are lesser. If invoice value is less, then shipping charges applied are bit more than high shipping charges applied on a high value invoice. You can setup Shipping Rule to address the requirement of varying shipping charge based on the Net Total of sales transaction.
-
-To setup Shipping Rule, go to:
-
-`Selling > Setup > Shipping Rule` or `Accounts > Setup > Shipping Rule`
-
-####Shipping Rule Conditions
-
-
-
-Referring above, you will notice that shipping charges are reducing as valye is increasing. This shipping charge will only be applied if transaction total falls under one of the above range.
-
-####Valid for Countries
-
-You can set Shipping Charges valid for all the countries, or specify specific Country. If specific countries mentioned, then Shipping Charges will be applied only if Customer's country matches Country mentioned in the Shipping Rule.
-
-
-
-####Shipping Account
-
-If shipping charges are applied based on Shipping Rule, then more values like Shipping Account, Cost Center will be needed as well to add row in the Taxes and Other Charges table of transaction. Hence these details are tracked as well in the Shipping Rule.
-
-
-
-####Shipping Rule Application
-
-Following is an example of how shipping charges is auto-applied on Sales Order based on Shipping Rule.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3581e425..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Selling
-
-Selling is the communication that happens with the customer prior to and
-during the sale. You might be managing all the communication yourself or you
-may have a small team of sales people to handle this. ERPNext helps you track
-the communication leading up to the sale, by keeping all your documents in an
-organized and searchable manner.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 5fa5a1b9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-quotation
-sales-order
-sales-analytics
-setup
-articles
-selling-reports
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/manufacturing-work-in-progress.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/manufacturing-work-in-progress.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b5a0d5e1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/manufacturing-work-in-progress.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-# Manufacturing Work in Progress Report
-
-As the name suggest, this report is to show any work orders that are still in progress. This is similar with Open work orders which status is in progress.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4f0263fd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quotation
-
-During a sale, the customer may request for a written note about the products
-or services you are planning to offer, along with the prices and other terms
-of engagement. This is called a “Proposal” or an “Estimate” or a “Pro Forma
-Invoice”or a **Quotation**.
-
-A typical Selling flow looks like:
-
-
-
-To create a new Quotation navigate to:
-
-> Selling > Quotation > New Quotation
-
-###Creating Quotation from Opportunity
-
-You can also create a Quotation from an Opportunity.
-
-
-
-A Quotation contains details about:
-
- * The recipient of the Quotation
- * The Items and quantities you are offering.
- * The rates at which they are offered.
- * The taxes applicable.
- * Other charges (like shipping, insurance) if applicable.
- * The validity of contract.
- * The time of delivery.
- * Other conditions.
-
-> Tip: Images look great on Quotations. Make sure your items have an image attached.
-
-### Rates
-
-The rates you quote may depend on two things.
-
- * The Price List: If you have multiple Price Lists, you can select a Price List or tag it to the Customer (so that it is auto-selected). Your Item prices will automatically be updated from the Price List. For details refer [Price List](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.html)
-
- * The Currency: If you are quoting to a Customer in a different currency, you will have to update the conversion rates to enable ERPNext to save the information in your standard Currency. This will help you to analyze the value of your Quotations in standard Currency.
-
-### Taxes
-
-To add taxes to your Quotation, you can select a **Sales Taxes and Charges Template** or add the taxes on your own.
-
-For e.g
-
-
-
-To understand taxes in detail visit [Taxes](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
-
-### Terms and Conditions
-
-Each Quotation must ideally contain a set of terms, of your contract. It is
-usually a good idea to make templates of your Terms and Conditions, so that
-you have a standard set of terms. You can do this by going to:
-
-> Selling > Terms and Conditions
-
-#### What should Terms and Conditions Contain?
-
- * Validity of the offer.
- * Payment Terms (In Advance, On Credit, part advance etc).
- * What is extra (or payable by the Customer).
- * Safety / usage warning.
- * Warranty if any.
- * Returns Policy.
- * Terms of shipping, if applicable.
- * Ways of addressing disputes, indemnity, liability, etc.
- * Address and Contact of your Company.
-
-### Submission
-
-Quotation is a “Submittable” transaction. Since you send this Quotation to
-your Customer or Lead, you must freeze it so that changes are not made after
-you send the Quotation.
-
-> Tip: Quotations can also be titled as “Proforma Invoice” or “Proposal”.
-You can do this by selecting a **Print Heading** in the **Print Settings**
-section. To create new Print Headings go to Setup > Printing >
-Print Heading.
-
-### Discount
-
-While making your sales transactions like a Quotation (or Sales Order) you
-can also give discounts to your customers. In the Discount section, add
-the discount in percentage or fixed amount. Read [Discount](https://erpnext.org/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount) for more explanation.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-analytics.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-analytics.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1615c5e1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-analytics.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-# Sales Analytics Report
-
-With the ability to see and analyze your sales data in different views, data is able to diagnose and analyze to better understand how sales are performing. The data allows for filters to be altered dynamically with criteria selections through filters. There are three window areas that make up the Sales Analytics Report. The Filter Toolbar Window, the Graph Window and the Data Window. Please see the example below.
-
-
-
-### The Filter Toolbar Window
-
-The toolbar provides for filtering to select what data is to be used. Using the dropdown selections, data selections can be refined in a compounding fashion. As the selections are made, data is reflected in the data window as well as the graph window.
-
-
-
-### Data Analytics and Charts
-
-Within the data window, selections can be made to expand or compress the data to be analyzed. At the left of the window, (blue), are selection boxes. Each box can be selected for use. There is no restriction for the data comparison, so a higher level can be compared to lower levels. The data column to the right, (orange), contains selection boxes with + and minus selections. Selecting a + will expand the data and selecting a – will compress the data. As this is performed, the Graph Window is dynamically altered allowing rapid data analysis.
-
-
-
-Within a few minutes, mastery of the sales data can be achieved. With sales analytics in hand, sales teams can be better supported. Please see the expanded view below to see the complete report.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2421871b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
-# Sales Order
-
-The Sales Order confirms the receipt of an order from your customer. It is usually a binding Contract with your Customer. Once your customer confirms the Quotation you can convert your Quotation into
-a Sales Order.
-
-There are various transactions which can be triggered from Sales Order like;
-
-* Delivery Note
-* Sales Invoice
-* Material Request
-* Production Order
-* Project
-
-### Sales Order Flow-Chart
-
-
-
-To create a new Sales Order, go to:
-
-> Selling > Sales Order > New Sales Order
-
-### Creating Sales Order from Quotation
-
-You can also create a Sales Order from a submitted Quotation.
-
-
-
-Or you can create a new Sales Order and pull details from an Quotation.
-
-
-
-Most of the information in your Sales Order is the same as the Quotation.
-
-There are a few amongst other things that a Sales Order will ask you to
-update.
-
- * Enter Delivery Date agaist each item. If there are multiple items and if you enter delivery date in the first row, the date will be copied to other rows as well where it is blank.
- * Customer Purchase Order number: If your customer has sent you a Purchase Order, you can update its number for future reference (in billing).
- * To allow for per-Customer, per-Item Pricing Rules ("Customer A" pays $1.00 for "Item 1" but "Customer B" pays $1.25 for "Item 1"), there's a check box in Selling Settings to enable saving the specific item price per customer when you change a price in the Sales Order.
-
-### Packing List
-
-The “Packing List” table will be automatically updated when you “Save” the Sales Order. If any Items in your table are Product Bundle (packets), then the “Packing List” will contain the exploded (detailed) list of your Items.
-
-### Reservation and Warehouses
-
-If your Sales Order contains Items for which inventory is tracked (Is Stock Item is “Yes”) then, ERPNext will ask you for “Reservation Warehouse”. If you have set a default Warehouse for the Item, it will automatically set this Warehouse here.
-
-This “reserved” quantity will help you project what is the quantity you need to purchase based on all your commitments.
-
-### Taxes
-
-To add taxes to your Quotation, you can select a **Sales Taxes and Charges Template** or add the taxes on your own.
-
-For e.g
-
-
-
-To understand taxes in detail visit [Taxes](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
-
-### Sales Team
-
-**Sales Partner:** If this Sale was booked via a Sales Partner, you can update the Sales Partner’s details with commission and other info that you can aggregate.
-
-**Sales Persons:** ERPNext allows you to tag multiple Sales Persons who may have worked on this deal. You can also split the amount in targets of different Sales Persons and track how much incentives they earned on this deal.
-
-### Next Steps
-
-Once you “Submit” your Sales Order, you can now trigger different aspects of
-your organization:
-
- * To begin purchase click on Make -> Purchase Request
- * To make a shipment entry click on Make -> Delivery Note. You can also make Delivery Note for selected items based on delivery date.
- * To bill, make Make -> Sales Invoice
- * To stop further process on this Sales Order, click on “Stop”
-
-### Submission
-
-Sales Order is a “Submittable” transaction. See Document Stages. You will be able to execute dependent steps (like making a Delivery Note) only after “Submitting” this Sales Order.
-
-### Sales Order with Order type Maintenance
-
-When the 'Order Type' of the Sales Order is 'Maintenance' follow the steps
-given below:
-
-__Step 1:__ Enter Currency, Price list and Item details.
-
-__Step 2:__ Mention taxes and other information.
-
-__Step 3:__ Save and Submit the form
-
-__Step 4:__ Once the form is submitted, the Action button will provide three choices.i) Maintenance Visit ii) Maintenance Schedule iii) Invoice.
-
-
-> **Note 1:**
-By clicking on the Action button and selecting 'Maintenance Visit' you can directly fill the visit form. The Sales Order details will be fetched directly.
-
-> **Note 2:**
-By clicking on the Action button and selecting 'Maintenance Schedule' you can fill the schedule details. The Sales Order details will be fetched directly.
-
-> **Note 3:**
-By clicking on the Invoice button you can make an Invoice for your
-services . The sales orders details will be fetched directly.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/customer-acquisition-and-loyalty-report.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/customer-acquisition-and-loyalty-report.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 56d2f427..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/customer-acquisition-and-loyalty-report.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-# Customer Acquisition and Loyalty Report
-
-To understand revenue, it often is helpful to look at the data from a new customer and existing customers standpoint. This report helps visualize customer loyalty. There are two windows within this report: The Filter Window and the Data Window.
-
-
-
-Accessing the Filter Window, the company and date ranges can be applied. Data is updated in the Data Window as changes are applied.
-
-Within the Data Window, columns of information are accessible. The label at the top of each column can be selected by hovering over the column heading and clicking. This will sort the data by this column in an ascending or descending fashion. As well, the open data entry field immediately below the column can be used to further refine by filtering the data. The following example demonstrates data that has been sorted in ascending order by total (orange) and has been filtered for the year 2018 (blue).
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/sales-funnel-report.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/sales-funnel-report.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 784f096a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/sales-funnel-report.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-# Sales Funnel Report
-
-The sales funnel report provides sales generation analysis. This demonstrates the progression stages of the sales process. There are four stages for leads to be generated into Sales Orders. These stages are: Active Leads/Customers, Opportunities, Quotations and Sales orders.
-
-The report has two windows. The first window is the Date Selection Window. The second window is the Graph Window.
-
-
-
-Once a date range has been selected, the graph is updated, the graph reflects the changes and the associated with the associated labels.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 648f2bc4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-This section includes information on how to setup customer groups, sales partners, sales persons and terms and conditions.
-
-It has instructions on how to configure selling settings, in order to enable default fields.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 22a335b0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-selling-settings
-sales-partner
-shipping-rule
-product-bundle
-item-price
-sales-person-target-allocation
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ba8061fb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Price
-
-Item Price is the record in which you can log sellig and buying rate of an item.
-
-There are two ways to reach to new Item Price form.
-
-> Selling/Buying/Stock > Setup > Item Price > New Item Price
-
-Or
-
-> Item > Add/Edit Prices > Click on "+" >> New Item Price
-
-Following are the steps to create new Item Price.
-
-Step 1: Select Price List
-
-You can create multiple Price List in ERPNext to track Selling and Buying Price List of an item separtely. Also if item's selling prices id changing based on territory, or due to other criteria, you can create multiple selling Price List for it.
-
-
-
-On selection of Price List, its currency and for selling or buying property will be fetched as well.
-
-To have Item Price fetching in the sales or purchase transaction, you should have Price List id selected in the transaction, just above Item table.
-
-Step 2: Select Item
-
-Select item for which Item Price record is to be created. On selection of Item Code, Item Name and Description will be fetched as well.
-
-
-
-Step 3: Enter Rate
-
-Enter selling/buying rate of an item in Price List currency.
-
-
-
-Step 4: Save Item Price
-
-To check all Item Price together, go to:
-
-> Stock > Main Report > Itemwise Price List Rate
-
-You will find option to create new Item Price record (+) in this report as well.
-
-div>
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 035aadfe..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-
-#Product Bundle
-
-Product Bundle can be seen as something like a "Bill-of-Material" on the Sales side. It's a master where you can list existing items which are bundled together and sold as a set (or bundle). For instance, when you sell a laptop, you need to ensure that charger, mouse and laptop bag are delivered with it and stock levels of these items get affected.
-To address this scenario, you can set create a Product Bundle for the main item, i.e. laptop, and list deliverable items i.e. laptop + charger + mouse + laptop bag as so-called "Child Items".
-
-Following are the steps on how to setup Product Bundle master, and how is it used in the sales transactions.
-
-####Create new Product Bundle
-
-To create new Product Bundle, Go to:
-
-Selling > Setup > Product Bundle > New
-
-
-
-To learn how to define holidays for your company, check [Holiday List](/user/manual/en/human-resources/holiday-list) feature in the HR module.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2c2a3f11..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-# Daily Work Summary
-
-Daily Work Summary is way to get a automated way to get a summary of work done by users.
-
-Replies of all users who choose to respond is collected and sent as a summary at midnight. Emails are only sent based on the Holiday List selected for the group
-
-**Note:**
-> You must have one active incoming email account setup for this to work.
-
-
-
-### How to Use
-
-Go to "Daily Work Summary Group" via HR module or search bar and set the users for whom you want to send the reminder.
-
-You can set multiple groups with different set of _users_ from your user list with different _time to send emails_ and with separate _holiday list_ for each.
-
-You can also choose to customize the _Message_ you send to users.
-
-**Note:**
->1. If no holiday list is selected then the email will be sent every day.
->2. Name of a "Daily Work Summary Group" will be sent as the title for daily summary email.
->3. Mail will not be sent to the users of a disabled Daily Work Summary Group.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance-request.md
deleted file mode 100644
index df6ec468..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-# Attendance Request
-
-Using the Attendance Request document, employees can now submit their attendance request for the days when their attendance wasn't marked.
-
-Just go to,
-
-> Human Resources > Employee and Attendance > Attendance Request > New Attendance Request
-
-
-
-- Fill up the details, mention the dates for which you want the attendance to be marked, reason and explanation.
-- You can also choose if it has to be marked as a half day or not.
-- Save it.
-- On submission of the same, Attendance documents will be created for the days you mentioned.
-
-
-
-You can see in the below image, Attendance records are linked with Attendance Request which was submitted.
-
-
-
-So, if you cancel the Attendance request, the linked Attendance documents created will be cancelled as well.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e17d34f0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/attendance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Attendance
-
-An Attendance record stating that an Employee has been present on a particular
-day can be created manually by:
-
-> Human Resources > Documents > Attendance > New Attendance
-
-
-
-You can get a monthly report of your Attendance data by going to the _Monthly
-Attendance Details_ report.
-
-You can easily set attendance for Employees using the [Employee Attendance Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee-attendance-tool.html)
-
-You can also bulk upload attendance using the [Upload Attendence Tool](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/upload-attendance.html)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee-attendance-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee-attendance-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 571241c7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee-attendance-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Attendance Tool
-
-To go the attendance tool, go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Employee and Attendance > Employee Attendance Tool
-
-This tool allows you to add attendance records for multiple employees quickly.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 54575a47..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/employee.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee
-
-An individual who works part-time or full-time under a contract of employment, and has recognized rights and duties is your Employee.
-
-In ERPNext, you can manage Employee master. The Employee master captures demographics, personal and professional details.
-
-
-
-You can further use this Employee master for performing various HR functions like:
-
-1. Processing Payroll
-1. Leave Allocation and Application
-1. Employee Advance and Expense Claim
-1. Loan Application
-1. Performance Appraisal
-
-### New Employee
-
-To create new Employee go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Employee > New Employee
-
-
-
-### Employee Deputation
-
-Once an Employee is created, you can update Department, Designation, Employee to whom he/she will report to etc.
-
-
-
-- - - -{next} diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.md deleted file mode 100644 index a81f814a..00000000 --- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6 +0,0 @@ - -# Employee and Attendance - -With ERPNext it's super simple to manage employees, keep track of attendance records etc. ERPNext also allows you to bulk upload attendance of employees. - -{index} diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 0ee047f2..00000000 --- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/index.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5 +0,0 @@ -employee -employee-attendance-tool -attendance -attendance-request -upload-attendance diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/upload-attendance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/upload-attendance.md deleted file mode 100755 index c2e27029..00000000 --- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_and_attendance/upload-attendance.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12 +0,0 @@ - -# Upload Attendance - -This tool helps you to upload bulk attendance from a csv file. - -To upload the attendance go to: - -> Human Resources > Upload Attendance - -
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee-onboarding-and-separation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee-onboarding-and-separation.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cfc16005..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee-onboarding-and-separation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
-# Employee Onboarding and Separation
-
-In the process of hiring or relieving an Employee, there are set of standard activities which need to be executed. This feature helps you maintain the master of these activities, and create the set of Task at the time of each Employee hiring or relieving.
-
-Use Case: Let's assume that following are the activities which need to be performed as soon as a job applicant is approved to be hired.
-
-- Perform a legal and professional background check
-- Create an Employee master
-- Create an Email Account
-- Create an identity card
-- Allocate leaves
-
-Same way, you can have a different set of activities to be performed when relieving an Employee, like:
-
-- Disable access from the system
-- Collect assets from the relieving Employee, if any allocated
-- Collect ID card
-- Update employee master
-- Perform full and final payment process in the payroll
-
-In ERPNext, these standard activities can be tracked in the Employee Onboarding and Separation Template.
-
-### Employee Onboarding Template
-
-> HR > Employee Lifecycle > Employee Onboarding Template
-
-
-
-You can notice that for each Activity, you can also mention the User or Role, or one of it, to whom this activity will be assigned.
-
-You can also maintain separate master for the Employee Separation Template, based on Department, Designation, and Grade.
-
-### Employee Onboarding
-
-Employee Onboarding is created for a Job Application, who is approved for the hiring.
-
-You can select an applicant from Job Applicant master, and fetch activities from Employee Onboarding master.
-
-
-
-### Tasks and Assignments
-
-On submission on Employee Onboarding / Separation, a Project will be created. Within the Project, a Tasks will also be created for each Activity. Again, each Task will be allocated, based on the User or Role selected for that Activity.
-
-
-
-### Employee Creation
-
-Based on the progress on the Tasks, progress can be updated in the Employee Onboarding and Separation process.
-
-
-
-### Video Help (Webinar Recording)
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_promotion.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_promotion.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4e75155c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_promotion.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Promotion
-
-You can manage Employee Promotions using this document.
-
-To record an Employee Promotion go to
-
-> Human Resource > Employee Promotion > New Employee Promotion
-
-Select Employee and add all details to be updated to Promotion Details table.
-
-
-
-Promotion document can be submitted on or after Promotion Date. Once submitted all the changes added to Promotion Details table will be applied to the Employee. ERPNext also keeps a record of all promotions of the Employee in the Employment History table in Employee document.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_transfer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_transfer.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e9e443ea..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/employee_transfer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Transfer
-
-You can transfer Employees to different Company or Department by using Employee Transfer.
-
-To reocord an Employee Transfer go to
-
-> Human Resource > Employee Transfer > New Employee Transfer
-
-Select Employee and add all details to be updated to Transfer Details table.
-
-
-
-Transfer document can be submitted on or after Transfer Date. Once submitted all the changes added to Transfer Details table will applied to Employee.
-
-
-
-> Note : If Create New Employee ID is checked, a new Employee will be created with property changes in Transfer Details table and old Employee will be marked as relieved. Leave allocations for the new Employee has to be manually created from Leave Period.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b7cf5797..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Lifecycle Management
-Employee lifecycle management relates to the various stages an Employee goes through during the employment with an organization. It is important for most enterprise HR departments to keep records of these changes employees go through across the company. ERPNext simplifies these HR activities, read the following sections to understand how.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 7ac8e501..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee_lifecycle/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-employee-promotion
-employee-transfer
-employee-onboarding-and-separation
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9ddc207d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fleet Management
-
-Fleet Management section of Human Resources helps your Organization manage their fleet of vehicles and track their expenses.
-
-To use Fleet Management in ERPNext,
-
- 1. Set Up a Vehicle.
- 2. Enter Vehicle Logs regularly.
- 3. Make Expense Claims for Vehicle Expenses.
- 4. View Reports for Vehicle Expenses.
-
-### Vehicle Set Up
-
-The Vehicle Set Up allows you to define the different types of Vehicles in your Organization.It acts as the Vehicle Master for Fleet Management.
-
-To create a new Vehicle go to:
-
-Human Resources > Fleet Management > Vehicle
-
-* Enter License Plate, Make, Model, Odometer Value, Fuel Type and Fuel UOM for a quick entry.
-
-
-
-* Enter details like Insurance, Chassis, Vehicle Value, Location and Employee.
-
-
-
-* Enter Vehicle attributes like color, wheels, doors and last carbon check
-
-
-
-### Vehicle Log
-
-Vehicle Log is used to enter Odometer readings, Fuel Expenses and Service Expense details.
-
-To create a new Vehicle Log go to:
-
-Human Resources > Fleet Management > Vehicle Log
-
-* Enter License Plate, Employee, Date, Odometer reading for a quick entry.
-
-
-
-* Enter Refueling details, Service details if applicable.
-
-
-
-### Make Expense Claim
-
-* Click on Make Expense Claim button. This button appears only in case of Submitted Vehicle Logs.
-
-
-
-When you click on 'Make Expense Claim',
-
- 1. The date,employee,expense total are copied over to the created Expense Claim.
- 2. The sum of Fuel Expenses and Service Expenses is copied over to Expense Claim Amount.
- 3. Employee can submit the Expense Claim for further processing.
-
-
-
-### Vehicle Expenses Report
-
-* To track and monitor Vehicle Expenses you can use the Vehicle Expenses report.This report gives a one stop view of all your vehicle expenses month wise.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c85daadf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-
-# Human Resource Setup
-
-The HR module has a setup process where you create the masters for all the major activities.
-
-### Organization Setup
-
-To setup your Employee master you must first create:
-
-* Employment Type (like Permanent, Temp, Contractor, Intern etc).
-* Branch (if there are multiple offices).
-* Department (if any, like Accounting, Sales etc).
-* Designation (CEO, Sales Manager etc).
-* Grade (A, B, C etc, usually based on seniority).
-
-Check [Setup](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/) for more details on each of masters, global _HR Settings_ and other configurations.
-
-### Leave Setup
-
-To setup Leaves, create:
-
-* Leave Type (like Sick Leave, Travel Leave etc)
-* Holiday List (list of annual holidays for the year - these days will not be considered in Leave Applications)
-* Leave Policy to effectively track and manage Employee leaves across the company
-
-You can read [Leaves - Overview](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.html) for a detailed description about how you can configure and manage Leaves.
-
-### Payroll (Salary) Setup
-
-In ERPNext, salaries have two types of components, earnings (basic salary, expenses paid by the company, like telephone bill, travel allowance etc) and deductions (amounts deducted for taxes, social security etc). You can create and assign salary structures to employees and ERPNext simplifies most of the payroll processing for you.
-
-Read more about setting up your payroll and how ERPNext simplifies payroll processing in [Salary and Payroll](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.html).
-
-If you intend to configure ERPNext to calculate Income Tax deductions automatically based on multiple Salary Slabs, [Setting Up Income Tax Deduction]((/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setting-up-tax.html)) will help you understand how you can set this up properly.
-
-### Recruitment
-
-It is important for enterprises to plan their manpower recruitment for future periods. ERPNext allows you to define recruitment plans at group company level. Subsidiary companies can create and publish job openings based on the group company plans, making it easy to manage your hiring process. To understand how you can set this up, check [Staffing Plan](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.html)
-
-If you have an active Staffing Plan, every time you create a new _Job Opening_ ERPNext will validate the open positions and current employment count with the Staffing Plan.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 33a4ae99..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-# Human Resources Reports
-
-### Employee Leave Balance
-
-Employee Leave Balance Report shows employees and their respective balance leaves under various leave types. Report is generated as per the number of allowed leaves.
-
-
-
-### Employee Birthday
-
-Employee Birthday Report shows Birthdays of your employees.
-
-
-
-### Employee Information
-
-Employee Information Report shows Report View of important information recorded in Employee master.
-
-
-
-### Employee Holiday Attendance
-
-Employee Holiday Attendance shows the list of Employees who attended on Holidays.
-
-
-
-### Monthly Salary Register
-
-Monthly Salary Register shows net pay and its components of employee(s) at a glance.
-
-
-
-
-### Monthly Attendance Sheet
-
-Monthly Attendance Sheet shows monthly attendance of selected employee at a glance.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ba8ae9de..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Human Resources
-
-The Human Resources (HR) Module covers the processes linked to managing a team
-of co-workers. Most important feature here is processing the payroll by using
-Payroll Entry to generate Salary Slips. Most countries have complex tax
-rules stating which expenses the company can make on behalf of the Employees.
-There are a set of rules for the company to deduct taxes and social security
-from employee payroll. ERPNext allows to accommodate all types of taxes and
-their calculation.
-
-It also maintains a complete employee database including contact information,
-salary details, attendance, performance evaluation, and appraisal records.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index f5cd9f80..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-employee-and-attendance
-leave-management
-payroll
-travel-and-expense-claim
-appraisal
-loan-management
-training
-recruitment
-shift-management
-fleet-management
-daily-work-summary
-human-resources-reports
-human-resource-setup
-setup
-articles
-employee-onboarding-and-separation
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/compensatory-leave-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/compensatory-leave-request.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 015e1181..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/compensatory-leave-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-# Compensatory Leave Request
-ERPNext allows employees to request for compensatory leaves for days which they have worked on holidays. It is necessary that the dates should be in default Holiday List and also that the Employee should have her attendance marked Present. Note that Leave Types which are marked are _Is Compensatory_ can be selected in the Compensatory Leave Request.
-
-To create a new Compensatory Leave Request, go to
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Compensatory Leave Request > New Compensatory Leave Request
-
-
-
-On submitting a Compensatory Leave Request, ERPNext updates the Leave Allocation record for the leave type is updated allowing her to apply for leaves of this type later on.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/holiday-list.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/holiday-list.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a951c95e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/holiday-list.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-#Holiday List
-
-Holiday List is a list which contains the dates of holidays.
-
-Most organizations have a standard Holiday-List for their employees. Some even have different holiday lists based on the different locations or departments.
-
-To add a new Holiday List, go to:
-
-`Human Resources (HR) > Leave and Holiday > Holiday List`
-
-Click on New to add new Holiday List.
-
-### New Holiday List
-
-Give a name to Holiday List. It can be based in Fiscal Year or location or department as application. Also select From and To Date for the Holiday List.
-
-
-
-You can quickly add Weekly Off in the Holiday List as following.
-
-
-
-After that, you can also add specific days (like festival holidays) manually.
-
-
-
-
-### Holiday List in Employee
-
-If you have created multiple Holiday List, then select specific Holiday List for an Employee in the respective master.
-
-
-
-When an Employee applies for the Leave, then days mentioned in the Holiday List will not be counted, as they are holiday already. For more configuration option in Holiday List, check `HR > HR Settings`.
-
-> Note 1: If you have specified a Holiday List in the Employment master, then that Holiday List will give priority the default Holiday List of the company.
-
-> Note 2: You can form as many holiday lists as you wish. For example, if you have a factory, you can have one list for the factory workers and another list for office staff. You can manage between lists by attaching their respective holiday list to their respective employment detail form.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index aaf57a2a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Leaves and Holiday
-
-This section will help you understand how ERPNext enables you to efficiently manage the leave schedule of your organization. It also explains the way employees can apply for leaves.
-
-Employees create leave requests, which their respective managers (leave approver) can approve or reject. An Employee can select from a number of leave types such as sick leave, casual leave, privilege leave and so on. The number and type of leaves an Employee can apply is controlled by Leave Allocations. You can create Leave Allocations for a Leave Period based on the company's Leave Policy. You can also allocate additional leaves to your employees and generate reports to track leaves taken by Employees.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 3a828576..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-leave-type
-leave-period
-leave-policy
-leave-allocation
-leave-application
-compensatory-leave-request
-leave-encashment
-holiday-list
-leave-block-list
-leave
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-allocation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-allocation.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a92ecaa..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-allocation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-# Leave Allocation
-
-Leave Allocation enables you to allot a specific number of leaves to a particular employee. You can allocate a number of leaves to different types of leave.
-
-### Allocating leaves for a Leave Period
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Period
-
-Leave Period helps you manage leaves for a period and also doubles up as a tool to help you grant leaves for a category of employees. The _Grant_ button will generate Leave Allocations based on the Leave Policy applicable to each Employee. You can allocate leaves based on Employee Grade, Department or Designation. Also, note that _Carry Forward Leaves_ check will enable you to carry forward any unused leaves (for Leave Types with Is Carry Forward turned on) from previous allocations to new ones.
-
-
-
-###Manual Allocation of leaves
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Allocation > New Leave Allocation
-
-To manually allocate leaves for an Employee, select the period and the number of leaves you want to allocate. You can also add unused leaves from previous allocation period.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-application.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-application.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e6ec75e9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-application.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-
-# Leave Application
-
-If your company has a formal system where Employees have to apply for leaves
-to be able to qualify as paid leaves, you can create Leave Application to
-track approval and usage of leaves. The applying employee requires to select their Employee record, Leave
-Type and the period for which the leave is taken.
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Application > New Leave Application
-
-
-
-_Basic Workflow:_
-
-- Employee applies for leave through Leave Application
-- Approver gets notification via email, "Follow via Email" should be checked for this.
-- Approver reviews Leave Application
-- Approver approves/rejects Leave Application
-- Employee gets notification on the status of his/her Leave Application
-
-
-
-### Setting Leave Approver
-
-* A leave approver is a user who can approve an leave application for an employee. Leave Approvers for each department can be configured in the [Department](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.html) master.
-
-> Tip : If you want all users to create their own Leave Applications, you can set
-their “Employee ID” as a match rule in the Leave Application Permission
-settings. See the earlier discussion on [Setting Up Permissions](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
-for more info.
-
-_Notes:_
-
-* Leave Application period must be within a single Leave Allocation period. In case, you are applying for leave across leave allocation period, you have to create two Leave Application records.
-* Application period must be in the latest Allocation period.
-* Employee can't apply for leave on the dates which are added in the "Leave Block List".
-
-To understand how ERPNext allows you configure leaves for employees, check [Leaves - Setup](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.html)
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-block-list.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-block-list.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ec54d94c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-block-list.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-# Leave Block List
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Block List > New Leave Block List
-
-Leave Block List is a list of dates in a year, on which employees can not apply for leave. You can define a list of users who can approve Leave Application on blocked days, in case of urgency. You can also define whether the list will applied on entire company or any specific departments.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-encashment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-encashment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e33a2839..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-encashment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-# Leave Encashment
-
-For Leave Types which are encashable, you can submit Leave Encashment. To create a new Leave Encashment, go to
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Encashment > New Leave Encashment
-
-As you select Employee and Leave Type, Leave Balance and Encashable Days (which is total leave balance less the threshold days set in Leave Type) will be shown along with the Encashment Amount based on the Leave Encashment per day as configured in the Employee's assigned Salary Structure.
-
-
-
-On submitting a Leave Encashment for an Employee, ERPNext automatically creates an [Additional Salary](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/additional-salary.html) which will get added to the Salary Slip of the Employee when processing the next payroll
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-period.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-period.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 140fbf70..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-period.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-# Leave Period
-
-Most companies manage leaves based on a Leave Period, corresponding to a calendar year or the fiscal year. ERPNext allows you to create a Leave period by going to,
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Period > New Leave Period
-
-
-
-The Leave Period also allows you select the list a Holiday List which will be considered for allocating Optional Leaves for the period.
-### Granting Leaves to Employees
-
-Leave Management in ERPNext is based on [Leave Allocations](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-allocation.html) created for each employee. This means, Employees can only avail as many leaves (of each Leave Type) allocated to them.
-
-You can configure [Leave Policies](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-policy.html) and apply the Leave Policy for different Employee Grades or to specific Employees. The `Grant` button will allow you to create leave allocations in bulk. Alternatively, you can also create Leave Allocations manually.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-policy.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-policy.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 7b42da02..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-policy.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-# Leave Policy
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Policy > New Leave Policy
-
-It is a practice for many enterprises to enforce a general Leave Policy to effectively track and manage Employee leaves. ERPNext allows you to create and manage multiple Leave Policies and allocate leaves to Employees as defined by the policy.
-
-
-
-### Enforcing the Leave Policy
-
-To enforce the Leave Policy, you can either:
-
-* Apply the Leave Policy in Employee Grade
-
-
-
-This will ensure all leave allocations for all employees of this grade will be as per the Leave Policy
-
-* Update Employee record with appropriate Leave Policy. In case you need to selectively update the Leave Policy for a particular Employee, you can do so by updating the Employee record.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-type.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 98f88f78..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-management/leave-type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-# Leave Type
-
-> Human Resources > Leaves and Holiday > Leave Type > New Leave Type
-
-Leave Type refers to types of leave allotted to an employee by a company. An employee can select a particular Leave Type while requesting for a leave. You can create any number of Leave Types based on your company’s
-requirement.
-
-
-
-* Max Leaves Allowed: This field allows you to set the maximum number of leaves of this Leave Type that Employees can apply within a Leave Period.
-
-* Applicable After (Working Days): Employees who have worked with the company for this number of days are only allowed to apply for this Leave Type. Do note that any other leaves availed by the Employee after her joining date is also considered while calculating working days.
-
-* Maximum Continuous Days Applicable: It refers to maximum number of days this particular Leave Type can be availed at a stretch. If an employee exceeds the maximum number of days under a particular Leave Type, his/her extended leave may be considered as ‘Leave Without Pay’ and this may affect his/her salary calculation.
-
-* Is Carry Forward: If checked, the balance leave will be carried forwarded to the next allocation period.
-
-* Is Leave Without Pay: This ensures that the Leave Type will be treated as leaves without pay and salary will get deducted for this Leave Type.
-
-* Allow Negative Balance: If checked, system will always allow to approve leave application for the Leave Type, even if there is no leave balance.
-
-* Include holidays within leaves as leaves: Check this option if you wish to count holidays within leaves as a ‘leave’. Such holidays will be deducted from the total number of leaves.
-
-* Is Compensatory: Compensatory leaves are leaves granted for working overtime or on holidays, normally compensated as an encashable leave. You can check this option to mark the Leave Type as compensatory. An Employee can request for compensatory leaves using [Compensatory Leave Request](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leaves_and_holiday/compensatory-leave-request.html) and on approval of such requests, Leave Allocation for this leave type is updated allowing her to apply for leaves of this type later on.
-
-* Is Optional: Check this Optional Leaves are holidays which Employees can choose to avail from a list of holidays published by the company. The Holiday List for optional leaves can have any number of holidays but you can restrict the number of such leaves granted to an Employee in a Leave Period by setting the Max Days Leave Allowed field.
-
-* Encashment: It is possible that Employees can receive cash from their Employer for unused leaves granted to them in a Leave Period. Not all Leave Types need to be encashable, so you should set "Allow Encashment" for Leave Types which are encashable. Leave encashment is allowed only in the last month of the Leave Period.
-
-
-
- You can set the _Encashment Threshold Days_ field so that the Employees wont be able to encash that many days. These days should be carry forwarded to the next Leave Period so that it can be either encashed or availed. You may also want to set the _Earning Component_ for use in Salary Slip while paying out the encashed amount to Employees as part of their Salary.
-
- >Note: On submitting a [Leave Encashment](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leaves_and_holiday/leave-encashment.html) for an Employee, ERPNext automatically creates an [Additional Salary](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/additional-salary.html) which will get added to the Salary Slip of the Employee when processing the next payroll
-
-* Earned Leave: Earned Leaves are leaves earned by an employee after working with the company for a certain amount of time. Checking "Is Earned Leave" will allot leaves pro rata by automatically updating Leave Allocation for leaves of this type at intervals set by _Earned Leave Frequency_. For example, if an employee earns 2 leaves of type Paid Leaves monthly, ERPNext automatically increments the Leave Allocation for Paid Leave at the end of every month by 2. The leave allotment process (background job) will only allot leaves considering the max leaves for the leave type, and will round to _Rounding_ for fractions.
-
-
-
-### Default Leave Types
-There are some pre-loaded Leave Types in the system, as below:
-
-- Leave Without Pay: You can avail these leaves for different purposes, such as, extended medical issues, educational purpose or unavoidable personal reason. Employee does not get paid for such leaves.
-- Privilege leave: These are like earned leaves which can be availed for the purpose of travel, family vacation and so on.
-- Sick leave: You can avail these leaves if you are unwell.
-- Compensatory off: These are compensatory leave allotted to employees for overtime work.
-- Casual leave: You can avail this leave to take care of urgent and unseen matters.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leaves_and_holiday/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leaves_and_holiday/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/loan-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/loan-management.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e139ff52..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/loan-management.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-
-# Loan Management
-This module enables companies which provides loans to define and manage loans.
-Employees can request loans, which are then reviewed and approved. For the approved loans,
-repayment schedule for the entire loan cycle can be generated and automatic deduction from salary can also be set up.
-
-### Loan Type
-To create a new Loan Type go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Loan Management > Loan Type > New Loan Type
-
-Configure Loan limit and Rate of interest.
-
-
-
-### Loan Application
-
-Employee can apply for loan by going to:
-
-> Human Resources > Loan Management > Loan Application > New Loan Application
-
-
-
-#### In the Loan Application,
-
- * Enter Employee details and Loan details
- * Select the repayment method, and based on your selection enter Repayment Period in Months or repayment Amount
-
-On save, Employee can see Repayment Information and make changes if required before submitting.
-
-
-
-### Loan
-
-Once the Loan is approved, Manager can create Loan record for the Employee.
-
-> Human Resources > Loan Management > Loan > New Loan
-
-
-
-#### In the Loan,
-
- * Enter Employee and Loan Application
- * Check "Repay from Salary" if the loan repayment will be deducted from the salary
- * Enter Disbursement Date, Repayment Start Date, and Account Info
- * If the amount has been disbursed and status is set to "Disbursed", as soon as you hit save, the repayment schedule is generated.
- * The first repayment payment date would be set as per the "Repayment Start Date".
-
-
-
-#### Loan Repayment for Members
-
-* After submitting the document, if the status is "Disbursed" and "Repay from Salary" is unchecked, you can click on "Make Repayment Entry" and select the payments which haven't been paid till date.
-* After selecting the rows, you will be routed to Journal Entry where the selected payments will be added and placed in their respective Debit/ Credit accounts.
-* On submitting the Journal Entry, "Paid" will be checked in the payment rows of the Repayment Schedule, for which the Journal entry has been created.
-
-
-
-#### Loan repayment deduction from Salary
-
-To auto deduct the Loan repayment from Salary, check "Repay from Salary" in Loan. It will appear as Loan repayment in Salary Slip.
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/additional-salary.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/additional-salary.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ddfd1b90..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/additional-salary.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Additional Salary
-
-ERPNext allows you to add additional Salary Components (_Is Additional Component_) to Salary Slips while processing the payroll. Some examples of Additional Salary could be Performance Bonus, Deputation Allowance, Arrears or other adjustments etc. To create Additional Salary, you can go to -
-
-> Human resources > Payroll > Additional Salary > New Additional Salary
-
-
-
-You can select the Employee to whom you wish to disburse the Additional Salary, the Salary Component and the period for which the employee is entitled to receive the Additional Salary. If the period (From and To dates) consists on multiple payroll periods, the amount will be disbursed on a pro-rata basis.
-
-> Note: The Salary Component can also be a deduction component which will add the Additional Salary to the Deductions table in the Salary Slip
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-application.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-application.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cc923d18..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-application.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-#Employee Benefit Application
-
-Employees are entitled to flexible benefits which they can either receive pro-rata (as part of their Salary) or as a lump-sum amount when they claim the benefit. In order to choose from various flexible benefits which an Employee shall receive on a pro-rata basis, the employee should create a new Employee Benefit Application.
-
-To create a new Employee Benefit Application,
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Employee Benefit Application > New Employee Benefit Application
-
-
-
-Here, Employee can view the Max Benefits as per the Salary Structure Assignment and then chose from the Earning Components which are part of the employee's assigned Salary Structure. They can also enter the amount which they wish to receive as part of their Salary Slip.
-
-It is based on the Employee Benefit Application that the Max Benefit Amount will be distributed among the flexible earning components while generating the Salary Slip. If an Employee fails to submit the Employee Benefit Application before processing the payroll, the Max Benefit Amount eligible to the employee will be distributed proportionately to each of the flexible component present in the Employee's salary structure.
-
-> Note: Employees can only submit one Employee Benefit Application for a Payroll Period.
-
-Employee Benefit Application should cover the full amount which the employee has to receive as per the Max Benefit amount on a pro-rata basis. However, if the Salary Structure of the employee consists of Salary Components which are to be paid on Employee Benefit Claim (Salary Component with _Pay Against Benefit Claim_), they are allowed to submit Employee Benefit Application excluding the amount allocated for such components.
-
-Also, note that those components which are to be received based on Employee Benefit Claims can also be part of the application, but will only be disbursed lump-sum, as part of their salary when the Employee submits a claim for it.
-
-> Note: Normal Tax calculation does not include Flexible Benefits as in most cases these are exempted from Tax. To tax these components anytime before the last payroll, use _Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits_ in Payroll Entry / Salary Slip while processing the Salary.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-claim.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3451fc8c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-claim.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-#Employee Benefit Claim
-
-Employee Benefit Claim allows Employees to -
- 1. Claim flexible benefits which are to be received lump-sum (if Salary Component is _Pay Against Benefit Claim_)
- 2. Claim tax exemption for flexible benefits received pro-rata, as part of salary when _Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits_ is checked in Payroll Entry / Salary Slip
-
-You can create a new Employee Benefit Claim by going to,
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Employee Benefit Claim > New Employee Benefit Claim
-
-
-
-Here, Employee can view the eligible amount as per their Salary Structure Assignment and claim for the amount which they wish to receive as part of their next Salary. Any remaining amount which the employee did not claim for, in a Payroll Period, will be disbursed as part of the last payroll Salary.
-
-> Note: Normal Tax calculation does not include Flexible Benefits as in most cases these are exempted from Tax. To tax these components anytime before the last payroll, use _Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits_ in Payroll Entry / Salary Slip while processing the Salary.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.md
deleted file mode 100644
index d17c2a00..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-#Employee Tax Exemption Declaration
-At the beginning of a Payroll Period, employees can declare the amount of exemption from their taxable salary they will be claiming at the end of the period by submitting proofs. To create a new Employee Tax Exemption Declaration, go to
-
-> Human resources > Payroll > Employee Tax Exemption Declaration > New Employee Tax Exemption Declaration
-
-
-
-The _Total Exemption Amount_ will be exempted from annual taxable earnings of the employee while calculating the tax deductions in Payroll.
-
-> Note: Employees can only submit one Employee Tax Exemption Declaration for a Payroll Period.
-
-### Regional - India
-For the current fiscal year, in India, House Rent Allowance (HRA) exemption from taxable earnings is the minimum of:
-
-* The actual amount allotted by the employer as the HRA.
-* Actual rent paid less 10% of the basic salary.
-* 50% of the basic salary, if the employee is staying in a metro city (40% for a non-metro city).
-
-As part of the Employee Tax Exemption Declaration, employees shall also fill out the HRA Exemption. ERPNext will calculate the exemption eligible for HRA and exempt it while calculating the taxable earnings.
-
-> Note: HRA component shall be configured in Company for HRA exemption to work
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 16851f25..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-#Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission
-Employees are required to submit proofs for all the spendings they claim tax exemption for. This is usually done at the end of a Payroll Period, but employees can submit any number of proofs unlike Employee Tax Exemption Declaration.
-
-To create a new Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission, go to
-
-> Human resources > Payroll > Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission > New Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission
-
-
-
-The _Total Exemption Amount_ will be exempted from annual taxable earnings of the employee while calculating the tax deductions in the last payroll.
-
-> Note: Even if employees submit exemption proofs anytime during the payroll period, ERPNext will only consider this in the last payroll of the Payroll Period for adjusting the final taxes based on the proof submitted. If you need to adjust any additional tax collected or consider proof submission of employees anytime before the last payroll, while processing Payroll Entry (or in the Salary Slip of the employee) check the _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ option.
-
-### Regional - India
-For the current fiscal year, in India, House Rent Allowance (HRA) exemption from taxable earnings is the minimum of:
-
-* The actual amount allotted by the employer as the HRA.
-* Actual rent paid less 10% of the basic salary.
-* 50% of the basic salary, if the employee is staying in a metro city (40% for a non-metro city).
-
-As part of the Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission, employees shall also submit proof for HRA Exemption. ERPNext will calculate the exemption eligible for HRA and exempt it while calculating the taxable earnings in the last payroll of the Payroll Period.
-
-> Note: HRA component shall be configured in Company for HRA exemption to work
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 837eaff9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Payroll
-Payroll processing is an important function of every enterprise HR. ERPNext greatly simplifies this process by offering an array of features that you can utilize form Salary Structure management to bulk processing Payroll of employees. Read the following documentation to understand how to configure and use ERPNext Human Resources to super power your Payroll processing.
-
-#Topics
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 72e0f4e8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-payroll-entry
-additional-salary
-retention-bonus
-employee-benefit-application
-employee-benefit-claim
-employee-tax-exemption-declaration
-employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission
-payroll-period
-payroll-setup
-setting-up-tax
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f2a54e95..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-
-# Payroll Entry
-
-Payroll Entry enables bulk processing of payroll for employees company wide or employees of a particular branch, department or designation. Payroll Entry helps you create Salary Slips _in bulk_ for selected employees, submit the created Salary Slips at once, submit salary accrual entry and finally post bank entry for recording the salary payment, automating almost every step involved in payroll processing. Here's how you can use Payroll Entry to simplify your payroll processing.
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Payroll Entry > New Payroll Entry
-
-
-
-> Note: Read [Payroll Setup](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-setup.html) to know how you can configure Payroll to take the full advantage of ERPNext Human Resources.
-
-In Payroll Entry,
-
-1. Select the Company for which you want to create the Salary Slips. You can also select the other fields like Branch, Department, Designation or Project to be more specific.
-2. Check _Salary Slip based on Timesheet_ if you want to process timesheet based Salary Slips.
-3. Select the Posting Date and the frequency of payroll which you want to create the Salary Slips.
-4. Click on _Get Employee Details_ to get a list of Employees for which the Salary Slips will be created based on the selected criteria.
-5. Enter the Start and End dates for the payroll period.
-6. You can check _Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits_ if you want to deduct taxes for all benefits (Salary Components which are _Is Flexible Benefit_) paid to employees till the current payroll
-7. Similarly, _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ allows you to deduct taxes for the earnings which were exempted in the previous payrolls as declared in [Employee Tax Exemption Declaration](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.html) but the Employee has not submitted sufficient proof [Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.html)
-8. Select the Cost Center and Payment Account.
-9. Save the form and Submit it to create Salary Slip records for each active Employee for the time period selected. If the Salary Slips are already created, the system will not create any more Salary Slips. You can also just save the form as Draft and create the Salary Slips later.
-
-
-
-Once all Salary Slips are created, you can use _View Salary Slips_ to verify if they are created correctly or edit it if you want to deduct Leave Without Pay (LWP).
-
-### Booking Salary Accrual and Payment
-
-After verifying the Salary Slips, you can _Submit_ them all together by clicking on `Submit Salary Slip`. This will also book the default Payroll Payable account against respective Expense Heads (as configured in Salary Components) to record the accrual of salary to employees.
-
-> Note: Submitting Salary Slips one by one manually will _not_ create the Journal Entry to record salary accrual.
-
-The final step is to book the Salary Payment.
-
-Salaries in businesses are usually dealt with extreme privacy. In most cases, the companies issues a single payment to the bank combining all salaries and the bank distributes the salaries to each employee’s salary account. This way there is only one payment entry in the company’s books of accounts and anyone with access to the company’s accounts will not have access to the individual salaries.
-
-The salary payment entry is a Journal Entry that debits the total of the earning type salary component and credits the total of deduction type salary component of all Employees to the default account set at Salary Component level for each component.
-
-To generate your salary payment voucher from Payroll Entry, click on -
-> Make > Bank Entry
-
-
-
-Payroll Entry will route you to Journal Entry with relevant filters to view the draft Journal Vouchers created. You shall set reference number and date for the transactions and Submit the Journal Entries.
-
->Note: For Salary Components which are Flexible Benefits and has _Create Separate Payment Entry Against Benefit Claim_ checked, ERPNext will book separate draft Journal Entries.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 668c4682..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-#Payroll Period
-A payroll period, in ERPNext, is a period for which Employees get paid for their occupation with the Company. Payroll period helps you define Tax slabs applicable for the period, making it easier to manage changing laws.
-
-You can create Payroll Period by going to:
-> Human Resources > Payroll Setup > Payroll Period > New Payroll Period
-
-
-
-You can add multiple tax slabs for the payroll period depending on the tax regulations. Note that you can use fields in Employee document in the _Condition_ field to apply tax slabs based on properties of employees. Here is an example of how to define a tax slab for Employees who are aged between 60 and 80 years.
-
-
-
-> Note: Configuring Payroll Period is optional if you do not intend to use Flexible Benefits or Tax Slabs
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-setup.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 83414457..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,226 +0,0 @@
-
-# Payroll Setup
-
-Salary is a fixed amount of money or compensation paid to an employee by an employer in return for the work performed.
-
-Payroll is the administration of financial records of employees' salaries, wages, bonuses, net pay, and deductions.
-
-To process Payroll in ERPNext,
-
-1. Define [Payroll Period](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.html) (optional)
-2. Create Salary Structure with Salary Components (Earnings and Deductions)
-3. Assign Salary Structures to each Employee via Salary Structure Assignment
-4. Generate Salary Slips via [Payroll Entry](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-entry.html).
-5. Book the Salary in your Accounts.
-
-## Payroll Period
-[Payroll Period](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.html), in ERPNext, is a period for which Employees get paid for their occupation with the Company. Payroll period helps you define Tax slabs applicable for the period, making it easier to manage changing laws.
-
-> Note: Configuring Payroll Period is optional if you do not intend to use Flexible Benefits or Tax Slabs
-
-## Salary Component
-This document allows you to define each Earning and Deduction component which can be used to create a Salary Structure and subsequently create Salary Slip or Additional Salary. You can also configure the type, condition and formula as well as other settings which are discussed below. You should be able to enable various combinations of the following options to configure each component as it fits your Company / Regional policies.
-
-* Depends on Leave Without Pay: Leave Without Pay (LWP) happens when an Employee runs out of allocated leaves
-or takes a leave without an approval (via Leave Application). If enabled, ERPNext will automatically deduct the
-pay in proportion of LWP days divided by the total working days for the month (based on the Holiday List).
-
- > Note: If you don’t want ERPNext to manage LWP, don’t turn on this flag in any of the Salary Components
-
-* Do not include in total: If this option is enabled, the component wont be added to the total of the Earnings or Deductions of the Salary Slip
-
-#### Earning
-
-
-
-* Is Additional Component: This option specify that the component can only be paid as Additional Salary. Examples of this component could be Performance Bonus or pay received for on-site deputation etc. Such components are not considered to be part of normal Salary Structure. Instead, Additional Salary with these components can be submitted as required which will be added to the Salary Slip automatically.
-
-* Is Tax Applicable: If a component needs to be considered for Tax calculations specified as per the Payroll Period you may want to enable this option. It would be required that you have a Payroll Period configured with valid Tax Slabs for payroll processing.
-
-* Is Payable: Such components can be booked against separate payable accounts and the Accounts shall be configured in the Accounts table
-
-* Flexible Benefits: Flexible Benefits are earning components which Employees can choose to receive on a pro-rata basis or annually when they claim for. These are mostly tax exempted, unless the Employee fail to file the claim with adequate bills / documents. If turned on, you can specify the maximum benefit allowed for an employee in a year. Employees can create [Employee Benefit Application](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benfit-application.html) with the ones they opt for.
-
- >Note: Employee Benefit Application will only allow Employees to only choose from the flexible components which are present in the Salary Structure assigned to the Employee
-
- - Pay Against Benefit Claim: Employees can opt to receive flexible benefits annually via Employee Benefit Claim or along with their salary every month. If you enable this, the amount allocated for the component will be paid as the Employee submits an [Employee Benefit Claim](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-claim.html). Else the amount will be dispersed as part of the Employee's salary on a pro-rata basis.
-
- - Only Tax Impact (Cannot Claim But Part of Taxable Income): Such components are those which the company has already paid to the Employee in cash or by some other means, for example a car purchased for the Employee's use. The Employee cannot claim but is liable to pay tax. The amount allocated for this component will be considered while calculating the taxable income of the Employee.
-
- - Create Separate Payment Entry Against Benefit Claim: Some of the flexible benefits may be legally required to be paid via separate vouchers. If you enable this, while posting the bank entry the amount paid for such components will be posted as a separate entry for each Employee.
-
-
-
- > Note: Normal Tax calculation does not include Flexible Benefits as in most cases these are exempted from Tax. To tax these components anytime before that last payroll, use "Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits" in Payroll Entry / Salary Slip while processing the Salary.
-
-#### Deduction
-
-
-
-* Variable Based On Taxable Salary: If you enable this, the component will be considered as the standard Tax deduction component. Tax will be calculated based on the Tax slabs configured in Payroll Period on all the total taxable salary.
-
-## Salary Structure
-
-Salary Structure represents how Salaries are structured and calculated based on Earnings and Deductions. Salary structures are used to help organizations:
-
-1. Maintain pay levels that are competitive with the external labor market,
-2. Maintain internal pay relationships among jobs,
-3. Recognize and reward differences in the level of responsibility, skill, and performance, and manage pay expenditures.
-
-Usual components of a salary structure (in India) include:
-
-* Basic Salary: It is the taxable base income and generally not more than 40% of CTC.
-
-* House Rent Allowance: The HRA constitutes 40 to 50% of the basic salary.
-
-* Special Allowances: Makes up for the remainder part of the salary, mostly smaller than the basic salary which is completely taxable.
-
-* Leave Travel Allowance: The non-taxable amount paid by the employer to the employee for vacation/trips with family within India.
-
-* Gratuity: It is basically a lump sum amount paid by the employer when the employee resigns from the organization or retires.
-
-* PF: Fund collected during emergency or old age. 12% of the basic salary is automatically deducted and goes to the employee provident fund.
-
-* Medical Allowance: The employer pays the employee for the medical expenditures incurred. It is tax-free up to Rs.15,000.
-
-* Bonus: Taxable part of the CTC, usually a once a year lump sum amount, given to the employee based on the individual’s as well as the organizational performance for the year.
-
-* Employee Stock Options: ESOPS are Free/discounted shares given by the company to the employees. This is done to primarily increase employee retention.
-
-
-A submitted Salary Structure
-
-### Creating a New Salary Structure
-To create a new Salary Structure go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll Setup > Salary Structure > New Salary Structure
-
-In the new Salary Structure,
-
-1. Name the salary Structure and set the company, letterhead for Salary Slip printing and frequency of payroll etc.
-2. Set the starting date from which this is valid (Note: There can only be one Salary Structure that can be “Active” for an Employee during any period).
-3. Configure Leave Encashment Amount per Day which will be the amount payable to Employees on Leave Encashment requests.
-4. Max Benefits amount is the maximum amount eligible as Flexible Components to employees.
-
-#### Salary Slip Based on Timesheet
-
-Salary Slip based on Timesheet is applicable if you have timesheet based payroll system
-
-1. Check "Salary Slip Based on Timesheet"
-2. Select the salary component and enter Hour Rate (Note: This salary component gets added to earnings in Salary Slip)
-
-
-
-#### Earnings and Deductions in Salary Structure
-
-In the “Earnings” and “Deductions” tables, you can select the earnings and deductions components The condition and formula configured in Salary Component will be copied by default, but you may change this if required. You may also want to select the Base component in the Earnings table. Note that the amount eligible for each employee should be configured in Salary Structure Assignment.
-
-If the condition and formula for any of the earnings or deductions are not configured in Salary Component, you can calculate the values of Salary Components based on,
-
-#### Condition and Formula
-
-
-
-#### Condition and Amount
-
-
-
-
-In conditions and formulas,
-
- * Use field "base" for using base salary of the Employee
- * Use Salary Component abbreviations. For example: BS for Basic Salary
- * Use field name for employee details. For example: Employment Type for employment_type
-
-#### Account Details
-
-
-
- * Select Mode of Payment and Payment Account for the Salary Slips which will be generated using this Salary Structure
-
-Finally, *Save* the Salary Structure.
-
-### Leave Without Pay (LWP)
-
-Leave Without Pay (LWP) happens when an Employee runs out of allocated leaves or takes a leave without an approval (via Leave Application). If you want ERPNext to automatically deduct salary in case of LWP, then you must check on
-the “Apply LWP” column in the Earning Type and Deduction Type masters. The amount of pay cut is the proportion of LWP days divided by the total working days for the month (based on the Holiday List).
-
-If you don’t want ERPNext to manage LWP, leave the LWP unchecked in all of the Earning Types and Deduction Types.
-
-## Salary Structure Assignment
-
-Salary Structure Assignment allows you to assign salary structure and specify the base pay eligible for each employee. It is important that you set the base salary for each assignment as this will be the base salary used for calculations as per the Salary Structure.
-
-To create a new Salary Structure Assignment go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Salary Structure Assignment > New Salary Structure Assignment
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-#Processing Payroll
-You can either bulk process payroll for Employees under a department, branch or designation or process payroll individually by creating Salary Slips for each employee.
-
-## Payroll Processing Using Payroll Entry
-You can also create salary slip for multiple employees using Payroll Entry:
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Payroll Entry > New Payroll Entry
-
-#### Payroll Entry
-
-
-
-In Payroll Entry,
-
-1. Select the Company for which you want to create the Salary Slips. You can also select the other fields like Branch, Department, Designation or Project to be more specific.
-2. Check _Salary Slip based on Timesheet_ if you want to process timesheet based Salary Slips.
-3. Select the Posting Date and the frequency of payroll which you want to create the Salary Slips.
-4. Click on "Get Employee Details" to get a list of Employees for which the Salary Slips will be created based on the selected criteria.
-5. Enter the Start and End dates for the payroll period.
-6. You can check _Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits_ if you want to deduct taxes for all benefits (Salary Components which are _Is Flexible Benefit_) paid to employees till the current payroll
-7. Similarly, _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ allows you to deduct taxes for the earnings which were exempted in the previous payrolls as declared in [Employee Tax Exemption Declaration](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.html) but the Employee has not submitted sufficient proof [Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.html)
-8. Select the Cost Center and Payment Account.
-9. Save the form and Submit it to create Salary Slip records for each active Employee for the time period selected. If the Salary Slips are already created, the system will not create any more Salary Slips. You can also just save the form as Draft and create the Salary Slips later.
-
-
-
-Once all Salary Slips are created, you can use _View Salary Slips_ to verify if they are created correctly or edit it if you want to deduct Leave Without Pay (LWP).
-
-After checking, you can "Submit" them all together by clicking on "Submit Salary Slip".
-
->Note: Submitting Salary Slips will also book the default Payroll Payable account to record the accrual of salary.
-
-#### Booking Salaries in Accounts
-
-The final step is to book the Salaries in your Accounts.
-
-Salaries in businesses are usually dealt with extreme privacy. In most cases, the companies issues a single payment to the bank combining all salaries and the bank distributes the salaries to each employee’s salary account. This way there is only one payment entry in the company’s books of accounts and anyone with access to the company’s accounts will not have access to the individual salaries.
-
-The salary payment entry is a Journal Entry that debits the total of the earning type salary component and credits the total of deduction type salary component of all Employees to the default account set at Salary Component level for each component.
-
-To generate your salary payment voucher from Payroll Entry, click on -
-> Make > Bank Entry
-
-
-
-Payroll Entry will route you to Journal Entry with relevant filters to view the draft Journal Vouchers created. You shall set reference number and date for the transactions and Submit the Journal Entries.
-
->Note: For Salary Components which are Flexible Benefits and has _Create Separate Payment Entry Against Benefit Claim_ checked, ERPNext will book separate draft Journal Entries.
-
-
-
-## Creating Salary Slips Manually
-
-Once the Salary Structure is created and assigned to employees via Salary Structure Assignment, you can make a Salary Slip individually. Go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Payroll > Salary Slip > New Salary Slip
-
-#### Salary Slip
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/retention-bonus.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/retention-bonus.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f1aee4e9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/retention-bonus.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-#Retention Bonus
-In general, retention bonus is a payment or reward outside of an employee's regular salary that is offered as an incentive to keep a key employee on the job during a particularly crucial business cycle, such as a merger or acquisition, or during a crucial production period.
-
-However, many enterprises also grant bonus to employees who have worked with them for longer periods. ERPNext allows you to configure Retention Bonus for employees which will alert the HR Manager (or any role as configured in Email Alert) on the event of an employee working for a particular period, say 5 years.
-
-You can create new Retention Bonus here,
-> Human resources > Payroll > Retention Bonus
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/setting-up-tax.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/setting-up-tax.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1115a2d7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/setting-up-tax.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-
-#Setting Up Income Tax Deduction
-Calculating Tax deductions for employees every month is a time consuming activity for most businesses, especially for large enterprises. If setup properly, ERPNext simplifies most of the tax related calculations by automatically calculating tax deductions while generating Salary Slips. Here's how you can configure ERPNext to ease you payroll processing -
-
-#Income Tax Exemption
-In many countries, especially in India, regulations allow exempting a part (or all) of some type of spendings by individuals from being added to their annual taxable income. Examples of such spendings could be contributions to charitable institutions, amount spent for education of children, specific investments etc. To
-avail the exemption from their taxable income, individuals are required to submit proof of such spendings.
-
-ERPNext allows you to configure Tax Slabs as part of every Payroll Period and the applies tax on each Salary based on projected annual earnings of the employee. Tax thus calculated will be added to the Salary Slip for deduction Salary Component configured _Variable Based On Taxable Salary_. Employees are required to declare the exemption amount they plan to claim at the end of the fiscal year so that the payroll deductions for tax will be calculated based on the projected annual earnings less the exemption. Employees can declare this through [Employee Tax Exemption Declaration](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.html), the total of which will be exempted from annual taxable earnings of the employee.
-
-If no declaration is submitted by the employee, the monthly deductions will be calculated without any exemption from the employee's annual earnings. However, if the employee submits a declaration in between the payroll period, from the next payroll onwards the exemption will be applied from the next payroll. Any additional tax collected in earlier payrolls will be adjusted in the last payroll or when using _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ in Payroll Entry or Salary Slip.
-
-Also, at the end of the year employees submit the actual proof of the spendings for filing via [Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.html). In the last payroll of the Payroll Period, ERPNext checks for proof submissions of employees and if not found, tax for the exempted income will be aded to the standard deduction component.
-
-###Employee Tax Exemption Category
-Exemptions from taxable salary are usually restricted to spendings on particular categories decided by government or regulatory agencies. ERPNext allows you to configure various categories which are allowed to be exempted. Examples of this could be, for India, 80G, 80C, B0CC etc.
-
-You can configure Employee Tax Exemption Category by going to,
-> Human resources > Payroll Setup > Employee Tax Exemption Category > New Employee Tax Exemption Category
-
-
-
-###Employee Tax Exemption Sub Category
-Under each category, there could be many heads for which the exemptions are allowed. For example, in India, sub categories under 80C could be Life Insurance Premium
-
-You can configure Employee Tax Exemption Sub Category by going to,
-> Human resources > Payroll Setup > Employee Tax Exemption Sub Category > New Employee Tax Sub Exemption Category
-
-
-
-###HRA Exemption - Regional, India
-For the fiscal year 2018-19, in India, House Rent Allowance (HRA) exemption from taxable earnings is the minimum of:
- * The actual amount allotted by the employer as the HRA.
- * Actual rent paid less 10% of the basic salary.
- * 50% of the basic salary, if the employee is staying in a metro city (40% for a non-metro city).
-
- As part of the Employee Tax Exemption Declaration, employees shall also fill out the HRA Exemption. ERPNext will calculate the exemption eligible for HRA and exempt it while calculating the taxable earnings.
-
- > Note: Basic and HRA salary component shall be configured in Company for HRA exemption to work
-
-###Options in Payroll Entry and Salary Slip
-ERPNext simplifies payroll processing by automatically processing payroll in bulk via [Payroll Entry](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-entry.html).
-
-* Deduct Tax For Unclaimed Employee Benefits: Flexible benefits (Salary Components which are _Is Flexible Benefit_) are not included in the taxable income of the employee. However, the amount received for these components will be included in the taxable earnings of the employee if she fails to submit [Employee Benefit Claim](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-benefit-claim.html) while calculating tax in the last payroll of the Payroll Period.
-
-If you wish to collect tax for benefits before the last payroll, check this option and ERPNext will recalculate the tax and add the tax for all untaxed benefits while generating the Salary Slip.
-
-* Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof: This option allows you to deduct taxes for the earnings which were exempted in previous payrolls as declared in [Employee Tax Exemption Declaration](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.html) but the Employee has not submitted sufficient proof via [Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.html). It is to be noted that if this option is checked ERPNext does not consider the Employee Tax Exemption Declaration by employees and will only take into account _Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission_ instead, while calculating exemption from employees' annual earnings.
-
->Note: If required, you can still process payroll for employees individually, by manually creating a new Salary Slip and both these options are made available in the Salary Slip
-
-#Payroll Period
-[Payroll Period](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/payroll-period.html) helps you define Tax slabs applicable for the period, making it easier to manage changing laws. You can add multiple tax slabs for the payroll period depending on the tax regulations. Note that you can use fields in Employee document in the _Condition_ field to apply tax slabs based on attributes of employees.
-
-#Salary Component
-To enable automatic tax deduction based on Tax slabs configured in Payroll Period, you have to configure a Salary Component of type _Deduction_ with _Variable Based On Taxable Salary_ option enabled. If you enable this, the component will be considered as the standard Tax deduction component and tax will be calculated based on the Tax slabs configured in Payroll Period on all the total taxable salary.
-
-_Important Note:_ If you configure condition and formula for this Deduction component, the condition and formula will be considered for calculating the Salary Component and the Tax Slabs configured in Payroll Period will be ignored. However, you can still use _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ option in Payroll Entry / Salary Slip to deduct taxes based on the Tax Slabs configured in Payroll Period, exempting [Employee Tax Exemption Proof Submission](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-proof-submission.html) which will give precedence to the Tax Slab based tax deduction.
-
-This is particularly helpful if you need to deduct a fixed amount as deduction in each payroll rather than ERPNext automatically calculating the deductions based on projected annual salary of the employee after exemption as declared by the employee via [Employee Tax Exemption Declaration](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/payroll/employee-tax-exemption-declaration.html). At the end of the fiscal year, you can still use _Deduct Tax For Unsubmitted Tax Exemption Proof_ to deduct the remaining tax liability of the employee for the whole period.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2e33e4b6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Recruitment
-It is important for enterprises to create and manage vacant positions, job applicants and also create and manage recruitment plans. ERPNext helps you create recruitment plans and create and publish job openings accordingly, making it easy to manage your hiring process. To understand how you can do configure this, check [Staffing Plan](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.html)
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 76db6762..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-job-applicant
-job-offer
-job-opening
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-applicant.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-applicant.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 19ef8026..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-applicant.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-# Job Applicant
-
-You can maintain a list of People who have applied for a [Job Opening](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-opening.html).
-
-To create a new Job Applicant go to
-
-> Human Resource > Recruitment > Job Applicant > New Job Applicant
-
-
-
-### Linking with an Email Account
-
-You can link Job Application with an Email account.
-Suppose you link Job Application with an email job@example.com
-system shall create a New Job Applicant against each email received on the mailbox.
-
-* To link Email Account with Job Applicant, go to
-
-> Setup > Email > Email Account > New Email Account
-
-* Enter the Email Address and the password, and select 'Enable Incoming'
-
-* In 'Append To' select 'Job Applicant'
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-offer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-offer.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bba9c0a0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-offer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Job Offer
-
-Job Offer is given to selected candidates after Interview & selection which states the offered salary package,
-designation, grade, department working, no of days entitled for leave.
-
-In ERPNext you can make a record of the Job Offers that you can give to candidates. To create a new Job Offer go to
-
-> Human Resource > Recruitment > Job Offer > New
-
-
-
-> Note: A Job Offer can be made only against a [Job Applicant](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.html)
-
-There is a pre-designed print format to print you Job Offer.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-opening.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-opening.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5bc183c2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/recruitment/job-opening.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Job Opening
-
-You can make a record of the open vacancies in your company using Job Opening.
-
-To create a new Job Opening go to
-
-> Human Resource > Recruitment > Job Opening > New Job Opening
-
-
-
-ERPNext allows to plan your recruitment at a group company level. The number of Job Openings you can create for a Designation is restricted according to the Vacancies planned by the Staffing Plan defined for the company or one of it's parent group companies in the hierarchy. To understand how you can do configure this, check [Staffing Plan](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.html)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3d0658c2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Branch
-
-Branches of your organization
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/daily-work-summary-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/daily-work-summary-group.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 22ae0b6b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/daily-work-summary-group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-#Daily Work Summary Group
-In order to facilitate daily reporting of employees, you can configure ERPNext to request employees email to send their work summary. To configure a new Daily Work Summary Group go to
-
-> Human Resources > Setup > Daily Work Summary Group
-
-You can set multiple groups with different set of _users_ from your user list with different _time to send emails_ and with separate _holiday list_ for each.
-
-You can also choose to customize the _Message_ you send to users.
-
-**Note:**
->1. If no holiday list is selected then the email will be sent every day.
->2. Name of a "Daily Work Summary Group" will be sent as the title for daily summary email.
->3. Mail will not be sent to the users of a disabled Daily Work Summary Group.
-via HR module or search bar and set the users for whom you want to send the reminder.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0fe314e7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Department
-
-You can configure the Departments in your organization, set Leave Block List for the department and also Leave and Expense Approvers.
-
-
-
-It is also possible for you to create and group departments as depicted below.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f8fc20aa..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Designation
-
-Designations in your organization
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employee-grade.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employee-grade.md
deleted file mode 100644
index ce21a322..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employee-grade.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-#Employee Grade
-ERPNext allows you to configure employee grades, helping you to easily categorize employees based on seniority or any other criteria. Employee Grades also helps you fetch employee records in bulk based on their grades while processing payroll, allocating leaves etc.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 65498692..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employment Type
-
-Various employment contracts you have with your employees.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/health-insurance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/health-insurance.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6ea12430..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/health-insurance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Health Insurance
-
-To create Health Insurance Provider:
-
-> Human Resources > Health Insurance > New
-
-
-
-In Employee, you can attached the provider and fill in the Health Insurance No.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 49001d60..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# HR Settings
-
-Global settings for HR related documents
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a7193b07..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index ad091920..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-hr-settings
-employment-type
-branch
-department
-designation
-employee-grade
-daily-work-summary-group
-health-insurance
-staffing-plan
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.md
deleted file mode 100644
index a0d002bb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/staffing-plan.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-# Staffing Plan
-Staffing Plan helps you to plan human resource recruitments for your Company. ERPNext allows you to do this at a group company level helping you efficiently plan and budget new hirings for a period. Job Openings can only be created as per the number of vacancies and budget as per the active Staffing Plan.
-
-> Human Resources > Setup > Staffing Plan > New Staffing Plan
-
-
-
-- **Designation:** The designations for which you are creating the Staffing Plan.
-- **Number of Positions:** The number of positions you plan to recruit for between the Staffing Plan from and to dates.
-- **Current Count:** This is the number of Employees already hired for the Designation.
-- **Vacancies:** The number of vacancies based on the Number of Positions you wish to recruit and the current Employee count.
-- **Estimated Cost Per Position:** You can specify the cost to company per position so that hiring officials can stick to the budget.
-
-
-
-**Total Estimated Budget** Once you enter the recruitment plan for all the designations, Staffing Plan will draw up the total estimated budget as per the plan.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/shift-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/shift-management.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bf0c0ac6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/shift-management.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-# Shift Management
-
-Shift Management section of Human Resources helps your Organization manage shifts of your employees.
-
-To use Shift Management in ERPNext,
-
- 1. Set Up a Shift Type.
- 2. Enter Shift Request.
- 3. View and Manage Shift Assignments.
-
-### Shift Type
-
-The Shift Type Set Up allows you to define the different types of Shifts in your Organization.
-
-To create a new Shift Type go to:
-
-Human Resources > Shift Management > Shift Type
-
-* Enter Shift Type, Start Time and End Time for quick entry.
-
-
-
-### Shift Request
-
-Shift Request is used by an employee to request for a particular Shift Type.
-
-To create a new Shift Request Log go to:
-
-Human Resources > Shift Management > Shift Request
-
-* Enter Shift Type, Employee, Company, From Date and To Date.
-
-
-
-### Shift Assignment
-
-* Once the Shift Request is submitted it automatically creates the Shift Assignments for an Employee.
-
-
-
-* You can also view Calendar view of Shift Assignments.
-
-
-
- {next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md
deleted file mode 100755
index af59ac87..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-
-# Training
-### Training Program
-
-Create Training Program and schedule Training Events under it. It has a dashboard linked to Training Event to view which event is under the Training Program.
-
-
-
-### Training Event
-
-Schedule seminars, workshops, conferences etc using Training Event linked to a Training Program. You can also invite your employees to attend the event using this feature.
-
-
-
-### Inviting Employees for Event
-
-You can invite your employees to attend the event. You can do so by selecting the employees to be invited in the employee table.
-
-By default the status of the employee will be 'Open'.
-
-
-
-When you submit the Training Event, a notification will be sent to the employee notifying that the Training has been scheduled. This is sent via Email Alert "Training Scheduled". You can modify this Email Alert to customize the message.
-
-### Training Result
-
-After completion of the training Employee-wise training results can be stored based on the Feedback received from the Trainer.
-
-
-
-When the Training Result is submitted, all the employees will receive an email notifying them that they must share their feedback via "Training Feedback". This is also managed via an Email Alert, so you can customize this alert too.
-
-### Training Feedback
-
-Employees can then share their feedback via Training Feedback.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/employee-advance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/employee-advance.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4b9a5d5c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/employee-advance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Advance
-
-Sometimes employees go outside for company's work and company pays some amount for their expenses in advance. In that time, the employee can create Employee Advance form and the expense approver can submit the advance record after verification. After Employee Advance gets submitted, the accountant releases the payment and makes the payment entry.
-
-To make a new Employee Advance, go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Travel and Expense Claims > Employee Advance > New Employee Advance
-
-
-
-Set the Employee ID, date, purpose and requested amount and “Save” the record.
-
-### Employee Advance Submission
-
-Employee Advance record can be created by any employee but they cannot submit the record.
-
-After saving Employee Advance, Employee should [Assign document to Approver](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.html). On assignment, approving user will also receive email notification. To automate email notification, you can also setup [Email Alert](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.html).
-
-After verification, approver can submit the Employee Advance form or reject the request.
-
-### Make Payment Entry
-After submission of Employee Advance record, accounts user will be able to create payment entry via Journal Entry or Payment Entry form.
-The payment entry will look like following:
-
-
-
-
-On submission of payment entry, the paid amount and status will be updated in Employee Advance record.
-
-### Adjust advances on Expense Claim
-Later when employee claims the expense and advance record can be fetched in Expense Claim and linked to the claim record.
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/expense-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/expense-claim.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fc08d2b9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/expense-claim.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-
-# Expense Claim
-
-Expense Claim is made when Employee’s make expenses out of their pocket on behalf of the company. For example, if they take a customer out for lunch, they can make a request for reimbursement via the Expense Claim form.
-
-To make a new Expense Claim, go to:
-
-> Human Resources > Travel and Expense Claims > Expense Claim > New Expense Claim
-
-
-
-Set the Employee ID, date and the list of expenses that are to be claimed and
-“Submit” the record.
-
-
-
-
-### Set Account for Employee
-Set employee's expense account on the employee form, system books an expense amount of an employee under this account.
-
-
-### Approving Expenses
-
-Approver for the Expense Claim is selected by an Employee himself. Employee can choose from the list of users who are configured as _Expense Approvers_ for their [Department](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.html).
-
-After saving Expense Claim, Employee should [Assign document to Approver](/docs/user/manual/en/using-eprnext/assignment.html). On assignment, approving user will also receive email notification. To automate email notification, you can also setup [Email Alert](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.html).
-
-Expense Claim Approver can update the “Sanctioned Amounts” against Claimed Amount of an Employee. If submitting, Approval Status should be submitted to Approved or Rejected. If Approved, then Expense Claim gets submitted. If rejected, then Expense Approver's comments can be added in the Comments section explaining why the claim was approved or rejected.
-
-### Booking the Expense
-
-On submission of Expense Claim, system books an expense against the expense account and the employee account
-
-
-User can view unpaid expense claim using report "Unclaimed Expense Claims"
-
-
-### Payment for Expense Claim
-
-To make payment against the expense claim, user has to click on Make > Bank Entry
-#### Expense Claim
-
-
-#### Payment Entry
-
-
-Note: This amount should not be clubbed with Salary because the amount will then be taxable to the Employee.
-
-Alternatively, a Payment Entry can be made for an employee and all outstanding Expense Claims will be pulled in.
-
-> Accounts > Payment Entry > New Payment Entry
-
-Set the Payment Type to "Pay", the Party Type to Employee, the Party to the employee being paid and the account being paid from. All outstanding expense claims will be pulled in and payments amounts can be allocated to each expense.
-
-
-### Linking with Task & Project
-
-* To Link Expense Claim with Task or Project specify the Task or the Project while making an Expense Claim
-
-
-
-This will update the Project cost with the Expense claim amounts
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ca24c75f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Travel and Expense Claim
-It is a common practice that employees incur expenses for official travel or other petty expenses which they reimburse from the employer periodically. ERPNext helps you efficiently manage advance payments made to employees, travel requests and expense claims and related approval workflows.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 818895ff..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-employee-advance
-expense-claim
-travel-request
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/travel-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/travel-request.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4974fcfd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/travel_and_expense_claim/travel-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-#Travel Request
-Employees can request funds for official travel using Travel Request. To create a new Travel Request, go to
-
-> Human Resource > Travel and Expense Claim > Travel Request > New Travel Request
-
-
-
-You can also mention the Travel Itinerary as well as the costs involved for the trip. Employees can also check `Travel Advance Required` if they wish to receive any upfront payment form the company.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0cc26022..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# User Manual (English)
-
-### Contents:
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 6b127e42..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-introduction
-setting-up
-accounts
-asset
-stock
-CRM
-selling
-buying
-manufacturing
-projects
-support
-human-resources
-subscription
-customer-portal
-website
-using-erpnext
-regional
-customize-erpnext
-education
-erpnext_integration
-quality-management
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ee528577..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,432 +0,0 @@
-
-# Concepts And Terms
-
-Before you start implementation, lets get familiar with the terminology that
-is used and some basic concepts in ERPNext.
-
-* * *
-
-### Basic Concepts
-
-#### Company
-
-This represents the Company records for which ERPNext is setup. With this same
-setup, you can create multiple Company records, each representing a different
-legal entity. The accounting for each Company will be different, but they will
-share the Customer, Supplier and Item records.
-
-> Setup > Company
-
-#### Customer
-
-Represents a customer. A Customer can be an individual or an organization.
-You can create multiple Contacts and Addresses for each Customer.
-
-> Selling > Customer
-
-#### Supplier
-
-Represents a supplier of goods or services. Your telephone company is a
-Supplier, so is your raw materials Supplier. Again, a Supplier can be an
-individual or an organization and has multiple Contacts and Addresses.
-
-> Buying > Supplier
-
-#### Item
-
-A Product, sub-product or Service that is either bought, sold or manufactured
-and is uniquely identified.
-
-> Stock > Item
-
-#### Account
-
-An Account is a heading under which financial and business transactions are
-carried on. For example, “Travel Expense” is an account, “Customer Zoe”,
-“Supplier Mae” are accounts. ERPNext creates accounts for Customers and
-Suppliers automatically.
-
-> Accounts > Chart of Accounts
-
-#### Address
-
-An address represents location details of a Customer or Supplier. These can be
-of different locations such as Head Office, Factory, Warehouse, Shop etc.
-
-> Selling > Address
-
-#### Contact
-
-An individual Contact belongs to a Customer or Supplier or is just an
-independent. A Contact has a name and contact details like email and phone
-number.
-
-> Selling > Contact
-
-#### Communication
-
-A list of all Communication with a Contact or Lead. All emails sent from the
-system are added to the Communication table.
-
-> Support > Communication
-
-#### Price List
-
-A Price List is a place where different rate plans can be stored. It’s a name
-you give to a set of Item Prices stored under a particular List.
-
-> Selling > Price List
-
-
-> Buying > Price List
-
-* * *
-
-### Accounting
-
-#### Fiscal Year
-
-Represents a Financial Year or Accounting Year. You can operate multiple
-Fiscal Years at the same time. Each Fiscal Year has a start date and an end
-date and transactions can only be recorded in this period. When you “close” a
-fiscal year, it's balances are transferred as “opening” balances for the next
-fiscal year.
-
-> Setup > Company > Fiscal Year
-
-#### Cost Center
-
-A Cost Center is like an Account, but the only difference is that its
-structure represents your business more closely than Accounts.
-For example, in your Chart of Accounts, you can separate your expenses by its type
-(i.e., travel, marketing, etc.). In your Chart of Cost Centers, you can separate
-them by product line or business group (e.g., online sales, retail sales, etc.).
-
-> Accounts > Chart of Cost Centers
-
-#### Journal Entry
-
-A document that contains General Ledger (GL) entries and the sum of Debits and
-Credits of those entries is the same. In ERPNext you can update Payments,
-Returns, etc., using Journal Entries.
-
-> Accounts > Journal Entry
-
-#### Sales Invoice
-
-A bill sent to Customers for delivery of Items (goods or services).
-
-> Accounts > Sales Invoice
-
-#### Purchase Invoice
-
-A bill sent by a Supplier for delivery of Items (goods or services).
-
-> Accounts > Purchase Invoice
-
-#### Currency
-
-ERPNext allows you to book transactions in multiple currencies. There is only
-one currency for your book of accounts though. While posting your Invoices with
-payments in different currencies, the amount is converted to the default
-currency by the specified conversion rate.
-
-> Setup > Currency
-
-* * *
-
-### Selling
-
-#### Customer Group
-
-A classification of Customers, usually based on market segment.
-
-> Selling > Setup > Customer Group
-
-#### Lead
-
-A person who could be a future source of business. A Lead may generate
-Opportunities. (from: “may lead to a sale”).
-
-> CRM > Lead
-
-#### Opportunity
-
-A potential sale. (from: “opportunity for a business”).
-
-> CRM > Opportunity
-
-#### Quotation
-
-Customer's request to price an item or service.
-
-> Selling > Quotation
-
-#### Sales Order
-
-A note confirming the terms of delivery and price of an Item (product or
-service) by the Customer. Deliveries, Work Orders and Invoices are made
-on basis of Sales Orders.
-
-> Selling > Sales Order
-
-#### Territory
-
-A geographical area classification for sales management. You can set targets
-for Territories and each sale is linked to a Territory.
-
-> Selling > Setup > Territory
-
-#### Sales Partner
-
-A third party distributer / dealer / affiliate / commission agent who sells
-the company’s products usually for a commission.
-
-> Selling > Setup > Sales Partner
-
-#### Sales Person
-
-Someone who pitches to the Customer and closes deals. You can set targets for
-Sales Persons and tag them in transactions.
-
-> Selling > Setup > Sales Person
-
-* * *
-
-### Buying
-
-#### Purchase Order
-
-A contract given to a Supplier to deliver the specified Items at the specified
-cost, quantity, dates and other terms.
-
-> Buying > Purchase Order
-
-#### Material Request
-
-A request made by a system User, or automatically generated by ERPNext based
-on reorder level or projected quantity in Production Plan for purchasing a set
-of Items.
-
-> Buying > Material Request
-
-* * *
-
-### Stock (Inventory)
-
-#### Warehouse
-
-A logical Warehouse against which stock entries are made.
-
-> Stock > Warehouse
-
-#### Stock Entry
-
-Material transfer from a Warehouse, to a Warehouse or from one Warehouse to
-another.
-
-> Stock > Stock Entry
-
-#### Delivery Note
-
-A list of Items with quantities for shipment. A Delivery Note will reduce the
-stock of Items for the Warehouse from where you ship. A Delivery Note is
-usually made against a Sales Order.
-
-> Stock > Delivery Note
-
-#### Purchase Receipt
-
-A note stating that a particular set of Items were received from the Supplier,
-most likely against a Purchase Order.
-
-> Stock > Purchase Receipt
-
-#### Serial Number
-
-A unique number given to a particular unit of an Item.
-
-> Stock > Serial Number
-
-#### Batch
-
-A number given to a group of units of a particular Item that may be purchased
-or manufactured in a group.
-
-> Stock > Batch
-
-#### Stock Ledger Entry
-
-A unified table for all material movement from one warehouse to another. This
-is the table that is updated when a Stock Entry, Delivery Note, Purchase
-Receipt, and Sales Invoice (POS) is made.
-
-#### Stock Reconciliation
-
-Update Stock of multiple Items from a spreadsheet (CSV) file.
-
-> Stock > Stock Reconciliation
-
-#### Quality Inspection
-
-A note prepared to record certain parameters of an Item at the time of Receipt
-from Supplier, or Delivery to Customer.
-
-> Stock > Quality Inspection
-
-#### Item Group
-
-A classification of Item.
-
-> Stock > Setup > Item Group
-
-* * *
-
-### Human Resource Management
-
-#### Employee
-
-Record of a person who has been in present or past, in the employment of the
-company.
-
-> Human Resources > Employee
-
-#### Leave Application
-
-A record of an approved or rejected request for leave.
-
-> Human Resource > Leave Application
-
-#### Leave Type
-
-A type of leave (e.g., Sick Leave, Maternity Leave, etc.).
-
-> Human Resource > Leave and Attendance > Leave Type
-
-#### Payroll Entry
-
-A tool that helps in creation of multiple Salary Slips for Employees.
-
-> Human Resource > Payroll Entry
-
-#### Salary Slip
-
-A record of the monthly salary given to an Employee.
-
-> Human Resource > Salary Slip
-
-#### Salary Structure
-
-A template identifying all the components of an Employees' salary (earnings),
-tax and other social security deductions.
-
-> Human Resource > Salary and Payroll > Salary Structure
-
-#### Appraisal
-
-A record of the performance of an Employee over a specified period based on
-certain parameters.
-
-> Human Resources > Appraisal
-
-#### Appraisal Template
-
-A template recording the different parameters of an Employees' performance and
-their weightage for a particular role.
-
-> Human Resources > Employee Setup > Appraisal Template
-
-#### Attendance
-
-A record indicating presence or absence of an Employee on a particular day.
-
-> Human Resources > Attendance
-
-* * *
-
-### Manufacturing
-
-#### Bill of Materials (BOM)
-
-A list of Operations and Items with their quantities, that are required to
-produce another Item. A Bill of Materials (BOM) is used to plan purchases and
-do product costing.
-
-> Manufacturing > BOM
-
-#### Workstation
-
-A place where a BOM operation takes place. It is useful to calculate the
-direct cost of the product.
-
-> Manufacturing > Workstation
-
-#### Work Order
-
-A document signaling production (manufacture) of a particular Item with
-specified quantities.
-
-> Manufacturing > Work Order
-
-#### Production Planning Tool
-
-A tool for automatic creation of Work Orders and Purchase Requests based
-on Open Sales Orders in a given period.
-
-> Manufacturing > Production Planning Tool
-
-* * *
-
-### Website
-
-#### Blog Post
-
-A short article that appears in the “Blog” section of the website generated
-from the ERPNext website module. Blog is a short form of “Web Log”.
-
-> Website > Blog Post
-
-#### Web Page
-
-A web page with a unique URL (web address) on the website generated from
-ERPNext.
-
-> Website > Web Page
-
-* * *
-
-### Setup / Customization
-
-#### Custom Field
-
-A user defined field on a form / table.
-
-> Setup > Customize ERPNext > Custom Field
-
-#### Global Defaults
-
-This is the section where you set default values for various parameters of the
-system.
-
-> Setup > Data > Global Defaults
-
-#### Print Heading
-
-A title that can be set on a transaction just for printing. For example, you
-want to print a Quotation with a title “Proposal” or “Pro forma Invoice”.
-
-> Setup > Branding and Printing > Print Headings
-
-#### Terms and Conditions
-
-Text of your terms of contract.
-
-> Selling > Setup > Terms and Conditions
-
-#### Unit of Measure (UOM)
-
-How quantity is measured for an Item. E.g., Kg, No., Pair, Packet, etc.
-
-> Stock > Setup > UOM
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ab733386..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Do I Need An Erp
-
-ERPNext is a modern tool that covers not only accounting but also all other
-business functions, on an integrated platform. It has many benefits over both
-traditional accounting as well as ERP applications.
-
-### Benefits over traditional accounting software:
-
- * Do a lot more than just accounting! Manage inventory, billing, quotes, leads, payroll and a lot more.
- * Keep all your data safe and in one place. Don’t keep hunting for data when you need it across spreadsheets and different computers. Manage everyone on the same page. All users get the same updated data.
- * Stop repetitive work. Don’t enter the same information from your word processor to your accounting tool. It's all integrated.
- * Keep track. Get the entire history of a customer or a deal in one place.
-
-### Benefits over big ERPs
-
- * $$$ - Saves money.
- * **Easier to configure:** Big ERPs are notoriously hard to setup and will ask you a zillion questions before you can do something meaningful.
- * **Easier to use:** Modern web like user interface will keep your users happy and in familiar territory.
- * **Open Source :** This software is always free and you can host it anywhere you like.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 99adb079..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-# Getting Started with ERPNext
-
-There are many ways to get started with ERPNext.
-
-### 1\. See the Demo
-
-If you want to check out the user interface and **feel** the application, just
-see the demo at:
-
- *
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 535fcfec..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-do-i-need-an-erp
-open-source
-getting-started-with-erpnext
-the-champion
-implementation-strategy
-key-workflows
-concepts-and-terms
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/key-workflows.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/key-workflows.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8e5894d5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/key-workflows.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-# Flow Chart Of Transactions In ERPNext
-
-This diagram covers how ERPNext tracks your company information across key
-functions. This diagram does not cover all the features of ERPNext.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-_Note: Not all of the steps are mandatory. ERPNext allows you to freely skip
-steps if you want to simplify the process._
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/open-source.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/open-source.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5cf6fe52..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/open-source.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-# Open Source
-
-The source code is an Open Source software. It is open for anyone to
-understand, extend or improve. And it is free!
-
-Advantages of an Open Source software are:
-
- 1. You can choose to change your service provider anytime.
- 2. You can host the application anywhere, including your own server to gain complete ownership and privacy of the data.
- 3. You can access a community to support you, incase you need help. You are not dependant on your service provider.
- 4. You can benefit from using a product that is critiqued and used by a wide range of people, who have reported hundreds of issues and suggestions to make this product better, and this will always continue.
-
-
----
-
-### ERPNext Source Code
-
-ERPnext source repository is hosted at GitHub and can be found here
-
-- [https://github.com/frappe/erpnext](https://github.com/frappe/erpnext)
-
-
----
-
-### Alternatives
-
-There are many Open Source ERPs you can consider. Popular ones are:
-
- 1. Odoo
- 2. OpenBravo
- 3. Apache OfBiz
- 4. xTuple
- 5. Compiere (and forks)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 670cae62..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-
-# The Champion
-
-
-
-We have seen dozens of ERP implementations over the past few years and we
-realize that successful implementation is a lot about intangibles and
-attitude.
-
-**ERPs are not required.**
-
-Like exercise.
-
-The human body may seem like it does not require exercise today or even tomorrow,
-but in the long run, if you wish to maintain your body and its health, you
-should get on the treadmill.
-
-In the same way, ERPs improve the health of your organization over a long run
-by keeping it fit and efficient. The more you delay putting things in order,
-the more time you lose, and the closer you get to a major disaster.
-
-So when you start implementing an ERP, keep your sight on the long term
-benefits. Like exercise, its painful in the short run, but will do wonders if
-you stay on course.
-
-* * *
-
-## The Champion
-
-ERP means organization wide change and it does not happen without effort.
-Every change requires a champion and it is the duty of the champion to
-organize and energize the entire team towards implementation. The champion
-needs to be resilient incase something goes wrong .
-
-In many organizations we have seen, the champion is most often the owner or a
-senior manager. Occasionally, the champion is an outsider who is hired for a
-particular purpose.
-
-In either case, you must identify your champion first.
-
-Most likely it's **you!**
-
-Lets Begin!
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/capacity-planning.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/capacity-planning.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cd2410f4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/capacity-planning.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-
-# Capacity Planning based on Work Order
-
-Capacity Planning functionality helps you in tracking production jobs allocated on each Workstation.
-
-
-
-Follow are the steps to use Capacity Planning Feature in your ERPNext account.
-
-1. Operations
-
- To add operations, go to:
-
- `Manufacturing > Bill of Materials > Operations`
-
-2. Workstation
-
- Add each Workstation in your ERPNext account from:
-
- `Manufacturing > Bill of Materials > Workstation`
-
- In the Workstation master, you can define which operations will be performed on it, what are the cost associated with it, and what are the working hours of that Workstation.
-
-3. Bill of Materials (BOM):
-
- In a BOM, with the list of raw material needed, for manufacturing, you can also list operation and workstations through which those raw materials will be processed.
-
-4. Work Order:
-
- On submission of Work Order, Timesheet for Operations. This helps you allocate production jobs on each Workstation, as well as you can update actual time taken for each Operation.
-
-### Error due to Capacity Planning
-
-**Question:** On Submission of Work Order, we are getting following error message.
-
-
-
-**Answer: **Please check if you have updated Working Hours in the Workstation master? If not, then please update it and then try to submit Work Order.
-
-On submission of Work Order, Operations (as added in the BOM) are allocated on the workstation. Each operation should start and end on the same day. If a system is not able to schedule that operation in a day, then system request you to divide that Project, so that system can allocate smaller operations in a day.
-
-If you have update working hours in the Workstation, but still getting this issue, that because one of your operation is taking too long, and cannot be completed in a day. Please divide that operation into smaller operations, so that it can be allocated on Workstation and completed on the same day.
-
-### Avoid Working Hours of Workstation
-
-If you want to ignore above validation and allow scheduling of production job beyond the working hours of the Workstation, enable
-Overtime in the Manufacturing Settings.
-
-
-
-If you want to complete disable Capacity Planning feature, in the Manufacturing Settings, check field "Disable Capacity Planning and Time Tracking".
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/customer-provided-items.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/customer-provided-items.md
deleted file mode 100644
index e65cd7d0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/customer-provided-items.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customer Provided Items
-
-In Contract Manufacturing, in some cases Customer provides specific items as one or few of the BOM components. These items cannot be received using a `Buying Cycle` since that will mean making Customer as a Supplier at the same time and it will go through each doctype in the cycle.
-
-In this feature, Customer Provided Item is received through `Stock Entry` from a `Material Request` with type `Customer provided`.
-
-
-
-Here are the steps on how to setup a `Customer Provided` item.
-
-1. Got to Item Doctype and add a new `Customer Provided` item.
-
- `Stock > Item >`
-
-2. In the `Purchase, Replenishment Details` section, check `Is Customer
- Provided` and set a default `Customer`.
-
-
-
-How to receive a `Customer Provided` Items?
-
-1. If `Production Plan` is used, `Material Request` for this items can be auto
- created.
-
-
-
-2. Once a component in a BOM is set as `Customer Provided` and `Material
- Request` is created from `Production Plan`, it will create both `Material Request` with type `Purchase` and `Customer Provided`. From there, a `Stock Entry` with purpose `Material Receipt` can be created.
-
-
-
-3. A `Material Request` can have multiple `Stock Entry` - Material Receipt. It
- will reflect it in the status.
-
-
-
-4. Customer will be able to track their `Material Requests` in a Web Portal
- `Material Requests`. The portal is filtered to show only the `Material Request` of the customer.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 91d4a6c4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-nested-bom-structure
-production-planning-subassembly
-valuation-based-on-field-in-bom
-capacity-planning
-open-work-orders
-material_consumption
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/material_consumption.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/material_consumption.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 911e0c4b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/material_consumption.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-#Material consumption
-
-Material Consumption functionality allows you to have multiple consumption `Stock Entry` against a Work Order. To enable this, go to Manufacturing > Manufacturing Settings.
-
-
-
-Once enabled, a `Material Consumption` button will be available in Work Order once started.
-
-
-
-When button is clicked, it will do the following:
-
-1. It will create Stock Entry with purpose `Material Consumption for Manufacture`.
-
-
-
-2. If the "Backflush Raw Materials Based On" in the Manufacturing Settings is set to `BOM`, if will propose to consume all required qty for manufacture.
-3. If the "Backflush Raw Materials Based On" in the Manufacturing Settings is set to `Material Transferred for Manufacture`, if will propose to consume all transferred qty for manufacture.
-4. Once submitted, it will update `Consumed Qty` column in the Work Order.
-
-
-
-5. In succeeding Material Consumption, it will suggest unconsumed qty.
-6. Once "Finish" button is clicked in Work Order, it will take into account consumed qty.
-
-### Validations
-
-* If "Allow Multiple Material Consumption" is not set in Manufacturing Settings but "Material Consumption for Manufacture" is use in Stock Entry.
-
-
-
-* Cannot cancel "Material Consumption for Manufacture" for completed Work Order.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a48dffa0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-
-#Nested BOM Structure
-
-**Question:** Our manufacturing process involves producing sub-assembly items before final product. How should we manage BOM master in this scenario?
-
-**Answer:** You should create BOM for item in the order of their production. BOM for the sub-assembly item should be created first. BOM for the Product Order item should be created last. Let's consider an example to understand this better.
-
-A computer assembler is creating a BOM for PC. They also manufacture Hard Disk and DVD Drive themselve. They should first create BOM for Hard Disk and DVD Drive. After that BOM for the PC should be created.
-
-BOM of PC will have all the raw-material items selected in it. Hard Disk and DVD Drive (sub-assemblies) will also be selected as raw-material items. For the sib-assembly items, respective BOM no. will be fetched as well.
-
-
-
-Following is how the structure of nested BOM will look:
-
-
-
--Personal Computer (FG Item)
----- Mother Board
----- SMTP
----- Accessories and wires
-----Hard Disk (sub-assembly)
- ------- Item A
- ------- Item B
- ------- Item C
-----DVD Drive (sub-assembly)
- ------- Item X
- ------- Item Y
- ------- Item Z - -
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/open-work-orders.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/open-work-orders.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cdb6ceb4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/open-work-orders.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-# Open Work Order Report
-
-We can easily identify the progress of manufacturing of certain items in our organizations using Open Work Orders in ERPNext.
-
------ Mother Board
----- SMTP
----- Accessories and wires
-----Hard Disk (sub-assembly)
- ------- Item A
- ------- Item B
- ------- Item C
-----DVD Drive (sub-assembly)
- ------- Item X
- ------- Item Y
- ------- Item Z - -
-
-In this report, users are able to see what items need to be produced, total quantity to be produced and also any produced items before. To further detail, users can proceed to click on the work order e.g; MFG-WO-2018-00005.
-
-With this report, we are able to know what items to be produced, in this report qty to manufacture is 2.
-
-The important information is the warehouses which warehouses to store our in-progress items and the finished manufactured items. This should enable us to track our stocks inventory and translate to efficiency in costing.
-
-We can prepare our manufacturing in mannerly order based on the required items in source warehouse where the items been stored. See figure 3.
-
-Figure 4 Manufacturing operationsCertain items required certain manufacturing processes and steps. The open work orders will be able to tell us the manufacturing steps and their status if done or not yet done. It definitely will help in organizing the jobs in better way.
-
-This report is helping to calculate the operation cost required in the manufacturing. This is to give us certain information required to make the business decision. See below for more details.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/production-planning-subassembly.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/production-planning-subassembly.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a26a3e7a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/production-planning-subassembly.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-#Production Planning & Subassembly
-
-if you need Production Planning Tool to consider raw-materials required for the manufacturing of sub-assembly items selected in the BOM, please check following instructions to achieve the same.
-
-Production Planning Tool has field called "Use Multi-Level BOM", checking which will consider raw-material of sub-assemblies as well in the material planning. If this field is not checked, then it will consider sub-assembly as an item, and won't consider raw-material required for the manufacturing of that sub-assembly.
-
-
-
-`Use Multi-Level BOM` field is also there in the Work Order and Stock Entry. If checked, raw-materials of sub-assembly item will be consumed in the manufacturing process, and not the sub-assembly item itself.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/scrap-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/scrap-management.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 94de33c1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/scrap-management.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-# Production Scrap Management
-
-Scrap means waste that either has no economic value or only the value of its basic material content recoverable through recycling.
-
-Scrap is generally availed at the end of the manufacture process. Also you can find some products that are damaged or that are unusable due to expiry or for some other reason, which needs to be scraped.
-
-In ERPNext, at the end of manufacturing process, scrap items are accounted in the scrap warehouse.s
-
-### Scrap in Bill of Materials
-
-You can update estimated scrap quantity of an item in the BOM, Scrap table. If required, you can reselect a raw-material item as scrap.
-
-
-
-### Scrap in Manufacture Entry
-
-When production is completed, Finish / Manufacture Entry is created against a Production Order. In this entry, scrap item is fetched in the Item table, with only Target Warehouse updated for it. Ensure that Valuation Rate is updated for this item for the accounts posting purposes.
-
-
-
-> Scrap from the BOM will only work if Manufacture Entry is created based on BOM, and not based on Material Transfer. This is configurable from Manufacturing Settings.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0d50ab60..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-#Valuation Based On in BOM
-
-**Question:** What are for various options in `Valuation Based On` in the Bill Of Materials (BOM)?
-
-**Answer:** There are 3 available options in the Valuation Based On field:
-
-
-
-**Valuation Rate:** Item valuation rate is defined based on it's purchase or manufacture value.
-
-For Purchase Item, it is defined based on charges entered in the Purchase Receipt. If you don't have any Purchase Receipt
-made for an item or a Stock Reconciliation, then there won't be any Valuation Rate for that item.
-
-**Price List Rate:** This option allows to pull item rates from [Price List.](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.html)
-
-**Last Purchase Rate:** It will be the last Purchase (Order) Rate of an item.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 71e5e0c9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
-
-# Bill Of Materials
-
-At the heart of the Manufacturing system is the **Bill of Materials** (BOM).
-The **BOM** is a list of all materials (either bought or made) and operations
-that go into a finished product or sub-Item. In ERPNext, the component could
-have its own BOM hence forming a tree of Items with multiple levels.
-
-
-
-
-To make accurate Purchase Requests, you must always maintain correct BOMs.
-To make a new BOM:
-
-> Manufacturing > Bill of Materials > New BOM
-
-
-
-* To add Operations select 'With Operation'. The Operations table shall appear.
-
-
-
- * Select the Item for which you want to make the BOM.
- * Check 'Inspection Required' to make the 'Quality Inspection' mandatory for raw materials and the finished goods.
- * Add the operations that you have to go through to make that particular Item in the “Operations” table. For each operation, you will be asked to enter a Workstation. You must create new Workstations as and when necessary.
- * Workstations are defined only for product costing and Work Order Operations scheduling purposes not inventory.
- * Inventory is tracked in Warehouses not Workstations.
-
-###Costing of a BOM
-
-* The Costing section in BOM gives an approximate cost of producing the Item.
-
-* Add the list of Items you require for each operation, with its quantity. This Item could be a purchased Item or a sub-assembly with its own BOM. If the row Item is a manufactured Item and has multiple BOMs, select the appropriate BOM. You can also define if a part of the Item goes into scrap.
-
-
-
-* This cost can be updated on by using the 'Update Cost' button.
-
-
-
-* User can select the currency in the BOM
-* System calculates the costing based on the price list currency
-
-
-
-### Materials Required(exploded)
-
-This table lists down all the Material required for the Item to be Manufactured.
-It also fetches sub-assemblies along with the quantity.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8947be95..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-# Manufacturing
-
-ERPNext comes batteries included for all requirements of a manufacturing business like Bill of Materials tracking, Production Order planning and execution, procurement and lot more.
-
-
-
-### Bill of Material, Production Order and More
-
-The Manufacturing module in ERPNext helps you to maintain multi-level Bill of Materials (BOMs) for your Items. It helps in product costing, production planning, creating work orders for your manufacturing shop floors and planning inventory by getting your material requirement via BOMs (also called Material Requirements Planning MRP).
-
-
-
-You can also effectively track operations like:
-
-* Production Orders against customer's Sales Order
-* Material Planning
-* Purchasing based on Material Planning an reorder level.
-* Track actual material transfer against a Production Order
-* Despatched manufactured items to the Customers.
-* View reports
-
-### ERPNext Manufacturing Demo
-
-Check the following video to educate yourself on each feature in the manufacturing module.
-
-
-
-### User Manual
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index c21527cc..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-introduction
-workstation
-operation
-bill-of-materials
-work-order
-job-card
-subcontracting
-item-alternative
-tools
-setup
-articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 79f57ffa..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Introduction
-
-
-
-### Types of Production Planning
-
-Broadly there are three types of Production Planning Systems
-
- * __Make-to-Stock:__ In these systems, production is planned based on a forecast and the Items are then sold to distributors or customers. All fast moving consumer goods that are sold in retail shops like soaps, packaged water etc and electronics like phones etc are Made-to-Stock.
- * __Make-to-Order:__ In these systems, manufacturing takes place after a firm order is placed by a customer.
- * __Engineer-to-Order:__ In this case each sale is a separate project and has to be designed and engineered to the requirements of the customer. Common examples of this are any custom business like furniture, machine tools, speciality devices, metal fabrication etc.
-
-Most small and medium sized manufacturing businesses are based on a make-to-
-order or engineer-to-order system and so is ERPNext.
-
-For engineer-to-order systems, the Manufacturing module should be used along
-with the Projects module..
-
-#### Manufacturing and Inventory
-
-You can track work-in-progress by creating work-in-progress Warehouses.
-
-ERPNext will help you track material movement by automatically creating Stock
-Entries from your Work Orders by building from Bill of Materials.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/item-alternative.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/item-alternative.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 48f6d1c9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/item-alternative.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Alternative
-
-Item alternative feature is very useful in manufacturing industries, if the raw material defined in the BOM is not available during the production process then their respective available alternative item used to complete the production process.
-
-To make item alternative for an item, kindly enable the "Allow Alternative Item" in the item.
-
-
-* To make item alternative, goto module Stock > Items and Pricing > Item Alternative
-
-
-The user can enable Two-Way between an item and their alternative item if both can be used as an alternative to each other
-
-
-### Item Alternative for work order
-
-To allow to use alternative items in the manufacturing process user can configure allow an alternative item in the BOM/Work Order
-
-##### Provision to allow alternative item in the bom
-
-
-##### Provision to allow alternative item in the work order
-User can also enable/disable allow alternative item in the work order
-
-
-##### How it works for work order
-
-
-### Item Alternative for subcontract
-In subcontract, the user has to transfer raw materials to the subcontracted supplier to get finished good from them. If the raw material is not available in the stock, with this feature, the user can transfer the alternate item of the subcontracted raw material to the supplier.
-
-##### How it works for subcontract
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/job-card.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/job-card.md
deleted file mode 100644
index f697557e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/job-card.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-# Job Card
-
-A Job Card is created from the Work Order and given to each of the workstation in the manufacturing floor to start the production of an item with a certain quantity in each of the operations defined in the Work Order.
-
-The Job Card extends the functionality of the Work Order in the manufacturing process by adding/defining phase of operations in work orders and assigning each operations into their respective workstation.
-
-Job Card allows each operation's workstation to issue a “Material Request” and “Stock Transfer to Manufacture” for raw material required against a “Job Card” order assigned to them.
-
-Job Card completion will change the production status in Work Order, we can track completion of production progress for each of the operations defined in the work order.
-
-> Manufacturing > Work Order > Create Job Card
-
-### Job Card creation based on BOM
-
-In the Work Order, the Operations and Workstations are fetched from the BOM of an Item. Hence, you should ensure that Routing (master of Operations and Production) is configured in the BOM. Here are the steps for the same.
-
-- Define the Item BOM for production, select “With Operations” on the checklist.
-
-
-
-- Define the production flow by selecting operations in BOM.
-
-
-
-- Select Item required for production, assign each of the Item into Operations.
-
-
-
-> You can select “Transfer Material Against Job Card” to transfer raw material for production based on the Job Card, and not by Work Order.
-
-Define “Operations” cycle/flow involved in the Item
-Select the Item required and assign material to operations for manufacturing.
-
-
-
-You can select “Transfer Material Against Job Card” on the Bill of Material to transfer Material for Production based on Job Card.
-
-### Routing in Work Order
-
-Job Card will be created upon submission of the Work Order based on the Operations defined in the Bill of Material. Each Job Card represents job order for each Workstations on the manufacturing floor.
-
-#### Select Work Order with Item to Manufacture
-
-In the Work Order, define if you want to transfer material against a Job Order or no.
-
-
-
-#### Job Card Creation
-
-On submission of Work Order, Job Cards will be auto-created based on the values in the Routing table.
-
-
-
-### Job Card
-
-Each Job Card created will have Workstation & Operations assigned. Raw material required from each source warehouse will be calculated based on quantity required for production.
-
-Employee assignment and timing detail will also be defined in Job Card.
-
-
-
-#### Material Request against Job Card
-
-A Material Request will be raised from the Job Card as a basis/order to prepare raw-material required for manufacturing process. The Material Request raised will have its reference to the original Job Card number.
-
-
-
-Track the Manufacturing Progress in The Work Order by The Completion of Each Operations defined in Work Order.
-
-Job Card completion allow us to track the manufacturing progress inside the Work Order by looking of the completion of each Operations that are related in the Work Order.
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fe158e8d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Operation
-
-### Operation
-
-Stores a list of all Manufacturing Operations, its description and the Default Workstation for the Operation.
-
-You can also create a Operation by:
-
-> Manufacturing > Documents > Operation > New
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-plan.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-plan.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5f3e32d2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-plan.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-# Production Plan
-
-Production Plan helps user to plan production against multiple sales orders or the material requests. Also, it helps in Material Procurement planning for the raw-material item, based on the quantity of finished product to be manufactured.
-
-To use the Production Plan, go to:
-
-> Manufacturing > Production > Production Plan
-
-
-
-## Planning for Production
-
-#### Production Against Sales Orders
-
-* Select option as Sales Order from the drop down list of get items from. System will show the filters, using that we can pull the sales orders for the production.
-
-
-
-* Click on Get Sales Orders to fetch sales orders based on above filters
-
-
-
-* Click on Get Items for Work Order to fetch the items from the above sales orders.
-
-
- * Include Exploded Items :- To include subassembly items of raw materials in the production.
-
-#### Production Against Material Requests
-
-* Select option as Material Request from the drop down list of get items from. System will show the filters, using that we can pull the material requests for the production.
-
-
-
-* Click on Get Material Request to fetch material requests based on above filters
-
-
-
-* Click on Get Items for Work Order to fetch the items from the above material requests.
-
-
-
-## Planning for Material Requests
-* Click on get raw materials for production button to fetch raw materials required in the production.
-
-
-
- * Include Non Stock Items :- To add non stock items in the material request planning.
- * Include Subcontracted Items :- To add subcontracted item's raw materials if include exploded items is disabled
- * Ignore Existing Ordered Quantity :- If enabled then system will not check the projected quantity to make material request.
-
-# Options To Make Work Order and Material Request
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5430d779..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-Global settings for manufacturing Processes
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 68a2ad8c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-manufacturing-settings
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 929b04ba..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-
-#Manufacturing Settings
-
-Manufacturing Settings can be found at:
-
-`Manufacturing > Setup > Manufacturing Settings`
-
-
-
-####Disable Capacity Planning and Time Tracking
-
-As per Capacity Planning feature, when Work Order is created for an item, for each Operation, Time Log is created. Based on actual Operation Time, Time Logs is updated. This also provides total Operations Cost against Work Order.
-
-If you don't track actual operations time, and want to disable creation of Time Log based on Operations, you should check "Disable Capacity Planning and Time Tracking" in the Manufacturing Settings.
-
-####Allow Overtime
-
-In the Workstation master, actual working hours are defined (say 101m to 6pm). As per the Capacity Planning, Time Logs are created against Workstation, for tracking actual operations hour. It also considers working hours of a Workstation when scheduling job (via Time Log).
-
-
-
-As per the standard validation, if Operation cannot be completed within working hours of Workstation, then user is asked to divide an Operation into multiple and smaller Operations. However, if `Allow Overtime` field is checked, while creating Time Logs for Operation, working hours of Workstation will not be validated. In this case, Time Logs for Operation will be created beyond working hours of Workstation as well.
-
-####Allow Production on Holidays
-
-Holiday of a company can be recorded in the [Holiday List](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/) master. While scheduling production job on workstation, system doesn't consider a day listed in the Holiday list. If you want production job to be scheduled on holidays as well, `Allow Production on Holidays` field should be checked.
-
-
-
-####Over Production Allowance Percentage
-
-While making Work Orders against a Sales Order, the system will only allow production item quantity to be lesser than or equal to the quantity in the Sales Order. In case you wish to allow Work Orders to be raised with greater quantity, you can mention the Over Production Allowance Percentage here.
-
-####Back-flush Raw Materials Based On
-
-When creating Manufacture Entry, raw-material items are back-flush based on BOM of production item. If you want raw-material items to be back-flushed based on Material Transfer entry made against that Work Order instead, then you should set Back-flush Raw Materials Based On "Material Transferred for Manufacture".
-
-
-
-####Capacity Planning For (Days)
-
-Define no. of days for which system will do production job allocation in advance.
-
-####Time Between Operations (in mins)
-
-Time gap between two production operations.
-
-####Default Work In Progress Warehouse
-
-This Warehouse will be auto-updated in the Work In Progress Warehouse field of Work Order.
-
-####Default Finished Goods Warehouse
-
-This Warehouse will be auto-updated in the Work In Progress Warehouse field of Work Order.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1a3d0fce..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-
-# Subcontracting
-
-Subcontracting is a type of job contract that seeks to outsource certain types
-of work to other companies. It allows work on more than one phase of the
-project to be done at once, often leading to a quicker completion.
-Subcontracting is practiced by various industries. For example, manufacturers
-making a number of products from complex components subcontract certain
-components and package them at their facilities.
-
-If your business involves outsourcing certain processes to a third party
-Supplier, where you buy the raw material from, you can track this by using the
-sub-contracting feature of ERPNext.
-
-### Setup Sub-Contracting:
-
- 1. Create separate Items for the unprocessed and the processed product. For example if you supply unpainted X to your Supplier and the Supplier returns you X, you can create two Items: “X-unpainted” and “X”.
- 2. Create a Warehouse for your Supplier so that you can keep track of Items supplied. (you may supply a months worth of Items in one go).
- 3. For the processed Item, in the Item master, set “Is Sub Contracted Item” to “Yes”.
-
-
-
-
-__Step 1:__ Make a Bill of Materials for the processed Item, with the unprocessed
-Items as sub-items. For example, If you are manufacturing a pen, the processed
-pen will be named under Bill of Materials(BOM), whereas, the refill, knob, and
-other items which go into the making of pen, will be categorized as sub-items.
-
-
-
-__Step 2:__ Make a Purchase Order for the processed Item. When you “Save”, in the “Raw Materials Supplied”, all your un-processed Items will be updated based on your Bill of Materials. You can also select the warehouse from which the material would be reserved for sub contracting.
-
-
-
-Once the PO is submitted, you can view the reserved quantity of the item from the item dashboard as well.
-
-
-
-__Step 3:__ Make a Stock Entry to deliver the raw material Items to your Supplier.
-
-
-
-__Step 4:__ Receive the Items from your Supplier via Purchase Receipt. Make sure to check the “Consumed Quantity” in the “Raw Materials” table so that the
-correct stock is maintained at the Supplier’s end.
-
-
-
-> Note 1: Make sure that the “Rate” of processed Item is the processing rate
-(excluding the raw material rate).
-
-> Note 2: ERPNext will automatically add the raw material rate for your
-valuation purpose when you receive the finished Item in your stock.
-
-> Note 3: ERPNext will automatically default the Reserve Warehouse in the PO
-from the BOM. If not found in the BOM, it would default it from the default
-warehouse setup in the Item.
-
-### Video Help
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-update-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-update-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dd8b9fe1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-update-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-
-# BOM Update Tool
-
-From BOM Update Tool, you can replace a sub-assembly BOM and update costs of all BOMs.
-
-### Replace BOM
-Using this utility, you can replace an existing BOM of sub-assembly item, with a new one. The system will update the new BOM in all the parent BOMs where it was used.
-
-To use the BOM Update Tool, go to:
-
-> Manufacturing > Tools > BOM Update Tool
-
-Let's consider a scenario to understand this better.
-
-Suppose a company manufactures computers, Bill of Material of of the computer will look like this:
-
-1. Monitor
-1. Key Board
-1. Mouse
-1. CPU
-
-Out of all the items above, CPU is asembled separately. Hence separate BOM will be created for the CPU. Following are the items from the BOM of CPU.
-
-1. 250 GB Hard Disk
-1. Mother Board
-1. Processor
-1. SMTP
-1. DVD player
-
-If we have more items to be added , or existing items to be edited in the BOM of CPU, then we should create new BOM for it.
-
-1. _350 GB Hard Disk_
-1. Mother Board
-1. Processor
-1. SMTP
-1. DVD player
-
-To update new BOM in all the parent BOMs, where CPU is selected as raw-material, you can use Replace utility.
-
-
-
-In this tool, you should select Current BOM, and New BOM. On clicking Replace button, current BOM of CPU will be replaced with New BOM in the BOM of finished Item (Computer).
-
-**Will BOM Replace Tool work for replacing finsihed item in BOM?**
-
-No. You should Cancel and Amend current BOM, or create a new BOM for finished item.
-
-### Update BOM Cost
-Using the button **Update latest price in all BOMs**, you can update cost of all Bill of Materials, based on latest purchase price / price list rate / valuation rate of raw materials.
-
-On clicking of this buttom, system will create a background process to update all the BOM's cost. It is processed via background jobs because this process can take a few minutes (depending on the number of BOMs) to update all the BOMs.
-
-This functionality can also be executed automatically on daily basis. For that, you need to enable "Update BOM Cost Automatically" from Manufacturing Settings.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9919d806..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tools
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index bdd357cd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-bom-update-tool
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/work-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/work-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 56742c20..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/work-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,126 +0,0 @@
-
-# Work Order
-
-
-A Work Order is a document that is given to
-the manufacturing shop floor by the Production Planner as a signal to produce
-a certain quantity of a certain Item. The Work Order also helps to generate
-the material requirements (Stock Entry) for the Item to be produced from its
-**Bill of Materials**.
-
-The **Work Order** is generated from the **Production Planning
-Tool** based on Sales Orders. You can also create a direct Work Order
-by:
-
-> Manufacturing > Documents > Work Order > New
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-### Creating Work Orders
-
- * Select the Item to be produced.
- * The default BOM for that item will be fetched by the system. You can also change BOM.
- * Enter the Qty to manufacture.
- * If the selected BOM has operation mentioned in it, the system shall fetch all operations from BOM.
- * Mention the Planned Start Date (an Estimated Date at which you want the Production to begin.)
- * Select Warehouses:
- * Source Warehouses: The warehouse where you store your raw materials. Each required item can have separate source warehouse. Group warehouse also can be selected as source warehouse. On submission of Work Order, the raw mateirals will be reserved in these warehouses for production usage.
- * Work-in-Progress Warehouse: The warehouse where your Items will be transferred when you begin production. Group Warehouse can also be selected as Work-in-Progress warehouse.
- * Target Warehouse: The warehouse where you store finished Items before they are shipped.
- * Scrap Warehouse: Scrap Items will be stored in this warehouse.
- * Required Items: All the required items (raw materials) will be fetched from BOM and populated in this table. Here you can also change the default source warehouse for any item. And during the production, you can track transferred raw materials from this table.
-
-> Note : You can save a Work Order without selecting the warehouses, but warehouses are mandatory for submitting a Work Order
-
-###Reassigning Workstation/Duration for Operations
-
-* By default the system fetchs workstation and duration for Work Order Operations from the selected BOM.
-
-
-
-* If you wish to reassign the workstation for a particular opeeration in the Work Order, you can do so before submitting the Work Order.
-
-
-
-* Select the respective operation, and change its workstation.
-* You can also change the Operating Time for that operation
-
-### Capacity Planning in Work Order
-
-* When a Work Order is submitted, based on the Planned Start Date and the availability of the workstations, system schedules all operations for the Work Order (if Work Order has operations specified).
-* Drafts of Time Logs are also created based on the scheduled operations.
-
-### Transfering Materials for Manufacturing
-
-* Once you have submitted your Work Order, you need to Transfer the Raw Materials to initiate the Manufacturing Process.
-* This will create a Stock Entry with all the Items required to complete this Work Order to be added to the WIP Warehouse. (this will add sub-Items with BOM as one Item or explode their children based on your setting above).
-
-* Click on 'Start'.
-
-
-
-* Mention the quantity of materials to be transfered.
-
-
-
-* Submit the Stock Entry
-
-
-
-* Material Transfered for Manufacturing will be updated in the Work Order based on the Stock Entry.
-
-
-
-#### Material Transfer through Stock Entry
-Use cases for this option are:
-* If material transfer is done in bulk and/or is not required to be tracked against a particular Work Order
-* If the responsibility for Material Transfer and Production Entry lies with two separate users
-
-If this is the case, you can select the Skip Material Transfer check box, which will allow you to make the “Manufacture” Stock Entry directly by clicking on the ‘Finish’ button.
-
-### Making Time Logs
-
-* Progress in the Work Order can be tracked using [Timesheet](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-work-order.html)
-* Timesheet's time slots are created against Work Order Operations.
-* Drafts of Timesheet are created based on the scheduled operations when an Work Order is Submitted.
-* To create more Timesheets against an operation click 'Make Timesheet' button.
-
-
-
-###Updating Finished Goods
-
-* Once you are done with the Work Order you need to update the Finished Goods.
-* This will create a Stock Entry that will deduct all the sub-Items from the WIP Warehouse and add them to the Finished Goods Warehouse.
-* Click on 'Finish'.
-
-
-
-* Mention the quantity of materials to be transfered.
-
-
-
- > Tip : You can also partially complete a Work Order by updating the Finished Goods stock creating a Stock Entry.
-
-### Stopping a Work Order
-
-* When you stop a Work Order its status is changed to Stop indicating that all production process against that Work Order is to be ceased.
-* To stop the Work Order click on the 'Stop' Button
-
- 1. On Submitting the Work Order, the system will reserve a slot for each of the Work Order Operations serially after the planned start date based on the workstation availability. The Workstation availability depends on the Workstation timings, holiday list and if some other Work Order Operation was scheduled in that slot. You can mention the number of days for the system to try scheduling the operations in the Manufacturing Settings. This is set to 30 Days by default. If the operation requires time exceeding the available slot, system shall ask you to break the operations. Once the scheduling is done system shall create Time Logs and save them. You can Modify them and submit them later.
- 2. You can also create additional time logs against an Operation. For doing so select the respective operation and click on 'Make Time Log'
- 3. Transfer Raw Material: This will create a Stock Entry with all the Items required to complete this Work Order to be added to the WIP Warehouse. (this will add sub-Items with BOM as one Item or explode their children based on your setting above).
- 4. Update Finished Goods: This will create a Stock Entry that will deduct all the sub-Items from the WIP Warehouse and add them to the Finished Goods Warehouse.
- 5. To check all Time Logs made against the Work Order click on 'Show Time Logs'
-
-
-
-* You can also re-start a stopped Work Order.
-
-> Note : In order to make a Work Order against an Item you must specify 'Yes' to "Allow Work Order" on the Item form.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6053b72f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-# Workstation
-
-### Workstation
-
-Workstation stores information regarding the place where the workstation operations is carried out.
-Data regarding the operation cost of the place can be stored here.
-We can also specify the workstation operation timings and a Holiday List.
-
-You can also create a Workstation by:
-
-> Manufacturing > Documents > Workstation > New
-
-
-
-In workstation specify the workstation working hours under the 'working hour' section.
-You can also specify the working hours based on shifts.
-While scheduling Work Order, system will check for the availability of the workstation based on the working hours specified.
-
-> Note : You can enable overtime for your workstation in [Manufacturing Settings](/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.html)
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/chapter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/chapter.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 19dfd269..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/chapter.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-#Chapter
-
-The Chapter doctype allows you to record the Chapter details.
-
-Chapter Head or System User can create Chapter.
-
-To Create Chapter:
-
-> Non Profit > Chapter > New
-
-
-
-System User or Chapter Head can add chapter Member directly from the desk or
-User can join directly by visiting chapter page on website
-
-to join chapter online
-
-> My Account on website > Chapter from sidebar > Select Available chapter and click on join chapter button
-
-
-
-
-
-
-To leave chapter click on leave chapter button
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e7971818..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Chapter
-
-This section contains Chapter related documents.
-
-Chapter doctype is for people to organize or join offline group meetings in various cities around the world. user/members can find and join groups with a common interest.
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 9eb7bdd7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Chapter/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-chapter
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0b9d4740..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-#Donor
-
-The Donor doctype allows you to record the Donor details.
-
-Donor are simply contacts in your ERPNext database with one or more Donation. The contact may be an individual, a household, an organisation, or some other contact sub-type, but it is always a contact to which a donation is applied.
-
-To create new Donor go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Donor > New
-
-
-
-**Email:** Email field is the id of Member doctype.
-
-**Donor Type:** DonorType is link field to Donor Type Doctype. Member can select Available Doctype.
-
-**Address and Contact Section:** This Section linked to address and contact doctypes.
-
-**Accounting Section:** This section allowed to set member accounting details such as Account Receivable.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor_type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor_type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0fa89d31..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/donor_type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-#Donor Type
-
-The Donor Type doctype allows you to Create different Donor Profile for the Donor.
-
-Donor Types are a basic building block for Donor and contribution management. Typically an organization will set up a donor type for each of the different donation that they offer. For example, an organisation may define three donation types for 'regular', 'Organization', and 'honorary' donor.
-
-In this chapter we will cover the most common set-up for donor types.
-
-To create new donor Type go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Donor Type > New
-
-
-
-**Donor Type:** The Donor Type is displayed throughout the system, on both public and backend pages so spend some time thinking about a donor type name that is appropriate to both audiences. It can be changed at a later date
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cfa50df4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Donor
-
-This section contains Donors and Donors Contribution related documents.
-
-A donor in general is a person, organization or government who donates something voluntarily. The term is usually used to represent a form of pure altruism but sometimes used when the payment for a service is recognized by all parties as representing less than the value of the donation and that the motivation is altruistic. In business law, a donor is someone who is giving the gift (law), and a donee the person receiving the gift.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 7f36f92b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Donor/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-donor_type
-donor
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/grant_application.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/grant_application.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4bb9462a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/grant_application.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-
-#Grant Application
-
-The Grant Application doctype allows you to record the Grant Applicants details.
-
-To Generate Online Grant Application go to:
-
-> My Account on website > Grant Application from sidebar > Apply for new Grant Application.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-To Generate Grant Application go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Grant Application > New.
-
-
-
-
-
-**Email:** Email is a mandatory field.
-
-**Organization:** Organization is data field contain organizaion name set as name field in erpnext.
-
-
-**Address and Contact Section:** This Section linked to address and contact doctypes.
-
-**Grant Application Details Section:** This section contains information about grant description.
-
-**Amount:** Amount field describe requested amount by an applicant.
-
-**Route:** Route field leave blank it will automatically create route path grant-application/organization_name
-
-**Assessment Result Section:** In This section when status field selected as received, send Grant Review Email button appear on the top right corner which sends grant URL to Assessment Manager.
-
-After reviewing grant. Grant Assessment Manager scale application at 0 - 9 point and left a note about a grant.
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index adb41a38..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Grant Application
-
-Grant Application is designed to be used by organisations that distribute funds to others, for example grant seeker, etc.
-
-Grants are non-repayable funds or products disbursed or gifted by one party (grantmakers), often a government department, corporation, foundation or trust, to a recipient, often (but not always) a nonprofit entity, educational institution, business or an individual. In order to receive a grant, some form of "Grant Writing" often referred to as either a proposal or an application is required.
-
-Most grants are made to fund a specific project and require some level of compliance and reporting.
-
-The grant writing process involves an applicant submitting a proposal (or submission) to a potential funder, either on the applicant's own initiative or in response to a Request for Proposal from the funder. Other grants can be given to individuals, such as victims of natural disasters or individuals who seek to open a small business. Sometimes grant makers require grant seekers to have some form of tax-exempt status, be a registered nonprofit organization or a local government.
-
-Grant Application is grant writing process which can be review by assessment manager and then decided by the organization to disburse grant amount to the applicant or not.
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 5d997e82..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Grant Application/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-grant_application
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 90712047..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Membership
-
-This section contains Member and Membership related documents.
-
-How to set up one or more membership types that you can use to manage your organization's members. It also explains the concept of membership statuses and how your organisation can use them to define a membership life-cycle.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index f1d9bf36..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-membership_type
-member
-membership
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/member.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/member.md
deleted file mode 100755
index df36fe94..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/member.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-#Member
-
-The Member doctype allows you to record the Member details for a **Membership**.
-
-Members are simply contacts in your ERPNext database with one or more memberships. The contact may be an individual, a household, an organisation, or some other contact sub-type, but it is always a contact to which a membership is applied.
-
-To create new Member go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Member > New
-
-
-
-**Email:** Email field is the id of Member doctype.
-
-**Membership Type:** Membership Type is link field to Membership Type Doctype. Member can select Available Doctype.
-
-**Membership Expiry Date:** This Field fetch membership end date details from membership doctype.
-
-**Address and Contact Section:** This Section linked to address and contact doctypes.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7fa94a64..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-#Membership
-
-The Membership doctype allows you to record membership details for the **Member**.
-
-Membership is a term which refers to any organization that allows people to subscribe, and often requires them to pay a membership fee or "subscription".
-
-
-To create new Membership go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Membership > New
-
-
-
-**Member:** Member is a link field fetch member details from Member doctype.
-
-**Membership Status:** Membership Status is a select field which contains New, Current, Expired, Pending and Cancelled.
-
-**Membership Date Details section:** This section contain information related to Membership start date, end date and member since date.
-
-**Payment Details:** This section contains payment related details. If the person paid for membership checkbox paid is marked as checked else unmarked.
-Amount fetch based on membership type.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership_type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership_type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d5c80be8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Membership/membership_type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-#Membership Type
-
-Membership Types are a basic building block for membership management. Typically an organization will set up a membership type for each of the different memberships that they offer. For the simplest membership structures, one membership type may be enough. For more complex membership structures, more membership types may be required. For example, an organisation may define three membership types for 'regular', 'student', and 'honorary' members. Or an organization may choose to use membership types as subcriptions to their different publications, either free or paying ones.
-
-In this chapter we will cover the most common set-up for membership types.
-
-To create new Membership Type go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Membership Type > New
-
-
-
-
-**Membership Type:** The Membership Type is displayed throughout the system, on both public and backend pages so spend some time thinking about a membership type name that is appropriate to both audiences. It can be changed at a later date
-
-**Amount:** If your memberships are free you should enter 0 (zero) in this field. Otherwise you should enter the amount that must be paid for this membership type.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 943b9d65..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Volunteer
-
-This section contains Volunteer and Volunteer Type related documents.
-
-Volunteer is the practice of people working on behalf of others without being motivated by financial or material gain.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 3d93d069..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-volunteer_type
-volunteer
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c4dd81dd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-#Volunteer
-
-The Volunteer doctype allows you to record the Volunter details.
-
-Volunteer are simply contacts in your ERPNext database with one or more volunteering program. The contact may be an individual, a household, an organisation, or some other contact sub-type
-
-To create new Volunteer go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Volunteer > New
-
-
-
-**Email:** Email field is the id of Member doctype.
-
-**Volunteer Type:** Volunteer Type is link field to Volunteer Type Doctype. Volunteer can select available Doctype.
-
-**Address and Contact Section:** This Section linked to address and contact doctypes.
-
-**Volunteer Availability Section:** This section is child table which contains select field about volunteer availability. a volunteer can select availability such as weekly, morning etc
-
-**Volunteer Skills Section:** This section is child table which contains data field about the volunteer skills. a volunteer can add multiple skill for eg. Desk Job,
-Hospitality, Food management, computer operator etc.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer_type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer_type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 22a56dbf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/Volunteer/volunteer_type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-#Volunteer Type
-
-Volunteer Types are a basic building block for Volunteering management. Typically an organization will set up a volunteer type for each of the different donation that they offer. For example, an organisation may define three volunteer types for 'regular', 'Student', and 'Member' donor.
-
-In this chapter we will cover the most common set-up for volunteer types.
-
-To create new volunteer Type go to:
-
-> Non Profit > Volunteer Type > New
-
-
-
-
-**Volunteer Type:** The Volunteer Type is displayed throughout the system, on both public and backend pages so spend some time thinking about a membership type name that is appropriate to both audiences. It can be changed at a later date
-
-**Amount:** If your Volunteering are free you should enter 0 (zero) in this field. Otherwise you should enter the amount that must be paid to the volunteer.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2f4b9543..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-# ERPNext for Non-Profit Organizations
-
-People who change the world need the tools to do it! The Non Profit Modules of ERPNext is designed for a non-profit organization, so that they can deliver well on their noble cause of a better world.
-
-
-
-### Manager Members, Donors, Voluteers and More
-
-This is a centralized system, which maintains and updates all the activities related to an Organization.
-
-This will track all activity related to Memberships, Chapters, Volunteer Management, Donor Management, Event and Grant etc.
-
-
-
-### Demonstration of ERPNext Non-Profit Domain
-
-Check the following video to educate yourself on each feature in the non-profit module.
-
-
-
-
-
-### User Manual
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 9f5e13a6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/non_profit/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-Membership
-Chapter
-Volunteer
-Donor
-Grant Application
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-cost.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-cost.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5b16bfd7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-cost.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Activity Cost
-
-Activity Cost records the per-hour billing rate and costing rate of an Employee against an Activity Type.
-This rate is pulled by the system while making Time Logs. It is used for Project Costing.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 87aeace1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Activity Type
-
-Activity Type makes a list of the different types of activities against which a Time Log can be made.
-
-
-
-By default the following Activity Types are created.
-
-* Planning
-* Research
-* Proposal Writing
-* Execution
-* Communication
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 56c193c2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-project-costing
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d4d741f0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-# Project Costing
-
-Each project has multiple task associated with it. To track actual costing of a Project, primarily in terms of services, user has to create Time Log based on actual time spent on Project-Task. Following the steps on how you can track actual service cost against Project.
-
-#### Activity Type
-
-Activity Type is a master of service offered by your personnel. You can add new Activity type from:
-
-`Project > Activity Type > New`
-
-#### Activity Cost
-
-Activity Cost is a master where you can track billing and costing rate for each Employee, and for each Activity Type.
-
-
-
-#### Time Log
-
-Based on Actual Time spent on the Project-Task, Employee will create a time log.
-
-
-
-On selection of Activity Type in the Time Log, Billing and Costing Rate will fetched for that Employee from respective Activity Cost master.
-
-
-
-Multiplying these rates with total no. of Hours in the Time Log gives Costing Amount and Billing Amount for the specific Time Log.
-
-#### Costing in Project and Task
-
-Based on total Time Logs created for a specific Task, its costing will be updated in the respective Task master.
-
-
-
-Same way, Project master will have cost updated based on Time Log created against that Projects, and tasks associated with that Project.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f71cc9ec..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-
-# Projects
-
-For a services business, which doesn't have a tangible product to showcase their value, needs to get many things right to stay afloat and grow in the industry. ERPNext helps services company effectively manage business aspects like Projects Management, Customer Support, Sales and Purchase Management to list a few.
-
-
-
-### Project Management in ERPNext
-
-ERPNext helps you manage your Projects by breaking them into Tasks and
-allocating them to different people.
-
-
-
-Projects can be used to manage internal projects, manufacturing jobs or
-service jobs. For service jobs, Time Sheets can also be created that can be used to bill Customers if billing is done on a Time & Money basis.
-
-### Sales, Purchase Management, Customer Support
-
-Purchasing and selling can also be tracked against Projects and this can help the company keep tabs on its budget, delivery and profitability for a Project.
-
-
-
-### Demo on ERPNext for the Service Business
-
-Check the following video to educate yourself on the ERPNext features for services business.
-
-
-
-
-
-### User Manual
-
-A services company needs lots more than projects module to operate efficiently. ERPNext has all of it available built-in.
-
-- You track your books of accounts using [Accounts module](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts.html).
-- Manage payroll, leaves and claims of your support staff in the [HR module](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources.html).
-- Attend customer's support queries better with [Support](/docs/user/manual/en/support.html) module of ERPNext.
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 11f5901c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-tasks
-project
-timesheet
-project-customer-portal
-project-profitability
-project-expense-claims
-activity-type
-activity-cost
-articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-customer-portal.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-customer-portal.md
deleted file mode 100755
index be4d782b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-customer-portal.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Project from Customer Portal
-
-If you are doing a Project for a Customer, then Customer will need to be updated on its progress on timely bases. In ERPNext, since it is a Customer Portal feature, you can let Customer update oneself on the Project's progress via Customer Portal.
-
-### Add User as a Website User
-
-For a Customer to be able to access Project from the portal, should be added as a Website User. A Customer can also sign up from the Login Page of your ERPNext account, using the same Email ID as mentioned in the Contact master. Or you can invite that User from the Contact master.
-
-
-
-### Add Customer and User in Project
-
-In the Project master, check Customer Details section. Select a Customer and Sales Order associated with this Project.
-
-
-
-### Portal View of Project
-
-When a Customer logins from the Portal, he/she will be able to view all the Task for that Project. Also, the customer will be able to update the status of the Tasks or comment when needed.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-expense-claims.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-expense-claims.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 65741c82..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-expense-claims.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Project and Managing Expenses
-
-The Employees working on the Project incur various expenses, sometimes from their own pocket. In ERPNext, then can claim such expenses using [Expense Claim](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html)
-
-In this Expense Claim, they can also select a Project for which that expense was incurred.
-
-Based on the Expense Claims made for a particular project, total Expense Claim Amount is updated in the Project master, under project costing section.
-
-* You can create an Expense Claims directly and link it to the Project.
-
-
-
-* Total amount of Expense Claims booked against a project is shown under 'Total Expense Claim' in the Project Costing Section
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-profitability.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-profitability.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0fdf3f62..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project-profitability.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-
-# Project Profitability
-
-Project and related activities are generally active for longer time periods. While developments happen on the Project, there are various income and expense incurred against it. Hence, it becomes important to track the Profitability of a Project and ensure that you don't overspend.
-
-### Project in Sales Transactions
-
-You can link a Project in all the sales transactions like Sales Order, Delivery Note, Sales Invoice, and Payment. Linking Project with the sales transactions will help you in tracking income received against that Project.
-
-In sales transactions, Project field is generally available in the More Information section.
-
-
-
-
-#### Project in Purchase Transactions
-
-The project can also be linked to the purchase transactions like Purchase Order, Purchase Receipt, and Purchase Invoice.
-
-In the purchase transactions, Project's link field is available in the Item table. This is because you could be procuring material for multiple Projects from the same purchase entry.
-
-
-
-### Budgeting against Project
-
-You can create Budget for a Project as well. The expense limit defined in the Budget master will be validated in the expense transactions.
-
-
-
-### Project Profitability
-
-Based on the all the income and expense entries created for the Project, you can get its profitability.
-
-> Accounts > Profitability Analysis
-
-Filter report based on Project to check Projectwise Profitability.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 283f4704..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
-
-# Project
-
-The project is an individual or collaborative enterprise, possibly involving research or design, that is carefully planned, usually by a project team, to achieve a particular aim
-
-In ERPNext, Project management in is Task driven. You can a create Project and divide into multiple and assignable Tasks.
-
-
-
-### Managing Tasks
-
-The project is generally has a broader scope, and hence not assignable to an individual. Hence, you can divide the Project into multiple Tasks. These can be assigned to an individual and tracked better.
-
-These Tasks can be created from a Project itself or a [Task](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.html) can be created separately as well.
-
-
-
-### Task Completion
-
-You can also track % Completion of a Project using different methods.
-
- 1. Task Completion
- 2. Task Progress
- 3. Task Weight
-
-
-
-Some examples of how the % Completion is calculated based on Tasks.
-
-
-
-
-
-### Project Costing
-
-The Project Costing section helps you track the time, expenses and purchases incurred against the project.
-
-
-
-* The Total Cost is composed of the costing amount from timesheets, the total cost of expense claims and the total cost of purchase invoices created against this project.
-
-* The Gross Margin is the difference between Total Billed Amount and the Total Cost Amount for this project.
-
-### Gantt Chart
-
-ERPNext gives you an illustrated view of tasks scheduled for that project in Gantt Chart View.
-
-* To view Gantt chart against a project, go to the Task list and Apply filter on the Project.
-
-
-
-### Project Help Video
-
-This is a tutorial video on how to manage Project and associate Tasks in ERPNext.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fc37305f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tasks
-
-Project is divided into Tasks.
-In ERPNext, you can also create a Task independently.
-
-
-
-### Status of the Task
-
-A Task can have one of the following statuses - Open, Working, Pending Review, Closed, or Cancelled.
-
-
-
-* By default each new Task created has the status set to 'Open'.
-
-* If a Time Log is made against a task, its status will be set to 'Working'.
-
-### Dependent Task
-
-You can specify a list of dependent tasks under the 'Depends On' section.
-
-
-
-* You cannot close the parent task until all dependent tasks are closed.
-
-* If the dependent tasks are delayed and overlap with the expected Start Date of the Parent task, the system will reschedule the parent task.
-
-### Managing Time
-
-ERPNext uses [Time Log](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log.html) to track the progress of a Task.
-You can create multiple Time Logs against each task.
-The Actual Start and End Time along with the costing is updated based on the Time Log.
-
-* To view Time Log made against a Task click on 'Time Logs'
-
-
-
-
-
-* You can also create a Time Log directly and link it to the Task.
-
-
-
-### Managing Expenses
-
-You can book [Expense Claim](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html) against a task.
-The system shall update the total amount from expense claims in the costing section.
-
-* To view Expense Claims made against a Task click on 'Expense Claims'
-
-
-
-* You can also create a Expense Claims directly and link it to the Task.
-
-
-
-* Total amount of Expense Claims booked against a task is shown under 'Total Expense Claim' in the Task Costing Section
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 443d7682..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-# Timesheet
-
-Timesheet can be used to track actual hours worked. It can be used for multiple purposes like:
-
-* Billable work to Customers
-* Work Order Operations
-* Creating Salary Slip based on hours worked.
-* Tasks
-* Project
-* Internal References
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 287d5263..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-salary-slip-from-timesheet
-sales-invoice-from-timesheet
-timesheet-against-work-order
-timer-in-timesheet
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 53b0d8ba..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-
-#Salary Slip from Timesheet
-
-If salary / wages for your employees are calculated based on number of hours worked, you can use Timesheet to track actual hours worked, and for creating Salary Slip.
-
-####Employee creates Timesheet
-
-To track actual hours employee has worked for, create Timesheet for each Employee. We suggest you to create Timesheet based on a payment period. For example, if you are paying employee on a weekly basis, create one Timesheet for an Employee for one week. However, you can create multiple Timesheets, and create one Salary Slip for the multiple Timesheets.
-
-
-
-####Salary Structure for the Employee
-
-In the Salary Structure of the Employee, check field "Salary Slip Based on Timesheet". On checking this field, you see fields Salary Component and Hour Rate. Amount for that Salary Component (say Basic) will be calculated based on:
-
- Total Timesheet Hours * Hour Rate
-
-Amount directly for other Salary Components (eg: House Rent Allowance, Phone Allowance) can be defined directly. When creating Salary Slip, Amount for these Salary Component will be fetched as it is.
-
-
-
-
-
-#### Create Salary Slip from Timesheet
-
-To create Salary Slip against Timesheet, open Timesheet and click on "Salary Slip".
-
-
-
-
-In the Salary Slip, Timesheet ID will be updated. You can select more Timesheet to be paid via this Salary Slip. Based on the Timesheets selected, Total Working Hours will be calculated.
-
-
-
-Hour Rate will be fetched from the Salary Structure of an Employee. Based on Total Working Hours and Hour Rate, Amount will be calculated for the Salary Component based on actual hours worked.- -#### Save and Submit Salary Slip - -On Submission of Salary Slip, Timesheet's status will be updated to "Payslip". - -
-
-
-
-Creating Salary Slip based on Timesheet will allow you to manage payment for the overtime.
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 763f549e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
-
-#Sales Invoice from Timesheet
-
-Customer can be invoiced based on total no. of hours your Employees has worked for that Customer. Timesheet can be used to track actual no. of hours Employee has worked. For example, in the IT services domain, clients are billed based on man-hour basis, where per hour billing cost is pre-determined.
-
-###Timesheet
-
-####Step 1: Create new Timesheet
-
-To create new Timesheet, go to:
-
-`Project > Timesheet > New`
-
-#### Step 2: Select Employee
-
-In the Employee field, only ones having active Salary Structure will be selectable. Further in the Salary Structure , is created for the E on the actual hours worked, Employee can create Timesheet. To be able to create Sales Invoice against this Timesheet, ensure `Billable` field is checked.
-
--
-
- Employee created Timesheet for the overtime. -
- In the Salary Structure of an Employee, set Overtime as a Salary Component to be calculated based on hourly basis. -
- When creating Salary Structure for an Employee, pull Timesheet when overtime details are tracked. -
-
-#### Step 3:Activity Type
-
-Employee will have to select an Activity Type (like planning, site visit, repairing etc. ). Costing and Billing Rate for each Activity can be different for each Employee. These cost can be tracked in the Activity Cost. On selection of Activity Type, Activity Cost is fetched from that Employee. Based on total Activity Cost and total no. of hours, Total Billing Amount (to the Customer) is calculated.
-
-To learn more on how to setup Activity Type and Activity Cost, click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing).
-
-
-
-#### Step 4: Enter Actual Time
-
-In the Timesheet Details table, enter actual hours an Employee has worked for. One Timesheet can be used for multiple days as well.
-
-To be able to create Sales Invoice from the Time Sheet, ensure 'Is Billable' field is checked.
-
-
-
-Based on the actual hours worked and Activity Cost of an Employee, Total Billing Amount will be calculated for Timesheet.
-
-#### Step 5: Save and Submit
-
-After submitting Timesheet, you will find buttons to create Sales Invoice and Salary Slip against this Timesheet.
-
-
-
-###Create Sales Invoice from Timesheet
-
-#### Submitted Timesheet
-
-In the Timesheet, if "Is Billable" is checked, you will find option to create Sales Invoice against it.
-
-
-
-
-
-####Sales Invoice
-
-Sales Invoice has dedicated table for the Timesheet table where Timesheet details will be updated. You can select more Timesheets in this table.
-
-
-
-
-####Select Customer and Item
-
-Select Customer to be billed. Select an Item, and enter rate as the billing amount.
-
-####Save
-
-After you enter all required details in the Sales Invoice, Save and Submit it.
-
-On submitting Sales Invoice, status of the Timesheets linked to the Sales Invoice will be updated as Billed.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timer-in-timesheet.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timer-in-timesheet.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1af8930b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timer-in-timesheet.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-
-# Timer in Timesheet
-
-Timesheets can be tracked against Project and Tasks along with a Timer.
-
-
-
-#### Steps to start a Timer:
-
-- On clicking, **Start Timer**, a dialog pops up and starts the timer for already present activity for which checkbox `completed` is unchecked.
-
-
-
-- If no activities are present, fill up the activity details, i.e. activity type, expected hours or project in the dialog itself, on clicking **Start**, a new row is added into the Timesheet Details child table and timer begins.
-
-- On clicking, **Complete**, the `hours` and `to_time` fields are updated for that particular activity.
-
-
-
-- At any point of time, if the dialog is closed without completing the activity, on opening the dialog again, the timer resumes by calculating how much time has elapsed since `from_time` of the activity.
-
-- If any activities are already present in the Timesheet with completed unchecked, clicking on **Resume Timer** fetches the activity and starts its timer.
-
-- If the time exceeds the `expected_hours`, an alert box appears.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e723b174..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-
-#Timesheet against Project and Task
-
-Timesheets can be tracked against Project and Tasks so that you can get reports on how much time was spent on each Task or Project.
-
-If standard working hours are set up in the Company master and the user enters from time and to time, the system would
-automatically calculate the number of hours. Eg: standard working hours are set up as 8 at the company level and start
-time and end time are 4 days apart, the calculated hours would be 32. If the standard working hours are not set up, then
-the system would calculate the hours as 96 hours in this case.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-####Billable Timesheet
-
-To bill Customer based on Timesheet, check "Is Billable" in the Timesheet created against Project and Task. To learn more about billing Customer from Timesheet, click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.html).
-
-User can also make invoice against timesheet by selecting the project on the invoice. System will fetch the records from the timesheet based on selected project, for mode detail check below video
-
-
-####Project Costing
-
-When creating Timesheet, Employee will have to select an Activity Type. For each Activity Type, you can create an Activity Cost master. In the Activity Cost, Billing Rate and Costing rate is defined for each Employee.
-
-In the Timesheet, costing will be done based on Activity Cost multiplied with number of hours. Based the Timesheet Cost, total costing will be doen for the Task and Project as well.
-
-To learn about setup of Activity Type and Activity Cost, click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-work-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-work-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f357f77a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-work-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-#Timesheet based on Work Order
-
-Creating Timesheet for Work Order helps in capacity planning for the Workstations. Also it helps in tracking actual time consumed by the Workstation for completing specific operation.
-
-When a Work Order is submitted, based on the Planned Start Date and the availability of the Workstations, system schedules all operations by creating Timesheet.
-
-
-
-Let's assume we are manufacturing a mobile phone. As per the Bill of Material, time required for the assembly of components could be one hour. However the actual time taken for it's completion could be more than planned. The actual time tracking provides actual operation cost, hence helps in determining accurate valuation of the manufacturing item.
-
-####Work Order
-
-As per the Bill of Materials of manufacturing item, following are the Operations and Workstation through which raw-material items are processed.
-
-
-
-On submission of Work Order, Timesheet will be created automatically.
-
-
-
-####Time Sheet created from Work Order
-
-In the Timesheet, unique row will be added for each Operation - Workstation. This allows operator/supervisor at the workstation to enter actual From Time and To Time taken for each Operation.
-
-
-
-After enter From Time and To Time for all the Operations, Total Hours will be calculated.
-
-
-
-With updating actual time, you can also enter "Completed Qty". If all the items are not processed in the same Timesheet, you can create another Timesheet from the Work Order.
-
-
-
-####Save and Submit Timesheet
-
-On the submission of Timesheet, Total Hours is calculated. Also, in the Work Order, for each Operation, actual Start and End Time is updated.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/customer_feedback.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/customer_feedback.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 6baaa472..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/customer_feedback.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customer Feedback
-
- It is the information that a customer expresses about the satisfaction or dissatisfaction about the products or services.
-
- The Customer Feedback has to rate different parameters and provide Qualitative Feedbacks using the pre-determined Feedback Templates.
-
-## Customer Feedback Template
-
- For creating the Customer Feedback first you must to decide the parameters by creating the Customer Feedback Template. The templates generally contains the title of the template, scope and the different parameter to be entered. The diffrent parameter which can be decided on the basis of different occssions and survey.
-
-## Creating a Customer Feedback Template
-
-
-
- Steps for creating a Customer Feedback Template
-
- * Template : The name of the template
-
- * Procedure : Select procedure associated with the Feedback.
-
- * Parameter : Listing down various processes/parameters to which you want the user to rate and give the feedback.
-
- * Scope : Whether the Feedback Template is a generic for the whole company or only for a particular department.
-
- * Department : Deparment related to the Feedback Template.(If scope is deparment)
-
-## Customer Feedback
-
- The customer can easily give there feedbacks by selecting there template to rate on different parameter and also provide the qualitative feedback on the parameters.
- If the Feedback is not as per expectations, Quality Action may be initialised on the basis of the seriousness of the Feedback.
-
-## Creating a Customer Feedback
-
-
-
- Steps for creating a Customer Feedback
-
- * Customer : Name of the Customer who is giving the Feedback.
-
- * Template : Selecting the template for the Feedback and the parameters are automatically populated for the Feedback.
-
- * Feedback :
-
- - Parameter : Various Parameters that are pre-defined in the Feedback Template.
- - Rating : Rate a parameter.
- - Qualitative Feedback : Feedback regarding the parameter.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 35e6188a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-# Quality Management System
-
- Quality management is the act of overseeing all activities and tasks needed to maintain a desired level of excellence.
-
- Quality Management System is used to comply with ISO quality standards. The tool eliminates the need for paper records and replaces them with electronic systems. The application helps service and manufacturing companies to manage day-to-day work and instills full transparency across the system.
- It helps the organization in making Quality Goal and design Quality Procedures to achieve it.
-
- For more details go through the following topics
-## Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 7fd942e1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-quality_goal
-quality_procedure
-tree_of_procedure
-quality_review
-quality_action
-quality_meeting
-customer_feedback
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_action.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_action.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 3f097dc2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_action.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Action
-
-
- Quality Action is a standard features to allow implementation of corrective and preventive actions. This will meet compliance with industry regulations including GMP, ISO 9001 and 14001, TSCA, REACH, etc.
-
- Quality Action process workflows provide a controlled environment and reduce the risk of repeat issues by ensuring that defined solutions and processes are met.
-
- Quality Actions can be initialized for a Quality Goal or for a Customer Feedback which may not meet the expected target and depending on that a Corrective or Preventive Action can be started.
-
-## Creating a Quality Action
-
-
-
- Steps for creating an Action:
-
- * Corrective/Preventive : It is used to indicate whether the Review is being scheduled for Corrective or for Preventive Purpose.
-
- * Type : It is used to select whether an Action is scheduled for a Quality Review or for a Customer Feedback.
-
- * Review : If the Quality Action is being scheduled for a Quality Review, select the Review from the list.
-
- * Feedback : If the Quality Action is being scheduled for a Customer Feedback, select the Feedback from the list.
-
- * Goal : If the Quality Action is being scheduled for a Quality Review, Goal associated with Review is fetched automatically.
-
- * Procedure : If the Quality Action is being scheduled for a Quality Review, Procedure associated with Review is fetched automatically.
-
- * Status : Is automatically computed based on the Status of the Problem. If the status of all the problem are 'Close' then the status of the Action is 'Closed'.
-
- * Problem : Consists of the Goal Objective that have not met the target.
-
- * Resolution : Reolution proposed for the problem.
-
- * Status : Indicates whether the problem is Open or Close.
-
- * Responsible : Individual responsible for handling the particular problem.
-
- * Completion Date : Date before which the Problem should be resolved.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_goal.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_goal.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bee2653e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_goal.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Goal
-
- It is collection of individual metrics that helps to quantify quality of application. It is a basic quality management process to establish a set of quality objectives.
-
- You can create a Quality Goal for your business having multiple Quality Objectives. Different Quality Objectives for a Goal can have definite numeric target or target measured in terms of completion status(yes or no). It is monitored based on Frequency which is set for that Goal.
-
-
-
-## Creating a Quality Goal
-
- Steps for creating a Quality Goal
-
- * Goal : Name of the Quality Goal that you intend to create.
-
- * Procedure : Quality Procedure that is to be followed to achieve the Goal.
-
- * created By : Person responsible for the creation of the Goal.
-
- * Scope : This represents whether the Goal applied to the Company or only to a particular department.
-
- * Department : If the scope of the Goal is only to a particular department, the name of the department is to be specified.
-
- * Monitoring Frequency : If a Review of a Goal is to be scheduled automatically then select the time interval after which the Review will be created.
-
- * Revision : Mentioning the curent Revision of the Quality Goal.
-
- * Measurable Goal : If a Goal can be measured in terms of numeric values, eg: 100 Leads, 24 Hours, etc, then select 'Yes' indicating the Goal is be measured in numeric values. If a Goal can only be measured interms of completion status ie Yes or No, then select 'No' indicating the Goal is to be measured interms of completion status. Target and Units are disabled if the Goal cannot be measured interms of numeric values.
-
- * Objective : Consists of the various Objectives that a Quality Goal consists of and which have to be completed to meet the Goal.
-
- * Target : Consists of the numeric target value of an Objective that is to be met.
-
- * Unit : Measurement Unit, eg: Lead/s, Hour/s, etc, to measure Objective.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_meeting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_meeting.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 925d394d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_meeting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Meeting
-
- It is an assembly of people for a particular purpose or agenda, especially for formal discussion about Quality aspects.
-
- Quality Meetings are conducted to review the Quality Reviews that have been generated. The minutes of these meetings would include the discussion on the various Quality Reviews.
-
-## Creating a Quality Meeting:
-
-
-
- Steps for creating a Meeting
-
- * Meeting Date: Date on which the Meeting is held.
-
- * Status: The status of the Meeting is generated based in the status of every individual Minutes discussed. If the status of all the minutes is Close, then Status of the Meeting will be 'Close' else 'Open'.
-
- * Minute:
-
- - Review: Select the Quality Review to be discussed.
- - Action: It is the action that is proposed for the Review which can be either Under Review or Planned if any action is planned.
- - Responsible: The individual who is responsible for carrying out the action for the Review.
- - Status: Status of minute can be Open or Close depending upon whether the action has been carried out or not.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_procedure.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_procedure.md
deleted file mode 100644
index cae14ebf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_procedure.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Procedure (Standard Operating Procedure)
-
- A standard operating procedure (SOP) is a set of step-by-step instructions compiled by an organisation to help workers carry out complex routine operations. SOPs aim to achieve efficiency, quality output and uniformity of performance, while reducing miscommunication and failure to comply with industry regulations.
-
- A Procedure can be of two types ie a Procedure consiting of simply steps that you must follow to achieve the Goal and Procedure having a nested Procedure along with steps that must be followed.
-
-## Creating a Quality Procedure
-
- Steps for creating a Procedure
-
-* Procedure : Name of the Procedure that you intend to create.
-
-* Department : The Department to which the Procedure is associated with. For Example, A Procedure regarding a product sales is associated with the Sales Department.
-
-* Parent Procedure : If a Procedure is child to a Parent Procedure, then this field will contain the name of the Parent Procedure.
-
-* Is Group : If a Procedure has chile Procedures, selecting Is Group, groups all the Procedures into the Parent Procedure in the TreeView.
-
-* Procedure consisting of Steps :
-
-
-
- - If a Procedure only has a set of steps to be followed, select Step from Dropdown.
- - Document the step.
- - Select the Individual responsible for carrying out the task.
-
-* Procedure consisting of Nested Procedure :
-
- - If a Procedure multiple procedures, select Procedure from Dropdown.
- - Select the Child Procedure.(When this field is set, the Parent Procedure field of the Child Procedures will contain the name of the Parent Procedure)
- - Select the Individual responsible for carrying out the task.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_review.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_review.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 210c8332..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/quality_review.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Review
-
- A Quality Review is an inspection with a specific structure, defined roles and procedure designed to ensure a product's completeness and adherence to standards.
-
- The Quality Review can be scheduled manually or scheduled based on Goal's Monitoring Frequency. The Quality Review checks whether all Objectives of a Goal have been achieved or not.
-
-
-
-## Creating a Quality Review
-
- Steps for creating a Review
-
- * Quality Goal : Quality Goal which is to be Reviewed.
-
- * Procedure : Quality Procedure of the Goal is automatically fetched when a Goal is selected.
-
- * Scope : Scope of the Goal is automatically fetched when a Goal is selected.
-
- * Values : All the Objectives and Target and Unit associated with the Goal are fetched.
-
- * Achieved : Indicates the Achieved Value for a certain Target Value.(This Field is visible only if the Goal can be measured interms of numeric values)
-
- * Yes/No : Indicates whether the Objective has been completed or not.(This Field is visible only if the Goal cannot be measured interms of numeric values)
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/tree_of_procedure.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/tree_of_procedure.md
deleted file mode 100644
index de4b353d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/quality-management/tree_of_procedure.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tree of Procedures
-
- Tree of Procedures is used to show the Parent-Child relationship which may or may not exist between the different Procedures. If a Procedure has a Child Procedure, then they are grouped under the Parent Procedure else they are represented individually.
- From where you can directly edit or delete the procedure if he don't have any child.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/fichier_des_ecritures_comptables.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/fichier_des_ecritures_comptables.md
deleted file mode 100755
index efd3585c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/fichier_des_ecritures_comptables.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Le Fichier des Écritures Comptables [FEC]
-
-Since 2014, a legal requirement makes it mandatory for companies operating in France to provide a file of their general accounting postings by fiscal year corresponding to an electronic accounting journal.
-
-For ERPNext users this file can be generated using a report available if you system's country is France.
-
-
-### Requirements
-
-To generate the report correctly, your Chart of Account needs to be setup according to the french accounting rules.
-
-All accounts need to have a number in line with the General Chart of Account (PCG) and a name.
-
-The SIREN number of your company can be added in the "Company" doctype.
-
-
-### CSV generation
-
-You can generate the required CSV file by clicking on "Export" in the top right corner of the report.
-
-
-### Testing Instructions
-
-To test the validity of your file, the tax administration provides a testing tool at the following address: [Outil de test des fichiers des écritures comptables (FEC)](http://www.economie.gouv.fr/dgfip/outil-test-des-fichiers-des-ecritures-comptables-fec)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 84fcb9e3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-fichier_des_ecritures_comptables
-local_overrides
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/local_overrides.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/local_overrides.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 25505e13..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/france/local_overrides.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sales and Payment Transactions
-
-In order to be compliant with the latest finance law applicable to POS software, ERPNext automatically registers all sales and payment transactions in a chained log.
-
-If your country is set to "France", the deletion of sales and payment transactions will also not be permitted, even if the appropriate permissions are given to the user.
-
-Please note that ERPNext is not yet fully compliant with the 2016 Finance Law.
-
-# Chained log Report
-
-A dedicated report called "Transaction Log Report" is available to verify that the logged chain has not been broken.
-
-If the status of the column "Chain Integrity" is "True", the chain has not been broken.
-It means that you can consult the full chain of events that occurred in your system.
-
-If the status of the column "Chain Integrity" is "False", it means that there is a discrepancy in the chain.
-In this case, the previous row has been removed or altered in the database. It is a probable effect of a fraudulent behavior.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 68464f2e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Regional
-
-ERPNext aims to support local regulation for all the regions in the world. In most cases ERPNext is very flexible so you can easily add Custom Fields and make Custom Reports to support the regluation of your region.
-
-As of mid-2017, ERPNext aims to pre-set additional fields and forms required for companies to easily submit reports to the relevant authorities.
-
-This section is still under-development.
-
-### Regions
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 1a6cf1b7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-france
-india
-united_arab_emirates
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6c106a5c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sending GST Reminders
-
-You can send email reminders to your Customers and Suppliers so that they can directly add or update their GSTIN numbers
-
-To send GSTIN Reminders, you can either open the Customer / Supplier record or **GST Settings**
-
-
-
-Here you can click on the "Send GSTIN Update Reminders" button to send email reminders to all your customers
-
-### Updating GSTIN
-
-Your customers will receive an email asking them to update their GSTIN and that email will link them to a portal page:
-
-
-
-Here they can update their GSTIN and it will automatically be added to your customer GSTIN record.
-
-#### Sample GSTIN Reminder Email
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f46f5336..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-
-# GST Features in ERPNext
-
-### 1. Setting up GSTIN
-
-GST Law requires that you maintain the GSTIN number for all your suppliers and vendors. In ERPNext, GSTIN is linked to the **Address**
-
-
-
-**GST for your Company Address**
-
-You also need to set the Address for your own Company and your Company's GST Number
-
-Go to the Company master and add the GSTIN to your default address.
-
-
-
-**Include GSTIN number in the Address Template**
-
-Open Address Template record for India, add GSTIN number and State Code there if not exists.
-
-
-
-
-### 2. Setting up HSN Codes
-
-According to the GST Law, your itemised invoices must contain the HSN Code related to that Item. ERPNext comes pre-installed with all 12,000+ HSN Codes so that you can easily select the relevant HSN Code in your Item
-
-
-
-### 3. Making Tax Masters
-
-To setup Billing in GST, you need to create 3 Tax Accounts for the various GST reporting heads CGST - Central GST, SGST - State GST, IGST - Inter-state GST
-
-Go to your **Chart of Accounts**, under the Duties and Taxes head of your account, create 3 Accounts
-
-**Note:** Usually the rate in CGST and SGST is half of IGST. For example if most of your items are billed at 18%, then create IGST at 18%, CGST and SGST at 9% each.
-
-
-
-### 4. Make Tax Templates
-
-You will have have to make two tax templates for both your sales and purchase, one for in state sales and other for out of state sales.
-
-In your **In State GST** template, select 2 accounts, SGST and CGST
-
-
-
-In your **Out of State GST** template, select IGST
-
-### 5. Making GST Ready Invoices
-
-If you have setup the GSTIN of your Customers and Suppliers, and your tax template, you are ready to go for making GST Ready Invoices!
-
-For **Sales Invoice**,
-
-1. Select the correct Customer and Item and the address where the transaction will happen.
-2. Check if the GSTIN of your Company and Supplier have been correctly set.
-3. Check if the HSN Number has been set in the Item
-4. Select the the **In State GST** or **Out of State GST** template that you have created based on the type of transaction
-5. Save and Submit the Invoice
-
-
-
-### 6. Print GST Tax Invoice
-
-To print Tax Invoice as per GSTN guidelines, please select **GST Tax Invoice** print format. This print format includes company address, GSTIN numbers, HSN/SAC Code and item-wise tax breakup. And while printing select correct value of Invoice Copy field, to mention whether it is for the Customer, Supplier or Transporter.
-
-
-
-### Reports
-
-ERPNext comes with most of your reports you need to prepare your GST Returns. Go to Accounts > GST India head for the list.
-
-
-
-You can check the impact of your invoice in the **GST Sales Register** and **GST Itemised Sales Register**
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 67abf7bf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Statutory Requirements for India
-
-As of 2017, India will fall under the new GST (Goods and Services Tax) regime and ERPNext makes it easy for users to track the details of its Supplier and Customers across Invoices and make the required reports.
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 8d72c56f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-gst-setup
-gst-reminders
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index cf167db3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-uae-vat-setup
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/uae-vat-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/uae-vat-setup.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e0e0793e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/united_arab_emirates/uae-vat-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-
-# VAT/EXCISE Tax Implementation for UAE/KSA
-
-### 1. Setting up Tax Registration No for customer, supplier and company
-
-Set tax registation number in the field tax id for the customer, supplier and company
-
-1. For Customer
-
-
-2. For Company
-
-
-### 2. Setting up TAX Code for Products
-Setup tax code in the item master, system will fetch same code in the sales/purchase invoice on selection of an item.
-
-
-### 3. Default Tax Templates
-
-ERPNext provides you default tax template for vat(5%, zero, exempted) and excise(50%, 100%). You can create your own [tax template](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
-
-
-
-### 3. Making VAT Ready Invoices
-
-If you have setup the TRN of your Customers and Suppliers, and your tax template, you are ready to go for making VAT Ready Invoices!
-
-For **Sales Invoice**,
-
-1. Select the correct Customer and Item and the address where the transaction will happen.
-2. Check if the TRN of your Company and Supplier have been correctly set.
-3. Check if the TAX Code has been set in the Item
-4. Select the template that you have created based on the type of transaction
-5. Save and Submit the Invoice
-
-
-
-### 4. Print Tax Invoice
-
-ERPNext provides 2 default print foramt
-
-1. Simplified Tax Invoice
-
-
-2. Detailed Tax Invoice
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 087f32a5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-#Selling in Different Unit (UoM)
-
-A sell price unit of measure (UOM) is the UOM with which you price items. You can have multiple sell price UOMs for any inventory item. However, when Customer places, UoM for an item could change.
-
-For example an Item Pen is stocked in Nos, but sold in Box. Hence we will make Sales Order for Pen in Box.
-
-###Step 1: In the Item master, under Unit of Measure section, you can list all the possible UoM of an item, with its UoM Conversion Factor. Update UoM Conversion Factors
-In one Box, if you get 10 Nos. of Pen, UoM Conversion Factor would be 10.
-
-
-
-
-###Setp 2: In the Sale Order, you will find two UoM fields
-
--UoM
--Stock UoM
-
-In both the fields, default UoM of an item will be fetched by default. You should edit UoM field, and select Sale UoM (Box in this case). Updating Sales UoM is mainly for the reference of the Customer. In the print format, you will see item quantity in the Sales UoM.
-
-
-
-Based on the Qty and Conversion Factor, qty will be calculated in the Stock UoM of an item. If you sell just one Box, then Qty as per stock UoM will be set as 10.
-
-
-###Stock Ledger Posting
-
-Irrespective of the Sales UoM selected in the Sale Order, stock ledger posting will be done in the Default UoM of an item. Hence you should ensure that conversion factor is entered correctly while selling item in different UoM.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e864e567..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-#Adding Margin
-
-User Can apply the margin on Quotation Item and Sales Order Item using following two options.
-1)Price Rule: With the help of this method user can apply the margin on Quotation and Sales Order based on condition. You can find the section margin on pricing rule where a user has to select the type of margin whether it is Percentage or Amount and Rate or Amount. The system will apply the margin on quotation item and sales order item if pricing rule is enabled.
-
-To setup Pricing Rule, go to:
-
-`Selling > Setup > Pricing Rule` or `Accounts > Setup > Pricing Rule`
-
-####Adding Margin in Pricing Rule
-
-
-
-Total Margin is calculated as follows:
-`Rate = Price List Rate + Margin Rate`
-
-So, In order to apply the Margin you need to add the Price List for the Item
-
-To add Price List, go to:
-
-`Selling > Setup > Item Price` or `Stock > Setup > Item Price`
-
-####Adding Item Price
-
-
-
-2) Apply margin direct on Item: If user wants to apply the margin without pricing rule, they can use this option. In Quotation Item and Sales Order Item, user can select the margin type and rate or amount. The system will calculate the margin and apply it on price list rate to calculate the rate of the product.
-
-To add margin directly on Quotation or Sales Order, go to:
-
-`Selling > Document > Quotation`
-
-add item and scroll down to section where you can find the Margin Type
-
-####Adding Margin in Quotation
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/amending-sales-order-after-submit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/amending-sales-order-after-submit.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bc33773d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/amending-sales-order-after-submit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-
-#Amending Sales Order after Submit
-Rate and Qty in Sales Order can now be amended after Submit using the `Update Items` button.
-
-
-
-To Update Rate and Qty in a Submitted Sales Order, click on the `Update Items` button. A dialog will pop up to let you make the change.
-
-
-
-Please Note the following validations and usecases:
-
-- Update Features checks if Sales Order has Delivery Note and Sales Invoice.
-- Qty can be updated for undelivered Sales Order and for Partial Delivery Note. For Sales Order with completed Delivery Notes, it cannot be updated.
-- Rate can be updated for un-invoiced and partially-invoiced Sales Order. For Sales Order with submitted Sales Invoice, it cannot be updated.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2aafd2b7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-#Applying a Discount
-
-There are several ways to apply a Discount on an item in a sales transactions. This can be done in the Sales Order, as well as in a Sales Invoice
-
-#### 1. Discount on "Price List Rate" of an item
-
-You can find the Discount field in the Item table. a Discount can be applied as a percentage or a fixed amount related to the Price List Rate of the Item.
-
-
-
-The feature of Discount (%) is available in all sales and purchase transactions.
-
-If you want to apply a discount (as a Percentage) regularly for certain quantities you'd rather use a "Pricing Rule" [Click here to learn more about Pricing Rule functionality.](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.html)
-
-#### 2. Discount on "Net Total" or "Grand Total"
-
-In the "Additional Discount" section (of a "Sales Order" or "Sales Invoice" alike), you can apply a Discount as a fixed amount or a percentage on the total sum of the Sales.
-
-
-
-##### 2.1 Discount on "Net Total"
-
-If a Discount is applied on **Net Total**, then item's Net Rate and Net Amount is calculated as per the Discount Amount. Net Rate and Amount field will be visible only if Discount is applied using this feature.
-
-
-
-##### 2.2 Discount on "Grand Total"
-
-If a Discount is applied based on the **Grand Total**, then with item's Net Rate, Net Amount as well as taxes are also re-calculated as per Discount Amount.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5d86e5fa..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-#Close Sales Order
-
-In the submitted Sales Orders, you will find **Stop** option. Stopping Sales Order will restrict user from creating Delivery Note and Sales Invoice against it.
-
-
-
-####Scenario
-
-An order is received for ten Wind Turbines. Sales Order is also created for ten units. Due to scarcity of stock, only seven units are delivered to the customer. Pending three units are to be delivered soon. Customer informs that they don't need to deliver pending item, as they have purchased it from other vendor.
-
-In this case, create Delivery Note and Sales Invoice will be created only for the seven units. And the Sales Order should be set as stopped.
-
-
-
-Once Sales Order is set as stopped, you will not have pending quantities (three in this case) reflecting in Pending to Deliver and Pending to Invoice reports. To make further transactions against Stopped Sales Order, you should first Unstop it.
-
-You will find same funtionality in the Purchase Order as well.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cd5cee99..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-
-#Drop Ship
-
-**Drop shipping** is a supply chain management technique in which the retailer does not keep goods in stock. Instead they transfer customer orders and shipment details to either the manufacturer, another retailer, or a wholesaler, who then ships the goods directly to the customer
-
-In ERPNext, you can create a Drop Shipping by creating Purchase Order against Sales Order.
-
-> Selling > Documents > Sales Order > Purchase Order
-
-#### Setup on Item Master
-
-Set **_Delivered by Supplier (Drop Ship)_** and **_Default Supplier_** in Item Master.
-
-
-
-#### Setup on Sales Order
-If Drop Shipping has set on Item master, it will automatically set **Supplier delivers to Customer** and **Supplier** on Sales Order Item.
-
-You can setup Drop Shipping, on Sales Order Item. Under **Drop Ship** section, set **Supplier delivers to Customer** and select **Supplier** agaist which Purchase Order will get created.
-
-
-
-#### Create Purchase Order
-After submitting a Sales Order, create Puchase Order.
-
-
-
-From Sales Order, all items, having **Supplier delivers to Customer** checked or **Supplier**(matching with supplier selected on For Supplier popup) mentioned, will get mapped onto Purchase Order.
-
-It will automatically set Customer, Customer Address and Contact Person.
-
-After submitting Purchase Order, to update delivery status, use **Mark as Delivered** button on Purchase Order. It will update delivery percetage and delivered quantity on Sales Order.
-
-
-
-**_Close_**, is a new feature introduced on **Purchase Order** and **Sales Order**, to close or to mark fulfillment.
-
-
-
-###Drop Shipping Print Format
-You can notify, Suppliers by sending a email after submitting Purchase Order by attaching Drop Shipping print format.
-
-
-
-###Video Help on Drop Ship
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5e3462c3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-
-#ERPNext for Service Organization
-
-**Question:** ERPNext looks primarily designed for the traders and manufacturers. Is ERPNext used by companies offering servies?
-
-**Answer:**
-
-About 30% of ERPNext customers are companies into services. These are companies into software development, certification services, individual consultants and many more. Being into service business ourselves, we use ERPNext to manage our sales, accounting, support and HR operations. Check following video to learn how ERPNext uses ERPNext.
-
-
-
-###Master Setup
-
-The setup for a Service company differs primarily for Items. They don't maintain the Stock for Items and thus, don't have Warehouses.
-
-To create a Service (non-stock) Item, in the item master, uncheck "Maintain Stock" field.
-
-
-
-When creating Sales Order for the services, select Order Type as **Maintenance**. Sales Order of Maintenance Type needs lesser details compared to stock item's order like Delivery Note, item warehouse etc.
-
-Service company can still add stock items to mantain their fixed assets like computers, furniture and other office equipments.
-
-###Hiding Non-required Features
-
-Since many modules like Manufacturing and Stock will not be required for the services company, you can hide those modules from:
-
-`Setup > Permissions > Show/Hide Modules`
-
-Modules unchecked here will be hidden from all the User.
-
-####Feature Setup
-
-Within the form, there are many fields only needed for companies into trading and manufacturing businesses. These fields can be hidden for the service company. Feature Setup is a tool where you can enable/disable specific feature. If a feature is disabled, then fields relevant to that feature is hidden from all the forms. For example, if Serial No. feature is disabled, then Serial. No. field from Item as well as from all the sales and purchase transaction will be hidden.
-
-[To learn more about Feature Setup, click here.](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.html).
-
-####Permissions
-
-ERPNext is the permission controlled system. Users access system based on permissions assigned to them. So, if user is not assigned Role related to Stock and Manufacturing module, it will be hidden from that User. [Click here to learn more about permission management.](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions.html).
-
-You can also refer to help video on User and Permissions setting in ERPNext.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 12617f81..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-applying-discount
-drop-shipping
-erpnext-for-services-organization
-shipping-rule
-sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions
-close-sales-order
-request-for-raw-materials-from-sales-order
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/request-for-raw-materials-from-sales-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/request-for-raw-materials-from-sales-order.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 637b5ed5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/request-for-raw-materials-from-sales-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-# Request for Raw Materials from Sales Order
-
-Production Plan helps user to plan production against multiple sales orders and helps in Material Procurement planning for the raw-material item, based on the quantity of finished product to be manufactured.
-
-But, when you only need to plan for raw-material items of a single Sales Order, it becomes a bit of a tedious task. Hence, you can create a Material Request for the raw materials of the finished Items present in the Sales Order, from that Sales Order itself.
-
-To do so, you can follow the below steps.
-
-* After your Sales Order has been submitted, click on **Make** and select **Request for Raw Materials**.
-
-
-
-* It will open a dialog and display all the Finished Items having a BOM.
-
-
-
-* Here, you can change the BOM as you want and choose the necessary options.
-
-Suppose, enabling the **Include Exploded Items** will fetch the Raw Materials from the Exploded Items of BOM and enabling the **Ignore Existing Ordered Qty** will make a Request even if the required quantities are present.
-
-* Click on Make, and your Material Request will be submitted.
-
-
-
-Material Request generated for the Raw Material of the finished Item present in Sales Order.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2f8ba8bf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-#Sales Persons in the Sales Transactions
-
-In ERPNext, Sales Person master is maintained in [tree structure](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.html). Sales Person is selectable in all the sales transactions.
-
-Sales Persons can be updated in the Customer master as well. On selection of Customer in the transactions, Sales Persons as updated in the Customer will fetch into sales transaction.
-
-
-
-####Sales Person Contribution
-
-If more than one sales persons are working together on an order, then contribution (%) should be set for each Sales Person.
-
-
-
-On saving transaction, based on the Net Total and Contriution (%), `Contribution to Net Total` will be calculated for each Sales Person.
-
-Total % Contribution for all Sales Person must be 100%. If only one Sales Person is selected, then % Contribution will be 100.
-
-####Sales Person Transaction Report
-
-Check Sales Person's Transaction report from:
-
-`Selling > Standard Reports > Sales Personwise Transaction Summary`
-
-This report can be generated based on Sales Order, Delivery Note and Sales Invoice. It will give you total amount of sale made by an employe.
-
-
-
-####Sales Person wise Commission
-
-ERPNext only provide total amount of sale made by a Sales Person. If you offer commission to Sales Person, you should add Sales Person as Sales Partners in ERPNext. For Sales Partners, you can define Commission (%). On selected on Sales Partner in a sales transction, based on Net Total, Commission Amount is calculated as well. You can check Sales Partner's commission report from:
-
-`Accounts > Standard Reports > Sales Partners Commission`
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c7ea46fe..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-#Shipping Rule
-
-Shipping Rule master helps in defining a rule based on which shipping charge is applied on a sales transactions.
-
-Most of the companies (mainly retail) have shipping charge applied based on the invoice total. If invoice value is above certain value, then shipping charge applied are lesser. If invoice value is less, then shipping charges applied are bit more than high shipping charges applied on a high value invoice. You can setup Shipping Rule to address the requirement of varying shipping charge based on the Net Total of sales transaction.
-
-To setup Shipping Rule, go to:
-
-`Selling > Setup > Shipping Rule` or `Accounts > Setup > Shipping Rule`
-
-####Shipping Rule Conditions
-
-
-
-Referring above, you will notice that shipping charges are reducing as valye is increasing. This shipping charge will only be applied if transaction total falls under one of the above range.
-
-####Valid for Countries
-
-You can set Shipping Charges valid for all the countries, or specify specific Country. If specific countries mentioned, then Shipping Charges will be applied only if Customer's country matches Country mentioned in the Shipping Rule.
-
-
-
-####Shipping Account
-
-If shipping charges are applied based on Shipping Rule, then more values like Shipping Account, Cost Center will be needed as well to add row in the Taxes and Other Charges table of transaction. Hence these details are tracked as well in the Shipping Rule.
-
-
-
-####Shipping Rule Application
-
-Following is an example of how shipping charges is auto-applied on Sales Order based on Shipping Rule.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3581e425..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Selling
-
-Selling is the communication that happens with the customer prior to and
-during the sale. You might be managing all the communication yourself or you
-may have a small team of sales people to handle this. ERPNext helps you track
-the communication leading up to the sale, by keeping all your documents in an
-organized and searchable manner.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 5fa5a1b9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-quotation
-sales-order
-sales-analytics
-setup
-articles
-selling-reports
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/manufacturing-work-in-progress.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/manufacturing-work-in-progress.md
deleted file mode 100644
index b5a0d5e1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/manufacturing-work-in-progress.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-# Manufacturing Work in Progress Report
-
-As the name suggest, this report is to show any work orders that are still in progress. This is similar with Open work orders which status is in progress.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4f0263fd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quotation
-
-During a sale, the customer may request for a written note about the products
-or services you are planning to offer, along with the prices and other terms
-of engagement. This is called a “Proposal” or an “Estimate” or a “Pro Forma
-Invoice”or a **Quotation**.
-
-A typical Selling flow looks like:
-
-
-
-To create a new Quotation navigate to:
-
-> Selling > Quotation > New Quotation
-
-###Creating Quotation from Opportunity
-
-You can also create a Quotation from an Opportunity.
-
-
-
-A Quotation contains details about:
-
- * The recipient of the Quotation
- * The Items and quantities you are offering.
- * The rates at which they are offered.
- * The taxes applicable.
- * Other charges (like shipping, insurance) if applicable.
- * The validity of contract.
- * The time of delivery.
- * Other conditions.
-
-> Tip: Images look great on Quotations. Make sure your items have an image attached.
-
-### Rates
-
-The rates you quote may depend on two things.
-
- * The Price List: If you have multiple Price Lists, you can select a Price List or tag it to the Customer (so that it is auto-selected). Your Item prices will automatically be updated from the Price List. For details refer [Price List](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.html)
-
- * The Currency: If you are quoting to a Customer in a different currency, you will have to update the conversion rates to enable ERPNext to save the information in your standard Currency. This will help you to analyze the value of your Quotations in standard Currency.
-
-### Taxes
-
-To add taxes to your Quotation, you can select a **Sales Taxes and Charges Template** or add the taxes on your own.
-
-For e.g
-
-
-
-To understand taxes in detail visit [Taxes](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
-
-### Terms and Conditions
-
-Each Quotation must ideally contain a set of terms, of your contract. It is
-usually a good idea to make templates of your Terms and Conditions, so that
-you have a standard set of terms. You can do this by going to:
-
-> Selling > Terms and Conditions
-
-#### What should Terms and Conditions Contain?
-
- * Validity of the offer.
- * Payment Terms (In Advance, On Credit, part advance etc).
- * What is extra (or payable by the Customer).
- * Safety / usage warning.
- * Warranty if any.
- * Returns Policy.
- * Terms of shipping, if applicable.
- * Ways of addressing disputes, indemnity, liability, etc.
- * Address and Contact of your Company.
-
-### Submission
-
-Quotation is a “Submittable” transaction. Since you send this Quotation to
-your Customer or Lead, you must freeze it so that changes are not made after
-you send the Quotation.
-
-> Tip: Quotations can also be titled as “Proforma Invoice” or “Proposal”.
-You can do this by selecting a **Print Heading** in the **Print Settings**
-section. To create new Print Headings go to Setup > Printing >
-Print Heading.
-
-### Discount
-
-While making your sales transactions like a Quotation (or Sales Order) you
-can also give discounts to your customers. In the Discount section, add
-the discount in percentage or fixed amount. Read [Discount](https://erpnext.org/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount) for more explanation.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-analytics.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-analytics.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 1615c5e1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-analytics.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-# Sales Analytics Report
-
-With the ability to see and analyze your sales data in different views, data is able to diagnose and analyze to better understand how sales are performing. The data allows for filters to be altered dynamically with criteria selections through filters. There are three window areas that make up the Sales Analytics Report. The Filter Toolbar Window, the Graph Window and the Data Window. Please see the example below.
-
-
-
-### The Filter Toolbar Window
-
-The toolbar provides for filtering to select what data is to be used. Using the dropdown selections, data selections can be refined in a compounding fashion. As the selections are made, data is reflected in the data window as well as the graph window.
-
-
-
-### Data Analytics and Charts
-
-Within the data window, selections can be made to expand or compress the data to be analyzed. At the left of the window, (blue), are selection boxes. Each box can be selected for use. There is no restriction for the data comparison, so a higher level can be compared to lower levels. The data column to the right, (orange), contains selection boxes with + and minus selections. Selecting a + will expand the data and selecting a – will compress the data. As this is performed, the Graph Window is dynamically altered allowing rapid data analysis.
-
-
-
-Within a few minutes, mastery of the sales data can be achieved. With sales analytics in hand, sales teams can be better supported. Please see the expanded view below to see the complete report.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2421871b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
-# Sales Order
-
-The Sales Order confirms the receipt of an order from your customer. It is usually a binding Contract with your Customer. Once your customer confirms the Quotation you can convert your Quotation into
-a Sales Order.
-
-There are various transactions which can be triggered from Sales Order like;
-
-* Delivery Note
-* Sales Invoice
-* Material Request
-* Production Order
-* Project
-
-### Sales Order Flow-Chart
-
-
-
-To create a new Sales Order, go to:
-
-> Selling > Sales Order > New Sales Order
-
-### Creating Sales Order from Quotation
-
-You can also create a Sales Order from a submitted Quotation.
-
-
-
-Or you can create a new Sales Order and pull details from an Quotation.
-
-
-
-Most of the information in your Sales Order is the same as the Quotation.
-
-There are a few amongst other things that a Sales Order will ask you to
-update.
-
- * Enter Delivery Date agaist each item. If there are multiple items and if you enter delivery date in the first row, the date will be copied to other rows as well where it is blank.
- * Customer Purchase Order number: If your customer has sent you a Purchase Order, you can update its number for future reference (in billing).
- * To allow for per-Customer, per-Item Pricing Rules ("Customer A" pays $1.00 for "Item 1" but "Customer B" pays $1.25 for "Item 1"), there's a check box in Selling Settings to enable saving the specific item price per customer when you change a price in the Sales Order.
-
-### Packing List
-
-The “Packing List” table will be automatically updated when you “Save” the Sales Order. If any Items in your table are Product Bundle (packets), then the “Packing List” will contain the exploded (detailed) list of your Items.
-
-### Reservation and Warehouses
-
-If your Sales Order contains Items for which inventory is tracked (Is Stock Item is “Yes”) then, ERPNext will ask you for “Reservation Warehouse”. If you have set a default Warehouse for the Item, it will automatically set this Warehouse here.
-
-This “reserved” quantity will help you project what is the quantity you need to purchase based on all your commitments.
-
-### Taxes
-
-To add taxes to your Quotation, you can select a **Sales Taxes and Charges Template** or add the taxes on your own.
-
-For e.g
-
-
-
-To understand taxes in detail visit [Taxes](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
-
-### Sales Team
-
-**Sales Partner:** If this Sale was booked via a Sales Partner, you can update the Sales Partner’s details with commission and other info that you can aggregate.
-
-**Sales Persons:** ERPNext allows you to tag multiple Sales Persons who may have worked on this deal. You can also split the amount in targets of different Sales Persons and track how much incentives they earned on this deal.
-
-### Next Steps
-
-Once you “Submit” your Sales Order, you can now trigger different aspects of
-your organization:
-
- * To begin purchase click on Make -> Purchase Request
- * To make a shipment entry click on Make -> Delivery Note. You can also make Delivery Note for selected items based on delivery date.
- * To bill, make Make -> Sales Invoice
- * To stop further process on this Sales Order, click on “Stop”
-
-### Submission
-
-Sales Order is a “Submittable” transaction. See Document Stages. You will be able to execute dependent steps (like making a Delivery Note) only after “Submitting” this Sales Order.
-
-### Sales Order with Order type Maintenance
-
-When the 'Order Type' of the Sales Order is 'Maintenance' follow the steps
-given below:
-
-__Step 1:__ Enter Currency, Price list and Item details.
-
-__Step 2:__ Mention taxes and other information.
-
-__Step 3:__ Save and Submit the form
-
-__Step 4:__ Once the form is submitted, the Action button will provide three choices.i) Maintenance Visit ii) Maintenance Schedule iii) Invoice.
-
-
-> **Note 1:**
-By clicking on the Action button and selecting 'Maintenance Visit' you can directly fill the visit form. The Sales Order details will be fetched directly.
-
-> **Note 2:**
-By clicking on the Action button and selecting 'Maintenance Schedule' you can fill the schedule details. The Sales Order details will be fetched directly.
-
-> **Note 3:**
-By clicking on the Invoice button you can make an Invoice for your
-services . The sales orders details will be fetched directly.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/customer-acquisition-and-loyalty-report.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/customer-acquisition-and-loyalty-report.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 56d2f427..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/customer-acquisition-and-loyalty-report.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-# Customer Acquisition and Loyalty Report
-
-To understand revenue, it often is helpful to look at the data from a new customer and existing customers standpoint. This report helps visualize customer loyalty. There are two windows within this report: The Filter Window and the Data Window.
-
-
-
-Accessing the Filter Window, the company and date ranges can be applied. Data is updated in the Data Window as changes are applied.
-
-Within the Data Window, columns of information are accessible. The label at the top of each column can be selected by hovering over the column heading and clicking. This will sort the data by this column in an ascending or descending fashion. As well, the open data entry field immediately below the column can be used to further refine by filtering the data. The following example demonstrates data that has been sorted in ascending order by total (orange) and has been filtered for the year 2018 (blue).
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/sales-funnel-report.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/sales-funnel-report.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 784f096a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/selling-reports/sales-funnel-report.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-# Sales Funnel Report
-
-The sales funnel report provides sales generation analysis. This demonstrates the progression stages of the sales process. There are four stages for leads to be generated into Sales Orders. These stages are: Active Leads/Customers, Opportunities, Quotations and Sales orders.
-
-The report has two windows. The first window is the Date Selection Window. The second window is the Graph Window.
-
-
-
-Once a date range has been selected, the graph is updated, the graph reflects the changes and the associated with the associated labels.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 648f2bc4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-This section includes information on how to setup customer groups, sales partners, sales persons and terms and conditions.
-
-It has instructions on how to configure selling settings, in order to enable default fields.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 22a335b0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-selling-settings
-sales-partner
-shipping-rule
-product-bundle
-item-price
-sales-person-target-allocation
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ba8061fb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Price
-
-Item Price is the record in which you can log sellig and buying rate of an item.
-
-There are two ways to reach to new Item Price form.
-
-> Selling/Buying/Stock > Setup > Item Price > New Item Price
-
-Or
-
-> Item > Add/Edit Prices > Click on "+" >> New Item Price
-
-Following are the steps to create new Item Price.
-
-Step 1: Select Price List
-
-You can create multiple Price List in ERPNext to track Selling and Buying Price List of an item separtely. Also if item's selling prices id changing based on territory, or due to other criteria, you can create multiple selling Price List for it.
-
-
-
-On selection of Price List, its currency and for selling or buying property will be fetched as well.
-
-To have Item Price fetching in the sales or purchase transaction, you should have Price List id selected in the transaction, just above Item table.
-
-Step 2: Select Item
-
-Select item for which Item Price record is to be created. On selection of Item Code, Item Name and Description will be fetched as well.
-
-
-
-Step 3: Enter Rate
-
-Enter selling/buying rate of an item in Price List currency.
-
-
-
-Step 4: Save Item Price
-
-To check all Item Price together, go to:
-
-> Stock > Main Report > Itemwise Price List Rate
-
-You will find option to create new Item Price record (+) in this report as well.
-
-div>
-
-
-
-
-###Select Parent Item
-
-In Product Bundle master, there are two sections. The "Parent Item" and a List of items to be shipped (Child Items).
-
-The "Parent Item" must be a so called non-stock item. The "Parent Item" is to be seen more like a vessel or virtual item and not a physical product.
-To create a non-stock item you have to unmark "Maintain Stock" in the Item Form.
-This is non-stock item because there is no stock maintained for it but only for the "Child Items".
-If you want to maintain stock for the Parent Item, then you must create a regular Bill of Material (BOM)
-and package them using a Stock Entry Transactions.
-
-###Select Child Items
-
-In Package Item section, you will list all the child items for which we maintain stock and is delivered to customer.
-Remember: The "Parent Item" is just virtual, so your main product (a laptop in our example here) also has to be listed on the List of Child (or Package) Items
-
-###Product Bundle in the Sales Transactions
-
-When making Sales transactions (Sales Invoice, Sales Order, Delivery Note)
-the Parent Item will be selected in the main item table.
-
-
-
-On selection of a Parent Item in the main item table, its child items will be fetched in Packing List
-table of the transaction. If child item is the serialized item, you will be able to specify its Serial Mo.
-in packing List table itself. On submission of transaction, system will reduce the stock level of child items from
-warehouse specified in Packing List table.
-
-Use Product Bundle to Manage Schemes:
-
-This work-around in Product Bundle was discovered when a customer dealing into nutrition product asked for feature to manage schemes like "Buy One Get One Free". To manage the same, he created a non-stock item which was used as Parent Item. In description of item, he entered scheme details with items image indicating the offer. The saleable product was selected in Package Item where qty was two. Hence every time they sold one qty of Parent item under scheme, system deducted two quantities of product from Warehouse.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-partner.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 260469dc..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sales Partner
-
-People who assist you in getting business are termed as Sales Partners. Sales Partners can be represented by different names in ERPNext. You can call them Channel Partner, Distributor, Dealer, Agent, Retailer, Implementation Partner, Reseller etc.
-
-For each Sales Partner, you can define commission offer to them. When Sales Partner is selected in transactions, their commission is calculated over Net Total of Sales Order/Invoice or Delivery Note.
-
-You can track Sales Personwise commission in the report under Selling module.
-
-To create a sales partner go to:
-
-`Selling > Setup > Sales Partner`
-
-Sales Partners are saved with Sales Partner name provided by user.
-
--This work-around in Product Bundle was discovered when a customer dealing into nutrition product asked for feature to manage schemes like "Buy One Get One Free". To manage the same, he created a non-stock item which was used as Parent Item. In description of item, he entered scheme details with items image indicating the offer. The saleable product was selected in Package Item where qty was two. Hence every time they sold one qty of Parent item under scheme, system deducted two quantities of product from Warehouse.
-
-You can track their address and contact details and also allocate Sales Partner for each Item Group, based on Qty and Amount.
-
-### Including Sales Partners in Your Website
-
-To include the name of your Partner on your website, check the "Show in
-Website" box. When click on "Show in Website", you will see field where you can attach logo of partner's company and enter brief and introduction of partner.
-
-
-
-To see listing of partner, you should go to:
-
-https://example.erpnext.com/partners
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f4050e7e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,90 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sales Person Target Allocation
-
-With management of Sales Person, ERPNext also allow you to assign target to Sales Persons based on Item Group and Territory. Based on target allocated and actual sales booked by Sales Person, you will get target variance report for the Sales Person.
-
-###1. Sales Person - Item Groupwise Target Allocation
-
-####1.1 Open Sales Person's Master
-
-To allocate target, you should open specific Sales Person master.
-
-`Selling > Setup > Sales Person > (Open Sales Person)`
-
-####1.2 Allocate Item Groupwise Target
-
-In the Sales Person master, you will find table called Sales Person Target.
-
-
-
-In this table, you should select Item Group, Fiscal Year, Target Qty and Amount.
-
-You can give target in amount or quantity, or in both. Item Group can also be left blank. In this case the system will calculate target based on all the Items.
-
-####1.3 Target Distribution
-
-If you wish to spread allocated target across months, then you should setup Monthly Distribution master, and select it in the Sales Person master. Considering our example, target for the month of December will be set as 5 qty (10% of total allocation).
-
-
-
-####Report - Sales Person Target Variance Item Groupwise
-
-To check this report, go to:
-
-`Selling > Standard Report > Sales Person Target Variance (Item Group-wise)'
-
-This report will provide you variance between target and actual performance of Sales Person. This report is based on Sales Order report.
-
-
-
-
-As per the report, allocated target to Sales Person for the month of December was 5 qty. However, Sales Order was made for this employee and Item Group for only 3 qty. Hence, variance of 2 qty is shown in the report.
-
----
-
-###2. Sales Person - Territorywise Target Allocation
-
-To allocate target to Sales Person based on Territory, you can should select specific Sales Person in the Territory master. This Sales Person is entered just for the reference. Sales Person details are not updated in the variance report of Territorywise Target Allocation.
-
-####2.1 Go to Territory master
-
-`Selling > Setup > Territory > (Open specific Territory master)`
-
-In the Territory master, you will find field to select Territory Manager. This field is linked to "Sales Person" master.
-
-
-
-####2.2 Allocating Target
-
-Target Allocation in the Territory master is same as in Sales Person master. You can follow same steps as given above to specify target in the Territory master as well.
-
-####2.3 Target Distribution
-
-Using this Monthly Distribution document, you can divide target Qty or Amount across various months.
-
-####2.4 Report - Territory Target Variance Item Groupwise
-
-This report will provide you variance between target and actual performance of Sales in particular territory. This report is based on Sales Order report. Though Sales Person is defined in the Territory master, its details are not pulled in the report.
-
-
-
----
-
-###3. Target Distribution
-
-Target Distribution document allows you to divide allocated target across multiple months. If your product and services is seasonal, you can distribute the sales target accordingly. For example, if you are into umbrella business, then target allocated in the monsoon seasion will be higher than in other months.
-
-To create new Monthly Distriibution, go to:
-
-`Accounts > Monthly Distributon`
-
-
-
-You can link Monthly Distribution while allocating targets in Sales Person as well as in Territory master.
-
-###See Also
-
-1. [Sales Person Target Allocation](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation)
-2. [Using Sales Person in transactions](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/selling-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cf6f365b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-# Selling Settings
-
-Selling Setting is where you can define properties which will be applied to the masters and transactions involved in the sales cycle.
-
-Let's check into each property one by one.
-
-
-
-####1. Customer Naming By
-
-When a customer is saved, a unique ID is generated for that Customer.
-
-By default, Customer ID is generated based on Customer Name. If you wish to save Customer using a naming series, in the field Customer Naming Series, set value as "Naming Series".
-
-Example of Customer Id's saved in Naming Series - `CUST00001,CUST00002, CUST00003...` and so on.
-
-You can set Naming Series for Customers from:
-
-> Setup > Data > Naming Series
-
-####2. Campaign Naming By
-
-Just like for Customer, you can also configure naming methodology for the Campaign master as well. By default, Campaign will be saved with Campaign Name only.
-
-####3. Default Customer Group and Territory
-
-Select a default [Customer Group](/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.html) which will be auto-updated when creating a new Customer.
-
-Quotations can be created for the Customers as well as for the Leads. When converting a Quotation into Sales Order, which is created for a Lead, the system attempts to convert that Lead into Customer. While creating Customer in the backend, values for Customer Group and Territory is picked from Selling Settings. If no default values are found for Customer Group or Territory, then you will receive a validation message asking for Customer Group or Territory. Or you can manually convert a Lead into Customer.
-
-####5. Default Price List
-
-Price List set in this field will be auto-updated in the Price List field of sales transactions like Quotation, Sales Order, Delivery Note and Sales Invoice.
-
-####6. Close Opportunity After Days
-
-If there are many Opportunities having a status other than Open, then they will be auto-closed after the no. of days mentioned in this field.
-
-####7. Default Quotation Validity Days
-
-Quotation Issues to the customer is Valid for certain days only. In the Quotation, you can update Valid Till Date manually. By default, the Valid Till date is auto-set as 30 days from the Quotation's Posting Date. You can change the no. of days in this field as per your business case.
-
-####8. Sales Order Required
-
-If you wish to make Sales Order creation mandatory before the creation of Sales Invoice, then you should set the Sales Order Required field as Yes. By default, this will be "No" for a value.
-
-####9. Delivery Note Required
-
-To make Delivery Note creation as mandatory before Sales Invoice creation, you should set this field as "Yes". By default, this will be "No" for a value.
-
-####10. Maintain Same Rate Throughout Sales Cycle
-
-The system by default validates that item price will be the same throughout the sales cycle (Sales Order - Delivery Note - Sales Invoice). If you could have item price changing within the cycle, and you need to bypass validation of the same rate throughout the cycle, then you should uncheck this field and save.
-
-####11. Allow User to Edit Price List Rate in Transaction
-
-Item table of the sale transactions has a field called Price List Rate. This field is non-editable by default in all the sales transactions. This is to ensure that price of an item is fetched from Item Price record and the user is not able to edit it.
-
-If you need to enable the user to edit Item Price, fetched from Price List of an item, you should uncheck this field.
-
-####12. Allow multiple Sales Orders against a Customer's Purchase Order
-
-When creating a Sales Order, you can update the Purchase Order ID and Date received from the Customer. You can create only one Sales Order against the Customer's PO No. and Date. However, if you wish to allow the creation of multiple Sales Order's against the same PO No. of the Customer, enable the property of "Allow multiple Sales Orders against a Customer's Purchase Order".
-
-####13. Validate Selling Price for Item against Purchase Rate or Valuation Rate
-
-When making sales, it's important to know if you are not selling it at a loss-making price. Enabling this validation will validate item's Selling Price with its valuation/buying price. If item's selling price is found to be less than it's buying price, then you will get a prompt indicating the same.
-
-####14. Hide Customer's Tax Id from Sales Transactions
-
-As per the statutory requirement, most of the Customers have unique Tax ID assigned to them. They also need to have this tax ID fetched in the selling transactions. However, if you don't wish to use this functionality, you can disable by checking this property.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index af4b0498..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Shipping Rule
-
-Using Shipping Rule you can define the cost for delivering the product to the customer and also to the supplier.
-You can define different shipping rules or a fixed shipping amount for the same item across different territories.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/calculate-incentive-for-sales-team.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/calculate-incentive-for-sales-team.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d5bd7000..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/calculate-incentive-for-sales-team.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-# Calculate Incentive For Sales Team
-
-Can be used in any Sales Transaction with **Sales Team** Table:
-
-
-
- cur_frm.cscript.custom_validate = function(doc) {
- // calculate incentives for each person on the deal
- total_incentive = 0
- $.each(wn.model.get("Sales Team", {parent:doc.name}), function(i, d) {
-
- // calculate incentive
- var incentive_percent = 2;
- if(doc.grand_total > 400) incentive_percent = 4;
-
- // actual incentive
- d.incentives = flt(doc.grand_total) * incentive_percent / 100;
- total_incentive += flt(d.incentives)
- });
-
- doc.total_incentive = total_incentive;
- }
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/change-password.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/change-password.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1b6449de..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/change-password.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-#Change User Password
-
-Each ERPNext user can customize password for his/her ERPNext account. Also user with System Manager role will be able to reset password for himself as well as for other users. Following are the steps to go about changing your password.
-
-
-####Step 1: Go to My Setting
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Set New Password
-
-
-
-Enter the new password and save the form to save changes
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 39f53297..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-#Delete All Related Transactions for a Company
-
-Often, users setup all the master data and then create a few dummy records. Then they want to delete the dummy records and the company and start over again, keeping the other master data like Customers, Items, BOMs intact.
-
-Version 5 onwards, you can now delete all dummy transactions related to a company.
-
-To do that, open the company record.
-
-`Setup > Accounts > Company` or `Accounts > Setup > Company`
-
-In Company master, click on the **Delete Company Transactions** button right at the bottom of the form. Then you must re-type the company name to confirm if you are sure you want to continue with this.
-
-This action will wipe out all the data related to that company like Quotation, Invoices, Purchase Orders etc. So be careful
-
-
-
-**Note:** If you want to delete the company record itself, use the normal "Delete" button from Menu options. It will also delete Chart of Accounts, Chart of Cost Centers and Warehouse records for that company.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/difference-between-system-user-and-website-user.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/difference-between-system-user-and-website-user.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 48c8b6c4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/difference-between-system-user-and-website-user.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-# Difference Between System User and Website User
-
-**Question:** I have added my Employee as a User and have assigned them Roles as well. Still, they are not able to view Dashboard on the login.
-
-**Answer:**
-
-There are two type of Users in ERPNext.
-
-* **System User**: They are Employees of your company. Example of Roles assigned to System Users are Account User, Sales Manager, Purchase User, Support Team etc.
-
-* **Website User**: They are to parties (like Customer and Suppliers) of your Company.
-
-Example Website User Roles are Customer and Suppliers.
-
-How to check if Role is for System User or Website User?
-
-In the Role master, if field "Desk Access" is checked, that Role is for System User. If Desk Access field is unchecked, then that Role is for Website User.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/edit-submitted-document.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/edit-submitted-document.md
deleted file mode 100755
index aa90d36d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/edit-submitted-document.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-
-#Edit Submitted Document
-
-To edit submitted document, you need to cancel it first. Followings are steps to edit submitted document.
-
-####Step 1: Cancel Submitted Document
-
-You will find Cancel button on upper right corner of submitted document.
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Amend the document
-
-On cancellation of submitted document, Amend button will be became visible.
-
-
-
-####Step 3: Save and Submit the document
-
-On clicking Amend button, same document will become editable again. After Making required changes, save and submit the document.
-
-
-
-Note: If your document linked with other documents, then you will need to cancel last document you made on top of this document.
-
-Example:If you have created Delivery Note and Sales Invoice against Sales Order, which you need to amend, then you should first Cancel Delivery Note and Sales Invoice made for that Sales Order. Then amend Sales Order, re-save and re-submit it.
-
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/email-error.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/email-error.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7bd5196e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/email-error.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Email Error in Sending or Receiving
-
-In ERPNext, you can customize the Incoming and Outgoing Email Gateway. On saving an Email Account, ERPNext tries establishing a connection with your email gateway. If your ERPNext account is able to connect fine, then Email Account is saved successfully. If not, then you might receive an error as below.
-
-
-
-This indicates that using login credentials and other email gateway details provided in the Email Account, ERPNext is not able to connect to your email server. Please ensure that you have entered valid email credentials for your Email Gateway. Once you have configured Email Account successfully, you should be able to send and receive emails from your ERPNext account fine.
-
-Note: Your ERPNext account is connected with an ERPNext email server by default. If you don't want to use your own email server, you can continue sending emails using ERPNext email server, without any configuration required in the Email Account.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 259229ec..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-change-password
-delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions
-edit-submitted-document
-calculate-incentive-for-sales-team
-integrating-erpnext-with-other-application
-manage-header-and-footer
-managing-multiple-companies
-managing-perm-level
-managing-tree-structure-masters
-naming-series-current-value
-overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool
-rename-user
-using-custom-domain-on-erpnext
-setup-two-factor-authentication
-difference-between-system-user-and-website-user
-outgoing-email-gateway
-print-format-sections
-email-error
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/integrating-erpnext-with-other-application.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/integrating-erpnext-with-other-application.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 68f7f681..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/integrating-erpnext-with-other-application.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-#Integrating ERPNext with other Applications
-
-For now, ERPNext has out-of-the-box integration available for some applications like Shopify, your SMS gateway and payment gateway. To integrate ERPNext with other application, you can use REST API of Frappe. Check following links to learn more about REST API of Frappe.
-
-[Frappe Rest API](https://frappe.io/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api.html)
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/manage-header-and-footer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/manage-header-and-footer.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bab703b9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/manage-header-and-footer.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-#Manage Header And Footer
-
-Check following to learn how to setup Letter Head in ERPNext.
-
-[Managing Letter head](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.html)
-
-ERPNext doesn't have option to define standard Footer. As a work around, you can use Terms and Condition master for footer. Content of Terms and Condition is already the last to appear in the standard print formats on transactions. Check following link to learn how to manage Terms and Conditions in ERPNext.
-
-[Terms and Condition](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.html)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-multiple-companies.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-multiple-companies.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3ced7927..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-multiple-companies.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-#Managing Multiple Companies
-
-ERPNext allows you to create multiple companies in a single ERPNext instance.
-
-In one account has multiple companies, you will find option to select Company in each transactions. While most of the records (mostly transactions) will be separated based on Company, there are few masters like Item, Item Group, Customer Group, Territory etc. which are common among all the companies.
-
-If you have separate teams working on each company, you can restrict access of the User to the data of specific Company. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/) to know how to set permission rules for giving restricted access to the User.
-
-Following are the steps to add new Company.
-
-####Go to Setup Module
-
-`Accounts > Setup > Company > New`
-
-####Enter Company Details
-
-Company will be saved with Company Name provided.
-
-
-
-Also, you can define other properties for new company like:
-
-* Country
-* Currency
-* Default Cash and Bank Account
-* Income/Expense Account
-* Company Registration Details
-
-Value will be auto-filled in most of these field to define company-wise defaults. You can edit/customize it as per your requirement.
-
-
-
-####Chart of Account for New Company
-
-A separate Chart of Account master will be set for each company in the ERPNext. This allows you managing Accounts/Ledger master separately for each company. Also it allows you avail financial statement and reports like Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss Statement separately for each company.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-perm-level.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-perm-level.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 38c1c805..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-perm-level.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-#Managing Perm Level in Permission Manager
-
-In each document, you can group fields by "levels". Each group of field is denoted by a unique number (0, 1, 2, 3 etc.). A separate set of permission rules can be applied to each field group. By default all fields are of level 0.
-
-Perm Level for a field can be defined in the [Customize Form](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.html).
-
-
-
-If you need to assign different permission of particular field to different users, you can achieve it via Perm Level. Let's consider an example for better understanding.
-
-Delivery Note is accessible to Stock Manager as well as Stock User. You don't wish Stock User to access Amount related field in Delivery Note, but other field should be visible just like it is visible Stock Manager.
-
-For the amount related fields, you should set Perm Level as (say) 2.
-
-For Stock Manager, they will have permission on fields on Delivery Note as Perm Level 2 whereas a Stock User will not have any permission on Perm Level 2 for Delivery Note.
-
-
-
-Considering the same scenario, if you want a Stock User to access a field at Perm Level 2, but not edit it, the Stock User will be assigned permission on Perm Level 2, but only for read, and not for write/edit.
-
-
-
-Perm Level (1, 2, 3) not need be in order. Perm Level is primarily for grouping number of fields together, and then assigning permission to Roles for that group. Hence, you can set any perm level for an item, and then do permission setting for it.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 83611e14..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-
-#Managing Tree Structure Masters
-
-Some of the masters in ERPNext are maintained in tree structure. Tree structured masters allow you to set Parent master, and Child masters under those Parents. Setting up this structure allows you creating intelligent report, and track growth at each level in the hierarchy.
-
-Following is the partial list of masters which are maintained in the tree structure.
-
-* Chart of Accounts
-
-* Chart of Cost Centers
-
-* Customer Group
-
-* Territory
-
-* Sales Person
-
-* Item Group
-
-Following are the steps to manage and create record in the tree structured master. Let's consider Territory master to understand managing tree masters.
-
-####Step 1 : Go to Master
-
-`Selling > Setup > Territory`
-
-####Step 2 : Parent Territory
-
-
-
-When click on Parent territory, you will see option to add child territory under it. All default Territory groups will be listed under Parent group called "All Territories". You can add further Parent or child Territory Groups under it.
-
-####Step 3: Add new Territory
-
-When click on Add Child, a dialog box will provide two fields.
-
-**Territory Group Name**
-
-Territory will be saved with Territory Name provided here.
-
-**Group Node**
-
-If Group Node selected as Yes, then this Territory will be created as Parent, which means you can further create sub-territories under it. If select No, then it will become child Territory which you will be able to select in another masters.
-
-Only child Territory Groups are selectable in another masters and transactions.
-
-
-
-Following is how Child Territories will be listed under a Parent Territory.
-
-
-
-Following this steps, you can manage other tree masters as well in ERPNext.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/naming-series-current-value.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/naming-series-current-value.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 598d819f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/naming-series-current-value.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-
-#Setting the Current Value for Naming Series
-
-Naming Series feature allows you to define prefix for naming of a documents. For example, if a Sales Order has prefix "SO", then the series will be generated as SO-00001, SO-00002... and so on. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html) to learn how you can customize Number Series for a transaction/master in ERPNext.
-
-### 1. Setting the Current Value
-
-Naming Series feature also offers a tool where you can set Current Value for specific prefix. This is generally required if you have recently started using ERPNext, and have old transactions in the previous system, and you want the numbering series to start in from where it ended in the old system. Let's consider a scenario to learn this better.
-
-For example, you have 322 Sales Orders created in your old system with SO00322 as highest Sales Order Id. In ERPNext, you need the first Sales Order to pick up #323 when it is saved. To enable this, you should set Current Value for SO series in following steps.
-
-#### Go to Naming Series Tool
-
-`Setup > System > Naming Series`
-
-#### Update Series Section
-
-
-
-#### Select Prefix
-
-Considering our scenario, prefix for Sales Order will be "SO".
-
-
-
-#### Current Value
-
-If you have currently 12 Sales Orders created in your account, then current value updated will be 12. You can edit Current Value to 322, and then click on Update Series Number.
-
-
-
-With this setting, you will have numbering for the New Sales Orders starting with #323.
-
-### 2. Error Due Series Number
-
-If you receive a Duplicate Name error while saving a transaction, for example, while saving Item Price, you receive an error saying:
-
-`Duplicate name Item Price RFD/00016`
-
-This error message indicates that when you are saving Item Price, system is trying to allocate "RFD/00016" to that Item Price record. But it is finding that Item Price with this ID is already existing in your system.
-
-This error could arise because Current Value for Series/Prefix of Item Price is disturbed and not in sync with actual Current Value. While actual Current Value for Item Price could be 20 (or any number more than 16), someone has set Current Value for this series as 15.
-
-To confirm actual Current Value for particular Series, you should check report for document in question (Item Price in this case), and check for the Item Price ID with highest value.
-
-Let's assume we find that actual Current Value for Item price is 22, then you go Naming Series, and set Current Value for the Prefix/Series of Item Price to 22, and Update Series Number.
-
-These instructions is applicable for all the documents in ERPNext for which user can customize Series and its Current Value.
-
-Let's consider another scenario to learn this better. On assigning a document to another user, error message says:
-
-`Duplicate name ToDo TDI00014286`
-
-This indicate the Current Value for Series/Prefix of ToDo (TDI) has been disturbed. You should follow these steps to correct value for Current Value for TDI prefix.
-
-1. Check ToDo report for the highest ToDo id value.
-1. Setup >> Settings >> Naming Series
-1. Check section B of Update Series
-1. Select Prefix for ToDo "TDI"
-1. Ensure that highest number for ToDo is updated as Current Value in Naming Series. If not, correct Current Value, and click on "Update Series Numbering".
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/outgoing-email-gateway.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/outgoing-email-gateway.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4223da8c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/outgoing-email-gateway.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-#Outgoing Email Gateway
-
-In the ERPNext, you can customize incoming and Outgoing Email Gateway. On saving an Email Account, ERPNext tries establishing a connection with your email gateway. If your ERPNext account is able to connect fine, then Email Account master is saved. If not, then you might receive an error as indicated below.
-
-
-
-This indicates that using login credentials and other email gateway details provided, ERPNext is not able to connect to your email server. Please ensure that you have entered valid email credentials for your Email Gateway. Once you have configured Email Account successfully, you should be able to send and receive emails from your ERPNext account fine.
-
-Note: Your ERPNext account is connected with ERPNext email server by default. If you don't want to use your own email server, you can continue sending emails using an ERPNext email server.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 25c00186..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-
-#Overwriting Data from Data Import Tool
-
-Data Import Tool allows importing documents (like customers, Suppliers, Orders, Invoices etc.) from spreadsheet file into ERPNext. The very same tool can also be used for overwrite values in the existing documents.
-
-Overwriting data from Data Import Tool works only for the saved transactions, and not for Submitted ones.
-
-Let's assume there are no. of items for which we need to overwrite Item Group. Following are the steps to go about overwriting Item Groups for existing Items.
-
-####Step 1: Download Template
-
-Template Used for overwriting data will be same as one used for importing new items. Hence, you should first download template from.
-
-`Setup > Data > Import/Export Data'
-
-Since items to be over-written will be already available in the system, while downloading template, click on "Download with data" to get all the existing items in the template.
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Prepare Data
-
-In the template, we can only keep rows of the items to be overwritten and delete the rest.
-
-Enter new value in the Item Group column for an item. Since Item Group is a master in itself, ensure Item Group entered in the spreadsheet file is already added in the Item Group master.
-
-
-
-Since we are overwriting only Item Group, only following columns will be mandatory.
-
-1. Column A (since it has main values of template)
-1. Name (Column B)
-1. Item Group
-
-Columns of other field which won't have any impact can be removed, even if they are mandatory. This is applicable only for overwriting, and not when importing new records.
-
-####Step 3: Browse Template
-
-After updating Item Groups in spreadheet, come back to Data Import Tool in ERPNext. Browse and select the File/template which has data to be overwritten.
-
-
-
-####Step 4: Upload
-
-On clicking Import, Item Group will be over-written.
-
-
-
-If validation of values fails, then it will indicate row no. of spreadsheet for which validation failed and needs correction. In that case, you should corrected value in that row of spreadsheet, and then import same file again. If validation fails even for one row, none of the records are imported/overwritten.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/print-format-sections.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/print-format-sections.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e6b09442..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/print-format-sections.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-#Print Format Sections
-
-**Question:** In the Print Format, I am getting link breaks for each section. How can I disable it?
-
-
-
-**Answer:** To disable line breaks for the section breaks, you should uncheck field "Show Line Breaks after Sections" in its Print Format.
-
-Print Format Builder > Select Print Format > Edit Settings > Uncheck field "Show Line Breaks after Sections"
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/rename-user.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/rename-user.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 74e02d00..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/rename-user.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-#Rename User
-
-Renaming functionality allows you to edit id of specific record. User is saved with person's Email Address. Only User with System Manager's role will be able to rename User IDs.
-
-Following are the steps to rename user id.
-
-#### Step 1: Users
-
-`Setup > Users > User`
-
-Open User to be renamed.
-
-#### Step 2: Rename
-
-From Menu, select Rename.
-
-
-
-#### Step 3: Update
-
-Enter valid Email Address and click on Rename.
-
-
-
-After successful renaming, User will be able login using updated user id.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/report-permission-error.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/report-permission-error.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 437644b1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/report-permission-error.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-**Question:** User has roles like Account User and Account Manager assigned. Still, when accessing Account Receivable report, User is getting an error message of no permission the territory master.
-
-
-
-**Answer:**
-
-As per the permission system in ERPNext, for the User to be able to access a form or a report, s(he) should have at-least read permission on all the link field in that form/report. Since Territory is a link field in Account Receivable report, please add a permission rule to let Account User/Manager have at-least Read permission on the Territory master. Please follow below-given steps to resolve this issue.
-
-1. Roles assigned to User are Account User and Account Manager.
-
-2. As indicates in the Error message, the user didn't have permission on the territory master. As per the default permission, none of the above role assigned to that User has any permission on the Territory master.
-
-3. To resolve this issue, I have assigned Account User permission to Read Territory master.
-
- 
-
-As per this permission update, User should be able to access Account Receivable report fine.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/setup-two-factor-authentication.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/setup-two-factor-authentication.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e15fd974..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/setup-two-factor-authentication.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-
-#Setup Two Factor Authentication
-
-##Enable Two Factor Authentication (2FA)
-
-Activate two factor authentication by running the command.
-
-`bench --site [sitename] enable_two_factor_auth true`
-
-Specify the following in System Settings
-
-* The method of OTP validation (OTP App = TOTP using Soft or Hard Token while Email/SMS = HOTP using Email or SMS
-* The expiry time for the QR Code on the server if OTP App is specified
-* The OTP Issuer Name.
-
-
-
-
-On activation of 2FA from setup, it is also activated for the Role "All". In this way, all users including the Administrator have to perform a 2nd level authentication with a token. By unchecking the "Two Factor Authentication" checkbox in the "All" role and enabling it in other roles, the need to login with a token can be limited to specific roles. 2FA does not apply to login by Web Users and API login
-
-
-
-If using SMS authentication, please make sure that your SMS settings are updated
-
-
-
-If using Email, make sure that your outgoing Email account settings are updated
-
-
-
-When the new user tries to log in for the first time in a system that has two-factor authentication enabled and which has the authentication option as OTP App, an email is sent containing a link to the QR Code.
-
-
-
-
-Scanning the QR Code with an authentication app like Google Authenticator registers the access for the user and automatically starts to generate tokens that can be used to login
-
-
-
-If either of Email/SMS is used as the authentication method, you get notifications also
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/using-custom-domain-on-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/using-custom-domain-on-erpnext.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d76df1fd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/using-custom-domain-on-erpnext.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Using Custom Domain On ERPNext
-
-
-
-If you have subscribed to any of the plans at [ERPNext](https://erpnext.com), you can have us serve your site on your custom domain (for example at http://example.com). This enables your website to be served on a custom domain.
-
-To enable this feature, you will first have to edit DNS settings of your domain as follows.
-
-- Make a CNAME record for a subdomain (www in most cases) to {youraccountname}.erpnext.com
-- If you want serve the website on a naked domain (ie. http://example.com), set a URL redirect to http://www.example.com and not a CNAME record. Making a CNAME record in this case can have unexpected consequences including you not being able to receive emails anymore.
-
-After you've setup the DNS records, you will have to raise a support ticket by sending an email to support@erpnext.com and we'll take it from there.
-
-**Note**: We do not support HTTPS on custom domains. HTTPS enables end to end encryption (from your browser to our server). Although not critical for the website but we strongly recommend against using the ERPNext app over an unencrypted protocol. To be safe always use the ERP at your erpnext.com address.
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/authorization-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 00eaff80..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-
-# Authorization Rule
-
-Authorization Rule is a tool to define rule for conditional authorization.
-
-If you sales and purchase transactions of higher value or discount requires an authorization from senior manager, you can set authorization rule for it.
-
-To create new Authorization Rule, go to:
-
-> Setup > Customize > Authorization Rule
-
-Let's consider an example of Authorization Rule to learn better.
-
-Assume that Sales Manager needs to authorize Sales Orders, only if its Grand Total value exceeds 10000. If Sales Order values is less than 10000, then even Sales User will be able to submit it. It means Submit permision of Sales User will be restricted only upto Sales Order of Grand Total less than 10000.
-
-**Step 1:**
-
-Open new Authorization Rule
-
-**Step 2:**
-
-Select Company and Transaction on which Authorization Rule will be applicable. This functionality is available for limited transactions only.
-
-**Step 3:**
-
-Select Based On. Authorization Rule will be applied based on value selected in this field.
-
-**Step 4:**
-
-Select Role on whom this Authorization Rule will be applicable. As per the example considered, Sales User will be selected as Application To (Role). To be more specific you can also select Applicable To User, if you wish to apply the rule for specific Sales User, and not all Sales User. Its okay to not select Sales User, as its not mandatory.
-
-**Step 5:**
-
-Select approvers Role. It will be Sales Manager role which if assigned to user, will be able to submit Sales Order above 10000. Also you can select specific Sales Manager, and then rule should be applicable for that User only. Selecting Approving User field is not mandatory.
-
-**Step 6:**
-
-Set Above Value. Given the exmaple, Above Value will be set as 10000.
-
-
-
-If Sales User tries submitting Sales Order of value higher than 10000, then he will get error message.
-
->If you wish to restrict Sales User from submitting Sales Orders, then instead of creating Authorization Rule, you should remove submit previledge from Role Permission Manager for Sales User.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/company-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/company-setup.md
deleted file mode 100755
index eba85fe8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/company-setup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-# Company
-
-A company is a legal entity made up of an association of people for carrying on a commercial or industrial enterprise.
-
-In ERPNext, first Company is created on completion of account creation. For each Company, you can set a domain as manufacturing, retail, or services depending on the nature of your business activity.
-
-If you have more than one company, you can add them from:
-
-> Accounts > Company > New Company
-
-### Company Tree Structure
-
-> New in Version 11
-
-The company is a tree-structured master. It allows you to define a federated and group company structure.
-
-
-
-Once you build a company tree, ERPNext will validate that the accounts of the child companies will match the accounts in the parent company, so that you can consolidate all the accounts in a consolidated chart of accounts statement.
-
-### Chart of Accounts
-
-On each Company, the master for Chart of Account is maintained separately. This allows you to maintain separate accounting for each company as per the legal requirements.
-
-
-
-ERPNext has localized Chart of Accounts readily available for some countries. When creating new Company, you can choose to setup Chart of Account for it from one of the following options.
-
-* Standard Chart of Accounts
-* Based on Existing Company's Chart of Account
-
-
-
-### Default Values
-
-Within the Company master, you can set lots of default values for master and accounts. These default account will help you in the quick posting of accounting transactions, where the value for the Account will be fetched from the Company master if provided. Following are the types of values for which default can be set in the Company master.
-
-* Letter Head
-* Bank Account
-* Holiday List
-* Sales Income Account
-* Cost of Goods Sold Account
-* Control Accounts related to perpetual inventory
-* Accounts related to Fixed Asset accounting
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bbf2ae6c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Bulk Renaming of Records
-
-You can rename a document in ERPNext (if it is allowed) by going to **Menu > Rename** in the document.
-
-Alternatively, if you want to rename a whole bunch of records, just go to:
-
-> Setup > Data > Rename Tool
-
-This tool will allow you to rename multiple records at the same time.
-
-### Example
-
-To rename multiple records, upload a **.csv** file with the old name in the first column and the new name in the second column and click on **Upload**.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import.md
deleted file mode 100644
index bebce35f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-
-
-# Data Import
-
-Data Import (formerly known as the Data Import Tool) is a great way to upload (or edit) bulk data, specially master data, into the system.
-
-To begin importing the Data, go to either setup, or to the Transaction you want to import, or simply type so in Global Search!
-
-
-
-## 1\. Downloading The Template
-
-Data in ERPNext is stored in tables, much like a spreadsheet with columns and
-rows of data. Each entity in ERPNext can have multiple child tables associated
-with it too. The child tables are linked to the parent tables and are
-implemented where there are multiple values for any property. For example an
-Item can have multiple prices, An Invoice has multiple Items and so on.
-
- * Select Doctype for which template should be downloaded.
- * Check fields to be included in the template.
- * Select the file format of the template file.
- * For a blank template, make sure that the "Download with Data" field is unchecked.
- * For bulk editing, you can check "Download With Data".
-
-
-
-### 2\. Fill in the Template
-
-After downloading the template, open it in a spreadsheet application (like Excel, Numbers or Libre Office) and fill in the data below the column headings.
-
-
-
-Then export your template or save it as a Excel or Comma Separated Values (CSV)
-file. To export the document in Excel tick the checkbox for Download in Excel File Format
-
-
-
-### Download in Excel/CSV
-
-
-
-### 3\. Upload the File either in .xlsx or .csv
-
-Finally attach the file in the section. Click on the "Upload". Once the upload is successfull click Import"
-button.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-#### Notes:
-
-1. Make sure that if your application allows, use encoding as UTF-8.
-1. Keep the ID column blank for new records.
-
-### 4. Uploading All Tables (Main + Child)
-
-If you select all tables, you will get columns belonging to all the tables in
-one row separated by `~` columns.
-
-If you have multiple child rows then you must start a new main item on a new
-row. See the example:
-
-
- Main Table ~ Child Table
- Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 ~ Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
- v11 v12 v13 c11 c12 c13
- c14 c15 c17
- v21 v22 v23 c21 c22 c23
-
-> To see how its done, enter a few records manually using forms and export
-"All Tables" with "Download with Data"
-
-### 5. Overwriting
-
-ERPNext also allows you to overwrite all / certain columns. If you want to
-update certain columns, you can download the template with data. Remember to
-check on the “Update Records” box before uploading.
-
-> Note: For child records, if you select Overwrite, it will delete all the
-child records of that parent.
-
-### 6. Upload Limitations
-
-You can only upload upto 5000 records in one go. (may be less in some cases).
-
-Why is this? Uploading a lot of data can cause your system to crash, specially
-if there are other users doing things in parallel. Hence ERPNext restricts the
-number of “writes” you can process in one request.
-
-***
-
-### Import Options
-
-#### 1. Update records
-
-This option let's you edit/overwrite the current data on import.
-
-#### 2. Skip rows with errors
-
-If this is checked, rows with valid data will be imported and invalid rows will be dumped into a new file for you to import later.
-
-#### 3. Submit after importing
-
-If this is checked, in case there are submittable transactions which are imported ()
-
-#### 4. Ignore encoding errors
-
-In case there are any unicode errors, a new file with the invalid rows will be created to be imported later.
-
-***
-
-#### How to Attach files?
-
-When you open a form, on the right sidebar, you will see a section to attach
-files. Click on “Add” and select the file you want to attach. Click on
-“Upload” and you are set.
-
-#### What is a CSV file?
-
-A CSV (Comma Separated Value) file is a data file that you can upload into
-ERPNext to update various data. Any spreadsheet file from popular spreadsheet
-applications like MS Excel or Open Office Spreadsheet can be saved as a CSV
-file.
-
-If you are using Microsoft Excel and using non-English characters, make sure
-to save your file encoded as UTF-8. For older versions of Excel, there is no
-clear way of saving as UTF-8. So save your file as a CSV, then open it in
-Notepad, and save as “UTF-8”. (Sorry blame Microsoft for this!)
-
-####Help Video on Importing Data in ERPNext from Spreadsheet file
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/download-backup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/download-backup.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 55389c63..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/download-backup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Download Backup
-
-In the ERPNext, you can manually download database backup. To get the latest database backup, go to:
-
-`Setup > Data > Download Backup`
-
-Backup available for the download is updated in every eight hours. Click on the link to download the backups at a given time.
-
-
-
-By default three latest backups will be available for the download. If you want to customize no. of backups, then click on "Set Number of Backups". In the System Settings, you can set Number of Backups available for the download at a time.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f9c74bbb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Data Management
-
-You can import, export bulk edit data from and to spreadsheet files (**.csv**) from the Data Import Export Tool. This tool will be very helpful initially to setup your data from other systems.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 464639f8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-data-import
-bulk-rename
-download-backup
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 13d063dd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,98 +0,0 @@
-
-#
-
-Emails are the nervous system of business communication and ERPNext has been
-designed to make good use of this.
-
-## Sending Emails
-
-You can email any document from the system, by clicking on the “Email” button
-on the right sidebar. Before that you will need to set your outgoing email
-settings (SMTP server).
-
-All emails sent from the system are added to the Communication table.
-
-> **Info:** What is SMTP? There are two types of email services, sending and
-receiving emails. Sending is done via a protocol called SMTP (Simple Mail
-Transfer Protocol) and the server (computer) that sends your email to its
-destination is called SMTP Server.
-
-
-Bulk Emails, especially those that are sent without consent (spam), are considered as bad behavior. While it may be okay to send emails to those who have “opted-in” to receive mails, it is very difficult for the internet community to know what is spam and what is allowed. To overcome this problem, most email servers share a black and white list of email senders. If your emails have been marked as spam, you will be blacklisted. So be careful. Many times, it may be a good idea to send email via whitelisted services also known as SMTP relay services which are paid services.These
-services will block you from sending spam while ensuring that most of your email does not go in the spam folder. There are many such services available like SendGrid and SMTP.com.
-
-To setup your outgoing mails, go to
-
-> Setup > Outgoing Email Settings
-
-#### Figure 1: Set up outgoing mail server.
-
-
-
-Set your outgoing mail server settings here. These are the same settings you
-would use in your Outlook, Thunderbird, Apple Mail or other such email
-applications. If you are not sure, get in touch with your email service
-provider.
-
-> **Tip:** If you are using EPRNext hosted service, keep the first section
-blank. Emails will still be sent from your email id, but via our SMTP relay
-service.
-
-### Creating Issues from Incoming Emails
-
-A very useful email integration is to sync the incoming emails from support
-inbox into Issue, so that you can track, assign and monitor support
-issues.
-
-> **Case Study:** Here at ERPNext, we have regularly tracked incoming support
-issues via email at “support@erpnext.com”. At the time of writing we had
-answered more than 3000 tickets via this system.
-
-To setup your Support integration, go to:
-
-> Setup > Support Email Settings
-
-#### Figure 2: Setup support Integration
-
-
-
-To make ERPNext pull emails from your mail box, enter the POP3 settings. (POP3
-is a way of extracting emails from your mailbox. It should be fairly easy to
-find out what your POP3 settings are. If you have problems, contact your email
-service provider). If you want to setup an auto reply, check on the “Send
-Autoreply” box and whenever someone sends an email, an autoreply will be sent.
-Add a custom signature which you want to send with your replies.
-
-### Setting Auto-notification on Documents
-
-ERPNext allows you to automatically email documents on “Submission” to the
-contact mentioned in the document. To set this up, go to:
-
-> Setup > Tools > Enable / Disable Notifications.
-
-#### Figure 3: Set Auto Notification
-
-
-
-Check on the transactions you want to send via email directly on Submission
-and add a custom message if you want on these documents.
-
-### Email Digests
-
-Email Digests allow you to get regular updates about your sales, expenses and
-other critical numbers directly in your Inbox.
-
-Set your frequency, check all the items you want to receive in your weekly
-update and select the user ids whom you want to send the Digest to.
-
-Email Digests are a great way for top managers to keep track of the big
-numbers like “Sales Booked” or “Amount Collected” or “Invoices Raised” etc.
-
-To setup Email Digests, go to:
-
-> Setup > Email Digest > New Email Digest
-
-#### Figure 4: Set up Email Digest
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0a18f729..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-
-# Email Accounts
-
-You can manage multiple incoming and outgoing Email Accounts in ERPNext. There has to be at-least one default outgoing account and one default incoming account. If you are on the ERPNext cloud, the default outgoing email is set by us.
-
-> **Note for self implementers:** For outgoing emails, you should setup your own SMTP server or sign up with an SMTP relay service like mandrill.com or sendgrid.com that allows a larger number of transactional emails to be sent. Regular email services like Gmail will restrict you to a limited number of emails per day.
-
-### Default Email Accounts
-
-ERPNext will create templates for a bunch of email accounts by default. Not all of them are enabled. To enable them, you must set your account details.
-
-There are 2 types of email accounts, outgoing and incoming. Outgoing email accounts use an SMTP service to send emails and emails are retrived from your inbox using a IMAP or POP service. Most email providers such as GMail, Outlook or Yahoo provide these services.
-
-
-
-### Outgoing Email Accounts
-
-All emails sent from the system, either by the user to a contact or notifications or transaction emails, will be sent from an Outgoing Email Account.
-
-To setup an outgoing Email Account, check on **Enable Outgoing** and set your SMTP server settings, if you are using a popular email service, these will be preset for you.
-
-
-
-### Incoming Email Accounts
-
-To setup an incoming Email Account, check on **Enable Incoming** and set your POP3 settings, if you are using a popular email service, these will be preset for you.
-
-
-
-### Setting Import Conditions for Email Import
-
-Email Accounts allows you to set conditions according to the data of the incoming emails. The email will be imported to ERPNext only if the all conditions are true. For example if you want to import an email if the subject is "Some important email", you put doc.subject == "Some important email" in the conditions textbox. You can also set more complex conditions by combining them, as shown on the following screenshot.
-
-
-
-### How ERPNext handles replies
-
-In ERPNext when you send an email to a contact like a customer, the sender will be the user who sent the email. In the **Reply-To** property, the Email Address will be of the default incoming account (like `replies@yourcompany.com`). ERPNext will automatically extract these emails from the incoming account and tag it to the relevant communication
-
-### Notification for unreplied messages
-
-If you would like ERPNext to notify you if an email is unreplied for a certain amount of time, then you can set **Notify if Unreplied**. Here you can set the number of minutes to wait before notifications are sent and whom the notifications must go to.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-digest.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0820d8e4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Email Digest
-
-Email Digests allow you to get regular updates about your sales, expenses and other critical numbers directly in your Inbox.
-
-Email Digests are a great way for top managers to keep track of the big numbers like “Sales Booked” or “Amount Collected” or “Invoices Raised” etc.
-
-To set up Email Digest, go to:
-
-> Setup > Email > Email Digest
-
-## Example
-
-Set your frequency, check all the items you want to receive in your weekly update and select the user ids whom you want to send the Digest to.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-domain.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-domain.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b798fde..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-domain.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-
-# Email Domains
-
-You can configure your Email Domain in ERPNext for easy setup of all Email Accounts. You can find Email Domain settings under Setup-->Email Domain.
-
-> **What is my Email Domain?:** You might have purchased Email service from your internet service provider or your IT services provider. For example, if you access your business mailbox with URL like http://mail.yourcompany.com, then yourcompany.com is your email domain. Without setting up email domain correctly, your ERPNext instance may not be able to receive mails. You may be using free mail services like gmail or yahoo. In this case google.com or yahoo.com is your email domain. However you might have to allow access to ERPNext for your gmail account.
-
-### Default Email Domain
-
-ERPNext creates a template email domain using example.com for your reference. You should add your new domain as well.
-
-
-
-### Example Email Address
-
-Example Email Address is where you enter your business email address. For example, if your email ID is yourname@yourcompanyname.com you should enter this.
-
-### Email Server
-
-This is the internet address or URL of your mail server or the email service that you have purchased. For example, it may be mail.yourcompany.com or imap.yourcompany.com.
-
-### USE IMAP
-
-IMAP and POP are two services used by most mail servers for incoming mails. If your Email server uses IMAP service for the incoming mails keep this checked. Otherwise leave this unchecked.
-
-### USE SSL
-
-If your mail server uses SSL (Secure Socket Layer) communication leave this checked.
-
-> **Do I have SSL?:** You may have purchased SSL certificate from your IT service provider for the SSL and they may have setup SSL for your mail server. If you're using https while accessing mail server over browser then you might have SSL setup.
-
-### Attachment Limit (MB)
-
-If you want to limit the size of file attachments for emails sent from within ERPNext, you can set that up here. You can enter the max size of attachments in MB.
-
-### SMTP Server
-
-This is the outgoing email service adress of your email server.
-
-### Use TLS
-
-Set this up if your SMTP service is setup with TLS for security.
-
-### Default port
-
-SMTP service is usually set on port 25. If your email server is setup on a separate port number you can set that up here.
-
-### Save entered domain
-
-Once you click on save, these settings are validated by ERPNext and the Email Domain gets saved. Sometimes this could take a few seconds and you might have to wait. This email domain is then available in a dropdown called Domain under Email Accounts screen.
-
-### Entered everything but still unable to setup Email Domain?
-
-If you've entered and verified the above settings and are still unable to setup Email Domain, you can contact ERPNext support for help.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-inbox.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-inbox.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 45a94104..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-inbox.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-
-# Email Inbox
-
-Business involves many transactional emails exchanges with parties like Customers and Suppliers, and within a company. Email Inbox feature allows you pull all your business emails into your ERPNext account. Accessing all the business emails with other transactions details makes ERPNext a single platform for accessing complete business information in one place.
-
-In ERPNext, you can configure Email Inbox for each System User. Following are the detailed steps to configure Email Inbox for a User.
-
-#### Step 1: Create User
-
-As mentioned above, you can configure Email Inbox for a System User only. Hence ensure that you have added yourself and your colleagues as a User and assigned them required permissions.
-
-To add new User, go to:
-
-`Setup > User > New User`
-
-
-
-#### Step 2: Create Email Domain
-
-To be able to send and receive emails into your ERPNext from other email service (like WebMail or Gmail), you should setup an Email Domain master. In this master, email gateway details like SMTP Address, Port No., IMAP/POP3 address details are captured. If you have ever configured a local email client (like Outlook), Email Domain master requires details to be fed in the similar way.
-
-To add new Email Domain, go to:
-
-`Setup > Emails > Email Domain > New`
-
-
-
-Once you have configured an Email Domain for your Email Service, it will be used for creating Email Accounts for all the Users in your ERPNext account.
-
-If you use one of the following Email Service, then you need not create Email Domain in your ERPNext account. In ERPNext, Email Domain for the following Services is available out-of-the-box and you can directly proceed to creating Email Account.
-
-
-#### Step 3: Email Account
-
-Create an Email Account based on the Email ID of the User. For each User who's email account is to be integrated with ERPNext, an Email Account master should be created for it.
-
-If you are creating an Email Account for your colleague who's Email Password is unknown to you, then check field "Awaiting Password". As per this setting, a User (for whom Email Account is created) will get a prompt to enter email password when accessing his/her ERPNext Account.
-
--
-
- Gmail -
- Yahoo -
- Sparkpost -
- SendGrid -
- Outlook.com -
- Yandex.mail -
-
-
-
-In the Email Account, select Email Domain only if you are using Email Service other than Email Services listed above. Else, you can just select Email Service, leave Email Domain blank and proceed forward.
-
-
-
->If you are creating an Email Account for Email Inbox of a User, then leave Append To field as blank.
-
-For more details on how to setup Email Account, [click here](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.html").
-
-#### Step 4: Linking Email Account in User master
-
-Once an Email Account is created for an User, select that Email Account in the User. This will ensure that emails pulled from the said Email ID will accessible only to this User in your ERPNext account.
-
-
-
-## Email Inbox
-
-If you have correctly configured Email Inbox as instructed above, then on the login of a User, Email Inbox icon will be visible. This will navigate user to Email Inbox view within the ERPNext account. All the Emails received on that email will be fetch and listed in the Email Inbox view. User will be able to open emails and take various actions against it.
-
-
-
-#### Folders
-
-In ERPNext, you can link multiple Email Accounts with the single User. To switch to Inbox of different email account and access other folders like Sent Emails, Spam, Trash, check Email Inbox option in the left bar.
-
-
-
-#### Actions
-
-On the emails in your inbox, you can take various actions like Reply, Forward, Mark as Spam or Trash.
-
-
-
-#### Make Options
-
-The Email Inbox within ERPNext also allow you to quickly create ERPNext transaction based on email received. From an Email itself, you can a Issue, Lead or Opportunity based on the context of the email.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-reports.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 268ff65f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-reports.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-
-# Email Reports at Regular Intervals
-
-You can setup **Auto Email Report** to send reports at regular intervals. These must be saved reports of any type (Report Builder, Script or Query Report).
-
-You can find Auto Email Report at
-
-> Setup > Email > Auto Email Report
-
-Or just type "Auto Email Report" on the Search bar.
-
-### Example
-
-#### Step 1
-
-Select the Report, the user for which you want to create this report (permissions will apply for this user), the Email Addresses where you want this report emailed and the frequency of the report.
-
-
-
-#### Step 2
-
-If your report has filters, you will see a table with the filters
-
-Step 1. Select the Report, the user for which you want to create this report. Permissions will apply for this user
-
-
-
-Click on the table to edit the table
-
-
-
-#### Test
-
-You can also test the report by clicking on "Download" or "Send Now"
-
-Here is an example of the email you will receive for a report
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d45237d4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Email
-
-Email is at the heart of electronic communication and ERPNext is deeply integrated with Email. You can create multiple email accounts, automatically create transactions like Lead, Issue from incoming emails, send documents to your contacts via ERPnext. You can also setup email digests and email alerts to send you reminders.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 7b5b6980..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-email-account
-email-inbox
-email-alerts
-email-digest
-email-reports
-sending-email
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/sending-email.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 80db0233..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sending Email from any Document
-
-In ERPNext you can send any document as email (with a PDF attachment) by clicking on `Menu > Email` from any open document.
-
-
-
-**Note:** You must have outgoing [email accounts](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.html) setup for this.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4318d1e0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Feedback
-
-Customer/User Feedback for a Product or Services can be useful for business as it can be used to make decisions for improvements either in products or services.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 08160ccd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-setting-up-feedback
-submit-feedback
-resend-feedback-request
-manual-feedback-request
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/manual-feedback-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/manual-feedback-request.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0378767a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/manual-feedback-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Manual Feedback Request
-
-We can also send the feedback request to Customer/User without configuring the
-Feedback Trigger.
-
-To request a feedback manually go to respective document e.g. Sales Order, Issue etc.
-and click on Request Feedback option in Menu.
-
-
-
-Then, user can enter the feedback request details like email id, message and send the
-feedback request mail.
-
-
-
-Note. If Feedback Trigger is already configured for the document then system will fetch
-Feedback Request details (email id, message)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/resend-feedback-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/resend-feedback-request.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfc3f7db..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/resend-feedback-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Resend Feedback Request
-
-We can also Resend the Feedback Request to the Customer/User.
-
-
-
-To resend the Feedback Request we will need to navigate the Communication by clicking the `Details` link on Timeline Feedback.
-
-
-
-On Resend Button click a dialog with the Feedback Request message will appear user can either send the
-Feedback Request with same message or he/she can make the changes in the Feedback Request message.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/setting-up-feedback.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/setting-up-feedback.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 75e9fd23..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/setting-up-feedback.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-
-# Feedback Trigger
-
-You can set up the Feedback Trigger for various documents to get the Feedback from the user.
-
-For this, you will need to setup the Feedback Trigger,
-
-> Setup > Email > Feedback Trigger
-
-### Setting Up Feedback Trigger
-
-To Setup an Feedback:
-
-1. Select which Document Type you want to send feedback request mail.
-2. Select the Email Field, This field will be used to get the recipients email id.
-3. Set the Subject for feedback request mail.
-4. Set the conditions, if all the conditions are met only then the feedback request mail will be sent.
-5. Compose the message.
-
-### Setting a Subject
-You can retrieve the data for a particular field by using `doc.[field_name]`. To use it in your subject/message, you have to surround it with `{% raw %}{{ }}{% endraw %}`. These are called [Jinja](http://jinja.pocoo.org/) tags. So, for example, to get the name of a document, you use `{% raw %}{{ doc.name }}{% endraw %}`. The below example sends an feedback request whenever Issue is Closed with the Subject, "ISS-##### Issue is Resolved"
-
-
-
-### Setting Conditions
-
-Feedback Trigger allows you to set conditions according to the field data in your documents. The feedback request email will be sent on document save only if the all conditions are true For example if you want to trigger the feedback request mail to a customer if an Issue is has been saved as "Closed" as it's status, you put `doc.status == "Closed"` in the conditions textbox. You can also set more complex conditions by combining them.
-
-
-
-### Setting a Message
-
-You can use both Jinja Tags (`{% raw %}{{ doc.[field_name] }}{% endraw %}`) and HTML tags in the message textbox.
-
- {% raw %}Your Support Ticket is Resolved
- -Issue {{ doc.name }} Is resolved. Please check and confirm the same.
-Your Feedback is important for us. Please give us your Feedback for {{ doc.name }}
-Please visit the following url for feedback.
- - {{ feedback_url }} - {% endraw %} - ---- - -### Example - -1. Setting up Feedback Trigger -
-
-1. Setting the Recipients and Message
- 
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/submit-feedback.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/submit-feedback.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 083fa0ca..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/submit-feedback.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-# Submit Feedback
-
-Once feedback request mail is sent the user/customer. He/She can visit the URL to submit the feedback
-as well as rating for the document.
-
-
-
-Once Feedback is submitted the feedback details message and ratings will be recorded and will be shown on Document sidebar and timeline. Also once the Feedback is successfully submitted by the user the link shared to the user will be expired and can not be used to submit the Feedback again.
-
-On Document sidebar the latest feedback ratings will displayed.
-
-
-
-Also, The Feedback details such as Feedback message and ratings will be shown in the Document's Timeline along
-with Comment, Email.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 049651df..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setting Up
-
-Setting up an ERP system is like starting your business all over again,
-although in the virtual world. Thankfully it is not as hard as the real
-business and you get to do a trial too!
-
-Implementation requires the implementer to take a step back and set aside some
-time to do this right. This is usually not a couple-of-hours, after-work kind
-of a project.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 0323e635..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-setup-wizard
-users-and-permissions
-settings
-data
-email
-notifications
-print
-setting-up-taxes
-pos-setting
-price-lists
-authorization-rule
-sms-setting
-stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item
-territory
-third-party-backups
-workflows
-company-setup
-articles
-integrations
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/braintree-integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/braintree-integration.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5ce68c73..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/braintree-integration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setting up Braintree
-
-To setup Braintree, go to `Explore > Integrations > Braintree Settings`
-
-## Setup Braintree
-
-To enable Braintree in your ERPNext account, you need to configure the following parameters:
-
-- Merchant ID
-- Public Key
-- Private Key
-
-You can setup several Braintree payment gateways if needed. The choice of payment gateway account will determine which braintree account is used for the payment.
-
-
-
-On enabling service, the system will create Payment Gateway record and an Account head in chart of account with account type as Bank.
-
-
-
-It will also create a payment gateway account. You can change the default bank account if needed and create a template for the payment request.
-
-
-
-After configuring the Payment Gateway Account, your system is able to accept online payments through Braintree.
-
-## Supporting transaction currencies
-
-```
-"AED","AMD","AOA","ARS","AUD","AWG","AZN","BAM","BBD","BDT","BGN","BIF","BMD","BND","BOB",
-"BRL","BSD","BWP","BYN","BZD","CAD","CHF","CLP","CNY","COP","CRC","CVE","CZK","DJF","DKK",
-"DOP","DZD","EGP","ETB","EUR","FJD","FKP","GBP","GEL","GHS","GIP","GMD","GNF","GTQ","GYD",
-"HKD","HNL","HRK","HTG","HUF","IDR","ILS","INR","ISK","JMD","JPY","KES","KGS","KHR","KMF",
-"KRW","KYD","KZT","LAK","LBP","LKR","LRD","LSL","LTL","MAD","MDL","MKD","MNT","MOP","MUR",
-"MVR","MWK","MXN","MYR","MZN","NAD","NGN","NIO","NOK","NPR","NZD","PAB","PEN","PGK","PHP",
-"PKR","PLN","PYG","QAR","RON","RSD","RUB","RWF","SAR","SBD","SCR","SEK","SGD","SHP","SLL",
-"SOS","SRD","STD","SVC","SYP","SZL","THB","TJS","TOP","TRY","TTD","TWD","TZS","UAH","UGX",
-"USD","UYU","UZS","VEF","VND","VUV","WST","XAF","XCD","XOF","XPF","YER","ZAR","ZMK","ZWD"
-```
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/dropbox-backup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/dropbox-backup.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 52ef6de5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/dropbox-backup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
-
-#Setting Up Dropbox Backups
-
-We always recommend customers to maintain backup of their data in ERPNext. The database backup is downloaded in the form of an SQL file. If needed, this SQL file of backup can be restored in the another ERPNext account as well.
-
-You can automate database backup download of your ERPNext account into your Dropbox account.
-
-To setup Dropbox Backup,
-`Explore > Integrations > Dropbox Settings`
-
-##Steps are different for ERPnext managed versions and open-source versions
-
-###ERPnext Managed Version Instructions
-
-####Step 1: Set Frequency
-
-Set Frequency to download backup in your Dropbox account.
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Allow Dropbox Access
-
-After setting frequency and updating other details, click on `Allow Dropbox access`. On clicking this button, the Dropbox login page will open in the new tab. This might require you to allow pop-up for your ERPNext account.
-
-####Step 3: Login to Dropbox
-
-Login to your Dropbox account by entering login credentials.
-
-
-
-####Step 4: Allow
-
-On successful login, you will find a confirmation message as following. Click on "Allow" to let your ERPNext account have access to your Dropbox account.
-
-
-
-With this, a folder called "ERPNext" will be created in your Dropbox account, and database backup will start to auto-download in it.
-
-
-##Open Source Version Instructions
-
-####Step 1: Login to Dropbox Developer area
-
-https://www.dropbox.com/developers/apps
-
-####Step 2: Create a new Dropbox app
-
-
-
-####Step 3: Fill in the details for your new app
-
-
-
--
-
-
-####Step 4: Insert your custom domain Redirect URI
-
-`https://{yourwebsite.com}/api/method/frappe.integrations.doctype.dropbox_settings.dropbox_settings.dropbox_auth_finish`
-
-
-
-####Step 5: In a new window, open the Dropbox Settings page in your ERPnext installation
-
-####Step 6: Set backup frequency and email
-
-Set the frequency to download your site backups to your Dropbox account.
-
-
-
-####Step 7: Input Keys from your Dropbox App window
-
-From your Dropbox App page, enter the app key and (unhidden) app secret into the ERPnext Dropbox settings page.
-
-Alternatively, you can enter it manually in `sites/{sitename}/site_config.json` as follows,
-
-
-
-
-####Step 8: Click Save before continuing!!!
-
-####Step 9: After saving, click "Allow Dropbox Access"
-
-The Dropbox login page will open in the new tab. This might require you to allow pop-up for your ERPNext account.
-
-####Step 11: Allow Dropbox Access
-
-On successful login, you will find a confirmation message as following. Click on "Allow" to let your ERPNext account have access to your Dropbox account.
-
-
- {
- "db_name": "demo",
- "db_password": "DZ1Idd55xJ9qvkHvUH",
- "dropbox_access_key": "ACCESSKEY",
- "dropbox_secret_key": "SECRECTKEY"
-}
-
-
-
-
-####Step 12: Confirm Backups Work
-
-From the ERPnext Dropbox page, click `Take Backup Now` and then go to you Dropbox files view. You should see a new folder in Dropbox named `Apps` and inside of it your {New App} folder. Inside of it should be backup folders for both files and database.
-
-So for an app named `erpnext`, following are the folder locations:
-
-```
-Database files: /Apps/erpnext/database
-Public files: /Apps/erpnext/files
-Private files: /Apps/erpnext/private/files
-```
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/gocardless-integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/gocardless-integration.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3a3c92b3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/gocardless-integration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setting up GoCardless
-
-To setup GoCardless, go to `Explore > Integrations > GoCardless Settings`
-
-## Setup GoCardless
-
-To enable GoCardless in your ERPNext account, you need to configure the following parameters and Access Token and optionally (but highly recommended), a Webhooks Secret key.
-
-
-You can setup several GoCardless payment gateways if needed. The choice of payment gateway account will determine which GoCardless account is used for the payment.
-
-
-
-On enabling service, the system will create a Payment Gateway record and an Account head in chart of account with account type as Bank.
-
-
-
-It will also create a payment gateway account. You can change the default bank account if needed and create a template for the payment request.
-
-
-
-After configuring the Payment Gateway Account, your system is able to accept online payments through GoCardless.
-
-## SEPA Payments Flow
-
-When a new payment SEPA payment in initiated, the customer is asked to enter his IBAN (or local account number) and to validate a SEPA mandate.
-
-Upon validation of the mandate, a payment request is sent to GoCardless and processed.
-
-If the customer has already a valid SEPA mandate, when instead of sending a payment request to the customer, the payment request is directly sent to GoCardless without the need for the customer to validate it.
-The customer will only receive a confirmation email from GoCardless informing him that a payment has been processed.
-
-
-## Mandate cancellation
-
-You can setup a Webhook in GoCardless to automatically disabled cancelled or expired mandates in ERPNext.
-
-The Endpoint URL of your webhook should be: https://yoursite.com/api/method/erpnext.erpnext_integrations.doctype.gocardless_settings.webhooks
-
-In this case do not forget to configure your Webhooks Secret Key in your GoCardless account settings in ERPNext.
-
-
-## Supported transaction currencies
- "EUR", "DKK", "GBP", "SEK"
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cbd38ffa..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Integrations
-
-
-Integration Services is platform to configure 3rd Party Services.
-
-###Services
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index da85ac42..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-paypal-integration
-razorpay-integration
-dropbox-backup
-ldap-integration
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/ldap-integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/ldap-integration.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2bd83375..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/ldap-integration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-
-#Setting up LDAP
-
-Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is a centralised access controll system used by many small and medium scale organisations.
-
-By settings up LDAP service, you able to login to ERPNext account by using LDAP credentials.
-
-To setup LDAP, go to
-`Explore > Integrations > LDAP Settings`
-
-#### Setup LDAP
-
-To enable ldap service, you need to configure parameters like LDAP Server URL (including ldap://), Organizational Unit, UID, Base Distinguished Name (DN) and Password for Base DN
-
-
-
-
-After setting up LDAP parameters, on login screen, the system enables **Login Via LDAP** option.
-
-
-
-For the extended fields, try these settings:
-
- LDAP Search String: uid={0}
- LDAP First Name Field: cn
- LDAP Email Field: mail
- LDAP Username Field: uid
-
-The default role of a new LDAP user is `Blogger`. You might want to adapt the permissions of that role with the permission manager.
-
-#### Connecting to LDAP Securely
-
-In the LDAP Settings area, there are two dropdowns.
-1. SSL/TLS Mode - set this to **StartTLS** to connect to your LDAP server using StartTLS. If your LDAP server does not support StartTLS, setting this to StartTLS will result in an error `StartTLS is not supported`. Check the configuration on your LDAP server if you receive this error.
-2. Require Trusted Certificate - if you change this to **Yes** then the certificate provided by the LDAP server must be trusted by the Frappe/ERPNext server. If you would rather use StartTLS with a self-signed (untrusted) certificate, set this to **No**. If you do not use StartTLS, this setting is ignored.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/paypal-integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/paypal-integration.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d3d58d4c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/paypal-integration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-
-#Setting up PayPal
-
-A payment gateway is an e-commerce application service provider service that authorizes credit card payments for e-businesses, online retailers, bricks and clicks, or traditional brick and mortar.
-
-A payment gateway facilitates the transfer of information between a payment portal (such as a website, mobile phone or interactive voice response service) and the Front End Processor or acquiring bank.
-
-To setup PayPal ,
-`Explore > Integrations > PayPal Settings`
-
-#### Setup PayPal
-
-To enable PayPal payment service, you need to configure parameters like API Username, API Password and Signature.
-
-
-
-You also can set test payment environment, by settings `Use Sandbox`
-
-On enabling service, the system will create Payment Gateway record and Account head in chart of accounts having account type as Bank.
-
-
-
-Also it will create Payment Gateway Account entry. Payment Gateway Account is configuration hub from this you can set account head from existing COA, default Payment Request email body template.
-
-
-
-After enabling service and configuring Payment Gateway Account your system is able to accept online payments.
-
-####Supporting transaction currencies
-AUD, BRL, CAD, CZK, DKK, EUR, HKD, HUF, ILS, JPY, MYR, MXN, TWD, NZD, NOK, PHP, PLN, GBP, RUB, SGD, SEK, CHF, THB, TRY, USD
-
-##Get PayPal credentials
-
-#### Paypal Sanbox API Signature
- - Login to paypal developer account, PayPal Developer Account
- - From **Accounts** tab. create a new business account.
-
-
- - From this account profile you will get your sandbox api credentials
-
-
-
----
-
-#### PayPal Account API Signature
- - Login to PayPal Account and go to profile
-
-
- - From **My Selling Tools** go to **api Access**
-
-
- - On API Access Page, choose option 2 to generate API credentials
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/razorpay-integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/razorpay-integration.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 72245f0a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/razorpay-integration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-#RazorPay Integration
-
-A payment gateway is an e-commerce application service provider service that authorises credit card payments for e-businesses, online retailers, bricks and clicks, or traditional brick and mortar.
-
-A payment gateway facilitates the transfer of information between a payment portal (such as a website, mobile phone or interactive voice response service) and the Front End Processor or acquiring bank.
-
-To setup RazorPay,
-
-`Explore > Integrations > RazorPay Settings`
-
-
-
-#### Setup RazorPay
-
-To enable RazorPay payment service, you need to configure parameters like API Key, API Secret
-
-
-
-On enabling service, the system will create Payment Gateway record and Account head in the Chart of Account with account type as Bank.
-
-
-
-Also, it will create Payment Gateway Account entry. Payment Gateway Account is configuration hub from this you can set account head from existing COA, default Payment Request email body template.
-
-
-
-After enabling service and configuring Payment Gateway Account your system is able to accept online payments.
-
-####Supporting transaction currencies
-
-RazorPay will only work for the company having `INR (Indian Rupee)` as a Currency.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/stripe-integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/stripe-integration.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7a34481b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/stripe-integration.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-
-#Setting up Stripe
-
-To setup Stripe,
-`Explore > Integrations > Stripe Settings`
-
-#### Setup Stripe
-
-To enable Stripe payment service, you need to configure parameters like Publishable Key, Secret Key
-
-
-On enabling service, the system will create Payment Gateway record and Account head in chart of account with account type as Bank.
-
-
-
-Also it will create Payment Gateway Account entry. Payment Gateway Account is configuration hub from this you can set account head from existing COA, default Payment Request email body template.
-
-
-
-After configuring Payment Gateway Account your system is able to accept online payments.
-
-### Setup subscriptions plans
-
-If you need to bill a recurring amount instead of a one-time charge, you can use Stripe's subscription system.
-
-Once you have created your billing plans in Stripe, add one or several new "Payment Plan" in Frappe.
-
-
-
-
-Afterwards, when you create your payment request, click the check field "Is a subscription" and add the system will fetch the corresponding susbscription plans from within the corresponding subscription.
-
-
-
-ERPNext will automatically create a new subscription for this customer in Stripe.
-
-
-####Supporting transaction currencies
- "AED", "ALL", "ANG", "ARS", "AUD", "AWG", "BBD", "BDT", "BIF", "BMD", "BND",
- "BOB", "BRL", "BSD", "BWP", "BZD", "CAD", "CHF", "CLP", "CNY", "COP", "CRC", "CVE", "CZK", "DJF",
- "DKK", "DOP", "DZD", "EGP", "ETB", "EUR", "FJD", "FKP", "GBP", "GIP", "GMD", "GNF", "GTQ", "GYD",
- "HKD", "HNL", "HRK", "HTG", "HUF", "IDR", "ILS", "INR", "ISK", "JMD", "JPY", "KES", "KHR", "KMF",
- "KRW", "KYD", "KZT", "LAK", "LBP", "LKR", "LRD", "MAD", "MDL", "MNT", "MOP", "MRO", "MUR", "MVR",
- "MWK", "MXN", "MYR", "NAD", "NGN", "NIO", "NOK", "NPR", "NZD", "PAB", "PEN", "PGK", "PHP", "PKR",
- "PLN", "PYG", "QAR", "RUB", "SAR", "SBD", "SCR", "SEK", "SGD", "SHP", "SLL", "SOS", "STD", "SVC",
- "SZL", "THB", "TOP", "TTD", "TWD", "TZS", "UAH", "UGX", "USD", "UYU", "UZS", "VND", "VUV", "WST",
- "XAF", "XOF", "XPF", "YER", "ZAR"
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/notifications/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/notifications/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/notifications/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/notifications/index.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 30423ea2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/notifications/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
-
-# Notifications
-
-You can configure various Notifications in your system to remind you of important activities such as:
-
-1. Completion date of a Task.
-2. Expected Delivery Date of a Sales Order.
-3. Expected Payment Date.
-4. Reminder of followup.
-5. If an Order greater than a particular value is received or sent.
-6. Expiry notification for a Contract.
-7. Completion / Status change of a Task.
-
-For this, you need to setup a Notification.
-
-> Setup > Email > Notification
-
-### Setting Up An Alert
-
-To setup a Notification:
-
-1. Select which Document Type you want watch changes on
-2. Define what events you want to watch. Events are:
- 1. New: When a new document of the selected type is made.
- 2. Save / Submit / Cancel: When a document of the selected type is saved, submitted, cancelled.
- 3. Value Change: When a particular value in the selected type changes.
- 4. Days Before / Days After: Trigger this alert a few days before or after the **Reference Date.** To set the days, set **Days Before or After**. This can be useful in reminding you of upcoming due dates or reminding you to follow up on certain leads of quotations.
-3. Set additional conditions if you want.
-4. Set the recipients of this alert. The recipient could either be a field of the document or a list of fixed Email Addresses.
-5. Compose the message
-
-
-### Setting a Subject
-You can retrieve the data for a particular field by using `doc.[field_name]`. To use it in your subject / message, you have to surround it with `{% raw %}{{ }}{% endraw %}`. These are called [Jinja](http://jinja.pocoo.org/) tags. So, for example to get the name of a document, you use `{% raw %}{{ doc.name }}{% endraw %}`. The below example sends an email on saving a Task with the Subject, "TASK##### has been created"
-
-
-
-### Setting Conditions
-
-Notifications allow you to set conditions according to the field data in your documents. For example, if you want to recieve an Email if a Lead has been saved as "Interested" as it's status, you put `doc.status == "Interested"` in the conditions textbox. You can also set more complex conditions by combining them.
-
-
-
-The above example will send a Notification when a Task is saved with the status "Open" and the Expected End Date for the Task is the date on or before the date on which it was saved on.
-
-
-### Setting a Message
-
-You can use both Jinja Tags (`{% raw %}{{ doc.[field_name] }}{% endraw %}`) and HTML tags in the message textbox.
-
- {% raw %}Order Overdue
- -Transaction {{ doc.name }} has exceeded Due Date. Please take necessary action.
- - - {% if comments %} - Last comment: {{ comments[-1].comment }} by {{ comments[-1].by }} - {% endif %} - -Details
- --
-
- Customer: {{ doc.customer }} -
- Amount: {{ doc.total_amount }} -
-
-### Example
-
-1. Defining the Criteria
- 
-
-1. Setting the Recipients and Message
- 
-
-
----
-
-# Slack Notifications
-
-If you prefer to have your notifications sent to a dedicated Slack channel, you can also choose the option "Slack" in the channel options and select the appropriate Slack Webhook URL.
-
-### Slack Webhook url
-
-A Slack webhook URL is an URL pointing directly to a Slack channel.
-
-In order to generate webhook URLs, you need to create a new Slack App:
-
-1. Go to https://api.slack.com/slack-apps
-2. Click on "Create a Slack App"
- 
-
-3. Give your App a name and choose the right workspace
- Once your app is created, go to the "Incoming Webhooks" section and add a new Webhook to Workspace.
- 
-
-4. Copy the created link, go back to ERPNext and use it to create a new Slack Webhook URL in Integrations > Slack Webhook URL.
- 
-
-5. Select Slack and your Slack channel in the channel and Slack channel fields within your notification
-
-
-### Message Format
-
-Unlike Email messages, Slack doesn't allow HTML formatting.
-
-Instead you can use markdown formatting: [Slack Documentation](https://get.slack.help/hc/en-us/articles/202288908-Format-your-messages)
-
-Example:
- {% raw %}
- *Order Overdue*
-
- Transaction {{ doc.name }} has exceeded Due Date. Please take necessary action.
-
-
- {% if comments %}
- Last comment: {{ comments[-1].comment }} by {{ comments[-1].by }}
- {% endif %}
-
- *Details*
-
- • Customer: {{ doc.customer }}
- • Amount: {{ doc.grand_total }}
- {% endraw %}
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d83dbbdc..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-# Point of Sale Profile
-
-POS includes advanced features to cater to different functionality, such as
-inventory management, CRM, financials, warehousing, etc., all built into the
-POS software. Prior to the modern POS, all of these functions were done
-independently and required the manual re-keying of information, which could
-lead to entry errors.
-
-If you are in retail operations, you want your Point of Sale to be as quick
-and efficient as possible. To do this, you can create a POS Setting for a user
-from:
-
-> Accounts > Setup > Point-of-Sale Profile
-
-Set default values as defined.
-
-
-
-To set the default mode of payment, enabled the option default in the mode of payments table
-
-
-User can sale the particular products to the particular customers from the POS by adding item groups, customer groups in the POS Profile.
-
-
-> Important : If you specify a particular User, the POS setting will be
-applied only to that User. If the User option is left blank, the setting will
-be set for all users. To understand POS in detail visit [Point of Sale](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.html)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ba4672f7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-
-# Price Lists
-
-ERPNext lets you maintain multiple selling and buying prices for an Item using Price Lists. A PriceList is a name you can give to a set of Item prices.
-
-Why would you want Price Lists? You have different prices for different zones (based on the shipping costs), for different currencies etc.
-
-An Item can have multiple prices based on customer, currency, region, shipping cost etc, which can be stored as different rate plans. In ERPNext, you are required to store all the lists separately. Buying Price List is different from Selling Price List and thus is stored separately.
-
-You can create new Price List
-
-> Selling/Buying/Stock > Setup > Price List >> New
-
-
-
-* These Price List will be used when creating Item Price record to track selling or buying price of an item. Click here to learn more about Item Price.
-
-* To disable specific Price List, uncheck Enabled field in it. Disabled Price List will not be available for selection in the Sales and Purchase transactions.
-
-* Standard Buying and Selling Price List are created by default.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/address-template.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/address-template.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 68c9955f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/address-template.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-# Address Template
-
-Each region has its own way of defining Addresses. To manage multiple address formats for your Documents (like Quotation, Purchase Invoice etc.), you can create country-wise **Address Templates**.
-
-> Setup > Printing and Branding > Address Template
-
-A default Address Template is created when you setup the system. You can either edit or update it or create a new template.
-
-One template is default and will apply to all countries that do not have an specific template.
-
-#### Template
-
-The templating engine is based on HTML and the [Jinja Templating](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/) system and all the fields (including Custom Fields) will be available for creating the template.
-
-Here is the default template:
-
- {% raw %}{{ address_line1 }}- {% if address_line2 %}{{ address_line2 }}
{% endif -%} - {{ city }}
- {% if state %}{{ state }}
{% endif -%} - {% if pincode %}PIN: {{ pincode }}
{% endif -%} - {{ country }}
- {% if phone %}Phone: {{ phone }}
{% endif -%} - {% if fax %}Fax: {{ fax }}
{% endif -%} - {% if email_id %}Email: {{ email_id }}
{% endif -%}{% endraw %} - -### Example - -
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/cheque-print-template.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/cheque-print-template.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5dc013b4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/cheque-print-template.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-
-#Cheque Print Template
-
-Business involves making payment to various parties like suppliers and employees. Payment can be made in various modes like cash, NEFT or cheque. If you are making a payment via cheque, you can also create a Print Format for printing Cheque from ERPNext based on the Payment Entry.
-
-
-
-Using the Cheque Print Template you can generate a new Print Format based. It will be created based the cheque format provided by your bank.
-
-####Create New
-
-To create a new Print Format based on the specific cheque’s format, go to:
-
-`Account > Tools > Cheque Printing Template > New`
-
-In the Cheque Print Template, for each value (say Payee, Date), exact co-ordinates are provided based on where that value should be printed on a cheque. Co-ordinates are provided in centi-meter.
-
-
-
-####New Format via Scanning
-
-To speed up creation of a new cheque printing format, you can upload scanned image of the cheque. Considering the scanned image for the cheque, system automatically updates co-ordinates for each value like party name, amount, date, amount in words etc.
-
-
-
-####New format by manual entry
-You can manually provide the co-ordinate for each value based on where you want to to be printed on the cheque.
-
-####Preview
-Based on co-ordinates provided for all the values, a preview be shown as to how the values will be printed on the cheque.
-
-
-
-####New Print Format
-
-If the preview looks promising, click on the button to create a new Print Format for printing cheque. Based on the values provided in the Cheque Print Template, the system will auto-generate an HTML script for the cheque’s Print Format.
-
-
-
-####Printing Cheque
-
-New print format generated for the cheque will be visible in the Payment Entry form. After creating the payment entry, you will be able to print transaction details on the cheque.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/custom-translations.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/custom-translations.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c2edc3ad..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/custom-translations.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-
-#Custom Translations
-
-User can print the customer's and supplier's document in their local language. For an example if I have customers from germany, france who want quotation in german, french language will be possible with these feature.
-
-####Set Language
-
-In the Customer master, select default Language. Say default language for the Customer is deutsch.
-
-
-
-Same way, you can also set default language in the Supplier master.
-
-
-
-####Print Preview in the Party's Language
-
-In the Print Preview of a transaction, values will be translated into party's language.
-
-Customer Quotation print preview in customer's default language.
-
-
-
-Supplier Quotation print preview in supplier's default language.
-
-
-
-####What to do if want to print with another language?
-
-User can have option to select alternate language on print view.
-
-
-
-####Custom Translation
-
-User can set their custom translations using translation form. For example user want to set description of the product in customer's language(Italiano). For that create new translation with language as Italiano, enter source data and Translated information.
-
-`Setup > Settings > Translation List > New`
-
-
-
-The translation is applied when user select language as Italiano on supplier quotation's print preview.
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 198a3fa8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Printing and Branding
-
-Documents that you send to your customers carry your brand and image and they must be tailored to your requirements. ERPNext gives you many options so that you can set your oraganization's branding in your documents.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 9597cc06..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-print-settings
-print-format-builder
-print-style
-print-headings
-letter-head
-address-template
-terms-and-conditions
-cheque-print-template
-custom-translations
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4648066a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-
-#Letter Head
-
-Each company has default Letter Head for their company. This Letter Head values are generally set as Header and Footer in the documents. In ERPNext, you can capture the these details in the Letter Head master.
-
-In the Letter Head master, you can track Header and Footer details of the company. These details will appear in the Print Format of the transactions like Sales Order, Sales Invoice, Salary Slip, Purchase Order etc.
-
-
-
-####Step 1: Go to Setup
-
-`Explore > Setup > Printing > Letter Head > New Letter Head`
-
-####Step 2: Letter Head Name
-
-In one ERPNext account, you can enter multiple Letter Head, hence name Letter Head so that you can identify it easily. For example, if your Letter Head also contains office address, then you should create separate Letter Head for each office location.
-
-####Step 3: Enter Details
-
-Following is how you can enter details in the Letter Head.
-
- * Logo Image: You can insert the image in your Letter Head record by clicking on image icon. Once image is inserted, HTML for it will be generated automatically.
- * Other information (like Address, tax ID etc.) that you want to put on your letter head.
-
-
-
-> If you want to make this the default letter head, click on “Is Default”.
-
-####Step 4: Save
-
-After enter values in the Header and Footer section, Save Letter Head.
-
-####Letter Head in the Print Format
-
-This is how the letter head looks in a document's print.
-
-
-
-> Please note that Footer will be visible only when document's print is seen in the PDF. Footer will not be visible in the HTML based print preview.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6d2c78f6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-
-# Print Format Builder
-
-The Print Format Builder helps you quickly make a simple customized Print Format by dragging and dropping data fields and adding custom text or HTML.
-
-You can create a new Print Format either by going to:
-
-> Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Format Builder
-
-or Open the document for which you want to make a print format. Click the Printer icon, or go to Menu > Print and click on the **Edit** button. Note: You must have System Manager permission to do this.
-
-
-- -### Step 1: Make a new Format - -
-
-### Step 2: Add a new Field
-
-To add a field, just drag it from the left sidebar and add it in your layout. You can edit the layout by clicking on the settings icon.
-
-
-
-### Step 3
-
-To remove a field, just drag it back into the fields sidebar.
-
-
-
-### Step 4
-
-You can add customized text, HTML in your print format, just add the **Custom HTML** field (in dark colour) and add it to the the place where you want to add the text.
-
-Then click on **Edit HTML** to edit your content.
-
-
-
-To save your format, just click on the **Save** button on the top.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-headings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f6786c28..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-# Print Headings
-
-Print Headings are the names which you can give to your sales invoices,
-supplier quotations etc. You can create a list of names for different business
-communications.
-
-You can create print headings from :
-
-> Setup > Printing > Print Heading > New Print Heading
-
-#### Figure 1: Save Print Heading
-
-
-
-Example of a change in print heading is shown below:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9fb69b63..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-# Print Settings
-
-In Print Settings you can set your default printing preferences like Paper Size, default text size, whether you want to output as PDF or HTML etc.
-
-To edit print settings, go to:
-
-> Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Settings
-
-
-
-There is various other configuration available in the Print Settings. Let's learn about each below.
-
-#### PDF or HTML
-
-When you email any document (like order or invoice) from ERPNext, it is sent in the PDF or HTML format. The file is sent in the PDF by default. If you wish to send a document in the HTML format, just uncheck field "Send Print as PDF".
-
-#### Repeat Header and Footer in PDF
-
-The letterhead is a master where you can define the standard Header and Footer which is appended to the document's Print Format. If this Property is enabled, then Header and Footer are added to each page. If you don't want header and footer repeat on each page, just disbale this setting.
-
-#### Print With Letterhead
-
-Enabling this property will automatically update Letterhead in each of your print formats.
-
-#### Compact Item Print
-
-The transactions like orders and invoices have table detailing item's bought or sold. It has multiple columns like Item Name, Description, UoM, Rate Amount etc. If there are many columns in the Item table, then print format looks bit cluttered. You can improve the view of the table by enabling Compact Item Print.
-
-As per this setting, there will be only four column in the Print Format, namely:
-
-> Description, Qty, Rate and Amount
-
-The value of other columns (like name, description, image, serial nos. etc.) is concatenated in the Description column. Here is the sneak preview of Compact Print Format.
-
-
-
-#### Allow Print for Draft
-
-The documents (mostly transactions) has two stage of authentication, Save and Submit. The saved documents are a first draft and mostly un-authenticate. Hence printing is restricted for the documents at this stage. However, if you wish to permit users to print documents at the Draft stage as well, enabling this setting will help.
-
-#### Send document web view link in the email
-
-ERPNext has a portal view available from where parties like Customer and Suppliers can signup and view their order history.
-
-When you email a transaction to your party, you can also send a web link to view the same document on the portal of your ERPNext account.
-
-#### Always add "Draft" Heading for printing draft documents
-
-Enabling this setting also print Draft in the Print Format as well, thus indicating that document shared is not completely authenticated as yet.
-
-#### Allow Page Break Inside Table
-
-If you have item's details which capture more than usual space of a page, then enabling this setting will split item's details to the next page. Hence, a page break will be inserted between the Item Description, and the rest of the details will be pushed to the next page.
-
-#### Allow Print for Cancelled
-
-Canceled transactions are the ones which don't have any impact on the reports. If you wish to allow printing for the canceled transactions, then enable this setting.
-
-#### Print Taxes with Zero Amount
-
-In the sales and purchase transactions, you can add apply multiple taxes on the item. Bydefault, in the print format, only taxes which has some amount calculated are visible in the Print Format. If you wish to also print the tax which was not applied to any item and has zero tax amount, just enable this setting.
-
-#### Network Printer
-
-You can enable print server by fill the print server IP and port then chose default printer
-
-Before enabling this feature you have to install pycups library.
-
-You may need first to install cups library if is not already on your system
-
-For Debian OS Family:
-
-`sudo apt-get install libcups2-dev`
-
-For Redhat OS Family:
-
-`sudo yum install cups-libs`
-
-After that, install pycups in the env using the command
-
-`./env/bin/pip install pycups`
-
-executed from the `frappe-bench` directory.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-style.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-style.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2d3990c9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-style.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Print Style
-
-Frappe/ERPNext comes with pre-set styles for your printed documents. You can also create new styles using CSS that can be applied to all your print formats.
-
-To create a new **Print Style** go to **Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Style**, or just type "print style" in the search bar.
-
-Here you can define the CSS rules for your print formats. These apply to both standard and custom print formats. To find out the various classes available, you can make a standard print format, open in a new page and see the source.
-
-To set a default style, you can go to [Print Settings](/docs/setup/print/print-settings)
-
-All Print Format styles are based on Bootstrap (Version 3) CSS Framework.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 34a9f3c5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-# Terms And Conditions
-
-Terms and conditions are the general and special arrangements, provisions, requirements, rules, specifications, and standards that a company follows. These specifications are an integral part of an agreement or contract that the company gets into with its customers, suppliers or partners.
-
-### 1. Make a new Terms and Conditions
-
-To setup Terms and Condition master, go to:
-
-`Selling > Terms and Condition > New`
-
-
-
-### 2. Editing in HTML
-
-Content of Terms and Condition can be formatted as per your preference, and also insert images where needed. If you have expertise in HTML, you will also find option to edit the content of Terms and Condition in HTML.
-
-
-
-This also allows you to use Terms and Condition master for footer, which otherwise is not available in ERPNext as dedicated functionality. Since contents of Terms and Condition is always the last to appear in the print format, details of footer should be inserted at the end of the content, so that it actually appears as footer in the print format.
-
-### 3. Select in Transaction
-
-In transactions, you will find section of Terms and Condition where you will be able to search and fetched required Terms and Condition master.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-company-sales-goal.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-company-sales-goal.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1c647e63..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-company-sales-goal.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setting Company Sales Goal
-
-Monthly sales targets can be set for a company via the Company master. By default, the Company master dashboard features past sales stats.
-
-
-
-You can set the **Sales Target** field to track progress to track progress with respect to it.
-
-
-
-The target progress is also shown in notifications:
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6ce03ef2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setting Up Taxes
-
-One of the primary motivator for compulsory use of accounting tools is
-calculation of Taxes. You may or may not make money but your government will
-(to help your country be safe and prosperous). And if you don’t calculate your
-taxes correctly, they get very unhappy. Ok, philosophy aside, ERPNext allows
-you to make configurable tax templates that you can apply to your sales or
-purchase.
-
-### Tax Accounts
-
-For Tax Accounts that you want to use in the tax templates, you must go to
-Chart of Accounts and mention them as type “Tax” in your Chart of Item.
-
-## Item Tax
-
-If some of your Items require different tax rates as compared to others,
-mention them in the Item tax table. Even if you have selected your sales and
-purchase taxes as default tax rates, the system will pull the Item tax rate
-for calculations. Item tax will get preference over other sales or purchase
-taxes. However, if you wish to apply default sales and purchase taxes, do not
-mention item tax rates in the Item master. The system will then select the
-sales or purchase tax rate specified by you as default rates.
-
-Item Tax table can be found as a section within the Item Master document.
-
-
-
- * **Inclusive and Exclusive Tax**: ERPNext allows you to enter Item rates which are tax inclusive.
-
-
-
- * **Exception to the rule**: Item tax settings are required only if a particular Item has a different tax rate than the rate defined in the standard tax Account
- * **Item tax is overwrite-able**: You can overwrite or change the item tax rate by going to the Item master in the Item tax table.
- * **Tax Accounts**: For Item Tax to work, you need to ensure that the Tax accounts set in Item Tax table (with changed tax rates) in Item master are part of the _default_ Sales / Purhcase Tax Template.
-
-## Sales Taxes and Charges Template
-
-You must usually collect taxes from your Customer and pay them to the
-government. At times, you may have to pay multiple taxes to multiple
-government bodies like local government, state or provincial and federal or
-central government.
-
-The way ERPNext sets up taxes is via templates. Other types of charges that
-may apply to your invoices (like shipping, insurance etc.) can also be
-configured as taxes.
-
-Select template and modify as per your need.
-
-To create a new sales tax template called Sales Taxes and Charges Template, you
-have to go to:
-
-> Setup > Accounts > Sales Taxes and Charge Master
-
-
-
-When you create a new master, you will have to add a row for each tax type.
-
-The tax rate you define here will be the standard tax rate for all Items. If
-there are Items that have different rates, they must be added in the Item Tax
-table in the Item master.
-
-In each row, you have to mention:
-
- * Calculation Type:
-
- * On Net Total : This can be on net total (total amount without taxes).
- * On Previous Row Total/Amount: You can apply taxes on previous row total / amount. If you select this option, the tax will be applied as a percentage of the previous row (in the tax table) amount or total. Previous row amount means a particular tax amount.And, previous row total means net total plus taxes applied up to that row. In the Enter Row Field, mention row number on which you want to apply the current tax. If you want to apply the tax on the 3rd row, mention "3" in the Enter Row field.
-
- * Actual : Enter as per actual amount in rate column.
-
- * Account Head: The Account ledger under which this tax will be booked
-
- * Cost Center: If the tax / charge is an income (like shipping) it needs to be booked against - a Cost Center.
- * Description: Description of the tax (that will be printed in invoices / quotes).
- * Rate: Tax rate.
- * Amount: Tax amount.
- * Total: Cumulative total to this point.
- * Enter Row: If based on "Previous Row Total" you can select the row number which will be taken as a base for this calculation (default is the previous row).
- * Is this Tax included in Basic Rate?: If you check this, it means that this tax will not be shown below the item table, but will be included in the rate in your main item table. This is useful when you want to give a flat price (inclusive of all taxes) to your customers.
-
-Once you setup your template, you can select this in your sales transactions.
-
-## Purchase Taxes and Charges Template
-
-Similar to your Sales Taxes and Charges Template is the Purchase Taxes and
-Charges Master.
-
-This is the tax template that you can use in your Purchase Orders and Purchase
-Invoices. If you have value added taxes (VAT), where you pay to the government
-the difference between your incoming and outgoing taxes, you can select the
-same Account that you use for sales taxes.
-
-The columns in this table are similar to the Sales Taxes and Charges Template
-with the difference as follows:
-
-Consider Tax or Charge for: In this section you can specify if the tax /
-charge is only for valuation (not a part of total) or only for total (does not
-add value to the item) or for both.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 56354011..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Global Defaults
-
-You can set default values for your documents from Global Defaults
-
-> Setup > Settings > Global Defaults
-
-Whenever a new document is created, these values will be set as default.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f7f4cd30..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Settings
-
-In `Setup > Settings` you will find ways to manage your system settings like defaults, number and currency formats, global session timeout settings etc.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index e33aedce..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-system-settings
-module-settings
-naming-series
-global-defaults
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2fc26415..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Show or Hide Modules
-
-You can globally switch off certain desktop module via:
-
-> Setup > Permissions > Show / Hide Modules
-
-For example if you are in the services business, you want to hide the Manufacturing Module, you can do this via **Show or Hide Modules**
-
-### Example
-
-Check / uncheck the items to show / hide.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a2b51437..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-
-# Naming Series
-
-### 1. Introduction
-
-Data records are broadly classified as “Master” or “Transaction”. A master
-record is a record that has a “name”, for example a Customer, Item, Supplier,
-Employee etc. A Transaction is a record that has a “number”. Examples of
-transactions include Sales Invoices, Quotations etc. You make transactions
-against a number of master records.
-
-ERPNext allows you to make prefixes to your transactions, with each prefix
-forming its own series. For example a series with prefix INV12 will have
-numbers INV120001, INV120002 and so on.
-
-You can have multiple series for all your transactions. It is common to have a
-separate series for each financial year. For example in Sales Invoice you
-could have:
-
- * INV120001
- * INV120002
- * INV-A-120002
-
-etc. You could also have a separate series for each type of Customer or for
-each of your retail outlets.
-
-### 2. Managing Naming Series for Documents
-
-To setup a series, go to:
-
-> Setup > Tools > Update Numbering Series
-
-In this form,
-
- 1. Select the transaction for which you want to make the series The system will update the current series in the text box.
- 2. Edit the series as required with unique prefixes for each series. Each prefix must be on a new line.
- 3. The first prefix will be the default prefix. If you want the user to explicitly select a series instead of the default one, check the “User must always select” check box.
-
-You can also update the starting point of a series by entering the series
-name and the starting point in the “Update Series” section.
-
-### 3. Example
-
-See how to set the naming series
-
-
-
-### 4. Custom Field in Naming Series
-
- Some companies prefers to make use of "short-codes" for suppliers, i.e. WN for company "Web Notes" that later can be used in naming series for quick identification.
-
-#### Example:
-
- A custom field "Vendor ID" is created under Document: Supplier.
- Then under Naming Series, we should allow something like
- PO-.YY.MM.-.vendor_id.-.#####
- Resulting in "PO-1503-WN-00001"
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 05905f08..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-# System Settings
-
-You can localize ERPNext to use particular timezone, date, number or currency format and also set global session expiry via System Settings.
-
-By checking the 'Allow Login using Mobile Number' checkbox, you can login to ERPNext using a valid mobile number set in your User account.
-
-To open System Settings, go to:
-
-> Setup > Settings > System Settings
-
-
-
-####Two Factor Authentication.
-Settings for Two Factor Authentication can be configured here.
-
-* Select the authentication method to be used
-* Expiry time for QRCode image if "OTP App" is selected in method
-* Issuer name of the One Time Password
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100644
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fcd35b95..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup Wizard
-
-The Setup Wizard helps you quickly setup ERPnext as per your locale and sets up your organization.
-
-Here is a quick overview of the steps:
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 91c3afc6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-step-01-language
-step-02-currency-and-timezone
-step-03-user-details
-step-04-select-domain
-step-05-the-brand
-step-06-your-organization
-step-07-setup-company-complete
-step-08-set-sales-target
-step-09-customers
-step-10-letterhead
-step-11-suppliers
-step-12-users
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-01-language.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-01-language.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 04950aed..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-01-language.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 1: Language
-
-Select your language. ERPNext is available in more than 20 languages.
-
-
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-02-currency-and-timezone.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-02-currency-and-timezone.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b60a746b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-02-currency-and-timezone.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 2: Country, Currency and Time Zone
-
-Set your Country Name, Time Zone and Currency.
-
-
-
-### Default Currency
-
-For most countries, your currency and time zone will be automatically set.
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-03-user-details.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-03-user-details.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7c1a0428..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-03-user-details.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 3: User Details
-
-Enter the First User. Give the Full Name, Email Address (as User ID) and Password. This first user will be setup as a System Manager with privileges similar to the Administrator account.
-
-
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-04-select-domain.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-04-select-domain.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e979bb78..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-04-select-domain.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 4: Select Domain
-
-Select the domain(s) that will be enabled after setup.
-
-
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-05-the-brand.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-05-the-brand.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7cdbf2f1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-05-the-brand.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 5: The Brand
-
-Enter Company Name, Abbreviation and add a logo.
-
-
-
-### Company Abbreviation
-
-These will be appended to your **Account** Heads, for example if your abbreviation is **WPL**, then your Sales account will be **Sales - WPL**
-
-For Example: East Wind will be abbreviated as EW. Shades of Green will be abbreviated as SOG. In case you wish to give your own abbreviation, you can do so. The text field allows any type of text.
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-06-your-organization.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-06-your-organization.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8cf37fb1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-06-your-organization.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 6: Your Organization
-
-Enter in a short sentence of what your company does. This is often a mission statement or vision statement.
-
-Add the name of the organization's primary financial institution. This information will populate **Accounts**.
-
-
-
-### Chart of Accounts
-
-Select whether the organization will use a standard chart of accounts without number or a standard chart of accounts with numbers. The out of box chart of accounts is the same either way.
-
-### Financial Year
-
-Any annual period at the end of which a firm's accounts are made up is called a Financial Year. Some countries have their account year starting from 1st January and some 1st April.
-
-The end date will be set automatically
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-07-setup-company-complete.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-07-setup-company-complete.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f54bb4db..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-07-setup-company-complete.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 7: Initial Setup Complete
-
-The initial setup wizard will create all the settings needed including the first system manager user.
-
-
-
-When complete, the Setup Wizard will go to the Desk and begin a secondary set of steps. This screen shows that the initial setup wizard is complete and begins the secondary setup wizard.
-
-
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-08-set-sales-target.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-08-set-sales-target.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f285dd1e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-08-set-sales-target.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 8: Set Sales Target
-
-Set a monthly sales target for the organization in the currency selected during Step 2.
-
-
-
-If a sales target is not known, then clicking **Mark as Done** will complete the step.
-
-
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-09-customers.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-09-customers.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bf332107..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-09-customers.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 9: Add Customers
-
-Add known customers to the system.
-
-
-
-If customers are not known, then clicking **Mark as Done** will complete the step.
-
-
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-letterhead.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-letterhead.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0dd54e55..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-letterhead.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 10: Company Letter Head
-
-Add a company logo to be used as a standard letter head on all printed invoices and other document types. Ideally the logo is 900px by 100px.
-
-
-
-If a letter head logo file is not available, the clicking **Mark as Done** will complete the step.
-
-
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-11-suppliers.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-11-suppliers.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e084c1a5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-11-suppliers.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 11: Add Suppliers
-
-Add known suppliers to the system.
-
-
-
-If suppliers are not known, then clicking **Mark as Done** will complete the step.
-
-
-
-
-## Step 11a: Other Domain Specific Steps
-
-Depending on the domain(s) selected in Step 4, there will be more screens to fill in for the secondary setup wizard.
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-12-users.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-12-users.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a4618e0d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-12-users.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Step 12: Add Users
-
-The last step in the secondary setup wizard will prompt to add more users to the system. These users will be regular non-privileged users.
-
-
-
-If users are not known, then clicking **Mark as Done** will complete the step.
-
-
-
----
-
-Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/sms-setting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/sms-setting.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 444f6c96..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/sms-setting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-
-# SMS Setting
-
-To integrate SMS in ERPNext, approach a SMS Gateway Provider who provides HTTP
-API. They will create an account for you and will provide an unique username
-and password.
-
-To configure SMS Settings in ERPNext, find out their HTTP API (a document
-which describes the method of accessing their SMS interface from 3rd party
-applications). In this document, you will get an URL which is used to send the
-SMS using HTTP request. Using this URL, you can configure SMS Settings in
-ERPNext.
-
-Example URL:
-
-
-
- http://instant.smses.com/web2sms.php?username=
-
-
-> Note: the string up to the "?" is the SMS Gateway URL
-
-Example:
-
-
-
- http://instant.smses.com/web2sms.php?username=abcd&password;=abcd&to;=9900XXXXXX&sender;
- =DEMO&message;=THIS+IS+A+TEST+SMS
-
-The above URL will send SMS from account abcd to mobile number 9900XXXXXX with
-sender ID as DEMO with text message as "THIS IS A TEST SMS"
-
-Note that some parameters in the URL are static.You will get static values
-from your SMS Provider like username, password etc. These static values should
-be entered in the Static Parameters table.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 65cebc57..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,161 +0,0 @@
-
-# Stock Reconciliation For Non Serialized Item
-
-Stock Reconciliation is the process of counting and evaluating stock-in-trade,
-usually at an organisations year end in order to value the total stock for
-preparation of the accounts. In this process actual physical stocks are
-checked and recorded in the system. The actual stocks and the stock in the system should be in agreement and accurate. If they are not, you can
-use the stock reconciliation tool to reconcile stock balance and value with actuals.
-
-**Difference between Serialized and Non-serialized Items.**
-
-A serial number is a unique, identifying number or group of numbers and
-letters assigned to an individual Item. Serialized items are generally high value items for which you need to warranty's and service agreements. Mostly items as machinery, equipments and high-value electronics (computers, printers etc.) are serialized.
-
-Non Serialized items are generally fast moving and low value item, hence doesn't need tracking for each unit. Items like screw, cotton waste, other consumables, stationary products can be categorized as non-serialized.
-
-> Stock Reconciliation option is available for the non serialized Items only. For serialized and batch items, you should create Material Receipt (to increase stock) or Material Issue (to decrease stock) via Stock Entry.
-
-### Opening Stocks
-
-You can upload your opening stock balance in the system using Stock Reconciliation.
-Stock Reconciliation will update your stock for a given Item on a given date
-for a given Warehouse to the given quantity.
-
-To perform Stock Reconciliation, go to:
-
-> Stock > Tools > Stock Reconciliation > New
-
-#### Step 1: Download Template
-
-A predefined template of an spreadsheet file should be followed for importing item's stock levels and valuations. Open new Stock Reconciliation form to see download option.
-
-
-
-#### Step 2: Enter Data in csv file.
-
-
-
-The csv format is case-sensitive. Do not edit the headers which are preset in the template. In the Item Code and Warehouse column, enter exact Item Code and Warehouse as created in your ERPNext account. For quatity, enter stock level you wish to set for that item, in a specific warehouse.
-
-#### Step 3: Upload file and Enter Values in Stock Reconciliation Form
-
-
-
-**Posting Date**
-
-Posting Date will be date when you want uploaded stock to reflect in the report. Posting Date selection option allows you making back dated stock reconcialiation as well.
-
-**Difference Account:**
-
-When making Stock Reconciliation for updating **opening balance**, then you should select Balance Sheet account. By default **Temporary Opening** is created in the chart of account which can be used here.
-
-If you are making Stock Reconciliation for **correcting stock level or valuation of an item**, then you can select any expense account in which you would want difference amount (derived from difference of valuation of item) should be booked. If Expense Account is selected as Difference Account, you will also need to select Cost Center as it is mandatory with any income and expense account selection.
-
-After reviewing saved Reconciliation Data, submit the Stock Reconciliation. On
-successful submission, the data will be updated in the system. To check the
-submitted data go to stock and view stock level report.
-
-Note: While filling the valuation rates of Items, if you wish to find out the
-valuation rates of all items, you can go to stock and click on Item Prices
-report. The report will show you all types of rates.
-
-#### Step 4: Review the reconciliation data
-
-
-
-### Stock Ledger Report
-
-
-
-
-**How Stock Reconciliation Works**
-
-Stock Reconciliation on a specific date means balance quantity frozen for that item on reconciliation date, and shall not get affected due to stock entries made before its date.
-
-Example:
-
-Item Code: ABC001
-Warehouse: Mumbai
-Let's assume stock as on 10th January is 100 nos.
-Stock Reconciliation is made on 12th January to bring stock balance to 150 nos.
-Existing Stock Ledger:
-
-
- | Posting Date - | -Qty - | -Balance Qty - | -Voucher Type - | -
| 10/01/2014 | -100 | -100 | -Purchase Receipt | -
| 12/01/2014 | -50 | -150 | -Stock Reconciliation | -
| Posting Date | -Qty | -Balance Qty | -Voucher Type | -
| 05/01/2014 | -20 | -20 | -Purchase Receipt | -
| 10/01/2014 | -100 | -120 | -Purchase Receipt | -
| 12/01/2014 | -150 | -Stock Reconciliation |
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1fa551f7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-
-# Adding Users
-
-Users can be added by the System Manager. If you are a System Manager, you can add Users via
-
-> Setup > User
-
-There are two main classes of users: Web Users and System Users. System Users are people using ERPNext in the company. Web users are customers or suppliers (or portal users).
-
-Under User a lot of info can be entered. For the sake of usability the information entered for webs users is minimal: First Name and email.
-Important is to realize that the email address is the unique key (ID) identifying the Users.
-
-### 1. List of Users
-
-
-
-
-To add a new user, click on "New"
-
-### 2. Add the user details
-
-Add user details such as First Name, Last Name, Email etc.
-
-
-
-The user's Email will become the user id. Mobile No can also be used to log in if you check the Allow Login using Mobile No checkbox under the Security section in System Settings. While Mobile No will be unique, it will not be treated as a user id.
-
-
-
-
-
-After adding these details, save the user.
-
-### 3. Setting Roles
-
-After saving, you will see a list of roles and a checkbox next to it. Just check the roles you want the user to have and save the document. To click on what permissions translate into roles, click on the role
-name.
-
-
-
-### 4. Setting Module Access
-
-Users will have access to all modules for which they have role based access. If you want to block certain modules for certain users, un-check the module from the list.
-
-
-
-### 5. Security Settings
-
-If you wish to give the user access to the system only between office hours,
-or during weekends, mention it under security settings.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/admin-user.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/admin-user.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 425714fd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/admin-user.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Administrator User
-
-If your ERPNext account is hosted with us (Frappe Technologies Pvt. Ltd.), then you won't be able to access your ERPNext account as an Administrator. For the hosted account, access via Administrator User us reserved with us.
-
-1. For the hosted account, upgrades are managed from the backend. We reserve admin login credential with us so that we can upgrade all the hosted customer's ERPNext accounts from the backend.
-
-2. Since on a single server, we host have many customer's ERPNext accounts, as a security measure, we cannot share the credentials for administrator account with any hosted user.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ddb1afb2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-# Users And Permissions
-
-
-In ERPNext, you can create multiple users and assign them different roles. There are some users which can only access the public facing part of ERPNext (i.e. the website). Such users are called "Website Users".
-
-ERPNext implements permission control at the User and Role level. Each user in the system can be assigned multiple
-roles and permissions.
-
-The most important role is the "System Manager". Any user having this role can add other users and set roles to all users.
-
-
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 2477fca4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-adding-users
-role-based-permissions
-user-permissions
-role-permisison-for-page-and-report
-sharing
-admin-user
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a152f322..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-
-# Role Based Permissions
-
-ERPNext has a role-based permission system. It means that you can assign Roles to Users, and set Permissions on Roles. The permission structure also allows you to define different permission rules for different fields, using a concept called **Permission "Level"** of a field. Once roles are assigned to a user, it gives you the ability to limit access for a user to only specific documents.
-
-To start with, go to:
-> Setup > Permissions > Role Permissions Manager
-
-
-
-Permissions are applied on a combination of:
-
- * **Roles:** As we saw earlier, Users are assigned to Roles and it is on these Roles that permission rules are applied.
-
- *Examples of Roles include Accounts Manager, Employee, HR User.*
-
- * **Document Types:** Each type of document, master or transaction, has a separate list of Role based permissions.
-
- *Examples of Document Types are Sales Invoice, Leave Application, Stock Entry, etc.*
-
- * **Permission "Levels":** In each document, you can group fields by "levels". Each group of field is denoted by a unique number (0, 1, 2, 3, etc.). A separate set of permission rules can be applied to each field group. By default all fields are of level 0.
-
- *Permission "Level" connects the group of fields with level X to a permission rule with level X.*
-
- * **Document Stages:** Permissions are applied on each stage of the document like on Creation, Saving, Submission, Cancellation and Amendment. A role can be permitted to Print, Email, Import or Export data, access Reports, or define User Permissions.
-
- * **User Permissions:** There is a concept of user permission using which a user can be restricted to access only specific Documents for that Document Type. Such specific Document access is defined in the list of User Permissions. Additionally, User Permissions defined for other Document Types also get applied if they are related to the current Document Type through Link Fields.
-
- To set, User Permissions go to:
- > Setup > Permissions > [User Permissions](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
-
----
-
-**To add a new rule**, click on "Add a New Rule" button and a pop-up box will ask you to select a Role and a Permission Level. Once you select this and click on "Add", this will add a new row to your rules table.
-
----
-
-Leave Application is a good **example** that encompasses all areas of Permission System.
-
-
-
- 1. **It should be created by an Employee.**
- For this, Employee Role should be given Read, Write, Create permissions.
-
-
-
- 1. **An Employee should only be able to access his/her Leave Application.**
- Hence, User Permissions record should be created for each User Employee combination.
-
-
-
- 1. **HR Manager should be able to see all Leave Applications.**
- Create a Permission Rule for HR Manager at Level 0, with Read permissions. Apply User Permissions should be disabled.
-
-
-
- 2. **Leave Approver should be able to see and update Leave Applications applicable to him/her.**
- Leave Approver is given Read and Write access at Level 0. Relevant Employee Documents should be enlisted in the User Permissions of Leave Approvers. (This effort is reduced for Leave Approvers mentioned in Employee Documents, by programmatically creating User Permission records.)
-
-
-
- 3. **It should be Approved / Rejected only by HR User or Leave Approver.**
- The Status field of Leave Application is set at Level 1. HR User and Leave Approver are given Read and Write permissions for Level 1, while everyone else (All) are given Read permission for Level 1.
-
-
-
-
- 4. **HR User should be able to delegate Leave Applications to his/her subordinates**
- HR User is given the right to Set User Permissions. A User with HR User role would be able to defined User Permissions on Leave Application for other users.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-permisison-for-page-and-report.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-permisison-for-page-and-report.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fcc99df5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-permisison-for-page-and-report.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-# Role Permission for Page and Report
-
-In ERPNext, user can make his custom user interface using Page and the custom report using Report Builder or Query Report. ERPNext has role-based-permission system where user can assign roles to the user. And the same role can be assigned to the page and report, to access them.
-
-If user has enabled the developer mode, then they can add the roles directly in the page and report record. But in that case, the permissions will also be reflected in the json file for the page / report.
-
-### For Page
-
-
-### For Report
-
-
-## Tool for custom roles assignment
-
-If developer mode is disabled, then user can assign the roles to the page and report, using "Role Permission for Page and Report" page.
-
-To access, goto Setup > Permissions > Role Permission for Page and Report
-
-
-
-### Reset to defaults
-
-Using "Reset to Default" button, user can remove the custom permissions applied on a page or report. Then default permissions will be applicable on that page or report.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 298060d9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sharing
-
-In addition to user and role permissions, you can also Share a document with another user if you have sharing rights.
-
-To share a document, open the document, click on the "+" icon under sharing and select the user
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e6330ba1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-
-# User Permissions
-
-Along with Role based permissions, you can also set user level permissions that are based on rules that are evaluated against the data contained in the document being accessed. This is particularly useful when you want to restrict based on:
-
-1. Allow user to access data belonging to one Company
-2. Allow user to access data related to a specific Customer or Territory
-
-### Creating User Permissions
-
-To create a User Permission, go to Setup > Permission > User Permissions
-
-When you create a new record you will have to specify
-
-1. The user for which the rule has to be applied
-2. The type of document which will be allowed (for example "Company")
-3. The specific item that you want to allow (the name of the "Company)
-
-
-
-### Advanced control
-
-You can optionally apply user permission only for specific Document Type by setting the Document Type in the Applicable For field under Advanced Control.
-Setting **Applicable For** option will make the current user permission applicable only under the selected Document Type master.
-
-
-In the above User Permission, user michael.corleone@gadgets.com will be able to access blog posts created by blogger Michael Corleone.
-
-**Note:** If **Applicable For** is not set, User Permission will applicable across all related Document Types.
-
-### Ignoring User Permissions on Certain Fields
-
-Another way of allowing documents to be seen that have been restricted by User Permissions is to check "Ignore User Permissions" on a particular field by going to **Customize Form**
-
-For example you don't want Assets to be restricted for any user, then select **Asset** in **Customize Form** and in the Company field, check on "Ignore User Permissions"
-
-
-
-
-
-### Strict Permissions
-
-Since User Permissions are applied via Roles, there may be many users belonging to a particular Role. Suppose you have three users belonging to Role "Accounts User" and you have applied **User Permissions** to only one user, then the permissions will only be restricted to that user.
-
-You can change this setting incase you want the user permissions to be assigned to all users, even if they are not assigned any user permissions by going to **System Settings** and checking "Apply Strict User Permissions"
-
-### Checking How User Permissions are Applied
-
-Finally once you have created your air-tight permission model, and you want to check how it applies to various users, you can see it via the **Permitted Documents for User** report. Using this report, you can select the **User** and document type and check how user permissions get applied.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/workflows.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/workflows.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6cb5c207..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/workflows.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
-
-# Workflows
-
-In order to allow multiple people to submit multiple requests, for approvals,
-by multiple users, ERPNext requires you to fill the workflow conditions.
-ERPNext tracks the multiple permissions before submission.
-
-Example of a leave application workflow is given below:
-
-If a user applies for a leave, then his request will be sent to the HR
-department. The HR department (HR User) will either reject or approve this
-request. Once this process is completed, the user's Manager (leave approver)
-will get an indication that the HR department has Accepted or Rejected. The
-Manager, who is the approving authority, will either Approve or Reject this
-request. Accordingly,the user will get his Approved or Rejected status.
-
-
-
-To make this Workflow and transition rules go to :
-
-> Setup > Workflow > New Workflow
-
-#### Step 1: Enter the different states of Leave Approval Process.
-
-
-
-#### Step 2: Enter Transition Rules.
-
-
-
-#### Notes:
-
-> Note 1: When you make a workflow you essentially overwrite the code that is
-written for that document. Thus the document will function based on your
-workflow and not based on the pre-set code settings. Hence there might be no
-submit button / option if you have not specified it in the workflow.
-
-> Note 2: Document status of saved is 0, of submitted is 1, and of cancelled is
-2.
-
-> Note 3: A document cannot be cancelled unless it is submitted.
-
-> Note 4: If you wish to give the option to cancel, you will have to write a
-workflow transition step that says from submitted you can cancel.
-
-
-#### Enable/Disable Self approval
-
-> New in Version 11
-
-
-
-
-#### Conditions
-
-> New in Version 11
-
-In Version 11, you can also add a condition for the transition to be applicable. For example in this case if someone applies to leave for more than 5 days, a particular role must approve. For this in the particular transition you can set a property for `Condition` as:
-
-```
-doc.total_leave_days <= 5
-```
-
-Then if someone applied for leave for less than 5 days, only that particular transition will apply.
-
-This can be extended to any property of the document.
-
-#### Example of a Leave Application Process:
-
-When a Leave Application is saved by Employee, the status of the document changes to "Applied"
-
-
-
-When the HR User logs in, he can either Approve or Reject. If approved the
-status of the document changes to "Approved by HR". However, it is yet to be approved by Leave Approver.
-
-
-
-When the Leave Approver opens the Leave Application page, he can finally "Approve" or "Reject" the Leave Application.
-
-
-
-#### Workflow Actions
-
-> New in Version 11
-
-Workflow Actions is a single place to manage all the pending actions you can take on Workflows.
-
-If a User is eligible to take action on some workflows, emails will be sent to the user, with the relevant document as attachment, from where the user can `Approve` or `Reject` the Workflow.
-
-
-Also the users will see entries in their Workflow Action list.
-
-
-**Note:** You can set email template for Workflow Actions on each state.
-The template might consist message for users to proceed with the next Workflow Actions
-
-
-### Video Tutorial:
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8d5059d4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
-
-# Accounting Of Inventory Stock
-
-The value of available inventory is treated as an Asset in company's Chart of
-Accounts. Depending on the type of items, it can be treated as Fixed Asset or
-Current Asset. To prepare Balance Sheet, you should make the accounting
-entries for those assets. There are generally two different methods of
-accounting for inventory:
-
-### **Auto / Perpetual Inventory**
-
-In this process, for each stock transactions, the system posts relevant
-accounting entries to sync stock balance and accounting balance. This is the
-default setting in ERPNext for new accounts.
-
-When you buy and receive items, those items are booked as the company’s assets
-(stock-in-hand / fixed-assets). When you sell and deliver those items, an
-expense (cost-of-goods-sold) equal to the buying cost of the items is booked.
-General Ledger entries are made after every stock transaction. As a result,
-the value as per Stock Ledger always remains same with the relevant account
-balance. This improves accuracy of Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss
-statement.
-
-To check accounting entries for a particular stock transaction, please check
-[examples](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html)
-
-#### **Advantages**
-
-Perpetual Inventory system will make it easier for you to maintain accuracy of
-company's asset and expense values. Stock balances will always be synced with
-relevant account balances, so no more periodic manual entry has to be done to
-balance them.
-
-In case of new back-dated stock transactions or cancellation/amendment of an
-existing transaction, all the future Stock Ledger entries and GL Entries will
-be recalculated for all items of that transaction. The same is applicable if
-any cost is added to the submitted Purchase Receipt, later through the Landed
-Cost Wizard.
-
-> Note: Perpetual Inventory totally depends upon the item valuation rate.
-Hence, you have to be more careful entering valuation rate while making any
-incoming stock transactions like Purchase Receipt, Material Receipt, or
-Manufacturing / Repack.
-
-* * *
-
-### **Periodic Inventory**
-
-In this method, accounting entries are manually created periodically, to sync
-stock balance and relevant account balance. The system does not create
-accounting entries automatically for assets, at the time of material purchases
-or sales.
-
-In an accounting period, when you buy and receive items, an expense is booked
-in your accounting system. You sell and deliver some of these items.
-
-At the end of an accounting period, the total value of items to be sold, need
-to be booked as the company’s assets, often known as stock-in-hand.
-
-The difference between the value of the items remaining to be sold and the
-previous period’s stock-in-hand value can be positive or negative. If
-positive, this value is removed from expenses (cost-of-goods-sold) and is
-added to assets (stock-in-hand / fixed-assets). If negative, a reverse entry
-is passed.
-
-This complete process is called Periodic Inventory.
-
-If you are an existing user using Periodic Inventory and want to use Perpetual
-Inventory, you have to follow some steps to migrate. For details, check
-[Migration From Periodic Inventory](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.html).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 21624e52..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-perpetual-inventory
-migrate-to-perpetual-inventory
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 40557f51..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-# Migrate To Perpetual Inventory
-
-Perpetual Inventory Valuation is activated by default in the system.
-
-For the users who are currently following periodic inventory valuation system, and wish to migrate to perpetual inventory valuation system, please follow the steps explained below.
-
-As Perpetual Inventory always maintains a sync between stock and account balance, it is not possible to enable it with existing Warehouse setup. You have to create a whole new set of Warehouses, each linked to relevant account.
-
-Steps:
-
- * Nullify the balance of account heads (stock-in-hand / fixed-asset) which you are using to maintain available stock value, through a Journal Entry.
-
- * As existing warehouses are linked to stock transactions which does not have corresponding accounting entries, those warehouses can not be used for perpetual inventory. You have to create new warehouses for the future stock transactions which will be linked to their respective accounts. While creating new warehouses, select an account group under which the child account for the warehouse will be created.
-
- * Setup the following default accounts for each Company
-
- * Stock Received But Not Billed
- * Stock Adjustment Account
- * Expenses Included In Valuation
- * Cost Center
- * Activate Perpetual Inventory
-
- `Explore > Accounts > Accounts Settings`
-
- 
-
-
- * Create Stock Entry (Material Transfer) to transfer available stock from existing warehouse to new warehouse. As stock will be available in the new warehouse, you should select the new warehouse for all the future transactions.
-
-System will not post any accounting entries for existing stock transactions submitted prior to the activation of Perpetual Inventory as those old warehouses will not be linked to any account. If you create any new transaction or modify/amend existing transactions, with old warehouse, there will be no corresponding accounting entries. You have to manually sync stock and account balance through Journal Entry.
-
-> Note: If you are already using old Perpetual Inventory system, it will be deactivated automatically. You need to follow the above steps to reactivate it.
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 072882d7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,360 +0,0 @@
-
-# Perpetual Inventory
-
-As per the perpetual inventory system, accounts posting is done for every stock transaction.
-
-On creating new Warehouse, the system will automatically create an Account in the Chart of Account, with the same name as Warehouse Name.
-
-On receipt of items in a particular warehouse, the balance in the Warehouse Account will increase. Similarly when items are delivered from the Warehouse, an expense will be booked, and balance in the Warehouse Account will reduce.
-
-##Activation
-
- * Activate Perpetual Inventory
-
- > Setup > Company > Stock Settings > "Enable Perpetual Inventory"
-
-
-
- * Setup the following default accounts for each Company. These accounts are created automatically in the new ERPNext accounts.
-
- * Default Inventory Account
- * Stock Received But Not Billed
- * Stock Adjustment Account
- * Expenses Included In Valuation
- * Cost Center
-
- * If user wants to set an individual account for each warehouse, create account head for each account under `Assets > Current Asset > Stock Assets > (Warehouse)` and set it on the respective warehouse under field 'Account'.
-
- * For stock transactions, general ledger entries made against the account head set on the warehouse, if user had not set the account for the warhouse then system gets the account head from the parent warehouse. If account had not set for parent warehouse then system gets the account(Default Inventory Account) from the company master.
-
-* * *
-
-##Example
-
-Consider following Chart of Accounts and Warehouse setup for your company:
-
-####Chart of Accounts
-
- * Assets (Dr)
- * Current Assets
- * Accounts Receivable
- * Debtor
- * Stock Assets
- * Stores
- * Finished Goods
- * Work In Progress
- * Tax Assets
- * VAT
- * Fixed Assets
- * Fixed Asset Warehouse
- * Liabilities (Cr)
- * Current Liabilities
- * Accounts Payable
- * Creditors
- * Stock Liabilities
- * Stock Received But Not Billed
- * Tax Liabilities
- * Service Tax
- * Income (Cr)
- * Direct Income
- * Sales Account
- * Expenses (Dr)
- * Direct Expenses
- * Stock Expenses
- * Cost of Goods Sold
- * Expenses Included In Valuation
- * Stock Adjustment
- * Shipping Charges
- * Customs Duty
-
-####Warehouse - Account Configuration
-
- * Stores
- * Work In Progress
- * Finished Goods
-
-###Purchase Receipt
-
-Suppose you have purchased _10 nos_ of item "RM0001" at _$200_ and _5 nos_ of item "Base Plate" at **$100** from supplier "Arcu Vel Quam Fabricators". Following are the details of Purchase Receipt:
-
-**Supplier:** Arcu Vel Quam Fabricators
-
-**Items:**
-
-| Item | -Warehouse | -Qty | -Rate | -Amount | -Valuation Amount | -
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | -Stores | -10 | -200 | -2000 | -2250 | -
Taxes: -
-| Account | -Amount | -Category | -
|---|---|---|
| Shipping Charges | -100 | -Total and Valuation | -
| VAT (10%) | -200 | -Total | -
| Customs Duty | -150 | -Valuation | -
-
-**General Ledger**
-
-
-
-As stock balance increases through Purchase Receipt, "Store" accounts are debited and a temporary account "Stock Receipt But Not Billed" account is credited, to maintain double entry accounting system. At the same time, negative expense is booked in account "Expense included in Valuation" for the amount added for valuation purpose, to avoid double expense booking.
-
-* * *
-
-###Purchase Invoice
-
-On receiving Bill from supplier, for the above Purchase Receipt, you will make Purchase Invoice for the same. The general ledger entries are as follows:
-
-**General Ledger**
-
-
-
-Here "Stock Received But Not Billed" account is debited and nullified the
-effect of Purchase Receipt.
-
-* * *
-
-###Delivery Note
-
-Lets say, you have an order from "Utah Automation Services" to deliver 5 nos of item "RM0001"
-at $300. Following are the details of Delivery Note:
-
-**Customer:** Utah Automation Services
-
-**Items:**
-| Item | -Warehouse | -Qty | -Rate | -Amount | -
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | -Stores | -5 | -300 | -1500 | -
Taxes: -
-| Account | -Amount | -
|---|---|
| Service Tax | -150 | -
| VAT | -100 | -
-
-**General Ledger**
-
-
-
-As item is delivered from "Stores" warehouse, "Stores" account is credited and
-equal amount is debited to the expense account "Cost of Goods Sold". The
-debit/credit amount is equal to the total valuation amount (buying cost) of
-the selling items. And valuation amount is calculated based on your preferred
-valuation method (FIFO / Moving Average) or actual cost of serialized items.
-
-
-
- In this example, we have considered valuation method as FIFO.
- Valuation Rate = Purchase Rate + Charges Included in Valuation
- = 200 + (250 * (2000 / 2500) / 10)
- = 220
- Total Valuation Amount = 220 * 5
- = 1100
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-###Sales Invoice with Update Stock
-
-Lets say, you did not make Delivery Note against the above order and instead
-you have made Sales Invoice directly, with "Update Stock" options. The details
-of the Sales Invoice are same as the above Delivery Note.
-
-**Stock Ledger**
-
-
-
-**General Ledger**
-
-
-
-Here, apart from normal account entries for invoice, "Stores" and "Cost of
-Goods Sold" accounts are also affected based on the valuation amount.
-
-* * *
-
-###Stock Entry (Material Receipt)
-
-**Items:**
-
-| Item | -Target Warehouse | -Qty | -Rate | -Amount | -
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | -Stores | -50 | -220 | -11000 | -
-
-**General Ledger**
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-###Stock Entry (Material Issue)
-
-**Items:**
-
-| Item | -Source Warehouse | -Qty | -Rate | -Amount | -
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | -Stores | -10 | -220 | -2200 | -
-
-**General Ledger**
-
-
-
-* * *
-
-###Stock Entry (Material Transfer)
-
-**Items:**
-
-| Item | -Source Warehouse | -Target Warehouse | -Qty | -Rate | -Amount | -
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | -Stores | -Work In Progress | -10 | -220 | -2200 | -
-
-**General Ledger**
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e1fca848..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-
-#Allow Over Delivery/Billing
-
-When creating a Delivery Note, system validates if item's qty is same as in the Sales Order. If item's qty has been increased, you will get the validation message of over-delivery or receipt.
-
-Considering the case fo sales, if you want to be able to deliver more items than mentioned in the Sales Order, you should update "Allow over delivery or receipt upto this percent" in the Item master.
-
-
-
-When creating an invoice, item's rate is also validated based on the preceding transaction like Sales Order. This also applies when creating Purchase Receipt or Purchaes Invoice from Purchase Order. Updating "Allow over delivery or receipt upto this percent" will be affective in all sales and purchase transactions.
-
-For example, if you have ordered 100 units of an item, and if item's over receipt percent is 50, then you are allowed to make Purchase Receipt for upto 150 units.
-
-Update global value for "Allow over delivery or receipt upto this percent" from Stock Settings. Value updated here will be applicable for all the items.
-
-1. Go to `Stock > Setup > Stock Settings`
-
-2. Set `Limit Percentage`.
-
-3. Save Stock Settings.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/auto-creation-of-material-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/auto-creation-of-material-request.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c6a705ef..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/auto-creation-of-material-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-#Auto Creation of Material Request
-
-To prevent stockouts, you can track item's reorder level. When stock level goes below reorder level, purchase manager is notified and instructed to initiate purchase process for the item.
-
-In ERPNext, you can update item's Reorder Level and Reorder Qty in the Item master. If same item has different reorder level, you can also update warehouse-wise reorder level and reorder qty.
-
-
-
-With reorder level, you can also define what should be the next action. Either new purchase or transfer from another warehouse. Based on setting in Item master, purpose will be updated in the Material Request as well.
-
-
-
-When item's stock reaches reorder level, Material Request is auto-created automatically. You can enable this feature from:
-
-`Stock > Setup > Stock Settings`
-
-
-
-A separate Material Request will be created for each item. User with Purchase Manager's role will receive email alert about these Material Requests.
-
-If auto creation of Material Request is failed, User with Purchase Manager role will be informed about error message. One of the most encountered error message is:
-
-**An error occurred for certain Items while creating Material Requests based on Re-order level.**
-**Date 01-04-2016 not in any Fiscal Year.**
-
-One of the reason of error could be Fiscal Year as well. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.html) to learn more about it.
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/creating-depreciation-for-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/creating-depreciation-for-item.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f18163eb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/creating-depreciation-for-item.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-#Depreciation Entry
-
-**Question:** A Fixed Asset Item has been purchased and stored in a warehouse. How to create a depreciation for a Fixed Asset Item?
-
-**Answer:**You can post asset depreciation entry for the fixed asset item via [Stock Reconciliation](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.html) Entry.
-
-####Step 1:
-
-In the Attachment file, fill in the appropriate columns;
-
-- **Item Code** whose value is to be depreciated.
-- **Warehouse** in which item is stored.
-- **Qty (Quantity)** Leave this column blank.
-- **Valuation Rate** will be item's value after depreciation.
-
-
-
-After updating Valuation Rate for an item, come back to Stock Reconciliation and upload save .csv file.
-
-####Step 2:
-
-Select Expense account for depreciation in **Difference Account**. Value booked in the depreciation account will be the difference of old and next valuation rate of the fixed asset item, which will be actually the depreciation amount.
-
-
-
-####Stock Reconciliation Help Video
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/delivery-note-stock-error.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/delivery-note-stock-error.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7db41e9c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/delivery-note-stock-error.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Delivery Note Negative Stock Error
-
-**Question**: When submitting a Delivery Note, receiving a message says that item's stock is insufficient, but we have item's stock available in the Warehouse.
-
-**Answer**: On submission of Delivery Note, stock level is checked as on Posting Date and Posting Time of a Delivery Note. It's possible that you have stock of an Item available in the Warehouse. But if you are creating back-dated Delivery Note, and if item was not available in the warehouse on the Posting Date and Posting Time of Delivery Note, you are likely to receive an error message on the negative stock. You can refer to the Stock Ledger report to confirm the same.
-
-If this is the case, you should edit the Posting Date and Time of a Delivery Note, and ensure that it is after the Posting Date and Time of item's receipt entry.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 9b6be7d8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-sales-return-use-cases
-allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit
-auto-creation-of-material-request
-depreciation-entry
-maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master
-manage-rejected-finished-goods-items
-managing-batch-wise-inventory
-managing-fractions-in-uom
-opening-stock-balance-entry-for-serialized-and-batch-item
-repack-entry
-serial-no-naming
-stock-entry-purpose
-stock-level-report
-track-items-using-barcode
-stock-received-but-not-billed
-return-rejected-item
-item-valuation-transactions
-delivery-note-stock-error
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/item-valuation-transactions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/item-valuation-transactions.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 87f0ae3a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/item-valuation-transactions.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Valuation Methods and Transactions
-
-In ERPNext, Item's stock valuation is updated on the creation of one of the following transaction.
-
-1. Purchase Receipt
-2. Stock Entry of type Material Receipt
-3. Stock Reconciliation made for updating stock opening balance
-
-You can select valuation method based on which item's value will be calculated. Valuation Method can be set globally for all the items from the Stock Settings.
-
-
-
-You can also set Valuation Method in the item master, especially when a valuation method for an item is different from the default Method.
-
-
-
-[Click here to learn about the valuation methods available in the ERPNext, and how it works.](https://frappe.io/blog/erpnext-features/inventory-valuation-method-fifo-vs-moving-average)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 84615a66..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-#Maintain Stock field Frozen in the Item master
-
-In the item master, you might witness values in the following fields to be frozen.
-
-1. Maintain Stock
-1. Has Batch No.
-1. Has Serial No.
-
-
-
-For an item, once stock ledger entry is created, values in these fields will be froze. This is to prevent user from changing value which can lead to mis-match of actual stock, and stock level in the system of an item.
-
-For the serialized item, since its stock level is calculated based on count of available Serial Nos., setting Item as non-serialized mid-way will break the sync, and item's stock level shown in the report will not be accurate, hence Has Serial No. field is froze.
-
-To make these fields editable once again, you should delete all the stock transactions made for this item. For the Serialized and Batch Item, you should also delete Serial No. and Batch No. record for this item.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/manage-rejected-finished-goods-items.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/manage-rejected-finished-goods-items.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8cd24969..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/manage-rejected-finished-goods-items.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-#Manage Rejected Finished Goods Items
-
-There could be manufactured Items which would not pass quality test, hence rejected.
-
-Standard manufacturing process in ERPNext doesn't cover managing rejected items. Hence you should create finished goods entry for both accepted as well as rejected items. With this, you will have rejected items also received in the finished goods warehouse.
-
-To move rejected items from the finished goods warehouse, you should create Material Transfer entry. Steps below to create Material Transfer entry.
-
-####Step 1: New Stock Entry
-
-`Stock > Documents > Stock Entry > New`
-
-####Step 2: Purpose
-
-Purpose = Material Transfer
-
-####Step 3: Warehouse
-
-Source Warehouse = Finished Goods warehouse
-Target Warehouse = Rejected items warehouse
-
-####Step 4: Items
-
-Select item which failed quality test, and enter total rejected items as Qty.
-
-####Step 5: Submit Stock Entry
-
-On Saving and Submitting Stock Entry, stock of rejected items will be moved from Finished Goods Warehouse to Rejected Warehouse.
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f873c9a7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-
-#Managing Batch wise Inventory
-
-Set of items which has same properties and attributes can be group in a single Batch. For example, pharmaceuticals items are batch, so that it's manufacturing and expiry date can be tracked together.
-
-To maintain batches against an Item you need to mention 'Has Batch No' as yes in the Item Master.
-
-
-
-You can create a new Batch from:
-
-`Stock > Documents > Batch > New`
-
-To learn more about batch, click [here.](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.html)
-
-For the Batch item, updating Batch No. in the stock transactions (Purchase Receipt & Delivery Note) is mandatory.
-
-#### Purchase Receipt
-
-When creating Purchase Receipt, you should create new Batch, or select one of the existing Batch master. One Batch can be associated with one Batch Item.
-
-
-
-#### Delivery Note
-
-Define Batch in Delivery Note Item table. If Batch item is added under Product Bundle, you can update it's Batch No. in the Packing List table sa well.
-
-
-
-#### Batch-wise Stock Balance Report
-
-To check batch-wise stock balance report, go to:
-
-Stock > Standard Reports > Batch-wise Balance History
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-fractions-in-uom.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-fractions-in-uom.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8e4e3aae..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-fractions-in-uom.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-#Managing Fractions in UoM
-
-UoM stands for Unit of Measurement. Few examples of UoM are Numbers (Nos), Kgs, Litre, Meter, Box, Carton etc.
-
-There are few UoMs which cannot have value in decimal places. For example, if we have television for an item, with Nos as its UoM, we cannot have 1.5 Nos. of television, or 3.7 Nos. of computer sets. The value of quantity for these items must be whole number.
-
-You can configure if particular UoM can have value in decimal place or no. By default, value in decimal places will be allowed for all the UoMs. To restrict decimal places or value in fraction for any UoM, you should follow these steps.
-
-####UoM List
-
-For UoM list, go to:
-
-`Stock > Setup > UoM`
-
-From the list of UoM, select UoM for which value in decimal place is to be restricted. Let's assume that UoM is Nos.
-
-####Configure
-
-In the UoM master, you will find a field called "Must be whole number". Check this field to restrict user from enter value in decimal places in quantity field, for item having this UoM.
-
-
-
-####Validation
-
-While creating transaction, if you enter value in fraction for item whos UoM has "Must be whole number" checked, you will get error message stating:
-
-`Quantity cannot be a fraction at row #`
-
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/material-transfer-from-delivery-note.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/material-transfer-from-delivery-note.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bb07b150..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/material-transfer-from-delivery-note.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-# Material Transfer from Delivery Note
-
-In ERPNext, you can create Material Transfer entry from [Stock Entry](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-entry.html) document. However, there are some scenarios in the Material Transfer where it needs to be presented as a Delivery Note.
-
-### Scenarios
-
-1. One of the examples is when you transfer a Material from your stores to project site, however, you need to present it as a Delivery Note to the client.
-
-2. Also, there are statutory requirements where taxes are to be applied on each transfer of Material. It is easier to manage in a transaction like Delivery Note, than in the Stock Entry.
-
-Considering these scenarios, the provision of Material Transfer has been added in the Delivery Note as well. Following are the steps to use Delivery Note for creating Material Transfer entry.
-
-### Steps
-
-#### Enable Customer Warehouse
-
-Delivery Note Item doctype as a hidden field of Customer Warehouse. You can enable it from [Customize Form](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.html). Here is the quick demonstration of the same.
-
-
-
-### Select Warehouses
-
-When creating a Delivery Note for Material Transfer, for an item select source Warehouse as From Warehouse.
-
-In the Customer Warehouse, select a Warehouse where Material is to be transferred or select a target warehouse.
-
-
-
-On the submission of a Delivery Note, item's stock will be deducted from "From Warehouse" and added to the "Customer Warehouse".
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/mode_of_payment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/mode_of_payment.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 02d31ab7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/mode_of_payment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-#Mode of Payment
-
-In the sales and purchase transactions, there are various options to settle the payment. We can do it in cash, via bank transfer, via promotion voucher to list a few. In ERPNext, you can create Mode of Payments as per your requirement. In the Payment Entry, you can select the Mode of Payment applicable.
-
-You can manage standard Mode of Payments and create new ones from:
-
-> Accounts > Setup > Mode of Payment
-
-
-
-In each Mode of Payment master, you can also set a default payment account. On selection of Mode of Payment, the respective payment account will be fetched automatically in the transaction.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/opening-stock-balance-entry-for-serialized-and-batch-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/opening-stock-balance-entry-for-serialized-and-batch-item.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ef63f0cf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/opening-stock-balance-entry-for-serialized-and-batch-item.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-
-#Opening Stock Balance Entry for Serialized and Batch Item
-
-Items for which Serial No. and Batch No. is maintained, opening stock balance entry for them is update via Stock Entry. [Click here to learn how serialized inventory is managed in ERPNext](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.html).
-
-**Question:** Why Opening Balance entry for the Serialized and Batch Item cannot be updated via Stock Reconciliation?
-
-In the ERPNext, stock level of a serialized item is derived based on the count of Serial Nos for that item. Hence, unless Serial Nos. are created for the serialized item, its stock level will not be updated. In the Stock Reconciliation Tool, you can only update opening quantity of an item, but not the Serial No. and Batch No.
-
-### Opening Balance for the Serialized Item
-
-Following are the steps to create opening stock balance entry for the Serialized and Batch item.
-
-#### Step 1: New Stock Entry
-
-`Stock > Stock Entry > New`
-
-#### Step 2: Select Purpose
-
-Stock Entry Purpose should be updated as `Material Receipt`.
-
-#### Step 3: Update Posting Date
-
-Posting Date should be date on which you wish to update opening balance for an item.
-
-#### Step 4: Update Target Warehouse
-
-Target Warehouse will be one in which opening balance of an item will be updated.
-
-#### Step 5: Select Items
-
-Select Items for which opening balance is to be updated.
-
-#### Step 6: Update Opening Qty
-
-For the serialized item, update quantity as many Serial Nos are their.
-
-For the serialized item, mention Serial Nos. equivalent to it's Qty. Or if Serial Nos. are configured to be created based on Prefix, then no need to mention Serial Nos. manually. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.html) to learn more about Serial No. naming.
-
-For a batch item, provide Batch ID in which opening balance will be updated. Keep batch master ready, and updated it for the Batch Item. To create new Batch, go to:
-
-`Stock > Setup > Batch > New`
-
-[Click here to learn how Batchwise inventory is managed in ERPNext.](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.html)
-
-#### Step 7: Update Item Valuation Rate
-
-Update valuation rate, which will be per unit value of item. If different units of the same items having different valuation rate, they should be updated in a separate row, with different Valuation Rates.
-
-#### Step 8: Difference Account
-
-As per perpetual inventory valuation system, accounting entry is created for every stock transaction. Double entry accounting system requires Total Debit matching with Total Credit in an entry. On the submission of Stock Entry, system debits Warehouse account by total value of items. To balance the same, we use Temporary Opening account as a Difference Account.
-
-
-
-#### Step 9: Save and Submit Stock Entry
-
-On submission of Stock Entry, stock ledger posting will be posted, and opening balance will be updated for the items on a given Posting Date.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/repack-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/repack-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 702cffa6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/repack-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-#Repack Entry
-
-Repack Entry is created for item bought in bulk, which is being packed into smaller packages. For example, item bought in tons can be repacked into Kgs.
-
-Notes:
-1. Purchase Item and repack will be have different Item Codes.
-2. Repack entry can be made with or without BOM (Bill of Material).
-
-In a Repack Entry, there can be one or more than one repack items. Let's check below scenario to understand this better.
-
-Assume we are buying boxes of spray paint of specific colour (Green, Blue etc). And later re-bundling to create packs having multiple colours of spray paint (Blue-Green, Green-Yellow etc.) in them.
-
-#### 1. New Stock Entry
-
-`Stock > Documents > Stock Entry > New Stock Entry`
-
-#### 2. Enter Items
-
-Select Purpose as 'Repack Entry'.
-
-For raw-material/input item, only Source Warehouse will be provided.
-
-For repacked/output items, only Target Warehouse will be provided. You will have to provide valuation for the repack items.
-
-
-
-Update Qty for all the items selected.
-
-#### 3. Submit Stock Entry
-
-On submitting Stock Entry, stock of input item will be reduced from Source Warehouse, and stock of repack/output item will be added in the Target Warehouse.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/return-rejected-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/return-rejected-item.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d06addb6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/return-rejected-item.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-# Return Rejected Items
-
-In the Purchase Receipt, you can receive the Items in the Accepted or the Rejected Warehouse.
-
-If you are creating Purchase Return for the items received in the Rejected Warehouse, then create return entry following these steps.
-
-1. In the Purchase Receipt Item table, for the item to be returned, in the Received Qty field, enter return entry in negative.
-2. In the Accepted Warehouse field, set value as zero.
-3. In the Rejected Warehouse field, set the quantity to be returned in negative.
-
-For detailed steps on how to create Purchase Return Entry for the Rejected Item, refer to the below example.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/sales-return-use-cases.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/sales-return-use-cases.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ad81639..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/sales-return-use-cases.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-# Sales Return Management
-
-In an event of Sales Return, the following adjustment pertaining to stock and accounting can be handled in multiple ways. Let's check what stock and accounts posting would be posted based on the Sales Return adjustment.
-
-### Return Without Payment
-
-If a customer request for the returns even before processing a payment, then you can simply:
-
-1. Cancel the Sales Invoice.
-2. Create a Sales Return against a Delivery Note
-
-If your statutory laws don't allow you to cancel the Sales Invoice, you can create a Credit Note against a Sales Invoice as well.
-
-### Paid Sales Invoice - Adjustment via Credit Note
-
-This is a scenario where the customer purchased an item from you for which Sales Invoice as submitted, and also paid.
-
-1. Create a Credit Note against a Sales Invoice.
-2. In the Sales Invoice, check field "Is Paid". Ensure that Payment Account / Mode of Payment is selected in the relevant table.
-3. If you wish to also return items via Sales Invoice itself, check field "Update Stock".
-4. Save and Submit Credit Note.
-
-
-
-As per this entry, the sold items will be accepted back in your Warehouse. Also, the payment received from the Customer will be reversed.
-
-After the Credit Note creation, the Outstanding Balance of Sales Invoice will turn negative. This will give you scope to adjust this Sales Invoice (with a negative balance) to adjust against the future outstanding Sales Invoice.
-
-### Unpaid Sales Invoice - Credit Note
-
-In the case of Sales Return where the customer didn't process any payment, you can simply create a Credit Note. On creation of Credit Note, Outstanding of the Sales Invoice will become negative.
-
-For the Adjustment of stock, you can create a Sales Return against Delivery Note or in the Credit Note itself, check field "Update Stock".
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ba25579a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-#Serial No. Naming
-
-Serial Nos. is unique value assigned on each unit of an item. Serial no. helps in tracking item's warranty and expiry details. Generally high value items like machines, computers, costly equipments are serialized.
-
-To make item Serialized, in the Item master, check **Has Serial No**.
-
-There are two ways Serial no. can be generated in ERPNext.
-
-###1. Serializing Purchase Items
-
-If purchased items are received with Serial Nos. applied by OEM (original equipment manufacturer), you can follow same Serial No in ERPNext as well. While creating Purchase Receipt, you shall scan or manually enter Serial nos. for an item. On submitting Purchase Receipt, Serial Nos. will be created in the backend as per Serial Nos. provided for an item. If using OEM' Serial No., then in the Item master, Prefix should not be mentioned for serializalization. As per this scenaio, Prefix field should be left blank.
-
-If received items already has its Serial No. barcoded, you can simply scan that barcode for entering Serial No. in the Purchase Receipt. Click [here](https://frappe.io/blog/management/using-barcodes-to-ease-data-entry) to learn more about it.
-
-On submission of Purchase Receipt or Stock entry for the serialized item, Serial Nos. will be auto-generated.
-
-
-
-Generated Serial numbers will be updated for each item.
-
-
-
-###2. Serializing Manufacturing Item
-
-To Serialize Manufacturing Item, you can define Series for Serial No. Generation in the Item master itself. Following that series, system will create Serial Nos. for Item when its Production entry is made.
-
-####2.1 Serial No. Series
-
-When Item is set as serialized, it will allow you to mentioned Series for it.
-
-
-
-####2.2 Production Entry for Serialized Item
-
-On submission of production entry for manufacturing item, system will automatically generate Serial Nos. following Series as specified in the Item master.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-entry-purpose.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-entry-purpose.md
deleted file mode 100755
index afce52ed..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-entry-purpose.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-
-#Stock Entry Purpose
-
-Stock Entry is a stock transaction, which can be used for multiple purposes. Let's learn about each Stock Entry Purpose below.
-
-#### 1.Purpose: Material Issue
-
-Material Issue entry create to issue item(s) from a warehouse. On submission of Material Issue, stock of item is deducated from the Source Warehouse.
-
-Material Issue is generally made for the low value consumable items like office stationary, product consumables etc. Also you can create Material Issue to reconcile serialized and batched item's stock.
-
-
-
-#### 2.Purpose: Material Receipt
-
-Material Receipt entry is created to inward stock of item(s) in a warehouse. This type of stock entry can be created for updating opening balance of serialized and batched item. Also items purchased without Purchase Order can be inwarded from Material Receipt entry.
-
-For the stock valuation purpose, provided Item Valuation becomes a mandatory field in the Material Receipt entry.
-
-
-
-#### 3.Purpose: Material Transfer
-
-Material Transfer entry is created for the inter-warehouse Material Transfer.
-
-
-
-#### 4.Purpose: Material Transfer for Manufacture
-
-In the manufacturing process, raw-materials are issued from the stores to the production department (generally WIP warehouse). This Material Transfer entry is created from Work Order. Items in this entry are fetched from the BOM of production Item, as selected in Work Order.
-
-
-
-#### 4.Purpose: Manufacture
-
-Manufacture is created from Work Order. In this entry, both raw-material item as well as production item are fetched from the BOM, selected in the Work Order. For the raw-material items, only Source Warehouse (generally WIP warehouse) is mentioned. For the production item, only target warehouse as mentioned in the Work Order is updated. On submission, stock of raw-material items are deducted from Source Warehouse, which indicates that raw-material items were consumed in the manufacturing process. Production Item is added to the Target Warehouse marking the completion of production cycle.
-
-
-
-#### 5.Purpose: Repack
-
-Repack Entry is created when items purchases in bulk is repacked under smaller packs. 
-
-#### 6.Purpose: Subcontract
-
-Subcontracting transaction involves company transfer raw-material items to the sub-contractors warehouse. This requires adding a warehouse for the sub-contractor as well. Sub-contract entry transfers stock from the companies warehouse to the sub-contractors warehouse..
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-level-report.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-level-report.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4f0c0cc0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-level-report.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-#Stock Level Report
-
-Stock Level report list stock item's quantity available in a particular warehouse.
-
-There are multiple reports available you can check for item's stock level.
-
-####Stock Projected Quantity Report
-
-You can access this report from `Stock > Main Report > Stock Projected Quantity`
-
-This report list item wise - warehouse wise stock level of an item considering all the stock transactions. With Actual Quantity of an item, it also provide other details like:
-
-1. Actual Qty: Quantity available in the warehouse.
-2. Planned Qty: Quantity, for which, Work Order has been raised, but is pending to be manufactured.
-3. Requested Qty: Quantity requested for purchase, but not ordered.
-4. Ordered Qty: Quantity ordered for purchase, but not received.
-5. Reserved Qty: Quantity ordered for sale, but not delivered.
-6. Project Qty: Project Quantity is calculated as
-
-Projected Qty = Actual Qty + Planned Qty + Requested Qty + Ordered Qty - Reserved Qty
-
-The projected inventory is used by the planning system to monitor the reorder point and to determine the reorder quantity. The projected Quantity is used by the planning engine to monitor the safety stock levels. These levels are maintained to serve unexpected demands.
-
-Having a tight control of the projected inventory is crucial to determine shortages and to calculate the right order quantity.
-
-####Stock Balance Report
-
-Stock Ledger report helps you check stock balance of an item on a given date.
-
-You can access this report from
-
-`Stock > Main Report > Stock Balance`
-
-This allows you to go back in time, and check what was stock level of an item in a particular warehouse in the near past.
-
-With item's stock levels, you will also get their valuation details in this report.
-
-Based on the date filters, this report provides item's Opening Stock on From Date, and Closing Stock on To From. It will also list the In Quantity and Out Quantity for an item between the date range.
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-received-but-not-billed.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-received-but-not-billed.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c9f2634f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-received-but-not-billed.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Purpose of Stock Received but not Billed
-
-When purchased items are received, an accounts posting is done based on the value of the purchased items in the Stock-in-hand / fixed-assets account. When you sell and deliver those items, an expense (cost-of-goods-sold) is booked, equal to the buying cost of the items.
-
-As stock balance increases through Purchase Receipt, Warehouse account is debited and an adjustment account called **Stock Received But Not Billed** account is credited. At the same time, the negative expense is booked in account **Expense included in Valuation** for the amount added for valuation purpose, to avoid double expense booking.
-
-On receiving Bill from the supplier, you will make Purchase Invoice against a Purchase Receipt. Here **Stock Received But Not Billed** account is debited, hence nullifies the balance in the Stock Received but not Billed Account.
-
-The balance in the Stock Received but not Billed account indicates the value of items for which Purchase Receipt has been made, but billing is pending.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/track-items-using-barcode.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/track-items-using-barcode.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a88a6a41..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/track-items-using-barcode.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-#Track Items Using Barcode
-
-A barcode is a value decoded into vertical spaced lines. Barcode scanners are the input medium, like Keyboard. When it scans a barcode, the data appears in the computer screens at the point of a cursor.
-
-### Item Master
-
-To set the barcode of a particular item, you will have to open the Item record. You can also enter barcode while creating a new item.
-
-
-
-Once barcode field is updated in item master, items can be fetched using barcode. This feature will be availble in Delivery Note, Sales Invoice and Purchase Receipt transactions only.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6bf30683..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-
-# Batch
-
-Batch feature in ERPNext allows you to group multiple units of an item,
-and assign them a unique value/number/tag called Batch No.
-
-This is done based on the Item. If the Item is batched, then a Batch number must be mentioned in every stock transaction. Batch numbers can be maintained manually or automatically
-
-### Item Setup
-
-To set item as a batch item, "Has Batch No" field should be checked in the Item master.
-
-If you want automatic batch creation at the time of Purchase Receipt, you must check "Create New Batches Automatically"
-
-
-
-### Creating Batches
-
-If you have not selected "Create New Batches Automatically", you will have to make Batches Manually as you go along.
-
-To create new Batch No. master for an item, go to:
-
-> Stock > Setup > Batch > New
-
-### Splitting and Moving Batches
-
-When you open a batch, you will see all the quantities relating this that batch on the page.
-
-
-
-To move the batch from one warehouse to another, you can click on the move button.
-
-You can also split the batch into smaller one by clicking on "Split". This will create a new Batch based on this Batch and the quantities will be split between the batches.
-
-### Transacting Items with Batches
-
-Batch master is created before creation of Purchase Receipt.
-Hence eveytime there is Purchase Receipt or Work Order being made for a batch item,
-you will first create its Batch No, and then select it in Purchase order or Production Entry.
-
-On every stock transaction (Purchase Receipt, Delivery Note, POS Invoice) made for batch item,
-you should provide item's Batch No.
-
-> Note: In stock transactions, Batch IDs will be filtered based on Item Code, Warehouse,
-Batch Expiry Date (compared with Posting date of a transaction) and Actual Qty in Warehouse.
-While searching for Batch ID without value in Warehouse field, then Actual Qty filter won't be applied.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-note.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-note.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a046d7d7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-note.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
-
-# Delivery Note
-
-A Delivery Note is made when a shipment is shipped from the company’s
-Warehouse.
-
-A copy of the Delivery Note is usually sent with the transporter. The Delivery
-Note contains the list of Items that are sent in the shipment and updates the
-inventory.
-
-The entry of the Delivery Note is very similar to a Purchase Receipt. You can
-create a new Delivery Note from:
-
-> Stock > Delivery Note > New
-
-or from a “Submitted” Sales Order (that is not already shipped) by clicking on
-“Make Delivery Note”.
-
-
-
-You can also “fetch” the details from an unshipped Sales Order.
-
-You will notice that all the information about unshipped Items and other
-details are carried over from your Sales Order.
-
-### Shipping Packets or Items with Product Bundle
-
-If you are shipping Items that have a [Product Bundle](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.html), ERPNext will automatically
-create a “Packing List” table for you based on the sub-Items in that Item.
-
-If your Items are serialized, then for Product Bundle type of Items, you will have
-to update the Serial Number in the “Packing List” table.
-
-### Packing Items into Cases, for Container Shipment
-
-If you are doing container shipment or by weight, then you can use the Packing
-Slip to breakup your Delivery Note into smaller units. To make a Packing Slip
-go to:
-
-> Stock > Packing Slip > New Packing Slip
-
-You can create multiple Packing Slips for your Delivery Note and ERPNext will
-ensure that the quantities in the Packing Slip do not exceed the quantities in
-the Delivery Note.
-
-* * *
-
-#### Q. How to Print Without Amount?
-
-If you want to print your Delivery Note without the amount (this might be
-useful if you are shipping high value items), check the “Print without
-Amount” box in the “More Info” section.
-
-#### What happens when the Delivery Note is “Submitted”?
-
-A Stock Ledger Entry is made for each Item and stock is updated. Pending
-Quantity in the Sales Order is updated (if applicable).
-
-#### Q. How to not allow the creation of delievery notes without a sales order against it ?
-
-Go to Sales Settings > Sales Order Required, then turn this setting to YES
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-trip.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-trip.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 710fd9b7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-trip.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Delivery Trip
-
-Delivery Trip is created to record Customer Deliveries in one vehicle. Multiple stops can also be added and Submitted Delivery Note can be tagged per Customer.
-
-You can make a Delivery directly from:
-
-> Stock > Delivery Trip > New Delivery Trip
-
-Delivery
-
-
-
-Delivery Stops
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 83f210e2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-# Stock
-
-Distributors have large part of their net worth is invested in the stock in hand. With ERPNext, you can always keep a birds eye view on your stock availability, replenishment, procurement and sales.
-
-
-
-Distributors need to be on the top of their game always. From procuring the products to providing after-sales support for the same, they are an important part of the supply-chain.
-
-### Material Flow
-
-There are three main types of entries
-
- * Purchase Receipt: Items received from Suppliers against Purchase Orders.
- * Stock Entry: Items transferred from one Warehouse to another.
- * Delivery Note: Items shipped to Customers.
-
-
-
-### A Distributor on ERPNext Implementation
-
-When Tarun Gupta's security services startup Neural Integrated Services started growing, his ERP could not keep pace and was full of bugs in spite of spending a lot of money. Thats when Tarun decided he wanted to move to something better and discovered ERPNext.
-
-
-
-
-
-### User Manual
-
-A distributor needs lots more than sales and purchase module to operate efficiently. ERPNext has all of it available built-in.
-
-- You track your books of accounts using [Accounts module](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts.html).
-- Manage payroll, leaves and claims of your support staff in the [HR module](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources.html).
-- Attend customer's support queries better with [Support](/docs/user/manual/en/support.html) module of ERPNext.
-
-Here is the stepwise guide on the functionalities of ERPNext Stock / inventory module.
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index f807e736..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-material-request
-stock-entry
-delivery-note
-purchase-receipt
-installation-note
-item
-warehouse
-serial-no
-batch
-projected-quantity
-accounting-of-inventory-stock
-tools
-setup
-sales-return
-purchase-return
-articles
-opening-stock
-stock-how-to
-retain-sample-stock
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/installation-note.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/installation-note.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 69a04451..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/installation-note.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Installation Note
-
-An Installation Note can be created when a product/item is being installed or set up at the customer's place.
-If you, for example, sell a Washing Machine, a service person generally acompanies the delivery to install
-the machine at the customer’s place. The service person can create an “Installation Note”, to track the date
-and details of the installation.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 89bdc87c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item
-
-An Item is your companys' product or a service. The term Item is applicable to things (products or services) you sell as well as raw materials or components of products yet to be produced (before they can be sold to customers). An Item can be a physical product or a service that you buy/sell from your customers/suppliers. ERPNext allows you to manage all sorts of items like raw-materials, sub-assemblies, finished goods, item variants and service items.
-
-ERPNext is optimised for itemised management of your sales and purchase. If you are in services, you can create an Item for each services that your offer. Completing the Item Master is very essential for successful implementation of ERPNext.
-
-
-
-
-
-## Item Properties
-
- * **Item Name:** Item name is the actual name of your product or service.
- * **Item Code:** Item Code is a short-form to denote your Item. If you have very few Items, it is advisable to keep the Item Name and the Item Code same. This helps new users to recognise and update Item details in all transactions. In case you have lot of Items with long names and the list runs in hundreds, it is advisable to code. To understand naming Item codes see [Item Codification](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-codification.html)
- * **Item Group:** Item Group is used to categorize an Item under various criterias like products, raw materials, services, sub-assemblies, consumables or all Item groups. Create your default Item Group list under Setup> Item Group and pre-select the option while filling your New Item details under [Item Group](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.html)
- * **Default Unit of Measure:** This is the default measuring unit that you will use for your product. It could be in nos, kgs, meters, etc. You can store all the UOM’s that your product will require under Set Up> Master Data > UOM. These can be preselected while filling New Item by using % sign to get a pop up of the UOM list.
- * **Brand:** If you have more than one brand save them under Set Up> Master Data> Brand and pre-select them while filling a New Item.
- * **Variant:** A Item Variant is a different version of a Item.To learn more about managing variants see [Item Variants](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.html)
-
-### Upload an Image
-
-To upload an image for your icon that will appear in all transactions, save the partially filled form. Only after your file is saved the 'upload' button will work above the Image icon. Click on this sign and upload the image.
-
-### Inventory : Warehouse and Stock Setting
-
-In ERPNext, you can select different type of Warehouses to stock your different Items. This can be selected based on Item types. It could be Fixed Asset Item, Stock Item or even Manufacturing Item.
-
- * **Stock Item:** If you are maintaining stock of this Item in your Inventory, ERPNext will make a stock ledger entry for each transaction of this item.
- * **Default Warehouse:** This is the Warehouse that is automatically selected in your transactions.
- * **Allowance Percentage:** This is the percent by which you will be allowed to over-bill or over-deliver this Item. If not set, it will select from the Global Defaults.
- * **Valuation Method:** There are two options to maintain valuation of stock. FIFO (first in - first out) and Moving Average. To understand this topic in detail please visit “ Item Valuation, FIFO and Moving Average”.
-
-### Serialized and Batched Inventory
-
-These numbers help to track individual units or batches of Items which you sell. It also tracks warranty and returns. In case any individual Item is recalled by the supplier the number system helps to track individual Item. The numbering system also manages expiry dates. Please note that if you sell your items in thousands, and if the items are very small like pens or erasers, you need not serialize them. In ERPNext, you will have to mention the serial number in some accounting entries. To create serial numbers you will have to manually create all the numbers in your entries. If your product is not a big consumer durable Item, if it has no warranty and has no chances of being recalled, avoid giving serial numbers.
-
-> Tip: While entering an item code in an items table, if the table requires inventory details, then depending on whether the entered item is batched or serialized, you can enter serial or batch numbers right away in a pop-up dialog.
-
-
-> Important: Once you mark an item as serialized or batched or neither, you cannot change it after you have made any stock entry.
-
- * [Discussion on Serialized Inventory](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html)
-
-### Re Ordering
-
- ***Re-order level** suggests the amount of stock balance in the Warehouse.
- ***Re-order Qty** suggests the amount of stock to be ordered to maintain minimum stock levels.
- ***Minimum Order Qty** is the minimum quantity for which a Material Request / Purchase Order must be made.
-
-### Item Tax
-
-These settings are required only if a particular Item has a different tax rate than the rate defined in the standard tax Account. For example, If you have a tax Account, “VAT 10%” and this particular Item is exempted from tax, then you select “VAT 10%” in the first column, and set “0” as the tax rate in the second column.
-
-Go to [Setting Up Taxes](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) to understand this topic in detail.
-
-### Inspection
-
-Inspection Required: If an incoming inspection (at the time of delivery from the Supplier) is mandatory for this Item, mention “Inspection Required” as “Yes”. The system will ensure that a Quality Inspection will be prepared and approved before a Purchase Receipt is submitted.
-
-Inspection Criteria: If a Quality Inspection is prepared for this Item, then this template of criteria will automatically be updated in the Quality Inspection table of the Quality Inspection. Examples of Criteria are: Weight, Length, Finish etc.
-
-### Purchase, Replenishment Details
-
-
-
-
-
-* **Is Purchase Item:** Checked if Item is purchased through a supplier and follows `Buying Cycle`.
-
-* **Is Customer Provided Item:** Checked if Item is provided by a customer and received through `Stock Entry - Material Receipt`. If Checked, `Customer` field is Mandatory as the default customer for `Material Request`.
-
-* **Lead time days:** Lead time days are the number of days required for the Item to reach the warehouse.
-
-* **Default Expense Account:** It is the account in which cost of the Item will be debited.
-
-* **Default Cost Centre:** It is used for tracking expense for this Item.
-
-###Supplier Details
-
-
-
-* **Default Supplier:** Supplier from whom you generally purchase this item.
-
-* **Manufacturer Details:** Select Manufacturer and Part No. assigned by the Manufacturer for this item.
-
-* **Supplier Codes:** Track Item Code defined by the Suppliers for this Item. In the Purchase transactions, on selection and Supplier, Supplier Part No. will be fetched as well for the Supplier's reference.
-
-### Sales Details
-
-
-
-* **Default Income Account:** Income account selected here will be fetched automatically in sales invoice for this item.
-
-***Cost Centre:** Cost center selected here will be fetched automatically in sales invoice for this item.
-
-***Customer Codes:** Track Item Code assigned by the Customers for this Item. This will help you in searching item while creating Sales Order based on the Item Code in the Customer's Purchase Order.
-
-### Manufacturing And Website
-
-
-
-Visit [Manufacturing](/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing.html) and [Website ](/docs/user/manual/en/website.html)to understand these topics in detail.
-
-### Learn more about Item
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index db5fa0ad..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-item-price
-item-codification
-item-variants
-purchase-details
-reorder
-item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average
-item-settings
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-codification.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-codification.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 018b4bbf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-codification.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Codification
-
-If you already have a full-fledged business with a number of physical items,
-you would have probably coded your items. If you have not, you have a choice.
-We recommend that you should codify if you have lot of products with long or
-complicated names. In case you have few products with short names, it is
-preferable to keep the Item Code same as Item Name.
-
-Item codification has been a sensitive topic and wars have been fought on this
-(not joking). In our experience, when you have items that cross a certain
-size, life without codification is a nightmare.
-
-### Benefits
-
- * Standard way of naming things.
- * Less likely to have duplicates.
- * Explicit definition.
- * Helps to quickly find if a similar item exists.
- * Item names get longer and longer as more types get introduced. Codes are shorter.
-
-### Pain
-
- * You have to remember the codes!
- * Harder for new team members to pick up.
- * You have to create new codes all the time.
-
-### Example
-
-You should have a simple manual / cheat-sheet to codify your Items instead of
-just numbering them sequentially. Each letter should mean something. Here is
-an example:
-
-If your business involves wooden furniture, then you may codify as follows:
-
-Item Codification Summary Sheet (SAMPLE)
-
-
-
- First letter: "Material" Third letter: "Size"
-
- - W - Wood - 0 - less than 1mm
- - H - Hardware - 1 - 1mm - 5mm
- - G - Glass - 2 - 5mm - 10mm
- - U - Upholstery - 3 - 10mm - 10cm
- - P - Plastic
-
- Second Letter: "Type"
-
- For Wood: For Hardware:
-
- - S - Sheet - S - Screw
- - B - Bar - N - Nut
- - L - L-section - W - Washer
- - M - Molded - B - Bracket
- - R - Round
-
-
-The last few letters could be sequential. So by looking at code **WM304** \-
-you know its a wooden molding less than 10cm in size
-
-### Standardization
-
-If you have more than one person naming items, the style of naming items will
-change for everyone. Sometimes, even for one person, he or she may forget how
-they had named the item and may create a duplicate name _"Wooden Sheet 3mm" or
-"3mm Sheet of Wood"?_
-
-### Rationalizing
-
-It is a good practice to have minimum varieties of items so that you keep
-minimum stock, housekeeping is simpler etc. When you are planning a new
-product and you want to know if you are already purchasing a part in some
-other product, the item codes will help you quickly determine if you are using
-a similar raw material in another product.
-
-We believe if you do this small investment, it will help you rationalize
-things as your business grows, though its okay not to codify if you have less
-items.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c75a3ae9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Price
-
-Item Price is the record in which you can log selling and buying rate of an item.
-
-There are two ways to reach to new Item Price form.
-
-> Selling/Buying/Stock > Setup > Item Price > New Item Price
-
-Or
-
-> Item > Add/Edit Prices > Click on "+" > New Item Price
-
-Following are the steps to create new Item Price.
-
-Step 1: Select Price List
-
-You can create multiple Price List in ERPNext to track Selling and Buying Price List of an item separtely. Also if item's selling prices id changing based on territory, or due to other criteria, you can create multiple selling Price List for it.
-
-
-
-On selection of Price List, its currency and for selling or buying property will be fetched as well.
-
-To have Item Price fetching in the sales or purchase transaction, you should have Price List id selected in the transaction, just above Item table.
-
-Step 2: Select Item
-
-Select item for which Item Price record is to be created. On selection of Item Code, Item Name and Description will be fetched as well.
-
-
-
-Step 3: Enter Rate
-
-Enter selling/buying rate of an item in Price List currency.
-
-
-
-Step 4: Save Item Price
-
-To check all Item Price together, go to:
-
-> Stock > Main Report > Itemwise Price List Rate
-
-You will find option to create new Item Price record (+) in this report as well.
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fa9ff234..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Valuation Fifo And Moving Average
-
-### How are Items Valued?
-
-One of the major features of any inventory system is that you can find out the
-value of any item based on its historic or average price. You can also find
-the value of all your items for your balance sheet.
-
-Valuation is important because:
-
- * The buying price may fluctuate.
- * The value may change because of some process (value add).
- * The value may change because of decay, loss etc.
-
-You may encounter these terms, so lets clarify:
-
- * Rate: Rate at which the transaction takes place.
- * Valuation Rate: Rate at which the items value is set for your valuation.
-
-There are two major ways in which ERPNext values your items.
-
- * **FIFO (First In First Out):** In this system, ERPNext assumes that you will consume / sell those Items first which you bought first. For example, if you buy an Item at price X and then after a few days at price Y, whenever you sell your Item, ERPNext will reduce the quantity of the Item priced at X first and then Y.
-
-
-
- * **Moving Average:** In this method, ERPNext assumes that the value of the item at any point is the average price of the units of that Item in stock. For example, if the value of an Item is X in a Warehouse with quantity Y and another quantity Y1 is added to the Warehouse at cost X1, the new value X2 would be:
-
-> New Value X2 = (X * Y + X1 * Y1) / (Y + Y1)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 86a0da29..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Variants
-
-### What are Variants?
-
-A Item Variant is a version of a Item, such as differing sizes or differing colours (like a _blue_ t-shirt in size _small_ rather then just a t-shirt).
-Without Item variants, you would have to treat the _small, medium_ and _large_ versions of a t-shirt as three separate Items;
-Item variants let you treat the _small, medium_ and _large_ versions of a t-shirt as variations of the one Item 't-shirt'.
-
-### Using Variants
-
-Variants can be based on two things
-
-1. Item Attributes
-1. Manufacturers
-
-### Variants Based on Item Attributes
-
-To use Item Variants in ERPNext, create an Item and check 'Has Variants'.
-
-* The Item shall then be referred to as a so called 'Template'. Such a Template is not identical to a regular 'Item' any longer. For example it (the Template) can not be used directly in any Transactions (Sales Order, Delivery Note, Purchase Invoice) itself. Only the Variants of an Item (_blue_ t-shirt in size _small)_ can be practically used in such. Therefore it would be ideal to decide whether an item 'Has Variants' or not directly when creating it.
-
-
-
-On selecting 'Has Variants' a table shall appear. Specify the variant attributes for the Item in the table.
-In case the attribute has Numeric Values, you can specify the range and increment values here.
-
-
-
-> Note: You cannot make Transactions against a 'Template'
-
-To create 'Item Variants' against a 'Template' select 'Make Variants'
-
-
-
-
-
-To learn more about setting Attributes Master check [Item Attributes](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.html)
-
-### Variants Based on Manufacturers
-
-To setup variants based on Manufactueres, in your Item template, set "Variants Based On" as "Manufacturers"
-
-
-
-When you make a new Variant, the system will prompt you to select a Manufacturer. You can also optionally put in a Manufacturer Part Number
-
-
-
-The naming of the variant will be the name (ID) of the template Item with a number suffix. e.g. "ITEM000" will have variant "ITEM000-1"
-
-### Update Variants Based on Template
-To update the value in the variants items from the template item, select the respective fields first in the Item Variant Settings page. After that system will update the value of that fields in the variants if that values has been changed in the template item.
-
-To set the fields Goto Stock > Item Variant Settings
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/purchase-details.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/purchase-details.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4e0ada4e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/purchase-details.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Warranty
-
-To track a warranty period, it is necessary that the Item is a serialized Item. When this Item is delivered, the delivery date and the expiry period is saved in the serial number master. Through the serial number master you can track the warranty status.
-
-A warranty means a guarantee or a promise which provides assurance by one party to the other party which allows for a legal remedy if that promise is not true or followed. A warranty period is a time period in which a purchased product may be returned or exchanged.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/reorder.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/reorder.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c710e5d0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/reorder.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Re-order Level & Re-order Qty
-
-The **Re-order Level** is the point at which stock on a particular item has diminished to a point where it needs to be replenished. To order based on Re-order level can avoid shortages. Re-order level can be determined based on the lead time and the average daily consumption.
-
-You can update Re-order Level and Re-order Qty for an Item in the Auto Re-order section.
-
-For example, you can set your reorder level of Motherboard at 10. When there are only 10 Motherboards remaining in stock, the system will either automatically create a Material Request in your ERPNext account.
-
-**Re-order quantity** is the quantity to order, so that the sum of ordering cost and holding cost is at its minimum.The re-order quantity is based on the minimum order quantity specified by the supplier and many other factors.
-
-For example, If reorder level is 100 items, your reorder quantity may not necessarily be 100 items. The Reorder quantity can be greater than or equal to reorder level. It may depend upon lead time, discount, transportation and average daily consumption.
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/material-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/material-request.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9b3c0e60..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/material-request.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-
-# Material Request
-
-A Material Request is a simple document identifying a requirement of a set of
-Items (products or services) for a particular reason.
-
-
-
-To generate a Material Request manually go to:
-
-> Stock > Documents > Material Request > New
-
-#### Creating Material Request
-
-
-
-A Material Request can be generated:
-
- * Automatically from a Sales Order.
- * Automatically when the Projected Quantity of an Item in stores reaches a particular level.
- * Automatically from your Bill of Materials if you use Production Plan to plan your manufacturing activities.
- * If your Items are inventory items, you must also mention the Warehouse where you expect these Items to be delivered. This helps to keep track of the [Projected Quantity](/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.html) for this Item.
-
-A Material Request can be of type:
-
-* Purchase - If the request material is to be purchased.
-* Material Transfer - If the requested material is to be shifted from one warehouse to another.
-* Material Issue - If the requested material is to be Issued.
-* Manufacture - If the requested material is to be Produced.
-* Customer Provided - If the requested material is to be provided by Customer.
-
-The User can also raise a [Request For Quotation](/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.html) against a Material Request. To create a Request For Quotation the user can click on 'Make'.
-
-> Info: Material Request is not mandatory. It is ideal if you have centralized
-buying so that you can collect this information from various departments.
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 46e3cbb9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-# Opening Stock
-
-Opening Stock is the Stock quantity in the beginning of every accounting year of an organisation. The closing Stock with the prior accounting year becomes the opening Stock with the existing accounting year.
- -Opening Stock can be done for serialized Items as well as non-serialized Items.To update opening stock for non-serialized Item, you should perform Stock Reconciliation. For serialised Item, you can make Stock Entry of type Material Receipt. - -> Stock > Stock Reconciliation > New Stock Reconciliation - -In both cases, you should enter "Difference/Expense Account" as **Temporary Opening** account. On submission of the document, system will debit Warehouse account which is an asset account and credit difference/expense account. Before making these entries, make sure you have enabled "Perpetual Inventory" by checking Stock Settings page. - -If you are not making opening Stock Entry, you can select "Stock Adjustment" account in Difference/Expense Account field which is an expense account. - -To understand Opening Stock for serialized Items visit [Stock Reconciliation](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html) - - -
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 24dd3f67..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-# Projected Quantity
-
-Projected Quantity is the level of stock that is predicted for a particular
-Item, based on the current stock levels and other requirements. It is the
-quantity of gross inventory that includes supply and demand in the past which
-is done as part of the planning process.
-
-The projected inventory is used by the planning system to monitor the reorder
-point and to determine the reorder quantity. The projected Quantity is used by
-the planning engine to monitor the safety stock levels. These levels are
-maintained to serve unexpected demands.
-
-Having a tight control of the projected inventory is crucial to determine
-shortages and to calculate the right order quantity.
-
-
-
-
-> Projected Qty = Actual Qty + Planned Qty + Requested Qty + Ordered Qty -
-Reserved Qty
-
- * Actual Qty: Quantity available in the warehouse.
- * Planned Qty: Quantity, for which, Work Order has been raised, but is pending to be manufactured.
- * Requested Qty: Quantity requested for purchase, but not ordered.
- * Ordered Qty: Quantity ordered for purchase, but not received.
- * Reserved Qty: Quantity ordered for sale, but not delivered.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-receipt.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-receipt.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1542b262..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-receipt.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-
-# Purchase Receipt
-
-Purchase Receipts are made when you accept material from your Supplier usually
-against a Purchase Order.
-
-You can also accept Purchase Receipts directly ( Set Purchase Order
-Required as “No” in Global Defaults).
-
-You can make a Purchase Receipt directly from:
-
-> Stock > Purchase Receipt > New Purchase Receipt
-
-or from a “Submitted” Purchase Order, by clicking on “Make Purchase Receipt”.
-
-
-
-### Rejections
-
-In the Purchase Receipt, you are required to enter whether all the materials
-you receive are of acceptable quality (in case you check). If you have any
-rejections, update the “Rejected Quantity” column in the Items table.
-
-If you reject, you are required to enter a “Rejected Warehouse” to indicate
-where you are storing the rejected Items.
-
-### Quality Inspections
-
-If for certain Items, it is mandatory to record Quality Inspections (if you
-have set it in your Item master), you will need to update the “Quality
-Inspection No” (QA No) column. The system will only allow you to “Submit” the
-Purchase Receipt if you update the “Quality Inspection No”.
-
-### UOM Conversions
-
-If your Purchase Order for an Item is in a different Unit of Measure (UOM)
-than what you stock (Stock UOM), then you will need to update the “UOM
-Conversion Factor”.
-
-### Currency Conversions
-
-Since the incoming Item affects the value of your inventory, it is important
-to convert it into your base Currency, if you have ordered in another
-Currency. You will need to update the Currency Conversion Rate if applicable.
-
-### Taxes and Valuation
-
-Some of your taxes and charges may affect your Items value. For example, a Tax
-may not be added to your Item’s valuation, because if you sell the Item, you
-will have to add the tax at that time. So make sure to mark all your taxes in
-the Taxes and Charges table correctly for accurate valuation.
-
-### Serial Numbers and Batches
-
-If your Item is serialized or batched, you will have to enter Serial Number
-and Batch in the Item's table. You are allowed to enter multiple Serial Numbers
-in one row (each on a separate line) and you must enter the same number of
-Serial Numbers as the quantity. You must enter each Batch number on a separate
-line.
-
-* * *
-
-#### What happens when the Purchase Receipt is “Submitted”?
-
-A Stock Ledger Entry is created for each Item adding the Item in the Warehouse
-by the “Accepted Quantity” If you have rejections, a Stock Ledger Entry is
-made for each Rejection. The “Pending Quantity” is updated in the Purchase
-Order.
-
-* * *
-
-#### Adding value to your Items post Purchase Receipt:
-
-Some times, certain expenses that add value to your purchased Items are known
-only after a while. Common example is, if you are importing the Items, you
-will come to know of Customs Duty etc only when your “Clearing Agent” sends
-you a bill. If you want to attribute this cost to your purchased Items, you
-will have to use the Landed Cost Wizard. Why “Landed Cost”? Because it
-represents the charges that you paid when it landed in your possession.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-return.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-return.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 9fdf962f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-return.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-# Purchase Return
-
-ERPNext has an option for products that are need to be returned to the
-supplier. This may be on account of a number of reasons like defects in goods,
-quality not matching, the buyer not needing the stock, etc.
-
-You can create a Purchase Return by simply making a Purchase Receipt with negative quantity.
-
-First open the original Purchase Receipt, against which supplier delivered the items.
-
-
-
-Then click on "Make Purchase Return", it will open a new Purchase Receipt with "Is Return" checked, items and taxes with negative amount.
-
-
-
-On submission of Return Purchase Return, system will decrease item qty from the mentioned warehouse. To maintain correct stock valuation, stock balance will also go up according to the original purchase rate of the returned items.
-
-
-
-If Perpetual Inventory enabled, system will also post accounting entry against warehouse account to sync warehouse account balance with stock balance as per Stock Ledger.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/retain-sample-stock.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/retain-sample-stock.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c37fcb62..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/retain-sample-stock.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Retain Sample Stock
-
-A sample of a batch of starting material, packaging material or finished product is stored for the purpose of being analyzed should the need arise later.
-
-### Set Sample Retention Warehouse in Stock Settings
-
-It is advised to create a new warehouse just for retaining samples and not use it in production.
-
-
-
-### Enable Retain Sample in Item master
-
-Check Retain Sample and Maximum allowed samples in Item Master for a batch. Please note that Retain Sample is based
-on Batch hence Has Batch No should be enabled as well.
-
-
-
-### Stock Entry
-
-Whenever a Stock Entry is created with the purpose as Material Receipt, for items which have Retain Sample enabled, the Sample Quantity can be set during that Stock Entry. Sample quantity cannot be more than the Maximum sample quantity set in Item Master.
-
-
-
-On submission of this Stock Entry, button 'Make Retention Stock Entry' will be available to make another Stock Entry for the transfer of sample items from the mentioned batch to the retention warehouse set in Stock Settings. On clicking this button it will direct you to new Stock Entry with all the information, verify the information and click Submit.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/sales-return.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/sales-return.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 820a73d1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/sales-return.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sales Return
-
-Goods sold being returned is quite a common practice in business. They could
-be returned by the customer on quality issues, non-delivery on agreed date, or
-any other reason.
-
-In ERPNext, you can create a Sales Return by simply making a Delivery Note / Sales Invoice with negative quantity.
-
-First open the original Delivery Note / Sales Invoice, against which customer returned the items.
-
-
-
-Then click on "Make Sales Return", it will open a new Delivery Note with "Is Return" checked, items and taxes with negative amount.
-
-
-
-You can also create the return entry against original Sales Invoice, to return stock along with credit note, check "Update Stock" option in Return Sales Invoice.
-
-
-
-On submission of Return Delivery Note / Sales Invoice, system will increase stock balance in the mentioned warehouse. To maintain correct stock valuation, stock balance will go up according to the original purchase rate of the returned items.
-
-
-
-In case of Return Sales Invoice, Customer account will be credited and associated income and tax account will be debited.
-
-If Perpetual Inventory enabled, system will also post accounting entry against warehouse account to sync warehouse account balance with stock balance as per Stock Ledger.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d8f82134..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-# Serial No
-
-As we discussed in the **Item** section, if an **Item** is _serialized_, a
-**Serial Number** (Serial No) record is maintained for each quantity of that
-**Item**. This information is helpful in tracking the location of the Serial
-No, its warranty and end-of-life (expiry) information.
-
-**Serial Nos** are also useful to maintain fixed assets. **Maintenance Schedules** can also be created against serial numbers for planning and scheduling maintenance activity for these assets (if they require maintenance).
-
-You can also track from which **Supplier** you purchased the **Serial No** and
-to which **Customer** you have sold it. The **Serial No** status will tell you
-its current inventory status.
-
-If your Item is _serialized_ you will have to enter the Serial Nos in the
-related column with each Serial No in a new line.
-You can maintain single units of serialized items using Serial Number.
-
-
-
-### Serial Nos and Inventory
-
-Inventory of an Item can only be affected if the Serial No is transacted via a
-Stock transaction (Stock Entry, Purchase Receipt, Delivery Note, Sales
-Invoice). When a new Serial No is created directly, its warehouse cannot be
-set.
-
-
-
-* The Status is set based on Stock Entry.
-
-* Only Serial Numbers with status 'Available' can be delivered.
-
-* Serial Nos can automatically be created from a Stock Entry or Purchase Receipt. If you mention Serial No in the Serial Nos column, it will automatically create those serial Nos.
-
-* If in the Item Master, the Serial No Series is mentioned, you can leave the Serial No column blank in a Stock Entry / Purchase Receipt and Serial Nos will automatically be set from that series.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e8da5342..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index b21c4f92..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-stock-settings
-item-group
-item-attribute
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 634c859c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Attribute
-
-You can define Attributes and attribute values for your Item Variants here.
-
-
-
-#### Non Numeric Attributes
-
-* For Non Numeric Attributes, specify attributes values along with its abbreviation in the Attribute Value Table.
-
-
-
-#### Numeric Attributes
-
-* If your attribute is Numeric, select Numeric Values
-* Specify the Range and the Increment Value
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d76d6a6d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Group
-
-Item Group is the classification category. Depending on the type of product,
-categorise it under its respective field. If the product is
-service oriented, name it under the group head - service. If the
-product is used as a raw-material, you have to name it under the Raw-material
-category. In case, your product is used only in trading, you can categorise it
-under Trading.
-
-
-
-### Create a Item Group
-
-* Select an Item Group under which you wish to create the group.
-
-* Select 'Add Child'
-
-
-
-### Delete an Item Group
-
-* Select the Item Group you want to delete.
-
-* Select 'delete'
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/stock-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 81c2e4c5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Stock Settings
-
-You can set default settings for your stock related transactions here.
-
-
-
-### Clean HTML Description
-
-Usually descriptions are copy-pasted from a website or Word / PDF file and they contain a lot of embedded style. This messes up the Print view of your invoices or quotes.
-
-To fix this, you can check "Convert Item Description to Clean HTML" in Stock Settings. This will ensure that when you save your Items, their descriptions will be cleaned up.
-
-If you want control your description views and llow any HTML to be embedded, you can uncheck this property.
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ba527fc1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-
-# Stock Entry
-
-A Stock Entry is a simple document that lets you record Item movement from a
-Warehouse, to a Warehouse and between Warehouses.
-
-To make a Stock Entry you have to go to:
-
-> Stock > Stock Entry > New
-
-
-
-Stock Entries can be made for the following purposes:
-
-* Material Issue - If the material is being issued. (Outgoing Material)
-* Material Receipt - If the material is being received. (Incoming Material)
-* Material Transfer - If the material is being moved from one warehouse to another.
-* Material Transfer for Manufacturing - If the material being transfered is for Manufacturing Process.
-* Manufacture - If the Material is being received from a Manufacturing/Production Operation.
-* Repack - If the Original item/items is being repacked into new item/items.
-* Subcontract - If the Material is being issued for a sub-contract activity.
-
-In the Stock Entry you have to update the Items table with all your
-transactions. For each row, you must enter a “Source Warehouse” or a “Target
-Warehouse” or both (if you are recording a movement).
-
-
-
-**Additional Costs:**
-
-If the stock entry is an incoming entry i.e any item is receiving at a target warehouse, you can add related additional costs (like Shipping Charges, Customs Duty, Operating Costs etc) associated with the process. The additional costs will be considered to calculate valuation rate of the items.
-
-To add additional costs, enter the description and amount of the cost in the Additional Costs table.
-
-
-
-The added additional costs will be distributed among the receiving items (where the target warehouse mentioned) proportionately based on Basic Amount of the items. And the distributed additional cost will be added to the basic rate of the item, to calculate valuation rate.
-
-
-
-If perpetual inventory system is enabled, additional costs will be booked in "Expense Included In Valuation" account.
-
-
-
-
-> **Note:** To update Stock from a spreadsheet, see [Stock Reconciliation]({{doc_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-how-to.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-how-to.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f51c3bbc..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-how-to.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-
-# Stock How To
-
-This page contains most frequently asked questions on Stocks.
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 799d2dd4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tools
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 3aca9b75..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-packing-slip
-quality-inspection
-landed-cost-voucher
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3cf167a3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-# Landed Cost Voucher
-
-Landed Cost is the total cost of a product to reach the product at the buyer’s door. Landed costs include the original cost of the item, complete shipping costs, customs duties, taxes, insurance and currency conversion fees etc. All of these components might not be applicable in every shipment, but relevant components must be considered as a part of the landed cost.
-
-> To understand landed cost better, let’s take an example based on our daily lives. You need to purchase a new washing machine for your home. Before making actual purchase, you probably do some investigation to know the best price. In this process, you often found a better deal from a store which is long away from your home. But you should also consider shipping cost while buying from that store. Total cost including transportation might be more than the price you get in your nearby store. In that case you will choose to buy from your nearest store, as landed cost of the item is cheaper in the nearest store.
-
-Similarly in business, identifying landed cost for a item / product is very crucial, as it helps to decide selling cost of that item and impacts company’s profitability. Hence all applicable landed cost charges should be included in item’s valuation rate.
-
-According to the [Third-Party Logistics Study](http://www.3plstudy.com/), only 45% of the respondents stated that they use Landed Cost extensively. The main reasons of not using Landed Cost are unavailability of necessary data (49%), lack of right tools (48%), do not have sufficient time (31%) and not sure how to apply landed cost (27%).
-
-### Landed Cost via Purchase Receipt
-
-In ERPNext, you can add landed cost related charges in “Taxes and Charges” table while creating Purchase Receipt (PR). You should add those charges for “Total and Valuation” or “Valuation”. Charges which are payable to the same supplier from whom you are buying the items, should be tagged as “Total and Valuation”. Otherwise if applicable charges are payable to a 3rd party, it should be tagged as “Valuation”. On submission of PR, system will calculate landed cost of all items, considering those charges and that landed cost will be considered to calculate item’s valuation rate (based on FIFO / Moving Average method).
-
-But in reality, while making Purchase Receipt we might not know all the charges which are applicable for landed cost. Your transporter can send the invoice after 1 month, but there is no point in waiting for booking Purchase Receipt till then. Companies who imports their products / parts, pays a huge amount as Customs Duty. And generally they get invoices from Customs Department after a period of time. In these cases, “Landed Cost Voucher” becomes handy, as it allows you to add those additional charges on a later date, and to update landed cost of purchased items.
-
-### Landed Cost Voucher
-
-You can update landed cost any time in the future via Landed Cost Voucher.
-
-> Stock > Tools > Landed Cost Voucher
-
-In the document, you can select multiple Purchase Receipts and fetch all items from those Purchase Receipts. Then you should add applicable charges in “Taxes and Charges” table. You can easily delete an item if the added charges is not applicable to that item. The added charges are proportionately distributed among all the items based their amount.
-
-
-
-### What happens on submission?
-
-1. On submission of Landed Cost Voucher, the applicable landed cost charges are updated in Purchase Receipt Item table.
-
-2. Valuation Rate of items are recalculated based on new landed cost.
-
-3. If you are using “Perpetual Inventory”, the system will post general ledger entries to correct Stock-in-Hand balance. It will debit (increase) corresponding “warehouse account” and credit (decrease) “Expense Included in Valuation” account. If items are already delivered, the Cost-of-Goods-Sold (CoGS) value has been booked as per old valuation rate. Hence, general ledger entries are reposted for all future outgoing entries of associated items, to correct CoGS value.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/packing-slip.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c3e97ea0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Packing Slip
-
-A packing slip is a document listing the items in a shipment. Usually attached to the goods delivered.
-While Shipping a product 'Draft' for Delivery Notes are created.
-You can make a Packing Slip from these Delivery Notes (Draft)
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
deleted file mode 100755
index aa8b63f8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Inspection
-
-In ERPNext, you can mark your incoming or outgoing products for Quality
-Inspection. To enable ERPNext to perform this function, go to :
-
-> Stock > Quality Inspection > New
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/warehouse.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/warehouse.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2dc81e41..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/warehouse.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-# Warehouse
-
-A warehouse is a commercial building for storage of goods. Warehouses are used
-by manufacturers, importers, exporters, wholesalers, transport businesses,
-customs, etc. They are usually large plain buildings in industrial areas of
-cities, towns, and villages. They mostly have loading docks to load and unload
-goods from trucks.
-
-The terminology of 'Warehouse" in ERPNext is a bit broader though and maybe can be
-regarded as "storage locations". For example you can create a sub-Warehouse which
-practically is a shelf inside your actual location.
-This can become quite a detailed Tree like >Warehouse >Room >Row >Shelf >Box
-
-To go to Warehouse, click on Stock and go to Warehouse under Setup. You
-could also switch to 'Tree' View or simply type warehouse tree in the awesome bar.
-
-
-
-In ERPNext, every Warehouse must belong to a specific company, to maintain
-company wise stock balance. In order to do so each Warehouse is linked with an
-Account in the Chart of Accounts (by default of the the same name as the Warehouse
-itself) which captures the monetary equivalent of the goods or materials stored
-in that specific warehouse. If you have a more detailed Warehouse Tree as the one
-described above most likely it's a good idea to link the sub-locations (>room >row >Shelf, ...)
-to the account of the actual Warehouse (the root Warehouse of that Tree) as most
-scenarios do not require to account for value of stock items per Shelf or Box.
-
-Warehouses are saved with their respective company’s abbreviations. This facilitates
-identifying which Warehouse belongs to which company, at a glance.
-
-You can include user restrictions for these Warehouses. In case you do not
-wish a particular user to operate on a particular Warehouse, you can refrain
-the user from accessing that Warehouse.
-
-> Note: ERPNext system maintains stock balance for every distinct combination
-of Item and Warehouse. Thus you can get stock balance for any specific Item in
-a particular Warehouse on any particular date.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bc5c0d1e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Support
-
-Great customer support and maintenance is at the heart of any successful small
-business. ERPNext gives you the tools to track all incoming requests and issues
-from your customers so that you can respond quickly. Your database of incoming
-queries will also help you track where the biggest opportunities are for
-improvements.
-
-In this module, you can track incoming queries from your email using Support
-Ticket. You can keep track on Customer Issues raised by Customers on specific
-Serial No and respond to them based on their warranty and other information.
-You can also make Maintenance Schedules for Serial Nos and keep a record of
-all Maintenance Visits made to your Customers.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index eaff69e8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-issue
-warranty-claim
-maintenance-visit
-maintenance-schedule
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/issue.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/issue.md
deleted file mode 100755
index abc6d45d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/issue.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-
-# Issue
-
-Issue is an incoming query from your Customer, usually via email or
-from the “Contact” section of your website. (To fully integrate the Support
-Ticket to email, see the Email Settings section).
-
-> Tip: A dedicated support Email Address is a good way to integrate incoming
-queries via email. For example, you can send support queries to ERPNext at
-support@erpnext.com and it will automatically create a Issue in the
-Frappe system.
-
-
-
-> Support > Issue > New Issue
-
-
-
-#### Discussion Thread
-
-When a new email is fetched from your mailbox, a new Issue record is
-created and an automatic reply is sent to the sender indicating the Support
-Ticket Number. The sender can send additional information to this email. All
-subsequent emails containing this Issue number in the subject will be
-added to this Issue thread. The sender can also add attachments to
-the email.
-
-Issue maintains all the emails which are sent back and forth against
-this issue in the system so that you can track what transpired between the
-sender and the person responding.
-
-#### Status
-
-When a new Issue is created, its status is “Open”, when it is
-replied, its status becomes “Waiting for Reply”. If the sender replies back
-its status again becomes “Open”.
-
-#### Closing
-
-You can either “Close” the Issue manually by clicking on “Close
-Ticket” in the toolbar or if its status is “Waiting For Reply” . If the sender
-does not reply in 7 days, then the Issue closes automatically.
-
-#### Allocation
-
-You can allocate the Issue by using the “Assign To” feature in the
-left sidebar. This will add a new To Do to the user and also send a message
-indicating that this Issue is allocated.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-schedule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-schedule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c1a5c77f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-schedule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-# Maintenance Schedule
-
-All machines require regular maintenance, specially those that contain a lot
-of moving parts, so if you are in the business of maintaining those or have
-some of them in your own premises, this is a useful tool to plan a calendar of
-activities for its maintenance.
-
-If the Customer Issue refers to “Breakdown Maintenance”, this refers to
-“Preventive Maintenance”.
-
-To create a new Maintenance Schedule go to:
-
-> Support > Maintenance Schedule > New Maintenance Schedule
-
-
-
-In the Maintenance Schedule, there are two sections:
-
-In the first section, you select the Items for which you want to generate the
-schedule and set how frequently you want to plan a visit or a maintenance.
-These can be optionally fetched from a Sales Order. After selecting the Items,
-“Save” the record.
-
-The second section contains the maintenance activities planned in the
-schedule. “Generate Schedule” will generate a separate row for each
-maintenance activity.
-
-Each Item in a Maintenance Schedule is allocated to a Sales Person.
-
-When the document is “Submitted” Calendar events are created in the User of
-the Sales Person for each maintenance.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-visit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-visit.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3c61f79e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-visit.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-# Maintenance Visit
-
-A Maintenance Visit is a record of a visit made by an engineer to a
-Customer’s premise usually against a Customer Issue. You can create a new
-Maintenance Visit from:
-
-> Support > Maintenance Visit > New Maintenance Visit
-
-
-
-The Maintenance Visit contains information about the:
-
- * Customer.
- * The Items that were inspected / maintenance activity was carried out on.
- * Details of actions taken.
- * The person who carried out the actions.
- * Feedback from the Customer.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/support_reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/support_reports.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f7a8027b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/support_reports.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Support Reports
-
-
-
-### Support Hours
-This report provides the information about the time slot along with the count of issues that has been reported during the slot daywise.
-
-> Support > Reports > Support Hours
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/warranty-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/warranty-claim.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dc8aae89..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/warranty-claim.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-# Warranty Claim
-
-If you are selling **Items** under warranty or if you have sold and extended
-service contract like the Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC), your **Customer**
-may call you about an issue or a break-down and give you the Serial No of this
-Item.
-
-To record this, you can create a new **Warranty Claim** and add the
-**Customer** and **Item** / **Serial No**. The system will then automatically
-fetch the Serial No’s details and indicate whether this is under warranty or
-AMC.
-
-You must also add a description of the **Customer**’s issue and assign it to
-the person who needs to look into solving the issue.
-
-To create a new **Warranty Claim**:
-
-> Support > Warranty Claim > New Warranty Claim
-
-
-
-If a Customer visit is required to address the issue, you can create a new
-Maintenance Visit record from this.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/Global-search.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/Global-search.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f7e00122..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/Global-search.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
-# Global Search
-
-Global search is a word-processing operation in which a complete computer file or set of files is searched for every occurrence of a particular word or other sequence of characters.
-
-We have made the Awesome Bar of ERPNext lot more powerful by adding Global Search feature.
-Global Search helps users find information quickly. It’s located in the upper right-hand corner in ERPNext. Simply entering a few characters in the Search will show results from several different record types (Contact, Customer, Issues etc.) related to that keyword. You can also customise the fields based on which search will be shown.
-
-From v11, multi search term/keywords separated by & operator is supported, refer to the following use cases:
-
-- Input "apple & ipod" can return docs with one field contain Apple and the other contains iPpod( PO's vendor and item).
-- Input "iphone & ipod" can return target docs which contain both item iPhone and iPod (child table items).
-- Input "iphone & black" can return item with description contains both iPhone and black(long text field).
-- Input 'foo & bar" can return any docs with both tags foo and bar assigned.(special long text field _usertags).
-
-### Using Awesome Bar for Global Search.
-
-
-
-### Enable Global Search for fields in a Doctype.
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-attachments-to-outgoing-messages.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-attachments-to-outgoing-messages.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 93152ae3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-attachments-to-outgoing-messages.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-#Adding Attachments to Outgoing Messages
-
-ERPNext has in-built file manager. Click [here](/docs/user/videos/learn/file-manager.html) to learn more on how attachments are managed in ERPNext.
-
-If you have file attached to the document (say Purchase Order), and same file needs to be emailed as attachment, following is how you can achieve it.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-file-as-a-attachment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-file-as-a-attachment.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 169181e4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-file-as-a-attachment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-
-#Adding File as a Attachment
-
-ERPNext allows to attach files with documents. User with a read permission on particular document will also be able to access files attached with it.
-
-###Attach New File
-
-There are several ways to attach file to the document.
-
-####From Browser
-
-
-
-####By drag and drop
-
-
-
-Click on Attach to browse and select the file.
-
-####Link
-
-If you use separate server for files, or use online service like Dropbox, you can attach file by providing link of a particular file.
-
-
-
-`For hosted users, limit of 5 MB is applied on file size.`
-
-To ensure there are not many files attached to a document, which can affect your accounts performance, you can set limit as how many files can be attached to a particular document. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.html) to learn more about it.
-
-####File Manager
-
-Check following link to learn how files are managed in ERPNext.
-
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 609da8b8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-#Bulk Rename
-
-Using renaming tool, you can to rectify/change multiple document ids at once. This tool is only accessible to the User who has System Manager role assigned.
-
-###Rename Tool
-
-You can rename ids of upto 500 records at a time. Following are step to bulk rename bulk records. Let's assume we are renaming Item Codes for the existing items.
-
-#### Step 1: Open Excel File
-
-In a spreadsheet file, enter old Item IDs in the first column, and new Item Ids in the second column. Save spreadsheet file in a CSV format.
-
-
-
-#### Step 2: Upload Data File
-
-To upload data file go to,
-
-`Setup > Data > Rename Tool`
-
-Select DocType which you want to rename. Here DocType will be Item. Then Browse and Upload data file.
-
-
-
-{next}
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-update.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-update.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a9872f8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-update.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
-
-#Bulk Editing in Existing Documents
-
-Bulk Update tool helps you in over-writing value of a specific field in existing records.
-
-
-
-If you would like to overwrite value of a field based on certain condition you can use bulk update with conditions.
-
-Lets say you have a customer group named 'Commercial' and you would like to change that to 'Retail' for all customer records.
-
-Below are the steps to do so...
-
-#### Step 1: Open Bulk Update
-
-You can open bulk update tool by typing and selecting Bulk Update in Awesome Bar or Search Bar at the top.
-
-#### Step 2: Select the DocType
-
-All the Document Types are listed in 'Document Type' field.
-
-Select Customer in 'Document Type' field.
-
-#### Step 3: Select the field
-
-After selecting the Documnet Type, all the fields in that document are listed in 'Field'. Choose the field which you would like to update.
-
-You can choose 'customer_group'.
-
-#### Step 4: Provide the new value
-
-Type the new value in 'Update Value' field.
-
-Type Retail in Update Value field.
-
-#### Step 5: Add Condition if required
-
-You can add the condition here. If the existing records satisfy this condition, only then the values are overwritten.
-
-Conditions should be entered in SQL format.
-
-* You can use a **EQUAL** condition: customer_group = 'Commercial' in Condition field.
-
-* You can use **LIKE** condition: customer_group LIKE 'Commercial'
-
-* You can use multiple conditions with **AND**: customer_group = 'Commercial' AND territory = 'Karnataka'
-
-* You can use **OR** conditions: customer_group = 'Commercial' OR customer_group = 'Individual'
-
-* You can use **NOT** condition: NOT customer_group = 'Commercial'
-
-Enter customer_group = 'Commercial' in condition field.
-
-
-#### Step 6: Add a Limit
-
-There maybe thousands of record which meet the condition. It is better to update maximum 500 records at a time.
-
-Enter 10 in Limit field.
-
-#### Step 7: Click on 'Update'
-
-Finally click on Update button and check the records to make sure values are updated.
-
-You can also watch a [Video Tutorial on Bulk Update Tool](http://erpnext:8000/docs/user/videos/learn/bulk-update.md).
-
-> Be cautious while using the Bulk Update Tool as data is overwritten. Use Limit feature and update values in batches.
-
-{next}
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/check-link-between-documents.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/check-link-between-documents.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b242a363..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/check-link-between-documents.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-#Checking Link Between Documents
-
-Links option shows one document is linked to which other documents. Check Menu for the Links options.
-
-
-
-####Scenario
-
-If you need that against Sales Order, which Delivery Note and Sales Invoice has been created, you should open Sales Order document, and check Links. Same way, you can also check Purchase Order, and find which Purchase Receipt and Purchase Ivoice is linked with it.
-
-####How It Works?
-
-When you check Links for a Sales Order, it lists all the record where this Sales Order ID is linked. When Delivery Note is created against Sales Order, then Sales Order link is updated in the Delivery Note Item table.
-
-####Backward Links
-
-If I check Links in the Purchase Receipt, will it list Purchase Order from which this Purchase Receipt was created?
-
-Links only shows forward linkages. For the backward links, you should check current document itself. In the Purchase Receipt Item table table, you can check which Purchase Order it is linked to.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/copy-pasting-multiple-records-from-excel.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/copy-pasting-multiple-records-from-excel.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a6b231a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/copy-pasting-multiple-records-from-excel.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-
-#Copy Pasting Multiple Records From Excel
-
-From v11, it is now possible to copy and paste multi records into child table field in the form by simply follow the steps below:
-
-1. Prepare the source data in Excel or text editor with each column separated by tab.
-
-
-
-2. Drag to select the records , and click the copy menu button or by Ctrl + C (Cmd + C) for
-
- Case 1. First line as column header, both field name and label supported, hidden columns can be copied
-
- Case 2. No column header, the data will directly map to the visible columns
-
-
-
-3. Place the cursor to the target input field of the child table, paste it by Ctrl + V. Uunlike the import via upload file feature which also can batch input the child table, this copy & paste feature will trigger field change event automatically. In other word if only item_code is pasted, the item price, qty and other item code related fields will be auto populated just like user manually input item code and press ENTER. on the other hand, for performance consideration, less than 100 records per paste is allowed.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/delete-submitted-document.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/delete-submitted-document.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ae52b886..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/delete-submitted-document.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-
-#Delete Submitted Document
-
-To be able to delete Submitted document, you should first Cancel. Once canceled, you can delete that document from Menu or from the List View of that Document Type.
-
-If document which needs to be deleted is also linked to other documents, then you should first Cancel document those document as well. For example if you need to delete Sales Order, but Delivery Note and Sales Invoice has already been created against it. Then you should first cancel and delete documents in reverse order, i.e. Sales Invoice, Delivery Note and then Sales Order.
-
-Delete option is only visible to user having related permission. From Role Permission Manager, you can control and define Delete permission and Role for each Document Type.
-
-Following are step to delete submitted documents.
-
-####Step 1: Cancel Document
-
-You will find option to Cancel in the submitted document. If document is at draft stage, it can delete directly. Also if document is not submittable, but only save, it can be deleted directly.
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Delete Document
-
-After cancellation, go to Menu and click on Delete.
-
-
-
-####Step 3: Deleting from List
-
-For bulk deletion, you can select multiple Cancelled records and delete at once from the List View.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/duplicate-record.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/duplicate-record.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5bc89ea3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/duplicate-record.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-#Duplicate a Record
-
-Duplicate feature helps you to copy values of existing document into new document.
-
-####Scenario
-
-An electronic supplier receives a repeat order from an existing customer. Since new order will have details just like previous order, you should open previous order, and Duplciate it to create new order faster. On Duplicating, values of the previous transaction will be updated in a new document. You can make changes where needed and submit the document.
-
-You will find Copy option under:
-
-`Menu > Copy`
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4e98cfe6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
-
-{next}
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index df438436..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-adding-attachment-to-outgoing-messages
-check-link-between-documents
-delete-submitted-document
-duplicate-record
-adding-file-as-a-attachment
-merging-documents
-bulk-rename
-renaming-documents
-search-filter
-tree-master-renaming
-letter-head-in-the-report
-global-search
-copy-pasting-multiple-records-from-excel
-bulk-update
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/letter-head-in-the-report.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/letter-head-in-the-report.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 258900cb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/letter-head-in-the-report.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Letter Head in the Report's Print Format
-
-In the reports, Letter Head is fetched from the Company master. To have company's Letter Head fetched correctly in the report, please ensure that you have updated default Letter Head in the Company master.
-
-`Explore > Accounts > Company`
-
-
-
-In a Company master, if no Letter Head is set as default, then in the reports, Letter Head having Default field checked will be fetched.
-
-
-
-If you are managing multiple companies in a single ERPNext account, then ensure that for each Company, default Letter Head is set in the Company master.
-
-After updating Letter Head in the Company master, refresh your ERPNext account, and then check the print format of a report.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 807954c5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-#Merging Documents
-
-For a document, if you have two records which are identical, and meant for common purpose, you can merge them into one record.
-
-Following are step to merge documents. Let's assume we are merging two Accounts.
-
-#### Step 1: Go to Chart of Account
-
-`Accounts > Documents > Chart of Accounts`
-
-#### Step 2: Go to Account
-
-For an Account to be merged, click on the "Rename" option.
-
-
-
-#### Step 3: Merge Account
-
-In the New Name field, enter another account name with which this account will be merged. Check "Merge with existing" option. Then press 'Rename' button to merge.
-
-Following is how the merged account will appear in the Chart of Accounts master.
-
-
-
-###Effect of Merging
-
-After Account is merged, new name is updated in the existing transactions where old account was selected.
-
- Note: Group Account cannot be merged into Child Account and vice versa.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/renaming-documents.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/renaming-documents.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f5b6a01a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/renaming-documents.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
-
-#Renaming a Document
-
-Using Renaming feature, you can change ID of a master documents like Item, Warehouse, Accounts etc. Following are the steps to rename Item Code. Following same steps, you can rename other masters as well.
-
-#### 1. Go to Item
-
-`Stock > Documents > Item List > (Open Item to be renamed)`
-
-#### 2. Rename
-
-
-
-###Effect of Renaming
-
-Renaming document affects existing transaction where this record is selected. Consider given example, Item Code for a given item will be updated in the existing transaction as well.
-
-###See Also
-
-1. [Bulk Renaming](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.html)
-2. [Document Merging](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.html)
-
-**List of Renamable Documents**
-
-1. Contact
-2. Address
-3. Warehouse
-4. Supplier
-5. Customer
-6. User
-7. Sales Partner
-8. Project
-9. Cost Center
-10. Item Group
-11. Item
-12. Company
-13. Role
-14. Earning Type
-15. Note
-16. Serial No
-17. Account
-18. Territory
-19. Terms and Conditions
-20. Supplier Group
-21. Workstation
-22. Employee
-23. Sales Taxes and Charges Master
-24. Purchase Taxes and Charges Master
-25. Price List
-26. Party Type
-27. Mode of Payment
-28. Designation
-29. Department
-30. Deduction Type
-31. Customer Group
-32. Brand
-33. Branch
-34. Sales Person
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/search-filter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/search-filter.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 20bd6bd2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/search-filter.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-#Search Filter
-
-Search Filter option allow user to filter records based on value in the specific field of that document. Search Filters are available on the List View of Document Type and in the Report Builder.
-
-Each filter option has three fields.
-
-#### Field
-
-Select field of the document based on which you wish to filter records.
-
-
-
-
-#### Based On
-
-With Field, you will provide a value. In the based on field, you can define a criterion that when filter should be applied in record. It will be when value define for the field if filter is:
-
-
-
-#### Value
-
-A value should be entered in this field based on while records will be filtered. After filter is applied, records will be filtered based on it. And filter will shrunk under one field/button.
-
-
-
-
-You can apply multiple filters at a time. To remove specific filter, just click on cancelled (X) sign ahead of it.
-
-#### Ready Filters
-
-From the list views, you can also apply filters by clicking on the Status field.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/tree-master-renaming.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/tree-master-renaming.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 29e9e450..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/tree-master-renaming.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-#Tree Master Renaming
-
-There are various master which are maintained in tree structure. Click [here](/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.html) to learn more about tree structured masters in ERPNext.
-
-Following are the steps to be followed for renaming ID of a master which is maintained in tree structure. Let's rename an Account for the instance.
-
-#### Step 1: Go to Chart of Account
-
-`Accounts > Setup > Chart of Accounts`
-
-#### Step 2: Go to Account
-
-When click on the Account, you will find Rename option.
-
-
-
-#### Step 2: Rename Account
-
-On clicking Rename, you will get field to enter New Name. After entering new name for the Account, click on the "Rename" button.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c7e746be..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-
-# Assignment
-
-Assign To feature in ERPNext allows you to allocate particular document to specific user, whom needs to further work on that document.
-
-For example, if Sales Order needs to be approved/submitted by Sales Manager, first draft user can allocate that Sales Order to Sales Manager. On allocating document to Sales Manager, it will be added to that user's ToDo list. Same way, allocation can also be done to Material User and Account user who needs to create Delivery Note and Sales Invoice respectively against this Sales Note.
-
-Permissions restriction cannot be done based on Assigned To.
-
-Following are the steps to assign document to another user.
-
-#### Step 1: Click on the Assign To Button
-
-Assign to option is located at the footer of document. Clicking on Assignment Icon on the tool bar will fast-forward you to footer of same document.
-
-
-
-#### Step 2: Assign to User
-
-In the Assign To section, you will find option to select User to whom this document will be assigned to. You can assign one document to multiple people at a time.
-
-
-
-With assignment, you can also leave a comment for the review of assignee.
-
-####ToDo List of Assignee
-
-This transaction will appear in the To-do list of the user in “Todo” section.
-
-
-
-####Removing Assignment
-
-User will be able to remove assignment by clicking on "Assignment Completed" button in the document.
-
-
-
-Once assignment is set as completed, the Status of its ToDo record will be set as Closed.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/calendar.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/calendar.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cf387849..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/calendar.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-
-# Calendar
-
-The Calendar is a tool where you can create and share Events and also see auto-generated events from the system.
-
-You can switch calendar view based on Month, Week and Day.
-
-
-
-### Creating Events in Calendar
-
-#### Creating Event Manually
-
-To create event manually, you should first determine Calendar View. If Event's start and end time will be within one day, then you should first switch to Day view.
-
-This view will 24 hours of a day broken in various slots. You should click on slot for Event Start Time, and drag it down till you reach event end time.
-
-
-
-Based on the selection of time slot, Start Time and End Time will be updated in the Event master. Then you can set subject for an event, and save it.
-
-#### Event Based on Lead
-
-In the Lead form, you will find a field called Next Contact By and Next Contact Date. Event will be auto created for date and person specified in this field.
-
-
-
-#### Birthday Event
-
-Birthday Event is created based on Date of Birth specified in the Employee master.
-
-### Recurring Events
-
-You can set events as recurring in specific interval by Checking the "Repeat This
-Event".
-
-
-
-### Event Reminders
-
-There are two ways you can receive email reminder for an event.
-
-#### Enable Reminder in Event
-
-In the Event master, checking "Send an email reminder in the morning" will trigger notification email to all the participants for this event.
-
-
-
-#### Create Email Digest
-
-To get email reminders for event, you should set Email Digest for Calendar Events.
-
-Email Digest can be set from:
-
-`Setup > Email > Email Digest`
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/chat.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/chat.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d15c156e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/chat.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-
-# Chat
-
-You can send and receive messages from the system by using the Messages tool.
-
-`Explore > Tools > Chat`
-
-If you send a message to a user, and the user is logged in, it will appear as a popup message and the unread messages counter in the top toolbar will be
-updated.
-
-
-
-You can choose to send message to all the users, or to specific user.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 36182f6f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-# Collaborating Around Forms
-
-Following are the tools in each document using which you can collaborate with other Users in your ERPNext account.
-
-### Assigned to
-
-If some document requires an action from User, you can Assign that document to that User. On assignment, User to whom document is assigned is intimated via email. To learn about Assign To feature, [click here.](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.html)
-
-### Comments
-
-Comments are a great way to add information about a transaction that is not a
-part of the transactions. Like some background information etc.
-
-
-
-###Share
-
-You can share document with the specific User. If Document is shared with the specific User, he/she will be able to access it, even if that User doesn't have permission to access that document or Document Type.
-
-
-
-### Tags
-
-[Read more about Tags](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.html)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/document-versioning.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/document-versioning.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8559162e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/document-versioning.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-#Document Versioning
-
-The document versioning feature allows you to track all the changes made in the form over the period. It will be very helpful in audit trial to check which user edited what value, and when exactly.
-
-####Enable Document Versioning
-
-Document Versioning can be enabled for one Document Type as a time. Let's assume that we need to enable it from Purchase Order. Then, we will check Customize Form tool for Purchase Order and check field `Track Changes`. With this, document versioning will be enabled for all the Purchase Orders create and edited hence forth.
-
-
-
-####Version Log
-
-Following is link of version in a Purchase Order form. Each time a document is edited, a version's link will be added in that document. To check more details on specific version, click on it's link.
-
-
-
-####Version Details
-
-In the Version document, you will find log of all the fields and values changes in it.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 136b27ec..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-# Using ERPNext
-
-We live in an era when people are very comfortable communicating, discussing,
-asking, assigning work and getting feedback electronically. The Internet acts
-as a great medium to collaborate on work too. Taking this concept into ERP
-system, we have designed a bunch of tools whereby you can Assign transactions,
-manage your To Dos, share and maintain a Calendar, maintain a company wise
-Knowledge Base, Tag and Comment on transactions and send your Orders, Invoices
-etc via Email. You can also send instant messages to other users using the
-Messaging tool.
-
-These tools are integrated into all aspects of the product so that you can
-effectively manage your data and collaborate with your co-workers.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 66bfc1ee..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-to-do
-restore-deleted-docs
-document-versioning
-collaborating-around-forms
-chat
-notes
-calendar
-assignment
-tags
-articles
-pos-view
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/notes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/notes.md
deleted file mode 100755
index db2d3076..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/notes.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-# Notes
-
-You can store your long notes under this section. It can contain your partner lists, frequently used passwords, terms and conditions, or any other document which needs to be shared. Following are the steps to create new Note.
-
-`Explore > Note > New`
-
-####Notes Details
-
-Enter Title and Context.
-
-
-
-####Set Permissions to select Users
-
-To make Note accessible for all, check "Public" under links section. Else you can share it with the specific User by using Share feature.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/restore-deleted-docs.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/restore-deleted-docs.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6c9746b8..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/restore-deleted-docs.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-#Restore Deleted Documents
-
-In ERPNext, you can delete a records if not needed. They can be masters like Items, Customer or transactions like Sales Order, Payment Entries etc.
-
-
-
-If you have deleted an entry by mistake and wish to restore it back into your ERPNext account.
-
-> Only User having System Manager role assigned can restore deleted documents.
-
-Steps below to restore a deleted document.
-
-####Step 1: Go to Deleted Documents
-
-For the list of deleted document, just type Deleted Document in the Search Bar and go to list.
-
-
-
-####Step 2: Open Doc and Restore
-
-Open the document to be restored from the list. Click on Restore button.
-
-
-
-####Step 3: Restored
-
-Once a document is restored, you will be able to use it for creating entries in your ERPNext account.
-
-
-
-> If canceled document is deleted, then it will not be restored.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 61be1147..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tags
-
-Like Assignments and Comments, you can also add your own tags to each type of transactions. These tags can help you search a document and also classify it.
-
-
-
-ERPNext will also show you all the important tags in the document list.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/to-do.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/to-do.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c1aba1ad..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/to-do.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# To Do
-
-To Do is a simple tool where all the activities [assigned](/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignments.html) to you and assigned by you are listed. You can also add your own to-do items in the list.
-
-
-
-When task is completed, you should simply remove assignment from the assigned document. With this, task will be removed from your Todo list as well. For Todo which are not assigned via document, you can set their status as Closed from the Todo master itself.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/add-products-to-website.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/add-products-to-website.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5d020835..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/add-products-to-website.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-# Add Products To Website
-
-### Add Products to the Website
-
-ERPNext will populate your website with products out of your Item Master. The html code will be
-generated automatically.
-
-
-
-#### Step 1: Edit Item
-
-For this example we will add a rocking chair to our catalog to sell on our website.
-
-To edit a catalog item go to: `Stock > Items and Pricing > Item`. From there select an item to add to website or create a new item by clicking the **New** button in the upper right.
-
-For this example, click on the **New** button to create a new item. Fill in the form and then click **Save**.
-
-
-
-#### Step 2: Save Image
-
-1. Click the new item from the list to edit it.
-1. In the upper left, click the image block to give the product a picture. Be sure to uncheck the **Private** box so the image will be publicly viewable.
-
-
-
-#### Step 3: Check the 'Show in Website' box
-
-Under the Website section near the bottom of the form, check the box that says **Show in Website**. Once the box is checked, the page will display other fields for entering information.
-
-* Give the page a route on the website.
-
-
-
-#### Step 4: Enter Website Details
-
-Once the `Show in Website` checkbox is checked, a new section called **Website Specifications** appears. Expand this section to add more details about the rocking chair to the website.
-
-
-
-Click **Save** in the upper right and then click `See on Website` on the left under the product image to see the item on your website.
-
-
-
-### Item Groups
-
-Items can be grouped together in items groups. To see a listing of the existing item groups to go: `Stock > Items and Pricing > Item Group`. Out of the box, ERPNext comes with a collection of item groups that you can use. Click `Products` to select it and then click `Edit` to open it up.
-
-* Click the **Show in Website** check box.
-* Change the route to `products`.
-* Fill in a description for your products page.
-* Click **Save**.
-
-
-
-* Go back to the rocking chair item, expand the **website** section.
-* Click **Add new row** button under the `Item Group` table.
-* Select `Products` from the list.
-* Click **Save**.
-
-
-
-To see on the website, go back to the `Item Group` and then click **See on website**.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/disable-signup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/disable-signup.md
deleted file mode 100644
index 60638a62..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/disable-signup.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-# Disable Signup on ERPNext Website
-
-ERPNext has portal feature available which allows third parties like Customers and Suppliers sign, place new orders and track updates on the previous orders.
-
-
-
-To allow new Customer and Supplier to Signup, the login page of your ERPNext account has Signup link avaiable. However, if you wish to disbale this feature, you can achieve it by following the steps given below.
-
-### Steps
-
-1. Go To
-
-> Website > Setup > Website Settings `
-
-2. In the Website Settings page, scroll down upto `More Information` section.
-
-3. Check fied `Disable Signup`.
-
-
-
-4. Save Website Settings.
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dfda826d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Articles
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index eb7b11d5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-disable-signup
-website-security
-website-home-page
-website-banner
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-banner.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-banner.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a16f7768..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-banner.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-# Website Banner Resizing
-
-Each ERPNext account website automatically generated from it. On a website, logo is set based on logo image selected in the Setup Wizard. You can change or edit property for your company's logo from the Website Settings.
-
-`Explore > Website > Website Settings`
-
-For the exact steps on how to upload a Website Banner and resize it, please refer to the help given below.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-home-page.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-home-page.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d44a31aa..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-home-page.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-# Wesite Home Page
-
-It is very much possible in ERPNext to setup certain standard page as default website Home Page. Following are steps to setup default website home page.
-
-#### **Step 1: Create a Web Page**
-To create a web page go to: `Website > Web Site > Web Page` and then click on the `New` button in the upper right.
-
-* Fill in the page title
-* Give the page a route (keep it lower case)
-* Add content to the `Main Content` section. If you want, you can use markdown to create a more complex page.
-* Tick (Check) the `Published` check box
-* Click the `Save` button.
-
-#### **Step 2: Open Website Settings Page**
-To Open website settings page go to: `Website > Setup > Website Settings`
-
-#### **Step 3: Set Home page**
-
-Enter the same value you entered for the `route` field in the previous section to the `Home Page` field. ERPNext will set this route to be the same as /index for your page.
-
-
-
-#### **Step 4: Save Website Settings Form.**
-
-After setting up Home Page Press `Save` button from website settings page and refresh the system from Help menu. Like this you can set any standard page as your default website home page. When some one visited to your website, he/she will see home page as default landing page on your website.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-security.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-security.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ef7986a6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-security.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-#Website Security
-
-One can easily generate a website using ERPNext. We can list our Products on the website and also create blogs. Products are directly fetched from the Item Master records of your ERPNext account. Some people would like to limit the access of the website generated by ERPNext to certain people. This is because some of the items may not be available to the public.
-
-Well at the moment this feature is not available. You cannot limit the access of the website generated by ERPNext to certain people. If you publish the website it will be publicly visible. However while you cannot control who can view the website, you can always choose which items to display on the website. To show or not show an Item on your website go to `Selling > Items and Pricing > Item` and in the Item form check the `show in website` checkbox.
-
-
-
-Once the check box has been checked, then more details will appear that you can fill in for the details of the product as to be shown on the website.
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blog-post.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blog-post.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2b270e2a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blog-post.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-# Blog Post
-
-Blogs are a great way to share your thoughts about your business and keep your
-customers and readers updated of what you are up to.
-
-In the age of internet, writing assumes a lot of significance because when
-people come to your website, they want to read about you and your product.
-
-To create a new blog, just create a new Blog from:
-
-> Website > Blog > New Blog
-
-
-
-You can format a blog using the Markdown format.You can also access your blog
-by going to the page “blog.html”.
-
-#### A sample blog-page.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blogger.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blogger.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 469ada12..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blogger.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-# Blogger
-
-Blogger is a user who can post blogs.
-You can mention a short bio about the blogger and also set a avatar here.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 09e44510..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-
-# Website
-
-Websites are a core component of any business and having a good website
-usually means:
-
- * Invest lot of money.
- * Difficult to update.
- * Not interactive.
-
-Unless you are a web designer yourself.
-
-Wouldn't it be nice if there was a way to update your product catalog on your
-site automatically from your ERP?
-
-We thought exactly the same and hence built a small Website Development app
-right inside ERPNext! Using ERPNext’s Website module, you can
-
- 1. Create Web Pages
- 2. Write a Blog
- 3. Publish your Product Catalog using the Item master
-
-We will soon be adding a shopping cart facility so that your customers can
-place orders and pay you online!
-
-Though not necessary, to make a good website, you might have to know a bit of
-HTML / CSS or hire the services of a professional. The good part is that once
-this is setup, you can add and edit content, blogs and products directly from
-your ERP.
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 846011d2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-web-page
-blog-post
-web-form
-blogger
-setup
-add-products-to-website
-shopping-cart
-articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 465c8158..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup
-
-Settings for your website can be mentioned under setup.
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index c3aaac91..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-website-settings
-social-login-keys
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/social-login-keys.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/social-login-keys.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8141a318..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/social-login-keys.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-# Social Login Keys
-
-Social Login enables users to login to ERPNext via their Google, Facebook or GitHub account.
-
-### Enabling Social Logins.
-
-Checkout the following Video Tutorials to understand how to enable social logins on ERPNext
-
-* for FaceBook:
-
-
-
-* for Google:
-
-
-
-* for GitHub:
-
-
-
-For Google the *Authorized redirect URI* is [yoursite]/api/method/frappe.www.login.login_via_google
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/website-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/website-settings.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 09f36135..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/website-settings.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-
-# Website Settings
-
-Most of the website related settings can be defined here.
-
-
-
-####Landing Page
-
-* Home Page: You can specify which [Web Page](/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.html) must be the homepage of the website
-
-* Home Page is Products: if Checked, the Home page will be the default Item Group for the website.
-
-* Title Prefix: Set the browser title.
-
-####Website Theme
-
-Select the theme for the website. You can create new Theme for you website also.
-
-
-
-* Select 'create new website theme' if you wish to customize the default website theme.
-
-####Banner
-
-You can add a banner/ logo to your website here. Attach the image and click on set banner from Image.
-An HTML code will be generated by the system under Banner HTML.
-
-
-
-####Top Bar
-
-You can set the menus items in the Top Bar here.
-
-
-
- * Similarlly you can also set sidebar and footer links.
-
-####Integrations & Miscellaneous Settings
-
-You can integrate the website using Google Analytics and enable social media sharing for post shared on the website.
-
-
-
-* You can disable public signup to your ERPNext account by checking 'disable signup'
-
-{next}
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/shopping-cart.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/shopping-cart.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 09129bd9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/shopping-cart.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-# Shopping Cart
-
-On the Webpage, a shopping cart is an icon that allows you to store all the
-things that you have earmarked for purchasing. It is a graphical
-representation of a shopping basket or a shopping cart that allows you to save
-the items you intend to buy.
-
-This software displays the price of the product . It also displays shipping
-and handling charges, along with taxes, if applicable.
-
-
-
-### Shopping Cart Setup
-
-To set up a shopping cart, go to the website module.
-
-> Website > Shopping Cart Settings
-
-#### Enter Company Details and Checkout Details.
-
-
-
-To make item available on website go to Item master.
-
-> Stock > Item
-
-#### Enable Item for website.
-
-
-
-#### Enter Website Specifications for Item.
-
-
-
-
-### Shop using Shopping Cart
-
-#### Add item to shopping cart
-
-Click on "Add to Cart" to add item to shopping cart.
-
-
-
-#### Goto Checkout
-
-Click on "Go to Cart" to checkout or on "Cart" which is on upper right side
-of the screen.
-
-
-
-#### Checkout
-
-Change quantity, select Shipping and Billing Address and click
-on "Place Order" to place the order.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-form.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-form.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fc900edf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-form.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-# Web Forms
-
-> Context: There two types of in-built interfaces available in ERPNext. The 'Desk View' and the 'Web View'. Desk view is for users who regularly interact with ERPNext instance, like employees. It is feature rich and needs a bit of familiarisation. 'Web View' is for users who need to interact with ERPNext instance occasionally. Webforms are similar to the forms you generally fill in various websites on internet. Webforms are part of 'Web View' interface in ERPNext.
-
-Stakeholders who are not part of your organisation may need to interact with your ERPNext instance. You can authorise customers, suppliers, job applicants, students, and guardians to access certain information or even create certain transactions. For example, you can let anyone create an account on your website (created with ERPNext) and apply for job. You can let your customers see the details of complaints they have registered.
-
-This can be done using the Webforms.
-
-### Creating Web Form
-
-To create a new **Web Form** go to:
-
-> Website > Web Form > New
-
-1. Add appropriate 'Title'.
-1. 'Route' is set automatically based on the title. You can change it if required.
-1. Select the **DocType** in which you want the data filled by user needs to be stored.
-1. Select the 'Module' to which this webform belongs.
-1. Check 'Published' once your webform is complete and ready to be accessed.
-1. Check 'Login Required' if the web form has to be accessible to only those users who have an account and are logged in.
-1. Check 'Allow Edit' to make the web form editable, if you leave it unchecked the forms become read-only once it is saved.
-1. Check 'Show as Grid' if the data should be displayed in a table format.
-1. Check 'Allow Delete' if the user can delete the webforms that he/she has created.
-1. Check 'Allow Print' if the user can take a print out.
-1. Select the applicable 'Print Format'.
-1. Check 'Allow Comments' checkbox if user can add comments.
-1. Check 'Allow Incomplete Forms' if user is allowed to save the webforms with partial data.
-1. Finally add the fields from DocType in 'Fields Table'.
-
-
-### Introduction
-
-You can add a small text here to set the context for the web form.
-
-
-
-### Fields in Web Form
-
-You can only select the fields available in the DocType. You cannot create new fields directly in the webform.
-
-You can click on 'Get Fields' button on the top to add all fields in the DocType to the web form.
-
-
-
-Once you create the web form, you can view it on the URL(Route) and test it out!
-
-### Creating Web Forms with Child Table
-
-You can add child tables to your web forms, just like regular forms.
-
-
-
-### Pagination
-
-To help your users fill out long new forms, you can insert page breaks that will appear on new sections. This way the user to focus on only filling one section at a time.
-
-
-
-### Sidebar Settings
-
-Check 'Show Sidebar' if the sidebar needs to be displayed along with the web form.
-
-And add the links to be shown in the sidebar of the web form by adding the details in the table.
-
-
-
-### Payment Gateway Integration
-
-You can now add a Payment Gateway to the web form, so that you can ask users to pay against a web form. A good example for this is a conference ticket :)
-
-
-
-### Portal User
-
-We have also introduced roles for Website users. Before version 11, if you assigned any 'Role' to a user he would get access to 'Desk View'. From version 11 you can assign a 'Role' but still disallow access to 'Desk View' by unchecking 'Desk Access' in Role.
-
-
-
-In Portal Settings, you can set a role against each menu item so that only users with that role will be allowed to see that item.
-
-
-
-### Custom Script
-
-You can write code in javascript to implement custom logic and set the URL to the webpage to which the user must be redirected after successful submission of webform.
-
-### Actions
-
-You can add the text in 'Success Message' field and this text will be shown to user once he successfully submits the web form . And the user is redirected to the URL given at 'Success URL' when clicked on 'Continue' button. This is only applicable to webforms accessible without the user login(webforms with 'Login Required' checkbox unchecked).
-
-
-
-
-### Result
-
-When website user submits the form, the data will be stored in the document/doctype for which web form is created.
-
-### Customizing
-
-For customising web forms, see the [Frappe Documentation of Web Forms](https://frappe.io/docs/user/en/guides/portal-development/web-forms)
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5b4d46be..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-# Web Page
-
-Static Content like your Home Page, About Us, Contact Us, Terms pages can be created using the Web Page.
- -To create a new Web Page, go to: - -> Website > Web Page > New - -
-
-#### Title
-
-The first thing to set is the title of your page. The title has the maximum
-weight for search engines so choose a title that reflects the keywords that
-you are targeting for your audience.
-
-#### Content
-
-After selecting your layout, you can add content (text, images, etc) to each
-of your content boxes. You can add content in Markdown or HTML format. Read
-the section on how to format using Markdown, for more details.
-
-#### Page Link
-
-The web link to your page will be the value of the “Page Name” field +
-“.html”. For example if your page name is contact-us, the web link of your
-page will be yoursite.com/contact-us.html.
-
-#### Images
-
-You can attach images to your web page and show them using the HTML tag or
-using markdown format. the link to your file will be assets/manual_erpnext_com/old_images/erpnext/filename
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-entries.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-entries.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d2379948..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-entries.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
-
-# Accounting Entries
-
-
-
-El concepto de contabilidad se explica con el siguiente ejemplo: Se toma a
-"Tea Stall" como compañía y se observa como registrar entradas contables
-para el negocio.
-
- * Mama (El propietario de Tea-stall) invierte $25000 para iniciar el negocio.
-
-
-
-__Análisis:__ Mama invierte 25000 en la compañía, con la esperanza de obtener alguna
-ganancia. En otras palabras, la compañía es responsable del pago de $25000 a mama en
-el futuro. Así, la cuenta "Mama" es una cuenta de pasivo y es un crédito. El balance de
-efectivo de la compañía se incrementa debido a la inversión, "Caja" es un activo de
-la compañía y debe ser debitado.
-
- * La compañía necesita equipos (Estufa, tetera, pocillos, etc) y materias primas (te,
- azucar, leche, etc) de inmediato. Decide comprar en una tienda cercana "Super Bazaar"
- que pertenece a un amigo y le concede cierto crédito. Los equipos cuestan 2800 y las
- materias primas valen 2200. La compañía paga 2000 de un total de 5000.
-
-
-
-__Análisis:__ Los equipos son "Activos Fijos" (porque tienen una larga vida útil) de la
-compañía y las materias primas son "Activos corrientes" (porque son usados en la
-operación diaria del negocio). Entonces, "Equipos" y "Existencias disponibles" deben
-ser debitadas para incrementar su valor. La compañía pagó 2000, entonces la cuenta
-"Caja" debe ser reducida en dicha cantidad, es decir debe ser crédito. Y dado que la
-compañía tiene la obligación de pagar 3000 a "Super Bazaar", dicha cuenta debe tener
-un crédito de 3000.
-
-
- * Mama (quien está pendiente de todas las entradas)decide anotar las ventas al finalizar
- cada día, de tal manera que pueda analizar las ventas diarias. Al finaliza el primer
- día, Tea Stall vende 325 tazas de té, lo cual da una venta neta de RS. 1575. El propietario
- registra feliz su primer día de ventas.
-
-
-
-__Análisis:__ Los ingresos han sido anotados en la cuenta "Ventas de Té", la cual se
-debita para incrementar el valor y la misma cantidad se acredita de la cuenta
-"Caja". Digamos, para hacer 325 tazas de té cuestan Rs 800, entonces la
-cuenta "Existencias disponibles" debe ser reducidas (crédito) en 800 y el gasto
-debe ser registado en la cuenta "Costos de bienes vendidos" en la misma cantidad.
-
-Al finalizar el mes, la compañía paga el arriendo del local (5000) y el salario de
-un empleado (8000), el cual trabajó desde el primer día.
-
-
-
-### Registro de ganancias
-
-A medida que avanza el mes, la compañía compra más materias primas para el negocio.
-Después de un mes se anotan las ganancias en el "Libro de Balance" y en el de
-"Estado de Pérdidas y Ganancias". Ya que las ganacias pertenecen a Mama y no a
-la compañía, se considera que dichas ganacias son una obligación (la compañía tiene
-que pagárselas a Mama). Cuando el Libro de Balance no está balanceado, p.e. el
-débito no es igual al crédito, la ganacia aún no ha sido anotada. Se debe realziar
-la siguiente entrada:
-
-
-
-Explicación: Las ventas y gastos netos son 40000 y 20000 respectivamente.
-Entonces, la compañía tuvo una ganancia de 20000. Para registrar esa entrada,
-la cuenta "Pérdidas y Ganancias" debe ser debitada y la cuenta "Capital"
-debe ser acreditada. El balance neto de caja es 44000 y existe alguna materia
-prima que vale $1000.
-
-**Trabajo en progreso.**
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-reports.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5d70bdf1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-reports.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-
-# Accounting Reports
-
-
-
-Algunos de los principales reportes contables son:
-
-### Libro Mayor
-
-El Libro Mayor está basada en la tabla de Entradas y puede ser filtrado por
-cuenta y por periodo específico de tiempo. Esto ayuda a tener un reporte
-actualizado de todas las entradas que existan para una cuetna dada en un
-periodo determinado.
-
-
-
-### Balance Contable
-
-Es el listado del balance para todas las cuentas ("Libro Mayor" y "Grupo")
-en una fecha particular. Para cada cuenta proporciona:
-
- * Apertura
- * Débitos
- * Creditos
- * Cierre
-
-
-
-La suma de todos los balances de cierre en el Balance Contable debe ser igual a cero.
-
-### Cuentas por Pagar y Cuentas por Cobrar (CP / CC)
-
-Este reporte permite hacer seguimiento a las facturas enviadas a los clientes y proveedores. En este
-reporte, se resaltan diferentes periodos de tiempo. p.e. entre 0-30 días, 30-60 días y así por el estilo.
-
-
-
-### Registro de Ventas y Compras
-
-En este reporte, cada cuenta de impuestos es transpuesta en columnas. For cada factura y por cada item
-se puede obtener la cantidad de impuestos individuales que debe ser pagados, de acuerdo a la
-tabla de Impuestos y Contribuciones,
-
-
-
-**Trabajo en progreso.**
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4e4ddd0a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-
-# Advance Payment Entry
-
-Los pagos realizados por el cliente antes de recibir el envío del producto se
-denominan Anticipos. Para ordenes de alto costo, los negocios esperan recibir
-dcho tipos de pago.
-
-
-__Por Ejemplo:__ Consider a customer- Jane D'souza placing an order for a double
-bed costing $10000 She is asked to give some advance before the furniture
-house begins work on her order. She gives them $5000 in cash.
-
-
-Go to Accounts and open a new Journal Entry to make the advance entry.
-
-> Accounts > Documents > Journal Entry > New Journal Entry
-
-Mention the voucher type as cash voucher. This differs for different
-customers. If somebody pays by cheque the voucher type will be Bank Voucher.
-Then select the customer account and make the respective debit and credit
-entries.
-
-Since the customer has given $5000 as cash advance,it will be recorded as a
-credit entry against the customer. To balance it with the debit entry [Double
-accounting Entry] enter $5000 as debit against the company's cash account. In
-the row "Is Advance" click 'Yes'.
-
-#### Figure 1 : Journal Entry -Advance Entry
-
-
-
-### Double Entry Accounting
-
-Double entry bookkeeping is a system of accounting in which every transaction
-has a corresponding positive and negative entry : debits and credits. Every
-transaction involves a [debit entry
-](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/debit)in one account
-and a [credit
-entry](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/credit) in another
-account. This means that every transaction must be recorded in two accounts;
-one account will be debited because it receives value and the other account
-will be credited because it has given value.
-
-
-#### Figure 2: Transaction and Difference Entry
-
-
-
-Save and submit the JV. If this document is not saved it will not be pulled in
-other accounting documents.
-
-When you make a new Sales Invoice for the same customer, mention the advance
-in the Sales Invoice Form.
-
-To link the Sales Invoice to the Journal Entry which mentions the advance
-payment entry, click on ‘Get Advances Received’. Allocate the amount of
-advance in the advances table. The accounting will be adjusted accordingly.
-
-#### Figure 3: Receive Advance
-
-
-
-Save and submit the Sales Invoice.
-
-**Trabajo en progreso.**
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5bccdc77..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-# Accounts
-
-
-Al final del ciclo de compra y venta viene la facturación y los pagos.
-Quizás se tenga un contador en el equipo, quizás se haga la contabilidad
-por cuenta propia o quizás se tenga contratado un tercero que realice la tarea.
-En todos los casos, la contabilidad finaciera forma parte del núcleo de
-cualquier sistema de gestión del negocio tal como los ERP.
-
-En **ERPNext**, las operaciones contables consisten en 3 transacciones principales:
-
- * Factura de ventas: Las facturas que se entregan al Cliente correspondientes a
- los servicios o productos que se proveen.
- * Factura de Compra: Facturas que los proveedores le entregan a la compañía por
- la compra de sus productos o servicios.
- * Entradas
-
-
-At the end of sales and purchase cycle comes billing and payments. You may have
-an accountant in your team, or you may be doing accounting yourself, or you may
-have outsourced your accounting. In all the cases financial accounting forms the core of any business management system like an ERP.
-
-In ERPNext, your accounting operations consists of 3 main transactions:
-
- * Sales Invoice: The bills that you raise to your Customers for the products or services you provide.
- * Purchase Invoice: Bills that your Suppliers give you for their products or services.
- * Entradas Diarias: Para contabilizar entradas, tales cvomo pagos, créditos y otros tipos.
-
-### Temas
-
-**Trabajo en progreso.**
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index bad8436c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-advance-payment-entry
-accounting-reports
-accounting-entries
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_criteria.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_criteria.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0df19d72..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_criteria.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-#Criterios de Evaluación
-
-Criterios de evaluación es el parámetro basado en el que se evalúa el estudiante.
-
-
-
-Después de la evaluación para un curso, las calificaciones obtenidas se ingresan en base a los criterios de evaluación. Por ejemplo, si la evaluación se llevó a cabo para el tema de la ciencia, entonces usted puede evaluar al estudiante en ciencia en varios criterios como la escritura, prácticas, presentación, etc
-
-Los Criterios de Evaluación se usan al programar el Plan de Evaluación para el Grupo de Estudiantes y el Curso.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_group.md
deleted file mode 100755
index eef55c86..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-
-#Grupo de Evaluación
-
-La estructura del grupo de evaluación es un maestro donde se puede definir la jerarquía para el examen realizado en su instituto de educación.
-
-Por ejemplo, si realiza dos evaluaciones en un año académico, configure el Grupo de evaluación de la siguiente manera.
-
-
-
-En la misma línea, también puede definir varios Grupo de Evaluación basado sobre la evaluación llevada a cabo en su instituto.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_plan.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_plan.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1b8fab53..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_plan.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-#Plan de Evaluación
-
-Para programar una evaluación/examinación para un Grupo de Estudiantes, para un curso específico, crea un Plan de Evaluación. En el plan de evaluación, puedes capturar detalles como:
-
-1. Escala de Calificaciones basada en qué calificaciones serán asignadas a los estudiantes.
-
-2. Fecha de planificación de la Evaluación
-
-3. Aula donde se va a llevar a cabo la evaluación
-
-4. Examinador y Supervisor
-
-
-
-5. Los Criterios de Evaluación son la lista de criterios basados en que cada estudiante en será evaluado y los grados serán asignados.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_result.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_result.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f2990e9c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_result.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-#Resultados de Evaluación
-
-El resultado de la evaluación es un registro de las calificaciones obtenidas por el estudiante para una evaluación específica. El resultado de la evaluación se crea en el backend en base a los puntos en [Herramienta de Resultados de Evaluación](/docs/user/manual/es/education/assessment/assessment_result_tool.html).
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 31c4005a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-#Herramienta de resultados de la evaluación
-
-
-Herramienta de resultados de evaluación le ayuda a ingresar las calificaciones obtenidas por los estudiantes para un curso específico. En esta herramienta, basada en el plan de evaluación, todos los estudiantes van a ser filtrados dentro de la herramienta de resultados de la evaluación. También, Columnas para los Criterios de Evaluación serán donde las calificaciones ganadas pueden ser ingresadas para cada Estudiante.
-
-
-
-A medida que vaya introduciendo las notas para un Estudiante y cambie al siguiente alumno, en el backend, el registro de Resultados del Estudiante se creará automáticamente para ese Estudiante.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/grading_scale.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/grading_scale.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f0389ea3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/grading_scale.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-#Escala de calificación
-
-En la escala de calificación, puedes definir varios grados y límites para los estudiantes. Basado en la calificación obtenida por el estudiante en la evaluación, el grado (Grade) será asignado.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 468c6822..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-#Evaluación
-
-Cada instituto de educación organiza evaluaciones / examenes para evaluar el progreso de sus estudiantes. En ERPNext, puedes gestionar completamente el proceso de evaluación para sus cuentas en ERPNext.
-
-
-
-A continuación se muestra el orden en el que debe configurar los masters en el módulo de evaluación.
-
-1. Criterio de Evaluación
-2. Grupo de Evaluación
-3. Escala de Evaluación
-
-Una vez tengas definido los Grupos de Estudiantes y Cursos, puedes programar una evaluación / examinación creando un Plan de Evaluación.
-
-Basado en el rendimiento del estudiante en la evaluación, puedes ingresar los resultados de la evaluación por un estudiante. Puedes ingresar todos los registros de los estudiantes usando la herramienta de resultados de evaluación. En esta herramienta, en la selecció del Plan de Evaluación, todos los estudiantes (De un grupo de estudiantes) van a ser buscados y mostrados. Puedes rápidamente ingresar los puntos obtenidos por cada estudiante en cada uno de los Criterios de Evaluación en una sola linea.
-
-### Temas
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 61d744c7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/Assessment/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-assessment_criteria
-assessment_group
-grading_scale
-assessment_plan
-assessment_result_tool
-assessment_result
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ec4a7e7f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Admisiones
-
-Esta sección contiene los documentos relacionados a adminisiones de estudiantes.
-
-### Temas
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index ec9e7681..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-student-applicant
-program-enrollment
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/program-enrollment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/program-enrollment.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b91a67a4..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/program-enrollment.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Inscripción al Programa
-
-Este formulario te permite inscribir un estudiante a un programa. Un estudiante puede ser inscrito en multiples programas.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/student-applicant.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/student-applicant.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bc7b666d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/admission/student-applicant.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-
-# Aplicación de Estudiante
-
-Un registro de Aplicación de Estudiante necesita ser creado cuando un estudiante aplica para un programa en su institución.
-Puedes Aprobar o Rechazar una aplicación de estudiante. Aceptando una aplicación de un estudiante puedes agregarlos al master de estudiantes.
-
-
-
-### Estados de la Aplicación
-
-- Por defecto cuando una aplicación de estudiante es creada en el sistema, el estado de la aplicación es seteado a 'Applied'
-
-- Puedes actualizar el estado a 'Approved' una vez apruebas la aplicación de estudiante para unirse a su institución
-
-- Cuando el estado de la aplicación es actualizada a 'Approved', el botón de 'Inscribir' debería aparecer.
- Puedes crear un registro de estudiante usando la aplicación de estudiante e inscribirlos a un programa al presionar el botón de Inscribir
-
-- Una vez el estudiante es creado usando la aplicación de estudiante, el sistema va a setear el estado del documento de aplicación a 'Admitted'
- y no te va a permiter cambiar el estado de la aplicación a menos que el estudiante sea eliminado
-
-### Registro de Estudiante
-
-
-Una vez aprobada una Aplicación de Estudiante, puedes inscribirlo a un programa. Cuando le das click al butón 'Inscribir',
-el sistema creará un estudiante usando esa aplicación y le va a redireccionar a el [Formulario de Inscripción al Programa](/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/program-enrollment.html).
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/fee-category.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/fee-category.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1d30226f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/fee-category.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Categoría de Cuota
-
-Todos los tipos diferentes de cuotas que se cobran
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/fee-structure.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/fee-structure.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 28cf6315..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/fee-structure.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Estructura de Cuota
-
-Una Estructura de Cuota es una plantilla que puede ser usada cuando se hacen registros de cuotas.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/fees.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/fees.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fc2d51f9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/fees.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Cuotas
-
-Mantiene un registro de todas las cuotas recolectadas de los estudiantes.
-La [Estructura de Cuota](/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/fee-structure.html) es seleccionada basada en el programa seleccionada y los Términos Académicos.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fb22c116..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Cuota
-
-Esta sección contiene todos los documentos relacionado a las 'Cuota'
-
-
-
-### Temas
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 265ac6a5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/fees/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-fees
-fee-structure
-fee-category
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d547cbf2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Education
-
-
-Los módulos de School estan diseñados para satisfacer los requerimientos de Escuelas, Colegios e Institutos Educacionales.
-
-
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index b485fdcf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-student
-admission
-schedule
-fees
-setup
-assessment
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/course-schedule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/course-schedule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c33c794f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/course-schedule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-# Horario de un Curso
-
-El Horario de Curso es el horario de una sesión de un profesor para un Curso en particular.
-Puedes ver un resumen del horario del curso en la vista de Calendario.
-
-
-
-### Marcando asistencia
-
-Puedes pasar la asistencia para un grupo de estudiantes usando el Horario de Curso.
-
-
-
-- Para hacer la asistencia, expandir la sección de asistencia.
-- Selecciona los estudiantes que estaban presentes para esa sesión.
-- Click en el botón de 'Mark Attendance'. El sistema va a crear los registros de asistencia automáticamente.
-
-### Ver Asistencia
-
-Una vez hayas marcado la asistencia usando la sección de asistencia en el Horario de un Curso, esta sección debería estar oculta.
-Un botón de Ver Asistencia debería aparecer. Click en el botón para ver todos los registros de asistencia creados para ese Horario de Curso.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/examination.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/examination.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d49374fc..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/examination.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Examinación
-
-El registro de examinación puede ser usado para hacer el seguimiento del horario de los examenes y los resultados de los mismos.
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2418dcbb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Horario
-
-
-
-### Temas
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 704ad84b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-course-schedule
-student-attendance
-scheduling-tool
-examination
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/scheduling-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/scheduling-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dcb2231a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/scheduling-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-
-# Herramienta para Horarios
-
-Esta herramienta puede ser usada para crear los Horarios de los Cursos.
-
-
-
-### Creando Horarios de Cursos
-
-- Selecciona el Grupo de Estudiante para el cual vas a establecer el Horario.
-- Seleccione el curso, Aula y un Instructor para el Horario.
-- Específica los rangos de fecha desde-hasta para el horario de los cursos.
-- Especifíca Fecha Inicio y Fecha Final de un curso(Los Horarios de los cursos van a ser creados dentro de este rango de fechas)
-- Espeficíca el dia de la semana en el cual deseas establecer el horario.
-- Presiona el botón de 'Schedule Course'
-- El sistema va a crear la planificación si el Aula y el Instructor estan disponibles y no hay ningún conflicto con el grupo de estudiantes seleccionados con otros horarios para el mismo grupo.
-
-###Reprogramar Horario
-
-- Si deseas reprogramar el horario de un curso, sigue las instrucciones para crear horarios de cursos.
-- Selecciona el checkbox 'Reschedule' y luego da click en el botón 'Schedule Course'.
-- El sistema va a eliminar la progración de horario especifícada para ese curso dentro del rango de fecha seleccionado y crearia la nueva planificación de horario para el curso.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/student-attendance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/student-attendance.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 213c7d3f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/schedule/student-attendance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Asistencia de Estudiante
-
-Mantiene los registros de la asistencia del estudiante. Los registros de asistencia pueden ser creados sobre los horarios de los cursos (Course Schedules).
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/academic-term.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/academic-term.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a9923355..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/academic-term.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Término Académico
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/academic-year.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/academic-year.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 01b343dc..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/academic-year.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Año Académico
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/course.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/course.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6f33c28b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/course.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Curso
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 11a10831..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Configuración
-
-
-
-### Temas
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index fb9ba05d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-course
-program
-instructor
-room
-academic-term
-academic-year
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/instructor.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/instructor.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a06e39f9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/instructor.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Instructor
-
-
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/program.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/program.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ef261d3a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/program.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Programa
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/room.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/room.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1ccbdce2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/setup/room.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Aula
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dd0bce36..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Student
-
-Esta sección contiene los documentos relacionados a los estudiantes.
-
-### Temas
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 9b31be4d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-student
-student-log
-student-batch
-student-group
-student-group-creation-tool
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-batch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-batch.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3dfe6b5b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-batch.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lote de Estudiantes
-
-
-Un lote de estudiantes es una colección de estudiantes desde los Grupos de Estudiantes.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-group-creation-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-group-creation-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1f6d6589..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-group-creation-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Herramienta para creación de Grupo de Estudiantes
-
-Esta herramienta te permite crear grupos de estudiantes. Puedes especificar multiples parámetros para crearlos.
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-group.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1fa03b7e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-group.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Grupo de Estudiante
-
-Un Grupo de Estudiante es una colección de estudiantes tomando el mismo curso. Puedes crear calendarios para los cursos y examinaciones para un Grupo de Estudiante.
-Un Grupo de Estudiante necesita ser creado para cada curso en un año o término académico en particular.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-log.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-log.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e765e0ce..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student-log.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Bitácora de Estudiante (Log)
-
-Puedes crear una nota de una actividad de un estudiante usando la bitácora de estudiante (log)
-Los registros de bitágora pueden ser categorizadas como 'General', 'Academic', 'Medical' or 'Achievement'
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7c00b337..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/education/student/student.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-
-# Estudiante
-
-Un estudiante es una persona que se ha registrado en su institución y has aceptado se solicitud de aplicación.
-El doctype de Estudiante mantiene los detalles personales de los estudiantes.
-
-Puedes ver todo lo relacionado a un estudiante en particular en esta página. Ejemplo: Pagos, Grupo de Estudiante, etc.
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d4fb9a91..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Manual de Usuario (Español)
-
-### Contenido:
-
-{index}
-
-**Trabajo en progreso.**
-
-[La traducción al Español del manual de ERPNext está en progreso. Click aquí para ver el manual en ingles](/docs/user/manual/en)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index ad85a791..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-introduction
-accounts
-projects
-education
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5f34602b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-
-# Do I Need An Erp
-
-ERPNext es una herramienta moderna que no solo abarca el módulo de contabilidad,
-sino que también, cubre todas las otras funciones de su negocio en una plataforma integrada.
-Tiene muchos beneficios sobre los sistemas tradicionales de contabilidad y otros ERP en el mercado.
-
-### Beneficios sobre los sistemas de contabilidad tradicionales:
-
- * Es más que solo contabilidad! Gestionar inventario, facturación, cotizaciones, clientes potenciales, nómina y mucho más.
- * Mantiene toda tu información segura y en un solo lugar. No siga buscando sus datos cuando más lo necesitas en diferente hojas de calculo y en diferentes ordenadores.
- Gestiona a todos tus empleados en el mismo lugar. Todos los usuarios obtienen información actualizada.
- * No más trabajo doble. No introduzcas la misma información desde su procesador de textos a su herramienta de contabilidad. Todo está integrado!
- * Manten un historial. Obten el historial completo de un cliente o un acuerdo en un solo lugar
-
-### Beneficios sobre ERPs más grandes
-
- * $$$ - Ahorra dinero.
- * **Más facíl de configurar:** Grandes ERP son extramadamente complicados para configurar y van a preguntar demasiadas preguntas amtes de que puedas hacer algo utíl.
- * **Más facíl de usar:** Una moderna y limpia interfaz web va a mantener sus usuarios contentos y en un entorno mas familiar.
- * **Código Abierto :** Este sistema es completamente gratis y puedes instalarlo/configurarlo donde desees.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4c1604a0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-
-# Getting Started With ERPNext
-
-Hay muchas manera de comenzar a utilizar ERPNext.
-
-### 1\. Ver el Demo
-
-Si deseas entrar en contacto con la interfaz de usuario de ERPNext y **sentir** la aplicación, solo tienes que ver el demo en:
-see the demo at:
-
- *
-
-_Nota: No todos los pasos son obligatorios. ERPNext te permite pasar algunos pasos si deseas simplificar el proceso._
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/open-source.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/open-source.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ecdaaa6c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/open-source.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-
-# Open Source
-
-El código fuente de ERPNext es de código abierto. Está abierto para que todos
-podamos entenderlo, extenderlo o mejorarlo. Y es gratis!
-
-Las ventajas de un Sistema de Código Abierto:
-
- 1. Puedes cambiar tu proveedor de servicios cuando quieras.
- 2. Puedas hostear la aplicación donde quieras, incluyendo en tu propio servidor para tener completa propiedad y privacidad de la información.
- 3. Puedes pedir ayuda a la comunidad en caso de necesitarla. No estas atado a un proveedor de servicios.
- 4. Te puedes beneficiar de un producto que es criticado y usado por una gran cantidad de personas,
- quienes han reportado cientos de fallos y sugerencias para mejorarlo, y esto siempre va a continuar así.
-
-
----
-
-### Código Fuente de ERPNext
-
-El repositorio que contiene el código fuente de ERPnext está disponible en GitHub y puede ser encontrado aquí
-
-- [https://github.com/frappe/erpnext](https://github.com/frappe/erpnext)
-
-
----
-
-### Alternativas
-
-Hay muchas soluciones ERP que puedes considerar. Los más populares son:
-
- 1. Odoo
- 2. OpenBravo
- 3. Apache OfBiz
- 4. xTuple
- 5. Compiere (y clones)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/the-champion.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/the-champion.md
deleted file mode 100755
index edb0be3a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/the-champion.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-
-# The Champion
-
-
-
-El campeón
- -
-
-Hemos visto docenas de implementaciones de sistemas ERP en los últimos años
-y nos hemos dado cuenta que una implementación exitosa es más sobre cosas intangibles y actitudes.
-
-**Los ERP no son requeridos.**
-
-Como el ejercicio.
-
-El cuerpo humano puede que parezca que no requiere ejercicio hoy ni quizas mañana, pero con el pasar del tiempo,
- si desea mantener su cuerpo y su salud deberá comenzar a hacer ejercicio.
-
-En esta misma forma, ERPs mejoran la salud de su compañia a largo plazo manteniendola ajustada y eficiente.
- Mientas más demores en poner las cosas en orden, más tiempo pierdes, y estas más cerca de una desastre mayor.
-
-Por tanto, cuando comienzas a implementar un ERP, manten la visión en beneficios a largo plazo.
- Como el ejercicio, es doloroso al comienzo, pero va a hacer cosas maravillosas si te mantienes haciendolo.
-
-* * *
-
-## El Campeón
-
-Un ERP significa un cambio en la organización y un cambio no sucede sin exfuerzo.
-Cada cambio requiere un campeón y es la responsabilidad de el campeón el
-organizar y motivar al equipo completo durante la implementación.
-El campeón necesita ser activo en caso que algo salga mal.
-
-En muchas organizaciones que hemos visto, frecuentemente el campeón es el dueño o un Administrador.
- Ocasionalmente, el campeón es una persona externa quien es contratado con un propósito específico.
-
-En cualquier caso, debes identificar su campeón primero.
-
-Lo más seguro es que sea **usted!**
-
-Comencemos!
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/activity-cost.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/activity-cost.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3e890485..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/activity-cost.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-
-# Costo de Actividad
-
-El costo de la actividad registra la tasa de facturación por hora y la tasa de costos de un empleado en comparación con un tipo de actividad.
-El sistema hace uso de esta tasa mientras hace registros de tiempo. Se usa para Costeo de proyectos.
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/activity-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/activity-type.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 96bca785..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/activity-type.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tipo de Actividad
-
-Los tipos de actividad son la lista de los diferentes tipos de actividades sobre las que se hacen registro de tiempo.
-
-
-
-Por defecto, los siguientes tipos de actividades son creados.
-
-* Planning
-* Research
-* Proposal Writing
-* Execution
-* Communication
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/articles/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/articles/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7126ad40..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/articles/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-
-# Artículos
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/articles/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 56c193c2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/articles/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-project-costing
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/articles/project-costing.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/articles/project-costing.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d47e20ef..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/articles/project-costing.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-
-# Costeo de proyectos
-
-Cada proyecto tiene multiples tareas asociadas a el. Para hacer el seguimiento del costo actual de un proyecto, primeramente en términos de servicios, el usuario
-tiene que crear un registro de tiempo basado en el tiempo que invirtió en una tarea del proyecto. Siguiendo los pasos de como puedes hacer el seguimiento del costo actual de un servicio usando el proyecto.
-
-#### Tipo de actividad
-
-Tipo de actividad es un maestro de los servicios ofrecidos por su personal. Puedes agregar un nuevo Tipo de Actividad desde:
-
-`Project > Activity Type > New`
-
-#### Costo de actividad
-
-Costo de actividad es un maestro donde puedes hacer el seguimiento de los montos de facturación y costo de cada empleado, y por cada tipo de Tipo de Actividad.
-
-
-
-#### Registro de Tiempo
-
-Basados en el tiempo actual invertido en una Tarea del Proyecto, El empleado va a crear un registro de tiempo.
-
-
-
-Al momento de seleccionar el Tipo de Actividad en el Registro de tiempo, el monto de Facturación y Costo del empleado va a ser traído de su respectivo registro en el master de Costo de Actividad.
-
-
-
-Multiplicando esos montos con el total de número de horas en el registro de tiempo, nos da el monto de costos y Facturación para el registro de tiempo específico.
-
-#### Costeo en Proyectos y Tareas
-
-Basados en el total de registros de tiempos creados por una tarea en específico, su costo va a ser actualizado en el registro maestro de la tarea, o sea, en el detalle de la tarea.
-
-
-
-De la misma manera, el detalle del Proyecto va a actualizar su costo basado en el total de registros de tiempo a ese proyecto, y las tareas asociadas a ese proyecto.
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8dfbb10f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-# Proyectos
-
-ERPNext le ayuda en la administración de su proyecto a traves de la creacion de tareas y
-poder asignarlas a diferentes personas.
-
-Las compras y las ventas también se pueden rastrear en relación con los proyectos y
-esto puede ayudar a la empresa a controlar su presupuesto, entrega y rentabilidad para un proyecto.
-
-Los proyectos pueden ser usados para manejar los proyectos internos, trabajos de manufacturación y
-planificación de servicios. Para los trabajos de servicios, los Time Sheets (hojas de tiempo) pueden ser creadas
-para facturar a los clientes, en caso que el proceso de facturación se haga basado en tiempo y dinero de tareas.
-
-### Temas
-
-{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 716ec1fe..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-tasks
-project
-time-log-batch
-activity-type
-activity-cost
-articles
-timesheet
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/project.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/project.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4c763bce..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/project.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
-
-# Proyecto
-
-El manejo de proyectos en ERPNext se hace a traves de tareas. Puedes crear un proyecto y asignar varias tareas al mismo.
-
-
-
-También puedes hacer el seguimiento del % completado del proyecto usando diferentes métodos.
-
- 1. Tareas Completadas
- 2. Progreso de tareas
- 3. Peso de tarea
-
-
-
-Algunos ejemplos de como el % completado es cálculado basado en tareas.
-
-
-
-
-
-### Manejando tareas
-
-Los proyecto pueden ser divididos en multiples tareas.
-Las tareas pueden ser creadas a traves del documento de Proyecto o pueden ser creadas via [Tarea](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.html)
-
-
-
-* Para ver las tareas creadas a un proyecto click en 'Tasks'
-
-
-
-
-
-* También puedes ver las tareas desde la misma vista del proyecto.
-
-
-
-* Para agregar peso a las tareas puedes seguir los pasos siguientes
-
-
-
-
-
-### Manejando tiempo
-
-ERPNext usa [Time Log](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log.html) para hacer el seguimiento del progreso de un Proyecto.
-Puedes crear registros de tiempo sobre cada Tarea.
-El tiempo actual de inicio y finalización junto con el costo deben ser actualizados basados en los Registros de Tiempo.
-
-* Para ver los Registros de Tiempo realizados a un proyecto, dar click en 'Time Logs'
-
-
-
-
-
-* Puedes agregar un registro de tiempo directamente y luego asociarlo con el proyecto.
-
-
-
-### Gestión de gastos
-
-Puede reservar la [Reclamación de gastos](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html) contra una tarea de proyecto.
-El sistema actualizará el monto total de las reclamaciones de gastos en la sección de costos del proyecto.
-
-* Para ver las reclamaciones de gastos realizadas en un proyecto, haga clic en 'Reclamaciones de gastos'
-
-
-
-* También puede crear un Reclamo de gastos directamente y vincularlo al Proyecto.
-
-
-
-* El monto total de los Reclamos de gastos reservados contra un proyecto se muestra en 'Reclamo de gastos totales' en la Sección de Costos del proyecto
-
-
-
-### Centro de Costo
-
-Puedes crear un [Cost Center](/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.html) sobre un proyecto o usar un centro de costo existente para hacer el seguimiento de todos los gastos realizados al proyecto.
-
-
-
-###Costeo del proyecto
-
-La sección Costeo del proyecto le ayuda a rastrear el tiempo y los gastos incurridos en relación con el proyecto.
-
-
-
-* La sección de cálculo de costos se actualiza según los registros de tiempo realizados.
-
-* El margen bruto es la diferencia entre el monto total de costos y el monto total de facturación
-
-###Facturación
-
-Puedes crear/enlazar una [Sales Order](/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.html) a un proyecto. Una vez asociada puedes usar el módulo de ventas para facturar a un cliente sobre el proyecto.
-
-
-
-###Gantt Chart
-
-Un Gantt Chart muestra la planificación del proyecto.
-ERPNext te provee con una vista para visualizar las tareas de forma calendarizada usando un Gantt Chart (Hoja de Gantt).
-
-* Para visualizar el gantt chart de un proyecto, ve hasta el proyecto y dar click en 'Gantt Chart'
-
-
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/tasks.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/tasks.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 505ef5d0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/tasks.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-
-# Tareas
-
-Proyecto es dividido en Tareas.
-En ERPNext, puedes crear las tareas de forma independiente.
-
-
-
-### Estado de una Tarea
-
-Una tarea puede tener uno de los siguientes estados - Abierto, Trabajando, Pendiente de Revisión, Cerrado, o Cancelado.
-
-
-
-* Por defecto, cada nueva tarea creada se le establece el estado 'Abierto'.
-
-* Si un registro de tiempo es realizado sobre una tarea, su estado es asignado a 'Working'.
-
-### Tarea Dependiente
-
-Puedes especificar una lista de tareas dependientes en la sección 'Depende de'
-
-
-
-* No puedes cerrar una tarea padre hasta que todas las tareas dependientes esten cerradas.
-
-* Si una tarea dependiente se encuentra en retraso y se sobrepone con la fecha esperada de inicio de la tarea padre, el sistema va a re calandarizar la tarea padre.
-
-### Manejando el tiempo
-
-ERPNext usa [Time Log](/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log.html) para seguir el progreso de una tarea.
-Puedes crear varios registros de tiempo para cada tarea.
-El tiempo de inicio y fin actual junto con el costo es actualizado en base al Registro de Tiempo.
-
-* Para ver el Registro de tiempo realizado a una tarea, dar click en 'Time Logs'
-
-
-
-
-
-* Puedes también crear un Registro de Tiempo directamente y luego asociarlo a una Tarea.
-
-
-
-### Gestión de gastos
-
-Puede reservar la [Reclamación de gastos](/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html) contra una tarea de proyecto.
-El sistema actualizará el monto total de las reclamaciones de gastos en la sección de costos del proyecto.
-
-* Para ver las reclamaciones de gastos realizadas en un proyecto, haga clic en 'Reclamaciones de gastos'
-
-
-
-* También puede crear un Reclamo de gastos directamente y vincularlo al Proyecto.
-
-
-
-* El monto total de los Reclamos de gastos reservados contra un proyecto se muestra en 'Reclamo de gastos totales' en la Sección de Costos del proyecto
-
-
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/time-log-batch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/time-log-batch.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 156c5006..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/projects/time-log-batch.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lote de registro de tiempo
-
-Puede facturar Registros de tiempo viéndolos juntos. Esto le da la flexibilidad de administrar la facturación de su cliente de la manera que desee. Para crear una nueva hoja de tiempo, ve a
-
-> Projects > Time Sheet > New Time Sheet
-
-O
-
-Simplemente abra su lista de registro de tiempo y marque los elementos que desea agregar al registro de tiempo. A continuación, haga clic en el botón "Crear hoja de tiempo" y se seleccionarán estos registros de tiempo.
-
-
-
-###Creando Factura de Venta
-
-* Despues de crear la Hoja de Tiempo/Horario, el botón "Crear Factura" debe aparecer.
-
-
-
-* Haga clic en ese botón para hacer una factura de venta usando la hoja de tiempo.
-
-
-
-* Cuando "Presente" la Factura de Ventas, el número de Factura de Ventas se actualizará en los Registros de Tiempo y la Hoja de Horario y su estado cambiará a "Facturado".
-
-{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c0bba769..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# ERPNext User Manual
-
-Select your language
-
-1. [English](/docs/user/manual/en)
-1. [Deutsch](/docs/user/manual/de)
-1. [Español](/docs/user/manual/es)
-1. [Lietuvių](/docs/user/manual/lt)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 2c4c454f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-en
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/_sidebar.json
deleted file mode 100644
index ff6d312b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/_sidebar.json
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-[
- {
- "route": "/docs",
- "title": "Home"
- },
- {
- "route": "/docs/user/manual/en/introduction",
- "title": "Introduction"
- },
- {
- "route": "/search_docs",
- "title": "Search",
- "type": "input"
- }
-]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bb21e068..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-
-# Naudojimo instrukcijos (Lietuvių kalba)
-
-### Turinys:
-
-{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 34591e2d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-introduction
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 471e126b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,373 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sąvokos ir apibrėžimai
-
-Prieš pradėdami diegti ERPNext, galite susipažinti su naudojama terminologija ir kai kuriomis pagrindinėmis ERPNext sąvokomis.
-
-* * *
-
-### Pagrindinės sąvokos
-
-#### Įmonė
-
-Įmonė, kuriai yra skirta įdiegta ERPNext sistema. Įdiegus ERPNext sistemą, ją galima naudoti ir kelioms įmonėms valdyti, kurių kiekviena yra atskiras juridinis asmuo. Kiekviena Įmonės turės atskirą apskaitą, bet įmonės gali dalintis įrašais apie klientus, tiekėjus ir prekes.
-
-> Nustatymai > Įmonė
-
-#### Klientas
-
-Klientas gali būti asmuo arba organizacija. Galite sukurti kelis kontaktus ir adresus kiekvienam klientui.
-
-> Pardavimai > Klientas
-
-#### Tiekėjas
-
-Prekių ar paslaugų tiekėjas. Pvz. jūsų telefono kompanija yra jūsų Tiekėjas. Tiekėjas gali būti fizinis ar juridinis asmuo ir turėti keletą Kontaktų ir Adresų.
-
-> Pirkimai > Tiekėjas
-
-#### Daiktas
-
-Daiktas - dalinis gaminys ar paslauga, kuri yra arba perkama, parduodama ar gaminama ir yra unikaliai identifikuojama.
-
-> Ištekliai > Daiktas
-
-#### Sąskaita
-
-Sąskaita yra finansinių ir verslo sandorių apjungimas. Pavyzdžiui, "Kelionės išlaidos" yra sąskaita "Klientas Jolanta", "Tiekėjas Gediminas" yra sąskaitos. ERPNext Klientams ir Tiekėjams sąskaitas sukuria automatiškai.
-
-> Sąskaitos > Sąskaitų lentelė
-
-#### Adresas
-
-Adresas nurodo kliento ar tiekėjo vietos informaciją. Tai gali būti skirtingos vietos, tokios kaip pagrindinis biuras, gamykla, sandėlys, parduotuvė ir kt.
-
-> Pardavimai > Adresas
-
-#### Kontaktas
-
-Kontaktas gali būti nepriklausomas arba priklausyti Klientui arba Tiekėjui. Kontaktas turi vardą ir kontaktinę informaciją, pvz. el. pašto adresą ir telefono numerį.
-
-> Pardavimai > Kontaktas
-
-#### Komunikacija
-
-Sąrašas viso bendravimo su Kontaktu arba Potencialiu klientu. Visi elektroniniai laiškai, išsiųsti iš sistemos, pridedami prie komunikacijos sąrašo.
-
-> Palaikymas > Komunikacija
-
-#### Kainoraštis
-
-Kainoraštyje galima saugoti skirtingų tarifų planus, kainas. Tai jūsų suteiktas pavadinimas tam tikrų Daiktų kainų sąrašui.
-
-> Pardavimai > Kainoraštis
-
-> Pirkimai > Kainoraštis
-
-* * *
-
-### Apskaita
-
-#### Finansiniai metai
-
-Finansiniai metai arba apskaitos metai. J8s galite operuoti keliais Finansianiais metais tuo pa2iu metu. Kiekvieni finansiniai metai turi pradžios ir pabaigos datą, visi įmonės veiksmai gali būti užregistruoti tik šiuo laikotarpiu. Kai jūs "uždarote" finansinius metus, tai likučiai perkeliami kaip "atidarymo" likučiai kitiems finansiniams metams.
-
-> Nustatymai > Įmonė > Finansiniai metai
-
-#### Sąnaudų centras
-
-Sąnaudų centras yra kaip Sąskaita, tačiau skirtumas yra tas, kad jis skirtas labiau būtent jūsų verslui nei Sąskaitos. Pavyzdžiui, savo Sąskaitų lentelėje galite atskirti savo išlaidas pagal jų rūšį (t.y. kelionės, rinkodara ir kt.). Savo Sąnaudų centrų lentelėje galite jas atskirti pagal daiktų grupes ar verslo grupes (pvz., pardavimai internetu, mažmeninė prekyba ir kt.).
-
-> Sąskaitos > Sąnaudų centrų lentelė
-
-#### Žurnalo įrašas
-
-Dokumentas, kuriame yra Didžiosios knygos (DK) įrašai, suma Debetų ir Kreditų iš šių yrašų yra sutampa. Per ERPNext Žurnalo įrašus galite atnaujinti Mokėjimus, Grąžą ir t.t.
-
-> Sąskaitos > Žurnalo įrašas
-
-#### Pardavimo sąskaita-faktūra
-
-Sąskaita-faktūra siunčiama Klientams tiekiant Daiktus (prekes ar paslaugas).
-
-> Sąskaitos > Pardavimo sąskaitą-faktūrą
-
-#### Pirkimo sąskaita-faktūra
-
-Tiekėjo siunčiama sąskaita-faktūra už Daiktų (prekių ar paslaugų) pristatymą.
-
-> Sąskaitos > Pirkimo sąskaita-faktūra
-
-#### Valiuta
-
-ERPNext leidžia jums atlikti sandorius keliomis valiutomis nepaisant to, kad jūsų Sąskaitų lentelei yra prisikirta tik viena valiuta. Skelbdami mokėjimus pagal sąskaitas-faktūras skirtingomis valiutomis, suma konvertuojama į numatytąsias valiuta pagal nurodytą perskaičiavimo kursą.
-
-> Nustatymai > Valiuta
-
-* * *
-
-### Pardavimas
-
-#### Klientų grupė
-
-Klientų grupavimas, dažniausiai pagal rinkos segmentą.
-
-> Pardavimai > Nustatymai > Klientų grupė
-
-#### Potencialus klientas
-
-Asmuo, kuris galėtų tapti klientu. Potencialus klientas gali tapti Pardavimo galimybe.
-
-> CRM > Potencialus klientas
-
-#### Pardavimo galimybe
-
-Galimas pardavimas.
-
-> CRM > Pardavimo galimybe
-
-#### Apmokęstinimo pasiūlymas
-
-Apmokęstinimo pasiūlymas pagal Kliento prašymą apmokęstinti prekę ar paslaugą.
-
-> Pardavimai > Apmokęstinimo pasiūlymas
-
-#### Pardavimo patvirtinimas
-
-Daiktų (prekių arba paslaugų) pristatymo sąlygų ir kainos patvirtinimas. Pristatymai, darbo užsakymai ir sąskaitos-faktūros atliekami remiantis Pardavimo užsakymais.
-
-> Pardavimai > Pardavimo patvirtinimas
-
-#### Teritorija
-
-Geografinės vietovės skirstymas pardavimų valdymui. Galite nustatyti tikslias Teritorijas ir kiekvieną pardavimą susieti su šia Teritorija.
-
-> Pardavimai > Nustatymai > Teritorija
-
-#### Pardavimo partneris
-
-Trečiosios šalies platintojas / prekybininkas / filialas / tarpininkas (komisionierius), kuris parduoda kompanijos Daiktus, dažniausiai už komisinius.
-
-> Pardavimai > Nustatymai > Pardavimo partneris
-
-#### Pardavėjas
-
-Asmuo, kuris teikia pasiūlymus Klientui ir uždaro sandorius. Galite nustatyti tikslus
-Pardavėjui ir žymėti juos sandoriuose.
-
-> Pardavimai > Nustatymai > Pardavėjas
-
-* * *
-
-### Pirkimas
-
-#### Pirkimo užsąkymas
-
-Tiekėjui sudaryta sutartis, kuri nurodo tiekti nurodytus Daiktus nurodytomis sąlygomis (kaina, kiekis, datos ir t.t.)
-
-> Pirkimai > Pirkimo užsakymas
-
-#### Medžiagų užklausa
-
-Prašymas, kurį pateikia sistemos vartotojas arba automatiškai sugeneruotas ERPNext pagal pakartotinių užsakymų lygį arba numatomo kiekio Gamybos plane tam, kad įsigyti reikiamų Daiktų.
-
-> Pirkimai > Medžiagų užklausa
-
-* * *
-
-### Ištekliai
-
-#### Sandėlis
-
-Teorinio sandėlio likutis.
-
-> Ištekliai > Sandėlis
-
-#### Išteklių įrašas
-
-Medžiaga perduodama iš vieno Sandėlio į kitą.
-
-> Ištekliai > Išteklių įrašas
-
-#### Pristatymo pranešimas
-
-Daiktų sąrašas su siuntos kiekiu. Pristatymo pranešimas sumažins Produkų skaičių sandėlyje, iš kurio atliekamas tiekimas. Pristatymo pranešimas yra dažniausiai pateikiamas prieš Pardavimo užsakymą.
-
-> Ištekliai > Pristatymo pranešimas
-
-#### Pirkimo kvitas
-
-Įrašas, patvirtinantis, kad tiekėjas gavo tam tikrą Daiktų rinkinį, dažniausiai, pagal Pirkimo užsakymą.
-
-> Ištekliai > Pirkimo kvitas
-
-#### Serijos numeris
-
-Unikalus numeris tam tikram Daiktui.
-
-> Ištekliai > Serijos numeris
-
-#### Partija
-
-Numeris, suteiktas konkretaus Daikto vienetų partijai, kurią galima įsigyti arba gaminti grupėje.
-
-> Ištekliai > Partija
-
-#### Sandėlio apskaitos knygos įrašas
-
-Bendra lentelė visam išteklių judėjimui iš vieno Sandėlio į kitą. Tai yra lentelė, kuri yra atnaujinama, kai pateikiamas Išteklių įrašas, Tiekimo įrašas, Pirkimo kvitas ir Pardavimo užsakymas.
-
-#### Inventorizacija
-
-Atnaujinkite kelis įrašus lentelinės skaičiuoklės (CSV) byloje vienu metu.
-
-> Ištekliai > Inventorizacija
-
-#### Kokybės kontrolė
-
-Įrašas skirtas išsaugoti Daikto parametrus Gavimo iš Tiekėjo metu arba Pristatymo Klientui metu.
-
-> Ištekliai > Kokybės kontrolė
-
-#### Daiktų grupė
-
-Daiktų klasifikavimas.
-
-> Ištekliai > Nustatymai > Daiktų grupė
-
-* * *
-
-### Žmogiškųjų išteklių valdymas
-
-#### Darbuotojas
-
-Įrašas apie šiuo metu arba anskčiau įmonėje įdarbinantą asmenį.
-
-> Žmogiškieji ištekliai > Darbuotojas
-
-#### Atostogų prašymas
-
-Patvirtintų arba atmestų atostogų prašymų sąrašas.
-
-> Žmogiškieji ištekliai > Atostogų prašymas
-
-#### Atostogų rūšis
-
-Atostogų rūšis (pvz., Dėl ligos, gimdymo atostogos ir kt.).
-
-> Žmogiškieji ištekliai > Atostogos ir lankomumas > Atostogų rūšis
-
-#### Atlyginimo įrašas
-
-Įrankis, kuris padeda formuoti įvairius darbuotojų atlyginimo lapelius.
-
-> Žmogiškieji ištekliai > Atlyginimo įrašas
-
-#### Atlyginimo lapelis
-
-Darbuotojui skirtos mėnesinės algos įrašas.
-
-> Žmogiškieji ištekliai > Atlyginimo lapelis
-
-#### Darbo užmokesčio struktūra
-
-Šablonas, nustatantis visus darbuotojo atlyignimo komponentus, mokesčius ir kitus, kaip pvz. papildomą sveikatos draudimą.
-
-> Žmogiškieji ištekliai > Darbo užmokestis > Darbo užmokesčio struktūra
-
-#### Vertinimas
-
-Darbuotojo veiklos rezultatų vertinimas per nustatytą laikotarpį, remiantis tam tikrais parametrais.
-
-> Žmogiškieji ištekliai > Vertinimas
-
-#### Vertinimo šablonas
-
-Šablonas, kuriame įrašomi skirtingi Darbuotojų našumo parametrai ir jų snoris tam tikram pareigai.
-
-> Žmogiškieji ištekliai > Darbuotojo nustatymai > Vertinimo šablonas
-
-#### Lankomumas
-
-Įrašas, nurodantis darbuotojo buvimą ar nebuvimą konkrečią dieną.
-
-> Žmogiškieji ištekliai > Lankomumas
-
-* * *
-
-### Gamyba
-
-#### Komplektavimo specifikacija
-
-Operacijų ir Daiktų sąrašas su jų kiekiais, kurių reikia kuriant kitą Daiktą. Komplektavimo specifikacija naudojama planuojant pirkimus ir vertinti gaminamo Daikto sąnaudas.
-
-> Gamyba > Komplektavimo specifikacija
-
-#### Darbo stotis
-
-Vieta, kur vykdoma gamyba pagal Komplektavimo specifikacija. Padeda apskaičiuoti tiesioginęs Daikto sąnaudas.
-
-> Gamyba > Darbo stotis
-
-#### Darbo užsakymas
-
-Dokumentas, signalizuojantis konkretaus gaminio gamybos paleidimą pagal nurodytą kiekį.
-
-> Gamyba > Darbo užsakymas
-
-#### Gamybos planavimo įrankis
-
-Automatizuoto įrankis sukūriantis Darbų užsakymą ir Pirkimų prašymus pagal Aktyvius pardavimo užsakymus per tam tikrą laikotarpį.
-
-> Gamyba > Gamybos planavimo įrankis
-
-* * *
-
-### Svetainė
-
-#### Tinklaraščio įrašas
-
-Pateikiamas trumpas straipsnis, sukurtas ERPNext svetainės "Tiklaraščio" modulio skyriuje. Dienoraštis yra trumpa "interneto žurnalo" forma.
-
-> Svetainė > Tinklaraščio įrašas
-
-#### Tinklapis
-
-Tinklalapis su unikaliu URL (interneto adresu), sukurtos ERPNext.
-
-> Svetainė > Tinklalapis
-
-* * *
-
-### Nustatymai / pakeitimai
-
-#### Pasirinktinis laukas
-
-Vartotojo apibrėžtas laukas formoje / lentelėje.
-
-> Nustatymai > Keisti ERPNext > Pasirinktinis laukas
-
-#### Globalios numatytos reikšmės
-
-Skyrius, kuriame jūs nustatote numatytuosius įvairių parametrų reikšmes sistemoje.
-
-> Nustatymai > Duomenys > Globalios numatytos reikšmės
-
-#### Spausdinama antraštė
-
-Antraštė, kurią galima nustatyti tik spausdinimui. Pavyzdžiui, jūs norite atspausdinti pasiūlymą su antrašte "Pasiūlymas" arba "Sąskaita-faktūra".
-
-> Nustatymai > Ženklai ir spausdinimas > Spausdinama antraštė
-
-#### Sąlygos
-
-Jūsų sutarties sąlygų tekstas.
-
-> Pardavimai > Nustatymai > Sąlygos
-
-#### Matavimo vienetas
-
-Kokiais vienetais matuojamas Daiktas. Pvz., "Kg", "No", "Paketas" ir tt.
-
-> Ištekliai > Nustatymai > Matavimo vienetas
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
deleted file mode 100755
index be0771ec..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-# Ar man reikia ERP?
-
-ERPNext yra modernus įrankis, kuris apima ne tik apskaitą, bet ir daugelį kitų verslo funkcijų vienoje platformoje. ERPNext turi daug privalumų lyginant su tradicine apskaita ir kitomis ERP sistemomis.
-
-### Privalumai lyginant su tradicine apskaitos programine įranga:
-
- * Darykite daug daugiau nei vien tik apskaitą! Tvarkykite inventorių, atsiskaitymą, kainas, klientus, atlyginimą ir daug daugiau.
- * Saugokite visus savo duomenis saugioje vietoje. Nebegaiškite laiko ieškodami duomenų tarp gausybės Excel lentelių skirtinguose kompiuteriuose. Tvarkykite viską vienoje vietoje. Visi vartotojai vienu metu gauna tokius pat atnaujintus duomenis.
- * Nebedubliuokite darbų. Nebereikia įvedinėti tos pačios informacijos iš teksto redaktoriaus į apskaitos įrankį. Viskas integruota.
- * Sekite progresą. Gaukite visą kliento istoriją ar kurio nors sandorio informaciją vienoje vietoje.
-
-### Privalumas lyginant su didelėmis ERP
-
- * $$$ - taupo pinigus.
- * **Lengviau konfigūruoti:** Didelius ERP yra labai sunku diegti ir jie užduos tūkstančius klausimų, kol jūs galėsite ką nors prasmingo padaryti.
- * **Lengviau naudoti:** Šiuolaikinė žiniatinklio forma, kaip vartotojo sąsaja, padės vartotojams laimingai ir įprastoje teritorijoje.
- * **Atviro kodo:** Ši programinė įranga yra ir bus visada nemokama, ir jūs galite ją leisti bet kur, kur jūm panorėsit.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2b4c6a4e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
-# Darbo pradžia su ERPNext
-
-Yra daug būdų kaip pradėti darbą su ERPNext.
-
-### 1\. Išbandykite demonstraciją
-
-Jei norite išbandyti vartotojo sąsają ir **pajausti** sistemą, tiesiog pasileisite demonstraciją:
-
- * [demo.erpnext.com](https://demo.erpnext.com)
-
-### 2\. Gaukite nemokamą paskyrą ERPNext.com
-
-ERPNext.com yra tvarkoma (Frappe) organizacijos, kuri prižiūri ir viešina ERPNext. Galite sukurti savo paskyrą [užsiregistruojant svetainėje](https://erpnext.com).
-
-Jūs taip pat galite pirkti sistemos talpinimo paslaugą per [erpnext.com](https://erpnext.com). Tokiu būdu jūs remiate organizaciją, kuri vysto ir tobulina ERPNext. Taip pat galite gauti tiesioginį mūsų specialistų palaikymą kartu su talpinimo planu.
-
-### 3\. Atsisiųskite virtualią mašiną
-
-Jei norite išvengti problemų susijusių su programinės įrangos diegimu, ERPNext yra prieinamas kaip virtualios mašinos kopija (pilna operacinė sistema su įdiegta ERPNext sistema). Jūs šią kopiją galite naudoti **bet kurioje** platformoje, įskaitant ir "Microsoft Windows".
-
-[Spauskite čia norėdami pamatyti nurodymus, kaip naudotis Virtualiu mašinos kopija](https://erpnext.com/download)
-
-### 4\. Įdiekite ERPNext savo Unix / Linux / Mac kompiuteryje
-
-Jei esate susipažinę su programų diegimu *nix platformose, skaitykite instrukcijas, kaip įdiegti naudodami [Frappe Bench](https://github.com/frappe/bench).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/implementation-strategy.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/implementation-strategy.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 755585d0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/implementation-strategy.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-# Įgyvendinimo strategija
-
-Prieš pradėdami tvarkyti jūsų organizacijos veiklą per EPRNext, pirmiausia turite susipažiti su sistema ir vartojamais terminais. Mes rekomenduojame diegimą atlikti dviem etapais.
-
- * **Bandomasis etapas**, kuomet įvedate dirbtinius/sintentinius įrašus, kurie atitinka jūsų kasdienes operacijas ir **diegimo etapas**, vėliau pradėsime vesti realius duomenis.
-
-### Bandomasis etapas
-
- * Perskaitykite dokumentaciją
- * Sukurkite nemokamą paskyrą adresu [https://erpnext.com](https://erpnext.com) (tai lengviausias būdas eksperimentuoti).
- * Sukurkite savo pirmąjį klientą, tiekėją ir prekę. Pridėkite keletą papildomai, kad labiau perprasti sistemą.
- * Sukurkite klientų grupes, prekių grupes, sandėlius, tiekėjų grupes, kad galėtumėte rūšuoti savo prekes/daiktus.
- * Atlikite standartinį pardavimo ciklą - Potencialus klientas > Pardavimo galimybė > Apmokęstinimo pasiūlymas > Pardavimo užsakymas > Pristatymo pranešimas > Pardavimo sąskaita-faktūra > Mokėjimas (žurnalo įrašas)
- * Atlikite standartinį pirkimo ciklą - Medžiagų užsakymas > Pirkimo užsakymas > Pirkimo kvitas > Mokėjimas (žurnalo įrašas).
- * Atlikti gamybos ciklą (jei taikytina) - Komplektavimo specifikacija > Gamybos planavimo įrankis > Darbo užsakymas > Pristatymo pranešimas
- * Atkartokite realaus gyvenimo scenarijų sistemoje.
- * Sukurkite specifinius laukus, spausdinimo šablonus pagal poreikį.
-
-### Diegimo etapas
-
-Jei jau esate susipažinę su ERPNext, pradėkite vesti tikrus duomenis!
-
- * Išvalykite bandymo duomenis iš paskyros arba dar geriau, pradėkite įdiekite sistemą iš nauju.
- * Jei tiesiog norite išvalyti tranzakcijas, bet palikti pagrindinius duomenis, pvz., "Prekė", "Klientas", "Tiekėjas", "Komplektavimo specifikacija" ir kt., Galite spustelėti "Ištrinti" savo įmonės tranzakcijas ir pradėti iš naujo. Norėdami tai atlikti, atidarykite "Organziacijos žurnalas" per Nustatymai > Pagrindiniai > Įmonė ir ištrinkite savo organizacijos transakcijas, spustelėdami organizacijos formos apačioje esantį mygtuką **Trinti Organizacijos Tranzakcijas**.
- * Taip pat galite sukurti naują paskyrą adresu [https://erpnext.com](https://erpnext.com) ir 30 dienų nemokamai naudoti bandomąją versiją. [Sužinokite daugiau ERPNext diegimo būdų](docs/user/manual/en/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext)
- * Įdiekite visus modulius su Klientų grupėmis, Prekių grupėmis, Sandėliais, Komplektavimo specifikacijomis ir kt.
- * Importuokite Klientų duomenis, Tiekėjų duomenis, Prekes, Kontaktus ir Adresus naudodami duomenų importavimo įrankį.
- * Importuokite prekių atsargas naudojant Inventorizacijos įrankį.
- * Sukurkite apskaitos įrašą per Žurnalo įrašą ir įkelkite Neapmokėtas sąskaitas ir Pirkimų sąskaitas-faktūras.
- * Jei jums reikia pagalbos, [galite įsigyti palaikymą](https://erpnext.com/pricing) arba [paklauskite vartotojų bendruomenės forume](https://discuss.erpnext.com).
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 76876bcd..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-
-# Įvadas
-
-## Kas yra ERP sistema? Ir kodėl ji kam nors turėtų rūpėti?
-
-* Jei jau esate įsitikinęs, kad jums reikia vienos sistemos, kurioje yra viskas ko reikia organizacijai, galite praleisti šį puslapį.*
-
-Šiandien mažosios ir vidutinės įmonės (MVĮ) nedaug skiriasi nuo didelių įmonių. MVĮ susiduria su panašiais sunkumais kaip didelės įmonės, tačiau jos turi ribotus išteklius juos spręsti.
-
-Mažos įmonės (kaip ir didelės įmonės) turi:
-- tvarkyti sąskaitas, tam kad stebėti pardavimus / pirkimus
-- reguliariai mokėti mokesčius
-- reguliariai mokėti atlyginimus savo darbuotojams
-- valdyti pristatymus pagal įsipareigotus laiko grafikus
-- tiekti kokybiškas prekes ir paslaugas
-- bendrauti su klientais, atsakyti į klausimus
-Ir bendrai stenktis, kad visi būtų patenktinti.
-
-Didelės imonės sugebėjo investuoti šimtus milijonų dolerių kuriant labai sudėtingas sistemas, tokias kaip SAP. Sistemos, tokios kaip "SAP", gali patenkinti reikalavimus, keliamus didelėms įmonėms, kad jų vienintelė platforma apjungtų jų **paskistytą po įvairias šalis**, **turinčių ne vieną dukterinę bendrovę**, **daugiavaliutį** pasaulinį verslą. Tai padėjo jiems apjungti duomenis / įrašus, susijusius su pagrindiniu procesu, tokiu kaip apskaita, apmokestinimas, darbo užmokesčio fondas, atskaitomybė ir tiekimo grandinė.
-
-Priešingai nei didelės įmonės, MVĮ buvo paliktos **pirmos skaitmeninės revoliucijos bangos (1995-2015 m.)** nuošalį. Pagrindinė priežastis, kodėl MVĮ praleido skaitmenizavimo bangą yra tai, kad jos neturi tokių finansinių išteklių pirkti **licencijas, samdyti programuotojus ir adaptuoti** reikalingą programinę įrangą taik, kad atitiktų jų poreikius. Sistemos, tokios kaip SAP, buvo ir lieka finansiškai neprienamos daugumai MVĮ. Kad atsipirktų tokių sistemų naudojimas reikia, kad įmonės apyvarta siektų **mažiausiai $100k**. Net ir atsiradus debesijos paslaugoms ("Software as a Service", SAAS), nėra lengva patiems integruoti į savo verslą tokias sistemas.
-
-Taigi net ir šiandien mažosios įmonės vis dar susiduria su sunkumais norint tvarkingai organizuoti savo veiklą. Jos dažnai naudoja daugybę programų ir įrankių, tokių kaip lentelinės skaičiuoklės, apskaitos programinė įrangą, internetines klientų valdymo sistemas tam, kad galėtų tvarkyti jų kasdienę veiklą. Mažos įmonės turi naudoti skirtingas sistemas tam, kad perprastų pagrindinius duomenis susijusius su klientais, pardavimais, pinigų srautais ar pelningumu. Informacija egzistuoja izoliuotose sistemose. Duomenis sunku sujungti norint gauti naudingų įžvalgų ar automatinių įspėjimų. Kaip pasėkmė MVĮ **reaguoja**, o ne **proaktyviai** vykdo savo kasdienes veiklas. Esant tokiam ribotam darbui, **augimas** taip pat tampa ribotas.
-
-ERPNext sprendžia kai kurias iš šių pagrindinių problemų:
-* kaina: ERPNext yra nemokama atvirojo kodo programinė įranga, laisvai prieinama atsisiųsti ir diegti
-* pilnumas: apima visus būtinus modulius [Visas sąrašas List](https://erpnext.org/ "ERPNext.org tinklapis")
-* lankstus adaptavimas: lengva pridėti naujus laukus arba pridėti daugiau funkcijų
-* efektyvumas: skaičiavimo resursų reikalavimai yra ganėtinai žemi (pigu diegti ir valdyti)
-* viskas viename: viena sistema ir viena duomenų bazė, kuri leidžia visiems vartotojams įkelti įvairaus pobūdžio duomenis ir gauti duomenis vienu metu.
-
-## Kas yra ERPNext?
-
-ERPNext yra pilna verslo valdymo sistema, kuri padeda MVĮ turėti visas verslo valdymo sprendimus vienoje sistemoje. Be to, MVĮ gali ja naudotis priimant laiku ir faktais pagrįstus sprendimus, taip didinant savo konkurencingumą. ERPNext gali tapti verslo stuburu, pridėti jūsų augančiai įmonei stiprybės, skaidrumo ir kontrolės.
-
-Be kita ko, ERPNext padės jums:
- * Stebėkite visas sąskaitas faktūras ir mokėjimus.
- * Žinoti kiekvieno Daikto likutį sandėlyje.
- * Nustatykite ir sekite svarbiausius veiklos rezultatų rodiklius.
- * Nustatykite atviras kliento užklausas.
- * Valdyti darbo užmokesčio fondą.
- * Priskirti užduotis ir stebėti jas.
- * Saugoti ir tvarkyti visų savo klientų, tiekėjų ir jų kontaktų duomenų bazę.
- * Parengti kainas.
- * Jūsų biudžetų ir išlaidų stebėjimas
- * Nustatykite faktinę pardavimo kainą remiantis faktinėmis išlaidomis žaliavoms, įrangai ir darbo sąnaudomis.
- * Gaukite priminimus pagal techninės priežiūros tvarkaraščius.
- * Paleiskite savo svetainę.
-
-Ir daug daug daugiau.
-
-## Ar ERPNext tik MVĮ?
-
-ERPNext gali būti naudojamas tiek MVĮ, tiek didelėse įmonėse. Nėra žinomų apribojimų ar veikimo problemų. Mums žinomi keli mažmeninės prekybos tinklai Afrikoje ir aukštai vertinamą akcijų prekybos bendrovę Indijoje (turinti daugiau nei 1000 darbuotojų), kurios naudoja ERPNext.
-
-Norėdami sužinoti daugiau, peržiūrėkite įvairias [User Stories](https://erpnext.org/stories).
-
-
-
-
-
-### Topics
-
-{index}
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 535fcfec..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-do-i-need-an-erp
-open-source
-getting-started-with-erpnext
-the-champion
-implementation-strategy
-key-workflows
-concepts-and-terms
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/key-workflows.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/key-workflows.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5b291d1a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/key-workflows.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-
-# Standartinė organizacijos srautų diagrama ERPNext
-
-Ši diagrama demonstruoja, kaip infomacija keliauja ERPNext sistemoje vykdant jūsų įmonės esmines funkcijas. Ši schema neapima visų ERPNext funkcijų.
-
-
-
-
-
-Pastaba: ne visi veiksmai yra privalomi. ERPNext leidžia laisvai praleisti žingsnius, jei norite supaprastinti procesą.
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/open-source.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/open-source.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 17ff5f39..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/open-source.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-
-# Atviras kodas
-
-Ši programinė įranga yra sukurta atvirojo programinio kodo principu. Tai reiškia, kad ši programa yra atvira visiems išnagrinėti, papildyti ar patobulinti. Ir tai yra visiškai nemokama!
-
-"Atviro kodo" programinės įrangos privalumai:
-
- 1. Bet kada galite pakeisti paslaugų teikėją.
- 2. Galite leisti programinę įrangą bet kur, įskaitant savo serverį, kad galėtumėte įgyti visišką duomenų nuosavybę ir privatumą.
- 3. Galite bendradarbiauti su ERPNext bendruomenę, kuri gali padėti, jei reikia pagalbos. Esate nepriklausomas nuo paslaugos teikėjo.
- 4. Galite pasinaudoti programine įranga, kurią aptarinėja, tobulina ir naudoja daugybė žmonių, kurie pranešė apie šimtus problemų ir pateikė pasiūlymų, kaip pagerinti šį produktą, ir tai yra nuolatinis procesas.
-
----
-
-### ERPNext programinis kodas
-
-ERPnext programinis kodas yra saugomas yra GitHub ir gali būti pasiekiamas čia
-
-- [https://github.com/frappe/erpnext](https://github.com/frappe/erpnext)
-
----
-
-### Alternatyvos
-
-Yra daug atvirojo kodo ERP, kuriuos galite įvertinti. Populiariausi yra:
-
- 1. Odoo
- 2. OpenBravo
- 3. Apache OfBiz
- 4. xTuple
- 5. Compiere (and forks)
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/the-champion.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/the-champion.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8e5fdd81..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/lt/introduction/the-champion.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-# Lyderis
-
-
-
-Per pastaruosius keletą metų mes stebėjome daugybę ERP sistemų diegimų ir mes suvokėm, kad sėkmingas ERP integravimas į organizacijos valdymą priklauso nuo nematerialių dalykų ir požiūrio.
-
-**ERP nėra būtinas.**
-
-Kaip ir finzinė mankšta.
-
-Gali atrodyti, kad žmogaus kūnui nereikalinga mankšta šiandien ar net rytoj bet ilgainiui, jei norite išlaikyti savo kūną sveiką turėtumėt lipti ant bėgimo takelio.
-
-Taip pat ir ERP ilgainiui pagerins jūsų organizacijos sveikatą išlaikant ją tvirtą ir veiksmingą. Kuo toliau atidedate organizacijos sutvarkymą tuo daugiau laiko praprandate ir labiau priartinate organizacinę katastrofą.
-
-Kai pradėsite diegti ERP, galvokite apie ilgalaikę naudą. Panašiai kaip fizinis pratimas sukelia skausmą trumpuoju laikotarpiu, bet ilgainiui daro stebuklus.
-
-* * *
-
-## Lyderis
-
-ERP reiškia organizacinius pokyčius, ir tai neįvyks be pastangų. Kiekvienam pokyčiui reikalingas lyderis, o lyderio pareiga yra organizuoti ir paskatinti visą komandą siekti įgyvendinimo. Lyderis turi būti atsparus nesekmėms, kad kažkas nepavyks.
-
-Daugelyje organizacijų, kurias matėme, lyderis dažniausiai yra savininkas arba vyresnysis vadybininkas. Kartais lyderis yra iš šalies samdomas asmuo, kuriam nurodomas konkretus tikslas.
-
-Bet kuriuo atveju pirmiausia turite surasti savo lyderį.
-
-Labiausiai tikėtina, kad tai **esi tu!**
-
-Pradėkime!
-
-{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ee1bf7b3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-# ERPNext Videos
-
-- Learn ERPNext -
- -
-
-
----
-
-
-
- 
-
-
-
-
-
- Learn how to setup and use ERPNext in this series of videos that go through important processes step-by-step.
-
-- Conference Videos -
- -
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index b2d525b2..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-index
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/__init__.py
deleted file mode 100755
index e69de29b..00000000
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/advance-payments.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/advance-payments.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d0c69d92..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/advance-payments.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Advance Payment
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:11**
-
-In sales and purchase transaction, generally advance payments are involved. This tutorial covers how you can create advance payment entries against Sales Order and Purchase Order, and adjust the same in the final invoice.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/batch-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/batch-inventory.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f6a94211..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/batch-inventory.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Batch Inventory
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:46**
-
-Batch inventory allows you to group multiple units of an item, and assign them a unique value/number/tag called Batch No.
-
-This video walks you through creating new Batch, and using it in stock transactions. Each batch can have certain expiry. In the stock module, you can check item's batchwise stock level.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bill-of-materials.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bill-of-materials.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 5d527686..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bill-of-materials.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Bill of Material
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:27**
-
-The BOM is a list of all materials (either bought or made) and operations that go into a finished product or sub-Item.
-
-This video walks you through creating masters (like Item, Operations, Workstation etc.) required for setting up BOM. Once you have all these masters in place, using them you can create Bill of Materials for the sub-assembly, finished and sub-contracted items.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/budgeting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/budgeting.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b58d5b3b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/budgeting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Budgeting
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:26**
-
-Budgeting feature will help you from over-spending. In ERPNext, you can define budgets based on Cost Center and Projects.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bulk-update.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bulk-update.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f76d9d3a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bulk-update.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Bulk Update Data
-
-
-
-**Duration: 1:38**
-
-Bulk Update Tool help you in over-writing value in the specific field of exitsting records.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/chart-of-accounts.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/chart-of-accounts.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b631b93a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/chart-of-accounts.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Chart of Accounts
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:10**
-
-This tutorial walks you through setting up Accounts in the Chart of Account master. This is the most crucial master for getting your financial statement and other accounting reports correct.
-
-Chart of Account is a tree structure master which allows user to define parent and child relationship between accounts. Also there are various account types (like Income a/c, Expense a/c, Bank a/c, Tax a/c etc.) which helps you segregate and filter out other accounts while creating transactions.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bb04fcd6..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customer and Supplier
-
-
-
-**Duration: 4:35**
-
-This video demonstrate creating Customer and Suppliers in ERPNext. It also covers setting up masters required for creating Customer and Supplier like Customer Group, Territory and Supplier Group.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/data-import-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/data-import-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6e2009a0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/data-import-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Data Import Tool
-
-
-
-**Duration: 6:31**
-
-This video walks you through on importing data in ERPNext from spreadsheet files. This tools allows you in faster migration of masters and transactions from legacy system into ERPNext. You can also use this tool to export data from ERPNext, and keep it as a backup of specific document type.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/discounts.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/discounts.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 6c1e790f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/discounts.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Applying Discounts
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:23**
-
-This is a video tutorial on how to apply discounts in the sales and purchase transactions.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/distributors.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/distributors.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 4b519f65..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/distributors.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# ERPNext for Distributors
-
-
-
-**Duration: 51:47**
-
-This video is a recording of a webinar on how a distribution business can use ERPNext. It covers Selling, Buying, Stock and Accounts module. Also, you can can learn how serialised and batchwise inventory can be maintained in ERPNext.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/drop-ship.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/drop-ship.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 7d418345..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/drop-ship.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Drop Ship
-
-
-
-**Duration: 5:10**
-
-Drop Ship feature allows you managing orders where delivery to customer is made by the supplier.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/education.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/education.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 37a7157a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/education.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# ERPNext for Education
-
-
-
-**Duration: 39:21**
-
-This video is a recording of a webinar on how education institutes can use ERPNext Education module. It covers management of Student Applications, managing masters like Students, Programs and Courses. Also, you can manage processes like Course Scheduling, Student Assessment, Fees and Attendance.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/email-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/email-account.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ab213643..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/email-account.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Email Account
-
-
-
-**Duration: 4:00**
-
-This video walks you through setting up Email Account for incoming and outgoing emails. For hosted users, outgoing email gateway is set by default. Based on incoming email, you can have new document (like Issue, Lead etc.) auto-created, and have email received on these id's appended to specified document.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/email-inbox.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/email-inbox.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dbf38728..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/email-inbox.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Email Inbox
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:51**
-
-This is video tutorial on how a user can configure an Email Inbox for his/her ID. Email Inbox is integrated well with other functionalities like Support Issues, Opportuniies and Communication.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/employee-advance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/employee-advance.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f5be45b0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/employee-advance.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee Advance
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:46**
-
-In this video, we will learn how an advance amount is given to an Employee, and how to adjust the same against an Expense Claim.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/employee.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/employee.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 13608b7d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/employee.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Employee
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:26**
-
-This is a help video on how to add and manage Employees in ERPNext.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/expense-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/expense-claim.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e6aacb66..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/expense-claim.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Expense Claim
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:51**
-
-This tutorial walks you through managing Expense Claims in ERPNext. Employee create first draft of Expense Claim. User with Expense Claim Approver role review Expense Claim submitted by Employee, and update sanctioned amount in it. After Expense Claim is approved/submitted, Journal Entry is created Expense Claim.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/field-customization.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/field-customization.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 45070f6f..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/field-customization.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Field Customization
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:10**
-
-This video walks you through various field level customization options.
-
-Using Customize Form tool, you can insert custom field in the forms. Also you can change the property of standard fields like visibility in print format, should field be a mandatory or non-mandatory, should this field always carry unique value etc. Also you can customize location of a field on form.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/file-manager.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/file-manager.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c2d4548b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/file-manager.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# File Manager
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:24**
-
-Using File Manager in ERPNext, you can organized files received from varius sources. You can also create custom folders, and put files in them.
-
-To ensure only authorize person has access to file, set permission rules can be applied on specific Folder or File.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/fixed-assets.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/fixed-assets.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 8cb1caf1..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/fixed-assets.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Fixed Assets Management
-
-
-
-**Duration: 6:35**
-
-In this video, you will learn how to add Assets and manage Asset Depreciation in ERPNext.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.css b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.css
deleted file mode 100755
index 025e9386..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.css
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-.hero-and-content .page-container {
- max-width: 100%;
-}
-
-.video-list li {
- margin: 0px;
- padding: 10px 0px;
- border-bottom: 1px solid #d1d8dd;
-}
-
-.video-list li:last-child {
- border-bottom: 0px;
-}
-
-.manual-feedback {
- display: none;
-}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.md
deleted file mode 100755
index cd5def2e..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,334 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 
-
-
-
-
-
- Watch video presentations from the ERPNext team and users from the 2014 ERPNext Conference.
-
- ERPNext Conference on October 9th 2015 in Mumbai -
-- ERPNext Conference on October 9th 2015 in Mumbai -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.txt
deleted file mode 100755
index 116ac6ce..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-batch-inventory
-bill-of-materials
-chart-of-accounts
-customer-and-supplier
-data-import-tool
-email-account
-employee
-expense-claim
-field-customization
-index
-item
-item-variant
-lead-to-quotation
-leave-management
-material-request-to-purchase-order
-navigation
-newsletter
-opening-account-balances
-opening-stock
-point-of-sale
-printing-and-branding
-product-bundle
-work-order
-production-planning
-project-and-task
-purchase-cycle
-quality-inspection
-sales-cycle
-serialized-inventory
-setup-wizard
-stock-entries
-subcontracting
-taxes
-user-and-permission
-workflow
-advance-payments
-drop-ship
-file-manager
-publish-items-on-website
-shopping-cart
-report-builder
-services
-distributors
-manufacturing-make-to-order
-manufacturing-enigneer-to-order
-opening-invoice-creation-tool
-pricing-rule
-discounts
-email-inbox
-subscription
-employee-advance
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item-variant.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item-variant.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c2238acb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item-variant.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item Variant
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:38**
-
-This video tutorial helps you in setting up Item Attributes (like Size, Lenthg etc.) and creating item variants using these attributes.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 571eaacb..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Item and Pricing
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:55**
-
-This tutorial walks you through managing stock and service item in ERPNext. For each item, you can track its standard selling and buying price using Price List.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/lead-to-quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/lead-to-quotation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index b7e7d07a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/lead-to-quotation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:29**
-
-This video walks you through creating Lead in the CRM module. You can convert Lead into Opportunity, one which has good probability of conversion. When customer ask for the Quotation,
-you can fetch Lead and item details from Opportunity to Quotation.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/leave-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/leave-management.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 2efa2233..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/leave-management.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Leave Management
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:49**
-
-This tutorial walks you through leave processing in ERPNext. Firstly, various leaves are allocated to Employees for a year. As and when needed, Employees apply for leave. Their application is reviewed and approved or rejected by Leave Approver. On approval/submission of Leave Application, leave allocated to Employee is reduced.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-enigneer-to-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-enigneer-to-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 3f99ac62..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-enigneer-to-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# ERPNext for Manufacturers (Engineer-to-Order)
-
-
-
-**Duration: 44:40**
-
-This video is a recording of a webinar on how a manufacturing company operating based on **engineer to order **. This session covers modules like Selling, Manufacturing, Buying and Accounts.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-make-to-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-make-to-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 328b8590..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-make-to-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# ERPNext for Manufacturers (Make-to-Order)
-
-
-
-**Duration: 14:26**
-
-This video is a recording of a webinar on how a manufacturing company operating based on **make to order** can use ERPNext. This session covers modules like Selling, Manufacturing, Buying and Accounts. You can learn how to make a Bill of Materials of production item and plan for item's production from Sales Order.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/material-request-to-purchase-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/material-request-to-purchase-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 1d92b0e9..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/material-request-to-purchase-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Material Request to Purchase Order
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:25**
-
-This video walks you through creating Material Request. To request quotation from Supplier, you can forward Material Request to them. On receipt of quotation from supplier, Material Request's data will be fetched into Supplier Quotation. After evaluating multiple supplier quotations, favorable quotation's is converted into Purchase Order.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/navigation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/navigation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 52eab009..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/navigation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# User Interface and Navigation
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:41**
-
-This video walks you through using the ERPNext "Desk" interface. The ERPNext User Interface is very web friendly and if you have used a website or mobile app before, the navigation should be very intuitive.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/newsletter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/newsletter.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a25a7fdf..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/newsletter.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Newsletter
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:04**
-
-A newsletter is a short written report that tells about the recent activities of an organization. It is generally sent to members of the organization, potential clients, customers or potential leads.
-
-This video walks you through managing Newsletter List, master containing Email Address's to whom Newsletter will be sent. You can compose Newsletter using rich text editor, and also in HTML editor.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-account-balances.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-account-balances.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f14b4f1b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-account-balances.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Opening Account Balances
-
-
-
-**Duration: 4:40**
-
-This video walks you through step to update opening account balances in ERPNext. Before updating opening balance for accounts, you should close your financial statements in the previous system. Closing balance of your legacy system should be updated as opening balance in ERPNext.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-invoice-creation-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-invoice-creation-tool.md
deleted file mode 100755
index dac3a890..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-invoice-creation-tool.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Opening Invoices Creation Tool
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:30**
-
-An important on-boarding step for an ERP software includes updating opening sales and purchase invoices. In ERPNext, it is made simple with the Opening Invoices Creation Tool. You can use this tool for quickly creatio opening Sales and Purchase Invoices.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-stock.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-stock.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f129545b..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-stock.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Opening Stock
-
-
-
-**Duration: 4:27**
-
-This tutorial demonstrates updating opening stock balance of an item. Following same steps, you can also reconcile stock of an item with respect to physical stock in a warehouse.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/payment-terms.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/payment-terms.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 65b91978..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/payment-terms.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-
-#Payment Terms
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:56**
-
-This tutorial shows you how to set payment terms in ERPNext. Payment Terms help in defining the multiple payment slabs during sales or purchase transactions.
-
-In Payment Terms you can define the breakup of the payment to be received (or made) in terms of different payment modes and the period after the due date. You can also create templates to quickly load the payment terms in a transaction.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/point-of-sale.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/point-of-sale.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 16eae805..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/point-of-sale.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Point of Sale
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:34**
-
-Retail transaction has sales, goods delivery and payment happening at the same time. POS (Point of Sale) module in ERPNext allow you creating POS Invoices which manages all the functions involved in retail sales.
-
-This tutorial walks you through setting up POS profile and creating POS invoice in ERPNext. Each billing station can have separate POS profile. This allows in faster and efficient billing at the sales counters.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/pricing-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/pricing-rule.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d1b8400c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/pricing-rule.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Pricing Rule
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:56**
-
-If you apply discounts on the item based on certain conditions, you can use Pricing Rule to define these conditions. In the Pricing Rule, you define criterias based on these parameters for the auto application
-of discount or margin.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/printing-and-branding.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/printing-and-branding.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 39c49347..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/printing-and-branding.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Printing and Branding
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:59**
-
-This video walks you through setting up of masters like your companies Letterhead and Logo.
-This tutorial also covers using tools to customize standard print formats, creating new print
-format, and setting up print headings (Quotation to Proposal) as per your requirement.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/product-bundle.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/product-bundle.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 95324267..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/product-bundle.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Product Bundle
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:31**
-
-Product Bundle (aka Sales Bill of Material) is a master where you can list items which are bundled together and sold as one item.
-
-This video walks you through setting up items, and creating Product Bundle master using them.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/project-and-task.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/project-and-task.md
deleted file mode 100755
index eb4956f3..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/project-and-task.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Project and Task
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:52**
-
-This is the tutorial on managing Projects and Task in ERPNext.
-
-Project can be divided into multiple assignable Task. Based on Tasks of a Project, you can check its Gantt Chart view. To track actual time spent on Project or Task, user can create Time Logs.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/publish-items-on-website.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/publish-items-on-website.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c8752b59..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/publish-items-on-website.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Publish Items on Website
-
-
-
-**Duration: 5:14**
-
-Website can be generated from each ERPNext account. This tutorial covers how items in your stock module can be published on the website.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/purchase-cycle.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/purchase-cycle.md
deleted file mode 100755
index d4d553e7..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/purchase-cycle.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Purchase Cycle
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:16**
-
-This video walks you through purchase cycle in ERPNext. Purchase Order can be created directly, or by fetching data from Material Request or Supplier Quotation. When ordered items are received from Supplier, Purchase Receipt is created against Purchase Order. You can create Purchase Invoice from Purchase Order or Purchase Receipt. When making payment to Supplier, Journal Entry will be created against Purchase Invoice.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/quality-inspection.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/quality-inspection.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a3f23663..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/quality-inspection.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Quality Inspection
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:36**
-
-This video walks you through quality testing and reporting procedure for purchased, manufactured and item which are being delivered.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/report-builder.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/report-builder.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 65191b2d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/report-builder.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Report Builder
-
-
-
-**Duration: 4:27**
-
-This tutorial covers creating custom reports in ERPNext using Report Builder.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/request-for-quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/request-for-quotation.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 12499389..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/request-for-quotation.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Request for Quotation
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:17**
-
-Request for Quotation feature allows you invite multiple Suppliers to provide their quotation. Suppliers can also provide quotation by logging into your ERPNext account. Based on the price quoted by them, Supplier Quotation will be created in your ERPNext account.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/retailers.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/retailers.md
deleted file mode 100755
index e2c73773..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/retailers.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# ERPNext for Retailers
-
-
-
-**Duration: 24:27**
-
-This video is a recording of a webinar on how retailers can use ERPNext. For the ease of invoicing for retailers, we have a dedicated POS view. It takes care of invoicing, delivery and payment in one entry. Given the limitation of time availability and frequency of transaction, you can also create POS Invoices in the offline mode.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/sales-cycle.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/sales-cycle.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bff46e9a..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/sales-cycle.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Sales Cycle
-
-
-
-**Duration: 4:28**
-
-This video walks you through sales cycle in ERPNext. On receipt of confirmation of order from Customer, Sales Order will be directly. When sales items is shipped to customer, Delivery Note is created against Sales Order. You can create Sales Invoice from Sales Order or Delivery Note.
-
-From Sales Order, you can track complete order like %delivered, %billed and payment status of Sales Invoice.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/serialized-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/serialized-inventory.md
deleted file mode 100755
index a16cd157..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/serialized-inventory.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Serialized Inventory
-
-
-
-**Duration: 5:33**
-
-If an Item is serialized, a Serial Number (Serial No) record is maintained for each unit of that Item. This information is helpful in tracking the location of the Serial No, its warranty and end-of-life (expiry) information.
-
-This video walks you through setting item as serialized item, and creating stock transaction for it. Mostly a high value items are set as serialized item which requires close tracking of its location and warranty expiry.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/services.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/services.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 36d5aa58..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/services.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# ERPNext for Services Business
-
-
-
-**Duration: 52:50**
-
-This video is a recording of a webinar on how service company can use ERPNext. It covers creating a Service Item, service Quotation and Sales Order, Managing Projects, Tasks and billing Customer based on Timesheet. Also you will learn how to manage customer support in ERPNext by using features like Issues and Warranty Claims.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/setup-wizard.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/setup-wizard.md
deleted file mode 100755
index aafbf8c0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/setup-wizard.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-
-# Setup Wizard
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:28**
-
-After successful setup of ERPNext account, on the first login, you will see Setup Wizard. The Setup Wizard helps you quickly setup your masters like your company, Items, Customer,
-Suppliers and will also setup a basic website with this data.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/shopping-cart.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/shopping-cart.md
deleted file mode 100755
index ea10d4de..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/shopping-cart.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Shopping Cart
-
-
-
-**Duration: 6:32**
-
-ERPNext has Customers Portal. It allos Customer to login, and place new orderes using shopping cart. From Customer Portal, customer can also track progress on their existing orders, view history of transactions and communicate via Issues.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/stock-entries.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/stock-entries.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 0f8f085d..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/stock-entries.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Stock Entries
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:46**
-
-Stock Entry is a stock transaction, used for multiple purposes like inter-warehouse Material Transfer, Material Receipt for updating balance, Material Issue etc.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/subcontracting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/subcontracting.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bc6120c5..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/subcontracting.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Subcontracting
-
-
-
-**Duration: 4:36**
-
-Subcontracting is a type of job contract that seeks to outsource certain types of work to other companies.
-
-There are warehouses masters created in order to carryout subcontracting transaction. This video walks you through various steps involved like creating BOM, transfer raw-material to subcontractor, receiving processed goods from subcontractor.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/subscription.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/subscription.md
deleted file mode 100755
index bb47677c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/subscription.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Subscription Management
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:09**
-
-In this video, we will learn about subscription management in ERPNext. Let's suppose you have to create a purchase invoice every month for paying the property rent. You should only create first Purchase Invoice manually, and then create a Subscription for it, so that purchase invoice is auto-created for subsequent each month.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/taxes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/taxes.md
deleted file mode 100755
index fa7b1d92..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/taxes.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# Taxes
-
-
-
-**Duration: 5:13**
-
-This video walks you through setting up tax accounts in the Chart of Account. Based on the taxation rules, you can create multiple sales and purchase tax templates in ERPNext.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/user-and-permission.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/user-and-permission.md
deleted file mode 100755
index f811257c..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/user-and-permission.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-
-# User and Permissions
-
-
-
-**Duration: 6:16**
-
-This video tutorial walks you through setting up User and their permissions in ERPNext. Role Permission Manager tool allows you to define restricted access for the user, based on various criterion like, value in the specific field on the form, creator of the document etc.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/work-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/work-order.md
deleted file mode 100755
index c55a8470..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/work-order.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Work Order
-
-
-
-**Duration: 2:24**
-
-Work Order (also called as Work Order) is a document that is given to the manufacturing shop floor by the Production Planner as a signal to produce a certain quantity of a certain Item.
-
-This video walks you through creating Work Order in ERPNext. There will be several entries made against Work Order (like Material Transfer, Manufacture entry, Time Log) to track progress against Work Order.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/workflow.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/workflow.md
deleted file mode 100755
index 200599f0..00000000
--- a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/workflow.md
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-# Workflow
-
-
-
-**Duration: 3:37**
-
-This video walks you through setting up Workflow for a document type.
-
-Bydefault, ERPNext has two level verification system for documents, Save and Submit. If you have more than one authority approving document, you can manage it via Workflow. Workflow allow you do define multiple stages through which document will be review and finally get approved, and who will be the approver at each stage.
-
-
-
- ERPNext Video Tutorials
-Step-by-step guides to setting up and using ERPNext
--
ERPNext Demonstrations
--
-
- - ERPNext for Services Business - 52:50 - -
- - ERPNext for Distributors - 51:47 - -
- - ERPNext for Manufacturers - 14:26 - -
- - ERPNext for Retailers - 39:21 - -
- - ERPNext for Education - 39:21 - -
-
Using ERPNext
--
-
- - User Interface and Navigation - 2:17 - -
-
Setting Up
--
-
- - The Setup Wizard - 2:28 - -
- - User and Permissions - 6:16 - -
- - Data Import Tool - 6:31 - -
- - Printing and Branding - 4:00 - -
- - Customer and Supplier - 4:35 - -
- - Item and Pricing - 3:55 - -
- - Opening Stock - 4:27 - -
- - Chart of Accounts - 3:10 - -
- - Opening Account Balances - 4:40 - -
- - Opening Invoices Creation Tool - 2:30 - -
- - Email Account - 4:00 - -
- - Email Inbox - 2:51 - -
- - File Manager - 2:24 - -
-
CRM and Sales
--
-
- - Customer Relationship Management - 3:29 - -
- - Customer - 4:35 - -
- - Sales Order to Payment - 4:28 - -
- - Product Bundle - 2:31 - -
- - Newsletter - 2:04 - -
- - Taxes - 3:00 - -
- - Drop Ship - 2:26 - -
- - Pricing Rule - 3:56 - -
- - Discounts - 2:23 - -
-
Buying
--
-
- - Supplier - 4:35 - -
- - Material Request to Purchase Order - 2:25 - -
- - Request for Quotation - 3:17 - -
- - Purchase Order to Payment - 3:16 - -
- - Taxes - 5:13 - -
- - Pricing Rule - 3:56 - -
- - Discounts - 2:23 - -
-
Stock
--
-
- - Item and Pricing - 3:17 - -
- - Item Variant - 2:38 - -
- - Stock Opening Balance - 4:27 - -
- - Stock Entries - 3:46 - -
- - Serialized Inventory - 4:12 - -
- - Batched Inventory - 3:46 - -
- - Managing Subcontracting - 4:37 - -
- - Quality Inspection - 2:36 - -
- - Fixed Assets Management - 6:35 - -
-
Accounts
--
-
- - Chart of Accounts - 3:10 - -
- - Accounts Opening Balances - 4:40 - -
- - Taxes - 5:13 - -
- - Advance Payments - 3:11 - -
- - Budgeting - 3:26 - -
- - Subscription Management - 2:09 - -
-
Manufacturing
--
-
- - Bill of Materials - 3:27 - -
- - Work Order - 2:24 - -
- - - ERPNext for Manufacturers (Make to Order) - 14:26 - -
- - - ERPNext for Manufacturers (Engineer to Order) - 44:40 - -
-
Human Resource
--
-
- - Employees - 1:59 - -
- - Leave Management - 2:50 - -
- - Expense Claims - 2:52 - -
- - Employee Advance - 3:46 - -
-
Retail
--
-
- - Point of Sale - 2:34 - -
- - ERPNext for Retailers (Demo) - 39:21 - -
-
Project
--
-
- - Project and Task - 3:52 - -
-
Website
--
-
- - Publish Items on Website - 5:14 -
- - Shopping Cart - 6:32 - -
-
Customization
--
-
- - Field Customization - 3:10 - -
- - Bulk Update Data - 1:38 - -
- - Workflow - 3:38 - -
- - Report Builder - 4:27 - -